UNITED STATES

SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

Washington, D.C. 20549

FORM 10

GENERAL FORM REGISTRATION OF SECURITIES

Pursuant to Section 12(b) or (g) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934

Carolina Financial Corporation

(Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)

 

Delaware   57-1039637
(State or other jurisdiction of incorporation or organization)   (I.R.S. Employer Identification No.)

 

288 Meeting Street, Charleston, South Carolina   29401
(Address of principal executive offices)   (Zip Code)

 

843-723-7700

(Registrant’s telephone number, including area code)

Securities registered under Section 12(b) of the Exchange Act: None

Securities registered under Section 12(g) of the Exchange Act:

Common Stock, $0.01 par value per share

(Title of class)

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, a non-accelerated filer, or a smaller reporting company.  See the definitions of “large accelerated filer,” “accelerated filer” and “smaller reporting company” in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act.

 

Large accelerated filer o   Accelerated filer  o
     
Non-accelerated filer o   Smaller reporting company  x
(Do not check if a smaller reporting company)    

 

We are an “emerging growth company” as defined under the federal securities laws. For implications of our status as an emerging growth company, please see “Business” in Item 1, and “Risk Factors” in Item 1A of this registration statement.


 

 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

    Page
Item 1 . Business 3
     
Item 1A . Risk Factors 23
     
Item 2 . Financial Information 39
     
Item 3 . Properties 68
     
Item 4 . Security Ownership of Certain Beneficial Owners and Management 69
     
Item 5 . Directors and Executive Officers 70
     
Item 6 . Executive Compensation 78
     
Item 7 . Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions, and Director Independence 88
     
Item 8 . Legal Proceedings 88
     
Item 9 . Market Price of and Dividends on the Registrant’s Common Equity and Related Stockholder Matters 89
     
Item 10 . Recent Sales of Unregistered Securities 90
     
Item 11 . Description of Registrant’s Securities to be Registered 90
     
Item 12 . Indemnification of Directors and Officers 92
     
Item 13 . Financial Statements and Supplementary Data 94
     
Item 14 . Changes in and Disagreements with Accountants on Accounting and Financial Disclosure 153
     
Item 15. Financial Statements and Exhibits 153
     
Signatures    
     
Exhibit Index  

 

 
 

CAUTIONARY NOTE REGARDING FORWARD-LOOKING STATEMENTS

This registration statement contains forward-looking statements within the meaning of the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995. When used in this registration statement the word or phrases “would be,” “will allow,” “intends to,” “will likely result,” “are expected to,” “should,” “anticipate,” and similar expressions are meant to identify “forward-looking statements.” Such “forward-looking statements” speak only as of the date made, and various factors, including but not limited to, the following, could cause actual results to differ materially from those expressed in, or implied by such “forward-looking statements”:

· our ability to maintain appropriate levels of capital and to comply with our capital ratio requirements;
· examinations by our regulatory authorities, including the possibility that the regulatory authorities may, among other things, require us to increase our allowance for loan losses or write-down assets or otherwise impose restrictions or conditions on our operations, including, but not limited to, our ability to acquire or be acquired;
· changes in economic conditions, either nationally or regionally and especially in our primary service areas, resulting in, among other things, a deterioration in credit quality;
· an increase in interest rates, resulting in a decline in our mortgage production and a decrease in the profitability of our mortgage banking operations;
· greater than expected losses due to higher credit losses generally and specifically because losses in the sectors of our loan portfolio secured by real estate are greater than expected due to economic factors, including, but not limited to, declining real estate values, increasing interest rates, increasing unemployment, or changes in payment behavior or other factors;
· greater than expected losses due to higher credit losses because our loans are concentrated by loan type, industry segment, borrower type, or location of the borrower or collateral;
· changes in the amount of our loan portfolio collateralized by real estate and weaknesses in the South Carolina and national real estate markets;
· the rate of delinquencies and amount of loans charged-off;
· the adequacy of the level of our allowance for loan losses and the amount of loan loss provisions required in future periods;
· the rate of loan growth in recent or future years;
· our ability to attract and retain key personnel;
· our ability to retain our existing customers, including our deposit relationships;
· significant increases in competitive pressure in the banking and financial services industries;
· adverse changes in asset quality and resulting credit risk-related losses and expenses;
· changes in the interest rate environment which could reduce anticipated or actual margins;
· changes in political conditions or the legislative or regulatory environment, including, but not limited to, the Dodd-Frank Act and regulations adopted thereunder, changes in federal or state tax laws or interpretations thereof by taxing authorities and other governmental initiatives affecting the banking and financial service industries;
· changes occurring in business conditions and inflation;
· increased funding costs due to market illiquidity, increased competition for funding, or increased regulatory requirements with regard to funding;
· our business continuity plans or data security systems could prove to be inadequate, resulting in a material interruption in, or disruption to, business and a negative impact on results of operations;
· changes in deposit flows;
· changes in technology;
· changes in monetary and tax policies;
· changes in accounting policies, as may be adopted by the regulatory agencies, as well as the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board and the Financial Accounting Standards Board;
· loss of consumer confidence and economic disruptions resulting from terrorist activities or other military actions;
· our expectations regarding our operating revenues, expenses, effective tax rates and other results of operations;
· the general decline in the real estate and lending markets;
· our anticipated capital expenditures and our estimates regarding our capital requirements;
· our liquidity and working capital requirements;
· competitive pressures among depository and other financial institutions;

 

1
 

 

· the adequacy of the level of our allowance for loan losses and the amount of loan loss provisions required in future periods;
· the growth rates of the markets in which we compete;
· our anticipated strategies for growth and sources of new operating revenues;
· our current and future products, services, applications and functionality and plans to promote them;
· anticipated trends and challenges in our business and in the markets in which we operate;
· the evolution of technology affecting our products, services and markets;
· our ability to retain and hire necessary employees and to staff our operations appropriately;
· management compensation and the methodology for its determination;
· our ability to compete in our industry and innovation by our competitors;
· our ability to stay abreast of new or modified laws and regulations that currently apply or become applicable to our business; and
· estimates and estimate methodologies used in preparing our consolidated financial statements and determining option exercise prices.

These risks, uncertainties and factors include those we discuss in this registration statement under the caption “Risk Factors.” You should read these risk factors and the other cautionary statements made in this registration statement as being applicable to all related forward-looking statements wherever they appear in this registration statement.

The forward-looking statements made in this registration statement relate only to events as of the date on which the statements are made. We undertake no obligation to update publicly any forward-looking statements, whether as a result of new information, future events or otherwise, except as required by law.

 

2
 

INFORMATION REQUIRED IN REGISTRATION STATEMENT

Voluntary Filing

We voluntarily filed this registration statement on Form 10 to become a reporting company under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (the “Exchange Act”).  Following the effective date of this registration statement, we will be obligated to file various reports required by the Exchange Act, including current reports on Form 8-K, quarterly reports on Form 10-Q and annual reports on Form 10-K.

Unless the context indicates otherwise, all references in this registration statement to “we,” “us,” and “our” refer to Carolina Financial Corporation and our wholly owned subsidiary, the Bank, except that in the discussion of our capital stock and related matters, these terms refer solely to Carolina Financial Corporation and not to the Bank. All references to the “Company” refer to Carolina Financial Corporation only, and all references to the “Bank” refer to CresCom Bank only.

Item 1.  Business

General Overview

Carolina Financial Corporation is a Delaware corporation that was organized in February 1997 to serve as the holding company for Community FirstBank of Charleston. Community FirstBank of Charleston opened for business in Charleston, South Carolina, in April 1997. In July 2001, the Company opened a second wholly-owned subsidiary bank, Crescent Bank, in Myrtle Beach, South Carolina. Effective July 31, 2011, the Company merged Community FirstBank of Charleston with Crescent Bank, and Crescent Bank’s name was changed to CresCom Bank. In addition, at the time of the merger, Crescent Mortgage Company, a wholly-owned subsidiary of Community FirstBank of Charleston, became a wholly-owned subsidiary of the Bank. The Bank is a South Carolina state bank that operates 12 full-service offices in the Charleston and Myrtle Beach markets.

We offer a variety of traditional community banking services to individuals and businesses. Our product line includes loans to small and medium-sized businesses, residential and commercial construction and development loans, commercial real estate loans, residential mortgage loans, residential lot loans, home equity loans, consumer loans and a variety of commercial and consumer demand, savings and time deposit products. We also offer online and bill payment services, wire transfer services, safe deposit box rentals, debit card and ATM card services, and the availability of a network of ATMs for our customers.

Crescent Mortgage Company, acquired by us in 2003, was founded in February 1993 as a wholesale and correspondent mortgage lender for community banks in the Southeastern United States. Today, Crescent Mortgage Company lends in 43 states and has partnered with more than 2,000 community banks, credit unions, and mortgage brokers. Crescent Mortgage Company is based in Atlanta, Georgia.

In addition to the Bank, the Company is also the holding company for Carolina Services Corporation of Charleston, a Delaware financial services company incorporated in 2002 to provide data processing services to, and otherwise support the operations of, the Bank and Crescent Mortgage Company. In December 2002 and October 2003, respectively, the Company formed Carolina Financial Capital Trust I and Carolina Financial Capital Trust II, which are special purpose subsidiaries organized in Delaware for the sole purpose of issuing an aggregate of $15 million of trust preferred securities.

As of December 31, 2013, our total assets were approximately $881.6 million, our total loans receivable were approximately $543.3 million, our total deposits were approximately $697.6 million, and our total stockholders’ equity was approximately $82.2 million. Our main office is located at 288 Meeting Street, Charleston, South Carolina 29401.

3
 

Recent Developments

On January 15, 2014, the Board of Directors of the Company declared a two-for-one stock split to stockholders of record dated February 10, 2014, payable on February 28, 2014. All share, earnings per share, and per share data have been retroactively adjusted in the consolidated balance sheets, earnings per share, and stockholders’ equity disclosures to reflect the stock split for all periods presented in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles.

On January 15, 2014, the Board of Directors also declared a $0.05 dividend to stockholders of record dated March 26, 2014, payable on April 11, 2014.

 

On January 15, 2014, the Company entered into a contract to sell approximately $147.6 million in unpaid principal of loans serviced for an estimated gain on sale of servicing assets of $767,000. The Company expects to close the servicing sale during the first quarter of 2014.

 

On February 21, 2014, the Bank completed the acquisition of the St. George office of First Federal of South Carolina in an transaction that had been announced on August 28, 2013. The Bank added approximately $24.5 million in deposits and $11.2 million in loans receivable, as a result of this branch acquisition.

Strategic Plan

 

Through our subsidiaries, we are focused on three primary strategic opportunities:

 

1. Building a profitable, growing, full service community banking franchise which delivers a superior return on assets;
2. Maintaining profitable wholesale mortgage operations during years of high and low national mortgage originations which delivers superior customer service levels; and
3. Pursuing strategic acquisition opportunities, as well as organic branch expansion, that complement our existing footprint as well as achievement of the aforementioned goals.

The following is a description of our general plans to achieve the three goals indicated above:

 

Our community banking franchise is focused on developing banking relationships with small businesses and individuals located in our primary markets. Our current business strategy includes the following:

 

· Growing our personal checking, commercial checking, savings and money market accounts, which are considered “core” transaction accounts;
· Expanding our loan portfolio through traditional community bank lending;
· Continuing to reduce our nonperforming assets through enhanced collection practices, loan work out programs and sale of foreclosed assets; and
· Expanding our current footprint through both strategic acquisitions and organic growth.

Our wholesale mortgage operation is focused on growing and sustaining a profitable business in several ways:

· Increasing our customer base with community banking institutions and small mortgage brokers;
· Entering new markets and states to assist in the increased customer base;
· Retaining mortgage serving rights to provide an annual income stream; and

Implementing new technology solutions to improve operational performance as well as customer experience.

Our wholesale mortgage operation has retained a significant portion of mortgage servicing rights to complement the whole sale mortgage production. As of December, 31 2013, we have retained a servicing portfolio of approximately $2.0 billion. From time to time, we may look to sell portions of our servicing portfolio to take advantage of superior pricing opportunities. Furthermore, we may curtail the amount of servicing we retain on a going forward basis as we approach limitations resulting from Basel III regulations.

4
 

Our team is actively looking for ways to continue to implement and achieve the goals to grow a safe, sound and profitable institution. As such, we will look for strategic acquisitions within our footprint to assist in achieving those goals. We have formed a mergers and acquisitions committee to govern our process as it relates to strategic acquisition opportunities. For further discussion about the responsibilities and function of the mergers and acquisitions committee, please review the “Board Committees” section of this registration statement.

Our Market Area

Our primary market area is the South Carolina coast, including the Charleston (Charleston and Dorchester Counties) and Myrtle Beach (Horry and Georgetown Counties) market areas. Our main office is located at 288 Meeting Street, Charleston, South Carolina.

 

Charleston, Dorchester, Georgetown and Horry Counties had an estimated aggregate population of 789,943 (July 2012 estimates based on survey changes to 2010 U.S. Census data) and total deposits of approximately $14.2 billion as of June 30, 2013, according to the most recent data published by the FDIC. Charleston County, which is home to four of our Bank’s branch offices, had a population of 365,162 (according to July 2012 estimates) and total deposits of $8.0 billion as of June 30, 2013. As of June 30, 2013, approximately $373.6 million of the Bank’s deposits, or 4.70% of the market share, were located in Charleston County. Dorchester County, in which we have three branches, had a population of 142,496 (according to July 2012 estimates) and total deposits of $1.1 billion as of June 30, 2013. As of June 30, 2013, approximately $61.5 million of the Bank’s deposits, or 5.46% of the market share, were located in Dorchester County. Horry County, which is the largest county by land size in South Carolina and home to four of our Bank’s branches, had a population of 282,285 (according to July 2012 estimates) and total deposits of $5.1 billion as of June 30, 2013. As of June 30, 2013, approximately $261.0 million of the Bank’s deposits, or 5.08% of the market share, were located in Horry County. The Company also operates a branch in Georgetown County which opened during October 2013. There are approximately $1.2 billion in total deposits as of June 30, 2013 within Georgetown County.

 

Our primary markets in Charleston and Dorchester counties are heavily influenced by the diverse economic mix of the Charleston region. The region is home to the Port of Charleston, one of the busiest container ports along the Southeast and Gulf Coasts, as well as a number of national and international manufacturers, including Boeing South Carolina and Robert Bosch LLC. The region also benefits from a thriving tourism industry. In addition, a number of academic institutions are located within the region, including the Medical University of South Carolina, The Citadel, The College of Charleston, Charleston Southern University, Trident Technical College, and The Charleston School of Law. Charleston also hosts military installations for the U.S. Navy, Marine Corp, U.S. Air Force, U.S. Army, and U.S. Coast Guard. The Myrtle Beach area, also known as the Grand Strand, is a 60-mile stretch of beaches extending south from the South Carolina/North Carolina state line (Horry County) to Pawleys Island (Georgetown County) and is consistently ranked as one of the top vacation destinations in the country. Accordingly, the economy of the region is dominated by the tourism and retail industries. We believe that this diversified economic base has reduced, and will likely continue to reduce, economic volatility in our market areas. Our markets have experienced steady economic and population growth over the past 10 years, and we expect that the area, as well as the business and tourism industries needed to support it, will continue to grow.

 

Competition

The banking business is highly competitive, and we experience competition in our market areas from many other financial institutions.  Competition among financial institutions is based on interest rates offered on deposit accounts, interest rates charged on loans, other credit and service charges relating to loans, the quality and scope of the services rendered, the convenience of banking facilities, and, in the case of loans to commercial borrowers, relative lending limits.  We compete with commercial banks, credit unions, savings institutions, mortgage banking firms, consumer finance companies, securities brokerage firms, insurance companies, money market funds and other mutual funds, as well as super-regional, national and international financial institutions that operate offices in our market areas and elsewhere.

We compete with these institutions both in attracting deposits and in making loans.  In addition, we have to attract our customer base from other existing financial institutions and from new residents.  Many of our competitors are well-established, larger financial institutions, such as SunTrust, Bank of America, Wells Fargo and BB&T.  These institutions offer some services, including extensive and established branch networks, that we do not provide.  In addition, many of our non-bank competitors are not subject to the same extensive federal regulations that govern bank holding companies and federally insured banks.

5
 

Segment Information

Reference is made to Note 19 “Supplemental Segment Information” to the consolidated financial statements included under Item 13 “Financial Statements and Supplementary Data”.

Bank Lending Activities

General

We emphasize a range of lending services, including commercial and residential real estate mortgage loans, real estate construction loans, commercial and industrial loans and consumer loans. Our customers are generally individuals and small to medium-sized businesses and professional firms that are located in or conduct a substantial portion of their business in our market areas. We have focused our lending activities primarily on the professional market, including doctors, dentists, small business to medium sized owners and commercial real estate developers. At December 31, 2013, we had total loans receivable of $543.3 million, representing approximately 62.7% of our total earning assets. The average loan size was approximately $191,572. As of December 31, 2013, we had 46 nonaccrual loans totaling approximately $11.1 million, or 2.04% of total loans. The average size of our nonperforming loans at December 31, 2013 was approximately $117,981. For additional discussion related to nonperforming loans, see “Loans” under the Balance Sheet Review within the MD&A section of this registration statement as well as the notes to the consolidated financial statements.

Loan Approval

Certain credit risks are inherent in making loans. These include prepayment risks, risks resulting from uncertainties in the future value of collateral, risks resulting from changes in economic and industry conditions, and risks inherent in dealing with individual borrowers. We attempt to mitigate repayment risks by adhering to internal credit policies and procedures. These policies and procedures include officer and customer lending limits, with approval process for larger loans, documentation examination, and follow-up procedures for any exceptions to credit policies. Our loan approval policies provide for various levels of officer lending authority. When the amount of aggregate loans to a single borrower exceeds the maximum senior officer’s lending authority, the loan request will be considered by the management loan committee, or MLC, which is comprised of six members, all of whom are part of the senior management team of the Bank. The MLC meets weekly to approve loans with total loan commitments exceeding $1.0 million. The loan authority of the MLC is equal to two-thirds of the legal lending limit of the Bank which is equivalent to the in-house loan limit. Total credit exposure above the in-house limit requires approval by the majority of the Board of Directors. We do not make any loans to any director, executive officer of the Bank, or the related interests of each, unless the loan is approved by the full Board of Directors of the Bank and is on terms not more favorable than would be available to a person not affiliated with the Bank.

Credit Administration and Loan Review

We maintain a continuous loan review system. We also apply a credit grading system to each loan, and we use an independent consultant on a semi-annual basis to review the loan files on a test basis to confirm our loan grading. Additionally, we have a full-time trained loan review specialist that reviews all new loans over $750 thousand with a sampling below $750 thousand and all new loans that reach 60 days past due. Also, they perform special review projects on the portfolio as designated by the MLC. Then each loan officer is responsible for each loan he or she makes, regardless of whether other individuals or committees participated in the approval. This responsibility continues until the loan is repaid or until the loan is officially assigned to another officer.

Lending Limits

Our lending activities are subject to a variety of lending limits imposed by federal law. In general, the Bank is subject to a legal limit on loans to a single borrower equal to 15% of the Bank’s capital and unimpaired surplus. This legal lending limit will increase or decrease as the Bank’s level of capital increases or decreases. Based upon the capitalization of the Bank at December 31, 2013, the maximum amount we could lend to one borrower is $16.1 million. However, our internal lending limit at December 31, 2013 is $10.8 million. The board of directors will adjust the internal lending limit as deemed necessary to continue to mitigate risk and serve the Bank’s clients. We are able to sell participations in our larger loans to other financial institutions, which allow us to manage the risk involved in these loans and to meet the lending needs of our clients requiring extensions of credit in excess of these limits.

 

Real Estate Mortgage Loans

 

The principal component of our loan portfolio is loans secured by real estate mortgages. Real estate loans are subject to the same general risks as other loans and are particularly sensitive to fluctuations in the value of real estate. Fluctuations in the value of real estate, as well as other factors arising after a loan has been made, could negatively affect a borrower’s cash flow, creditworthiness, and ability to repay the loan. We obtain a security interest in real estate whenever possible, in addition to any other available collateral, in order to increase the likelihood of the ultimate repayment of the loan.

 

6
 

As of December 31, 2013, loans secured by first or second mortgages on real estate made up approximately $454.9 million, or 83.7%, of our loan portfolio. These loans generally will fall into one of two categories:

· Residential Mortgage Loans and Home Equity Loans . We generally originate and hold short-term and long-term first mortgages and traditional second mortgage residential real estate loans. Generally, we limit the loan-to-value ratio on our residential real estate loans to 90%. We offer fixed and adjustable rate residential real estate loans with terms of up to 30 years. We also offer a variety of lot loan options to consumers to purchase the lot on which they intend build their home. The options available depend on whether the borrower intends to begin building within 12 months of the lot purchase or at an undetermined future date. We also offer traditional home equity loans and lines of credit. Our underwriting criteria for, and the risks associated with, home equity loans and lines of credit are generally the same as those for first mortgage loans. Home equity loans typically have terms of 10 years or less. We generally limit the extension of credit to 90% of the available equity of each property, although we may extend up to 100% of the available equity.
· Commercial Real Estate . Commercial real estate loans generally have terms of five years or less, although payments may be structured on a longer amortization basis. We evaluate each borrower on an individual basis and attempt to determine their business risks and credit profile. We attempt to reduce credit risk in the commercial real estate portfolio by emphasizing loans on owner-occupied office and retail buildings where the loan-to-value ratio, established by independent appraisals, does not exceed 80%. We also generally require that a borrower’s cash flow exceed 120% of monthly debt service obligations. In order to ensure secondary sources of payment and liquidity to support a loan request, we typically review all of the personal financial statements of the principal owners and require their personal guarantees.

Real Estate Construction and Development Loans

We offer fixed and adjustable rate residential and commercial construction loan financing to builders and developers and to consumers who wish to build their own home. The term of construction and development loans generally is limited to 18 months, although payments may be structured on a longer amortization basis. Most loans will mature and require payment in full upon the sale of the property. We believe that construction and development loans generally carry a higher degree of risk than long-term financing of existing properties because repayment depends on the ultimate completion of the project and usually on the subsequent sale of the property. Specific risks include:

·          cost overruns;

·          mismanaged construction;

·          inferior or improper construction techniques;

·          economic changes or downturns during construction;

·          a downturn in the real estate market;

·          rising interest rates which may prevent sale of the property; and

·          failure to sell completed projects in a timely manner.

We attempt to reduce risk associated with construction and development loans by obtaining personal guarantees and by keeping the maximum loan-to-value ratio at or below 65%-85% of the lesser of cost or appraised value, depending on the project type. Generally, we do not have interest reserves built into loan commitments but require periodic cash payments for interest from the borrower’s cash flow.

Commercial Business Loans

We make loans for commercial purposes in various lines of businesses, including the manufacturing industry, service industry, and professional service areas. Commercial loans are generally considered to have greater risk than first or second mortgages on real estate because they may be unsecured, or if they are secured, the value of the collateral may be difficult to assess and more likely to decrease than real estate.

7
 

Equipment loans typically will be made for a term of 10 years or less at fixed or variable rates, with the loan fully amortized over the term and secured by the financed equipment. Generally, we limit the loan-to-value ratio on these loans to 75% of cost. Working capital loans typically have terms not exceeding one year and usually are secured by accounts receivable, inventory, or personal guarantees of the principals of the business. For loans secured by accounts receivable or inventory, principal will typically be repaid as the assets securing the loan are converted into cash, and in other cases principal will typically be due at maturity. Trade letters of credit, standby letters of credit, and foreign exchange will generally be handled through a correspondent bank as agent for the Bank.

Consumer Loans

We make a variety of loans to individuals for personal and household purposes, including secured and unsecured installment loans and revolving lines of credit. Consumer loans are underwritten based on the borrower’s income, current debt level, past credit history, and the availability and value of collateral. Consumer rates are both fixed and variable, with negotiable terms. Our installment loans typically amortize over periods up to 60 months. Although we typically require monthly payments of interest and a portion of the principal on our loan products, we will offer consumer loans with a single maturity date when a specific source of repayment is available. Consumer loans are generally considered to have greater risk than first or second mortgages on real estate because they may be unsecured, or, if they are secured, the value of the collateral may be difficult to assess and more likely to decrease in value than real estate.

 

Mortgage Banking Activities

 

As summarized below, our mortgage banking segment is comprised of two primary businesses: correspondent lending and loan servicing.

 

Correspondent Lending

 

Our mortgage banking operations are conducted mainly through the Bank’s wholesale mortgage origination subsidiary, Crescent Mortgage Company headquartered in Atlanta, Georgia. These operations consist of the purchase of mortgage loans and table funded originations as well as the sale and servicing of a variety of residential mortgage loan products. Crescent Mortgage Company lends in 43 states and partners with over two thousand community banks, credit unions, and quality mortgage brokers. Crescent Mortgage Company focuses on originating residential real estate loans, some of which conform to Federal Housing Administration (FHA), Veterans Affairs (VA) and Rural Development standards (RD). Loans originated that meet FHA standards qualify for the FHA’s insurance program whereas loans that meet VA and RD standards are guaranteed by their respective federal agencies.

 

Mortgage loans that do not qualify under these programs are commonly referred to as conventional loans. Conventional real estate loans could be conforming and non-conforming. Conforming loans are residential real estate loans that meet the standards for sale under the Federal National Mortgage Association (FNMA) and Federal Home Loan Mortgage Corporation (FHLMC) programs whereas loans that do not meet those standards are referred to as non-conforming residential real estate loans. In addition, Crescent Mortgage Company offers certain jumbo mortgage products which meet underwriting requirements of certain correspondent lenders. The Company’s strategy is to grow market share through superior service and competitive pricing and high quality mortgage products. Crescent Mortgage Company generally sells mortgages it acquires to a number of investors like FNMA and FHLMC or major banking correspondents.

 

Our mortgage banking profitability depends on maintaining sufficient volume of loan originations. Changes in the level of interest rates, competition and the local economy affect the number of loans originated and the amount of loan sales and loan fees earned.

 

Loan Servicing

 

We retain the rights to service loans, and collect a servicing fee for loans we sell on the secondary market, as part of our mortgage banking activities. These rights are known as mortgage servicing rights, or MSRs, where the owner of the MSR acts on behalf of the mortgage loan owner and has the contractual right to receive a stream of cash flows in exchange for performing specified mortgage servicing functions. These duties typically include, but are not limited, to performing loan administration, collection, and default activities, collection and remittance of loan payments, responding to customer inquiries, accounting for principal and interest, holding custodial (impound) funds for the payment of property taxes and insurance premiums, counseling delinquent mortgagors, modifying loans, supervising foreclosures, and property dispositions. Crescent Mortgage Company uses a third party sub servicer to perform the servicing duties and responsibilities for which we pay a fee.

 

8
 

For further discussion related to the mortgage operations of the Crescent Mortgage Company, please review “Mortgage Operations” sections within the MD&A as well as the consolidated financial statements.

 

Deposit Products

We offer a full range of deposit services that are typically available in most banks and savings institutions, including checking accounts, commercial accounts, savings accounts and other time deposits of various types, ranging from daily money market accounts to longer-term certificates of deposit.  Transaction accounts and time deposits are tailored to and offered at rates competitive to those offered in our primary market areas.  In addition, we offer certain retirement accounts. We solicit accounts from individuals, businesses, associations, organizations and governmental authorities. We believe that our branch infrastructure will assist us in obtaining deposits from local customers in the future. Our retail customer deposits were $595.7 million at December 31, 2013, or 85.4% of our total deposits.

Emerging Growth Company

We qualify as an “emerging growth company” as defined in the Jumpstart Our Business Startups Act of 2012, or the JOBS Act. As an “emerging growth company,” we may take advantage of specified reduced disclosure and other requirements that are otherwise applicable generally to public companies. These provisions include:

· only two years of audited financial statements in addition to any required unaudited interim financial statements with correspondingly reduced “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” disclosure;
· reduced disclosure about our executive compensation arrangements;
· no requirement that we solicit non-binding advisory votes on executive compensation or golden parachute arrangements; and
· exemption from the auditor attestation requirement in the assessment of our internal control over financial reporting.

We intend to take advantage of the reduced disclosure obligations. As a result, the information that we provide to our stockholders may be different from the information that you might receive from other public reporting companies in which you hold equity interests.

Section 107 of the JOBS Act also provides that an emerging growth company can take advantage of the extended transition period provided in the Securities Act of 1933 (the “Securities Act”), for complying with new or revised accounting standards. In other words, an emerging growth company can elect to delay the adoption of certain accounting standards until those standards would otherwise apply to private companies. We have irrevocably elected not to avail ourselves of this extended transition period for complying with new or revised accounting standards and, as a result, we will adopt new or revised accounting standards on the relevant dates on which adoption of such standards is required for other companies.

We could remain an emerging growth company for up to five years, or until the earliest of (i) the last day of the first fiscal year in which our annual gross revenues exceed $1 billion, (ii) the date that we become a “large accelerated filer” as defined in Rule 12b-2 under the Exchange Act, which would occur if the market value of our common stock held by non-affiliates exceeds $700 million as of the last business day of our most recently completed second fiscal quarter, (iii) the date on which we have issued more than $1 billion in non-convertible debt during the preceding three-year period and (iv) the last day of the fiscal year following the fifth anniversary of the date of the first sale of our common equity securities pursuant to an effective registration statement under the Securities Act. At this time, we expect to remain an “emerging growth company” for the foreseeable future.

9
 

Employees

As of February 26, 2014, we had 300 total employees, including 292 full-time employees.

General Corporate Information

Our principal executive offices are located at 288 Meeting St., Charleston, South Carolina 29401-1575, and our telephone number at that address is (843) 723-7700. Additional information can be found on our website: www.haveanicebank.com. Information on our website or any other website is not incorporated by reference herein and does not constitute a part of this registration statement.

Public Information

Persons interested in obtaining information on the Company may read and copy any materials that we file with the SEC at the SEC’s Public Reference Room at 100 F Street, NE, Washington, DC 20549, on official business days during the hours of 10 a.m. to 3 p.m. The public may obtain information on the operation of the Public Reference Room by calling the SEC at 1-800-SEC-0330. The Commission maintains an Internet site that contains reports, proxy and information statements, and other information regarding issuers that file electronically with the SEC at www.sec.gov.

 

SUPERVISION AND REGULATION

 

 

Both the Company and the Bank are subject to extensive state and federal banking laws and regulations that impose restrictions on and provide for general regulatory oversight of their operations.  These laws and regulations generally are intended to protect consumers and depositors and not stockholders.  The following summary is qualified by reference to the statutory and regulatory provisions discussed.  Changes in applicable laws or regulations may have a material effect on our business and prospects.  Our operations may be affected by legislative changes and the policies of various regulatory authorities.  We cannot predict the effect that fiscal or monetary policies, economic control or new federal or state legislation may have on our business and earnings in the future.

 

The following discussion is not intended to be a complete list of all the activities regulated by the banking laws or of the impact of those laws and regulations on our operations.  It is intended only to briefly summarize some material provisions.

Recent Legislative and Regulatory Initiatives to Address the Financial and Economic Crises

Markets in the United States and elsewhere experienced extreme volatility and disruption beginning in the latter half of 2007 that has continued since then. These circumstances have exerted significant downward pressure on prices of equity securities and virtually all other asset classes, and have resulted in substantially increased market volatility, severely constrained credit and capital markets, particularly for financial institutions, and has caused an overall loss of investor confidence. Loan portfolio performances have deteriorated at many institutions resulting from, among other factors, a weak economy and a decline in the value of the collateral supporting their loans. Dramatic slowdowns in the housing industry, due in part to falling home prices and increasing foreclosures and unemployment, have created strains on financial institutions. Many borrowers were unable to repay their loans, and the collateral securing these loans has, in some cases, declined below the loan balance. In response to the challenges facing the financial services sector, the following regulatory and governmental actions enacted.

 

The Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act

On July 21, 2010, President Obama signed into law The Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act, also known as the Dodd-Frank Act (the “Dodd-Frank Act”), which, among other things, changes the oversight and supervision of financial institutions, includes new minimum capital requirements, creates a new federal agency to regulate consumer financial products and services and implements changes to corporate governance and compensation practices. The Dodd-Frank Act is focused in large part on the financial services industry, particularly bank holding companies with consolidated assets of $50 billion or more, and contains a number of provisions that will affect us, including:

10
 

Minimum Leverage and Risk-Based Capital Requirements . Under the Dodd-Frank Act, the appropriate Federal banking agencies are required to establish minimum leverage and risk-based capital requirements on a consolidated basis for all insured depository institutions and bank holding companies, which can be no less than the currently applicable leverage and risk-based capital requirements for depository institutions. As a result, the Bank will be subject to at least the same capital requirements and must include the same components in regulatory capital.

Deposit Insurance Modifications . The Dodd-Frank Act modifies the FDIC’s assessment base upon which deposit insurance premiums are calculated. The new assessment base will equal our average total consolidated assets minus the sum of our average tangible equity during the assessment period. The Dodd-Frank Act also permanently raises the standard maximum insurance amount to $250,000.

Creation of New Governmental Authorities . The Dodd-Frank Act creates various new governmental authorities such as the Financial Stability Oversight Council and the Consumer Financial Protection Bureau, or CFPB, an independent regulatory authority housed within the Federal Reserve. The CFPB has broad authority to regulate the offering and provision of consumer financial products. The CFPB officially came into being on July 21, 2011, and rulemaking authority for a range of consumer financial protection laws (such as the Truth in Lending Act, the Electronic Funds Transfer Act and the Real Estate Settlement Procedures Act, among others) transferred from the Federal Reserve and other federal regulators to the CFPB on that date. The Dodd-Frank Act gives the CFPB authority to supervise and examine depository institutions with more than $10 billion in assets for compliance with these federal consumer laws. The authority to supervise and examine depository institutions with $10 billion or less in assets for compliance with federal consumer laws will remain largely with those institutions’ primary regulators. However, the CFPB may participate in examinations of these smaller institutions on a “sampling basis” and may refer potential enforcement Actions against such institutions to their primary regulators. The CFPB also has supervisory and examination authority over certain nonbank institutions that offer consumer financial products. The Dodd-Frank Act identifies a number of covered nonbank institutions, and also authorizes the CFPB to identify additional institutions that will be subject to its jurisdiction. Accordingly, the CFPB may participate in examinations of the Bank, which currently has assets of less than $10 billion, and could supervise and examine our other direct or indirect subsidiaries that offer consumer financial products or services. In addition, the Dodd-Frank Act permits states to adopt consumer protection laws and regulations that are stricter than those regulations promulgated by the CFPB, and state attorneys general are permitted to enforce consumer protection rules adopted by the CFPB against certain institutions.

The Dodd-Frank Act also authorized the CFPB to establish certain minimum standards for the origination of residential mortgages, including a determination of the borrower’s ability to repay. Under the Dodd-Frank Act, financial institutions may not make a residential mortgage loan unless they make a “reasonable and good faith determination” that the consumer has a “reasonable ability” to repay the loan. The Dodd-Frank Act allows borrowers to raise certain defenses to foreclosure but provides a full or partial safe harbor from such defenses for loans that are “qualified mortgages.” On January 10, 2013, the CFPB published final rules to, among other things, specify the types of income and assets that may be considered in the ability-to-repay determination, the permissible sources for verification, and the required methods of calculating the loan’s monthly payments. Since then the CFPB made certain modifications to these rules. The rules extend the requirement that creditors verify and document a borrower’s “income and assets” to include all “information” that creditors rely on in determining repayment ability. The rules also provide further examples of third-party documents that may be relied on for such verification, such as government records and check-cashing or funds-transfer service receipts. The rules took effect January 10, 2014. The rules also define “qualified mortgages,” imposing both underwriting standards - for example, a borrower’s debt-to-income ratio may not exceed 43% - and limits on the terms of their loans. Points and fees are subject to a relatively stringent cap, and the terms include a wide array of payments that may be made in the course of closing a loan. Certain loans, including interest-only loans and negative amortization loans, cannot be qualified mortgages.

Executive Compensation and Corporate Governance Requirements . The Dodd-Frank Act requires public companies to include, at least once every three years, a separate non-binding “say on pay” vote in their proxy statement by which stockholders may vote on the compensation of the company’s named executive officers. In addition, if such companies are involved in a merger, acquisition, or consolidation, or if they propose to sell or dispose of all or substantially all of their assets, stockholders have a right to an advisory vote on any golden parachute arrangements in connection with such transaction (frequently referred to as “say-on-golden parachute” vote). Other provisions of the Dodd-Frank Act may impact our corporate governance. For instance, the Dodd-Frank Act requires the SEC to adopt rules:

· prohibiting the listing of any equity security of a company that does not have an independent compensation committee; and

 

11
 

 

· requiring all exchange-traded companies to adopt clawback policies for incentive compensation paid to executive officers in the event of accounting restatements based on material non-compliance with financial reporting requirements.

The Dodd-Frank Act also authorizes the SEC to issue rules allowing stockholders to include their own nominations for directors in a company’s proxy solicitation materials. Many provisions of the Dodd-Frank Act require the adoption of additional rules to implement the changes. In addition, the Dodd-Frank Act mandates multiple studies that could result in additional legislative Action. Governmental intervention and new regulations under these programs could materially and adversely affect our business, financial condition and results of operations.

Basel Capital Standards

In December 2010, the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision, or BCBS, an international forum for cooperation on banking supervisory matters, announced the “Basel III” capital standards, which substantially revised the existing capital requirements for banking organizations. Modest revisions were made in June 2011. The Basel III standards operate in conjunction with portions of standards previously released by the BCBS and commonly known as “Basel II” and “Basel 2.5.” On June 7, 2012, the Federal Reserve, the OCC, and the FDIC requested comment on these proposed rules that, taken together, would implement the Basel regulatory capital reforms through what we refer to herein as the “Basel III capital framework.”

On July 2, 2013, the Federal Reserve adopted a final rule for the Basel III capital framework and, on July 9, 2013, the OCC also adopted a final rule and the FDIC adopted the same provisions in the form of an “interim” final rule. The rule will apply to all national and state banks and savings associations and most bank holding companies and savings and loan holding companies, which we collectively refer to herein as “covered” banking organizations. Bank holding companies with less than $500 million in total consolidated assets are not subject to the final rule, nor are savings and loan holding companies substantially engaged in commercial activities or insurance underwriting. In certain respects, the rule imposes more stringent requirements on “advanced approaches” banking organizations—those organizations with $250 billion or more in total consolidated assets, $10 billion or more in total foreign exposures, or that have opted in to the Basel II capital regime. The requirements in the rule began to phase in on January 1, 2014, for advanced approaches banking organizations, and will begin to phase in on January 1, 2015, for other covered banking organizations. The requirements in the rule will be fully phased in by January 1, 2019.

The rule imposes higher risk-based capital and leverage requirements than those currently in place. Specifically, the rule imposes the following minimum capital requirements:

· a new common equity Tier 1 risk-based capital ratio of 4.5%;
· a Tier 1 risk-based capital ratio of 6% (increased from the current 4% requirement);
· a total risk-based capital ratio of 8% (unchanged from current requirements);
· a leverage ratio of 4%; and
· a new supplementary leverage ratio of 3% applicable to advanced approaches banking organizations, resulting in a leverage ratio requirement of 7% for such institutions.

Under the rule, Tier 1 capital is redefined to include two components: Common Equity Tier 1 capital and additional Tier 1 capital. The new and highest form of capital, Common Equity Tier 1 capital, consists solely of common stock (plus related surplus), retained earnings, accumulated other comprehensive income, and limited amounts of minority interests that are in the form of common stock. Additional Tier 1 capital includes other perpetual instruments historically included in Tier 1 capital, such as non-cumulative perpetual preferred stock. The rule permits bank holding companies with less than $15 billion in total consolidated assets to continue to include trust preferred securities and cumulative perpetual preferred stock issued before May 19, 2010 in Tier 1 capital, but not in Common Equity Tier 1 capital, subject to certain restrictions. Tier 2 capital consists of instruments that currently qualify in Tier 2 capital plus instruments that the rule has disqualified from Tier 1 capital treatment.

In addition, in order to avoid restrictions on capital distributions or discretionary bonus payments to executives, a covered banking organization must maintain a “capital conservation buffer” on top of its minimum risk-based capital requirements. This buffer must consist solely of Tier 1 Common Equity, but the buffer applies to all three measurements (Common Equity Tier 1, Tier 1 capital and total capital). The capital conservation buffer will be phased in incrementally over time, becoming fully effective on January 1, 2019, and will consist of an additional amount of common equity equal to 2.5% of risk-weighted assets.

12
 

The current capital rules require certain deductions from or adjustments to capital.  The final rule retains many of these deductions and adjustments and also provides for new ones.  As a result, deductions from Common Equity Tier 1 capital will be required for goodwill (net of associated deferred tax liabilities); intangible assets such as non-mortgage servicing assets and purchased credit card relationships (net of associated deferred tax liabilities); deferred tax assets that arise from net operating loss and tax credit carryforwards (net of any related valuations allowances and net of deferred tax liabilities); any gain on sale in connection with a securitization exposure; any defined benefit pension fund net asset (net of any associated deferred tax liabilities) held by a bank holding company (this provision does not apply to a bank or savings association); the aggregate amount of outstanding equity investments (including retained earnings) in financial subsidiaries; and identified losses.  Savings associations also must deduct investments in certain subsidiaries.  Other deductions will be necessary from different levels of capital.

Additionally, the rule provides for the deduction of three categories of assets: (i) deferred tax assets arising from temporary differences that cannot be realized through net operating loss carrybacks (net of related valuation allowances and of deferred tax liabilities), (ii) mortgage servicing assets (net of associated deferred tax liabilities) and (iii) investments in more than 10% of the issued and outstanding common stock of unconsolidated financial institutions (net of associated deferred tax liabilities).  The amount in each category that exceeds 10% of Common Equity Tier 1 capital must be deducted from Common Equity Tier 1 capital.  The remaining, non-deducted amounts are then aggregated, and the amount by which this total amount exceeds 15% of Common Equity Tier 1 capital must be deducted from Common Equity Tier 1 capital.  Amounts of minority investments in consolidated subsidiaries that exceed certain limits and investments in unconsolidated financial institutions may also have to be deducted from the category of capital to which such instruments belong.

Accumulated other comprehensive income (AOCI) is presumptively included in Common Equity Tier 1 capital and often would operate to reduce this category of capital.  The rule provides a one-time opportunity at the end of the first quarter of 2015 for covered banking organizations to opt out of much of this treatment of AOCI.  The rule also has the effect of increasing capital requirements by increasing the risk weights on certain assets, including high volatility commercial real estate, mortgage servicing rights not  includable in Common Equity Tier 1 capital, equity exposures, and claims on securities firms, that are used in the denominator of the three risk-based capital ratios.

Volcker Rule

Section 619 of the Dodd-Frank Act, known as the “Volcker Rule,” prohibits any bank, bank holding company, or affiliate (referred to collectively as “banking entities”) from engaging in two types of activities: “proprietary trading” and the ownership or sponsorship of private equity or hedge funds that are referred to as “covered funds.” On December 10, 2013, our primary federal regulators, the Federal Reserve and the FDIC, together with other federal banking agencies and the SEC and the Commodity Futures Trading Commission, finalized a regulation to implement the Volcker Rule. The deadline for compliance with the Volcker Rule is July 21, 2015.

Proprietary trading includes the purchase or sale as principal of any security, derivative, commodity future, or option on any such instrument for the purpose of benefitting from short-term price movements or realizing short-term profits. Exceptions apply, however. Trading in U.S. Treasuries, obligations or other instruments issued by a government sponsored enterprise, state or municipal obligations, or obligations of the FDIC is permitted. A banking entity also may trade for the purpose of managing its liquidity, provided that it has a bona fide liquidity management plan. Trading activities as agent, broker or custodian; through a deferred compensation or pension plan; as trustee or fiduciary on behalf of customers; in order to satisfy a debt previously contracted; or in repurchase and securities lending agreements are permitted. Additionally, the Volcker Rule permits banking entities to engage in trading that takes the form of risk-mitigating hedging activities.

The covered funds that a banking entity may not sponsor or hold on ownership interest in are, with certain exceptions, funds that are exempt from registration under the Investment Company Act of 1940 because they either have 100 or fewer investors or are owned exclusively by “qualified investors” (generally, high net worth individuals or entities). Wholly owned subsidiaries, joint ventures and acquisition vehicles, foreign pension or retirement funds, insurance company separate accounts (including bank-owned life insurance), public welfare investment funds, and entities formed by the FDIC for the purpose of disposing of assets are not covered funds, and a bank may invest in them. Most securitizations also are not treated as covered funds.

13
 

The regulation as issued on December 10, 2013, treated collateralized debt obligations backed by trust preferred securities as covered funds and accordingly subject to divestiture. In an interim final rule issued on January 14, 2014, the agencies exempted collateralized debt obligations, or CDOs, issued before May 19, 2010, that were backed by trust preferred securities issued before the same date by a bank with total consolidated assets of less than $15 billion or by a mutual holding company and that the bank holding the CDO interest had purchased before December 10, 2013, from the Volcker Rule prohibition. This exemption does not extend to CDOs backed by trust-preferred securities issued by an insurance company. All of the CDOs that we own qualified for this exemption.

Carolina Financial Corporation

We own 100% of the outstanding capital stock of the Bank, and therefore we are considered to be a bank holding company under the federal Bank Holding Company Act of 1956, or BHCA. As a result, we are primarily subject to the supervision, examination and reporting requirements of the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve under the BHCA and its regulations promulgated thereunder. Moreover, as a bank holding company of a bank located in South Carolina, we also are subject to the South Carolina Banking and Branching Efficiency Act.

Permitted Activities. Under the BHCA, a bank holding company is generally permitted to engage in, or acquire direct or indirect control of more than 5% of the voting shares of any company engaged in the following activities:

· banking or managing or controlling banks;
· furnishing services to or performing services for our subsidiaries; and
· any activity that the Federal Reserve determines to be so closely related to banking as to be a proper incident to the business of banking.

Activities that the Federal Reserve has found to be so closely related to banking as to be a proper incident to the business of banking include:

· factoring accounts receivable;
· making, acquiring, brokering or servicing loans and usual related activities;
· leasing personal or real property;
· operating a non-bank depository institution, such as a savings association;
· trust company functions;
· financial and investment advisory activities;
· conducting discount securities brokerage activities;
· underwriting and dealing in government obligations and money market instruments;
· providing specified management consulting and counseling activities;
· performing selected data processing services and support services;
· acting as agent or broker in selling credit life insurance and other types of insurance in connection with credit transactions; and
· performing selected insurance underwriting activities.

As a bank holding company we also can elect to be treated as a “financial holding company,” which would allow us to engage in a broader array of activities. In summary, a financial holding company can engage in activities that are financial in nature or incidental or complimentary to financial activities, including insurance underwriting, sales and brokerage activities, providing financial and investment advisory services, underwriting services and limited merchant banking activities. We have not sought financial holding company status but may elect such status in the future as our business matures. If we were to elect financial holding company status, each insured depository institution we control would have to be well capitalized, well managed, and have at least a satisfactory rating under the Community Reinvestment Act (discussed below).

The Federal Reserve has the authority to order a bank holding company or its subsidiaries to terminate any of these activities or to terminate its ownership or control of any subsidiary when it has reasonable cause to believe that the bank holding company’s continued ownership, activity or control constitutes a serious risk to the financial safety, soundness or stability of it or any of its bank subsidiaries.

14
 

Change in Control . In addition, and subject to certain exceptions, the BHCA and the Change in Bank Control Act, together with regulations promulgated thereunder, require Federal Reserve approval prior to any person or company acquiring “control” of a bank holding company. Control is conclusively presumed to exist if an individual or company acquires 25% or more of any class of voting securities of a bank holding company. Following the relaxing of these restrictions by the Federal Reserve in September 2008, control will be rebuttably presumed to exist if a person acquires more than 33% of the total equity of a bank or bank holding company, of which it may own, control or have the power to vote not more than 15% of any class of voting securities.

Source of Strength . In accordance with Federal Reserve policy, the Company is required to act as a source of financial strength to the Bank and to commit resources to support the Bank in circumstances in which it might not otherwise do so. Under the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporate Improvement Act of 1991, or FDICIA, to avoid receivership of its insured depository institution subsidiary, a bank holding company is required to guarantee the compliance of any insured depository institution subsidiary that may become “undercapitalized” within the terms of any capital restoration plan filed by such subsidiary with its appropriate federal banking agency up to the lesser of (i) an amount equal to 5% of the institution’s total assets at the time the institution became undercapitalized, or (ii) the amount which is necessary (or would have been necessary) to bring the institution into compliance with all applicable capital standards as of the time the institution fails to comply with such capital restoration plan.

Under the BHCA, the Federal Reserve may require a bank holding company to terminate any activity or relinquish control of a non-bank subsidiary, other than a non-bank subsidiary of a bank, upon the Federal Reserve’s determination that such activity or control constitutes a serious risk to the financial soundness or stability of any depository institution subsidiary of a bank holding company. Further, federal bank regulatory authorities have additional discretion to require a bank holding company to divest itself of any bank or non-bank subsidiaries if the agency determines that divestiture may aid the depository institution’s financial condition.

In addition, the “cross guarantee” provisions of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act, FDIA, require insured depository institutions under common control to reimburse the FDIC for any loss suffered or reasonably anticipated by the FDIC as a result of the default of a commonly controlled insured depository institution or for any assistance provided by the FDIC to a commonly controlled insured depository institution in danger of default. The FDIC’s claim for damages is superior to claims of stockholders of the insured depository institution or its holding company, but is subordinate to claims of depositors, secured creditors and holders of subordinated debt (other than affiliates) of the commonly controlled insured depository institutions.

The FDIA also provides that amounts received from the liquidation or other resolution of any insured depository institution by any receiver must be distributed (after payment of secured claims) to pay the deposit liabilities of the institution prior to payment of any other general or unsecured senior liability, subordinated liability, general creditor or stockholder. This provision would give depositors a preference over general and subordinated creditors and stockholders in the event a receiver is appointed to distribute the assets of the Bank.

Further, any loans by a bank holding company to a subsidiary bank are subordinate in right of payment to deposits and certain other indebtedness of the subsidiary bank. In the event of a bank holding company’s bankruptcy, any commitment by the bank holding company to a federal bank regulatory agency to maintain the capital of a subsidiary bank at a certain level would be assumed by the bankruptcy trustee and entitled to priority payment.

Capital Requirements . The Federal Reserve imposes certain capital requirements on the bank holding company under the BHCA, including a minimum leverage ratio and a minimum ratio of “qualifying” capital to risk-weighted assets. These requirements are essentially the same as those that apply to the Bank and are described below under “CresCom Bank.” Subject to our capital requirements and certain other restrictions, we are able to borrow money to make a capital contribution to the Bank, and these loans may be repaid from dividends paid from the Bank to the Company. We are also able to raise capital for contribution to the Bank by issuing securities without having to receive regulatory approval, subject to compliance with federal and state securities laws.

Dividends . Since the Company is a bank holding company, its ability to declare and pay dividends is dependent on certain federal and state regulatory considerations, including the guidelines of the Federal Reserve. The Federal Reserve has issued a policy statement regarding the payment of dividends by bank holding companies. In general, the Federal Reserve’s policies provide that dividends should be paid only out of current earnings and only if the prospective rate of earnings retention by the bank holding company appears consistent with the organization’s capital needs, asset quality, and overall financial condition. The Federal Reserve’s policies also require that a bank holding company serve as a source of financial strength to its subsidiary banks by standing ready to use available resources to provide adequate capital funds to those banks during periods of financial stress or adversity and by maintaining the financial flexibility and capital-raising capacity to obtain additional resources for assisting its subsidiary banks where necessary. Further, under the prompt corrective action regulations, the ability of a bank holding company to pay dividends may be restricted if a subsidiary bank becomes undercapitalized. These regulatory policies could affect the ability of the Company to pay dividends or otherwise engage in capital distributions.

15
 

In addition, since the Company is a legal entity separate and distinct from the Bank and does not conduct stand-alone operations, its ability to pay dividends depends on the ability of the Bank to pay dividends to it, which is also subject to regulatory restrictions as described below in “CresCom Bank – Dividends.”

South Carolina State Regulation . As a South Carolina bank holding company under the South Carolina Banking and Branching Efficiency Act, we are subject to limitations on sale or merger and to regulation by the South Carolina Board of Financial Institutions, or SCBFI. We are not required to obtain the approval of the SCBFI prior to acquiring the capital stock of a national bank, but we must notify them at least 15 days prior to doing so. We must obtain approval from the SCBFI prior to engaging in the acquisition of branches, a South Carolina state chartered bank, or another South Carolina bank holding company.

 

CresCom Bank

 

The Bank’s primary federal regulator is the FDIC. In addition, the Bank is regulated and examined by the SCBFI. Deposits in the Bank are insured by the FDIC up to a maximum amount of $250,000, pursuant to the provisions of the Dodd-Frank Act.

The SCBFI and the FDIC regulate or monitor virtually all areas of the Bank’s operations, including:

· security devices and procedures;
· adequacy of capitalization and loss reserves;
· loans;
· investments;
· borrowings;
· deposits;
· mergers;
· issuances of securities;
· payment of dividends;
· interest rates payable on deposits;
· interest rates or fees chargeable on loans;
· establishment of branches;
· corporate reorganizations;
· maintenance of books and records; and
· adequacy of staff training to carry on safe lending and deposit gathering practices.

The FDIC requires that the Bank maintain specified ratios of capital to assets and imposes limitations on the Bank’s aggregate investment in real estate, bank premises, and furniture and fixtures. Two categories of regulatory capital are used in calculating these ratios—Tier 1 capital and total capital. Tier 1 capital generally includes common equity, retained earnings, a limited amount of qualifying preferred stock, and qualifying minority interests in consolidated subsidiaries, reduced by goodwill and certain other intangible assets, such as core deposit intangibles, and certain other assets. Total capital generally consists of Tier 1 capital plus Tier 2 capital, which includes the allowance for loan losses, preferred stock that did not qualify as Tier 1 capital, certain types of subordinated debt and a limited amount of other items.

The Bank is required to calculate three ratios: the ratio of Tier 1 capital to risk-weighted assets, the ratio of total capital to risk-weighted assets, and the “leverage ratio,” which is the ratio of Tier 1 capital to assets on a non-risk-adjusted basis. For the two ratios of capital to risk-weighted assets, certain assets, such as cash and U.S. Treasury securities, have a zero risk weighting. Others, such as commercial and consumer loans, have a 100% risk weighting. Some assets, notably purchase-money loans secured by first-liens on residential real property, are risk-weighted at 50%. Assets also include amounts that represent the potential funding of off-balance sheet obligations such as loan commitments and letters of credit. These potential assets are assigned to risk categories in the same manner as funded assets. The total assets in each category are multiplied by the appropriate risk weighting to determine risk-adjusted assets for the capital calculations.

16
 

The current minimum capital ratios for both the Company and the Bank are generally 8% for total capital, 4% for Tier 1 capital and 4% for leverage. To be eligible to be classified as “well capitalized,” the Bank must generally maintain a total capital ratio of 10% or more, a Tier 1 capital ratio of 6% or more, and a leverage ratio of 5% or more. Certain implications of the regulatory capital classification system are discussed in greater detail below. See additional discussion related to Basel III in this registration statement.

Prompt Corrective Action. The FDICIA established a “prompt corrective action” program in which every bank is placed in one of five regulatory categories, depending primarily on its regulatory capital levels. The FDIC and the other federal banking regulators are permitted to take increasingly severe action as a bank’s capital position or financial condition declines below the “Adequately Capitalized” level described below. Regulators are also empowered to place in receivership or require the sale of a bank to another depository institution when a bank’s leverage ratio reaches two percent. Better capitalized institutions are generally subject to less onerous regulation and supervision than banks with lesser amounts of capital. The FDIC’s regulations set forth five capital categories, each with specific regulatory consequences. The categories are:

· Well Capitalized - The institution exceeds the required minimum level for each relevant capital measure. A well capitalized institution is one (i) having a total capital ratio of 10% or greater, (ii) having a Tier 1 capital ratio of 6% or greater, (iii) having a leverage capital ratio of 5% or greater and (iv) that is not subject to any order or written directive to meet and maintain a specific capital level for any capital measure.

· Adequately Capitalized - The institution meets the required minimum level for each relevant capital measure. No capital distribution may be made that would result in the institution becoming undercapitalized. An adequately capitalized institution is one (i) having a total capital ratio of 8% or greater, (ii) having a Tier 1 capital ratio of 4% or greater and (iii) having a leverage capital ratio of 4% or greater or a leverage capital ratio of 3% or greater if the institution is rated composite 1 under the CAMELS (Capital, Assets, Management, Earnings, Liquidity and Sensitivity to market risk) rating system.
· Undercapitalized - The institution fails to meet the required minimum level for any relevant capital measure. An undercapitalized institution is one (i) having a total capital ratio of less than 8% or (ii) having a Tier 1 capital ratio of less than 4% or (iii) having a leverage capital ratio of less than 4%, or if the institution is rated a composite 1 under the CAMELS rating system, a leverage capital ratio of less than 3%.

· Significantly Undercapitalized - The institution is significantly below the required minimum level for any relevant capital measure. A significantly undercapitalized institution is one (i) having a total capital ratio of less than 6% or (ii) having a Tier 1 capital ratio of less than 3% or (iii) having a leverage capital ratio of less than 3%.
· Critically Undercapitalized - The institution fails to meet a critical capital level set by the appropriate federal banking agency. A critically undercapitalized institution is one having a ratio of tangible equity to total assets that is equal to or less than 2%.

If the FDIC determines, after notice and an opportunity for hearing, that the bank is in an unsafe or unsound condition, the regulator is authorized to reclassify the bank to the next lower capital category (other than critically undercapitalized) and require the submission of a plan to correct the unsafe or unsound condition.

If a bank is not well capitalized, it cannot accept brokered deposits without prior regulatory approval. In addition, a bank that is not well capitalized cannot offer an effective yield in excess of 75 basis points over interest paid on deposits of comparable size and maturity in such institution’s normal market area for deposits accepted from within its normal market area, or national rate paid on deposits of comparable size and maturity for deposits accepted outside the bank’s normal market area. Moreover, the FDIC generally prohibits a depository institution from making any capital distributions (including payment of a dividend) or paying any management fee to its parent holding company if the depository institution would thereafter be categorized as undercapitalized. Undercapitalized institutions are subject to growth limitations (an undercapitalized institution may not acquire another institution, establish additional branch offices or engage in any new line of business unless determined by the appropriate federal banking agency to be consistent with an accepted capital restoration plan, or unless the FDIC determines that the proposed action will further the purpose of prompt corrective action) and are required to submit a capital restoration plan. The agencies may not accept a capital restoration plan without determining, among other things, that the plan is based on realistic assumptions and is likely to succeed in restoring the depository institution’s capital. In addition, for a capital restoration plan to be acceptable, the depository institution’s parent holding company must guarantee that the institution will comply with the capital restoration plan. The aggregate liability of the parent holding company is limited to the lesser of an amount equal to 5.0% of the depository institution’s total assets at the time it became categorized as undercapitalized or the amount that is necessary (or would have been necessary) to bring the institution into compliance with all capital standards applicable with respect to such institution as of the time it fails to comply with the plan. If a depository institution fails to submit an acceptable plan, it is categorized as significantly undercapitalized.

17
 

Significantly undercapitalized categorized depository institutions may be subject to a number of requirements and restrictions, including orders to sell sufficient voting stock to become categorized as adequately capitalized, requirements to reduce total assets, and cessation of receipt of deposits from correspondent banks. The appropriate federal banking agency may take any action authorized for a significantly undercapitalized institution if an undercapitalized institution fails to submit an acceptable capital restoration plan or fails in any material respect to implement a plan accepted by the agency. A critically undercapitalized institution is subject to having a receiver or conservator appointed to manage its affairs and for loss of its charter to conduct banking activities.

An insured depository institution may not pay a management fee to a bank holding company controlling that institution or any other person having control of the institution if, after making the payment, the institution would be undercapitalized. In addition, an institution cannot make a capital distribution, such as a dividend or other distribution that is in substance a distribution of capital to the owners of the institution if following such a distribution the institution would be undercapitalized. Thus, if payment of such a management fee or the making of such would cause a bank to become undercapitalized, it could not pay a management fee or dividend to the bank holding company.

As further described under “ Recent Legislative and Regulatory Initiatives to Address the Financial and Economic Crises – Basel Capital Standards ,” the Basel Committee released in June 2011 a revised framework for the regulation of capital and liquidity of internationally active banking organizations. The new framework is generally referred to as “Basel III”. As discussed above, when fully phased in, Basel III will require certain bank holding companies and their bank subsidiaries to maintain substantially more capital, with a greater emphasis on common equity. On July 7, 2013, the Federal Reserve adopted a final rule implementing the Basel III standards and complementary parts of Basel II and Basel 2.5. On July 9, 2013, the OCC also adopted a final rule and the FDIC adopted the same provisions in the form of an “interim” final rule.

Standards for Safety and Soundness. The Federal Deposit Insurance Act also requires the federal banking regulatory agencies to prescribe, by regulation or guideline, operational and managerial standards for all insured depository institutions relating to: (i) internal controls, information systems and internal audit systems; (ii) loan documentation; (iii) credit underwriting; (iv) interest rate risk exposure; and (v) asset growth. The agencies also must prescribe standards for asset quality, earnings, and stock valuation, as well as standards for compensation, fees and benefits. The federal banking agencies have adopted regulations and Interagency Guidelines Prescribing Standards for Safety and Soundness to implement these required standards. These guidelines set forth the safety and soundness standards that the federal banking agencies use to identify and address problems at insured depository institutions before capital becomes impaired. Under the regulations, if the FDIC determines that the Bank fails to meet any standards prescribed by the guidelines, the agency may require the Bank to submit to the agency an acceptable plan to achieve compliance with the standard, as required by the FDIC. The final regulations establish deadlines for the submission and review of such safety and soundness compliance plans.

Regulatory Examination. The FDIC also requires the Bank to prepare annual reports on the Bank’s financial condition and to conduct an annual audit of its financial affairs in compliance with its minimum standards and procedures.

18
 

All insured institutions must undergo regular on-site examinations by their appropriate banking agency. The cost of examinations of insured depository institutions and any affiliates may be assessed by the appropriate federal banking agency against each institution or affiliate as it deems necessary or appropriate. Insured institutions are required to submit annual reports to the FDIC, their federal regulatory agency, and state supervisor when applicable. The FDIC has developed a method for insured depository institutions to provide supplemental disclosure of the estimated fair market value of assets and liabilities, to the extent feasible and practicable, in any balance sheet, financial statement, report of condition or any other report of any insured depository institution. The federal banking regulatory agencies prescribe, by regulation, standards for all insured depository institutions and depository institution holding companies relating, among other things, to the following:

· internal controls;
· information systems and audit systems;
· loan documentation;
· credit underwriting;
· interest rate risk exposure; and
· asset quality.

Transactions with Affiliates and Insiders. The Company is a legal entity separate and distinct from the Bank and its other subsidiaries. Various legal limitations restrict the Bank from lending or otherwise supplying funds to the Company or its non-bank subsidiaries. The Company and the Bank are subject to Sections 23A and 23B of the Federal Reserve Act and Federal Reserve Regulation W.

Section 23A of the Federal Reserve Act places limits on the amount of loans or extensions of credit to, or investments in, or certain other transactions with, affiliates and on the amount of advances to third parties collateralized by the securities or obligations of affiliates. The aggregate of all covered transactions is limited in amount, as to any one affiliate, to 10% of the Bank’s capital and surplus and, as to all affiliates combined, to 20% of the Bank’s capital and surplus. Furthermore, within the foregoing limitations as to amount, each covered transaction must meet specified collateral requirements. The Bank is forbidden to purchase low quality assets from an affiliate.

The Dodd-Frank Act expanded the definition of affiliate for purposes of quantitative and qualitative limitations of Section 23A of the Federal Reserve Act to include mutual funds advised by a depository institution or its affiliates. The Dodd-Frank Act applies Section 23A and Section 22(h) of the Federal Reserve Act (governing transactions with insiders) to derivative transactions, repurchase agreements and securities lending and borrowing transaction that create credit exposure to an affiliate or an insider. Any such transactions with affiliates must be fully secured. Covered transactions between a bank and a financial subsidiary are now fully subject to all of the restrictions in Section 23A. The Dodd-Frank Act also prohibits an insured depository institution from purchasing an asset from or selling an asset to an insider unless the transaction is on market terms and, if representing more than 10% of capital, is approved in advance by the disinterested directors.

Section 23B of the Federal Reserve Act, among other things, prohibits an institution from engaging in certain transactions with certain affiliates unless the transactions are on terms substantially the same, or at least as favorable to such institution or its subsidiaries, as those prevailing at the time for comparable transactions with nonaffiliated companies.

Regulation W generally excludes all non-bank and non-savings association subsidiaries of banks from treatment as affiliates, except to the extent that the Federal Reserve decides to treat these subsidiaries as affiliates. The regulation also limits the amount of loans that can be purchased by a bank from an affiliate to not more than 100% of the bank’s capital and surplus.

The Bank is also subject to certain restrictions on extensions of credit to executive officers, directors, certain principal stockholders, and their related interests. Such extensions of credit (i) must be made on substantially the same terms, including interest rates and collateral requirements, as those prevailing at the time for comparable transactions with unrelated third parties and (ii) must not involve more than the normal risk of repayment or present other unfavorable features.

Dividends. The Company’s principal source of cash flow, including cash flow to pay dividends to its stockholders, is dividends it receives from the Bank. Statutory and regulatory limitations apply to the Bank’s payment of dividends to the Company. As a South Carolina chartered bank, the Bank is subject to limitations on the amount of dividends that it is permitted to pay. Unless otherwise instructed by the SCBFI, the Bank is generally permitted under South Carolina state banking regulations to pay cash dividends of up to 100% of net income in any calendar year without obtaining the prior approval of the SCBFI. The FDIC also has the authority under federal law to enjoin a bank from engaging in what in its opinion constitutes an unsafe or unsound practice in conducting its business, including the payment of a dividend under certain circumstances.

19
 

Branching. Under current South Carolina law, the Bank may open branch offices throughout South Carolina with the prior approval of the SCBFI. In addition, with prior regulatory approval, the Bank is able to acquire existing banking operations in South Carolina. Furthermore, federal legislation permits interstate branching, including out-of-state acquisitions by bank holding companies, interstate branching by banks, and interstate merging by banks. The Dodd-Frank Act removes previous state law restrictions on de novo interstate branching in states such as South Carolina. This change permits out-of-state banks to open de novo branches in states where the laws of the state where the de novo branch to be opened would permit a bank chartered by that state to open a de novo branch.

Anti-Tying Restrictions. Under amendments to the BHCA and Federal Reserve regulations, a bank is prohibited from engaging in certain tying or reciprocity arrangements with its customers. In general, a bank may not extend credit, lease, sell property, or furnish any services or fix or vary the consideration for these on the condition that (i) the customer obtain or provide some additional credit, property, or services from or to the bank, the bank holding company or subsidiaries thereof or (ii) the customer may not obtain some other credit, property, or services from a competitor, except to the extent reasonable conditions are imposed to assure the soundness of the credit extended. Certain arrangements are permissible: a bank may offer combined-balance products and may otherwise offer more favorable terms if a customer obtains two or more traditional bank products; and certain foreign transactions are exempt from the general rule. A bank holding company or any bank affiliate also is subject to anti-tying requirements in connection with electronic benefit transfer services.

Community Reinvestment Act. The Community Reinvestment Act, or CRA, requires that the FDIC evaluate the record of the Bank in meeting the credit needs of its local community, including low and moderate income neighborhoods. These factors are also considered in evaluating mergers, acquisitions, and applications to open a branch or facility. Failure to adequately meet these criteria could impose additional requirements and limitations on our Bank.

The Gramm-Leach-Bliley Act, or GLBA, made various changes to the CRA. Among other changes, CRA agreements with private parties must be disclosed and annual CRA reports must be made available to a bank’s primary federal regulator. A bank holding company will not be permitted to become a financial holding company and no new activities authorized under the GLBA may be commenced by a holding company or by a bank financial subsidiary if any of its bank subsidiaries received less than a satisfactory CRA rating in its latest CRA examination.

Financial Subsidiaries. Under the GLBA, subject to certain conditions imposed by their respective banking regulators, national and state-chartered banks are permitted to form “financial subsidiaries” that may conduct financial or incidental activities, thereby permitting bank subsidiaries to engage in certain activities that previously were impermissible. The GLBA imposes several safeguards and restrictions on financial subsidiaries, including that the parent bank’s equity investment in the financial subsidiary be deducted from the bank’s assets and tangible equity for purposes of calculating the bank’s capital adequacy. In addition, the GLBA imposes new restrictions on transactions between a bank and its financial subsidiaries similar to restrictions applicable to transactions between banks and non-bank affiliates.

Consumer Protection Regulations. Activities of the Bank are subject to a variety of statutes and regulations designed to protect consumers. Interest and other charges collected or contracted for by the Bank are subject to state usury laws and federal laws concerning interest rates. The Bank’s loan operations are also subject to federal laws applicable to credit transactions, such as:

· the federal Truth-In-Lending Act, governing disclosures of credit terms to consumer borrowers;
· the Home Mortgage Disclosure Act of 1975, requiring financial institutions to provide information to enable the public and public officials to determine whether a financial institution is fulfilling its obligation to help meet the housing needs of the community it serves;
· the Equal Credit Opportunity Act, prohibiting discrimination on the basis of race, creed or other prohibited factors in extending credit;
· the Fair Credit Reporting Act of 1978, governing the use and provision of information to credit reporting agencies;
· the Fair Debt Collection Act, governing the manner in which consumer debts may be collected by collection agencies; and
· the rules and regulations of the various federal agencies charged with the responsibility of implementing such federal laws.

20
 

The deposit operations of the Bank also are subject to:

· the Right to Financial Privacy Act, which imposes a duty to maintain confidentiality of consumer financial records and prescribes procedures for complying with administrative subpoenas of financial records; and
· the Electronic Funds Transfer Act and Regulation E issued by the Federal Reserve to implement that Act, which governs automatic deposits to and withdrawals from deposit accounts and customers’ rights and liabilities arising from the use of automated teller machines and other electronic banking services.

Enforcement Powers. The Bank and its “institution-affiliated parties,” including its management, employees, agents, independent contractors and consultants, such as attorneys and accountants, and others who participate in the conduct of the financial institution’s affairs, are subject to potential civil and criminal penalties for violations of law, regulations or written orders of a government agency. These practices can include the failure of an institution to timely file required reports or the filing of false or misleading information or the submission of inaccurate reports. Civil penalties may be as high as $1,000,000 a day for such violations. Criminal penalties for some financial institution crimes have been increased to twenty years. In addition, regulators are provided with greater flexibility to commence enforcement actions against institutions and institution-affiliated parties. Possible enforcement actions include the termination of deposit insurance. Furthermore, banking agencies’ powers to issue cease-and-desist orders have been expanded. Such orders may, among other things, require affirmative action to correct any harm resulting from a violation or practice, including restitution, reimbursement, indemnifications or guarantees against loss. A financial institution may also be ordered to restrict its growth, dispose of certain assets, rescind agreements or contracts, or take other actions as determined by the ordering agency to be appropriate.

Anti-Money Laundering. Financial institutions must maintain anti-money laundering programs that include established internal policies, procedures, and controls; a designated compliance officer; an ongoing employee training program; and testing of the program by an independent audit function. The Company and the Bank are also prohibited from entering into specified financial transactions and account relationships and must meet enhanced standards for due diligence and “knowing your customer” in their dealings with foreign financial institutions and foreign customers. Financial institutions must take reasonable steps to conduct enhanced scrutiny of account relationships to guard against money laundering and to report any suspicious transactions, and recent laws provide law enforcement authorities with increased access to financial information maintained by banks. Anti-money laundering obligations have been substantially strengthened as a result of the USA Patriot Act, enacted in 2001 and renewed in 2006. Bank regulators routinely examine institutions for compliance with these obligations and are required to consider compliance in connection with the regulatory review of applications. The regulatory authorities have been active in imposing cease and desist orders and money penalty sanctions against institutions found to be violating these obligations.

USA PATRIOT Act/Bank Secrecy Act. Financial institutions must maintain anti-money laundering programs that include established internal policies, procedures, and controls; a designated compliance officer; an ongoing employee training program; and testing of the program by an independent audit function. The USA PATRIOT Act, amended, in part, the Bank Secrecy Act and provides for the facilitation of information sharing among governmental entities and financial institutions for the purpose of combating terrorism and money laundering by enhancing anti-money laundering and financial transparency laws, as well as enhanced information collection tools and enforcement mechanics for the U.S. government, including: (i) requiring standards for verifying customer identification at account opening; (ii) rules to promote cooperation among financial institutions, regulators, and law enforcement entities in identifying parties that may be involved in terrorism or money laundering; (iii) reports by nonfinancial trades and businesses filed with the U.S. Treasury Department’s Financial Crimes Enforcement Network for transactions exceeding $10,000; and (iv) filing suspicious activities reports if a bank believes a customer may be violating U.S. laws and regulations and requires enhanced due diligence requirements for financial institutions that administer, maintain, or manage private bank accounts or correspondent accounts for non-U.S. persons. Bank regulators routinely examine institutions for compliance with these obligations and are required to consider compliance in connection with the regulatory review of applications.

Under the USA PATRIOT Act, the Federal Bureau of Investigation can send to the banking regulatory agencies lists of the names of persons suspected of involvement in terrorist activities. The Bank can be requested to search its records for any relationships or transactions with persons on those lists. If the Bank finds any relationships or transactions, it must file a suspicious activity report and contact the FBI.

21
 

The Office of Foreign Assets Control, or OFAC, which is a division of the Treasury, is responsible for helping to ensure that United States entities do not engage in transactions with “enemies” of the United States, as defined by various Executive Orders and Acts of Congress. OFAC has sent, and will send, our banking regulatory agencies lists of names of persons and organizations suspected of aiding, harboring or engaging in terrorist acts. If the Bank finds a name on any transaction, account or wire transfer that is on an OFAC list, it must freeze such account, file a suspicious activity report and notify the FBI. The Bank has appointed an OFAC compliance officer to oversee the inspection of its accounts and the filing of any notifications. The Bank actively checks high-risk OFAC areas such as new accounts, wire transfers and customer files. The Bank performs these checks utilizing software, which is updated each time a modification is made to the lists provided by OFAC and other agencies of Specially Designated Nationals and Blocked Persons.

Privacy and Credit Reporting. Financial institutions are required to disclose their policies for collecting and protecting confidential information. Customers generally may prevent financial institutions from sharing nonpublic personal financial information with nonaffiliated third parties except under narrow circumstances, such as the processing of transactions requested by the consumer. Additionally, financial institutions generally may not disclose consumer account numbers to any nonaffiliated third party for use in telemarketing, direct mail marketing or other marketing to consumers. It is the Bank’s policy not to disclose any personal information unless required by law. The OCC and the federal banking agencies have prescribed standards for maintaining the security and confidentiality of consumer information. The Bank is subject to such standards, as well as standards for notifying consumers in the event of a security breach.

Like other lending institutions, the Bank utilizes credit bureau data in its underwriting activities. Use of such data is regulated under the Federal Credit Reporting Act on a uniform, nationwide basis, including credit reporting, prescreening, sharing of information between affiliates, and the use of credit data. The Fair and Accurate Credit Transactions Act of 2003, also known as the FACT Act, permits states to enact identity theft laws that are not inconsistent with the conduct required by the provisions of the FACT Act.

Effect of Governmental Monetary Policies. Our earnings are affected by domestic economic conditions and the monetary and fiscal policies of the United States government and its agencies. The Federal Reserve’s monetary policies have had, and are likely to continue to have, an important impact on the operating results of commercial banks through its power to implement national monetary policy in order, among other things, to curb inflation or combat a recession. The monetary policies of the Federal Reserve have major effects upon the levels of bank loans, investments and deposits through its open market operations in United States government securities and through its regulation of the discount rate on borrowings of member banks and the reserve requirements against member bank deposits. It is not possible to predict the nature or impact of future changes in monetary and fiscal policies.

Insurance of Accounts and Regulation by the FDIC. The Bank’s deposits are insured up to applicable limits by the Deposit Insurance Fund of the FDIC. As insurer, the FDIC imposes deposit insurance premiums and is authorized to conduct examinations of and to require reporting by FDIC insured institutions. It also may prohibit any FDIC insured institution from engaging in any activity the FDIC determines by regulation or order to pose a serious risk to the insurance fund. The FDIC also has the authority to initiate enforcement actions against savings institutions, after giving the bank’s regulatory authority an opportunity to take such action, and may terminate the deposit insurance if it determines that the institution has engaged in unsafe or unsound practices or is in an unsafe or unsound condition.

FDIC insured institutions are required to pay a Financing Corporation assessment to fund the interest on bonds issued to resolve thrift failures in the 1980s. The Financing Corporation quarterly assessment for the fourth quarter of 2013 equaled 1.085 basis points for each $100 of average consolidated total assets minus average tangible equity. These assessments, which may be revised based upon the level of deposits, will continue until the bonds mature in the years 2017 through 2019.

The FDIC may terminate the deposit insurance of any insured depository institution, including the Bank, if it determines after a hearing that the institution has engaged in unsafe or unsound practices, is in an unsafe or unsound condition to continue operations or has violated any applicable law, regulation, rule, order or condition imposed by the FDIC. It also may suspend deposit insurance temporarily during the hearing process for the permanent termination of insurance if the institution has no tangible capital. If insurance of accounts is terminated, the accounts at the institution at the time of the termination, less subsequent withdrawals, shall continue to be insured for a period of six months to two years, as determined by the FDIC. Management is not aware of any practice, condition or violation that might lead to termination of the Bank’s deposit insurance.

22
 

Incentive Compensation. In June 2010, the Federal Reserve, the FDIC and the OCC issued a comprehensive final guidance on incentive compensation policies intended to ensure that the incentive compensation policies of banking organizations do not undermine the safety and soundness of such organizations by encouraging excessive risk-taking. The guidance, which covers all employees that have the ability to materially affect the risk profile of an organization, either individually or as part of a group, is based upon the key principles that a banking organization’s incentive compensation arrangements should (i) provide incentives that do not encourage risk-taking beyond the organization’s ability to effectively identify and manage risks, (ii) be compatible with effective internal controls and risk management, and (iii) be supported by strong corporate governance, including active and effective oversight by the organization’s board of directors.

The Federal Reserve will review, as part of the regular, risk-focused examination process, the incentive compensation arrangements of banking organizations, such as the Company, that are not “large, complex banking organizations.” These reviews will be tailored to each organization based on the scope and complexity of the organization’s activities and the prevalence of incentive compensation arrangements. The findings of the supervisory initiatives will be included in reports of examination. Deficiencies will be incorporated into the organization’s supervisory ratings, which can affect the organization’s ability to make acquisitions and take other actions. Enforcement actions may be taken against a banking organization if its incentive compensation arrangements, or related risk-management control or governance processes, pose a risk to the organization’s safety and soundness and the organization is not taking prompt and effective measures to correct the deficiencies.

Proposed Legislation and Regulatory Action. From time to time, various legislative and regulatory initiatives are introduced in Congress and state legislatures, as well as by regulatory agencies. Such initiatives may include proposals to expand or contract the powers of bank holding companies and depository institutions or proposals to substantially change the financial institution regulatory system. Such legislation could change banking statutes and the operating environment of the Company in substantial and unpredictable ways. If enacted, such legislation could increase or decrease the cost of doing business, limit or expand permissible activities or affect the competitive balance among banks, savings associations, credit unions, and other financial institutions. We cannot predict whether any such legislation will be enacted, and, if enacted, the effect that it, or any implementing regulations, would have on the financial condition or results of operations of the Company. A change in statutes, regulations or regulatory policies applicable to the Company or the Bank could have a material effect on the business of the Company.

Item 1A.  Risk Factors

Our business is subject to certain risks, including those described below.  If any of the events described in the following risk factors actually occurs then our business, results of operations and financial condition could be materially adversely affected.  More detailed information concerning these risks is contained in other sections of this registration statement, including “Business” and “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations.”

 

Risks Related to Our Business

 

Negative developments in the financial industry, the domestic and international credit markets, and the economy in general pose significant challenges for our industry and us and could adversely affect our business, financial condition and results of operations .

Negative developments that began in the latter half of 2007 and that have continued since then in the global credit and securitization markets have resulted in unprecedented volatility and disruption in the financial markets and a general economic downturn, both nationally and in our South Carolina markets. As a result of this “credit crunch,” commercial as well as consumer loan portfolio performances deteriorated at many institutions, and the competition for deposits and quality loans has increased significantly. In addition, the values of real estate collateral supporting many commercial loans and home mortgages have declined and may continue to decline. As a result, we may face the following risks:

· economic conditions that negatively affect housing prices and the job market may cause the credit quality of our loan portfolios to deteriorate;
· market developments that affect consumer confidence may cause adverse changes in payment patterns by our customers, causing increases in delinquencies and default rates on loans and other credit facilities;

 

23
 

 

· the processes that we use to estimate our allowance for loan and lease losses and reserves may no longer be reliable because they rely on judgments, such as forecasts of economic conditions, that may no longer be capable of accurate estimation;
· the value of our securities portfolio may decline; and
· we face increased regulation of our industry, and the costs of compliance with such regulation may increase.

These conditions or similar ones may continue to persist or worsen, causing us to experience continuing or increased adverse effects on our business, financial condition, results of operations and the price of our common stock.

Our mortgage banking profitability could be significantly reduced if we are not able to originate and resell a high volume of mortgage loans.

Mortgage production, especially refinancing activity, typically declines in a rising interest rate environment. During 2009-2013, there was a period of historically low interest rates; however, the low interest rate environment likely will not continue indefinitely. During the latter half of 2013, interest rates on mortgages loans increased approximately one percent. As a result, mortgage production has decreased approximately fifty percent. Because we sell a substantial portion of the mortgage loans we originate, the profitability of our mortgage banking business depends in large part upon our ability to aggregate a high volume of loans and sell them in the secondary market at a gain. Thus, in addition to our dependence on the interest rate environment, we are dependent upon (i) the existence of an active secondary market and (ii) our ability to profitably sell loans or securities into that market. As our level of mortgage production declines, the profitability from our mortgage operations will depend upon our ability to reduce our costs commensurate with the reduction of revenue from our mortgage operations.

Our ability to originate and sell mortgage loans readily is dependent upon the availability of an active secondary market for single-family mortgage loans, which in turn depends in part upon the continuation of programs currently offered by the government sponsored entities, or GSEs, and other institutional and non-institutional investors. These entities account for a substantial portion of the secondary market in residential mortgage loans. Because the largest participants in the secondary market are government-sponsored enterprises whose activities are governed by federal law, any future changes in laws that significantly affect the activity of the GSEs could, in turn, adversely affect our operations. In September 2008, the GSEs were placed into conservatorship by the U.S. government. Although to date the conservatorship has not had a significant or adverse effect on our operations, it remains unclear whether these events or further changes would significantly and adversely affect our operations. The government and others have provided options to reform the GSEs, but the results of any such reform, and their impact on us, are difficult to predict. To date, no reform proposal has been enacted. In addition, our ability to sell mortgage loans readily is dependent upon our ability to remain eligible for the programs offered by the GSEs and other institutional and non-institutional investors. Our ability to remain eligible to originate and securitize government insured loans may also depend on having an acceptable peer-relative delinquency ratio for FHA loans and maintaining a delinquency rate with respect to Ginnie Mae pools that are below Ginnie Mae guidelines.

Any significant impairment of our eligibility with any of the GSEs would materially adversely affect our operations. Further, the criteria for loans to be accepted under such programs may be changed from time-to-time by the sponsoring entity which could result in a lower volume of corresponding loan originations. The profitability of participating in specific programs may vary depending on a number of factors, including our administrative costs of originating and purchasing qualifying loans and our costs of meeting such criteria.

An increase in our nonperforming assets would adversely impact our earnings.

At December 31, 2013, we had total nonperforming assets of $17.4 million, or 2.0% of total assets, compared to $21.5 million, or 2.42% of total assets, at December 31, 2012. Our nonperforming assets may increase in future periods. Nonperforming assets adversely affect our net income in various ways. We do not record interest income on non-accrual loans or investments or on real estate owned. We must establish an allowance for loan losses that reserves for losses inherent in the loan portfolio that are both probable and reasonably estimable through current period provisions for loan losses, which are recorded as a charge to income. From time to time, we also write down the other real estate owned portfolio to reflect changing market values. Additionally, there are legal fees associated with the resolution of problem assets as well as carrying costs such as taxes, insurance and maintenance related to the other real estate owned. Further, the resolution of nonperforming assets requires the active involvement of management, which can distract them from our overall supervision of operations and other income-producing activities.

24
 

We could record other-than-temporary impairment on our securities portfolio. In addition, we may not receive full future interest payments on these securities.

We review our investment securities portfolio at least quarterly and more frequently when economic conditions warrant, assessing whether there is any indication of other-than-temporary impairment, OTTI. Factors considered in the review include estimated future cash flows, length of time and extent to which market value has been less than cost, the financial condition and near term prospect of the issuer, and our intent and ability to retain the security to allow for an anticipated recovery in market value. If the review determines that there is OTTI, then an impairment loss is recognized in earnings equal to the difference between the investment’s cost and its fair value at the balance sheet date of the reporting period for which the assessment is made, or a portion may be recognized in other comprehensive income. The fair value of investments on which OTTI is recognized then becomes the new cost basis of the investment.

At December 31, 2013, the Company had 58 individual securities available-for-sale in an unrealized loss position. In addition, the Company had four individual investments held to maturity that were in unrealized loss in held-to-maturity consisting of pooled trust preferred securities. The Company believes, based on industry analyst reports and third-party OTTI evaluations, that the deterioration in the value of these securities is attributable to a combination of the lack of liquidity in these securities, credit ratings and credit quality concerns.

Management has performed various analyses, including cash flows, and has recorded OTTI expense of $625,000 related to four non-agency mortgage backed securities classified as available-for-sale during fiscal 2012. These four securities available-for-sale were subsequently sold during fiscal 2012. No OTTI expense was recognized for 2013 for securities available-for-sale. There are three additional asset-backed securities classified as held-to-maturity securities that had OTTI expense recorded in prior years, but did not incur OTTI expense during fiscal 2013. Other than these three held-to-maturity securities, management believes that there are no other securities other-than-temporarily impaired at December 31, 2013. The Company does not intend to sell these securities, and it is more likely than not that the Company will not be required to sell these securities before recovery of their amortized cost. Management continues to monitor these securities with a high degree of scrutiny. There can be no assurance that the Company will not conclude in future periods that conditions existing at that time indicate some or all of the securities may be sold or are other-than-temporarily impaired, which would require a charge to earnings in such periods.

 

A number of factors or combinations of factors could require us to conclude in one or more future reporting periods that an unrealized loss that exists with respect to our securities portfolio constitutes additional impairment that is other than temporary, which could result in material losses to us. These factors include, but are not limited to, a continued failure by an issuer to make scheduled interest payments, an increase in the severity of the unrealized loss on a particular security, an increase in the continuous duration of the unrealized loss without an improvement in value or changes in market conditions and/or industry or issuer specific factors that would render us unable to forecast a full recovery in value. In addition, the fair values of securities could decline if the overall economy and the financial condition of some of the issuers continue to deteriorate and there remains limited liquidity for these securities.

We may not be able to continue to support the realization of our deferred tax asset.

We calculate income taxes in accordance with ASC 740 Income Taxes, which requires the use of the asset and liability method. In accordance with this, we regularly assess available positive and negative evidence to determine whether it is more likely than not that our deferred tax asset balances will be recovered from reversals of deferred tax liabilities, potential utilization of net operating loss carrybacks, tax planning strategies and future taxable income. At December 31, 2013, our net deferred tax asset was $7.4 million, for which we have not established a valuation allowance. We recognized the deferred tax asset because management believes, based on earnings and detailed financial projections, that it is more likely than not that we will have sufficient future earnings to utilize this asset to offset future income tax liabilities. Realization of a deferred tax asset requires us to apply significant judgment and is inherently speculative because it requires the future occurrence of circumstances that cannot be predicted with certainty. There can be no assurance that we will achieve sufficient future taxable income as the basis for the ultimate realization of our deferred tax asset and therefore we may have to establish a full or partial valuation allowance at some point in the future. If we determine that a valuation allowance is necessary, this would require us to incur a charge to operations that would adversely affect our capital position.

At December 31, 2013, we had $7.4 million of allowable net deferred tax assets for regulatory capital purposes, which is the amount that is expected to be recovered based on a two-year net operating loss carryback and the next four quarters calculation. There is no assurance that we will be able to continue to recognize any, or all, of the deferred tax asset for regulatory capital purposes.

25
 

We may be terminated as a servicer of mortgage loans, be required to repurchase a mortgage loan or reimburse investors for credit losses on a mortgage loan, or incur costs, liabilities, fines and other sanctions if we fail to satisfy our servicing obligations, including our obligations with respect to mortgage loan foreclosure actions.

We act as servicer for approximately $2.0 billion of mortgage loans owned by third parties as of December 31, 2013. As a servicer for those loans we have certain contractual obligations, including foreclosing on defaulted mortgage loans or, to the extent applicable, considering alternatives to foreclosure such as loan modifications or short sales. If we commit a material breach of our obligations as servicer, we may be subject to termination as servicer if the breach is not cured within a specified period of time following notice, causing us to lose servicing income.

In some cases, we may be contractually obligated to repurchase a mortgage loan or reimburse the investor for credit losses incurred on the loan as a remedy for servicing errors with respect to the loan. If we have increased repurchase obligations because of claims that we did not satisfy our obligations as a servicer, or increased loss severity on such repurchases, we may have a significant reduction to net servicing income within our mortgage banking noninterest income. We may incur costs if we are required to, or if we elect to, re-execute or re-file documents or take other action in our capacity as a servicer in connection with pending or completed foreclosures. We may incur litigation costs if the validity of a foreclosure action is challenged by a borrower. If a court were to overturn a foreclosure because of errors or deficiencies in the foreclosure process, we may have liability to the borrower and/or to any title insurer of the property sold in foreclosure if the required process was not followed. These costs and liabilities may not be legally or otherwise reimbursable to us. In addition, if certain documents required for a foreclosure action are missing or defective, we could be obligated to cure the defect or repurchase the loan. We may incur liability to securitization investors relating to delays or deficiencies in our processing of mortgage assignments or other documents necessary to comply with state law governing foreclosures. The fair value of our mortgage servicing rights may be negatively affected to the extent our servicing costs increase because of higher foreclosure costs. We may be subject to fines and other sanctions imposed by federal or state regulators as a result of actual or perceived deficiencies in our foreclosure practices or in the foreclosure practices of other mortgage loan servicers. Any of these actions may harm our reputation or negatively affect our home lending or servicing business.

We may be required to repurchase mortgage loans or indemnify buyers against losses in some circumstances, which could harm liquidity, results of operations and financial condition.

When mortgage loans are sold, whether as whole loans or pursuant to a securitization, we are required to make customary representations and warranties to purchasers, guarantors and insurers, including the government sponsored enterprises, about the mortgage loans and the manner in which they were originated. Whole loan sale agreements require repurchase or substitute mortgage loans, or indemnification of buyers against losses, in the event we breach these representations or warranties. In addition, we may be required to repurchase mortgage loans as a result of early payment default of the borrower on a mortgage loan. With respect to loans that are originated through our broker or correspondent channels, the remedies available against the originating broker or correspondent, if any, may not be as broad as the remedies available to purchasers, guarantors and insurers of mortgage loans against us. We face further risk that the originating broker or correspondent, if any, may not have financial capacity to perform remedies that otherwise may be available. Therefore, if a purchaser, guarantor or insurer enforces its remedies against us, we may not be able to recover losses from the originating broker or correspondent. If repurchase and indemnity demands increase and such demands are valid claims and are in excess of our provision for potential losses, our liquidity, results of operations and financial condition may be adversely affected.

Our decisions regarding credit risk and reserves for loan losses may materially and adversely affect our business.

Making loans and other extensions of credit is an essential element of our business. Although we seek to mitigate risks inherent in lending by adhering to specific underwriting practices, our loans and other extensions of credit may not be repaid. The risk of nonpayment is affected by a number of factors, including:

· the duration of the credit;
· credit risks of a particular customer;
· changes in economic and industry conditions; and
· in the case of a collateralized loan, risks resulting from uncertainties about the future value of the collateral.

26
 

We attempt to maintain an appropriate allowance for loan losses to provide for potential losses in our loan portfolio. We periodically determine the amount of the allowance based on consideration of several factors, including:

· an ongoing review of the quality, mix, and size of our overall loan portfolio;
· our historical loan loss experience;
· evaluation of economic conditions;
· regular reviews of loan delinquencies and loan portfolio quality; and
· the amount and quality of collateral, including guarantees, securing the loans.

There is no precise method of predicting credit losses; therefore, we face the risk that charge-offs in future periods will exceed our allowance for loan losses and that additional increases in the allowance for loan losses will be required. Additions to the allowance for loan losses would result in a decrease of our net income, and possibly our capital.

Federal and state regulators periodically review our allowance for loan losses and may require us to increase our provision for loan losses or recognize further loan charge-offs, based on judgments different than those of our management. Any increase in the amount of our provision or loans charged-off as required by these regulatory agencies could have a negative effect on our operating results.

We may have higher loan losses than we have allowed for in our allowance for loan losses.

Our actual loan losses could exceed our allowance for loan losses. Our average loan size continues to increase and reliance on our historic allowance for loan losses may not be adequate. As of December 31, 2013, approximately $333.5 million of our loan portfolio (excluding loans held for sale) is composed of construction (11.0% of total loans receivable), commercial mortgage (45.6% of total loans receivable) and commercial loans (4.7% of total loans receivable). Repayment of such loans is generally considered more subject to market risk than residential mortgage loans. Industry experience shows that a portion of loans will become delinquent and a portion of loans will require partial or entire charge-off. Regardless of the underwriting criteria utilized, losses may be experienced as a result of various factors beyond our control, including among other things, changes in market conditions affecting the value of loan collateral and problems affecting the credit of our borrowers.

A significant portion of our loan portfolio is secured by real estate, and events that negatively impact the real estate market could hurt our business.

A significant portion of our loan portfolio is secured by real estate. As of December 31, 2013, approximately 94.8% of our loans (excluding loans held for sale) had real estate as a primary or secondary component of collateral. The real estate collateral in each case provides an alternate source of repayment in the event of default by the borrower and may deteriorate in value during the time the credit is extended. A continued weakening of the real estate market in our primary market area could result in an increase in the number of borrowers who default on their loans and a reduction in the value of the collateral securing their loans, which in turn could have an adverse effect on our profitability and asset quality. If we are required to liquidate the collateral securing a loan to satisfy the debt during a period of reduced real estate values, our earnings and capital could be adversely affected. Acts of nature, including hurricanes, tornados, earthquakes, fires and floods, which could be exacerbated by potential climate change and may cause uninsured damage and other loss of value to real estate that secures these loans, may also negatively impact our financial condition.

We have a concentration of credit exposure in commercial real estate and challenges faced by the commercial real estate market could adversely affect our business, financial condition, and results of operations.

As of December 31, 2013, we had approximately $247.9 million in loans outstanding to borrowers whereby the collateral securing the loan was commercial real estate, representing approximately 45.6% of our total loans outstanding as of that date. Approximately 46.5%, or $115.2 million, of this real estate are owner-occupied properties. Commercial real estate loans are generally viewed as having more risk of default than residential real estate loans. They are also typically larger than residential real estate loans and consumer loans and depend on cash flows from the owner’s business or the property to service the debt. Cash flows may be affected significantly by general economic conditions, and a downturn in the local economy or in occupancy rates in the local economy where the property is located could increase the likelihood of default. Because our loan portfolio contains a number of commercial real estate loans with relatively large balances, the deterioration of one or a few of these loans could cause a significant increase in our level of nonperforming loans. An increase in nonperforming loans could result in a loss of earnings from these loans, an increase in the related provision for loan losses and an increase in charge-offs, all of which could have a material adverse effect on our financial condition and results of operations.

27
 

Our commercial real estate loans have grown 4.9%, or $11.6 million, since December 31, 2012. The banking regulators are giving commercial real estate lending greater scrutiny, and may require banks with higher levels of commercial real estate loans to implement more stringent underwriting, internal controls, risk management policies and portfolio stress testing, as well as possibly higher levels of allowances for losses and capital levels as a result of commercial real estate lending growth and exposures.

Repayment of our commercial business loans is often dependent on the cash flows of the borrower, which may be unpredictable, and the collateral securing these loans may fluctuate in value.

At December 31, 2013, commercial business loans comprised 4.7% of our total loan portfolio. Our commercial business loans are originated primarily based on the identified cash flow and general liquidity of the borrower and secondarily on the underlying collateral provided by the borrower and/or repayment capacity of any guarantor. The borrower’s cash flow may be unpredictable, and collateral securing these loans may fluctuate in value. Although commercial business loans are often collateralized by equipment, inventory, accounts receivable, or other business assets, the liquidation of collateral in the event of default is often an insufficient source of repayment because accounts receivable may be uncollectible and inventories may be obsolete or of limited use. In addition, business assets may depreciate over time, may be difficult to appraise, and may fluctuate in value based on the success of the business. Accordingly, the repayment of commercial business loans depends primarily on the cash flow and credit worthiness of the borrower and secondarily on the underlying collateral value provided by the borrower and liquidity of the guarantor.

Further downturns or a slower recovery in the real estate markets in our primary market areas could significantly adversely impact our business.

Our business activities and credit exposure are primarily concentrated in Charleston, Dorchester, and Horry counties in South Carolina. The Company’s primary markets in Charleston and Dorchester counties are heavily influenced by the Port of Charleston, the military, the medical industry and national and international industries. The Company’s primary market areas in Horry County are heavily influenced by tourism, retirement living, and retail. The real estate markets have experienced a significant decline in these markets and, if these economic drivers experience further downturns or recover more slowly than expected, real estate in the Company’s markets may experience further declines. As of December 31, 2013, the Company’s loan portfolio is primarily secured by real estate located in South Carolina. If real estate values continue to decline, the collateral for these loans will provide less security. As a result, the borrower’s ability to pay, or the Company’s ability to recover on defaulted loans by selling the underlying collateral, would be diminished.

Our focus on lending to small to mid-sized community-based businesses may increase our credit risk.

Most of our commercial business and commercial real estate loans are made to small business or middle market customers. These businesses generally have fewer financial resources in terms of capital or borrowing capacity than larger entities and have a heightened vulnerability to economic conditions. If general economic conditions in the markets in which we operate negatively impact this important customer sector, our results of operations and financial condition and the value of our common stock may be adversely affected. Moreover, a portion of these loans have been made by us in recent years and the borrowers may not have experienced a complete business or economic cycle. Furthermore, the deterioration of our borrowers’ businesses may hinder their ability to repay their loans with us, which could have a material adverse effect on our financial condition and results of operations.

We face strong competition for customers, which could prevent us from obtaining customers and may cause us to pay higher interest rates to attract customers.

The banking business is highly competitive, and we experience competition in our market from many other financial institutions. We compete with commercial banks, credit unions, savings and loan associations, mortgage banking firms, consumer finance companies, securities brokerage firms, insurance companies, money market funds, and other mutual funds, as well as other super-regional, national, and international financial institutions that operate offices in our primary market areas and elsewhere. We compete with these institutions both in attracting deposits and in making loans. In addition, we have to attract our customer base from other existing financial institutions and from new residents. Many of our competitors are well-established, larger financial institutions. These institutions offer some services, such as extensive and established branch networks, that we do not provide. There is a risk that we will not be able to compete successfully with other financial institutions in our market, and that we may have to pay higher interest rates to attract deposits, resulting in reduced profitability. In addition, competitors that are not depository institutions are generally not subject to the extensive regulations that apply to us.

28
 

Our deposit insurance premiums could be substantially higher in the future, which could have a material adverse effect on our future earnings.

The FDIC insures deposits at FDIC-insured depository institutions, such as the Bank, up to applicable limits. The amount of a particular institution’s deposit insurance assessment is based on that institution’s risk classification under an FDIC risk-based assessment system. An institution’s risk classification is assigned based on its capital levels and the level of supervisory concern the institution poses to its regulators. Recent market developments and bank failures significantly depleted the FDIC’s Deposit Insurance Fund and reduced the ratio of reserves to insured deposits. As a result of recent economic conditions and the enactment of the Dodd-Frank Act, banks are now assessed deposit insurance premiums based on the bank’s average consolidated total assets, and the FDIC has modified certain risk-based adjustments, which increase or decrease a bank’s overall assessment rate. This has resulted in increases to the deposit insurance assessment rates and thus raised deposit premiums for many insured depository institutions. If these increases are insufficient for the Deposit Insurance Fund to meet its funding requirements, further special assessments or increases in deposit insurance premiums may be required. We are generally unable to control the amount of premiums that we are required to pay for FDIC insurance. If there are additional bank or financial institution failures, we may be required to pay even higher FDIC premiums than the recently increased levels. Any future additional assessments, increases or required prepayments in FDIC insurance premiums could reduce our profitability, may limit our ability to pursue certain business opportunities or otherwise negatively impact our operations.

The accuracy of our financial statements and related disclosures could be affected if the judgments, assumptions or estimates used in our critical accounting policies are inaccurate.

The preparation of financial statements and related disclosure in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States requires us to make judgments, assumptions and estimates that affect the amounts reported in our consolidated financial statements and accompanying notes. Our critical accounting policies, which are included in the section captioned “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Results of Operations and Financial Condition”, describe those significant accounting policies and methods used in the preparation of our consolidated financial statements that we consider “critical” because they require judgments, assumptions and estimates that materially affect our consolidated financial statements and related disclosures. As a result, if future events differ significantly from the judgments, assumptions and estimates in our critical accounting policies, those events or assumptions could have a material impact on our consolidated financial statements and related disclosures.

Our funding sources may prove insufficient to replace deposits and support future growth.

We rely on customer deposits, including brokered deposits, advances from the Federal Home Loan Bank, or FHLB, and the Federal Reserve, and other borrowings to fund operations. Although the Company has historically been able to replace maturing deposits and advances, if desired, no assurance can be given that we would be able to replace such funds in the future if the financial condition of the FHLB or programs sponsored by the Federal Reserve, regulatory restrictions on brokered deposits or regulatory restrictions on the pricing of local deposits or other market conditions were to change. In addition, certain borrowing sources are on a secured basis. The FHLB has become more restrictive on the types of collateral it will accept and the amount of borrowings allowed on acceptable collateral. Due to changes applied by rating agencies on bonds, changes in collateral requirements or deteriorating loan quality, outstanding borrowings could be required to be repaid, incurring prepayment penalties. Our financial flexibility will be severely constrained if we are unable to maintain access to funding at acceptable interest rates. Finally, if we are required to rely more heavily on more expensive funding sources to support future operations, our revenues may not increase proportionally to cover these costs. In addition, Crescent Mortgage Company funds mortgage loans held for sale through a purchase and sale agreement with the Bank. A decline in economic conditions could affect Crescent Mortgage Company’s ability to fund loans held for sale.

29
 

Our operating results in fiscal 2013, 2012 and 2011 have been highly dependent upon the results of our mortgage subsidiary, Crescent Mortgage Company.

There are a number of items that could adversely affect the volumes and margin of the Company’s mortgage banking operations. These include, but are not limited to, the Federal Reserve’s monetary policy including its quantitative easing program, aggressively low rates, reduction in prices paid by the mortgage banking aggregators, aggressive competition, the housing market recovery, the status and financial condition of Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac, potential changes in Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac lending guidelines and programs, proposed changes in the FHA lending requirements, extensive regulatory changes and liquidity. Should these factors significantly impact production of mortgages, it is likely that the Company’s earnings would be adversely affected.

Our mortgage subsidiary’s operations are exposed to significant repurchase risk.

Crescent Mortgage Company is exposed to significant repurchase risk on mortgage loan production related to potential reimbursements for loans sold to third parties for borrower fraud, underwriting and documentation issues, early defaults and prepayments of sold loans. If the Company experiences significant losses related to repurchase risk, it is possible that the reserve established for such exposure is not adequate. The Company continues to receive repurchase requests. The Company evaluates each request and provides estimated reserves as necessary. We believe that the reserve related to repurchase risk is adequate to absorb probable losses; however, we cannot predict these losses or whether our reserve will be adequate. Any of these occurrences could materially and adversely affect our business, financial condition and profitability.

The value of our loan servicing portfolio may become impaired in the future.

As of December 31, 2013, Crescent Mortgage Company serviced approximately $2.0 billion of loans. At that date, our mortgage loan servicing rights were recorded as an asset with a carrying value of approximately $10.9 million. We expect that our loan servicing portfolio will increase in the future. If interest rates decline and the actual and expected mortgage loan prepayment rates increase or other factors that cause a reduction of the valuation of our mortgage servicing asset, the Company could incur an impairment of its mortgage loan servicing asset.

Hurricanes and other natural disasters may adversely affect loan portfolios and operations and increase the cost of doing business.

The Company operates in markets that are susceptible to natural disasters. Large-scale natural disasters may significantly affect loan portfolios by damaging properties pledged as collateral, affecting the economies our borrowers live in, and by impairing the ability of the borrower to repay their loans.

Changes in prevailing interest rates may reduce our profitability.

Our results of operations depend in large part upon the level of our net interest income, which is the difference between interest income from interest-earning assets, such as loans and investment securities, and interest expense on interest-bearing liabilities, such as deposits and borrowings. Depending on the terms and maturities of our assets and liabilities, we believe it is more likely than not a significant change in interest rates could have a material adverse effect on our profitability. Many factors cause changes in interest rates, including governmental monetary policies and domestic and international economic and political conditions. While we intend to manage the effects of changes in interest rates by adjusting the terms, maturities, and pricing of our assets and liabilities, our efforts may not be effective and our financial condition and results of operations could suffer.

We are dependent on key individuals, and the loss of one or more of these key individuals could curtail our growth and adversely affect our prospects.

Jerry Rexroad, the Company’s President and Chief Executive Officer, has extensive and long-standing ties within our primary markets. Mr. Rexroad has substantial experience in banking operations, wholesale mortgage operations, investment securities, and mergers and acquisitions. If we lose the services of Mr. Rexroad he would be difficult to replace and our business and development could be materially and adversely affected.

30
 

David Morrow, the Bank’s President and Chief Executive Officer, also has extensive and long-standing ties within our primary markets and substantial commercial lending experience within our Charleston and Myrtle Beach markets. If we lose the services of Mr. Morrow, he would be difficult to replace and our business and development could be materially and adversely affected.

Our success also depends, in part, on our continued ability to attract and retain experienced loan originators, as well as other management personnel. Competition for personnel is intense, and we may not be successful in attracting or retaining qualified personnel. Our failure to compete for these personnel, or the loss of the services of several of such key personnel, could adversely affect our business strategy and seriously harm our business, results of operations, and financial condition.

The Dodd-Frank Act may have a material adverse effect on our operations.

The Dodd-Frank Act imposes significant regulatory and compliance changes on banks and bank holding companies. The key effects of the Dodd-Frank Act on our business are:

· changes to regulatory capital requirements;
· exclusion of hybrid securities, including trust preferred securities, issued on or after May 19, 2010 from Tier 1 capital;
· creation of new government regulatory agencies (such as the Financial Stability Oversight Council, which oversees systemic risk, and the Consumer Financial Protection Bureau, which develops and enforces rules for bank and non-bank providers of consumer financial products);
· potential limitations on federal preemption;
· changes to deposit insurance assessments;
· regulation of debit interchange fees we earn;
· changes in retail banking regulations, including potential limitations on certain fees we may charge; and
· changes in regulation of consumer mortgage loan origination and risk retention.

In addition, the Dodd-Frank Act restricts the ability of banks to engage in certain proprietary trading or to sponsor or invest in private equity or hedge funds. The Dodd-Frank Act also contains provisions designed to limit the ability of insured depository institutions, their holding companies and their affiliates to conduct certain swaps and derivatives activities and to take certain principal positions in financial instruments.

Some provisions of the Dodd-Frank Act became effective immediately upon its enactment. Many provisions, however, will require regulations to be promulgated by various federal agencies in order to be implemented, some but not all of which have been proposed or finalized by the applicable federal agencies. The provisions of the Dodd-Frank Act may have unintended effects, which will not be clear until after implementation. Certain changes resulting from the Dodd-Frank Act may impact the profitability of our business activities, require changes to certain of our business practices, impose upon us more stringent capital, liquidity and leverage requirements or otherwise adversely affect our business. These changes may also require us to invest significant management attention and resources to evaluate and make any changes necessary to comply with new statutory and regulatory requirements. Failure to comply with the new requirements may negatively impact our results of operations and financial condition. While we cannot predict what effect any presently contemplated or future changes in the laws or regulations or their interpretations would have on us, these changes could be materially adverse to investors in our common stock.

New capital rules that were recently issued generally require insured depository institutions and their holding companies to hold more capital.  The impact of the new rules on our financial condition and operations is uncertain but could be materially adverse.

On July 2, 2013, the Federal Reserve adopted a final rule for the Basel III capital framework and, on July 9, 2013, the OCC also adopted a final rule and the FDIC adopted the same provisions in the form of an “interim final.”  These rules substantially amend the regulatory risk-based capital rules applicable to us.  The rules phase in over time beginning in 2015 and will become fully effective in 2019. The rules apply to the Company as well as to the Bank.

31
 

The final rules increase capital requirements and generally include two new capital measurements that will affect us, a risk-based common equity Tier 1 ratio and a capital conservation buffer. Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1) capital is a subset of Tier 1 capital and is limited to common equity (plus related surplus), retained earnings, accumulated other comprehensive income and certain other items. Other instruments that have historically qualified for Tier 1 treatment, including non-cumulative perpetual preferred stock, are consigned to a category known as additional Tier 1 capital and must be phased out over a period of nine years beginning in 2014. The rules permit bank holding companies with less than $15 billion in assets (such as us) to continue to include trust preferred securities and non-cumulative perpetual preferred stock issued before May 19, 2010 in Tier 1 capital, but not CET1. Tier 2 capital consists of instruments that have historically been placed in Tier 2, as well as cumulative perpetual preferred stock.

The final rules adjust all three categories of capital by requiring new deductions from and adjustments to capital that will result in more stringent capital requirements and may require changes in the ways we do business. Among other things, the current rule on the deduction of mortgage servicing assets from Tier 1 capital has been revised in ways that are likely to require a greater deduction than we currently make and that will require the deduction to be made from CET1.  This deduction phases in over a three-year period from 2015 through 2017.  We closely monitor our mortgage servicing assets, and we expect to maintain our mortgage servicing asset at levels close to the deduction thresholds by a combination of sales of portions of these assets from time to time either on a flowing basis as we originate mortgages or through bulk sale transactions. Additionally, any gains on sales from mortgage loans sold into securitizations must be deducted in full from CET1.  This requirement phases in over three years from 2015 through 2017.  Under the earlier rule and through 2014, no deduction is required.

Beginning in 2015, our minimum capital requirements will be (i) a CET1 ratio of 4.5%, (ii) a Tier 1 capital (CET1 plus Additional Tier 1 capital) of 6% (up from 4%) and (iii) a total capital ratio of 8% (the current requirement). Our leverage ratio requirement will remain at the 4% level now required. Beginning in 2016, a capital conservation buffer will phase in over three years, ultimately resulting in a requirement of 2.5% on top of the CET1, Tier 1 and total capital requirements, resulting in a require CET1 ratio of 7%, a Tier 1 ratio of 8.5%, and a total capital ratio of 10.5%. Failure to satisfy any of these three capital requirements will result in limits on paying dividends, engaging in share repurchases and paying discretionary bonuses. These limitations will establish a maximum percentage of eligible retained income that could be utilized for such actions. While the final rules will result in higher regulatory capital standards, it is difficult at this time to predict when or how any new standards will ultimately be applied to us.

In addition to the higher required capital ratios and the new deductions and adjustments, the final rules increase the risk weights for certain assets, meaning that we will have to hold more capital against these assets. For example, commercial real estate loans that do not meet certain new underwriting requirements must be risk-weighted at 150%, rather than the current 100%. There are also new risk weights for unsettled transactions and derivatives. We also will be required to hold capital against short-term commitments that are not unconditionally cancelable; currently, there are no capital requirements currently for these off-balance sheet assets. All changes to the risk weights take effect in full in 2015.

In addition, in the current economic and regulatory environment, bank regulators may impose capital requirements that are more stringent than those required by applicable existing regulations. The application of more stringent capital requirements for us could, among other things, result in lower returns on equity, require the raising of additional capital, and result in regulatory actions if we were to be unable to comply with such requirements. Implementation of changes to asset risk weightings for risk-based capital calculations, items included or deducted in calculating regulatory capital or additional capital conservation buffers, could result in management modifying our business strategy and could limit our ability to make distributions, including paying dividends or buying back our shares.

We face a risk of noncompliance and enforcement action with the Bank Secrecy Act and other anti-money laundering statutes and regulations.

The federal Bank Secrecy Act, the Uniting and Strengthening America by Providing Appropriate Tools Required to Intercept and Obstruct Terrorism Act of 2001 (also known as the PATRIOT Act), and other laws and regulations require financial institutions, among other duties, to institute and maintain effective anti-money laundering programs and file suspicious activity and currency transaction reports as appropriate. The federal Financial Crimes Enforcement Network, established by the Treasury to administer the Bank Secrecy Act, is authorized to impose significant civil money penalties for violations of those requirements and has recently engaged in coordinated enforcement efforts with the individual federal banking regulators, as well as the Department of Justice, Drug Enforcement Administration and Internal Revenue Service. There is also increased scrutiny of compliance with the rules enforced by OFAC. Federal and state bank regulators also have begun to focus on compliance with Bank Secrecy Act and anti-money laundering regulations. If our policies, procedures and systems are deemed deficient we would be subject to liability, including fines and regulatory actions, such as restrictions on our ability to pay dividends, which would negatively impact our business, financial condition and results of operations. Failure to maintain and implement adequate programs to combat money laundering and terrorist financing could also have serious reputational consequences for us.

32
 

Federal, state and local consumer lending laws may restrict our ability to originate certain mortgage loans or increase our risk of liability with respect to such loans and could increase our cost of doing business.

Federal, state and local laws have been adopted that are intended to eliminate certain lending practices considered “predatory.” These laws prohibit practices such as steering borrowers away from more affordable products, selling unnecessary insurance to borrowers, repeatedly refinancing loans and making loans without a reasonable expectation that the borrowers will be able to repay the loans irrespective of the value of the underlying property. Over the course of 2013, the CFPB has issued several rules on mortgage lending, notably a rule requiring all home mortgage lenders to determine a borrower’s ability to repay the loan.  Loans with certain terms and conditions and that otherwise meet the definition of a “qualified mortgage” may be protected from liability to a borrower for failing to make the necessary determinations.  In either case, we may find it necessary to tighten our mortgage loan underwriting standards in response to the CFPB rules, which may constrain our ability to make loans consistent with our business strategies. It is our policy not to make predatory loans and to determine borrowers’ ability to repay, but the law and related rules create the potential for increased liability with respect to our lending and loan investment activities. They increase our cost of doing business and, ultimately, may prevent us from making certain loans and cause us to reduce the average percentage rate or the points and fees on loans that we do make.

The requirements of being a public company may strain our resources, divert management’s attention and affect our ability to attract and retain executive management and qualified board members.

As a public company, we will be subject to the reporting requirements of the Exchange Act, the Sarbanes-Oxley Act, the Dodd-Frank Act, and other applicable securities rules and regulations. Compliance with these rules and regulations will increase our legal and financial compliance costs, make some activities more difficult, time-consuming or costly and increase demand on our systems and resources. The Exchange Act requires, among other things, that we file annual, quarterly and current reports with respect to our business and operating results. The Sarbanes-Oxley Act requires, among other things, that we maintain effective disclosure controls and procedures and internal control over financial reporting. In order to maintain and, if required, improve our disclosure controls and procedures and internal control over financial reporting to meet this standard, significant resources and management oversight may be required. As a result, management’s attention may be diverted from other business concerns, which could adversely affect our business and operating results. Although we have already hired additional employees to comply with these requirements, we may need to hire more employees in the future or engage outside consultants, which will increase our costs and expenses.

In addition, changing laws, regulations and standards relating to corporate governance and public disclosure are creating uncertainty for public companies, increasing legal and financial compliance costs and making some activities more time consuming. These laws, regulations and standards are subject to varying interpretations, in many cases due to their lack of specificity, and, as a result, their application in practice may evolve over time as new guidance is provided by regulatory and governing bodies. This could result in continuing uncertainty regarding compliance matters and higher costs necessitated by ongoing revisions to disclosure and governance practices. We intend to invest resources to comply with evolving laws, regulations and standards, and this investment may result in increased general and administrative expenses and a diversion of management’s time and attention from revenue-generating activities to compliance activities. If our efforts to comply with new laws, regulations and standards differ from the activities intended by regulatory or governing bodies due to ambiguities related to their application and practice, regulatory authorities may initiate legal proceedings against us and our business may be adversely affected.

We also expect that being a public company and these new rules and regulations will increase the costs of our director and officer liability insurance, and we may be required to accept reduced coverage or incur substantially higher costs to obtain coverage. These factors could also make it more difficult for us to attract and retain qualified members of our board of directors, particularly to serve on our audit committee and compensation committee, and qualified executive officers.

33
 

As a result of disclosure of information in this registration statement and in filings required of a public company, our business and financial condition will become more visible, which may result in threatened or actual litigation, including by competitors and other third parties. If such claims are successful, our business and operating results could be adversely affected, and even if the claims do not result in litigation or are resolved in our favor, these claims, and the time and resources necessary to resolve them, could divert the resources of our management and adversely affect our business and operating results.

We earned net income in fiscal 2013 and 2012, but experienced net losses in fiscal 2011 and 2010.

We earned net income of $16.8 and $16.9 million in 2013 and 2012, respectively, primarily due to the strong performance of the Company’s wholesale mortgage business. However, we experienced a net loss of $971,000 and $12.6 million for fiscal 2011 and 2010, respectively. In each of these years, the Company experienced significant losses related to historically elevated levels of nonperforming assets, which necessitated a provision for loan losses of $2.7 million for fiscal 2012, $10.7 million for fiscal 2011, and $30.8 million for fiscal 2010. We had net charge offs of $5.2 million of loans during 2012, compared to $13.0 million of loans during 2011 and $29.5 million of charge offs during 2010. Non-accrual loans (generally loans 90 days or more past due in principal or interest payments) totaled $11.1 million, or 2.1% of total loans, net, at December 31, 2013 compared to $15.2 million, or 3.04% of total loans, net, at December 31, 2012. We also recognized other-than-temporary impairment losses related to our investment portfolio of $913,000 for fiscal 2012 and $1.8 million for fiscal 2011. We did not record other-than-temporary impairment on securities for fiscal 2013. Although the credit quality indicators generally showed improvement during 2013 and 2012, if we experience further deterioration in loan portfolio in addition to other factors and conditions out of our control such as weakness in our local economy, we may not be able to maintain profitability in the future.

We may be adversely affected by the soundness of other financial institutions.

Financial services institutions are interrelated as a result of trading, clearing, counterparty, or other relationships. We have exposure to many different industries and counterparties, and routinely execute transactions with counterparties in the financial services industry, including commercial banks, brokers and dealers, investment banks, and other institutional clients. Many of these transactions expose us to credit risk in the event of a default by a counterparty or client. In addition, our credit risk may be exacerbated when the collateral held by the bank cannot be realized upon or is liquidated at prices not sufficient to recover the full amount of the credit or derivative exposure due to the bank. Any such losses could have a material adverse affect on our financial condition and results of operations.

We may face risks if we seek to expand through acquisitions or mergers.

From time to time, we may seek to acquire other financial institutions or parts of those institutions. We may also expand into new markets or lines of business or offer new products or services. These activities would involve a number of risks, including:

· the potential inaccuracy of the estimates and judgments used to evaluate credit, operations, management, and market risks with respect to a target institution;
· the time and costs of evaluating new markets, hiring or retaining experienced local management, and opening new offices and the time lags between these activities and the generation of sufficient assets and deposits to support the costs of the expansion;
· the incurrence and possible impairment of goodwill associated with an acquisition and possible adverse effects on our results of operations; and
· the risk of loss of key employees and customers.

Our underwriting decisions may materially and adversely affect our business.

While we generally underwrite the loans in our portfolio in accordance with our own internal underwriting guidelines and regulatory supervisory guidelines, in certain circumstances we have made loans which exceed supervisory guidelines. As of December 31, 2013, approximately $5,431,801 of our loans, or 5.6% of our Bank's regulatory capital, had loan-to-value ratios that exceeded regulatory supervisory guidelines, of which eight loans totaling approximately $1,762,337 had loan-to-value ratios of 100% or more. In addition, supervisory limits on commercial loan to value exceptions are set at 30%. At December 31, 2013, $1,916,585, or 1.79% of our Bank's regulatory capital, exceeded the supervisory loan-to-value ratio. The number of loans in our portfolio with loan-to-value ratios in excess of supervisory guidelines could increase the risk of delinquencies and defaults in our portfolio.

 

34
 

We depend on the accuracy and completeness of information about clients and counterparties and our financial condition could be adversely affected if we rely on misleading information.

 

In deciding whether to extend credit or to enter into other transactions with clients and counterparties, we may rely on information furnished to us by or on behalf of clients and counterparties, including financial statements and other financial information, which we do not independently verify. We also may rely on representations of clients and counterparties as to the accuracy and completeness of that information and, with respect to financial statements, on reports of independent auditors. For example, in deciding whether to extend credit to clients, we may assume that a customer’s audited financial statements conform with GAAP and present fairly, in all material respects, the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the customer. Our financial condition and results of operations could be negatively impacted to the extent we rely on financial statements that do not comply with GAAP or are materially misleading.

 

Our ability to pay cash dividends is limited, and we may be unable to pay future dividends even if we desire to do so.

The Federal Reserve has issued a policy statement regarding the payment of dividends by bank holding companies. In general, the Federal Reserve’s policies provide that dividends should be paid only out of current earnings and only if the prospective rate of earnings retention by the bank holding company appears consistent with the organization’s capital needs, asset quality and overall financial condition. The Federal Reserve’s policies also require that a bank holding company serve as a source of financial strength to its subsidiary banks by standing ready to use available resources to provide adequate capital funds to those banks during periods of financial stress or adversity and by maintaining the financial flexibility and capital-raising capacity to obtain additional resources for assisting its subsidiary banks where necessary. In addition, under the prompt corrective action regulations, the ability of a bank holding company to pay dividends may be restricted if a subsidiary bank becomes undercapitalized. These regulatory policies could affect the ability of the Company to pay dividends or otherwise engage in capital distributions.

Our ability to pay cash dividends may be limited by regulatory restrictions, by our Bank’s ability to pay cash dividends to the Company and by our need to maintain sufficient capital to support our operations. As a South Carolina chartered bank, the Bank is subject to limitations on the amount of dividends that it is permitted to pay. Unless otherwise instructed by the SCBFI, the Bank is generally permitted under South Carolina state banking regulations to pay cash dividends of up to 100% of net income in any calendar year without obtaining the prior approval of the SCBFI. If our Bank is not permitted to pay cash dividends to the Company, it is unlikely that we would be able to pay cash dividends on our common stock. Moreover, holders of our common stock are entitled to receive dividends only when, and if declared by our board of directors. Although we have historically paid cash dividends on our common stock, we are not required to do so and our board of directors could reduce or eliminate our common stock dividend in the future.

A failure in or breach of our operational or security systems or infrastructure, or those of our third party vendors and other service providers or other third parties, including as a result of cyber attacks, could disrupt our businesses, result in the disclosure or misuse of confidential or proprietary information, damage our reputation, increase our costs, and cause losses.

We rely heavily on communications and information systems to conduct our business. Information security risks for financial institutions such as ours have generally increased in recent years in part because of the proliferation of new technologies, the use of the internet and telecommunications technologies to conduct financial transactions, and the increased sophistication and activities of organized crime, hackers, and terrorists, activists, and other external parties. As customer, public, and regulatory expectations regarding operational and information security have increased, our operating systems and infrastructure must continue to be safeguarded and monitored for potential failures, disruptions, and breakdowns. Our business, financial, accounting, and data processing systems, or other operating systems and facilities may stop operating properly or become disabled or damaged as a result of a number of factors, including events that are wholly or partially beyond our control. For example, there could be electrical or telecommunication outages; natural disasters such as earthquakes, tornadoes, and hurricanes; disease pandemics; events arising from local or larger scale political or social matters, including terrorist acts; and as described below, cyber attacks.

35
 

As noted above, our business relies on our digital technologies, computer and email systems, software and networks to conduct its operations. Although we have information security procedures and controls in place, our technologies, systems, networks, and our customers’ devices may become the target of cyber attacks or information security breaches that could result in the unauthorized release, gathering, monitoring, misuse, loss, or destruction of our or our customers’ or other third parties’ confidential information. Third parties with whom we do business or that facilitate our business activities, including financial intermediaries, or vendors that provide service or security solutions for our operations, and other unaffiliated third parties, including the South Carolina Department of Revenue, which had customer records exposed in a 2012 cyber attack, could also be sources of operational and information security risk to us, including from breakdowns or failures of their own systems or capacity constraints.

While we have disaster recovery and other policies and procedures designed to prevent or limit the effect of the failure, interruption or security breach of our information systems, there can be no assurance that any such failures, interruptions or security breaches will not occur or, if they do occur, that they will be adequately addressed. Our risk and exposure to these matters remains heightened because of the evolving nature of these threats. As a result, cyber security and the continued development and enhancement of our controls, processes, and practices designed to protect our systems, computers, software, data, and networks from attack, damage or unauthorized access remain a focus for us. As threats continue to evolve, we may be required to expend additional resources to continue to modify or enhance our protective measures or to investigate and remediate information security vulnerabilities. Disruptions or failures in the physical infrastructure or operating systems that support our businesses and clients, or cyber attacks or security breaches of the networks, systems or devices that our clients use to access our products and services could result in client attrition, regulatory fines, penalties or intervention, reputation damage, reimbursement or other compensation costs, and/or additional compliance costs, any of which could have a material effect on our results of operations or financial condition.

Negative public opinion surrounding our Company and the financial institutions industry generally could damage our reputation and adversely impact our earnings and our ability to make loans or to acquire deposits.

Reputation risk, or the risk to our business, earnings and capital from negative public opinion surrounding our company and the financial institutions industry generally, is inherent in our business. Negative public opinion can result from our actual or alleged conduct in any number of activities, including lending practices, corporate governance and acquisitions, and from actions taken by government regulators and community organizations in response to those activities. Negative public opinion can adversely affect our ability to keep and attract clients and employees and can expose us to litigation and regulatory action. Although we take steps to minimize reputation risk in dealing with our clients and communities, this risk will always be present given the nature of our business.

We are an emerging growth company and we cannot be certain if the reduced disclosure requirements applicable to emerging growth companies will make our common stock less attractive to investors.

We are an emerging growth company. Under the Jumpstart Our Business Startups Act of 2012, or the JOBS Act, emerging growth companies can take advantage of certain exemptions from various reporting requirements that are applicable to other public companies including, without limitation, reduced disclosure obligations regarding executive compensation in our periodic reports and proxy statements, exemptions from the requirements of holding a nonbinding advisory stockholder vote on executive compensation and any golden parachute payments not previously approved, exemption from the requirement of auditor attestation in the assessment of our internal control over financial reporting and exemption from any requirement that may be adopted by the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board regarding mandatory audit firm rotation or a supplement to the auditor’s report providing additional information about our audit and the financial statements (auditor discussion and analysis). As a result of the foregoing, the information that we provide stockholders may be different than what is available with respect to other public companies. We cannot predict if investors will find our common stock less attractive because we will rely on these exemptions. If investors find our common stock less attractive as a result of our status as an emerging growth company, there may be less liquidity for our common stock and our stock price may be more volatile.

We will remain an emerging growth company until the earliest of (i) the end of the fiscal year in which the market value of our common stock that is held by non-affiliates exceeds $700 million as of the end of the second fiscal quarter, (ii) the end of the fiscal year in which we have total annual gross revenues of $1 billion or more during such fiscal year, (iii) the date on which we issue more than $1 billion in non-convertible debt in a three-year period or (iv) the end of the fiscal year following the fifth anniversary of the date of the first sale of our common stock pursuant to an effective registration statement filed under the Securities Act.

36
 

Risks Related to Our Common Stock

Our stock price may be volatile, which could result in losses to our investors and litigation against us.

Several factors could cause our stock price to fluctuate substantially in the future. These factors include but are not limited to: actual or anticipated variations in earnings, changes in analysts’ recommendations or projections, our announcement of developments related to our businesses, operations and stock performance of other companies deemed to be peers, new technology used or services offered by traditional and non-traditional competitors, news reports of trends, irrational exuberance on the part of investors, new federal banking regulations, and other issues related to the financial services industry. Our stock price may fluctuate significantly in the future, and these fluctuations may be unrelated to our performance. General market declines or market volatility in the future, especially in the financial institutions sector, could adversely affect the price of our common stock, and the current market price may not be indicative of future market prices. Stock price volatility may make it more difficult for you to resell your common stock when you want and at prices you find attractive. Moreover, in the past, securities class action lawsuits have been instituted against some companies following periods of volatility in the market price of its securities. We could in the future be the target of similar litigation. Securities litigation could result in substantial costs and divert management’s attention and resources from our normal business.

Future sales of our stock by our stockholders or the perception that those sales could occur may cause our stock price to decline.

Although our common stock is quoted on the OTCQB, the trading volume in our common stock is lower than that of other larger financial services companies. A public trading market having the desired characteristics of depth, liquidity and orderliness depends on the presence in the marketplace of willing buyers and sellers of our common stock at any given time. This presence depends on the individual decisions of investors and general economic and market conditions over which we have no control. Given the relatively low trading volume of our common stock, significant sales of our common stock in the public market, or the perception that those sales may occur, could cause the trading price of our common stock to decline or to be lower than it otherwise might be in the absence of those sales or perceptions.

Economic and other circumstances may require us to raise capital at times or in amounts that are unfavorable to us. If we have to issue shares of common stock, they will dilute the percentage ownership interest of existing stockholders and may dilute the book value per share of our common stock and adversely affect the terms on which we may obtain additional capital.

We may need to incur additional debt or equity financing in the future to make strategic acquisitions or investments or to strengthen our capital position. Our ability to raise additional capital, if needed, will depend on, among other things, conditions in the capital markets at that time, which are outside of our control and our financial performance. We cannot provide assurance that such financing will be available to us on acceptable terms or at all, or if we do raise additional capital that it will not be dilutive to existing stockholders.

If we determine, for any reason, that we need to raise capital, our board generally has the authority, without action by or vote of the stockholders, to issue all or part of any authorized but unissued shares of stock for any corporate purpose, including issuance of equity-based incentives under or outside of our equity compensation plans. Additionally, we are not restricted from issuing additional common stock or preferred stock, including any securities that are convertible into or exchangeable for, or that represent the right to receive, common stock or preferred stock or any substantially similar securities. The market price of our common stock could decline as a result of sales by us of a large number of shares of common stock or preferred stock or similar securities in the market or from the perception that such sales could occur. Any issuance of additional shares of stock will dilute the percentage ownership interest of our stockholders and may dilute the book value per share of our common stock. Shares we issue in connection with any such offering will increase the total number of shares and may dilute the economic and voting ownership interest of our existing stockholders.

Our board of directors may issue shares of preferred stock that would adversely affect the rights of our common stockholders.

37
 

Our authorized capital stock includes 200,000 shares of preferred stock of which no preferred shares are issued and outstanding. Our board of directors, in its sole discretion, may designate and issue one or more series of preferred stock from the authorized and unissued shares of preferred stock. Subject to limitations imposed by law or our certificate of incorporation, our board of directors is empowered to determine:

· the designation of, and the number of, shares constituting each series of preferred stock;
· the dividend rate for each series;
· the terms and conditions of any voting, conversion and exchange rights for each series;
· the amounts payable on each series on redemption or our liquidation, dissolution or winding-up;
· the provisions of any sinking fund for the redemption or purchase of shares of any series; and
· the preferences and the relative rights among the series of preferred stock.

We could issue preferred stock with voting and conversion rights that could adversely affect the voting power of the shares of our common stock and with preferences over the common stock with respect to dividends and in liquidation.

Our securities are not FDIC insured.

Our securities, including our common stock, are not savings or deposit accounts or other obligations of the Bank, are not insured by the Deposit Insurance Fund, the FDIC or any other governmental agency and are subject to investment risk, including the possible loss of principal.

 

38
 

Item 2.  Financial Information

Selected Financial Data

    For The Years Ended December 31,
    2013   2012   2011   2010   2009
Operating Data:   (In thousands)
                     
Interest income   $ 32,948       35,356       38,411       46,842       56,736  
Interest expense     5,718       7,513       11,113       17,077       25,019  
Net interest income     27,230       27,843       27,298       29,765       31,717  
Provision for loan losses     (860 )     2,707       10,735       30,755       10,460  
                                         
Net interest income (loss) after provision for loan losses     28,090       25,136       16,593       (990 )     21,257  
Noninterest income     44,086       53,524       19,721       21,600       27,938  
Noninterest expense     45,972       51,387       37,413       39,070       37,673  
Income (loss) before income taxes     26,204       27,273       (1,099 )     (18,460 )     11,522  
Income tax expense (benefit)     9,386       10,395       (128 )     (5,872 )     4,353  
Net income (loss)   $ 16,818       16,878       (971 )     (12,588 )     7,169  
                                         

 

    At December 31,
    2013   2012   2011   2010   2009
Balance Sheet Data:   (In thousands)
                     
Total assets   $ 881,584       888,724       826,218       930,749       1,078,757  
Interest-bearing cash     34,176       11,340       16,679       21,415       17,759  
Securities available for sale     167,535       148,407       136,944       151,574       104,401  
Securities held to maturity     24,554       9,166       9,401       9,848       125,633  
Federal Home Loan Bank stock     4,103       6,413       7,185       11,129       12,456  
Loans held for sale     36,897       144,849       80,007       82,615       71,233  
Loans receivable, net     535,221       501,691       513,335       583,995       690,163  
Allowance for loan losses     8,091       9,520       12,039       14,263       13,032  
Deposits     697,581       653,247       621,803       689,814       761,108  
Short-term borrowed funds     10,300       82,482       63,484       57,759       43,787  
Long-term debt     74,540       64,840       80,390       123,339       203,638  
Stockholders' equity     82,227       67,514       45,655       46,494       56,138  

39
 

    For The Years Ended December 31,
    2013   2012   2011   2010   2009
    (Dollars in thousands)
Selected Average Balances:                    
                     
Total assets   $ 889,851       837,066       858,432       1,018,130       1,114,132  
Loans receivable, net     509,455       495,889       545,556       640,646       737,448  
Deposits     696,784       641,085       649,002       742,409       767,814  
Stockholders' equity     76,322       54,002       47,003       50,065       51,949  
                                         
Performance Ratios:                                        
                                         
Return on average equity     22.04 %     31.25 %     (2.07 )%     (25.14 )%     13.80 %
Return on average assets     1.89 %     2.02 %     (0.11 )%     (1.24 )%     0.64 %
Average earning assets to average total assets     91.38 %     92.29 %     92.24 %     94.24 %     94.59 %
Average loans receivable, net to average deposits     73.12 %     77.35 %     84.06 %     86.29 %     96.05 %
Average equity to average assets     8.58 %     6.45 %     5.48 %     4.92 %     4.66 %
Net interest margin     3.35 %     3.60 %     3.45 %     3.10 %     3.01 %
Net charge-offs to average loans receivable, net     0.11 %     1.05 %     2.38 %     4.61 %     1.18 %
Non-performing assets to period end loans receivable, net     3.24 %     4.29 %     7.84 %     11.69 %     5.17 %
Non-performing assets to total assets     1.97 %     2.42 %     4.87 %     7.33 %     3.31 %
Non-performing loans to total loans     2.04 %     2.98 %     6.50 %     9.60 %     3.96 %
Allowance for loan losses as a percentage of loans receivable (end of period)     1.49 %     1.86 %     2.29 %     2.38 %     1.85 %
Allowance for loan losses as a percentage of nonperforming loans     73.03 %     62.43 %     35.24 %     24.84 %     46.83 %

 

    At or For The Years Ended December 31,
    2013   2012   2011   2010   2009
Per Share Data:                    
                     
Book value (end of period)   $ 21.38       17.59       11.90       12.12       14.68  
Basic earnings (loss)     4.38       4.40       (0.26 )     (3.29 )     1.88  
Diluted earnings (loss)     4.25       4.40       (0.26 )     (3.29 )     1.86  
                                         
Average common shares - basic     3,841,230       3,837,984       3,837,984       3,826,480       3,824,898  
Average common shares - diluted     3,960,247       3,837,984       3,837,984       3,826,480       3,849,440  

 

Note: Book value is calculated using common shares less unvested restricted shares.

 

On January 15, 2014, the Board of Directors of the Company declared a two-for-one stock split to stockholders of record as of February 10, 2014, payable on February 28, 2014. All share, earnings per share, and per share data have been retroactively adjusted in the consolidated balance sheets, earnings per share, and stockholders’ equity disclosures to reflect the stock split for all periods presented in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles.

 

40
 

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS

OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

The following discussion and analysis of our consolidated financial condition and results of operations should be read in conjunction with our consolidated financial statements and related notes.  Historical results of operations and the percentage relationships among any amounts included, and any trends that may appear, may not indicate trends in operations or results of operations for any future periods.

We have made, and will continue to make, various forward-looking statements with respect to financial and business matters.  Comments regarding our business that are not historical facts are considered forward-looking statements that involve inherent risks and uncertainties.  Actual results may differ materially from those contained in these forward-looking statements.  For additional information regarding our cautionary disclosures, see the “Cautionary Note Regarding Forward-Looking Statements” at the beginning of this registration statement.

Overview

Carolina Financial Corporation is a Delaware corporation and bank holding company that was incorporated in 1996 and began operations in 1997. It operates principally through CresCom Bank, a South Carolina state-chartered bank. Our subsidiaries provide a full range of financial services designed to meet the financial needs of our customers, including:

· Commercial and retail banking;
· Mortgage banking; and
· Cash management.

Through CresCom Bank, the Company currently conducts business through 12 bank branches located in the following counties: Charleston (4), Dorchester (3), Georgetown (1), and Horry (4) in South Carolina. Effective July 31, 2011, Carolina Financial Corporation merged its wholly-owned subsidiary bank, Community FirstBank of Charleston, with and into its other wholly-owned subsidiary bank, Crescent Bank. In conjunction with this internal reorganization, Crescent Bank’s name was changed to CresCom Bank, and Crescent Mortgage Company, formerly a wholly-owned subsidiary of Community FirstBank of Charleston, became a wholly-owned subsidiary of CresCom Bank. Crescent Mortgage Company is located in Atlanta, Georgia, and is qualified to originate loans in 43 states.

At December 31, 2013, we had total assets of $881.6 million, a decrease of $7.1 million, from total assets of $888.7 million at December 31, 2012. The largest components of our total assets are loans receivable and securities which were $535.2 million and $192.1 million, respectively at December 31, 2013. Comparatively, our loans receivable and securities totaled $501.7 million and $157.6 million, respectively, at December 31, 2012. At December 31, 2013 loans held for sale were $36.9 million compared to $144.8 million as of December 31, 2012. Our liabilities and stockholders’ equity at December 31, 2013 totaled $799.4 million and $82.2 million, respectively, compared to liabilities of $821.2 million and stockholders’ equity of $67.5 million at December 31, 2012. The principal components of our liabilities are deposits which were $697.6 and $653.2 million at December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively.

Like most community banks, we derive a significant portion of our income from interest we receive on our loans and investments. Our primary source of funds for making these loans and investments is our deposits, both interest-bearing and noninterest-bearing. Consequently, one of the key measures of our success is our amount of net interest income, or the difference between the income on our interest-earning assets, such as loans and investments, and the expense on our interest-bearing liabilities, such as deposits and borrowed funds. In order to maximize our net interest income, we must not only manage the volume of these balance sheet items, but also the yields that we earn on our interest-earning assets and the rates that we pay on interest-bearing liabilities.

Of course, there are risks inherent in all loans, so we maintain an allowance for loan losses to absorb probable losses on existing loans that may become uncollectible. We establish and maintain this allowance by charging a provision for loan losses against our operating earnings.

In addition to earning interest on our loans and investments, we derive a substantial portion of our income from Crescent Mortgage Company through net gain on sale of loans held for sale as well as servicing income. We also earn income through fees that we charge to our customers. Likewise, we incur other operating expenses as well. We describe the various components of this noninterest income, as well as our noninterest expense, within the “Results of Operations” within the MD&A.

41
 

Economic conditions, competition, and the monetary and fiscal policies of the federal government significantly affect most financial institutions, including the Bank. Lending and deposit activities and fee income generation are influenced by levels of business spending and investment, consumer income, consumer spending and savings, capital market activities, and competition among financial institutions as well as client preferences, interest rate conditions and prevailing market rates on competing products in our market areas.

Critical Accounting Policies

We have adopted various accounting policies that govern the application of accounting principles generally accepted in the United States and with general practices within the banking industry in the preparation of our financial statements. Our significant accounting policies are described in the notes to our consolidated financial statements in this report.

Certain accounting policies involve significant judgments and assumptions by us that have a material impact on the carrying value of certain assets and liabilities. We consider these accounting policies to be critical accounting policies. The judgment and assumptions we use are based on historical experience and other factors, which we believe to be reasonable under the circumstances. Because of the nature of the judgment and assumptions we make, actual results could differ from these judgments and estimates that could have a material impact on the carrying values of our assets and liabilities and our results of operations.

We believe the allowance for loan losses is the critical accounting policy that requires the most significant judgment and estimates used in preparation of our consolidated financial statements. Some of the more critical judgments supporting the amount of our allowance for loan losses include judgments about the credit worthiness of borrowers, the estimated value of the underlying collateral, the assumptions about cash flow, determination of loss factors for estimating credit losses, the impact of current events, and conditions, and other factors impacting the level of probable inherent losses. Under different conditions or using different assumptions, the actual amount of credit losses incurred by us may be different from management's estimates provided in our consolidated financial statements. Refer to the portion of this discussion that addresses our allowance for loan losses for a more complete discussion of our processes and methodology for determining our allowance for loan losses.

The evaluation and recognition of other-than-temporary impairment, or OTTI, on certain investments including our private label mortgage-backed securities and trust preferred securities requires significant judgment and estimates. Some of the more critical judgments supporting the evaluation of OTTI include projected cash flows including prepayment assumptions, default rates and severities of losses on the underlying collateral within the security. Under different conditions or utilizing different assumptions, the actual OTTI realized by us may be different from the actual amounts recognized in our consolidated financial statements. See Note 2 to the financial statements for the disclosure of certain assumptions used as well as OTTI recognized in the financial statements during the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012.

The determination of fair value related to derivatives of the Company requires significant judgment and estimates. The primary uses of derivative instruments are related to the mortgage banking activities of the Company. As such, the Company holds derivative instruments, which consist of rate lock agreements related to expected funding of fixed-rate mortgage loans to customers (“interest rate lock commitments”) and forward commitments to sell mortgage-backed securities and individual fixed-rate mortgage loans (“forward commitments”). The Company’s objective in obtaining the forward commitments is to mitigate the interest rate risk associated with the interest rate lock commitments and the mortgage loans that are held for sale. Derivatives related to these commitments are recorded as either a derivative asset or a derivative liability in the balance sheet and are measured at fair value. Both the interest rate lock commitments and the forward commitments are reported at fair value, with adjustments recorded in current period earnings in net gain on sale of loans held for sale within noninterest income section of the consolidated statements of operations.

Derivative instruments not related to mortgage banking activities, including interest rate swap agreements, that do not satisfy the hedge accounting requirements, are recorded at fair value and changes in fair value are recognized in noninterest income in the consolidated statements of operations.

42
 

For additional discussion related to the determination of fair value related to derivative instruments, See Note 14 to the consolidated financial statements within Item 13 “Financial Statements and Supplementary Data.”

 

The establishment of the mortgage repurchases reserves related to various representations and warranties that reflect management’s estimate of losses require significant judgment and estimates. Some of the more critical factors are incorporated into the estimation of the mortgage repurchase reserve include the defects on internal quality assurance, default expectations, historical investor repurchase demand and appeals success rates, reimbursement by correspondent and other third party originators, and projected loss severity. The Company establishes a reserve at the time loans are sold and continually updates the reserve estimate during the estimated loan life. To the extent that economic conditions and the housing market do not recover or future investor repurchase demand and appeals success rates differ from past experience, the Company could continue to have increased demands and increased loss severities on repurchases, causing future additions to the repurchase reserve. Refer to the “Mortgage Operations” within the MD&A for additional discussion.

 

Recent Accounting Standards and Pronouncements

 

For information relating to recent accounting standards and pronouncements, see Note 1 to our audited consolidated financial statements entitled “Summary of Significant Accounting Policies.”

 

Results of Operations

Summary

Our net income available to common stockholders was approximately $16.8 million for the year ended December 31, 2013, compared to net income of $16.9 million for the year ended December 31, 2012. Below are key highlights of our results of operations during 2013:

· Consolidated net income remained relatively consistent to the prior year with net income of $16.8 million in fiscal 2013 as compared to $16.9 million in fiscal 2012;
· Basic earnings per share decreased .45% to $4.38 in 2013 as compared to $4.40 per share in 2012;
· Book value per common share was $21.38 at the end of 2013, an increase from $17.59 from 2012;
· Return on average assets decreased to 1.89% in 2013 compared with 2.02% in 2012;
· Return on average stockholders’ equity decreased to 22.04% in 2013 compared with 31.25% in 2012; and
· Our average equity to average assets increased to 8.58% at December 31, 2013 compared with 6.45% at December 31, 2012.

Net Interest Income and Margin

Net interest income is a significant component of our net income. Net interest income is the difference between income earned on interest-earning assets and interest paid on deposits and borrowings. Net interest income is determined by the yields earned on interest-earning assets, rates paid on interest-bearing liabilities, the relative balances of interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities, the degree of mismatch, and the maturity and repricing characteristics of interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities.

For the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, our net interest income was $27.2 million and $27.8 million, respectively. The $600,000, or 2.16%, decrease in net interest income during 2013 was related to several factors including a reduction in the average balance of loans held for sale, as well as reduction on rates on loans receivable in the current year with these effects on net interest income offset, by a reduction in rates paid on interest bearing liabilities. The reduction in average balance of loans held for sale relates to the decrease in the level of mortgage originations incurred during the current year as compared to the prior year, particularly in the latter half of 2013. The decrease in loan yield was primarily driven by loans being originated or renewed at market rates which were lower than those in the past due to the overall rate environment and competitive pricing in the market place. The decrease in rates paid on interest-bearing liabilities is based on the continued historically low interest rates that have positively impacted our ability to reduce funding cost in relation to the decline in earning asset yields.

43
 

Interest income for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012 was $32.9 million and $35.4 million, respectively. A significant portion of our interest income relates to our strategy to maintain a significant portion of our assets in higher earning loans compared to lower yielding investments and federal funds sold. As such, 76.0% of our interest income related to interest on loans receivable during 2013 and 74.0% during 2012. Interest income related to loans held for sale was 8.2% and 11.1% of total interest income for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively.

Interest expense was $5.7 million and $7.5 million for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively. Interest expense on deposits for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012 represented 58.4% and 55.6%, respectively, of total interest expense, while interest expense on borrowings represented 41.6% and 44.4%, respectively of total interest expense.

The following table sets forth information related to our average balance sheet, average yields on assets, and average costs of liabilities at December 31, 2013, 2012 and 2011. We derived these yields or costs by dividing income or expense by the average balance of the corresponding assets or liabilities. We derived average balances from the daily balances throughout the periods indicated. During the same periods, we had no securities purchased with agreements to resell. All investments were owned at an original maturity of over one year. Nonaccrual loans are included in earning assets in the following tables. Loan yields have been reduced to reflect the negative impact on our earnings of loans on nonaccrual status. The net of capitalized loan costs and fees, which are considered immaterial, are amortized into interest income on loans.

44
 

    For The Years Ended December 31,
    2013   2012   2011
        Interest   Average       Interest   Average       Interest   Average
    Average   Paid/   Yield/   Average   Paid/   Yield/   Average   Paid/   Yield/
    Balance   Earned   Rate   Balance   Earned   Rate   Balance   Earned   Rate
    (Dollars in thousands)
Interest-earning assets:                                                                        
Loans held for sale   $ 72,975       2,696       3.69 %     106,626       3,914       3.67 %     49,895       2,150       4.31 %
Loans receivable, net (1)     509,455       25,035       4.91 %     495,889       26,160       5.28 %     545,556       29,640       5.43 %
Interest-bearing cash     43,151       107       0.25 %     16,765       41       0.24 %     29,070       52       0.18 %
Securities available for sale     170,061       4,662       2.74 %     136,715       4,870       3.56 %     146,641       6,244       4.26 %
Securities held to maturity     11,428       292       2.56 %     9,361       209       2.23 %     9,624       221       2.30 %
Federal Home Loan Bank stock     4,221       111       2.63 %     5,508       107       1.94 %     9,431       81       0.86 %
Other investments     1,872       45       2.40 %     1,706       55       3.22 %     1,632       53       3.25 %
Total interest-earning assets     813,163       32,948       4.05 %     772,570       35,356       4.58 %     791,849       38,441       4.85 %
Non-earning assets     76,688                       64,496                       66,583                  
                                                                         

 

Total assets

  $ 889,851                       837,066                       858,432                  
                                                                         
Interest-bearing liabilities:                                                                        
Demand accounts     56,405       115       0.20 %     41,361       110       0.27 %     34,129       95       0.28 %
Money market accounts     213,924       857       0.40 %     199,062       1,227       0.62 %     199,528       1,470       0.74 %
Savings accounts     14,387       46       0.32 %     9,468       47       0.50 %     6,725       36       0.54 %
Certificates of deposit     302,999       2,321       0.77 %     306,691       2,794       0.91 %     345,823       4,977       1.44 %
Short-term borrowed funds     22,335       239       1.07 %     42,367       640       1.51 %     43,845       1,045       2.38 %
Long-term debt     75,595       2,140       2.83 %     80,272       2,695       3.36 %     104,963       3,490       3.32 %
Total interest-bearing liabilities     685,645       5,718       0.83 %     679,221       7,513       1.11 %     735,013       11,113       1.51 %
Noninterest-bearing deposits     109,069                       84,503                       62,797                  
Other liabilities     18,815                       19,340                       13,619                  
Stockholders' equity     76,322                       54,002                       47,003                  
                                                                         
Total liabilities and  Stockholders' equity   $ 889,851                       837,066                       858,432                  
                                                                         
Net interest spread                     3.22 %                     3.47 %                     3.34 %
Net interest margin     3.35 %                     3.60 %                     3.45 %                
                                                                         
Net interest margin (tax equivalent) (2)     3.41 %                     3.61 %                     3.45 %                
Net interest income             27,230                       27,843                       27,328          

(1) Average balances of loans include nonaccrual loans.

(2) The tax equivalent net interest margin reflects tax-exempt income on a tax-equivalent basis.

 

Our net interest margin was 3.35%, and 3.41% on a tax equivalent basis, for the twelve months ended December 31, 2013 compared to 3.60%, and 3.61% on a tax equivalent basis, for 2012. The 25 basis point decrease in net interest margin during 2013 as compared to the prior year was driven primarily by a 53 basis point reduction in the yield on interest-earning assets offset by the 28 basis point decrease in interest bearing liabilities.

While our average interest-earning assets increased by $40.6 million during 2013, our interest income declined by $2.4 million, or 53 basis points on yield. As previously stated, the decline in interest income is primarly related to a decline in yield on loans receivable and a decline in average balance on loans held for sale. The overall average loans receivable balances increased by $13.6 million during the year ended December 31, 2013, compared to 2012, while our loan yield decreased by 37 basis points. The decrease in loan yield was driven primarily by loans being originated or renewed at market rates which are lower than those in the past. The average balance of loans held for sale declinded by $33.7 million and is a result of the decreased volume of loans originated and subsequently sold during the current year. Total originations for 2013 fell 30.4% to $1.6 billion from $2.3 billion during 2012.

45
 

Our interest expense also decreased during 2013 as compared to the year ended 2012 due to lower rates on our interest-bearing liabilities. While our interest expense decreased by $1.8 million during 2013, our average interest-bearing liabilities increased by $6.4 million, and the rate on these liabilities decreased by 28 basis points. We have also grown our average balance of nonintereest-bearing deposits to $109.1 million as compared to $84.5 million in the prior year. Continued historically low interest rates have positively impacted our ability to reduce funding costs. As a result, we continued to control the growth of our balance sheet and increased our funding from lower cost sources (noninterest bearing transaction accounts, interest-bearing transaction accounts, money market accounts and savings accounts).

Our net interest spread was 3.22% for the year ended December 31, 2013 as compared to 3.47% for the same period in 2012. The net interest spread is the difference between the yield we earn on our interest-earning assets and the rate we pay on our interest-bearing liabilities. The 28 basis point reduction in rate on our interest-bearing liabilities, partially offset by a 53 basis point decline in yield on our earning assets, resulted in a 25 basis point decrease in our net interest spread for the 2013 period.

Rate/Volume Analysis

Net interest income can be analyzed in terms of the impact of changing interest rates and changing volume. The following tables set forth the effect which the varying levels of interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities and the applicable rates have had on changes in net interest income for the periods presented.

    For The Years Ended December 31,
    2013 vs. 2012   2012 vs. 2011
    Increase (decrease)       Net   Increase (decrease)       Net
    due to   Rate/   Dollar   due to   Rate/   Dollar
    Volume   Rate   Volume   Change   Volume   Rate   Volume   Change
    (In thousands)
Loans held for sale   $ (1,235 )     25       (8 )     (1,218 )     2,446       (319 )     (363 )     1,764  
Loans receivable, net     716       (1,792 )     (49 )     (1,125 )     (2,737 )     (818 )     75       (3,480 )
Interest-bearing cash     65       1       —         66       (21 )     17       (7 )     (11 )
Securities available for sale     1,188       (1,122 )     (274 )     (208 )     (420 )     (1,020 )     66       (1,374 )
Securities held to maturity     46       30       7       83       (6 )     (6 )     —         (12 )
FHLB stock     (25 )     38       (9 )     4       (34 )     102       (42 )     26  
Other investments     5       (14 )     (1 )     (10 )     —         —         2       2  
Interest income     760       (2,834 )     (334 )     (2,408 )     (772 )     (2,044 )     (269 )     (3,085 )
                                                                 
Demand accounts     40       (26 )     (9 )     5       20       (4 )     (1 )     15  
Money market accounts     92       (430 )     (32 )     (370 )     (3 )     (241 )     1       (243 )
Savings accounts     24       (17 )     (8 )     (1 )     15       (3 )     (1 )     11  
Certificates of deposit     (34 )     (445 )     6       (473 )     (564 )     (1,826 )     207       (2,183 )
Short-term borrowed funds     (303 )     (187 )     89       (401 )     (35 )     (383 )     13       (405 )
Long-term debt     (125 )     (451 )     21       (555 )     (827 )     42       (10 )     (795 )
Interest expense   $ (306 )     (1,556 )     67       (1,795 )     (1,394 )     (2,415 )     209       (3,600 )
Net interest income                             (613 )                             515  

 

46
 

Provision for Loan Loss

We have established an allowance for loan losses through a provision for loan losses charged as an expense on our statements of operations. We review our loan portfolio periodically to evaluate our outstanding loans and to measure both the performance of the portfolio and the adequacy of the allowance for loan losses. Please see the discussion below under “Allowance for Loan Losses” for a description of the factors we consider in determining the amount of the provision we expense each period to maintain this allowance.

 

Following is a summary of the activity in the allowance for loan losses during the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012.

 

    For the Years
    Ended December 31,
    2013   2012
    (Dollars in thousands)
Balance, beginning of period   $ 9,520       12,039  
Provision for loan losses     (860 )     2,707  
Loan charge-offs     (1,675 )     (7,190 )
Loan recoveries     1,106       1,964  
Balance, end of period   $ 8,091       9,520  

 

For the year ended December 31, 2013, we incurred a negative provision for loan losses of $860,000, reducing the overall allowance for loan losses to $8.1 million, or 1.49% of gross loans, as of December 31, 2013. In comparison, we added $2.7 million to the provision for loan losses during the year ended December 31, 2012 resulting in an allowance of $9.5 million, which represented 1.86% of gross loans at December 31, 2012. The negative provision was primarily related to the removal of a specific allocation on an impaired loan relationship as well as the overall improvement in the credit quality of our loan portfolio and continued reduction in net charge offs during 2013. For further discussion, see the “Allowance for Loan Losses” discussion below.

During the twelve months ended December 31, 2013, our net charge-offs were $570,000, representing .11% of average loans, and consisted of $ 1.7 million in loans charged-off and $1.1 million of recoveries on loans previously charged-off. In addition, our loan balances increased by $32.1 million, while the amount of our nonperforming loans declined $4.1 million to $11.1 million as December 31, 2013 as compared to $15.2 million amount at December 31, 2012. Factors such as these are also considered in determining the amount of loan loss provision necessary to maintain our allowance for loan losses at an adequate level.

We reported net charge-offs of $5.2 million for the year ended December 31, 2012, including $7.2 million in gross charge offs and $2.0 million in recoveries. The net charge-offs of $5.2 million during 2012 represented 1.05% of the average outstanding loan portfolio for fiscal 2012.

47
 

Noninterest Income and Expense

Noninterest income provides us with additional revenues that are significant sources of income. In 2013 and 2012, noninterest income comprised of 57.2% and 60.2%, respectively, of total interest and noninterest income. The major components of noninterest income for the Company are listed below:

    For the Years
    Ended December 31,
    2013   2012
    (In thousands)
Noninterest income:                
Net gain on sale of loans held for sale   $ 29,914       52,763  
Deposit service charges     1,558       1,604  
Net loss on extinguishment of debt     (19 )     (1,591 )
Net loss on sale of securities     (1,125 )     (3,031 )
Other-than-temporary impairment of securities     —         (913 )
Net unrealized gain on derivatives - interest rate swap     428       —    
Net gain on sale of servicing assets     5,489       —    
Net increase in cash value life insurance     374       2  
Mortgage loan servicing income     6,583       4,085  
Other     884       605  
Total noninterest income   $ 44,086       53,524  

Noninterest income was $44.1 and $53.5 million for the period end December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively. The primary cause of the decrease in noninterest income from the prior year to the current year relates to the gain on sale of loans sold from our mortgage banking subsidiary. During the third quarter of 2013, mortgage interest rates began to rise and, as a result, mortgage loan production began to slow down. Rising interest rates significantly slowed the mortgage refinance activity.  As the overall mortgage originations volumes declined, there was a corresponding reduction in margins earned due to competitive pressures. Originations of loans held for sale for the Company decreased to $1.6 billion in 2013 from $2.3 billion in 2012. This represents a 30.4% decrease in originations year over year. We believe, on an industry wide basis, that mortgage origination volume, including refinance activity, will continue to decrease in the foreseeable future. As interest rates increased during the current year, there was significant improvement in the valuation of mortgage servicing rights which led to the Company selling $972.9 million of unpaid principal balance for a net gain of $5.5 million. The increase in mortgage loan servicing income relates to the increase in the average balance of loans serviced during 2013 as compared to 2012.

Deposit service charges were $1.5 and $1.6 million for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively, a decrease of 6.3%. Net increase in cash value of life insurance was $374,000, and $2,000 for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively. The $372,000 increase in cash surrender value relates to the increase of $20.1 million in cash value life insurance. During 2013, the Company purchased/invested Bank Owned Life Insurance policies on certain employees with an initial cash surrender value of $20 million through two insurance carriers. The balance of cash value of life insurance was $20.9 million and $800,000 at December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively.

48
 

The following table sets forth for the periods indicated the primary components of noninterest expense:

    For the Years
    Ended December 31,
    2013   2012
    (In thousands)
Noninterest expense:                
Salaries and employee benefits   $ 23,590       25,632  
Occupancy and equipment     3,450       3,274  
Marketing and public relations     1,088       1,360  
FDIC insurance     588       1,076  
Provision for mortgage loan repurchase losses     2,438       2,189  
Legal expense     926       1,768  
Other real estate expense, net     622       1,873  
Mortgage subservicing expense     1,862       1,249  
Amortization of mortgage servicing rights     2,444       1,464  
Settlement of employment agreements     2,639       227  
Other     6,325       11,275  
Total noninterest expense   $ 45,972       51,387  

 

Noninterest expense represents the largest expense category for our company. During 2013, we continued to emphasize carefully controlling our noninterest expense. Salaries and employee benefits decreased $2.0 million to $23.6 million during 2013 as compared to $25.6 million during 2012. The primary cause for the decrease in salaries and benefits relates to the reduced mortgage loan production in the current year and the related commissions and bonuses paid within the wholesale mortgage subsidiary. Occupancy and equipment expense increased $200,000 to $3.5 million from $3.3 million during the current year and was primarily attributable to the new branch established during the current year. Marketing and public relations expense decreased $300,000 to $1.1 million. FDIC insurance premiums decreased from $1.1 million to $600,000 during 2013 which resulted from a decrease in the premiums charged from the FDIC. Provision for mortgage loan repurchase losses increased $200,000 as the industry continues to experience increased buyback requests, increased regulatory complexity and from potential exposure to buy back risk related to fiscal 2013 production sold. Legal expense declined from $1.8 million for 2012 to $900,000 for 2013 and is a direct result of the continued improvement in the nonperforming assets of the Company. Other real estate expense declined $1.3 million in relation to the Company’s improved nonperforming assets. Subservicing expense and amortization increased from the prior year due to an increase in mortgage loan servicing retained during the year. During 2012, the Company had disputes over employment agreements with two former executive officers. During 2012 the discovery phases of the disputes were in progress. As of December 31, 2012, management determined that there was not sufficient information available at the time to make an evaluation as to the likelihood of an unfavorable outcome related to these claims or to estimate the amount of the potential loss, if any. As such, no amounts were accrued for these claims as of December 31, 2012. During 2013, the Company continued its due diligence process and participated in arbitration. As a result, the Company decided to settle the disputed employment agreements. Expense incurred related to the settlement of these disputed employment agreements totaled $2.6 million and $227,000 for the periods ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively. All amounts related to the settlement of these agreements have been expensed as of December 31, 2013. In 2012, the Company incurred a $4.0 million loss related to a kiting scheme by a former customer. This loss was recorded in other noninterest income expense.

 

Income Tax Expense

 

Our effective tax rate decreased to 35.8% for the year ended December 31, 2013, compared to 38.1% for the year ended December 31, 2012. The lower effective tax rate in 2013 is primarily attributable to the increase in balances of tax exempt municipal securities as well as the increase in average balances of bank owned life insurance.

 

49
 

Balance Sheet Review

Investment Securities

Our primary objective in managing the investment portfolio is to maintain a portfolio of high quality, highly liquid investments yielding competitive returns. We are required under federal regulations to maintain adequate liquidity to ensure safe and sound operations. We maintain investment balances based on a continuing assessment of cash flows, the level of current and expected loan production, current interest rate risk strategies and the assessment of the potential future direction of market interest rate changes. Investment securities differ in terms of default, interest rate, liquidity and expected rate of return risk.

At December 31, 2013, the $192.1 million in our investment securities portfolio, excluding FHLB stock and other investments, represented approximately 21.8% of our assets. Our available-for-sale investment portfolio included US agency securities, municipal securities, and mortgage-backed securities (agency and non-agency) with a fair value of $167.5 million and an amortized cost of $167.0 million for an unrealized gain of $500,000. Our held-to-maturity portfolio included municipal securities and asset backed securities, made up of pooled trust preferred securities, with a fair value of $23.5 million and a cost of $24.6 million for an unrealized loss of $1.1 million.

The pooled trust preferred securities within the held-to-maturity portfolio consisted of positions in seven different securities with the underlying issuers in the pools were primarily financial institutions and to a lesser extent, insurance companies and real estate investment trusts. The Company owns both senior and mezzanine tranches in pooled trust preferred securities; however, the Company does not own any income notes. The senior and mezzanine tranches of trust preferred collateralized debt obligations generally have some protection from defaults in the form of over-collateralization and excess spread revenues, along with waterfall structures that redirect cash flows in the event certain coverage test requirements are failed. Generally, senior tranches have the greatest protection, with mezzanine tranches subordinated to the senior tranches, and income notes subordinated to the mezzanine tranches. All of the securities in the mezzanine tranches are still subordinate to senior tranches as the senior notes have not been paid to a zero balance. The amortized cost of pooled trust preferred securities were $9.1 million and $9.2 million as of December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively.

As of December 31, 2013, $1.3 million of the pooled trust preferred securities were investment grade, $1.0 million were split-rated, and $6.8 million were below investment grade. As of December 31, 2012, $2.0 million of the pooled trust preferred securities were investment grade, $1.0 million were split-rated, and the remaining $6.2 million were below investment grade. In terms of risk based capital calculation, the Company allocates additional risk-based capital to the below investment grade securities

As securities are purchased, they are designated as held-to-maturity or available-for-sale based upon our intent, which incorporates liquidity needs, interest rate expectations, asset/liability management strategies, and capital requirements. We do not currently hold, nor have we ever held, any securities that are designated as trading securities.

The following table summarizes issuer concentrations of agency mortgage-backed securities for which aggregate fair values exceed 10% of stockholders’ equity at December 31, 2013:

        Fair Value
    Aggregate   Aggregate   as a % of
Issuer   Amortized
Cost
  Fair
Value
  Stockholders' Equity
    (Dollars in thousands)    
GNMA   $ 10,914       11,360       13.82 %
FNMA     31,354       31,906       38.80 %
FHLMC     26,545       26,663       32.43 %
    $ 68,813       69,929       85.04 %

50
 

The amortized costs and the fair value of our investments are as follows:

    At December 31,
    2013   2012   2011
    Amortized   Fair   Amortized   Fair   Amortized   Fair
    Cost   Value   Cost   Value   Cost   Value
Securities available-for-sale:   (In thousands)
Municipal securities   $ 39,790       38,499       17,630       17,769       1,118       1,137  
US government agencies     5,199       5,175       —         —         —         —    
Mortgage-backed securities:                                                
Agency     68,813       69,929       76,775       79,209       59,303       62,191  
Non-agency     53,195       53,932       50,106       51,429       78,674       72,399  
Total mortgage-backed securities     122,008       123,861       126,881       130,638       137,977       134,590  
Total securities available-for-sale   $ 166,997       167,535       144,511       148,407       139,095       135,727  
                                                 
Securities held-to-maturity:                                                
Municipal securities   $ 15,488       15,177       —         —         —         —    
Asset-backed securities (TRUPS)     9,066       8,370       9,166       5,549       9,401       2,773  
Total securities held-to- maturity   $ 24,554       23,547       9,166       5,549       9,401       2,773  

The Company use prices from third party pricing services and, to a lesser extent, indicative (nonbinding) quotes from third party brokers, to estimate the fair value of our investment securities. While we obtain fair value information from multiple sources, we generally obtain one price / quote for each individual security. For securities priced by third party pricing services, we determine the most appropriate and relevant pricing service for each security class and have that vendor provide the price for each security in the class. We record the value provided by the third party pricing service / broker in our Consolidated Financial Statements, subject to our internal price verification procedures, which include periodic comparisons to other brokers and Bloomberg pricing screens.

Contractual maturities and yields on our investments are shown in the following table. Expected maturities may differ from contractual maturities because issuers may have the right to call or prepay obligations with or without call or prepayment penalties. Securities available-for-sale are presented at fair value and held-to-maturity securities are presented at amortized cost.

51
 

    At December 31, 2013
    Less than 12 Months   One to Five Years   Five to Ten Years   Over Ten Years   Total
    Amount   Yield   Amount   Yield   Amount   Yield   Amount   Yield   Amount   Yield
    (Dollars in thousands)
Securities available-for-sale:                                                                        
Municipal securities   $ —         —         —         —         5,822       1.89 %     32,677       3.19 %     38,499       3.00 %
US government agencies     —         —         —         —         5,175       3.21 %     —         —         5,175       3.21 %
Mortgage-backed securities:                                                                                
Agency     —         —         —         —         1,747       4.22 %     68,182       4.00 %     69,929       3.71 %
Non-agency     —         —         —         —         1,491       5.02 %     52,441       3.81 %     53,932       3.84 %
Total mortgage-backed securities     —         —         —         —         3,238       4.59 %     120,623       3.74 %     123,861       3.77 %
Total securities available-for-sale   $ —         —         —         —         14,235       2.98 %     153,300       3.63 %     167,535       3.57 %
                                                                                 
Securities held-to-maturity:                                                                                
Municipal securities   $ —         —         —         —         3,563       1.72 %     11,925       3.62 %     15,488       3.19 %
Asset-backed securities     —         —         989       1.85 %     —         —         8,077       0.92 %     9,066       1.02 %
Total securities held-to- maturity   $ —         —         989       1.85 %     3,563       1.72 %     20,002       2.53 %     24,554       2.39 %

 

At December 31, 2013, the Company had 58 available-for-sale individual investments that were in an unrealized loss position. The unrealized losses were primarily attributable to changes in interest rates, rather than deterioration in credit quality. The Company considers the length of time and extent to which the fair value of available-for-sale debt securities have been less than cost to conclude that such securities were not other-than-temporarily impaired. We also consider other factors such as the financial condition of the issuer including credit ratings and specific events affecting the operations of the issuer, volatility of the security, underlying assets that collateralize the debt security, and other industry and macroeconomic conditions. As the Company has no intent to sell securities with unrealized losses and it is more-likely-than-not that the Company will not be required to sell these securities before recovery of amortized cost, we have concluded that the securities are not impaired on an other-than-temporary basis.

 

At December 31, 2013, the Company had four trust preferred securities within the held-to-maturity portfolio that were in an unrealized loss position. The asset-backed securities portfolio is collateralized with trust preferred securities issued by other financial institutions in pooled issuances.

 

To determine the fair value, a third-party pricing service is utilized by the Company for the trust preferred securities. Impairment testing is performed on a quarterly basis using a detailed cash flow analysis for each security. The major assumptions used during the impairment test are described in the subsequent paragraph.

 

In 2009, the Company adopted a four year “burst” scenario for its modeled default rates (2010 - 2013) that replicated the default rates for the banking industry from the four peak years of the Savings and Loan crisis, which then reduced to 0.25% annually. 2013 was the last year of the elevated default rate. The constant default rate used by the Company is now 0.25% annually. All issuers that were currently in deferral were presumed to be in default. Additionally, all defaults are assumed to have a 15% recovery after two years and 1% of the pool is presumed to prepay annually. If this analysis results in a present value of expected cash flows that is less than the book value of a security (that is, a credit loss exists), an OTTI is considered to have occurred. If there is no credit loss, any impairment is considered temporary. The cash flow analysis we performed used discount rates equal to the credit spread at the time of purchase for each security and then added the current 3-month LIBOR forward interest rate curve.

 

During 2012, the Company recorded OTTI expense of $625,000 related to 4 non-agency mortgage-backed securities that were classified as available-for-sale during fiscal 2012. These 4 securities available-for-sale were subsequently sold during fiscal 2012. In addition, OTTI expense totaling $288,000 was recorded related to 2 trust preferred securities that were classified as held-to-maturity securities during fiscal 2012. There was no OTTI recognized for 2013. See Footnote 2 for additional discussion of OTTI as well as a presentation of the cumulative OTTI from period to period.

 

52
 

Management believes that there are no additional securities other-than-temporarily impaired at December 31, 2013. The Company does not intend to sell these securities and it is more likely than not that the Company will not be required to sell these securities before recovery of their amortized cost. Management continues to monitor these securities with a high degree of scrutiny. There can be no assurance that the Company will not conclude in future periods that conditions existing at that time indicate some or all of the securities may be sold or are other-than-temporarily impaired, which would require a charge to earnings in such periods. For additional detail regarding securities, see Footnote 2 to the consolidated financial statements.

 

Non-marketable investments are comprised of the following and are recorded at cost which approximates fair value since no readily available market exists for these securities.

 

    At December 31,
    2013   2012
    (In thousands)
Community Reinvestment Act fund   $ 1,218       1,263  
SBIC Investments     175       —    
Investment in Trust Preferred subsidiaries     465       465  
Total other investments     1,858       1,728  
                 
Federal Home Loan Bank stock     4,103       6,413  
Non-marketable investments   $ 5,961       8,141  

 

Loans by Type

Since loans typically provide higher interest yields than other types of interest-earning assets, a substantial percentage of our earning assets are invested in our loan portfolio. Before allowance for loan losses, loans outstanding at December 31, 2013 and 2012 were $543.3 million and $511.2 million, respectively.

Our loan portfolio consists primarily of loans secured by real estate mortgages. As of December 31, 2013, our loan portfolio included $515.1 million, or 94.8%, of loans secured by real estate. As of December 31, 2012, loans secured by real estate made up 93.2% of our loan portfolio and totaled $476.7 million. Most of our real estate loans are secured by residential or commercial property. We obtain a security interest in real estate, in addition to any other available collateral. This collateral is taken to increase the likelihood of the ultimate repayment of the loan. Generally, we limit the loan-to-value ratio on loans to coincide with the appropriate regulatory guidelines. We attempt to maintain a relatively diversified loan portfolio to help reduce the risk inherent in concentration in certain types of collateral and business types.

As shown in the table below, one-to-four family increased $37.9 million to $184.2 as of December 31, 2013 as compared with $146.3 as of December 31, 2012. The increase in this loan category primarily relates to the Company purchasing high quality mortgage loans with low loan-to-value ratios at origination from its mortgage subsidiary. In addition, the Bank retained certain high quality, low loan-to-value loans from its retail mortgage operations.

53
 

The following table summarizes loans by type and percent of total at the end of the periods indicated:

    At December 31,
    2013   2012   2011
        % of Total       % of Total       % of Total
    Amount   Loans   Amount   Loans   Amount   Loans
    (Dollars in thousands)
Loans secured by real estate:                                                
One-to-four family   $ 184,210       32.60 %     146,333       27.66 %     124,604       23.10 %
Home equity     23,661       4.19 %     31,278       5.91 %     35,173       6.52 %
Commercial real estate     253,035       44.79 %     240,764       45.52 %     250,560       46.46 %
Construction and development     67,056       11.87 %     68,113       12.88 %     75,985       14.09 %
Consumer loans     3,060       0.54 %     3,762       0.71 %     5,085       0.94 %
Commercial business loans     33,938       6.01 %     38,714       7.32 %     47,933       8.89 %
Total gross loans receivable     564,960       100.00 %     528,964       100.00 %     539,340       100.00 %
Less:                                                
Undisbursed loans in process     21,550               17,690               13,898          
Allowance for loan losses     8,091               9,520               12,039          
Deferred fees, net     98               63               68          
Total loans receivable, net   $ 535,221               501,691               513,335          

 

    At December 31,
    2010   2009
        % of Total       % of Total
    Amount   Loans   Amount   Loans
    (Dollars in thousands)
Loans secured by real estate:                                
One-to-four family   $ 138,482       22.39 %     165,054       22.71 %
Home equity     38,798       6.28 %     50,891       7.00 %
Commercial real estate     276,199       44.67 %     296,330       40.77 %
Construction and development     102,195       16.53 %     146,736       20.19 %
Consumer loans     6,225       1.01 %     8,455       1.16 %
Commercial business loans     56,362       9.12 %     59,417       8.17 %
Total gross loans receivable     618,261       100.00 %     726,883       100.00 %
Less:                                
Undisbursed loans in process     19,708               23,230          
Allowance for loan losses     14,263               13,032          
Deferred fees, net     295               458          
Total loans receivable, net   $ 583,995               690,163          

 

Maturities and Sensitivity of Loans to Changes in Interest Rates

The information in the following table is based on the contractual maturities of individual loans, including loans which may be subject to renewal at their contractual maturity. Renewal of such loans is subject to review and credit approval, as well as modification of terms upon maturity. Actual repayments of loans may differ from the maturities reflected below because borrowers have the right to prepay obligations with or without prepayment penalties.

 

54
 

The following table summarizes the loan maturity distribution by type and related interest rate characteristics.

    At December 31, 2013
        After one        
    One Year   but within   After five    
    or Less   five years   years   Total
    (In thousands)
Loans secured by real estate:                                
One-to-four family   $ 11,916       47,641       124,653       184,210  
Home equity     2,888       16,705       4,068       23,661  
Commercial real estate     33,915       191,500       27,620       253,035  
Construction and development     25,524       41,436       96       67,056  
Consumer loans     1,075       1,704       281       3,060  
Commercial business loans     15,714       15,770       2,454       33,938  
Total gross loans receivable     91,032       314,756       159,172       564,960  
Less:                                
Undisbursed loans in process     14,434       6,395       721       21,550  
Deferred fees, net     89       515       (506 )     98  
Total loans receivable   $ 76,509       307,846       158,957       543,312  
                                 
Loans maturing - after one year                                
Variable rate loans                           $ 187,376  
Fixed rate loans                             279,427  
                            $ 466,803  

 

Nonperforming and Problem Assets

Nonperforming assets include loans on which interest is not being accrued, accruing loans that are 90 days or more delinquent and foreclosed property. Foreclosed property consists of real estate and other assets acquired as a result of a borrower’s loan default. Generally, a loan is placed on nonaccrual status when it becomes 90 days past due as to principal or interest, or when we believe, after considering economic and business conditions and collection efforts, that the borrower’s financial condition is such that collection of the loan is doubtful. A payment of interest on a loan that is classified as nonaccrual is recognized as a reduction of principal when received. In general, a nonaccrual loan may be placed back onto accruing status once the borrower has made a minimum of six consecutive payments in accordance with the loan terms. Further, the borrower must show capacity to continue performing into the future prior to restoration of accrual status. As of December 31, 2013 and 2012, we had no loans 90 days past due and still accruing.

Troubled Debt Restructurings (“TDRs”)

The Company designates loan modifications as TDRs when, for economic or legal reasons related to the borrower’s financial difficulties, it grants a concession to the borrower that it would not otherwise consider. Loans on nonaccrual status at the date of modification are initially classified as nonaccrual TDRs. Loans on accruing status at the date of modification are initially classified as accruing TDRs at the date of modification, if the note is reasonably assured of repayment and performance is in accordance with its modified terms. Such loans may be designated as nonaccrual loans subsequent to the modification date if reasonable doubt exists as to the collection of interest or principal under the restructuring agreement. Nonaccrual TDRs are returned to accrual status when there is economic substance to the restructuring, there is well documented credit evaluation of the borrower’s financial condition, the remaining balance is reasonably assured of repayment in accordance with its modified terms, and the borrower has demonstrated repayment performance in accordance with the modified terms for a reasonable period of time, generally a minimum of six months.

 

55
 

The following table summarizes non-performing and problem assets at the end of the periods indicated.

 

    At December 31,
    2013   2012   2011   2010   2009
    (In thousands)
Loans receivable:                                        
Nonaccrual loans-renegotiated loans   $ 7,641       10,733       18,704       34,829       3,505  
Nonaccrual loans-other     3,438       4,515       11,227       22,552       23,554  
Accruing loans 90 days or more delinquent     —         —         4,231       48       771  
Real estate acquired through foreclosure, net     6,273       6,284       6,097       10,816       7,853  
Total Non-Performing Assets   $ 17,352       21,532       40,259       68,245       35,683  
                                         
Problem Assets not included in Non-Performing Assets-Accruing renegotiated loans outstanding   $ 16,367       17,195       23,421       16,344       5,269  

 

At December 31, 2013, nonperforming assets were $17.4 million, or 2.0% of total assets and 3.2% of gross loans. Comparatively, nonperforming assets were $21.5 million, or 2.4% of total assets and 4.2% of gross loans at December 31, 2012. Nonaccrual loans decreased $4.1 million to $11.1 million at December 31, 2013 from $15.2 million at December 31, 2012.

Potential problem loans, which are not included in nonperforming loans, amounted to approximately $12.0 million, or 2.2% of total loans outstanding at December 31, 2013, compared to $18.1 million, or 3.5% of total loans outstanding at December 31, 2012. Potential problem loans represent those loans with a well-defined weakness and where information about possible credit problems of borrowers has caused management to have serious doubts about the borrower's ability to comply with present repayment terms.

Substantially all of the nonaccrual loans, accruing loans 90 days or more delinquent and accruing renegotiated loans for fiscal 2013 and 2012 are collateralized by real estate. The Bank utilizes third party appraisers to determine the fair value of collateral dependent loans. Our current loan and appraisal policies require the Bank to obtain updated appraisals on an annual basis, either through a new external appraisal or an internal appraisal evaluation. Impaired loans are individually reviewed on a quarterly basis to determine the level of impairment. We typically charge-off a portion or create a specific reserve for impaired loans when we do not expect repayment to occur as agreed upon under the original terms of the loan agreement. Management believes based on information known and available currently, the probable losses related to problem assets are adequately reserved in the allowance for loan losses.

Although nonperforming assets remain at an elevated level, credit quality indicators generally showed improvement during 2013 as the Company experienced reduced loan migrations to nonaccrual status, lower loss severity on individual problem assets and a significant reduction in nonperforming assets through December 31, 2013. The Company believes this general trend in reduced loans migrating into nonaccrual status is an indication of improving credit quality in the Company’s overall loan portfolio and a leading indicator of reduced credit losses going forward. Nevertheless, the Company can make no assurances that nonperforming assets will continue to improve in future periods. The Company continues to monitor the loan portfolio and foreclosed assets very carefully and is continually working to reduce its problem assets.

Allowance for Loan Losses

The allowance for loan losses is management’s estimate of probable credit losses inherent in the loan portfolio at the balance sheet date. Management determines the allowance based on an ongoing evaluation. Estimating the amount of the allowance for loan losses requires significant judgment and the use of estimates related to the amount and timing of expected future cash flows on impaired loans, estimated losses on non-impaired loans based on historical loss experience, and consideration of current economic trends and conditions, all of which may be susceptible to significant change. The allowance consists of specific and general components.

56
 

The general component covers nonimpaired loans and is based on historical loss experience adjusted for current factors. The historical loss experience is determined by major loan category and is based on the actual loss history trends for the previous twelve quarters. The actual loss experience is supplemented with internal and external qualitative factors as considered necessary at each period and given the facts at the time. These qualitative factors adjust the twelve quarter historical loss rate to recognize the most recent loss results and changes in the economic conditions to ensure the estimated losses in the portfolio are recognized in the period incurred and that the allowance at each balance sheet date is adequate and appropriate in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. Qualitative factors include consideration of the following: levels of and trends in delinquencies and impaired loans; levels of and trends in charge-offs and recoveries for the most recent twelve quarters; trends in volume and terms of loans; effects of any changes in risk selection and underwriting standards; other changes in lending policies, procedures, and practices; experience, ability, and depth of lending management and other relevant staff; national and local economic trends and conditions; industry conditions; and effects of changes in credit concentrations.

The specific component relates to loans that are individually classified as impaired when, based on current information and events, it is probable that the Company will be unable to collect all amounts due according to the contractual terms of the loan agreement. These analyses involve a high degree of judgment in estimating the amount of loss associated with specific loans, including estimating the amount and timing of future cash flows and collateral values. Impaired loans are evaluated for impairment using the discounted cash flow methodology or based on the net realizable value of the underlying collateral. Impaired loans are individually reviewed on a quarterly basis to determine the level of impairment. See additional discussion in section “Nonperforming and Problem Assets” of the MD&A.

While management uses the best information available to establish the allowance for loan losses, future adjustments to the allowance may be necessary if economic conditions differ substantially from the assumptions used in making the valuations or, if required by regulators, based upon information available to them at the time of their examinations. Such adjustments to original estimates, as necessary, are made in the period in which these factors and other relevant considerations indicate that loss levels may vary from previous estimates. To the extent actual outcomes differ from management’s estimates, additional provisions for loan losses could be required that could adversely affect the Bank’s earnings or financial position in future periods.

At December 31, 2013 and 2012, the allowance for loan losses was $8.1 million and $9.5 million, respectively, or 1.49% and 1.86% of outstanding loans, respectively. The allowance for loan losses as a percentage of our outstanding loan portfolio decreased primarily as a result of the overall improvement in the credit quality of our loan portfolio during 2013. Furthermore a negative provision of $860,000 was recorded primarily related to the removal of a specific reserve on an impaired loan relationship. The specific reserve was removed during the quarterly impairment analysis performed where it was determined that the net realizable value of the collateral was greater than the amortized cost of the loan. Management determined the reserve previously placed against this loan relationship should be reversed through a negative provision. During the year ended December 31, 2013, our net charged-off loans decreased $4.6 million to $569,000 as compared to net charge offs of $5.2 million during December 31, 2012. In conjunction with the reduced net charge offs experienced during the current year, our total nonaccrual loans decreased $4.1 million to $11.1 million at December 31, 2013 from $15.2 million at December 31, 2012. See Note 4 to the Consolidated Financial Statements for more information on our allowance for loan losses.

 

57
 

The following table summarizes the activity related to our allowance for loan losses for the five years ended December 31, 2013.

 

    For the Years Ended December 31,
    2013   2012   2011   2010   2009
    (Dollars in thousands)
Balance, beginning of period   $ 9,520       12,039       14,263       13,032       11,300  
Provision for loan losses     (860 )     2,707       10,735       30,755       10,460  
Loan charge-offs:                                        
Loans secured by real estate:                                        
One-to-four family     (168 )     (2,680 )     (3,837 )     (8,602 )     (1,448 )
Home equity     (28 )     (319 )     (211 )     (873 )     (1,039 )
Commercial real estate     (269 )     (1,432 )     (3,548 )     (3,614 )     (1,052 )
Construction and development     (765 )     (1,506 )     (6,043 )     (15,267 )     (3,442 )
Consumer loans     (35 )     (84 )     (221 )     (338 )     (50 )
Commercial business loans     (410 )     (1,169 )     (929 )     (1,092 )     (2,412 )
Total loan charge-offs     (1,675 )     (7,190 )     (14,789 )     (29,786 )     (9,443 )
Loan recoveries:                                        
Loans secured by real estate:                                        
One-to-four family     438       375       764       72       253  
Home equity     1       —         —         —         114  
Commercial real estate     126       231       182       8       45  
Construction and development     110       740       203       64       259  
Consumer loans     53       172       41       50       16  
Commercial business loans     378       446       640       68       28  
Total loan recoveries     1,106       1,964       1,830       262       715  
Net loan charge-offs     (569 )     (5,226 )     (12,959 )     (29,524 )     (8,728 )
Balance, end of period   $ 8,091       9,520       12,039       14,263       13,032  
                                         
Allowance for loan losses as a percentage of loans receivable (end of period)     1.49 %     1.86 %     2.29 %     2.38 %     1.85 %
Net charge-offs to average loans receivable, net     0.11 %     1.05 %     2.38 %     4.61 %     1.18 %

 

The following table summarizes an allocation of the allowance for loan losses and the related percentage of loans outstanding in each category for the five years ended December 31, 2013.

 

    At December 31,
    2013   2012   2011   2010   2009
    Amount   %   Amount   %   Amount   %   Amount   %   Amount   %
    (Dollars in thousands)
Loans receivable:                                                                                
One-to-four family   $ 2,472       32.60 %     3,193       27.66 %     3,978       23.10 %     3,193       22.39 %     3,420       22.71 %
Home equity     231       4.19 %     276       5.91 %     550       6.52 %     896       6.28 %     640       7.00 %
Commercial real estate     2,855       44.79 %     3,315       45.52 %     3,283       46.46 %     6,371       44.67 %     4,212       40.77 %
Construction and development     1,418       11.87 %     1,792       12.88 %     2,695       14.09 %     2,358       16.53 %     3,383       20.19 %
Consumer loans     42       0.54 %     82       0.71 %     210       0.94 %     144       1.01 %     218       1.16 %
Commercial business loans     339       6.01 %     862       7.32 %     1,323       8.89 %     1,301       9.12 %     1,159       8.17 %
                                                                                 
Unallocated     734       —         —         —         —         —         —         —                 —    
Total   $ 8,091       100.00 %     9,520       100.00 %     12,039       100.00 %     14,263       100.00 %     13,032       100.00 %

 

58
 

Mortgage Operations

Mortgage Activities and Servicing

Our mortgage banking operations are conducted through our mortgage origination subsidiary, Crescent Mortgage Company. Mortgage activities involve the purchase of mortgage loans and table funded originations for the purpose of generating gains on sales of loans and fee income on the origination of loans. While the Company originates residential one-to-four family loans that are held in its loan portfolio, the majority of new loans are generally sold pursuant to secondary market guidelines through our wholesale mortgage origination subsidiary, Crescent Mortgage Company. Generally, residential mortgage loans are sold and, depending on the pricing in the marketplace, servicing rights are either sold or retained. The level of loan sale activity and its contribution to the Company’s profitability depends on maintaining a sufficient volume of loan originations. Changes in the level of interest rates and the local economy affect the volume of loans originated by the Company and the amount of loan sales and loan fees earned. Discussion related to the impact and changes within the mortgage operations are provided in “Results of Operations” within Item 2. Additional segment information is provided in Note 19 “Supplemental Segment Information” to the consolidated financial statements included under Item 13.

Loan Servicing

We retain the rights to service loans we sell on the secondary market, as part of our mortgage banking activities, for which we receive service fee income. These rights are known as mortgage servicing rights, or MSRs, where the owner of the MSR acts on behalf of the mortgage loan owner and has the contractual right to receive a stream of cash flows in exchange for performing specified mortgage servicing functions. These duties typically include, but are not limited, to performing loan administration, collection, and default activities, including the collection and remittance of loan payments, responding to customer inquiries, accounting for principal and interest, holding custodial (impound) funds for the payment of property taxes and insurance premiums, counseling delinquent mortgagors, modifying loans and supervising foreclosures and property dispositions. We subservice the duties and responsibilities obligated to the owner of the MSR to a third party provider for which we pay a fee.

At December 31, 2013, the Company was servicing $2.0 billion of loans for others, a decrease from $2.2 billion at December 31, 2012. The decrease in loans serviced in the current year relates to a loan servicing sale where the Company sold $972.9 million in unpaid loan principal serviced for a net gain of $5.5 million.

We recognize the rights to service mortgage loans for others as an asset. We initially record the MSR at fair value and subsequently account for the asset at lower of cost or market using the amortization method. Servicing assets are amortized in proportion to, and over the period of, the estimated net servicing income and are carried at amortized cost. A valuation is performed by an independent third party on a quarterly basis to assess the servicing assets for impairment based on the fair value at each reporting date. The fair value of servicing assets is determined by calculating the present value of the estimated net future cash flows consistent with contractually specified servicing fees. This valuation is performed on a disaggregated basis, based on loan type and year of production. Generally, loan servicing becomes more valuable when interest rates rise (as prepayments typically decrease) and less valuable when interest rates decline (as prepayments typically increase). As discussed in detail in notes to the consolidated financial statements, we use an appropriate weighted average constant prepayment rate, discount rate, and other defined assumptions to model the respective cash flows and determine the fair value of the servicing asset at each reporting date. See Note 7 to the consolidated financial statements for further detail regarding the assumptions used in determining the economic estimated fair value of the mortgage servicing rights retained.

In aggregate, the net servicing asset had a balance of $10.9 million and $12.0 million at December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively. The economic estimated fair value of the mortgage servicing rights was $17.7 and $18.1 million at December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively. The amortization expense related to the mortgage servicing rights were $2.4 million and $1.5 million during the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively.

 

59
 

Below is a roll-forward of activity in the balance of the servicing assets for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012 respectively:

 

    December 31,
    2013   2012
    (In thousands)
MSR beginning balance   $ 12,039       6,452  
Amount capitalized     6,860       7,051  
Amount sold     (5,547 )     —    
Amount amortized     (2,444 )     (1,464 )
MSR ending balance   $ 10,908       12,039  

 

Losses on Mortgage Loans Previously Sold

Loans held for sale have primarily been fixed-rate single-family residential mortgage loans under contracts to be sold in the secondary market. In most cases, loans in this category are sold within thirty days of closing. Buyers generally have recourse to return a purchased loan to the Company under limited circumstances. Repurchases and losses on mortgage loans previously sold are recorded when the Company indemnifies or repurchases mortgage loans previously sold.  The representations and warranties in our loan sale agreements provide that we repurchase or indemnify the investors for losses or costs on loans we sell under certain limited conditions.  Some of these conditions include underwriting errors or omissions, fraud or material misstatements by the borrower in the loan application or invalid market value on the collateral property due to deficiencies in the appraisal.  In addition to these representations and warranties, our loan sale contracts define a condition in which the borrower defaults during a short period of time, typically 120 days to one year, as an early payment default, or EPD.  In the event of an EPD, we are required to return the premium paid by the investor for the loan as well as certain administrative fees, and in some cases repurchase the loan or indemnify the investor.  Because the level of mortgage loan repurchase losses depends upon economic factors, investor demand strategies and other external conditions that may change over the life of the underlying loans, the level of the liability for mortgage loan repurchase losses is difficult to estimate and requires considerable management judgment.

The Company incurred losses of $1.2 million and $960,000 for indemnification and repurchase for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively.

The following table demonstrates the activity for the mortgage repurchase reserve for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012:

 

    December 31,
    2013   2012
    (In thousands)
Beginning Balance   $ 4,882       3,623  
Losses paid     (1,237 )     (960 )
Recoveries     26       30  
Provision for buyback     2,438       2,189  
Ending balance   $ 6,109       4,882  

 

For the years ended December 31, 2013, and 2012, the Company recorded a provision for mortgage repurchase reserve expense of $2.4 million, and $2.2 million respectively. The provision for mortgage repurchase reserve of $2.4 during 2013 consisted of $1.0 million for current year sales and $1.4 million related to changes in estimates of prior year sales. The provision expense for mortgage repurchase reserve of $2.2 during 2012 consisted of $1.4 million for current year sales and $800,000 related to changes in estimates of prior year sales.

60
 

Deposits and Other Interest-Bearing Liabilities

We provide a range of deposit services, including noninterest-bearing demand accounts, interest-bearing demand and savings accounts, money market accounts and time deposits. These accounts generally pay interest at rates established by management based on competitive market factors and management's desire to increase or decrease certain types or maturities of deposits. Deposits continue to be our primary funding source. At December 31, 2013 deposits totaled $697.6 million, an increase of $44.4 million, or 6.8%, from December 31, 2012. During 2013, the Company established a deposit relationship with its mortgage subservicing provider whereby the subservicer deposited impound funds totaling $31.9 million at December 31, 2013 at the Bank. These funds are included in interest-bearing deposits.

 

Our retail deposits represented $595.7 million, or 85.4% of total deposits at December 31, 2013, while our out-of-market, or brokered deposits, represented $101.9 million, or 14.6% of our total deposits. At December 31, 2012, retail deposits represented $583.3 million, or 89.3% of our total deposits, while our out-of-market, or brokered deposits, were $69.9 million, representing 10.7% of our total deposits.

The following table shows the average balance amounts and the average rates paid on deposits held by us.

    For the Years Ended December 31,
    2013   2012   2011
        Average       Average       Average
    Average   Yield/   Average   Yield/   Average   Yield/
    Balance   Rate   Balance   Rate   Balance   Rate
    (Dollars in thousands)
                         
Interest-bearing demand accounts   $ 56,405       0.20 %     41,361       0.27 %     34,129       0.28 %
Money market accounts     213,924       0.40 %     199,062       0.62 %     199,528       0.74 %
Savings accounts     14,387       0.32 %     9,468       0.50 %     6,725       0.54 %
Certificates of deposit less than $100,000     210,029       0.79 %     249,413       0.94 %     316,185       1.43 %
Certificates of deposit of $100,000 or more     92,970       0.71 %     57,278       0.81 %     29,638       1.59 %
Total interest-bearing average deposits     587,715       0.57 %     556,582       0.75 %     586,205       1.12 %
                                                 
Noninterest-bearing deposits     109,069               84,503               62,797          
Total average deposits   $ 696,784               641,085               649,002          

 

The maturity distribution of our time deposits of $100,000 or more is as follows:

 

    At December 31,
    2013   2012
    (In thousands)
         
Three months or less   $ 24,476       22,418  
Over three through six months     5,422       25,063  
Over six through twelve months     14,066       6,659  
Over twelve months     44,080       31,883  
Total certificates of deposits   $ 88,044       86,023  

 

61
 

Borrowings and Other Interest-Bearing Liabilities

The following table outlines our various sources of borrowed funds during the years ended December 31, 2013, 2012, and 2011, and the amounts outstanding at the end of each period, the maximum amount for each component during the periods, the average amounts for each period, and the average interest rate that we paid for each borrowing source. The maximum month-end balance represents the high indebtedness for each component of borrowed funds at any time during each of the periods shown.

            Maximum        
        Period   Month   Average for the
    Ending   End   End   Period
    Balance   Rate   Balance   Balance   Rate
At or for the year ended December 31, 2013   (Dollars in thousands)
Short-term borrowed funds                                        
Unsecured line of credit   $ —         —         2,700       1,987       5.00 %
Short-term FHLB advances     10,000       0.36 %     73,000       17,513       0.27 %
Mortgage loan warehouse line of credit     —         —         3,748       1,620       5.20 %
Subordinated debenture, due 2020     300       2.70 %     300       300       2.73 %
                                         
Long-term borrowed funds                                        
Long-term FHLB advances, due 2014 through 2021     57,500       0.42% - 4.00%       57,500       51,692       2.67 %
Subordinated debentures, due 2016 through 2020     1,575       2.70 %     11,875       9,404       1.99 %
Subordinated debentures issued to Carolina Financial Capital Trust I, due 2032     5,155       3.75 %     5,155       5,155       3.75 %
Subordinated debentures issued to Carolina Financial Capital Trust II, due 2034     10,310       3.29 %     10,310       10,310       3.57 %

 

            Maximum        
        Period   Month   Average for the
    Ending   End   End   Period
    Balance   Rate   Balance   Balance   Rate
At or for the year ended December 31, 2012   (Dollars in thousands)
Short-term borrowed funds                                        
Unsecured line of credit   $ 2,750       4.75 %     2,900       2,825       5.00 %
Short-term FHLB advances     77,500       0.16% - .82%       70,000       29,754       0.33 %
Mortgage loan warehouse line of credit     1,932       2.5% - 4.5%       23,612       10,442       4.43 %
Temporary Liquidity Guarantee Program     —         —         20,400       2,508       3.08 %
Subordinated debenture, due 2020     300       2.81 %     300       300       2.18 %
                                         
Long-term borrowed funds                                        
Long-term FHLB advances, due 2013 through 2021     37,500       0.52% - 4.00%       55,000       50,765       3.46 %
Subordinated debentures, due 2016 through 2020     11,875       1.84% - 2.81%       12,475       12,060       2.23 %
Subordinated debentures issued to Carolina Financial Capital Trust I, due 2032     5,155       3.75 %     5,155       5,155       4.05 %
Subordinated debentures issued to Carolina Financial Capital Trust II, due 2034     10,310       3.39 %     10,310       10,310       3.76 %

 

62
 

 

            Maximum        
        Period   Month   Average for the
    Ending   End   End   Period
    Balance   Rate   Balance   Balance   Rate
At or for the year ended December 31, 2011   (Dollars in thousands)
Short-term borrowed funds                                        
Unsecured line of credit   $ 200       4.75 %     200       200       5.17 %
Short-term FHLB advances     40,000       0.14% - .35%       40,000       19,754       1.19 %
Mortgage loan warehouse line of credit     2,584       3.5% - 6.25%       10,994       3,192       4.26 %
Temporary Liquidity Guarantee Program     20,400       2.74 %     20,400       20,399       2.74 %
Subordinated debenture, due 2020     300       2.82 %     300       300       2.75 %
                                         
Long-term borrowed funds                                        
Unsecured line of credit     2,750       4.75 %     2,800       2,996       5.16 %
Long-term FHLB advances, due 2013 through 2021     50,000       0.82% - 4.23%       80,000       74,141       3.56 %
Subordinated debentures, due 2016 through 2020     12,175       1.90% - 2.82%       12,475       12,361       2.02 %
Subordinated debentures issued to Carolina Financial Capital Trust I, due 2032     5,155       3.75 %     5,155       5,155       3.75 %
Subordinated debentures issued to Carolina Financial Capital Trust II, due 2034     10,310       3.45 %     10,310       10,310       3.33 %

 

Liquidity

Liquidity represents the ability of a company to convert assets into cash or cash equivalents without significant loss, and the ability to raise additional funds by increasing liabilities. Liquidity management involves monitoring our sources and uses of funds in order to meet our day-to-day cash flow requirements while maximizing profits. Liquidity management is made more complicated because different balance sheet components are subject to varying degrees of management control. For example, the timing of maturities of our investment portfolio is fairly predictable and subject to a high degree of control at the time investment decisions are made. However, net deposit inflows and outflows are far less predictable and are not subject to the same degree of control.

The Company utilizes borrowing facilities in order to maintain adequate liquidity including: the FHLB of Atlanta advance window, the Federal Reserve Bank (“FRB”), federal funds purchased, and warehouse lines of credit. The Company also uses wholesale deposit products, including brokered deposits as well as national certificate of deposit services. Additionally, the Company has certain investment securities classified as available-for-sale that are carried at market value with changes in market value, net of tax, recorded through stockholders’ equity.

Lines of credit with the FHLB of Atlanta are based upon FHLB-approved percentages of Bank assets, but must be supported by appropriate collateral to be available. The Company has pledged first lien residential mortgage, second lien residential mortgage, residential home equity line of credit, commercial mortgage and multifamily mortgage portfolios under blanket lien agreements resulting in approximately $237.3 million of collateral for these advances. In addition, at December 31, 2013, the Company has pledged $12.3 million of securities for these advances. At December 31, 2013, collateral totaling $249.6 million was pledged to support FHLB advances. At December 31, 2013 the Company had FHLB advances of $67.5 million outstanding with excess collateral pledged to the FHLB during those periods that would support additional borrowings of approximately $88.6 million.

Lines of credit with the FRB are based on collateral pledged. The Company has pledged certain non-mortgage commercial, acquisition and development, and lot loan portfolios under blanket lien agreements resulting in approximately $52.0 million of collateral to the FRB for these advances. At December 31, 2013 the Company had lines available with the FRB for $38.7 million. At December 31, 2013 the Company had no FRB advances outstanding.

63
 

Capital Resources

The Company and the Bank are subject to numerous regulatory capital requirements administered by federal banking agencies. If these capital requirements are not met, regulators can initiate certain mandatory – and possibly additional discretionary – actions that, if undertaken, could affect operations. Under capital adequacy guidelines and the regulatory framework for corrective action, the Company and the Bank must meet certain capital guidelines, which involve quantitative measures of the Company’s and the Bank’s assets, liabilities and certain off-balance sheet items as calculated under regulatory accounting practices. The Company’s and the Bank’s capital amounts and classification are subject to qualitative judgments by the regulators about components, risk weightings and certain other factors.

Quantitative measures set up by regulation to guarantee capital adequacy require the Company and the Bank to sustain minimum amounts and ratios of Tier 1 capital and total risk-based capital to risk-weighted assets and Tier 1 capital to total average assets. The Company and the Bank are required to maintain minimum Tier 1 capital and total risk-based capital to risk-weighted assets, and Tier 1 capital to total average assets of 4%, 8%, and 4%, respectively. To be considered “well capitalized”, the Company and the Bank must maintain at least Tier 1 capital and total risk-based capital to risk-weighted assets, and Tier 1 capital to total average assets of 6%, 10%, and 5%, respectively. As of December 31, 2013, the Company and the Bank are considered “well capitalized” under regulatory capital adequacy guidelines.

The actual capital amounts and ratios as well as minimum amounts for each regulatory defined category for the Company and the Bank at December 31, 2013 and 2012 are as follows:

            Required to be        
            Categorized   Required to be
            Adequately   Categorized
    Actual   Capitalized   Well Capitalized
    Amount   Ratio   Amount   Ratio   Amount   Ratio
    (Dollars in thousands)
                         
December 31, 2013                                                
Carolina Financial Corporation                                                
Tier 1 capital (to risk weighted assets)   $ 99,602       15.42 %     25,834       4.00 %     N/A       N/A  
Total risk based capital (to risk weighted assets)     108,650       16.82 %     51,668       8.00 %     N/A       N/A  
Tier 1 capital (to total average assets)     99,602       11.15 %     35,732       4.00 %     N/A       N/A  
                                                 
CresCom Bank                                                
Tier 1 capital (to risk weighted assets)     98,301       15.26 %     25,763       4.00 %     38,645       6.00 %
Total risk based capital (to risk weighted assets)     107,327       16.66 %     51,526       8.00 %     64,408       10.00 %
Tier 1 capital (to total average assets)     98,301       11.01 %     35,706       4.00 %     44,632       5.00 %
                                                 
December 31, 2012                                                
Carolina Financial Corporation   $ 82,839       13.11 %     25,266       4.00 %     N/A       N/A  
Tier 1 capital (to risk weighted assets)     98,030       15.52 %     50,532       8.00 %     N/A       N/A  
Total risk based capital (to risk weighted assets)     82,839       9.65 %     34,322       4.00 %     N/A       N/A  
Tier 1 capital (to total average assets)                                                
                                                 
CresCom Bank     85,537       13.57 %     25,222       4.00 %     37,833       6.00 %
Tier 1 capital (to risk weighted assets)     100,714       15.97 %     50,445       8.00 %     63,056       10.00 %
Total risk based capital (to risk weighted assets)     85,537       10.01 %     34,171       4.00 %     42,713       5.00 %
Tier 1 capital (to total average assets)                                                

 

In December 2010, the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision, or BCBS, an international forum for cooperation on banking supervisory matters, announced the “Basel III” capital standards, which substantially revised the existing capital requirements for banking organizations. Modest revisions were made in June 2011. The Basel III standards operate in conjunction with portions of standards previously released by the BCBS and commonly known as “Basel II” and “Basel 2.5.” On June 7, 2012, the Federal Reserve, the OCC, and the FDIC requested comment on these proposed rules that, taken together, would implement the Basel regulatory capital reforms through what we refer to herein as the “Basel III capital framework.”

64
 

On July 2, 2013, the Federal Reserve adopted a final rule for the Basel III capital framework and, on July 9, 2013, the OCC also adopted a final rule and the FDIC adopted the same provisions in the form of an “interim” final rule. The rule will apply to all national and state banks and savings associations and most bank holding companies and savings and loan holding companies, which we collectively refer to herein as “covered” banking organizations. Bank holding companies with less than $500 million in total consolidated assets are not subject to the final rule, nor are savings and loan holding companies substantially engaged in commercial activities or insurance underwriting. In certain respects, the rule imposes more stringent requirements on “advanced approaches” banking organizations—those organizations with $250 billion or more in total consolidated assets, $10 billion or more in total foreign exposures, or that have opted in to the Basel II capital regime. The requirements in the rule will begin to phase on January 1, 2014, for advanced approaches banking organizations, and on January 1, 2015, for other covered banking organizations. The requirements in the rule will be fully phased in by January 1, 2019.

Management expects to comply with the final rules when issued and effective. To prepare for the implementation of the new capital rules, management continues to build capital through retained earnings and is evaluating strategies to maximize the Company’s capital under the Basel III NPR.

The following table shows the return on average assets (net income divided by average total assets), return on average equity (net income divided by average equity), and equity to assets ratio (average equity divided by average total assets) for the three years ended December 31, 2013.

    For the Years Ended December 31,
    2013   2012   2011
             
Return on average assets     1.89 %     2.02 %     -0.11 %
Return on average equity     22.04 %     31.25 %     -2.07 %
Average equity to average assets ratio     8.58 %     6.45 %     5.48 %

 

The following table provides the amount of dividends and payout ratios (dividends declared divided by net income) for the year ended December 31, 2013. The Company has not paid a dividend to stockholders prior to 2013.

 

    Years Ended
    December 31, 2013
         
Shareholder dividend payments   $ 401,000  
Dividend payout ratios     2.38 %

 

We retain earnings to have capital sufficient to grow our loan and investment portfolios and to support certain acquisitions or other business expansion opportunities as they arise. The dividend payout ratio is calculated by dividing dividends paid during the year by net income for the year.

 

Market Risk Management and Interest Rate Risk

The effective management of market risk is essential to achieving the Company’s objectives. As a financial institution, the Company’s most significant market risk exposure is interest rate risk. The primary objective of managing interest rate risk is to minimize the effect that changes in interest rates have on net income. This is accomplished through active asset and liability management, which requires the strategic pricing of asset and liability accounts and management of appropriate maturity mixes of assets and liabilities. The expected result of these strategies is the development of appropriate maturity and re-pricing opportunities in those accounts to produce consistent net income during periods of changing interest rates. The Bank’s asset/liability management committee, or ALCO, monitors loan, investment and liability portfolios to ensure comprehensive management of interest rate risk. These portfolios are analyzed for proper fixed-rate and variable-rate mixes under various interest rate scenarios. The asset/liability management process is designed to achieve relatively stable net interest margins and assure liquidity by coordinating the volumes, maturities or re-pricing opportunities of interest-earning assets, deposits and borrowed funds. It is the responsibility of the ALCO to determine and achieve the most appropriate volume and mix of interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities, as well as ensure an adequate level of liquidity and capital, within the context of corporate performance goals. The ALCO meets regularly to review the Company’s interest rate risk and liquidity positions in relation to present and prospective market and business conditions, and adopts funding and balance sheet management strategies that are intended to ensure that the potential impact on earnings and liquidity as a result of fluctuations in interest rates is within acceptable standards. The Board of Directors also sets policy guidelines and establishes long-term strategies with respect to interest rate risk exposure and liquidity.

65
 

The Company uses interest rate sensitivity analysis to measure the sensitivity of projected net interest income to changes in interest rates. Management monitors the Company’s interest sensitivity by means of a computer model that incorporates current volumes, average rates earned and paid, and scheduled maturities, payments of asset and liability portfolios, together with multiple scenarios of prepayments, repricing opportunities and anticipated volume growth. Interest rate sensitivity analysis shows the effect that the indicated changes in interest rates would have on net interest income as projected for the next twelve months under the current interest rate environment. The resulting change in net interest income reflects the level of sensitivity that net interest income has in relation to changing interest rates.

As of December 31, 2013, the following table summarizes the forecasted impact on net interest income using a base case scenario given upward movements in interest rates of 100, 200, and 300 basis points based on forecasted assumptions of prepayment speeds, nominal interest rates and loan and deposit repricing rates. Downward movements do not appear to be applicable due to the low interest rate environment experienced during 2013. Estimates are based on current economic conditions, historical interest rate cycles and other factors deemed to be relevant. However, underlying assumptions may be impacted in future periods which were not known to management at the time of the issuance of the Consolidated Financial Statements. Therefore, management’s assumptions may or may not prove valid. No assurance can be given that changing economic conditions and other relevant factors impacting our net interest income will not cause actual occurrences to differ from underlying assumptions. In addition, this analysis does not consider any strategic changes to our balance sheet which management may consider as a result of changes in market conditions.

 

    Annualized Hypothetical
  Interest Rate Scenario     Percentage Change in  
  Change       Prime Rate     Net Interest Income  
  0.00%       3.25%     0.00%
  1.00%       4.25%     2.00%
  2.00%       5.25%     4.50%
  3.00%       6.25%     6.20%

 

The primary uses of derivative instruments are related to the mortgage banking activities of the Company. As such, the Company holds derivative instruments, which consist of rate lock agreements related to expected funding of fixed-rate mortgage loans to customers (interest rate lock commitments) and forward commitments to sell mortgage-backed securities and individual fixed-rate mortgage loans. The Company’s objective in obtaining the forward commitments is to mitigate the interest rate risk associated with the interest rate lock commitments and the mortgage loans that are held for sale. Derivatives related to these commitments are recorded as either a derivative asset or a derivative liability in the balance sheet and are measured at fair value. Both the interest rate lock commitments and the forward commitments are reported at fair value, with adjustments recorded in current period earnings in net unrealized gain (loss) on derivatives within the noninterest income of the consolidated statements of operations.

Derivative instruments not related to mortgage banking activities, including financial futures commitments and interest rate swap agreements that do not satisfy the hedge accounting requirements are recorded at fair value and are classified with resultant changes in fair value being recognized in noninterest income in the consolidated statement of operations.

When using derivatives to hedge fair value and cash flow risks, the Company exposes itself to potential credit risk from the counterparty to the hedging instrument. This credit risk is normally a small percentage of the notional amount and fluctuates as interest rates change. The Company analyzes and approves credit risk for all potential derivative counterparties prior to execution of any derivative transaction. The Company seeks to minimize credit risk by dealing with highly rated counterparties and by obtaining collateralization for exposures above certain predetermined limits. If significant counterparty risk is determined, the Company would adjust the fair value of the derivative recorded asset balance to consider such risk.

  

66
 

The derivative positions of the Company at December 31, 2013 and 2012 are as follows:

 

    At December 31,
    2013   2012
    Fair   Notional   Fair   Notional
    Value   Value   Value   Value
    (In thousands)
Derivative assets:                                
Mortgage loan interest rate lock commitments   $ —         —         4,783       289,584  
Mortgage loan forward sales commitments     106       20,516       1,692       59,177  
Mortgage-backed securities forward sales commitments     878       88,000       67       308,000  
Interest rate swaps     428       20,000       —         —    
    $ 1,412       128,516       6,542       656,761  
Derivative liabilities:                                
Mortgage loan interest rate lock commitments   $ 55       103,614       —         —    

 

Contractual Obligations

The following table presents payment schedules for certain of our contractual obligations as of December 31, 2013. Operating lease obligations of $2.1 million pertain to banking facilities and equipment. Certain lease agreements include payment of property taxes and insurance and contain various renewal options. Additional information regarding leases is contained in Note 12 of the audited consolidated financial statements.

        Less than   1 to 3   3 to 5   More than
    Total   1 Year   Years   Years   5 Years
    (Dollars in thousands)
                     
Advances from FHLB   $ 67,800       10,300       17,500       10,000       30,000  
Subordinated debentures     1,875       300       600       600       375  
Subordinated debentures issued to Carolina Financial Capital Trust I, due 2032     5,155       —         —         —         5,155  
Subordinated debentures issued to Carolina Financial Capital Trust II, due 2034     10,310       —         —         —         10,310  
Operating lease obligations     2,147       604       421       857       265  
Total   $ 87,287       11,204       18,521       11,457       46,105  

 

Accounting, Reporting, and Regulatory Matters

Information regarding recent authoritative pronouncements that could impact the accounting, reporting, and/or disclosure of the financial information by the Company are included in Note 1 of the audited consolidated financial statements.

Effect of Inflation and Changing Prices

The effect of relative purchasing power over time due to inflation has not been taken into account in our consolidated financial statements. Rather, our financial statements have been prepared on an historical cost basis in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles.

Unlike most industrial companies, our assets and liabilities are primarily monetary in nature. Therefore, the effect of changes in interest rates will have a more significant impact on our performance than will the effect of changing prices and inflation in general. In addition, interest rates may generally increase as the rate of inflation increases, although not necessarily in the same magnitude. As discussed previously, we seek to manage the relationships between interest sensitive assets and liabilities in order to protect against wide rate fluctuations, including those resulting from inflation.

 

67
 

Item 3.  Properties

Our main office is located at 288 Meeting Street, Charleston, South Carolina 29401-1575.  In addition, the Bank operates 11 additional branches located along the coastal region of South Carolina.  The addresses of these offices are provided below. In addition to our main office and branches, we also operate Crescent Mortgage Company, which is headquartered in Atlanta, Georgia, and Carolina Services Corporation of Charleston, with Carolina Services Corporation’s operations conducted from our West Ashley location. We believe these premises will be adequate for present and anticipated needs and that we have adequate insurance to cover our owned and leased premises. For each property that we lease, we believe that upon expiration of the lease we will be able to extend the lease on satisfactory terms or relocate to another acceptable location.

 

Office Address City, State, Zip Lease/Own
Myrtle Beach Office 991 38th Avenue N. Myrtle Beach, South Carolina 29577 Own
North Myrtle Beach Office 700 Main Street North Myrtle Beach, South Carolina 29582 Land Lease
Conway Office 2069 Highway 501 East Conway, South Carolina 29526 Land Lease
Garden City Office 2636 South Highway 17 Business Garden City,  South Carolina 29576 Own
Meeting Street Office 288 Meeting Street Charleston, South Carolina 29401-1575 Lease
West Ashley Office 884 Orleans Road Charleston, South Carolina 29407-4937 Own
James Island Office 430 Folly Road Charleston, South Carolina 29412-2641 Own
Summerville Office 200 North Cedar Street Summerville, South Carolina 29483-6404 Own
Mount Pleasant Office 1492 Stuart Engals Blvd Mt. Pleasant, South Carolina 29464 Own
North Charleston Office 8485 Dorchester Road N. Charleston, South Carolina 29420-7307 Own
Litchfield/Pawleys Island Office 13021 Ocean Highway Pawleys Island, South Carolina 29585 Own
St. George Office 5561 Memorial Boulevard St. George, South Carolina 29477 Own
Crescent Mortgage Company 5901 Peachtree Dunwoody Road NE   Atlanta, Georgia 30328 Lease

 

68
 

Item 4.  Security Ownership of Certain Beneficial Owners and Management

The following table sets forth information known to the Company with respect to beneficial ownership of our common stock as of February 26, 2014, for (i) each of the Company’s current directors, (ii) each of the Company’s named executive officers, (iii) each holder of 5.0% or greater of the Company’s common stock, and (iv) all of the Company’s current directors and executive officers. Unless otherwise indicated, the mailing address of each beneficial owner is Carolina Financial Corporation, 288 Meeting Street, Charleston, South Carolina 29401-1575.

Beneficial ownership is determined under the rules of the SEC and generally includes voting or investment power with respect to securities. Except as indicated in the footnotes to this table and pursuant to applicable community property laws, to the Company’s knowledge the persons named in the table below have sole voting and investment power with respect to all shares of common stock beneficially owned. The number of shares beneficially owned by each person or group as of February 26, 2014 includes shares of common stock that such person or group had the right to acquire options that are exercisable on or within 60 days after February 26, 2014. References to options in the footnotes of the table below include only options to purchase shares outstanding as of February 26, 2014 that were exercisable on or within 60 days after February 26, 2014. For each individual and group included in the table below, percentage ownership is calculated by dividing the number of shares beneficially owned by such person or group by the sum of actual shares of common stock outstanding totaling 4,019,104 on February 26, 2014, plus the number of shares of common stock that such person or group had the right to acquire on or within 60 days after February 26, 2014. The number of shares beneficially owned shown below have been adjusted to reflect the two-for-one stock split declared on January 15, 2014 for stockholders of record as February 10, 2014 and payable on February 28, 2014.

 

 

Name

 

Number of
Shares
Beneficially Owned (1)(2)(3)(4)

  Percent of
Beneficial
Ownership
Directors and Named Executive Officers                
William H. Alford     16,590       0.41 %
Howell V. Bellamy, Jr.     14,800       0.37 %
W. Scott Brandon     56,824       1.41 %
Robert G. Clawson, Jr.     62,150       1.55 %
Jeffery L. Deal, M.D.     25,950       0.65 %
G. Manly Eubank     90,924       2.26 %
M. J. Huggins, III     23,370       0.58 %
Michael P. Leddy     50,600       1.26 %
Robert M. Moïse, CPA     55,548       1.38 %
David L. Morrow     71,704       1.78 %
Thompson E. Penney     10,600       0.26 %
Jerold L. Rexroad     125,480       3.12 %
Benedict P. Rosen     30,200       0.75 %
John D. Russ     178,860       4.45 %
Lt. General Claudius E. Watts, III (USAF - Retired)     43,386       1.08 %
Bonum S. Wilson, Jr.     62,546       1.56 %
All Directors and Executive Officers as a Group (20 persons)     994,704 (5)     24.75 %

 

(1) Includes shares for which the named person has sole voting and investment power, has shared voting and investment power with a spouse, holds in an IRA or SEP, or holds in a trust as trustee for the benefit of himself, unless otherwise indicated in these footnotes.

 

(2) Includes unvested shares of restricted stock, as to which the directors and executive officers have full voting privileges. The shares are as follows: Mr. Alford, 400 shares; Mr. Bellamy, 400 shares; Mr. Brandon, 400 shares; Mr. Clawson, 400 shares; Mr. Deal, 400 shares; Mr. Eubank, 400 shares; Mr. Huggins, 8,000 shares; Mr. Moise, 400 shares; Mr. Morrow, 24,000 shares; Mr. Rexroad, 32,000 shares; Mr. Rosen, 400 shares; Lt. General Watts, 400 shares; and Mr. Wilson, 400 shares.

 

(3) Includes shares that may be acquired within 60 days of February 26, 2014 by exercising vested stock options or unvested stock options that will vest within 60 days of February 26, 2014. The shares are as follows: Mr. Clawson, 320 shares; Mr. Deal, 320 shares; Mr. Eubank, 160 shares; Mr. Huggins, 1,370 shares; Mr. Moise, 320 shares; Mr. Morrow, 5,478 shares; Mr. Rexroad, 16,438 shares; and Mr. Wilson, 400 shares.

 

(4) Excludes shares of common stock owned by or for the benefit of family members of the following directors and executive officers, each of whom disclaims beneficial owneship of such shares: Mr. Clawson, 5,530 shares; Mr. Eubank, 4,000 shares; and Mr. Rexroad, 2,500 shares.

 

(5) Excludes 334,612 shares of common stock held by nine directors of the Bank or the Company’s other subsidiaries who are not directors or executive officers of the Company.

69
 

Item 5.  Directors and Executive Officers

The following table provides information regarding our directors and executive officers as of February 26, 2014:

 

Name Age Position
William H. Alford 61 Director (1)
Howell V. Bellamy, Jr. 77 Director (1)
W. Scott Brandon 50 Director (2) (4) (5) (6)
Robert G. Clawson, Jr. 71 Director (3)
Jeffery L. Deal, M.D. 59 Director (1) (2) (3) (5)
G. Manly Eubank 77 Director (2) (4) (6)
William A. Gehman, III 53 Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer
M. J. Huggins, III 51 Executive Vice President and Secretary
Michael P. Leddy 70 Director (2) (5)
Robert M. Moïse, CPA 65 Director (1) (4) (5) (6)
David L. Morrow 63 Director; Executive Vice President (4) (6)
Thompson E. Penney 63 Director (2) (3)
Jerold L. Rexroad 53 Director; President and Chief Executive Officer (4)(5)(6)
Benedict P. Rosen 77 Director (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
John D. Russ 66 Director
Lt. General Claudius E. Watts, III (USAF, Retired) 77 Chairman of the Board of Directors (4) (6)
Bonum S. Wilson, Jr. 77 Director (1) (2) (3) (4) (6)

 

 

(1) Member of the audit committee

(2) Member of the compensation committee

(3) Member of the corporate governance and nominating committee

(4) Member of the executive committee

(5) Member of the finance and capital committee

(6) Member of the mergers and acquisitions committee

Our directors are also directors of the Bank with the exceptions of Messrs. Bellamy, Leddy, and Rosen who are directors of the Company only, and each of our executive officers are also executive officers of the Bank, although they may serve in different capacities at the Bank level, as described below. The business experience and background of each of our directors and executive officers is provided below. All such persons have held their present positions for at least the past five years, except as otherwise indicated.

 

William H. Alford has served as a member of our board of directors since 2001. Mr. Alford is Vice President of A&I Fire and Water Restoration Company in Myrtle Beach, South Carolina. Mr. Alford also serves as a board member of the Coastal Carolina University Educational Foundation and on the Executive Committee for North Eastern Strategic Alliance. Mr. Alford previously served as Chairman of the Board of Trustees of Coastal Carolina University, Chairman of Crescent Bank, Chairman of the Board of Trustees for Grand Strand Regional Medical Center, Chairman of the Horry County Railroad Task Force, and Chairman of the South Carolina Department of Transportation Commission. Mr. Alford also previously served as a board member of Santee Cooper, Chairman Emeritus of the Horry County Higher Education Commission, president of the Myrtle Beach Chamber of Commerce, president of Myrtle Beach Rotary Club, President of the Dunes Golf and Beach Club and Chairman of the Ocean View Memorial Foundation. Mr. Alford served in the United States Marine Corps and is a Vietnam Veteran. He holds a Bachelor of Arts degree from the University of South Carolina at Coastal Carolina University. His experience as chairman of the board of a public university, as well as chairman and director of a state government agency, enhance his ability to contribute to the Company as a director.

 

Howell “Skeets” V. Bellamy, Jr . has served as a member of the Company’s board of directors since 2001. Mr. Bellamy is a member of Bellamy, Rutenberg, Copeland, Epps, Gravely & Bowers, P.A., a full service law firm headquartered in Myrtle Beach, South Carolina. Mr. Bellamy is a member of the Horry County and American Bar Associations, the South Carolina Bar Association, the South Carolina Trial Lawyers Association, the Association of Trial Lawyers of America, and the Fourth Circuit Judicial Conference, and previously served as President of the Horry County Bar Association. He also previously served as a director of Anchor Bank. Mr. Bellamy holds a Bachelor of Arts degree from Davidson College and a Juris Doctor degree from the University of South Carolina. His extensive legal and previous experience as a director of a state-wide financial institution give him useful insights and a valuable understanding of the key markets we serve.

 

70
 

W. Scott Brandon has served as a member of our board of directors since 2001. Mr. Brandon is owner and CEO of The Brandon Agency, South Carolina's largest independently owned advertising agency. He is also owner of Intellistrand, an internet marketing company that buys, sells and monetizes intuitive domain names on the internet as well as Fuel Interactive, South Carolina’s first and largest interactive-only advertising agency. He is also a co-owner of Merit Associates which operates rental car franchises in Tampa, Florida and Myrtle Beach, SC. He holds a Bachelor of Science degree in Economics from Davidson College and a Juris Doctor degree from the University of South Carolina School of Law. He is a 2012 recipient of The American Advertising Federation’s Silver Medal Award for his outstanding contributions to advertising and creative excellence. Mr. Brandon currently serves on the Board of Directors for the Myrtle Beach Area Recovery Council and the Myrtle Beach Regional Economic Development Corporation. He is a past member of the Horry-Georgetown Technical College Board of Visitors, past board member of The E. Craig Wall School of Business Administration Board of Visitors, past board member of the American Heart Association (Coastal Chapter), past board member of the Better Business Bureau, past board member of the Salvation Army Horry County as well as the Myrtle Beach Haven. He is a current member of Young Presidents Organization and Chief Executives Organization. Mr. Brandon has substantial leadership and financial experience as founder of several successful businesses and is extensively involved in the local community, both of which enhance his ability to serve as a director.

 

Robert G. Clawson, Jr. has served as a member of our board of directors since 1996. Mr. Clawson is a founding member of the law firm of Clawson and Staubes, LLC, and is a member of the South Carolina State Bar, the American Bar Association, the Metropolitan Exchange Club, and The Hibernian Society. Mr. Clawson is admitted to practice law before the South Carolina Supreme Court, the U.S. District Court for the District of South Carolina, the U.S. Court of Appeals for the Fourth Circuit, the U.S. Court of Federal Claims, the U.S. Tax Court, and the U.S. Court of International Trade. Mr. Clawson previously served as President of the South Carolina Municipal Attorneys Association and the College of Charleston Cougar Club. He is a graduate of the University of North Carolina and the University of South Carolina School of Law. Mr. Clawson’s qualification as a member of the board of directors is primarily attributed to his experience in founding a successful law practice and his extensive legal experience.

 

Jeffery L. Deal, M.D. has served as a member of our board of directors since 1996. Dr. Deal is an anthropologist and physician and serves as Director of Health Studies for Water Missions International, a non-profit non-governmental organization that provides water and sanitation for developing areas. Dr. Deal is a founding partner of Charleston ENT, and previously served as President of the Medical Staff of Bon Secours-St. Francis Hospital, Medical Director of a startup medical facility in South Sudan, and several other related positions. Dr. Deal is a Fellow in the American College of Surgeons, a Fellow in the American Academy of Otolaryngology - Head and Neck Surgery, and a Fellow in the Royal Society of Tropical Medicine. Dr. Deal is a graduate of the Medical University of South Carolina and completed his residency at the National Naval Medical Center in Bethesda, Maryland. He brings to the board of directors insights relative to the challenges and opportunities facing small businesses and healthcare professionals within our market areas.

 

G. Manly Eubank has served as a member of our board of directors since 1996. Mr. Eubank is Chairman of Palmetto Ford, Inc. and has been in the automotive business in Charleston for over 44 years. Mr. Eubank previously served as President of the Charleston Metro Chamber of Commerce and President of the South Carolina Automobile Dealers Association. Mr. Eubank is a graduate of Wofford College. His experience as the founder of a successful business and his involvement in leadership positions in his trade organization enhance his ability to serve on the board of directors.

 

Michael P. Leddy has served as a member of the Company’s board of directors since 2013. Prior to joining the board of directors, Mr. Leddy was the President and Chief Executive Officer of Crescent Mortgage Company from 2008 until 2011. Mr. Leddy has more than 40 years of mortgage banking experience and was a founding team member in the formation of Arvida Mortgage, a subsidiary of Walt Disney Productions. Mr. Leddy was briefly retired from 2011 until he joined the Company’s board in 2013. Mr. Leddy served in the U.S. Navy on board the USS Thomas Jefferson. Mr. Leddy holds a Bachelors of Science degree in finance from University of Central Florida and a Juris Doctor degree from Atlanta Law School. Mr. Leddy’s qualification as a member of the board of directors is primarily attributed to his experience in founding two mortgage companies and previously holding the position of CEO of Crescent Mortgage Company, as well as his vast knowledge of the mortgage industry.

 

71
 

Robert M. Moïse has served as a member of our board of directors since 1996.  Mr. Moïse is a partner in WebsterRogers LLP in the Charleston office.  He holds Bachelor of Science and Master of Accountancy degrees from the University of South Carolina and has been admitted to practice before the United States Tax Court.  He serves as Treasurer of the Coastal Council BSA, is the Secretary of the Coastal Boys Council Board, and a counselor at Camp Happy Days.  He is a member of the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants, serving on their national Tax Practice Responsibilities Committee and is a member of the South Carolina Association of Certified Public Accountants.  Mr. Moïse also continues to serve as a member of the Charleston County Business License Appeals Board. Mr. Moïse brings to the board of his 40 years of financial expertise and his business skills. His finance and accounting expertise also qualify him to serve as chairman of the Company’s audit committee and to be considered an “audit committee financial expert”.

 

David L. Morrow has served as an Executive Vice President of the Company since 2004 and has served as a member of our board of directors since 2001.  Mr. Morrow is also President and Chief Executive Officer of CresCom Bank.  He is a graduate of Clemson University with a Bachelor of Science degree and has more than 41 years of experience in banking and financial institution management in South Carolina.  Prior to founding Crescent Bank, a predecessor to CresCom Bank, he served as President of Carolina First Savings Bank and also as Executive Vice President and member of the Board of Directors of Carolina First Bank.  He is currently a member of the Board of Directors for the South Carolina Museum Foundation, a member of the Board of Clemson University’s Professional Advancement and Continuing Education (PACE) program and a member of the Board of Advisors of the Hollings Cancer Center at the Medical University of South Carolina.  He is also a past Board member of the Storm Eye Institute at the Medical University of South Carolina and a past member of the Board of Directors of Leadership South Carolina.  His 40 years of experience in financial institute management, including previous service as a director and president of a state-wide financial institution and CEO of both predecessor banks of CresCom Bank, provide a valuable perspective as a director.

 

Thompson E. “Thom” Penney has served as a member of our board of directors since 2013. A native of Charleston, Mr. Penney has more than 39 years of experience in the architectural field, serving as the president and chief executive officer of LS3P Associates LTD since 1989. Under Penney’s leadership, LS3P has grown to become a firm consistently recognized by Engineering News and Record as one of the Top 500 Design Firms and Top 50 Architectural Firms in the United States. A graduate of Clemson University with a bachelor’s degree and master’s degree in architecture, Penney has made significant contributions to the Charleston community and the architecture industry, having served as chairman of the Charleston Metro Chamber of Commerce and national president of the American Institute of Architects. He is also on the boards of the South Carolina Aquarium, the Charleston Regional Development Alliance and is Vice Chair of the Trident CEO Council. Mr. Penney brings to the Board of Directors leadership experience in one of the largest architectural firms in the United States. Also, Mr. Penney has served as President of his national trade organization.

 

Jerold L. Rexroad has served as the Company’s President and Chief Executive Officer since 2012 and as a director since 2012. Mr. Rexroad also serves as Senior Executive Vice President and Chief Administrative Officer of the Bank and Chief Executive Officer and Chairman of the Board of Crescent Mortgage Company. Mr. Rexroad joined the Company in May 2008 as Executive Vice President. Mr. Rexroad began his career in 1982 with Peat, Marwick, Mitchell and Co., a predecessor to the international accounting firm KPMG LLP, and is a Certified Public Accountant with over 20 years of experience in financial institution management. He became a KPMG partner in 1994 with responsibilities for all financial institutions in South Carolina. In 1995, Mr. Rexroad joined Coastal Financial Corporation as Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer. Under his oversight, the bank grew organically from $375 million in total assets to over $1.8 billion in total assets. Coastal Financial Corporation was sold to BB&T in 2007. Mr. Rexroad is a member of the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants and the South Carolina Association of Certified Public Accountants. Mr. Rexroad is a graduate of Bob Jones University, cum laude. Mr. Rexroad is a director of the Myrtle Beach Economic Development Corporation. His leadership experience, including over 30 years of experience in public accounting and financial institution management, as well as his service as the chief financial officer of a public bank holding company, enhance his ability to serve on the board of directors. These roles have required industry expertise combined with operational and global management expertise.

 

Benedict P. Rosen has served as a member of the Company’s board of directors since 2001, and he also serves as a director of Crescent Mortgage Company. Mr. Rosen served as Chairman of the board of directors for AVX Corporation from 1997 until 2008, Chief Executive Officer of AVX from 1993 until 2001, and President of AVX from 1993 until 1997. From 1994 to 2001, Mr. Rosen served as Representative Director of Kyocera Corporation of Japan. Mr. Rosen is on the Board of Sea Mist Resorts and also serves as Chairman of the Board of Trustees for Brookgreen Gardens. Mr. Rosen received a Bachelor of Science degree in Electrical Engineering from Massachusetts Institute of Technology in 1958. His experience as a chairman of the board and CEO of a large public technology company provide a valuable perspective as a director. These roles have required industry expertise combined with operational and global management expertise. Mr. Rosen has also served on the boards of several other public companies as a director.

 

72
 

John D. Russ was co-founder of Community FirstBank and Carolina Financial Corporation in 1997. He is a 1970 graduate of the University of South Carolina, with over 40 years of banking experience in the Charleston market. He is a member of the Payments Advisory Council of the Federal Reserve Bank of Richmond. He is a member of the American Bankers Association Membership and Government Relations Committees. Mr. Russ is also a member of the Carolina Yacht Club, The Hibernian Society, and the Metropolitan Exchange Club. He is a member of the Citizens Advisory Council of the Hollings Cancer Center at MUSC and a member of the Boards of both the Metro Charleston Chamber of Commerce and of the Trident United Way. Mr. Russ currently serves as the Treasurer of the Trident United Way. His unique experience as a co-founder of the Company and one of the Bank’s predecessor banks provides a valuable perspective as a director.

Lt. General Claudius E. Watts, III (USAF, Retired) has served as a member of our board of directors since 1996, and as Chairman of the board since 2008. Lt. General Watts also serves as Chairman of the board of the Bank. Lt. General Watts served 31 years in the United States Air Force and accumulated more than 7,000 hours as a pilot. Upon retiring from active duty, Lt. General Watts served as the President of The Citadel from June 23, 1989 until August 31, 1996. While with the Air Force, Lt. General Watts served as Comptroller of the Air Force and Chairman of the board of directors of the Army Air Force Exchange Services. Prior to that, he was an airlift wing commander, the chief planner for The Military Airlift Command and then Director of the Budget for The US Air Force. Lt. General Watts previously served as a member of the NCAA Council, the South Carolina Council of College Presidents, board of directors of the Air Force Aid Society and the National board of directors of the Aerospace Education Foundation. Lt. General Watts earned a Bachelor of Arts degree in political science from The Citadel in 1958, and attended the London School of Economics and Political Science as a Fulbright scholar. The General also earned a master’s degree in business administration from the Stanford University Graduate School of Business in 1967. His finance and accounting expertise as the Controller for the United States Air Force, as well as his military leadership experience, also qualify him to serve as chairman of the board of the Company.

 

Bonum S. Wilson, Jr. has served as a member of our board of directors since 1996. Mr. Wilson is a venture capitalist, and previously served as President of the Exchange Club of Charleston and Chairman of the Bishop Gadsden Retirement Center. Prior to becoming a venture capitalist, Mr. Wilson was the Group Vice President of Latin America, Asia/Pacific and South Africa for the Carborundum Company, a division of BP Corporation. Mr. Wilson holds a Bachelor of Science degree in Ceramic Engineering from Clemson University. Mr. Wilson’s qualification as a member of the board of directors is primarily attributed to his financial expertise and his entrepreneurial skills. Additionally, Mr. Wilson has founded a successful international company which has required a level of industry expertise.

 

Other than Messrs. Morrow and Rexroad, for which disclosure is provided above, the following provides information regarding our other executive officers:

 

William A. Gehman, III has served as our Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer since 2012. Prior to being promoted to Chief Financial officer, Mr. Gehman was the Company’s Controller from 2008 to 2012. Mr. Gehman is also the Chief Financial Officer of the Bank, Crescent Mortgage Company and Carolina Services Corporation. Mr. Gehman, a Certified Public Accountant with over 12 years of experience in financial institutions, spent over nine years with Peat, Marwick, Mitchell & Co., after which he joined Coastal Financial Corporation in 2002 as Senior Vice President and Corporate Controller, where his responsibilities included public and regulatory reporting. Mr. Gehman is a member of the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants, the South Carolina Association of Certified Public Accountants, and the Financial Managers Society, Inc. Mr. Gehman is a graduate of Liberty Baptist College.

 

M.J. Huggins, III has served as our Executive Vice President since 2010 and Secretary since 2012. Mr. Huggins is also a founding board member and former President, Chief Credit Officer and Secretary of Crescent Bank. Prior to joining us and assisting in the founding of the Bank, Mr. Huggins served as Area Executive and Senior Vice President of Carolina First Bank, responsible for commercial and retail operations from Georgetown to Myrtle Beach, South Carolina. Prior to his tenure with Carolina First Bank, Mr. Huggins worked for C & S Bank. Mr. Huggins is a board member of the Wall College Board of Visitors at Coastal Carolina University and member of the Community Banker’s Counsel with the South Carolina Banker’s Association. Mr. Huggins is a graduate of Coastal Carolina University and The Graduate School of Banking at Louisiana State University.

 

Election of Officers

 

Our executive officers are appointed by, and serve at the discretion of, our board of directors. There are no family relationships among any of our directors or executive officers.

 

73
 

Board Committees

Our board of directors has the following committees: an audit committee, a compensation committee, a corporate governance and nominating committee, an executive committee, a finance and capital committee, and a mergers and acquisitions committee. The composition and responsibilities of each committee are described below. Members serve on these committees until their resignation or until otherwise determined by our board of directors.

Audit Committee

Our audit committee is comprised of Messrs. Moïse, Alford, Bellamy, Deal and Wilson. Each member of the audit committee is an independent director pursuant to the audit committee charter.  Mr. Moïse is the chairman of our audit committee, is our audit committee financial expert as that term is defined under SEC rules, and possesses financial sophistication as defined under the rules of NASDAQ.  The designation does not impose on Mr. Moïse any duties, obligations or liabilities that are greater than those generally imposed on members of our audit committee and our board of directors. Our audit committee is directly responsible for, among other things:

· reviewing the effectiveness of the Company’s internal control, audit, and risk management functions;
· ensuring that significant findings and recommendations communicated by internal auditors and management’s proposed corrective actions are received, discussed and acted upon;
· holding an executive session with the internal auditor as part of every committee meeting, without management present, to discuss any matters the committee or internal auditor believes should be discussed privately;
· appointing an external auditor to conduct the Company’s independent audit process and assessing the performance of the Company’s independent auditor;
· confirming the independence of the external auditor selected;
· reviewing the Company’s annual report prepared by the Company’s independent auditors;
· discussing the Company’s annual report in detail with the Company’s independent auditors and with management;
· recommending to the full board any action to be taken following the independent audit;
· providing an avenue of communication among the internal auditors, external auditors, and board of directors;
· reviewing the Company’s process for monitoring compliance with relevant laws and regulations;
· reviewing the results of examinations performed by regulatory agencies; and
· instituting and overseeing special investigations, as needed.

Compensation Committee

Our compensation committee is comprised of Messrs. Penney, Brandon, Deal, Eubank, Leddy, Rosen, and Wilson. Mr. Penney is the chairman of our compensation committee. With the exception of Mr. Brandon, each member of this committee is a non-employee director, as defined pursuant to Rule 16b-3 promulgated under the Exchange Act, and an outside director, as defined under Section 162(m) of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended. Our compensation committee is responsible for, among other things:

· establishing compensation policies and guidelines;
· ensuring compliance with the compensation policies of all applicable banking regulators;
· administering and establishing incentive plans of the Company;
· reviewing the chief executive officer’s mission and objectives and considering succession for the chief executive officer and other senior executives, officers and business unit managers;
· conducting an annual evaluation of the performance of the chief executive officer and other senior executives, officers, and business unit managers;
· annually reviewing and establishing base salary and incentive bonus levels of the chief executive officer and other executive officers of the Company;
· annually evaluating director compensation and establishing the appropriate level of director compensation, including compensation for service as a member or chair of a board committee;
· reviewing and approving contracts of employment or related contracts with directors who are executive officers;

 

74
 

 

· reviewing and approving the terms of any compensation package in the event of early termination of the contract of any executive officer;
· reviewing and approving the Company’s severance programs and change in control agreements;
· providing and approving the report of the compensation committee for inclusion in the Company’s annual proxy statement;
· reviewing the executive compensation section of the Company’s annual proxy statement;
· reviewing and reassessing the adequacy of its charter and the Company’s compensation philosophy; and
· reviewing and evaluating its performance and the independence of its members.

Corporate Governance and Nominating Committee

Our corporate governance and nominating committee is comprised of Messrs. Deal, Clawson, Penney, Rosen, and Wilson. Dr. Deal is the chairman of our corporate governance and nominating committee. Our corporate governance and nominating committee is responsible for, among other things:

· recommending to the board criteria for the selection of new directors, evaluating the qualifications and independence of potential candidates for director, including any nominees submitted by stockholders in accordance with the provisions of the Company’s certificate of incorporation and bylaws, and recommending to the board a slate of nominees for election by stockholders at the annual meeting of stockholders;
· recommending to the board a nominee to be considered to fill a board vacancy or a newly created directorship resulting from any increase in the authorized number of directors;
· recommending to the board standards for determining director independence consistent with applicable legal or regulatory corporate governance requirements and reviewing and assessing those standards on a periodic basis;
· reviewing the qualifications and independence of the members of the board and its various committees on a regular basis and making any recommendations it may deem appropriate concerning changes in the composition of the board and its committees;
· identifying potential candidates for nomination as directors;
· overseeing the orientation and continuing education of directors;
· annually recommending to the board director nominees for each board committee;
· advising the board on removal of any board committee members;
· overseeing the annual self-assessment of the board and its committees;
· reviewing and reassessing the adequacy of the corporate governance principles of the Company and recommending any proposed changes to the board for approval;
· reviewing and assessing the Company’s compliance with the corporate governance principles; and
· reviewing and determining whether to recommend for approval to the board any proposed changes to the Company’s certificate of incorporation or bylaws.

Executive Committee

Our executive committee is comprised of Messrs. Watts, Brandon, Eubank, Moïse, Morrow, Rexroad, Rosen and Wilson. Lt. General Claudius E. Watts, III is the chairman of our executive committee. Our executive committee is responsible for, among other things:

· between meetings of the board, exercising authority on behalf of the board provided that it is otherwise impracticable for the full board to act;
· assisting the board in monitoring the Company’s operations and strategic initiatives with respect to all matters not specifically delegated to other board committees;
· assisting the chairman annually in the establishment of annual goals and objectives for the CEO of the Company for submission to the board of directors;
· consulting with the CEO and other members of senior management as necessary to review on a periodic basis the operations and strategies of the Company;
· reviewing with management prior to submission to the board of directors those matters requiring board approval that are not otherwise referred to other committees of the board;
· in the event of the unavailability of the board, assisting, as appropriate, executive management in dealing with crisis situations within the Company;

 

75
 

 

· annually reviewing with management the proposed budget for the Company and making recommendations to the board of directors with respect to the adoption of the budget;
· conducting, in consultation with the chairman of the compensation committee, periodic evaluations of the CEO’s performance; and
· With assistance from the corporate governance and nominating committee, monitoring the contingency plan for CEO and senior management succession.

Finance and Capital Committee

Our finance and capital committee is comprised of Messrs. Brandon, Rexroad, Deal, Leddy, Moïse and Rosen. Mr. Brandon is the chairman of our finance and capital committee. Our finance and capital committee is responsible for, among other things:

· retaining and terminating advisors to assist the committee in connection with the its work;
· reviewing policies and guidelines with respect to securities, derivatives, mortgage loans, and real estate investments for the Company, including investment quality standards, asset allocation and diversification, and maturity profiles for individual investments and portfolio averages;
· reviewing reports from management concerning investment results and significant portfolio security transactions and their compliance with investment policies and guidelines;
· reviewing the capital structure of the Company annually and monitoring changes to the capital structure during the year;
· reviewing recommendations by management for capital raising activities to support the strategic objectives of the Company;
· reviewing capital ratios and adequacy as compared to regulatory requirements on a quarterly basis;
· reviewing the Company’s insurance programs, including but not limited to, its directors and officers liability coverage;
· reviewing annual operational and capital expenditure plans and recommending to the board approval of significant capital expenditures;
· reviewing recommendations from management concerning distributions to the Company’s stockholders and, if applicable, share repurchase levels;
· designating officers of the Company authorized to enter into securities, loan, real estate and other investment transactions in accordance with the Company’s established investment policies and guidelines and to open or close banking and custodial accounts on behalf of the Company and access the Company’s funds and securities held in such accounts;
· reviewing and monitoring the financial performance of the Company and the Bank and their major business lines; and
· reviewing and monitoring the financial performance of the Company as compared to budget and the goals and objectives set forth in the Company’s strategic plans.

Mergers and Acquisitions Committee

Our mergers and acquisitions committee is comprised of Messrs. Watts, Brandon, Eubank, Moïse, Morrow, Rexroad, Rosen and Wilson. Lt. General Claudius E. Watts, III is the chairman of our mergers and acquisitions committee. Our mergers and acquisitions committee is responsible for, among other things:

·          reviewing, and providing guidance to management and the board with respect to the Company’s acquisition, investment and divestiture strategies;

·          assisting management and the board with the identification of acquisition, investment, and divestiture opportunities;

·          overseeing management and the board’s due diligence process with respect to proposed acquisitions, investments, and divestitures;

·          reviewing acquisition, investment, and divestiture candidates with management, when and as appropriate;

·          reviewing, negotiating, and recommending the relevant terms for each acquisition, investment or divestiture to the board; and

·          retaining and terminating advisors to assist in discharging its duties, including approving such advisors’ fees and retention terms.

76
 

Each of the above committees has a written charter approved by our board of directors. Following the effectiveness of this registration statement, copies of each charter will be posted on the Investor Relations section of our website.

 

Compensation Committee Interlocks and Insider Participation

 

The members of the compensation committee during fiscal 2013 were: Messrs. Penney, Brandon, Deal, Eubank, Leddy, Rosen, and Wilson. No member of this committee was at any time during fiscal 2013 or at any other time an officer or employee of the Company, and with the exception of Mr. Brandon, no member of this committee had any relationship with the Company requiring disclosure under Item 404 of Regulation S-K. Brandon Advertising, Inc. is the marketing agency of record for the Bank. Mr. Brandon is the sole owner and chief executive officer of Brandon Advertising, Inc. During fiscal 2013, the total payments made to Brandon Advertising, Inc. were $530,116, which included media buys paid by Brandon Advertising, Inc. on behalf of the Company. Brandon Advertising, Inc. received revenues of approximately $215,983 from the Company as a result of these payments. No executive officer of the Company has served on the board of directors or compensation committee of any other entity that has or has had one or more executive officers who served as a director or member of our compensation committee during fiscal 2013.

 

Code of Business Conduct and Ethics

 

Our board of directors has adopted a code of business conduct and ethics that applies to all of our employees, officers, and directors. The full text of our code of business conduct and ethics will be posted on the Investor Relations section of our website. We intend to disclose future amendments to certain provisions of our code of business conduct and ethics, or waivers of these provisions, on our website or in filings under the Exchange Act.

 

77
 

Item 6.  Executive Compensation

Summary Compensation Table

 

Name and Principal Position   Year   Salary   Cash Incentive   Stock Awards (2)   Option Awards (3)   LifeComp   All Other Compensation (4)   Total
Jerold L. Rexroad                                                                
Director, President and Chief
Executive Officer; Chairman
and CEO of Crescent Mortgage
Company; Senior Executive
Vice President and Chief
Administrative Officer of
CresCom Bank
    2013     $ 306,000     $ 401,025 (1)   $ 320,000 (1)   $ 120,000     $ —       $ 35,475     $ 1,182,500  
                                                                 
Director, President and Chief
Executive Officer; Chairman
and CEO of Crescent
Mortgage Company; Senior
Executive Vice President and
Chief Administrative Officer
of CresCom Bank
    2012     $ 250,000     $ 1,761,178 (1)   $ —       $ —       $ —       $ 29,500     $ 2,040,678  
                                                                 
David L. Morrow                                                                
Director, Executive Vice
President; Chief Executive
Officer, President and Director
of CresCom Bank
    2013     $ 275,400     $ 175,500     $ 240,000     $ 40,000     $ 140,000     $ 35,475     $ 906,375  
                                                                 
Director, Executive Vice
President; Chief Executive
Officer, President and Director
of CresCom Bank
    2012     $ 233,800     $ 133,000     $ —       $ —       $ 171,270     $ 33,500     $ 571,570  
                                                                 
M. J. Huggins, III                                                                
Executive Vice President and
Secretary; President of
Commercial Banking, Secretary
and Director of CresCom Bank
    2013     $ 245,000     $ 156,250     $ 80,000     $ 10,000     $ 40,000     $ 29,750     $ 561,000  
                                                                 
Director (1/1-5/24/12),
Executive Vice President and
Secretary; President of
Commercial Banking, Secretary
and Director of CresCom Bank
    2012     $ 216,300     $ 69,120     $ —       $ —       $ 49,403     $ 29,250     $ 364,073  

 

(1) At January 1, 2012, Mr. Rexroad was the Chairman and CEO of Crescent Mortgage Company with a bonus compensation arrangement established at 4.5% of the pretax, pre-bonus earnings of Crescent Mortgage Company.  In 2013, as a result of Mr. Rexroad becoming President and CEO of the Company, along with remaining Chairman and CEO of Crescent Mortgage Company, Mr. Rexroad’ s 2013 bonus compensation arrangement for Crescent Mortgage Company was reduced to 2.04% of the pretax, pre-bonus earnings of Crescent Mortgage Company, with 40% of such bonus being paid in shares of restricted stock.  In addition, in 2013 Mr. Rexroad participated in the CresCom Bank bonus program.

 

(2) All 2013 stock awards were issued from the 2013 Equity Incentive Plan. In fiscal 2013, Messrs. Rexroad, Morrow and Huggins were awarded 64,000 restricted shares. In addition, as part of the 2013 Crescent Mortgage Company bonus compensation plan, Mr. Rexroad earned 8,723 shares of restricted stock, as well as an additional 2,908 shares of restricted stock if Crescent Mortgage Company is profitable in the first six months of fiscal 2014, each of which the Company anticipates granting in 2014. The value for each of these awards is its grant date fair value calculated by multiplying the number of shares subject to the award by the market price per share on the date such award was granted, computed in accordance with Financial Accounting Standards Board Accounting Standards Codification Topic 718. The following tables summarize the number of stock options, restricted shares and unrestricted shares awards granted, the grant date and the per share fair value used to calculate the total grant date fair value for the restricted stock awards reported.

78
 

 

Name   # of Restricted Shares Awarded   Grant Date   Per Share Fair Value   Total Grant Date Fair Value
Jerold L. Rexroad     32,000     4/25/2013   $ 10.00     $ 320,000  
David L. Morrow     24,000     4/25/2013   $ 10.00     $ 240,000  
M. J. Huggins, III     8,000     4/25/2013   $ 10.00     $ 80,000  

 

(3) The 2013 option awards included for each individual consists of stock option awards granted under the 2013 Equity Incentive Plan. The value for each of these awards is its grant date fair value calculated by multiplying the number of shares subject to the award by the fair value of the stock option award on the date such award was granted, computed in accordance with Financial Accounting Standards Board Accounting Standards Codification Topic 718. The following table summarizes the number of stock option awards granted, the grant date and the fair value of the stock option award to calculate the total grant date fair value for the option awards reported.

 

Name   # of Stock Options Awarded   Grant Date   Per Share Fair Value   Total Grant Date Fair Value
Jerold L. Rexroad     32,876     4/25/2013   $ 3.65     $ 120,000  
David L. Morrow     10,958     4/25/2013   $ 3.65     $ 40,000  
M. J. Huggins, III     2,740     4/25/2013   $ 3.65     $ 10,000  

 

(4) All other compensation included the Company’s contributions under the 401(k) Plan and car allowances paid by the Company to the named executives.

 

Outstanding Equity Awards at Fiscal Year-End

The following table summarizes outstanding equity awards to our named executive officers at December 31, 2013:

  Stock Options   Stock Awards
  Equity Incentive Plan Awards:
Number of shares underlying
Unexercised Options
  Option
Exercise
  Option
Experiation
  Equity Incentive
Plan Awards:
Number of Unearned
Shares that have not
  Equity Incentive
Plan Awards:
Market of Payout Value
of Unearned Shares that
Name   Exercisable   Unexerisable   Price   Date   Vested   have not Vested
Jerold L. Rexroad     —         32,876     $ 3.65       4/25/2023       32,000     $ 320,000  
David L. Morrow     —         10,958     $ 3.65       4/25/2023       24,000     $ 240,000  
M. J. Huggins, III     —         2,740     $ 3.65       4/25/2023       8,000     $ 80,000  

79
 

Compensation Arrangements of Named Executive Officers

Jerold L. Rexroad

 

Effective as of September 19, 2012, the Company entered into an amendment to the employment agreement between the Company and Jerold L. Rexroad dated May 1, 2008, pursuant to which Mr. Rexroad agreed to serve as president and chief executive officer of the Company for a term of three years, which automatically extends for an additional year on each anniversary date such that the remaining term of the agreement continues to be three years unless the Company provides notice that the agreement will not renew. Under the agreement, Mr. Rexroad is entitled to an annual base salary of not less than $300,000 per year, subject to customary adjustments. Mr. Rexroad is also entitled to incentive compensation, bonuses and employee benefits as provided in any plan of the Company or its subsidiaries. He also received 10,000 shares of restricted common stock of the Company under the agreement, all of which have now vested, and is permitted during the term of the agreement to purchase up to $1 million of common stock of the Company as available and at market prices.

If Mr. Rexroad’s employment is terminated by the Company for any reason other than (i) retirement, disability, or death, (ii) following a change in control, or (iii) for cause, or if Mr. Rexroad resigns from the Company upon certain actions on the part of the Company (each, an “event of termination”), Mr. Rexroad would be entitled to receive a lump sum amount equal to three times the average of the sum of the following items in each of the three years preceding termination: (i) his annualized base salary; (ii) all other cash compensation paid to him in each year of the relevant period; and (iii) contributions made on his behalf to any employee benefit plans sponsored by the Company or its affiliates. Upon the occurrence of an event of termination, Mr. Rexroad will also be entitled to continuation of life, medical and dental coverage until the expiration of the remaining term of the agreement. If Mr. Rexroad voluntarily terminates his employment, the Company may pay to him a severance payment not to exceed three times the average of his annualized base salary over the preceding three years, including bonuses, any other cash compensation, and the amount of any benefits received pursuant to any employment benefit plans.

Upon termination of the agreement based on retirement, no benefits shall be paid to Mr. Rexroad under his agreement, but he will be entitled, if eligible, to all benefits under any retirement plans in which he participates. In the event of termination due to disability, Mr. Rexroad will continue to receive compensation under the agreement for the remaining term of the agreement or one year, whichever is longer, provided that any amounts paid to him pursuant to any disability insurance or program will reduce the compensation paid. In the event of the death of Mr. Rexroad during the term of the agreement, his estate or beneficiary will continue to receive his base salary for one year, and the Company or the Bank will continue to provide medical, dental, family and other benefits for one year after his death.

Following a change of control, if Mr. Rexroad voluntarily terminates his employment within 12 months or if he is subsequently dismissed by the Company (other than for retirement, disability, or death), Mr. Rexroad is entitled to a payment equal to 2.99 times the average of the sum of the following items in each of the last five completed calendar years: (i) his “annual compensation” as reported on his Form W-2 for a calendar year, and (ii) contributions made on his behalf to any employment benefit plans of the Company and its affiliates. The Company would also continue Mr. Rexroad’s life insurance and medical and dental coverage for 36 months following termination.

Mr. Rexroad’s employment agreement also provides that if his employment is terminated following an event of termination, for a period of one year from the effective date of his termination he will not, without written consent of the board of directors, become an officer, employee, consultant, director, independent contractor, agent, sole proprietor, partner, or trustee of any bank or bank holding company, savings bank, savings and loan association, savings and loan holding company, any mortgage or loan broker, or any other entity competing with the Company or its affiliates if such position involves working or providing services within a 30 mile radius of the Company’s main office.

David L. Morrow

Effective as of September 19, 2012, the Bank entered into an amendment to the amended and restated employment agreement between the Bank and David L. Morrow dated as of December 24, 2008, pursuant to which Mr. Morrow agreed to serve as chief executive officer of the Bank for a term of 36 months, which automatically extends for an additional year on each anniversary date such that the remaining term of the agreement continues to be 36 months unless the Bank provides notice that the agreement will not renew. Under the agreement, Mr. Morrow is entitled to an annual base salary of not less than $270,000 per year, which will be reviewed at least annually for upward adjustment. Mr. Morrow is also entitled to incentive compensation, bonuses and employee benefits as provided in any plan of the Bank in which he is eligible to participate.

80
 

If Mr. Morrow’s employment is terminated by the Bank for any reason other than (i) retirement, disability, or death, (ii) following a change in control, or (iii) for cause, or if Mr. Morrow resigns from the Bank for “good reason” (each, an “event of termination”), Mr. Morrow would be entitled to receive a lump sum amount equal to three times the average of the sum of the following items in each of the three years preceding termination: (i) his annualized base salary; (ii) all other cash compensation paid to him in each year of the relevant period; and (iii) contributions made on his behalf to any employee benefit plans sponsored by the Bank or its affiliates. Upon the occurrence of an event of termination, Mr. Morrow would also be entitled to continuation of life, medical and dental coverage until the expiration of the remaining term of the agreement, and the Bank would also continue to honor its obligations as part of the Elite LifeComp Plan. If Mr. Morrow voluntarily terminates his employment, the Bank may pay to him a severance payment not to exceed three times the average of his annualized base salary over the preceding three years, including bonuses, any other cash compensation, and the amount of any benefits received pursuant to any employment benefit plans

Upon termination of the agreement based on retirement, no benefits shall be paid to Mr. Morrow under the agreement, but he will be entitled, if eligible, to all benefits under any retirement plans in which he participates. In the event of termination due to disability, Mr. Morrow will continue to receive compensation under the agreement for the remaining term of the agreement or one year, whichever is longer, provided that any amounts paid to him pursuant to any disability insurance or program will reduce the compensation paid. In the event of the death of Mr. Morrow during the term of the agreement, his estate or beneficiary will continue to receive his base salary for one year, and the Bank will continue to provide medical and dental coverage to his family for one year after his death.

 

Following a change of control, if Mr. Morrow voluntarily terminates his employment within 12 months or if he is subsequently dismissed by the Bank (other than for retirement, disability, or death), Mr. Morrow is entitled to a payment equal to 2.99 times the average of the sum of the following items in each of the five completed calendar years preceding his termination: (i) his “annual compensation” as reported on his Form W-2 for a calendar year, and (ii) contributions made on his behalf to any employment benefit plans of the Company and its affiliates. The Bank would also continue Mr. Morrow’s life insurance and medical and dental coverage for 36 months following termination and continue to honor its obligations as part of the Elite LifeComp Plan.

Mr. Morrow’s employment agreement also provides that if his employment is terminated following an event of termination, for a period of one year following the effective date of his termination, he will not, without written consent of the board of directors, become an officer, employee, consultant, director, independent contractor, agent, sole proprietor, partner, or trustee of any bank or bank holding company, savings bank, savings and loan association, savings and loan holding company, any mortgage or loan broker, or any other entity competing with the Bank or its affiliates if such position involves working or providing services within a 30 mile radius of the Bank’s main office.

 

Also effective as of December 24, 2008, the Company entered into an amended and restated supplemental executive agreement with Mr. Morrow, which provides that, in the event that Mr. Morrow’s employment with the Bank is terminated following a change of control, Mr. Morrow will be entitled to receive, in addition to any amounts or benefits payable by the Bank, an amount equal to the difference, if any, between (i) the amounts that would have been payable to him by the Bank under his employment agreement without regard to any reduction that may be required due to certain payments or benefits constituting “parachute payments” under Section 280G of the Code, and (ii) the amounts actually paid under the employment agreement. In addition, in the event that any payments or benefits provided under the employment agreement are deemed to constitute “excess parachute payments” under Section 280G and are subject to excise tax under Section 4999 of the Code, the Company will pay to Mr. Morrow in cash an additional gross up payment in the amount needed to ensure that the amount of payments and benefits received by him equals the amount of such payments and benefits that he would receive in the absence of such excise tax and any other taxes on the Company’s payment to him attributable to such excise tax.

M. J. Huggins, III

Effective as of September 21, 2012, the Bank entered into an amendment to the amended and restated employment agreement between the Bank and M. J. Huggins, III, dated December 24, 2008, pursuant to which Mr. Huggins agreed to serve as president of commercial banking for the Bank for a term of 36 months, which automatically extends for an additional year on each anniversary date such that the remaining term of the agreement continues to be 36 months unless the Bank provides notice that the agreement will not renew. Under the agreement, Mr. Huggins is entitled to an annual base salary of not less than $240,000 per year, which will be reviewed at least annually for upward adjustment. Mr. Huggins is also entitled to incentive compensation, bonuses and employee benefits as provided in any plan of the Bank in which he is eligible to participate.

81
 

If Mr. Huggins’s employment is terminated by the Bank for any reason other than (i) retirement, disability, or death, (ii) following a change in control, or (iii) for cause, or if Mr. Huggins resigns from the Bank for “good reason” (each, an “event of termination”), Mr. Huggins would be entitled to receive a lump sum amount equal to three times the average of the sum of the following items in each of the three years preceding termination: (i) his annualized base salary; (ii) all other cash compensation paid to him in each year of the relevant period; and (iii) contributions made on his behalf to any employee benefit plans sponsored by the Bank or its affiliates. Upon the occurrence of an event of termination, Mr. Huggins would also be entitled to continuation of life, medical and dental coverage until the expiration of the remaining term of the agreement, and the Bank would also continue to honor its obligations as part of the Elite LifeComp Plan. If Mr. Huggins voluntarily terminates his employment, the Bank may pay to him a severance payment not to exceed three times the average of his annualized base salary over the preceding three years, including bonuses, any other cash compensation, and the amount of any benefits received pursuant to any employment benefit plans.

Upon termination of the agreement based on retirement, no benefits shall be paid to Mr. Huggins under the agreement, but he will be entitled, if eligible, to all benefits under any retirement plans in which he participates. In the event of termination due to disability, Mr. Huggins will continue to receive compensation under the agreement for the remaining term of the agreement or one year, whichever is longer, provided that any amounts paid to him pursuant to any disability insurance or program will reduce the compensation paid. In the event of the death of Mr. Huggins during the term of the agreement, his estate or beneficiary will continue to receive his base salary for one year, and the Bank will continue to provide medical and dental coverage to his family for one year after his death.

 

Following a change of control, if Mr. Huggins voluntarily terminates his employment within 12 months or if he is subsequently dismissed by the Bank (other than for retirement, disability, or death), Mr. Huggins is entitled to a payment equal to 2.99 times the average of the sum of the following items in each of the five completed calendar years preceding his termination: (i) his “annual compensation” as reported on his Form W-2 for a calendar year, and (ii) contributions made on his behalf to any employment benefit plans of the Bank and its affiliates. The Bank would also continue Mr. Huggins’ life insurance and medical and dental coverage for 36 months following termination and continue to honor its obligations as part of the Elite LifeComp Plan.

 

Mr. Huggins’ employment agreement also provides that if his employment is terminated for an event of termination, for a period of one year following his termination, he will not, without written consent of the board of directors, become an officer, employee, consultant, director, independent contractor, agent, sole proprietor, partner, or trustee of any bank or bank holding company, savings bank, savings and loan association, savings and loan holding company, any mortgage or loan broker, or any other entity competing with the Bank or its affiliates if such position involves working or providing services within a 30 mile radius of the Bank’s main office.

 

Also effective as of December 24, 2008, the Company entered into an amended and restated supplemental executive agreement with Mr. Huggins, which provides that, in the event that Mr. Huggins’ employment with the Bank is terminated following a change of control, Mr. Huggins will be entitled to receive, in addition to any amounts or benefits payable by the Bank, an amount equal to the difference, if any, between (i) the amounts that would have been payable to him by the Bank under his employment agreement without regard to any reduction that may be required due to certain payments or benefits constituting “parachute payments” under Section 280G of the Code, and (ii) the amounts actually paid under the employment agreement. In addition, in the event that any payments or benefits provided under the employment agreement are deemed to constitute “excess parachute payments” under Section 280G and are subject to excise tax under Section 4999 of the Code, the Company will pay to Mr. Huggins in cash an additional gross up payment in the amount needed to ensure that the amount of payments and benefits received by him equals the amount of such payments and benefits that he would receive in the absence of such excise tax and any other taxes on the Company’s payment to him attributable to such excise tax.

82
 

Benefit Plans

2013 Equity Incentive Plan

In 2013, we adopted, and our stockholders approved, the 2013 Equity Incentive Plan (the “2013 Plan”). The purpose of the 2013 Plan is to enable the Company to attract and retain highly qualified personnel who will contribute to the Company’s success and to provide incentives for recipients to increase stockholder value, therefore further aligning the interests of the recipients with those of the stockholders to benefit all stockholders of the Company. The material terms of the 2013 Plan are summarized below.

Share Reserve . Under the 2013 Plan, 500,000 shares of our common stock are reserved for issuance pursuant to a variety of stock-based compensation awards, which shares may be authorized and unissued shares or treasury shares held by the Company.

The following provisions will be in effect for the shares reserved under the 2013 Plan:

· to the extent that an award lapses, terminates, cancels, or expires and is thereafter forfeited to or otherwise reacquired by the Company, the shares subject to such award and the forfeited or reacquired shares will again be available for issuance under the 2013 Plan;
· to the extent that shares are tendered by a recipient or retained by the Company as full or partial payment for the purchase price of an award, such shares will again be available for issuance under the 2013 Plan;
· shares covered by an award that is settled in cash or in a manner that some or all shares covered by the award are not issued will remain available for awards under the 2013 Plan; and
· the number of shares available for issuance under the 2013 Plan will not be reduced to reflect any dividends or dividend equivalents that are reinvested into additional shares of common stock or credited as additional shares of common stock paid with respect to an award.

In addition, the maximum number of shares of our common stock that may be subject to one or more awards granted to any one participant pursuant to the 2013 Plan during any calendar year is 500,000, and to the extent required by Section 162(m) of the Internal Revenue Code, shares subject to options which are canceled will continue to be counted against the 500,000 maximum.

Administration. The 2013 Plan will be administered by our board of directors or by the compensation committee or other committee the board appoints to administer the plan. The composition of any committee of the board administering the 2013 Plan will be subject to certain limitations that may be imposed under Section 162(m) of the Internal Revenue Code, Section 16 of the Exchange Act, and/or stock exchange rules, as applicable. We refer to the body that administers the 2013 Plan as the “administrator.”

Subject to the terms and conditions of the 2013 Plan, the administrator has the authority to select the persons to whom awards are to be made, determine the number of shares subject to awards, establish the terms and conditions of awards, and to make all other determinations and to take all other actions necessary or advisable for the administration of the 2013 Plan. The administrator is also authorized to establish, adopt, or revise rules relating to administration of the 2013 Plan. The administrator may not, however, take any action that has the effect of repricing outstanding options granted under the plan without prior approval of the Company’s stockholders.

Eligibility. Awards under the 2013 Plan may be granted to individuals who are then our officers, directors, employees, consultants, or advisors of the Company or any subsidiary. Only current employees of the Company may be granted incentive stock options.

Awards. The 2013 Plan provides that the administrator may grant or issue stock options, restricted stock, or any combination thereof. Each award will be set forth in a separate agreement between the Company and the recipient that will indicate the type, terms and conditions of the award.

Incentive Stock Options will be designed in a manner intended to qualify as such under the provisions of Section 422 of the Internal Revenue Code and will be subject to specified restrictions contained in the Internal Revenue Code. Among such restrictions, incentive stock options must have an exercise price of not less than the fair market value of a share of common stock on the date of grant, may only be granted to employees, and must not be exercisable after a period of ten years measured from the date of grant. In the case of an incentive stock option granted to certain significant stockholders, the 2013 Plan provides that the exercise price must be at least 110% of the fair market value of a share of common stock on the date of grant and must not be exercisable after a period of five years measured from the date of grant.

83
 

Nonqualified Stock Options are any options granted under the 2013 Plan that are not incentive stock options. Each nonqualified stock option provides for the right to purchase shares of our common stock at a specified price which may not be less than fair market value on the date of grant, and may become exercisable (at the discretion of the administrator) in one or more installments after the grant date, subject to the participant’s continued employment or service with us and/or subject to the satisfaction of corporate or individual performance targets, or any other condition established by the administrator. Nonqualified stock options may be granted for any term specified by the administrator that does not exceed ten years.

Restricted Stock may be granted either alone or in addition to options to any eligible individual under the 2013 Plan, and may be granted subject to such restrictions as determined by the administrator. Restricted stock typically may be forfeited for no consideration or repurchased by us at the original purchase price if the conditions or restrictions on vesting are not met. In general, restricted stock may not be sold or otherwise transferred until the restrictions lapse. Recipients of restricted stock, unlike recipients of options, generally will have voting rights and will have the right to receive dividends, if any, prior to the time when the restrictions lapse.

Performance Awards . Performance awards include any of the awards that are granted subject to vesting and/or payment based on the attainment of specified performance goals. The administrator may set performance goals including, but not limited to, goals set for the purpose of qualifying the awards as “qualified performance-based compensation,” in which case the applicable performance criteria will be selected in accordance with the requirements of Section 162(m) of the Internal Revenue Code.

Section 162(m) of the Code imposes a $1,000,000 cap on the compensation deduction that we may take in respect of compensation paid to our “covered employees,” but excludes from the calculation of amounts subject to this limitation any amounts that constitute “qualified performance-based compensation.” In order to constitute “qualified performance-based compensation” under Section 162(m) of the Code, in addition to certain other requirements, the relevant amounts must be payable only upon the attainment of pre-established, objective performance goals set by our compensation committee and linked to stockholder-approved performance criteria.

Change in Control . In the event of a change in control where the acquiror does not assume or substitute awards granted, immediately prior to the completion of such transaction, awards issued under the 2013 Plan will be subject to accelerated vesting such that 100% of such awards will become vested and exercisable or payable, as applicable. Restrictions and forfeiture conditions applicable to any awards will lapse, and any performance conditions imposed will be deemed to have been fully achieved. Alternatively, the board, in its sole discretion, may provide for cash payments in lieu of awards outstanding at the time of a change in control, with such awards thereafter deemed paid in full and canceled.

Adjustments of Awards . In the event of any merger, consolidation, combination, reorganization, recapitalization, reclassification, extraordinary cash dividend, stock dividend, stock split, reverse stock split, or other change in corporate structure, the administrator will make equitable adjustments to:

· the aggregate number of shares reserved for issuance under the 2013 Plan;
· the kind, number, and exercise price of shares issuable with respect to outstanding options granted under the 2013 Plan; and
· the kind and number of shares subject to any outstanding awards of restricted stock granted under the plan

Equitable adjustments made with respect to incentive stock options will be subject to compliance with applicable provisions of the Internal Revenue Code.

Transferability of Awards . Except as otherwise provided in the applicable award agreement, options generally may not be sold, pledged, assigned, hypothecated, transferred, or disposed of in any manner other than by will, or by the laws of descent and distribution, except that nonqualified stock options may be transferred if and to the extent set forth in the award agreement. Subject to the terms of the award agreement, shares of restricted stock granted generally may not be transferred until the administrator has provided for the lapse of restrictions on the shares.

84
 

Amendment and Termination . Our board may terminate, amend, or modify the 2013 Plan at any time and from time to time; provided, however, that any modification or discontinuation of the 2013 Plan that would materially impair the rights of an award recipient may not be made without the recipient’s consent. The administrator may amend the terms of any award or award agreement to avoid adverse tax consequences to the Company under Internal Revenue Code Section 409A or to comply with the Company’s “clawback” policy regarding incentive compensation, the “clawback” provisions of Sarbanes-Oxley or the “clawback” requirements of the Dodd-Frank Act. Approval of the Company’s stockholders will be necessary for any amendment that would increase the total number of shares reserved for issuance under the plan or change the class of officers, directors, employees, consultants, and advisors eligible to participate in the 2013 Plan.

2006 Recognition and Retention Plan

Our board of directors adopted the 2006 Recognition and Retention Plan (the “2006 Plan”) to further advance the interests of the Company and its stockholders by providing additional incentive compensation for key management and to attract people of experience and ability. The 2006 Plan provides for the grant of restricted stock to our employees and outside directors. Though we have adopted the 2013 Plan, all outstanding awards granted pursuant to the 2006 Plan will continue to be governed by its existing terms. The material terms of the 2006 Plan are summarized below.

Administration. Our board, through a committee of its members determined in its sole discretion, administers the 2006 Plan and the awards granted thereunder. After the filing of this registration statement and pursuant to the 2006 Plan, the committee will be modified, if necessary, to consist of (i) at least two non-employee directors of the Company, or (ii) the entire board of the Company.

Limitations on Awards. The aggregate number of shares of our common stock that may be issued pursuant to the 2006 Plan is 60,000 shares, which shares may be authorized but unissued shares, treasury shares, or shares acquired by the Company through open market purchases. In the event that shares are forfeited by a recipient, such shares will be returned to the Company and available for an award to a new recipient.

Restricted Stock. The 2006 Plan provides for the grant of restricted stock subject to the terms and conditions of both the 2006 Plan and additional terms and conditions the committee chooses to place on them. The shares of restricted stock so granted will vest in a recipient at rates determined by the committee, provided that the recipient remains continuously employed or maintains continuous service as an outside director.

Corporate Transactions. In the event of certain significant corporate transactions which alter the capitalization or number of shares of the Company, the committee has the discretion to appropriately adjust the number of shares granted under the 2006 Plan. Any additional awards granted as a result of these certain corporate transactions will be subject to the same terms and conditions as all other awards granted under the 2006 Plan.

Amendment and Termination. Our board of directors may amend, suspend, or terminate the 2006 Plan at any time; provided, however, that no amendment or termination may impair the rights of an outstanding award without the affected recipient’s consent. In addition, no award may be granted pursuant to the 2006 Plan after the earlier of (i) 10 years after the date of approval of the plan by the Company’s stockholders, or (ii) the date on which the exercise of awards equaling the maximum number of shares reserved under the Plan occurs.

2002 Stock Option Plan

We established the 2002 Stock Option Plan (the “2002 Plan”) to advance the interests of the Company and its stockholders by providing employees and outside directors, upon whose management and efforts the success of the Company and its subsidiaries depend, as an additional incentive to perform in a superior manner. The 2002 Plan provides for the grant of incentive stock options, non-statutory stock options, and limited rights to employees and outside directors of our Company and our subsidiaries. Pursuant to the termination provisions of the 2002 Plan, we have ceased making awards under the Plan; however, all outstanding awards will continue to be governed by their existing terms. The material terms of the 2002 Plan are summarized below.

Administration. A committee of our board, as determined in the board’s discretion, administers the 2002 Plan and the awards granted thereunder.

85
 

Limitations on Awards . The maximum number of shares of our common stock reserved for issuance pursuant to the 2002 Plan is 160,700 shares, which shares may be authorized but unissued shares or treasury shares held by the Company. To the extent that options or rights granted under the plan are exercised, the shares covered will be unavailable for future grants under the plan; however, to the extent that options together with any related rights granted under the plan terminate, expire, or are canceled without having been exercised or, in the case of limited rights exercised for cash, new awards may be made with respect to those shares.

Incentive Stock Options . The 2002 Plan provides that incentive stock options may be granted from time to time to Company employees. Each incentive stock option granted is governed by a written option agreement between the Company and the employee recipient that specifies the exercise price and number of options granted. Incentive stock option grants are intended by the committee to comply with the terms of Section 422 of the Internal Revenue Code.

Non-Statutory Stock Options . The 2002 Plan provides that non-statutory stock options may be granted to eligible employees and outside directors. The non-statutory stock options so granted in the committee’s discretion are governed by written option agreements between the Company and the recipients that specify the exercise price and number of options granted. Non-statutory stock options do not qualify as “incentive stock options” within the meaning of Section 422 of the Internal Revenue Code.

Limited Rights . The 2002 Plan also provides that the committee may issue limited rights to any employee simultaneously with any grant of options. Such limited rights may cover all or some of the shares subject to the underlying option. The limited rights are exercisable only when the underlying option is eligible to be exercised and is in-the-money, and only in the event of a change in control of the Company. Limited rights may be for no more than 100% of the difference between the exercise price and the fair market value of the common stock subject to the underlying option.

Corporate Transactions . In the event of certain significant corporate transactions causing a change in the number of outstanding shares of common stock of the Company, the committee has the discretion to take one or more of the following actions with respect to previously granted awards to prevent the dilution or enlargement of rights of any recipient:

· provide adjustments to the aggregate number of kind of shares of common stock that may be awarded under the Plan;
· provide adjustments to the aggregate number or kind of shares of common stock covered by awards already made under the Plan; or
· provide adjustments in the purchase price of outstanding awards.

None of the above-mentioned adjustments are permitted when the value of the benefits available to eligible participants under the 2002 Plan would be materially altered, and no such adjustment can be made to an incentive stock option that would be deemed a “modification” under Section 424 of the Internal Revenue Code.

 

Amendment and Termination . Our board of directors may amend or terminate the 2002 Plan at any time; however, no amendment or termination may alter an outstanding award without the affected recipient’s consent. Pursuant to the 2002 Plan’s termination provisions, we have ceased granting awards under the 2002 Plan.

 

Elite LifeComp Program

Life insurance policies have been purchased on the lives of each of Messrs. Morrow and Huggins under split-dollar life insurance arrangements between each executive and the Bank in order to provide each executive with target retirement and death benefits following termination of employment. Under the arrangements, referred to as the LifeComp Agreements, the executives are named as the policy owners, but the Bank pays the premiums on each policy for a period of years and is entitled to recover a death benefit of $1.8 million under the policy as key man insurance. Until the executive attains an age specified in such executive’s agreement, the Bank annually pays to each executive an amount that is deemed to be, initially, a partial premium payment, and later, an incremental increase in the executive’s interest in the policy’s cash surrender value. Also, during the term of the executive’s employment, the Bank pays to the executive an amount sufficient to cover the interest payments owed by the executive to the Company on the loans, and also an additional amount to cover federal income taxes to which the executive becomes subject upon payment of bonuses.

86
 

Under an addendum to the LifeComp Agreement entered into and effective as of January 2007, if the executive’s employment with the Bank terminates for reasons other than for cause or due to a change in control, the Company has agreed to continue its obligations under the LifeComp Agreement until the date on which the split-dollar life insurance arrangement is terminated. Pursuant to the agreements with Messrs. Huggins and Morrow, the termination date is February 27, 2022 and February 27, 2015, respectively. Until such termination date, the addendum requires the Company, or its successor, to make all premium payments that would become due after the change in control or event of termination and also to “gross-up” the executive’s income through a series of bonus payments in order to: (i) facilitate the executive’s payment of his portion of the premiums, (ii) enable the executive to partially repay the accumulated loan balance on the deemed loans made by the Bank to the executive to pay the executive’s portion of said premiums, (iii) cover the deemed interest due on such loans, and (iv) cover federal income taxes that each executive would owe with respect to the deemed bonuses and interest owed (but not paid) on the loans. Beginning at retirement age (age 64 in the case of Mr. Morrow and age 60 in the case of Mr. Huggins), the executive is entitled to draw a retirement benefit from the cash surrender value of the policy for a period of up to 15 years. The annual target retirement benefit payable to Messrs. Morrow and Huggins is $75,000. In addition, each executive is entitled to a death benefit from the policy of $1 million prior to retirement, and a lesser amount once the executive begins to receive the retirement benefits under the policy. In the event the executive is terminated for cause, the executive loses all rights under the agreement. The Company incurred an aggregate premium of $108,000 in fiscal 2013 on the life insurance policies. In addition, $72,000 in aggregate bonuses were credited to the executives under the terms of the agreements.

Director Compensation

In 2013, our board of directors approved an annual retainer fee of $2,500 for each of our non-employee directors. In addition, starting on January 1, 2014, the chairman of our audit committee will receive an annual retainer fee of $50,000. Prior to our filing of this registration statement, there was no formal policy in place to provide our directors with equity compensation for their services as members of our board of directors or any committee of our board of directors. In 2013, our board of directors approved the grant of 300 shares of common stock to all non-employee directors of the holding company.

Although there was no formal policy in place relating to the granting of equity awards to our directors, the following table presents the total compensation for each person who served as a member of our board of directors during 2013. Other than as set forth in the table and described more fully below, in 2013, we did not pay any fees to, make any equity awards or non-equity awards to, or pay any other compensation to the members of our board of directors. Mr. Rexroad, the Company’s President and Chief Executive Officer, and Mr. Morrow, the Company’s Executive Vice President, receive no compensation for their service as directors and are not included in the table below.

 

Director Name  

Fees Earned or

Paid in
Cash (1)

  Stock Awards   Total
William H. Alford   $ 15,700     $ 3,000     $ 18,700  
Howell V. Bellamy, Jr.   $ 4,300     $ 3,000     $ 7,300  
W. Scott Brandon   $ 20,200     $ 3,000     $ 23,200  
Robert G. Clawson, Jr.   $ 30,400     $ 3,000     $ 33,400  
Jeffery L. Deal, M.D.   $ 22,000     $ 3,000     $ 25,000  
G. Manly Eubank   $ 19,800     $ 3,000     $ 22,800  
Michael P. Leddy   $ 19,600     $ 3,000     $ 22,600  
Robert M. Moïse, CPA   $ 19,000     $ 3,000     $ 22,000  
Thompson E. Penney   $ 15,300     $ 3,000     $ 18,300  
Benedict P. Rosen   $ 21,400     $ 3,000     $ 24,400  
Lt. General Claudius E. Watts, III (USAF, Retired)   $ 50,000     $ 3,000     $ 53,000  
Bonum S. Wilson, Jr.   $ 21,100     $ 3,000     $ 24,100  
John D. Russ   $ 2,800     $ 3,000     $ 5,800  

 

(1)  Includes fees, if any, for serving on boards of the Company’s subsidiaries.

 

87
 

Item 7.  Certain Relationships and Related Transactions, and Director Independence

 

Transactions with Related Parties

 

CresCom Bank has had, and expect to have in the future, loans and other banking transactions in the ordinary course of business with directors (including our independent directors) and executive officers of the Company and its subsidiaries, including members of their families or corporations, partnerships or other organizations in which such officers or directors have a controlling interest (collectively referred to as “related parties”). These loans were made on substantially the same terms (including interest rates and collateral) as those prevailing at the time for comparable transactions with persons not related to the Bank and did not involve more than the normal risks of collectability or present other unfavorable features.

 

In addition, the Bank is subject to the provisions of Section 23A of the Federal Reserve Act, which places limits on the amount of loans or extensions of credit to, or investments in, or certain other transactions with, affiliates and on the amount of advances to third parties collateralized by the securities or obligations of affiliates. The Bank is also subject to the provisions of Section 23B of the Federal Reserve Act which, among other things, prohibits an institution from engaging in certain transactions with certain affiliates unless the transactions are on terms substantially the same, or at least as favorable to such institution or its subsidiaries, as those prevailing at the time for comparable transactions with nonaffiliated companies.

 

The aggregate dollar amount of loans outstanding to directors, executive officers, and their controlled entities was approximately $12.9 million at December 31, 2013.

 

In addition, Brandon Advertising, Inc. is the marketing agency of record for the Bank. Mr. Brandon, one of the Company’s directors, is the sole owner and chief executive officer of Brandon Advertising, Inc. During fiscal 2013, the total payments made to Brandon Advertising, Inc. were $530,116, which included media buys paid by Brandon Advertising, Inc. on behalf of the Company. Brandon Advertising, Inc. received revenues of approximately $215,983 from the Company as a result of these payments.

 

We have a written policy that governs the identification, approval, ratification, and monitoring of transactions with related parties. The Board of Directors of the Company must approve all such transactions under the policy. No member of the Board of Directors may participate in any review or approval of a transaction with respect to which such member or any of his family members is a related person.

 

Director Independence

 

The board of directors annually evaluates the independence of its members based on the criteria for determining independence based on Item 407(a) of Regulation S-K and NASDAQ listing standards. In addition, our corporate governance guidelines and principles require that a majority of the board be composed of directors who meet the requirements for independence established by these standards. The board of directors has concluded that the Company has a majority of independent directors. The board has determined that Messrs. Alford, Bellamy, Brandon Clawson, Deal, Eubank, Leddy, Moise, Penney, Rosen, Watts, and Wilson are independent taking into account the matters discussed under “Certain Relationships and Related Transactions.” Mr. Rexroad, the Company’s President and Chief Executive Officer, and Mr. Morrow, the Company’s Executive Vice President, are not considered to be independent as they are also executive officers of the Company. Similarly, Mr. Russ is not considered to be independent as he has been an executive officer of the Company during the past three years.

 

Item 8.  Legal Proceedings

 

We are not a party to any material pending legal proceedings, other than ordinary routine litigation incident to our business.

 

88
 

Item 9.  Market Price of and Dividends on the Registrant’s Common Equity and Related Stockholder Matters.

Market Information

No established public trading market exists for our common stock, and there can be no assurance that a public trading market for our common stock will develop.  Our common stock has been quoted on the OTCQB marketplace, or OTCQB, since October 9, 2013 under the symbol “CARO,” and we have a sponsoring broker-dealer to match buy and sell orders for our common stock. Although we are quoted on the OTCQB, the trading markets on the OTCQB lack the depth, liquidity, and orderliness necessary to maintain a liquid market. The OTCQB prices are quotations, which reflect inter-dealer prices, without retail mark-up, mark-down or commissions and may not represent actual transactions.

The following table sets forth, for the periods indicated, the high and low bid prices of the Company’s common stock traded on the OTCQB. On January 15, 2014, the Board of Directors of the Company declared a two-for-one stock split to stockholders of record as of February 10, 2014, payable on February 28, 2014. All share data below has been retroactively adjusted to reflect this stock split.

 

Fiscal Quarter Ended       High       Low  
December 31, 2013     $ 17.50     $ 15.44  

 

As of February 26, 2014, we had 4,019,104 shares of common stock issued and outstanding and approximately 400 stockholders of record. In addition there were outstanding options or warrants to purchase, or securities convertible into, 63,214 shares of our common stock. As of February 25, 2014, 3,846,204 shares of our common stock are eligible for resale subject to the limitations of Rule 144 promulgated under the Securities Act.

Prior to 2013, there were no dividends paid to stockholders. On April 17, 2013, the board of directors declared a $0.10 dividend to stockholders of record dated August 9, 2013, payable on August, 28, 2013, for a total payment of $199,894. On October 16, 2013, the board of directors declared a $0.10 dividend to stockholders of record dated December 5, 2013, payable on December 20, 2013, for a total payment of $200.044. On January 15, 2014, the board of directors declared a $0.05 dividend to stockholders of record dated March 26, 2014, payable on April 11, 2014, for a total expected payment of $200,955. Also, as noted above, on that same day, the board of directors declared a two-for-one stock split of the Company’s common stock.

Equity Compensation Plan Information

The following table provides information as of December 31, 2013, with respect to shares of our common stock that may be issued under existing equity compensation plans. On January 15, 2014, the Board of Directors of the Company declared a two-for-one stock split to stockholders of record dated February 10, 2014, payable on February 28, 2014. All share data below has been retroactively adjusted to reflect this stock split.

 

 

 

 

 

 

Plan Category

  Number of securities to be issued upon exercise of outstanding options, warrants and rights   Weighted-average exercise price of outstanding options, warrants and rights   Number of securities remaining available for future issuance under equity compensation plans
Equity compensation plans approved by security holders     63,214     $ 10.40       276,046  
Equity compensation plans not approved by security holders     —         —         —    
Total     63,214     $ 10.40       276,046  

 

89
 

Item 10.  Recent Sales of Unregistered Securities

 

On April 25, 2013, the Company granted 160,900 shares of restricted stock to certain directors, executive officers, and employees of the Company and its subsidiaries in accordance with the terms of the 2013 Equity Incentive Plan. The awards of restricted stock granted to the Company’s directors (3,900 shares in total) vested immediately on the grant date, while awards granted to the Company’s executive officers and certain employees (132,000 shares in total) are subject to incremental vesting over a four-year period (25% of each award to vest annually on the first four anniversaries of the grant date). The awards granted to the remaining employees (25,000 shares in total) cliff vest on the fourth anniversary of the grant date, or April 25, 2017.

 

On May 17, 2013, the Company granted 4,000 shares of restricted stock to a new employee of the Company, which are subject to incremental vesting over a four-year period (25% of the award to vest annually on the first four anniversaries of the grant date). On November 20, 2013, an additional 14,000 shares of restricted stock were granted to certain employees, which are subject to incremental vesting over a five-year period (20% of each award to vest annually on the first five anniversaries of the grant date). Both grants were made in accordance with the terms of the 2013 Equity Incentive Plan.

 

On January 15, 2014, the Company granted a total of 3,900 shares of restricted stock to the directors of the Company (300 shares each). The awards of shares of restricted stock vested immediately on the grant date. The grants were made in accordance with the terms of the 2013 Equity Incentive Plan.

 

Of the 182,800 shares of restricted stock awarded as described above, 3,000 have been subsequently forfeited by the grantee.

 

On April 25, 2013, the Company also granted 52,054 options to purchase shares of common stock with an exercise price of $7.30 per share to the Company’s executive officers in accordiance with the terms of the 2013 Equity Incentive Plan. The options cliff vest on the second anniversary of the grant date, or Apirl 25, 2015.

 

Upon termination of employment, any unvested awards will be forfeited, and upon a change in control of the Company (as defined by the Plan), any unvested awards will be fully vested.

 

                A copy of the 2013 Equity Incentive Plan is attached to this registration statement as Exhibit 10.11. All of the shares of restricted stock and options described above were granted in reliance upon the exemption from registration provided by Rule 701, promulgated under Section 3(b) of the Securities Act, which provides an exemption from the registration requirements of the Securities Act for certain offers and sales of securities under a written compensatory benefit plan or compensation contract.

 

Item 11.  Description of Registrant’s Securities to be Registered

 

General

Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation authorizes us to issue up to 6,800,000 shares of common stock, $0.01 par value per share, and 200,000 shares of preferred stock, $0.01 par value per share. As of February 26, 2014, we had 4,019,104 shares of our common stock and no shares of preferred stock issued and outstanding.

The description of our capital stock below is qualified in its entirety by reference to our amended and restated certificate of incorporation.

Common Stock

General. Each share of common stock has the same relative rights as, and is identical in all respects to, each other share of common stock.

Voting Rights. Each share of common stock entitles the holder to one vote on all matters submitted to a vote of common stockholders, including the election of directors; provided, however, that any stockholder that beneficially owns, directly or indirectly, in excess of 10% of the then-outstanding shares of our common stock, will not be entitled or permitted to any vote in respect of the shares held in excess of such 10% limit. The number of votes which may be cast by any record owner by virtue of this restriction is equal to the total number of votes which a single record owner of all common stock owned by such person would be entitled to cast, multiplied by a fraction, the numerator of which is the number of shares of such class or series which are both beneficially owned by such person and owned of record by such record owner and the denominator of which is the total number of shares of common stock beneficially owned by such person owning shares in excess of the limit. There is no cumulative voting in the election of directors. All elections of directors are determined by a plurality of the votes cast, and except as otherwise required by our certificate of incorporation or by applicable Delaware law, all other matters are determined by a majority of the votes cast at a properly called meeting of stockholders.

The affirmative vote of the holders of at least 80% of the voting power of all of the then-outstanding shares of capital stock entitled to vote generally in the election of directors, voting together as a single class, is required to amend or repeal certain provisions of our certificate of incorporation, including those provisions regarding voting shares held in excess of the 10% limit described above, special meetings of stockholders, the election and removal of directors, amendment of our bylaws, business combinations with interested stockholders, indemnification of directors and officers, and amendments of our certificate of incorporation.

Dividends, Liquidation and Other Rights. Holders of shares of common stock are entitled to receive dividends only when, as and if approved by our board of directors from funds legally available for the payment of dividends. Our ability to pay dividends will be dependent on our earnings and financial conditions and subject to certain restrictions imposed by state and federal laws.

Our stockholders are entitled to share ratably in our assets legally available for distribution to our stockholders in the event of our liquidation, dissolution or winding up, voluntarily or involuntarily, after payment of, or adequate provision for, all of our known debts and liabilities. These rights are subject to the preferential rights of any series of our preferred stock that may then be outstanding.

Holders of shares of our common stock have no preference, conversion, exchange, sinking fund or redemption rights and have no preemptive rights to subscribe for any of our securities. All outstanding shares of our common stock are fully paid, nonassessable, and noncallable.

Certain Ownership Restrictions. The Company is a bank holding company. A holder of common stock (or group of holders acting in concert) that (i) directly or indirectly owns, controls or has the power to vote more than 5% of the total voting power of the Company, (ii) directly or indirectly owns, controls or has the power to vote 10% or more of any class of voting securities of the Company, (iii) directly or indirectly owns, controls or has the power to vote 25% or more of the total equity of the Company, or (iv) is otherwise deemed to “control” the Company under applicable regulatory standards may be subject to important restrictions, such as prior regulatory notice or approval requirements.

90
 

Preferred Stock

Our board of directors is authorized, without stockholder approval and subject to any limitations prescribed by law, to provide for the issuance of the shares of preferred stock in series, and by filing a certificate pursuant to the applicable law of the State of Delaware, to establish from time to time the number of shares to be included in each such series and to fix the designation, powers, preferences, and rights of the shares of each such series and any qualifications, limitations, or restrictions thereof. Accordingly, our board of directors, without stockholder approval, may authorize the issuance of one or more series of preferred stock with voting and conversion rights which could adversely affect the voting power of the holders of common stock and, under certain circumstances, discourage an attempt by others to gain control of the Company. The creation and issuance of any additional series of preferred stock, and the relative rights, designations, and preferences of each such series, if and when established, will depend on, among other things, our future capital needs, then existing market conditions, and other factors that, in the judgment of our board of directors, might warrant the issuance of preferred stock.

The number of authorized shares of preferred stock may be increased or decreased (but not below the number of shares then outstanding) by the affirmative vote of the holders of a majority of the common stock, without a vote of the holders of the preferred stock, or of any series thereof, unless a vote of any such holders is required by the terms of any preferred stock designation.

Certain Anti-Takeover Provisions

General. Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and bylaws, as well as Delaware General Corporation Law, contain certain provisions designed to enhance the ability of our board of directors to deal with attempts to acquire control of us. These provisions may be deemed to have an anti-takeover effect and may discourage takeover attempts which have not been approved by the board of directors (including takeovers which certain stockholders may deem to be in their best interest). This summary does not purport to be complete and is qualified in its entirety by reference to the laws and documents referenced. With respect to our charter documents, while such provisions might be deemed to have some “anti-takeover” effect, the principal effect of these provisions is to protect our stockholders generally and to provide our board and stockholders a reasonable opportunity to evaluate and respond to such unsolicited acquisition proposals.

Authorized but Unissued Stock. The authorized but unissued shares of common stock and preferred stock will be available for future issuance without stockholder approval. These additional shares may be used for a variety of corporate purposes, including future private or public offerings to raise additional capital, corporate acquisitions, and employee benefit plans. The existence of authorized but unissued and unreserved shares of common stock and preferred stock may enable the board of directors to issue shares to persons friendly to current management, which could render more difficult or discourage any attempt to obtain control of us by means such as a proxy contest, tender offer, or merger, and thereby protect the continuity of the Company’s management.

Number and Classification of Directors. Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and bylaws provide that the number of directors shall be fixed from time to time exclusively by the board of directors pursuant to a resolution adopted by a majority of the total number of authorized directorships (whether or not there exist any vacancies in previously authorized directorships at the time any such resolutions is presented to the board), except that in the absence of any such designation, the number shall be 14. The board of directors is divided into three classes so that each director serves for a term expiring at the third succeeding annual meeting of stockholders after their election with each director to hold office until his or her successor is duly elected and qualified. The classification of directors, together with the provisions in the amended and restated certificate of incorporation and bylaws described below that limit the ability of stockholders to remove directors and that permit the remaining directors to fill any vacancies on the board of directors, have the effect of making it more difficult for stockholders to change the composition of the board of directors. As a result, at least two annual meetings of stockholders may be required for the stockholders to change a majority of the directors, whether or not a change in the board of directors would be beneficial and whether or not a majority of stockholders believe that such a change would be desirable, and three meetings, rather than one, would be required to replace the entire board.

 

91
 

Removal of Directors and Filling Vacancies. Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation provides that any director, or the entire board of directors, may be removed from office at any time, but only for cause and only by the affirmative vote of the holders of at least 80% of the voting power of all the then-outstanding shares of capital stock entitled to vote generally in the election of directors, voting together as a separate class. Our bylaws provide that all vacancies on the board may be filled only by a majority vote of the directors then in office, though less than a quorum, and directors so chosen hold office for a term expiring at the annual meeting of stockholders at which the term of office of the class to which they have been elected expires and until such director’s successor shall have been duly elected and qualified.

Advance Notice Requirements for Stockholder Proposals. Our bylaws establish advance notice procedures with regard to stockholder nominations for the election of directors and for business to be brought by stockholders for any meeting of the stockholders of the Company. For stockholder nominations, written notice generally must be received by the Company not less than 90 days prior to the meeting and must set forth certain information regarding the person such stockholder proposes to nominate for election and regarding the stockholder himself. For business to be properly brought before an annual meeting by a stockholder, the business must relate to a proper subject matter for stockholder action, and the stockholder must have given timely notice in writing to the Secretary of the Company, which means that, generally, it must be received by the Company not less than 90 days prior to the date of the meeting. The notice must also set forth a brief description of the business desired to be brought before the annual meeting and the reasons for conducting such business at the annual meeting, as well as certain information regarding the stockholder. We may reject a stockholder proposal that is not made in accordance with such procedures.

Stockholder Vote Required to Approve Business Combinations with Interested Stockholders. Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation requires the affirmative vote of the holders of at least 80% of the voting power of all the then-outstanding shares of capital stock entitled to vote generally in the election of directors, voting together as a separate class, to approve certain business combinations involving an interested stockholder, except in the case of any business combination that does not involve any cash or other consideration being received by the stockholders of the Company solely in their capacity as stockholders of the Company, where the business combination has been approved a majority of the disinterested directors, or in the case of any other business combination, where the business combination has been approved by a majority of the disinterested directors or certain conditions with respect to the consideration to be received by some or all of the Company’s stockholders are satisfied.

Factors to be Considered in Certain Transactions. Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation grants the board of directors the discretion, when considering whether a proposed merger or similar transaction is in the best interests of the Company and our stockholders, to give due consideration to all relevant factors, including, without limitation, the social and economic effect of acceptance of such offer on the Company’s present and future customers and employees and those of its subsidiaries, the communities in which the Company and its subsidiaries operate or are located, the ability of the Company to fulfill its corporate objectives as a bank holding company, and on the ability of the Bank to fulfill the objectives of a stock bank under applicable statutes and regulations.

 

Transfer Agent

 

The transfer agent and registrar for our common stock is Registrar and Transfer Company.  Its address is 10 Commerce Drive, Cranford, NJ 07016-3573, and its telephone number is (908) 272-8511.

 

Item 12.  Indemnification of Directors and Officers

Article Tenth of the amended and restated certificate of incorporation provides that any person who was or is made a party or is threatened to be made a party to or is otherwise involved in any action, suit, or proceeding, whether civil, criminal, administrative, or investigative (a “proceeding”), by reason of the fact that he or she is or was a director or officer of the Company or is or was serving at the request of the Company as a director, officer, employee, or agent of another corporation or of a partnership joint venture, trust, or other enterprise, including service with respect to an employee benefit plan, whether the basis of such proceeding is alleged action in an official capacity as a director, officer, employee, or agent or in any other capacity while serving as a director, officer, employee, or agent, shall be indemnified and held harmless by the Company to the fullest extent authorized by the Delaware General Corporation Law against all expense, liability, and loss reasonably incurred or suffered by such individual in connection therewith; provided, however, that, generally, the Company shall indemnify any such individual in connection with a proceeding initiated by such individual only if such proceeding (or part thereof) was authorized by the board of directors. The right to indemnification provided by our amended and restated certificate of incorporation includes the right to advancement of expenses consistent with Delaware General Corporation Law.

92
 

Section 145 of the Delaware General Corporation Law provides for permissible and mandatory indemnification of directors, officers, employees and agents in certain circumstances. Section 145(a) provides that a corporation may indemnify any person who was or is a party or is threatened to be made a party to any threatened, pending or completed action, suit or proceeding, whether civil, criminal, administrative or investigative (other than an action by or in the right of the corporation), by reason of the fact that the person is or was a director, officer, employee or agent of the corporation, or is or was serving at the request of the corporation as a director, officer, employee or agent of another entity, against expenses (including attorneys’ fees), judgments, fines and amounts paid in settlement actually and reasonably incurred by the person in connection with such action, suit or proceeding if the person acted in good faith and in a manner the person reasonably believed to be in or not opposed to the best interests of the corporation, and, with respect to any criminal action or proceeding, had no reasonable cause to believe the person’s conduct was unlawful. The termination of any action, suit or proceeding by judgment, order, settlement, conviction, or upon a plea of nolo contendere or its equivalent, shall not, of itself, create a presumption that the person did not act in good faith and in a manner which the person reasonably believed to be in or not opposed to the best interests of the corporation, and, with respect to any criminal action or proceeding, had reasonable cause to believe that the person’s conduct was unlawful.

Section 145(b) provides that a corporation may indemnify any person who was or is a party or is threatened to be made a party to any threatened, pending or completed action or suit by or in the right of the corporation to procure a judgment in its favor by reason of the fact that the person is or was a director, officer, employee or agent of the corporation, or is or was serving at the request of the corporation as a director, officer, employee or agent of another entity against expenses (including attorneys’ fees) actually and reasonably incurred by the person in connection with the defense or settlement of such action or suit if the person acted in good faith and in a manner the person reasonably believed to be in or not opposed to the best interests of the corporation and except that no indemnification shall be made in respect of any claim, issue or matter as to which such person shall have been adjudged to be liable to the corporation unless and only to the extent that the Court of Chancery or the court in which such action or suit was brought shall determine upon application that, despite the adjudication of liability but in view of all the circumstances of the case, such person is fairly and reasonably entitled to indemnity for such expenses which the Court of Chancery or such other court shall deem proper.

Section 145(c) provides that to the extent that a present or former director or officer of a corporation has been successful on the merits or otherwise in defense of any action, suit or proceeding referred to in Sections 145(a) and 145(b), or in defense of any claim, issue or matter therein, that person shall be indemnified against expenses (including attorneys’ fees) actually and reasonably incurred by such person in connection therewith.

Section 145(d) provides that any indemnification under Sections 145(a) and 145(b) (unless ordered by a court) shall be made by the corporation only as authorized in the specific case upon a determination that indemnification of the present or former director, officer, employee or agent is proper in the circumstances because the person has met the applicable standard of conduct set forth in Sections 145(a) and 145(b).

Section 145(e) provides that expenses (including attorneys’ fees) incurred by an officer or director in defending any civil, criminal, administrative or investigative action, suit or proceeding may be paid by the corporation in advance of the final disposition of the action, suit or proceeding upon receipt of an undertaking to repay the amount if it is ultimately determined that the person is not entitled to be indemnified by the corporation. Expenses (including attorneys’ fees) incurred by former directors and officers or other employees and agents may be so paid upon such terms and conditions, if any, as the corporation deems appropriate.

 

Section 145(f) provides that indemnification and advancement of expenses provided under Section 145 are not exclusive of any other rights to which those seeking indemnification or advancement of expenses may be entitled under any bylaw, agreement, vote of stockholders or disinterested directors or otherwise. Section 145(g) provides that a corporation may purchase and maintain insurance on behalf of any person who is or was a director, officer, employee or agent of the corporation, or is or was serving at the request of the corporation as a director, officer, employee or agent of another corporation, partnership, joint venture, trust or other enterprise against any liability asserted against such person and incurred by such person in any such capacity, or arising out of such person’s status as such, whether or not the corporation would have the power to indemnify such person against such liability under this section.

 

93
 

Item 13.  Financial Statements and Supplementary Data

CAROLINA FINANCIAL CORPORATION AND SUBSIDIARIES

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm 95
   
Consolidated Balance Sheets at December 31, 2013 and 2012 96
   
Consolidated Statements of Operations for the Years Ended December 31, 2013 and 2012 97
   
Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income for the Years Ended December 31, 2013 and 2012 98
   
Consolidated Statements of Changes in Stockholders’ Equity for the Years Ended December 31, 2013 and 2012 98
   
Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows for the Years Ended December 31, 2013 and 2012 99
   
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 101

 

94
 

REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

 

To the Board of Directors and Stockholders

Carolina Financial Corporation

Charleston, South Carolina


We have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of Carolina Financial Corporation and subsidiaries as of December 31, 2013 and 2012, and the related consolidated statements of operations, comprehensive income, changes in stockholders’ equity, and cash flows for the years then ended. These consolidated financial statements are the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements based on our audits.


We conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. The Company is not required to have, nor were we engaged to perform, an audit of its internal control over financial reporting. Our audits included consideration of internal control over financial reporting as a basis for designing audit procedures that are appropriate in the circumstances, but not for the purpose of expressing an opinion on the effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting. Accordingly, we express no such opinion. An audit also includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements, assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.


In our opinion, the consolidated financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of Carolina Financial Corporation and subsidiaries as of December 31, 2013 and 2012, and the results of their operations and their cash flows for the years then ended, in conformity with U.S. generally accepted accounting principles.


/s/ Elliott Davis, LLC

 

Charleston, South Carolina
February 26, 2014

 

95
 

 

CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS

 

    At December 31,
    2013   2012
ASSETS   (In thousands)
Cash and due from banks   $ 4,489       6,499  
Interest-bearing cash     34,176       11,340  
Cash and cash equivalents     38,665       17,839  
Securities available-for-sale (cost of $166,997 at December 31, 2013 and $144,511 at December 31, 2012)     167,535       148,407  
Securities held-to-maturity (fair value of $23,547 at December 31, 2013 and $5,549 at December 31, 2012)     24,554       9,166  
Federal Home Loan Bank stock, at cost     4,103       6,413  
Other investments     1,858       1,728  
Derivative assets     1,412       6,542  
Loans held for sale     36,897       144,849  
Loans receivable, net of allowance for loan losses of $8,091 at December 31,2013 and $9,520 at December 31, 2012     535,221       501,691  
Premises and equipment, net     17,585       16,397  
Accrued interest receivable     2,802       3,203  
Real estate acquired through foreclosure, net     6,273       6,284  
Deferred tax assets, net     7,419       6,782  
Prepaid FDIC insurance     —         2,035  
Mortgage servicing rights     10,908       12,039  
Cash value life insurance     20,910       813  
Other assets     5,442       4,536  
Total assets   $ 881,584       888,724  
                 
LIABILITIES AND STOCKHOLDERS' EQUITY                
Liabilities:                
Noninterest-bearing deposits   $ 83,500       82,004  
Interest-bearing deposits     614,081       571,243  
Total deposits     697,581       653,247  
Short-term borrowed funds     10,300       82,482  
Long-term debt     74,540       64,840  
Derivative liabilities     55       —    
Drafts outstanding     2,703       3,010  
Advances from borrowers for insurance and taxes     284       613  
Accrued interest payable     311       1,599  
Income taxes payable     749       3,459  
Reserve for mortgage repurchase losses     6,109       4,882  
Accrued expenses and other liabilities     6,725       7,078  
Total liabilities     799,357       821,210  
Commitments and contingencies                
Stockholders' equity:                
Preferred stock, par value $.01; 200,000 shares authorized; no shares issued or outstanding     —         —    
Common stock, par value $.01; 6,800,000 shares authorized; 4,015,204 and 3,837,984 issued and outstanding at December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively     40       39  
Additional paid-in capital     22,393       22,048  
Retained earnings, restricted     62,169       45,752  
Accumulated other comprehensive loss, net of tax benefit     (2,375 )     (325 )
Total stockholders' equity     82,227       67,514  
Total liabilities and stockholders' equity   $ 881,584       888,724  

 

See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.

 

96
 

 

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF OPERATIONS

 

    For the Years
    Ended December 31,
    2013   2012
    (In thousands, except share data)
Interest income                
Loans   $ 27,731       30,074  
Debt securities     4,999       5,134  
Dividends from FHLB     111       107  
Interest-bearing cash     107       41  
Total interest income     32,948       35,356  
Interest expense                
Deposits     3,339       4,178  
Short-term borrowed funds     239       640  
Long-term debt     2,140       2,695  
Total interest expense     5,718       7,513  
Net interest income     27,230       27,843  
Provision for loan losses     (860 )     2,707  
Net interest income after provision for loan losses     28,090       25,136  
Noninterest income                
Net gain on sale of loans held for sale     29,914       52,763  
Deposit service charges     1,558       1,604  
Net loss on extinguishment of debt     (19 )     (1,591 )
Net loss on sale of securities     (1,125 )     (3,031 )
Other-than-temporary impairment of securities     —         (913 )
Net unrealized gain on derivatives - interest rate swap     428       —    
Net gain on sale of servicing assets     5,489       —    
Net increase in cash value life insurance     374       2  
Mortgage loan servicing income     6,583       4,085  
Other     884       605  
Total noninterest income     44,086       53,524  
Noninterest expense                
Salaries and employee benefits     23,590       25,632  
Occupancy and equipment     3,450       3,274  
Marketing and public relations     1,088       1,360  
FDIC insurance     588       1,076  
Provision for mortgage loan repurchase losses     2,438       2,189  
Legal expense     926       1,768  
Other real estate expense, net     622       1,873  
Mortgage subservicing expense     1,862       1,249  
Amortization of mortgage servicing rights     2,444       1,464  
Settlement of employment agreements     2,639       227  
Other     6,325       11,275  
Total noninterest expense     45,972       51,387  
Income before income taxes     26,204       27,273  
Income tax expense     9,386       10,395  
Net income   $ 16,818       16,878  
                 
Earnings per common share:                
Basic   $ 4.38       4.40  
Diluted   $ 4.25       4.40  
Average common shares outstanding:                
Basic     3,841,230       3,837,984  
Diluted     3,960,247       3,837,984  

 

See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.

 

97
 

 

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME

 

    For the Years
    Ended December 31,
    2013   2012
    (In thousands)
         
Net income   $ 16,818       16,878  
                 
Other comprehensive income (loss), net of tax:                
                 
Unrealized gain (losses) on securities, net of tax of $(1,703) and $1,124 for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively     (2,963 )     1,955  
                 
Reclassification adjustment for losses included in earnings, net of tax of $411 and $1,106 for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively     714       1,925  
                 
Reclassification adjustment for other-than-temporary impairment on securitites, net of tax of $333 for the year ended December 31, 2012     —         580  
                 
Accretion of unrealized losses on held-to-maturity securities previously recognized in other comprehensive income net of tax of $114 and $250 for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively     199       435  
                 
Other comprehensive income (loss), net of tax     (2,050 )     4,895  
                 
Comprehensive income   $ 14,768       21,773  

 

See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.

 

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CHANGES IN STOCKHOLDERS' EQUITY

 

                    Accumulated    
            Additional       Other    
    Common Stock   Paid-in   Retained   Comprehensive    
    Shares   Amount   Capital   Earnings   Income (Loss)   Total
    (In thousands, except share data)
                         
Balance, December 31, 2011     3,837,984     $ 39       21,962       28,874       (5,220 )     45,655  
Stock-based compensation expense, net     —         —         86       —         —         86  
Net income     —         —         —         16,878       —         16,878  
Other comprehensive income, net of tax     —         —         —         —         4,895       4,895  
Balance, December 31, 2012     3,837,984       39       22,048       45,752       (325 )     67,514  
Restricted stock awards, net     172,900       1       (1 )     —         —         —    
Stock options exercised     4,320       —         43       —         —         43  
Stock-based compensation expense, net     —         —         303       —         —         303  
Net income     —         —         —         16,818       —         16,818  
Dividends paid to stockholders     —         —         —         (401 )     —         (401 )
Other comprehensive loss, net of tax     —         —         —         —         (2,050 )     (2,050 )
Balance, December 31, 2013     4,015,204     $ 40       22,393       62,169       (2,375 )     82,227  

 

See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.

 

98
 

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS

 

    For the Years
    Ended December 31,
    2013   2012
    (In thousands)
Cash flows from operating activities:                
Net income   $ 16,818       16,878  
Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by (used in) operating activities:                
Provision for loan losses     (860 )     2,707  
Deferred tax expense (benefit)     542       (657 )
Amortization of unearned discount/premiums on investments, net     2,318       1,361  
Amortization of deferred loan fees     (4,424 )     (5,328 )
Amortization of mortgage servicing rights     2,444       1,464  
Loss on sale of available for sale securities, net     1,125       3,031  
Gain on sale of loans held for sale, net     (29,914 )     (52,763 )
Originations of loans held for sale     (1,616,594 )     (2,313,236 )
Proceeds from sale of loans held for sale     1,760,073       2,297,381  
Loss on extinquishment of debt     19       1,591  
Provision for mortgage loan repurchase losses     2,438       2,189  
Mortgage loan losses paid, net of recoveries     (1,211 )     (930 )
Unrealized gain on interest rate swap     (428 )     —    
Stock-based compensation     303       86  
(Increase) decrease in cash surrender value of bank owned life insurance     (267 )     161  
Depreciation     918       833  
Loss (gain) on disposals of premises and equipment     (24 )     11  
Loss (gain) on sale of real estate acquired through foreclosure     (425 )     227  
Write-down of real estate acquired through foreclosure     849       1,049  
Gain on sale of servicing assets     (5,489 )     —    
Proceeds from the sale of servicing assets     11,036       —    
Originations of mortgage servicing assets     (6,860 )     (7,051 )
Decrease (increase) in:                
Accrued interest receivable     401       (117 )
Income taxes receivable     —         5,789  
Prepaid FDIC insurance     2,035       1,000  
Other assets     (906 )     (1,461 )
Increase (decrease) in:                
Accrued interest payable     (1,288 )     228  
Income taxes payable     (3,038 )     3,459  
Accrued expenses and other liabilities     (353 )     3,445  
Cash flows provided by (used in) operating activities     129,238       (38,653 )

 

Continued

 

99
 

 

    For the Years
    Ended December 31,
    2013   2012
    (In thousands)
Cash flows from investing activities:                
Activity in available-for-sale securities:                
Purchases   $ (177,284 )     (79,869 )
Maturities, payments and calls     51,180       42,618  
Proceeds from sales     91,653       27,735  
Activity in held-to-maturity securities:                
Purchases     (6,708 )     —    
Maturities, payments and calls     299       794  
Increase in other investments     (130 )     (38 )
Decrease in Federal Home Loan Bank stock     2,310       772  
(Increase) decrease in loans receivable, net     (32,386 )     4,858  
Purchase of premises and equipment     (2,136 )     (1,182 )
Proceeds from disposals of premises and equipment     54       19  
Proceeds from sale of real estate acquired through foreclosure     3,727       7,944  
Purchase of bank owned life insurance     (20,053 )     —    
Distribution of bank owned life insurance     223       154  
Cash flows provided by (used in) investing activities     (89,251 )     3,805  
                 
Cash flows from financing activities:                
Net increase in deposit accounts     44,334       31,444  
Net (decrease) increase in Federal Home Loan Bank advances     (47,519 )     23,409  
Net decrease in other short-term borrowed funds     (4,682 )     (21,252 )
Principal repayment of subordinated debt     (10,300 )     (300 )
Net decrease in drafts outstanding     (307 )     (1,506 )
Net (decrease) increase in advances from borrowers for insurance and taxes     (329 )     104  
Cash dividends paid on common stock     (401 )     —    
Proceeds from exercise of stock options     43       —    
Cash flows (used in) provided by financing activities     (19,161 )     31,899  
Net increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents     20,826       (2,949 )
Cash and cash equivalents, beginning of year     17,839       20,788  
Cash and cash equivalents, end of year   $ 38,665       17,839  
                 
Supplemental disclosure                
Cash paid for:                
Interest on deposits and borrowed funds   $ 7,006       7,285  
Income taxes paid, net of (refunds)     11,556       1,424  
                 
Noncash investing and financing activities:                
Other-than-temporary impairment reflected through accumulated other comprehensive income     —         87  
Other-than-temporary impairment reflected through the statement of operations     —         913  
Transfer of loans receivable to real estate acquired through foreclosure     4,140       9,407  
Transfer of available-for-sale securities to held-to-maturity securities     8,649       —    

 

See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.

 

100
 

NOTE 1 - SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES

Organization

Carolina Financial Corporation (“Carolina Financial” or the “Company”), incorporated under the laws of the State of Delaware, is a bank holding company with two wholly-owned subsidiaries, CresCom Bank (the “Bank”) and Carolina Services Corporation of Charleston (“Carolina Services”). Effective July 31, 2012, Carolina Financial combined its wholly-owned subsidiary bank, Community FirstBank of Charleston (“Community FirstBank”), with and into its other wholly-owned subsidiary bank, Crescent Bank. In conjunction with this internal reorganization, Crescent Bank’s name was changed to CresCom Bank. Crescent Mortgage Company (“Crescent Mortgage”), formerly a wholly-owned subsidiary of Community FirstBank, became a wholly-owned subsidiary of CresCom Bank. The consolidated financial statements include the accounts of the Company and its wholly-owned subsidiaries, CresCom Bank and Carolina Services. In consolidation, all material intercompany accounts and transactions have been eliminated. The results of operations of the businesses acquired in transactions accounted for as purchases are included only from the dates of acquisition. All majority-owned subsidiaries are consolidated unless control is temporary or does not rest with the Company.

At December 31, 2013 and 2012, statutory business trusts (“Trusts”) created by the Company had outstanding trust preferred securities with an aggregate par value of $15,000,000. The principal assets of the Trusts are $15,465,000 of the Company’s subordinated debentures with identical rates of interest and maturities as the trust preferred securities. The Trusts have issued $465,000 of common securities to the Company and are included in other investments in the accompanying consolidated balance sheets. The Trusts are not consolidated subsidiaries of the Company.

Management’s Estimates

 

The financial statements are prepared in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles in the United States of America which require management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities and disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities as of the date of the financial statements and the reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the reporting periods. Actual results could differ from those estimates.

Material estimates that are particularly susceptible to significant change in the near term relate to the determination of the allowance for loan losses, including valuation for impaired loans, the valuation of real estate acquired in connection with foreclosure or in satisfaction of loans, the valuation of securities, the valuation of derivative instruments, the valuation of mortgage servicing rights, the determination of the reserve for mortgage loan repurchase losses, asserted and unasserted legal claims and deferred tax assets or liabilities. In connection with the determination of the allowance for loan losses and foreclosed real estate, management obtains independent appraisals for significant properties. Management must also make estimates in determining the estimated useful lives and methods for depreciating premises and equipment.

Management uses available information to recognize losses on loans and foreclosed real estate. However, future additions to the allowance may be necessary based on changes in local economic conditions. In addition, regulatory agencies, as an integral part of their examination process, periodically review the Bank’s allowances for loan losses and foreclosed real estate. Such agencies may require the Bank to recognize additions to the allowances based on their judgments about information available to them at the time of their examination. Because of these factors, it is reasonably possible that the allowances for loan losses and foreclosed real estate may change materially in the near term.

Subsequent Events

 

Subsequent events are events or transactions that occur after the balance sheet date but before financial statements are issued. Recognized subsequent events are events or transactions that provide additional evidence about conditions that existed at the date of the balance sheet, including the estimates inherent in the process of preparing financial statements. Non-recognized subsequent events are events that provide evidence about conditions that did not exist at the date of the statement of financial condition but arose after that date. Management has reviewed events occurring through the date the financial statements were issued and no subsequent events occurred requiring accrual or disclosure except for the following:

On January 15, 2014, the Board of Directors of the Company declared a two-for-one stock split to stockholders of record as of February 10, 2014, payable on February 28, 2014. All share, earnings per share, and per share data have been retroactively adjusted in the consolidated balance sheets, earnings per share, and stockholders’ equity disclosures to reflect this stock split for all periods presented in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles.

101
 

On January 15, 2014, the Board of Directors declared a $.05 dividend to stockholders of record dated March 26, 2014, payable on April 11, 2014.

On January 15, 2014, the Company entered into a contract to sell approximately $147.6 million in unpaid principal of loans serviced for an estimated gain on sale of servicing assets of $767,000. The Company expects to close the servicing sale during the first quarter of 2014.

On February 21, 2014, the Bank completed the acquisition of the St. George office of First Federal of South Carolina in a transaction that had been announced on August 28, 2013. The Bank added approximately $24.5 million in deposits and $11.2 million in loans receivable as a result of this branch acquisition.

Cash and Cash Equivalents

 

Cash and cash equivalents consists of cash and due from banks and interest-bearing cash with banks. Substantially all of the interest-bearing cash at December 31, 2013 and 2012 consists of Federal Reserve Bank and Federal Home Loan Bank overnight deposits. Cash and cash equivalents have maturities of three months or less. Accordingly, the carrying amount of such instruments is considered a reasonable estimate of fair value. The Bank is required to maintain average balances on hand or with the Federal Reserve Bank. At December 31, 2013 and 2012, these reserve balances amounted to $8.3 million and $4.7 million, respectively.

Securities

 

Investment securities are classified into three categories: (a) Held-to-Maturity – debt securities that the Company has positive intent and ability to hold to maturity, which are reported at amortized cost; (b) Trading – debt and equity securities that are bought and held principally for the purpose of selling them in the near term, which are reported at fair value, with unrealized gains and losses included in earnings; and (c) Available-for-Sale – debt and equity securities that may be sold under certain conditions, which are reported at fair value, with unrealized gains and losses excluded from earnings and reported in accumulated other comprehensive income.

The Company determines the category of the investment at the time of purchase. If a security is transferred from available-for-sale to held-to-maturity, the fair value at the time of transfer becomes the held-to-maturity security’s new cost basis. Premiums and discounts on securities are accreted and amortized as an adjustment to interest yield over the estimated life of the security using a method which approximates a level yield. Dividends and interest income are recognized when earned. Unrealized losses on securities, reflecting a decline in value judged by the Company to be other-than-temporary, are charged to income in the consolidated statements of operations.

The cost basis of securities sold is determined by specific identification. Purchases and sales of securities are recorded on a trade date basis.

Loans Held for Sale

 

The Company’s residential mortgage lending activities for sale in the secondary market are comprised of accepting residential mortgage loan applications, qualifying borrowers to standards established by investors, funding residential mortgage loans and selling mortgage loans to investors under pre-existing commitments. Loans held for sale are recorded at either fair value, if elected, or the lower of cost or fair value on an individual loan basis. Origination fees and costs for loans held for sale recorded at lower of cost or market are capitalized in the basis of the loan and are included in the calculation of realized gains and losses upon sale. Origination fees and costs are recognized in earnings at the time of origination for loans held for sale that are recorded at fair value. Fair value is derived from observable current market prices, when available, and includes loan servicing value. When observable market prices are not available, the Company uses judgment and estimates fair value using internal models, in which the Company uses its best estimates of assumptions it believes would be used by market participants in estimating fair value. Adjustments to reflect unrealized gains and losses resulting from changes in fair value and realized gains and losses upon ultimate sale of the loans are classified as noninterest income in the consolidated statements of operations.

The Company issues rate lock commitments to borrowers on prices quoted by secondary market investors. Derivatives related to these commitments are recorded as either assets or liabilities in the balance sheet and are measured at fair value. Changes in the fair value of the derivatives are reported in current earnings or other comprehensive income depending on the purpose for which the derivative is held and whether the derivative qualifies for hedge accounting.

102
 

Derivatives

 

The accounting for changes in fair value (i.e., unrealized gains or losses) of a derivative instrument depends on whether it has been designated and qualifies as part of a hedging relationship and, if so, on the reason for holding it. If certain conditions are met, entities may elect to designate a derivative instrument as a hedge of exposures to changes in fair values, cash flows, or foreign currencies. If the hedged exposure is a fair value exposure, the unrealized gain or loss on the derivative instrument is recognized in earnings in the period of change, together with the offsetting unrealized loss or gain on the hedged item attributable to the risk being hedged as a component of other noninterest income on the consolidated statements of operations. If the hedged exposure is a cash flows exposure, the effective portion of the gain or loss on the hedged item is reported initially as a component of accumulated other comprehensive income (loss), net of the tax impact, and subsequently reclassified into earnings when the hedged transaction affects earnings. Any amounts excluded from the assessment of hedge effectiveness, as well as the ineffective portion of the gain or loss on the derivative instrument, are reported in earnings immediately as a component of other noninterest income on the consolidated statements of operations. If the derivative instrument is not designated as a hedge, the gain or loss on the derivative instrument is recognized in earnings as a component of other noninterest income on the consolidated statements of operations in the period of change.

The primary uses of derivative instruments are related to the mortgage banking activities of the Company. As such, the Company holds derivative instruments, which consist of rate lock agreements related to expected funding of fixed-rate mortgage loans to customers (“interest rate lock commitments”) and forward commitments to sell mortgage-backed securities and individual fixed-rate mortgage loans (“forward commitments”). The Company’s objective in obtaining the forward commitments is to mitigate the interest rate risk associated with the interest rate lock commitments and the mortgage loans that are held for sale. Derivatives related to these commitments are recorded as either a derivative asset or a derivative liability in the balance sheet and are measured at fair value. Both the interest rate lock commitments and the forward commitments are reported at fair value, with adjustments recorded in current period earnings in net gain on sale of loans held for sale within noninterest income section of the consolidated statements of operations.

Derivative instruments not related to mortgage banking activities, including interest rate swap agreements, that do not satisfy the hedge accounting requirements, are recorded at fair value and changes in fair value are recognized in noninterest income in the consolidated statements of operations.

When using derivatives to hedge fair value and cash flows risks, the Company exposes itself to potential credit risk from the counterparty to the hedging instrument. This credit risk is normally a small percentage of the notional amount and fluctuates as interest rates change. The Company analyzes and approves credit risk for all potential derivative counterparties prior to execution of any derivative transaction. The Company seeks to minimize credit risk by dealing with highly rated counterparties and by obtaining collateralization for exposures above certain predetermined limits. If significant counterparty risk is determined, the Company would adjust the fair value of the derivative recorded asset balance to consider such risk.

Loans Receivable, Net

 

Loans that management has the intent and ability to hold for the foreseeable future are reported at their outstanding principal balances net of any unearned income, charge-offs, deferred fees or costs on originated loans and unamortized premiums or discounts on purchased loans. The net amount of nonrefundable loan origination fees, commitment fees and certain direct costs associated with the lending process are deferred and amortized to interest income over the contractual lives of the loans using methods that approximate a level yield or noninterest income when the loan is sold. Discounts and premiums on purchased loans are amortized to interest income over the estimated life of the loans using methods that approximate a level yield, or noninterest income when the loan is sold. Commercial loans and substantially all installment loans accrue interest on the unpaid balance of the loans.

A loan is impaired when, based on current information and events, it is probable that the Company will be unable to collect all amounts due according to the contractual terms of the loan agreement. Impaired loans are measured based on the present value of expected future cash flows discounted at the loan’s effective interest rate, or as a practical expedient, at the loan’s observable market price or the fair value of the collateral if the loan is collateral-dependent. When the fair value of the impaired loan is less than the recorded investment in the loan, the impairment is recorded through a specific reserve allocation that is a component of the allowance for loan losses. A loan is charged-off against the allowance for loan losses when all meaningful collection efforts have been exhausted and the loan is viewed as uncollectible in the immediate or foreseeable future.

103
 

Troubled Debt Restructurings (“TDRs”)

 

The Company designates loan modifications as TDRs when, for economic or legal reasons related to the borrower’s financial difficulties, it grants a concession to the borrower that it would not otherwise consider. Loans on nonaccrual status at the date of modification are initially classified as nonaccrual TDRs. Loans on accruing status at the date of modification are initially classified as accruing TDRs at the date of modification, if the note is reasonably assured of repayment and performance is in accordance with its modified terms. Such loans may be designated as nonaccrual loans subsequent to the modification date if reasonable doubt exists as to the collection of interest or principal under the restructuring agreement. Nonaccrual TDRs are returned to accrual status when there is economic substance to the restructuring, there is well documented credit evaluation of the borrower’s financial condition, the remaining balance is reasonably assured of repayment in accordance with its modified terms, and the borrower has demonstrated repayment performance in accordance with the modified terms for a reasonable period of time (generally a minimum of six months).

Mortgage Servicing Rights, Fees and Costs

 

The Company initially measures servicing assets and liabilities retained related to the sale of residential loans held for sale (“mortgage servicing rights”) at fair value, if practicable. For subsequent measurement purposes, the Company measures servicing assets and liabilities based on the lower of cost or market.

Mortgage servicing rights are amortized in proportion to, and over the period of, estimated net servicing income. The amortization of the mortgage servicing rights is analyzed periodically and is adjusted to reflect changes in prepayment rates and other estimates.

The Company evaluates potential impairment of mortgage servicing rights based on the difference between the carrying amount and current estimated fair value of the servicing rights. In determining impairment, the Company aggregates all servicing rights and stratifies them into tranches based on predominant risk characteristics. If impairment exists, a valuation allowance is established for any excess of amortized cost over the current estimated fair value by a charge to income. If the Company later determines that all or a portion of the impairment no longer exists for a particular tranche, a reduction of the allowance may be recorded as an increase to income.

Service fee income is recorded for fees earned for servicing mortgage loans under servicing agreements with the Federal National Mortgage Association (“FNMA”), the Federal Home Loan Mortgage Corporation (“FHLMC”), Government National Mortgage Association (“GNMA”) and certain private investors. The fees are based on a contractual percentage of the outstanding principal balance of the loans serviced and are recorded as income when received in noninterest income. Amortization of mortgage servicing rights and mortgage servicing costs are charged to expense when incurred.

Nonperforming Assets

 

Nonperforming assets include loans on which interest is not being accrued, accruing loans that are 90 days or more delinquent and foreclosed property. Foreclosed property consists of real estate and other assets acquired as a result of a borrower’s loan default. Loans are generally placed on nonaccrual status when concern exists that principal or interest is not fully collectible, or when any portion of principal or interest becomes 90 days past due, whichever occurs first. Loans past due 90 days or more may remain on accrual status if management determines that concern over the collectability of principal and interest is not significant. When loans are placed on nonaccrual status, interest receivable is reversed against interest income in the current period. Interest payments received thereafter are applied as a reduction to the remaining principal balance as long as concern exists as to the ultimate collection of the principal. Loans are removed from nonaccrual status when they become current as to both principal and interest and when concern no longer exists as to the collectability of principal or interest.

Assets acquired as a result of foreclosure are initially recorded at fair value less estimated selling costs at the date of foreclosure, establishing a new cost basis. Subsequent to foreclosure, valuations are periodically performed by management and the assets are carried at the lower of carrying amount or fair value less cost to sell. Gains and losses on the sale of assets acquired through foreclosure and related revenue and expenses of these assets are included in noninterest expense in other real estate expenses, net.

104
 

Allowance for Loan Losses

 

The allowance for loan losses is a valuation allowance for probable incurred credit losses. Loan losses are charged against the allowance when management believes the uncollectibility of a loan balance is confirmed. Subsequent recoveries, if any, are credited to the allowance. Management estimates the allowance balance required using past loan loss experience, the nature and volume of the portfolio, information about specific borrower situations and estimated collateral values, economic conditions, and other factors. Allocations of the allowance may be made for specific loans, but the entire allowance is available for any loan that, in management’s judgment, should be charged off.

The allowance consists of specific and general components. The specific component relates to loans that are individually classified as impaired when, based on current information and events, it is probable that the Company will be unable to collect all amounts due according to the contractual terms of the loan agreement. Loans for which the terms have been modified resulting in a concession, and for which the borrower is experiencing financial difficulties, are considered troubled debt restructurings and classified as impaired. These analyses involve a high degree of judgment in estimating the amount of loss associated with specific loans, including estimating the amount and timing of future cash flows and collateral values. Impaired loans are evaluated for impairment using the discounted cash flow methodology or based on the net realizable value of the underlying collateral. Impaired loans are individually reviewed on a quarterly basis to determine the level of impairment.

Factors considered by management in determining impaired loans include payment status, collateral value, and the probability of collecting scheduled principal and interest payments when due. Loans that experience insignificant payment delays and payment shortfalls generally are not classified as impaired. Management determines the significance of payment delays and payment shortfalls on a case-by-case basis, taking into consideration all of the circumstances surrounding the loan and the borrower, including the length of the delay, the reasons for the delay, the borrower’s prior payment record, and the amount of the shortfall in relation to the principal and interest owed.

If a loan has impairment, a portion of the allowance is allocated so that the loan is reported, net, at the present value of estimated future cash flows using the loan’s existing rate or at the fair value of collateral if repayment is expected solely from the collateral. Substantially all loans were considered collateral-dependent as of December 31, 2013 and 2012. For collateral-dependent loans, the measurement of impairment was based on the net investment of the loan compared to the fair value of the collateral less estimated selling costs. In most cases, the fair value of the collateral was based on appraised value, when appropriate, the fair value was based on the probable sales price of the collateral when sale of the collateral was imminent or contracted sales price if the collateral is subject to a binding sales contract as of the end of the quarter.

The general component covers non-impaired loans and is based on historical loss experience adjusted for current factors. The Company considers the actual loss history experience over the trailing twelve quarters to determine the historical loss experience used in the general component. This actual loss experience is supplemented with other economic factors based on the risks present for each portfolio segment. These economic factors include consideration of the following: levels of and trends in delinquencies and impaired loans; levels of and trends in charge-offs and recoveries for the most recent twelve quarters; trends in volume and terms of loans; effects of any changes in risk selection and underwriting standards; other changes in lending policies, procedures, and practices; experience, ability, and depth of lending management and other relevant staff; national and local economic trends and conditions; industry conditions; and effects of changes in credit concentrations.

While management uses the best information available to establish the allowance for loan losses, future adjustments to the allowance may be necessary if economic conditions differ substantially from the assumptions used in making the valuations or, if required by regulators, based upon information available to them at the time of their examinations. Such adjustments to original estimates, as necessary, are made in the period in which these factors and other relevant considerations indicate that loss levels may vary from previous estimates.

105
 

Guarantees

 

Standby letters of credit obligate the Company to meet certain financial obligations of its customers, under the contractual terms of the agreement, if the customers are unable to do so. Payment is only guaranteed under these letters of credit upon the borrower’s failure to perform its obligations to the beneficiary. The Company can seek recovery of the amounts paid from the borrower; however, these standby letters of credit are generally not collateralized. Commitments under standby letters of credit are usually one year or less. At December 31, 2013 the Company had recorded no liability for the current carrying amount of the obligation to perform as a guarantor; as such amounts are not considered material. The maximum potential amount of undiscounted future payments related to standby letters of credit at December 31, 2013 was $526,000.

Premises and Equipment, Net

 

Premises and equipment are stated at cost less accumulated depreciation. Depreciation is computed using the straight-line method over the asset’s estimated useful life. Estimated lives range up to forty years for buildings and improvements and up to ten years for furniture, fixtures and equipment. Maintenance and repairs are charged to expense as incurred. Improvements that extend the lives of the respective assets are capitalized. When property or equipment is sold or otherwise disposed of, the cost and related accumulated depreciation are removed from the respective accounts and the resulting gain or loss is reflected in income.

Advertising

 

The Company expenses advertising costs as incurred. These expenses are reflected as marketing and public relations in the accompanying consolidated statements of operations.

Income Taxes

 

The provision for income taxes is based upon income or loss before taxes for financial statement purposes, adjusted for nontaxable income and nondeductible expenses. Deferred income taxes have been provided when different accounting methods have been used in determining income for income tax purposes and for financial reporting purposes. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are recognized based on future tax consequences attributable to differences arising from the financial statement carrying values of assets and liabilities and their tax bases. In the event of changes in the tax laws, deferred tax assets and liabilities are adjusted in the period of the enactment of those changes, with the cumulative effects included in the current year’s income tax provision.

Positions taken by the Company’s tax returns may be subject to challenge by the taxing authorities upon examination. The benefits of uncertain tax positions are initially recognized in the financial statements only when it is more likely than not the position will be sustained upon examination by the tax authorities. Such tax positions are both initially and subsequently measured as the largest amount of tax benefit that is greater than 50% likely of being realized upon settlement with the tax authority, assuming full knowledge of the position and all relevant facts. The Company believes that its income tax filing positions taken or expected to be taken in its tax returns will more likely than not be sustained upon audit by the taxing authorities and does not anticipate any adjustments that will result in a material adverse impact on the Company’s financial condition, results of operations, or cash flow. Therefore, no reserves for uncertain tax positions have been recorded. The Company’s federal income tax returns were examined for the years 2008 through 2010. No changes were proposed.

Interest and penalties on income tax uncertainties are classified within income tax expense in the statement of operations. The Company paid $2,700 of penalties and $2,700 of interest during fiscal 2013. The Company paid $1,000 of penalties and $400 interest during fiscal 2012.

It is management’s belief that the realization of the remaining net deferred tax assets is more likely than not. Accordingly, no reserve was considered necessary.

Drafts Outstanding

 

The Company invests excess funds on deposit at other banks (including amounts on deposit for payment of outstanding disbursement checks) on a daily basis in an overnight interest-bearing account. Accordingly, outstanding checks are reported as a liability.

106
 

Reserve for Mortgage Loan Repurchase Losses

 

The Company sells mortgage loans to various third parties, including government-sponsored entities, under contractual provisions that include various representations and warranties that typically cover ownership of the loan, compliance with loan criteria set forth in the applicable agreement, validity of the lien securing the loan, absence of delinquent taxes or liens against the property securing the loan, and similar matters. The Company may be required to repurchase the mortgage loans with identified defects, indemnify the investor or insurer, or reimburse the investor for credit loss incurred on the loan (collectively “repurchase”) in the event of a material breach of such contractual representations or warranties. Risk associated with potential repurchases or other forms of settlement is managed through underwriting and quality assurance practices and by servicing mortgage loans to meet investor and secondary market standards.

The Company establishes mortgage repurchase reserves related to various representations and warranties that reflect management’s estimate of losses based on a combination of factors. Such factors incorporate estimated levels of defects on internal quality assurance, default expectations, historical investor repurchase demand and appeals success rates, reimbursement by correspondent and other third party originators, and projected loss severity. The Company establishes a reserve at the time loans are sold and continually updates the reserve estimate during the estimated loan life. The reserve for repurchases was $6.1 million and $4.9 million at December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively. For the years ended December 31, 2013, and 2012, the Company recorded a provision for mortgage repurchase reserve expense of $2.4 million, and $2.2 million respectively. The provision for mortgage repurchase reserve of $2.4 million during 2013 consisted of $1.0 million for current year sales and $1.4 million related to changes in estimates of prior year sales. The provision expense for mortgage repurchase reserve of $2.2 million during 2012 consisted of $1.4 million for current year sales and $800,000 related to changes in estimates of prior year sales.

The expense is reflected in noninterest expense in the accompanying consolidated statements of operations. In addition, the Company incurred mortgage repurchase losses, net of recoveries, for the years ended December 31, 2013, and 2012 of $1.2 million and $930,000, respectively which were charged against the reserve amount. To the extent that economic conditions and the housing market do not recover or future investor repurchase demand and appeals success rates differ from past experience, the Company could continue to have increased demands and increased loss severities on repurchases, requiring future additions to the repurchase reserve.

Transfers of Financial Assets

 

Transfers of financial assets are accounted for as sales, when control over the assets has been surrendered. Control over transferred assets is deemed to be surrendered when (1) the assets have been isolated from the Company, (2) the transferee obtains the right (free of conditions that constrain it from taking advantage of that right) to pledge or exchange the transferred assets, and (3) the Company does not maintain effective control over the transferred assets through an agreement to repurchase them before their maturity.

Comprehensive Income (Loss)

 

Comprehensive income (loss) consists of net income or loss and net unrealized gains (losses) on securities and is presented in the consolidated statements of comprehensive income. The Company’s other comprehensive income (loss) for the years ended December 31, 2013, and 2012 and accumulated other comprehensive income (loss) as of December 31, 2013 and 2012 are comprised solely of unrealized gains (losses) on certain investment securities net of the related tax effect.

Off-Balance-Sheet Financial Instruments

 

In the ordinary course of business, the Company entered into off-balance-sheet financial instruments consisting of commitments to extend credit, commitments under revolving credit agreements, and standby letters of credit. Such financial instruments are recorded in the financial statements when they are funded.

Stock Compensation Plans

 

The Company issues stock options and restricted stock under various plans to directors, officers and other key employees. The Company accounts for its stock compensation plans in accordance with ASC Topics 718 and 505. Under those provisions, the Company has adopted a fair value based method of accounting for employee stock compensation plans, whereby compensation cost is measured at the grant date based on the value of the award and is recognized on a straight-line basis over the service period, which is usually the vesting period, taking into account retirement eligibility. As a result, compensation expense relating to stock options and restricted stock is reflected in net income as part of “salaries and employee benefits” on the consolidated statements of operations.

107
 

Earnings Per Share

 

Basic earnings per share (“EPS”) represents income available to common stockholders’ divided by the weighted-average number of shares outstanding during the year. Diluted earnings per share reflects additional shares that would have been outstanding if dilutive potential shares had been issued. Potential shares that may be issued by the Company relate solely to outstanding stock options, restricted stock (non-vested shares), and warrants, and are determined using the treasury stock method. Under the treasury stock method, the number of incremental shares is determined by assuming the issuance of stock for the outstanding stock options and warrants, reduced by the number of shares assumed to be repurchased from the issuance proceeds, using the average market price for the year of the Company's stock. Weighted-average shares for the basic and diluted EPS calculations have been reduced by the average number of unvested restricted shares.

On January 15, 2014, the Board of Directors of the Company declared a two-for-one stock split to stockholders of record dated February 10, 2014, payable on February 28, 2014. As such, all share, earnings per share, and per share data have been retroactively adjusted to reflect this stock split for all periods presented in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles.

Reclassification

 

Certain reclassifications of accounts reported for previous periods have been made in these consolidated financial statements. Such reclassifications had no effect on stockholders’ equity or the net income as previously reported.

 

Recently Issued Accounting Pronouncements

 

The Balance Sheet topic of the ASC was amended in December 2011 for companies with financial instruments and derivative instruments that offset or are subject to a master netting agreement. The amendments require disclosure of both gross information and net information about instruments and transactions eligible for offset or subject to an agreement similar to a master netting agreement. The amendments were effective for reporting periods beginning on or after January 1, 2013 and required retrospective presentation for all comparative periods presented. Additionally, in January 2013 the FASB clarified that the amendments apply only to derivatives, repurchase agreements and reverse purchase agreements, and securities borrowing and securities lending transactions that are either offset in accordance with specific criteria contained in U.S. GAAP or subject to a master netting arrangement or similar agreement. These amendments did not have a material effect on the Company’s financial statements.

The FASB amended the Comprehensive Income topic of the ASC in February 2013. The amendments address reporting of amounts reclassified out of accumulated other comprehensive income. Specifically, the amendments do not change the current requirements for reporting net income or other comprehensive income in financial statements. However, the amendments do require an entity to provide information about the amounts reclassified out of accumulated other comprehensive income by component. In addition, in certain circumstances an entity is required to present, either on the face of the statement where net income is presented or in the notes, significant amounts reclassified out of accumulated other comprehensive income by the respective line items of net income. The amendments will be effective for the Company on a prospective basis for reporting periods beginning after December 15, 2013. Earlier adoption is permitted. The Company does not expect these amendments will have a material effect on its financial statements.

In February 2013 the FASB also amended the Financial Instruments topic of the ASC to address the scope and applicability of certain disclosures to nonpublic companies. The amendments clarify that the requirement to disclose “the level of the fair value hierarchy within the fair value measurements are categorized in their entirety (Level 1, 2, or 3)” does not apply to nonpublic entities for items that are not measured at fair value in the statement of financial position but for which fair value is disclosed. The Company does not expect these amendments to have a material effect on its financial statements.

In April 2013, the FASB issued guidance addressing application of the liquidation basis of accounting. The guidance is intended to clarify when an entity should apply the liquidation basis of accounting. In addition, the guidance provides principles for the recognition and measurement of assets and liabilities and requirements for financial statements prepared using the liquidation basis of accounting. The amendments will be effective for entities that determine liquidation is imminent during annual reporting periods beginning after December 15, 2013, and interim reporting periods therein and those requirements should be applied prospectively from the day that liquidation becomes imminent. Early adoption is permitted. The Company does not expect these amendments to have any effect on its financial statements.

108
 

In December 2013, the FASB amended the Master Glossary of the FASB Codification to define “Public Business Entity” to minimize the inconsistency and complexity of having multiple definitions of, or a diversity in practice as to what constitutes, a nonpublic entity and public entity within U.S. GAAP. The amendment does not affect existing requirements, however will be used by the FASB, the Private Company Council (“PCC”), and the Emerging Issues Task Force (“EITF”) in specifying the scope of future financial accounting and reporting guidance. The Company does not expect this amendment to have any effect on its financial statements.

In January 2014, the FASB amended the Receivables—Troubled Debt Restructurings by Creditors subtopic of the Codification to address the reclassification of consumer mortgage loans collateralized by residential real estate upon foreclosure. The amendments clarify the criteria for concluding that an in substance repossession or foreclosure has occurred, and a creditor is considered to have received physical possession of residential real estate property collateralizing a consumer mortgage loan. The amendments also outline interim and annual disclosure requirements. The amendments will be effective for the Company’s annual reporting periods beginning after December 15, 2014. Companies are allowed to use either a modified retrospective transition method or a prospective transition method when adopting this update. Early adoption is permitted. The Company does not expect these amendments to have a material effect on its financial statements.

Other accounting standards that have been issued or proposed by the FASB or other standards-setting bodies are not expected to have a material impact on the Company’s financial position, results of operations or cash flows.

 

Risks and Uncertainties

 

In the normal course of its business, the Company encounters two significant types of risks: economic and regulatory. There are three main components of economic risk: interest rate risk, credit risk, and market risk. The Company is subject to interest rate risk to the degree that its interest-bearing liabilities mature or re-price at different speeds, or on a different basis, than its interest-earning assets. Credit risk is the risk of default on the loan portfolio or certain securities that results from borrowers’ inability or unwillingness to make contractually required payments. Market risk reflects changes in the value of collateral underlying loans receivable and the valuation of real estate held by the Company. The Company is subject to the regulations of various governmental agencies. These regulations can and do change significantly from period to period. Periodic examinations by the regulatory agencies may subject the Company to further changes with respect to asset valuations, amounts of required loss allowances and operating restrictions from the regulators’ judgments based on information available to them at the time of their examination.

109
 

NOTE 2 - SECURITIES

The amortized cost, gross unrealized gains, gross unrealized losses and fair value of investments securities available-for-sale and held-to-maturity at December 31, 2013 and 2012 follows:

    At December 31,
    2013   2012
        Gross   Gross           Gross   Gross    
    Amortized   Unrealized   Unrealized   Fair   Amortized   Unrealized   Unrealized   Fair
    Cost   Gains   Losses   Value   Cost   Gains   Losses   Value
Securities available-for-sale:   (In thousands)
Municipal securities   $ 39,790       99       (1,390 )     38,499       17,630       252       (113 )     17,769  
US government agencies     5,199       —         (24 )     5,175       —         —         —         —    
Mortgage-backed securities:                                                                
Agency     68,813       1,433       (317 )     69,929       76,775       2,443       (9 )     79,209  
Non-agency     53,195       826       (89 )     53,932       50,106       1,405       (82 )     51,429  
Total mortgage-backed securities     122,008       2,259       (406 )     123,861       126,881       3,848       (91 )     130,638  
Total   $ 166,997       2,358       (1,820 )     167,535       144,511       4,100       (204 )     148,407  
                                                                 
                                                                 
Securities held-to-maturity:                                                                
Municipal securities   $ 15,488       30       (341 )     15,177       —         —         —         —    
Asset-backed securities     9,066       2,107       (2,803 )     8,370       9,166       580       (4,197 )     5,549  
Total   $ 24,554       2,137       (3,144 )     23,547       9,166       580       (4,197 )     5,549  

The asset-backed securities portfolio is collateralized with trust preferred securities issued by other financial institutions in pooled issuances.

The following table presents unrealized losses related to the trust preferred securities that were recognized within other comprehensive income at the time of transfer to held-to-maturity as well as the unrealized gains and losses that are not presented in other comprehensive income for December 31, 2013 and 2012.

110
 

 

    At December 31, 2013
                Recognized in
OCI
      Not Recognized
in OCI
       
                Gross Unrealized       Gross Unrealized        
    Purchased
Face
Value
  Cumulative
OTTI
  Carrying
Value
  Gains   Losses   Amortized
Cost
  Gains   Losses   Estimated
Fair
Value
  Collateralization
Percentage
Held-to-Maturity:     (In thousands)    
Trust Preferred Securities                                                                  
Total A-Class   $ 2,841       —         2,841       —         (586 )     2,255       354       (99 )     2,510     164% - 164%
Total B-Class     11,804       (2,635 )     9,169       —         (2,569 )     6,600       1,190       (2,704 )     5,086     94% - 98%
Total C-Class     2,688       (1,340 )     1,348       —         (1,137 )     211       563       —         774     83% - 83%
    $ 17,333       (3,975 )     13,358       —         (4,292 )     9,066       2,107       (2,803 )     8,370      

 

    At December 31, 2012
                Recognized in
OCI
      Not Recognized
in OCI
       
                Gross Unrealized       Gross Unrealized        
    Purchased
Face
Value
  Cumulative
OTTI
  Carrying
Value
  Gains   Losses   Amortized
Cost
  Gains   Losses   Estimated
Fair
Value
  Collateralization
Percentage
Held-to-Maturity:   (In thousands)    
Trust Preferred Securities                                                                                
Total A-Class   $ 3,733       —         3,733       —         (614 )     3,119       —         (230 )     2,889       157.2%-157.2%  
Total B-Class     11,318       (2,635 )     8,683       —         (2,680 )     6,003       405       (3,967 )     2,441       73.6%-91.8%  
Total C-Class     2,581       (1,340 )     1,241       —         (1,197 )     44       175       —         219       75.9%-75.9%  
    $ 17,632       (3,975 )     13,657       —         (4,491 )     9,166       580       (4,197 )     5,549          

 

The pooled trust preferred securities consisted of positions in seven different securities. The underlying issuers in the pools were primarily financial institutions and to a lesser extent, insurance companies and real estate investment trusts. The Company owns both senior and mezzanine tranches in pooled trust preferred securities; however, the Company does not own any income notes. The senior and mezzanine tranches of trust preferred collateralized debt obligations generally have some protection from defaults in the form of over-collateralization and excess spread revenues, along with waterfall structures that redirect cash flows in the event certain coverage test requirements are failed. Generally, senior tranches have the greatest protection, with mezzanine tranches subordinated to the senior tranches, and income notes subordinated to the mezzanine tranches. Unrealized Losses recognized in other comprehensive income relate to unrealized losses at the time of transfer from available-for-sale to held-to-maturity and are accreted in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles.

As of December 31, 2013, $1.3 million of the pooled trust preferred securities were investment grade, $1.0 million were split-rated, and $6.8 million were below investment grade. As of December 31, 2012, $2.0 million of the pooled trust preferred securities were investment grade, $1.0 million were split-rated, and the remaining $6.2 million were below investment grade. In terms of risk based capital calculation, the Company allocates additional risk-based capital to the below investment grade securities.

As of December 31, 2013, senior tranches represent $2.3 million of the Company’s pooled securities, while mezzanine tranches represented $6.8 million. All of the $6.8 million in mezzanine tranches are still subordinate to senior tranches as the senior notes have not been paid to a zero balance. As of December 31, 2012, senior tranches represent $3.1 million of the Company’s pooled securities, while mezzanine tranches represented $6.1 million. All of the $6.1 million in mezzanine tranches are still subordinate to senior tranches as the senior notes have not been paid to a zero balance.

 

111
 

The amortized cost and fair value of debt securities by contractual maturity at December 31, 2013 follows:

    2013
    Amortized   Fair
    Cost   Value
    (In thousands)
Securities available-for-sale:                
Three to five years   $ —         —    
Six to ten years     14,350       14,235  
After ten years     152,647       153,300  
Total   $ 166,997       167,535  
                 
Securities held-to-maturity:                
Three to five years   $ 989       890  
Six to ten years     3,563       3,413  
After ten years     20,002       19,244  
Total   $ 24,554       23,547  

The contractual maturity dates of the securities were used for mortgage-backed securities and asset-backed securities. No estimates were made to anticipate principal repayments.

During 2013, the Company sold 56 securities available-for-sale totaling $92.8 million. The Company received gross proceeds of $91.7 million related to the sale of these securities and recognized gross gains of $473,000 and gross losses of $1.6 million.

During 2012, the Company sold 14 securities available-for-sale totaling $30.8 million. The Company received gross proceeds of $27.7 million related to the sale of these securities and recognized gross gains of $426,000 and gross losses of $3.5 million.

At December 31, 2013, the Company has pledged $12.3 million of securities for FHLB advances. See Note 9 – Short-Term Borrowed Funds for further discussion.

 

112
 

The gross unrealized losses and fair value of the Company’s investments available-for-sale with unrealized losses that are not deemed to be other-than-temporarily impaired, aggregated by investment category and length of time that individual securities have been in a continuous unrealized loss position, at December 31, 2013 are as follows:

    At December 31, 2013
    Less than 12 Months   12 Months or Greater   Total
    Amortized   Fair   Unrealized   Amortized   Fair   Unrealized   Amortized   Fair   Unrealized
    Cost   Value   Losses   Cost   Value   Losses   Cost   Value   Losses
    (In thousands)
Available-for-sale:                                                                        
Municipal securities   $ 27,108       25,917       (1,191 )     3,157       2,958       (199 )     30,265       28,875       (1,390 )
US government agencies     5,199       5,175       (24 )     —         —         —         5,199       5,175       (24 )
Mortgage-backed securities:                                                                        
Agency     27,140       26,823       (317 )     —         —         —         27,140       26,823       (317 )
Non-agency     15,006       14,951       (55 )     3,660       3,626       (34 )     18,666       18,577       (89 )
Total mortgage-backed securities     42,146       41,774       (372 )     3,660       3,626       (34 )     45,806       45,400       (406 )
Total   $ 74,453       72,866       (1,587 )     6,817       6,584       (233 )     81,270       79,450       (1,820 )
                                                                         
Held-to-maturity-                                                                        
Municipal securities   $ 11,945       11,734       (211 )     2,177       2,047       (130 )     14,122       13,781       (341 )
Asset-backed securities     —         —         —         7,398       4,595       (2,803 )     7,398       4,595       (2,803 )
Total   $ 11,945       11,734       (211 )     9,575       6,642       (2,933 )     21,520       18,376       (3,144 )

The gross unrealized losses and fair value of the Company’s investments available-for-sale with unrealized losses that are not deemed to be other-than-temporarily impaired, aggregated by investment category and length of time that individual securities have been in a continuous unrealized loss position, at December 31, 2012 are as follows:

    At December 31, 2012
    Less than 12 Months   12 Months or Greater   Total
    Amortized   Fair   Unrealized   Amortized   Fair   Unrealized   Amortized   Fair   Unrealized
    Cost   Value   Losses   Cost   Value   Losses   Cost   Value   Losses
    (In thousands)
Available-for-sale:                                                                        
Municipal securities   $ 8,554       8,441       (113 )     —         —         —         8,554       8,441       (113 )
Mortgage-backed securities:                                                                        
Agency     4,587       4,578       (9 )     —         —         —         4,587       4,578       (9 )
Non-agency     8,491       8,445       (46 )     1,927       1,891       (36 )     10,418       10,336       (82 )
Total mortgage-backed securities     13,078       13,023       (55 )     1,927       1,891       (36 )     15,005       14,914       (91 )
Total   $ 21,632       21,464       (168 )     1,927       1,891       (36 )     23,559       23,355       (204 )
                                                                         
Held-to-maturity-
Asset-backed securities
  $ —         —         —         9,082       4,885       (4,197 )     9,082       4,885       (4,197 )

113
 

The Company reviews its investment securities portfolio at least quarterly and more frequently when economic conditions warrant, assessing whether there is any indication of other-than-temporary impairment (“OTTI”). Factors considered in the review include estimated future cash flows, length of time and extent to which market value has been less than cost, the financial condition and near term prospect of the issuer, and our intent and ability to retain the security to allow for an anticipated recovery in market value. If the review determines that there is OTTI, then an impairment loss is recognized in earnings equal to the difference between the investment’s cost and its fair value at the balance sheet date of the reporting period for which the assessment is made, or a portion may be recognized in other comprehensive income. The fair value of investments on which OTTI is recognized then becomes the new cost basis of the investment.

At December 31, 2013 and 2012, the Company had 58 and 26, respectively, individual investments available-for-sale that were in an unrealized loss position. The unrealized losses on the Company’s investments in US government-sponsored agencies, municipal securities and mortgage-backed securities (agency and non-agency) summarized above were attributable primarily to changes in interest rates. Management has performed various analyses, including cash flows, and determined that no OTTI expense was necessary during 2013.

At December 31, 2013, the Company had four trust preferred securities within the held-to-maturity portfolio that were in an unrealized loss position. The asset-backed securities portfolio is collateralized with trust preferred securities issued by other financial institutions in pooled issuances.

To determine the fair value, cash flow models for trust preferred securities are provided by a third-party pricing service. Impairment testing is performed on a quarterly basis using a detailed cash flow analysis for each security. The major assumptions used during the impairment test are described in the subsequent paragraph.

In 2009, the Company adopted a four year "burst" scenario for its modeled default rates (2010 - 2013) that replicated the default rates for the banking industry from the four peak years of the Savings and Loan crisis, which then reduced to 0.25% annually. 2013 was the last year of the elevated default rate. The constant default rate used by the Company is now 0.25% annually. All issuers that were currently in deferral were presumed to be in default. Additionally, all defaults are assumed to have a 15% recovery after two years and 1% of the pool is presumed to prepay annually. If this analysis results in a present value of expected cash flows that is less than the book value of a security (that is, a credit loss exists), an OTTI is considered to have occurred. If there is no credit loss, any impairment is considered temporary. The cash flow analysis we performed used discount rates equal to the credit spread at the time of purchase for each security and then added the current 3-month LIBOR forward interest rate curve.

During 2012, the Company recorded OTTI expense of $625,000 related to 4 securities available-for-sale during fiscal 2012. These 4 securities available-for-sale were subsequently sold during fiscal 2012. In addition, OTTI expense totaling $288,000 was recorded related to 2 held-to-maturity securities during fiscal 2012. There was no OTTI recognized for 2013.

The following table presents the cumulative credit related OTTI related to securities held-to-maturity taken as well as the activity for the period ended December 31, 2013 and 2012 for the trust preferred securities.

    At December 31,
    2013   2012
    (In thousands)
         
Balance at beginning of year   $ 3,975       3,687  
Additions for credit losses on securities for which OTTI was not previously recognized     —         —    
Additions for additional credit losses on securities for which OTTI was previously recognized     —         288  
Balance at end of year   $ 3,975       3,975  

Management believes that there are no additional securities other-than-temporarily impaired at December 31, 2013. The Company does not intend to sell these securities and it is more likely than not that the Company will not be required to sell these securities before recovery of their amortized cost. Management continues to monitor these securities with a high degree of scrutiny. There can be no assurance that the Company will not conclude in future periods that conditions existing at that time indicate some or all of the securities may be sold or are other-than-temporarily impaired, which would require a charge to earnings in such periods.

114
 

The Company, as a member of the Federal Home Loan Bank ("FHLB") of Atlanta, is required to own capital stock in the FHLB of Atlanta based generally upon a membership-based requirement and an activity based requirement. FHLB capital stock is pledged to secure FHLB advances. No secondary market exists for this stock, and it has no quoted market price. However, redemption through the FHLB of this stock has historically been at par value. The Company’s investment in FHLB capital stock was $4.1 million and $6.4 million at December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively.

Other investments at December 31, 2013 and 2012 consisted primarily of $465,000 invested in capital stock of statutory business trusts (See Note 10 – Long-term debt) as well as $1.2 million in a CRA fund.

NOTE 3 – DERIVATIVES

The derivative positions of the Company at December 31, 2013 and 2012 are as follows:

    At December 31,
    2013   2012
    Fair   Notional   Fair   Notional
    Value   Value   Value   Value
    (In thousands)
Derivative assets:                                
Mortgage loan interest rate lock commitments   $ —         —         4,783       289,584  
Mortgage loan forward sales commitments     106       20,516       1,692       59,177  
Mortgage-backed securities forward sales commitments     878       88,000       67       308,000  
Interest rate swaps     428       20,000       —         —    
    $ 1,412       128,516       6,542       656,761  
Derivative liabilities:                                
Mortgage loan interest rate lock commitments   $ 55       103,614       —         —    

The primary uses of derivative instruments are related to the mortgage banking activities of the Company. As such, the Company holds derivative instruments, which consist of rate lock agreements related to expected funding of fixed-rate mortgage loans to customers (interest rate lock commitments) and forward commitments to sell mortgage-backed securities and individual fixed-rate mortgage loans. The Company’s objective in obtaining the forward commitments is to mitigate the interest rate risk associated with the interest rate lock commitments and the mortgage loans that are held for sale. Derivatives related to these commitments are recorded as either a derivative asset or a derivative liability in the balance sheet and are measured at fair value. Both the interest rate lock commitments and the forward commitments are reported at fair value, with adjustments recorded in current period earnings in net unrealized gain (loss) on derivatives within the noninterest income of the consolidated statements of operations.

Derivative instruments not related to mortgage banking activities, including financial futures commitments and interest rate swap agreements that do not satisfy the hedge accounting requirements are recorded at fair value and are classified with resultant changes in fair value being recognized in noninterest income in the consolidated statement of operations.

When using derivatives to hedge fair value and cash flow risks, the Company exposes itself to potential credit risk from the counterparty to the hedging instrument. This credit risk is normally a small percentage of the notional amount and fluctuates as interest rates change. The Company analyzes and approves credit risk for all potential derivative counterparties prior to execution of any derivative transaction. The Company seeks to minimize credit risk by dealing with highly rated counterparties and by obtaining collateralization for exposures above certain predetermined limits. If significant counterparty risk is determined, the Company would adjust the fair value of the derivative recorded asset balance to consider such risk.

 

115
 

NOTE 4 - LOANS RECEIVABLE, NET

Loans receivable, net at December 31, 2013 and 2012 are summarized by category as follows:

 

    At December 31,
    2013   2012
        % of Total       % of Total
    Amount   Loans   Amount   Loans
    (Dollars in thousands)
Loans secured by real estate:                                
One-to-four family   $ 184,210       32.60 %     146,333       27.66 %
Home equity     23,661       4.19 %     31,278       5.91 %
Commercial real estate     253,035       44.79 %     240,764       45.52 %
Construction and development     67,056       11.87 %     68,113       12.88 %
Consumer loans     3,060       0.54 %     3,762       0.71 %
Commercial business loans     33,938       6.01 %     38,714       7.32 %
Total gross loans receivable     564,960       100.00 %     528,964       100.00 %
Less:                                
Undisbursed loans in process     21,550               17,690          
Allowance for loan losses     8,091               9,520          
Deferred fees, net     98               63          
Total loans receivable, net   $ 535,221               501,691          

 

The composition of gross loans outstanding, net of undisbursed amounts, by rate type is as follows:

    At December 31,
    2013   2012
    (Dollars in thousands)
                 
Variable rate loans   $ 219,589       40.41 %     265,657       51.96 %
Fixed rate loans     323,821       59.59 %     245,617       48.04 %
Total loans outstanding   $ 543,410       100.00 %     511,274       100.00 %

116
 

The following table presents activity in the allowance for loan losses. Allocation of a portion of the allowance to one category of loans does not preclude its availability to absorb losses in other categories.

Allowance for loan losses:   At December 31, 2013
    Loans Secured by Real Estate                
    One-to-       Commercial   Construction                
    four   Home   real   and       Commercial        
    family   equity   estate   Development   Consumer   business   Unallocated   Total
Balance at January 1, 2013   $ 3,193       276       3,315       1,792       82       862       —         9,520  
Provision for loan losses     (991 )     (18 )     (317 )     281       (58 )     (491 )     734       (860 )
Charge-offs     (168 )     (28 )     (269 )     (765 )     (35 )     (410 )     —         (1,675 )
Recoveries     438       1       126       110       53       378       —         1,106  
Balance at December 31, 2013   $ 2,472       231       2,855       1,418       42       339       734       8,091  

 

    At December 31, 2012
    Loans Secured by Real Estate                
    One-to-       Commercial   Construction                
    four   Home   real   and       Commercial        
    family   equity   estate   Development   Consumer   business   Unallocated   Total
Balance at January 1, 2012   $ 3,978       550       3,283       2,695       210       1,323       —         12,039  
Provision for loan losses     1,520       45       1,233       (137 )     (216 )     262       —         2,707  
Charge-offs     (2,680 )     (319 )     (1,432 )     (1,506 )     (84 )     (1,169 )     —         (7,190 )
Recoveries     375       —         231       740       172       446       —         1,964  
Balance at December 31, 2012   $ 3,193       276       3,315       1,792       828       62       —         9,520  

 

117
 

 

    Loans Secured by Real Estate                
    One-to-       Commercial   Construction                
    four   Home   real   and       Commercial        
    family   equity   estate   Development   Consumer   business   Unallocated   Total
    (In thousands)
At December 31, 2013:                                                                
Allowance for loan losses ending balances:                                                                
Individually evaluated for impairment   $ 103       —         55       165       20       6       —         349  
Collectively evaluated for impairment     2,369       231       2,800       1,253       22       333       734       7,742  
    $ 2,472       231       2,855       1,418       42       339       734       8,091  
                                                                 
Loans receivable ending balances:                                                                
Individually evaluated for impairment   $ 6,220       125       17,008       1,493       40       2,560       —         27,446  
Collectively evaluated for impairment     177,516       23,217       230,859       58,611       2,775       22,986       —         515,964  
Total loans receivable   $ 183,736       23,342       247,867       60,104       2,815       25,546       —         543,410  
                                                                 
At December 31, 2012:                                                                
Allowance for loan losses ending balances:                                                                
Individually evaluated for impairment   $ 312       —         359       429       25       273       —         1,398  
Collectively evaluated for impairment     2,881       276       2,956       1,363       57       589       —         8,122  
    $ 3,193       276       3,315       1,792       82       862       —         9,520  
                                                                 
Loans receivable ending balances:                                                                
Individually evaluated for impairment   $ 7,392       —         18,177       3,265       74       3,535       —         32,443  
Collectively evaluated for impairment     138,937       30,710       218,053       60,210       3,428       27,493       —         478,831  
Total loans receivable   $ 146,329       30,710       236,230       63,475       3,502       31,028       —         511,274  

 

118
 

The following table presents impaired loans individually evaluated for impairment in the segmented portfolio categories as of December 31, 2013 and 2012. The recorded investment is defined as the original amount of the loan, net of any deferred costs and fees, less any principal reductions and direct charge-offs. Unpaid principal balance includes amounts previously included in charge-offs.

    At and for the Year Ended December 31, 2013
        Unpaid       Average   Interest
    Recorded   Principal   Related   Recorded   Income
    Investment   Balance   Allowance   Investment   Recognized
    (In thousands)
With no related allowance recorded:                                        
Loans secured by real estate:                                        
One-to-four family   $ 5,713       7,682       —         5,783       184  
Home equity     125       472       —         177       10  
Commercial real estate     16,695       17,240       —         18,761       531  
Construction and development     1,227       3,887       —         1,960       13  
Consumer loans     20       404       —         23       1  
Commercial business loans     2,554       3,599       —         2,984       114  
      26,334       33,284       —         29,688       853  
                                         
With an allowance recorded:                                        
Loans secured by real estate:                                        
One-to-four family     507       607       103       469       13  
Home equity     —         —         —         —         —    
Commercial real estate     313       313       55       59       20  
Construction and development     266       266       165       33       10  
Consumer loans     20       20       20       26       —    
Commercial business loans     6       6       6       9       —    
      1,112       1,212       349       596       43  
                                         
Total:                                        
Loans secured by real estate:                                        
One-to-four family     6,220       8,289       103       6,252       197  
Home equity     125       472       —         177       10  
Commercial real estate     17,008       17,553       55       18,820       551  
Construction and development     1,493       4,153       165       1,993       23  
Consumer loans     40       424       20       49       1  
Commercial business loans     2,560       3,605       6       2,993       114  
    $ 27,446       34,496       349       30,284       896  

 

119
 

 

    At and for the Year Ended December 31, 2012
        Unpaid       Average   Interest
    Recorded   Principal   Related   Recorded   Income
    Investment   Balance   Allowance   Investment   Recognized
    (In thousands)
With no related allowance recorded:                                        
Loans secured by real estate:                                        
One-to-four family   $ 4,310       7,115       —         5,575       180  
Home equity     —         319       —         257       2  
Commercial real estate     13,891       14,746       —         16,142       945  
Construction and development     658       921       —         5,393       222  
Consumer loans     43       427       —         49       8  
Commercial business loans     2,419       3,473       —         2,687       143  
      21,321       27,001       —         30,103       1,500  
                                         
With an allowance recorded:                                        
Loans secured by real estate:                                        
One-to-four family     3,082       3,282       312       2,863       19  
Home equity     —         —         —         —         —    
Commercial real estate     4,286       4,286       359       4,420       1  
Construction and development     2,607       4,504       429       3,037       9  
Consumer loans     31       31       25       28       1  
Commercial business loans     1,116       1,116       273       1,247       1  
      11,122       13,219       1,398       11,595       31  
                                         
Total:                                        
Loans secured by real estate:                                        
One-to-four family     7,392       10,397       312       8,438       199  
Home equity     —         319       —         257       2  
Commercial real estate     18,177       19,032       359       20,562       946  
Construction and development     3,265       5,425       429       8,430       231  
Consumer loans     74       458       25       77       9  
Commercial business loans     3,535       4,589       273       3,934       144  
    $ 32,443       40,220       1,398       41,698       1,531  

 

The Company is committed to advance up to $230,000 of additional funds in connection with impaired loans as of December 31, 2013. The Company was not committed to advance additional funds in connection with impaired loans as of December 31, 2012.

 

120
 

A loan is considered past due if the required principal and interest payment has not been received as of the due date. The following schedule is an aging of past due loans receivable by portfolio segment as of December 31, 2013 and 2012.

    At December 31, 2013
    Real estate loans            
    One-to-       Commercial   Construction            
    four   Home   real   and       Commercial    
    family   equity   estate   Development   Consumer   business   Total
    (In thousands)
30-59 days past due   $ 231       —         273       53       —         —         557  
60-89 days past due     1,034       —         —         —         —         —         1,034  
90 days or more past due     3,440       125       5,074       1,477       7       431       10,554  
Total past due     4,705       125       5,347       1,530       7       431       12,145  
Current     179,031       23,217       242,520       58,574       2,808       25,115       531,265  
Total loans receivable   $ 183,736       23,342       247,867       60,104       2,815       25,546       543,410  
                                                         
Recorded investment greater than 90 days and still accruing   $ —         —         —         —         —         —         —    

 

    At December 31, 2012
    Real estate loans            
    One-to-       Commercial   Construction            
    four   Home   real   and       Commercial    
    family   equity   estate   Development   Consumer   business   Total
    (In thousands)
30-59 days past due   $ 300       —         1,142       173       106       378       2,099  
60-89 days past due     611       546       2,227       317       —         21       3,722  
90 days or more past due     4,247       —         5,534       3,092       26       1,136       14,035  
Total past due     5,158       546       8,903       3,582       132       1,535       19,856  
Current     141,171       30,164       227,327       59,893       3,370       29,493       491,418  
Total loans receivable   $ 146,329       30,710       236,230       63,475       3,502       31,028       511,274  
                                                         
Recorded investment greater than 90 days and still accruing   $ —         —         —         —         —         —         —    

 

Loans are generally placed in nonaccrual status when the collection of principal and interest is 90 days or more past due, unless the obligation is both well-secured and in the process of collection. When interest accrual is discontinued, all unpaid accrued interest is reversed. Interest payments received while the loan are on nonaccrual are applied to the principal balance. No interest income was recognized on impaired loans subsequent to the nonaccrual status designation. A loan is returned to accrual status when the borrower makes consistent payments according to contractual terms and future payments are reasonably assured.

 

121
 

The following is a schedule of loans receivable, by portfolio segment, on nonaccrual at December 31, 2013 and 2012.

    At December 31,
    2013   2012
Loans secured by real estate:   (In thousands)
One-to-four family   $ 3,902       4,817  
Home equity     125       —    
Commercial real estate     5,114       5,956  
Construction and development     1,481       3,251  
Consumer loans     20       52  
Commercial business loans     437       1,172  
    $ 11,079       15,248  

 

There were no loans past due 90 days or more and still accruing at December 31, 2013 or 2012.

The Company uses several metrics as credit quality indicators of current or potential risks as part of the ongoing monitoring of credit quality of its loan portfolio. The credit quality indicators are periodically reviewed and updated on a case-by-case basis. The Company uses the following definitions for the internal risk rating grades, listed from the least risk to the highest risk.

Outstanding: The borrower is typically a long established, well-seasoned company with a significant market position. It possesses unquestioned asset quality, liquidity, and excellent sales and earnings trends. Leverage, if present, is well below industry norms. Borrowers appear to have capacity to meet all of its obligations under almost any circumstances. The borrowing entity’s management has extensive experience and depth.

Excellent: The borrower demonstrates a strong and liquid financial condition based upon current financial information and qualifies to borrow on an unsecured basis under most circumstances. If borrowing is secured, collateral is readily marketable and amply margined. Repayment sources are well defined and more than adequate. Credit checks and prior lending experiences with the company, if any, are fully satisfactory. The borrower’s cash flow comfortably exceeds total current obligations.

Good: The borrower provides current financial information reflecting a satisfactory financial condition and reasonable debt service capacity. If borrowing is secured, collateral is marketable, adequately margined at the present time, and expected to afford coverage to maturity. Repayment sources are considered adequate, and repayment terms are appropriate. Credit checks and prior experience, if any, are satisfactory. The borrower is usually established and is attractive to other financial institutions. The borrower’s balance sheet is stable and sales and earnings are steady and predictable.

Acceptable: While clearly an acceptable credit risk to the Company, the borrower will generally demonstrate a higher leveraged, less liquid balance sheet and capacity to service debt, while steady, may be less well-defined. Repayment terms may not be appropriate for individual transactions. Borrower is generally acceptable to other financial institutions; however, secured borrowing is the norm. Collateral marketability and margin are acceptable at the present time but may not continue to be so. Credit checks or prior experience, if any, reveals some, but not serious, slowness of paying. If a business, its management experience may be limited or have less depth than a satisfactory borrower. Sensitivity to economic or credit cycles exists, and staying power could be a problem.

Management Watch: Loans to borrowers with generally acceptable credit strength, but with manageable weaknesses or uncertainty evident in one or more factors. Earnings may be erratic, with marginal cash flows or declining sales. Borrowers reflect leveraged financial condition and marginal liquidity. The borrower’s management may be new and a track record of performance has yet to be developed. Financial information may be incomplete and reliance on secondary repayment sources may be increasing.

Special Mention: While loans to a borrower in this rating category are currently protected (no loss of principal or interest is envisioned), they may pose undue or unwarranted credit risks if weaknesses are not checked or corrected. Weaknesses may be limited to one or several trends or developments. Weaknesses may include one or more of the following: a potentially over-extended financial condition, a questionable repayment program, an uncertain level of continuing employment or income, inadequate or deteriorating collateral, inadequate or untimely financial information, management competence or succession issues, or a high degree of vulnerability to outside forces.

122
 

Substandard: Assets in this category are inadequately protected by the current creditworthiness and paying capacity of the obligor or of the collateral pledged, if any. Assets so classified have a well-defined weakness or weakness that jeopardizes the liquidation of the debt. They are characterized by the distinct possibility that the company will sustain some loss if the deficiencies are not corrected. Nonaccrual loans, reduced-earnings loans, and loans to borrowers engaged in bankruptcy proceedings are automatically rated Substandard or lower.

Doubtful: A loan rated Doubtful has all of the weaknesses inherent in one rated Substandard with the added characteristic that the weakness may make collection or liquidation in full, based on currently existing facts, highly improbable. A Doubtful rating generally is used when the amount of loss can be projected and that projection exceeds one-third of the balance of outstanding debt but does not exceed two-thirds of that balance. A Doubtful rating is generally applied when the likelihood of significant loss is high.

Loss: A Loss rating should be applied when the borrower’s outstanding debt is considered uncollectible or of such little value that its continuance as a bankable asset is not warranted. This rating does not suggest that there is absolutely no recovery or salvage value, but that it is not practical or desirable to defer writing off the debt even though a partial recovery may be affected in the future.

The Company uses the following definitions:

Nonperforming: Loans on nonaccrual status plus loans greater than ninety days past due still accruing interest.

Performing: All current loans plus loans less than ninety days past due.

123
 

The following is a schedule of the credit quality of loans receivable, by portfolio segment, as of December 31, 2013 and 2012.

    At December 31, 2013
    Real estate loans            
    One-to-       Commercial   Construction            
    four   Home   real   and       Commercial    
    family   equity   estate   Development   Consumer   business   Total
    (In thousands)
Internal Risk Rating Grades:                                                        
Acceptable or better   $ 168,441       23,102       189,413       38,425       2,776       20,084       442,241  
Management Watch     9,437       115       41,856       20,138       19       4,739       76,304  
Special Mention     1,679       —         10,633       295       —         286       12,893  
Substandard     4,179       125       5,965       1,246       20       437       11,972  
Total loans receivable   $ 183,736       23,342       247,867       60,104       2,815       25,546       543,410  
                                                         
Performing   $ 179,834       23,217       242,753       58,623       2,795       25,109       532,331  
Nonperforming:                                                        
90 days or more and still accruing     —         —         —         —         —         —         —    
Nonaccrual     3,902       125       5,114       1,481       20       437       11,079  
Total nonperforming     3,902       125       5,114       1,481       20       437       11,079  
Total loans receivable   $ 183,736       23,342       247,867       60,104       2,815       25,546       543,410  

 

    At December 31, 2012
    Real estate loans            
    One-to-       Commercial   Construction            
    four   Home   real   and       Commercial    
    family   equity   estate   Development   Consumer   business   Total
    (In thousands)
Internal Risk Rating Grades:                                                        
Acceptable or better   $ 123,047       29,871       153,649       37,694       3,467       21,974       369,702  
Management Watch     15,073       375       50,629       17,285       —         5,535       88,897  
Special Mention     3,476       —         23,745       5,391       —         2,000       34,612  
Substandard     4,733       464       8,207       3,105       35       1,519       18,063  
Total loans receivable   $ 146,329       30,710       236,230       63,475       3,502       31,028       511,274  
                                                         
Performing   $ 141,512       30,710       230,274       60,224       3,450       29,856       496,026  
Nonperforming:                                                        
90 days or more and still accruing     —         —         —         —         —         —         —    
Nonaccrual     4,817       —         5,956       3,251       52       1,172       15,248  
Total nonperforming     4,817       —         5,956       3,251       52       1,172       15,248  
Total loans receivable   $ 146,329       30,710       236,230       63,475       3,502       31,028       511,274  

 

124
 

Troubled Debt Restructurings

The following is a schedule of loans designated as troubled debt restructurings, by portfolio segment, during the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012.

 

    During the year ended December 31, 2013
        Pre-Modification   Post-Modification
        Outstanding   Outstanding
    Number of   Recorded   Recorded
    Contracts   Investment   Investment
    (In thousands)
Troubled Debt Restructurings:                        
Loans secured by real estate:                        
One-to-four family     —       $ —         —    
Home equity     —         —         —    
Commercial real estate     —         —         —    
Construction and development     —         —         —    
Consumer loans     —         —         —    
Commercial business loans     1       6       6  
      1     $ 6       6  

 

    During the year ended December 31, 2012
        Pre-Modification   Post-Modification
        Outstanding   Outstanding
    Number of   Recorded   Recorded
    Contracts   Investment   Investment
    (In thousands)
Troubled Debt Restructurings:                        
Loans secured by real estate:                        
One-to-four family     —       $ —         —    
Home equity     —         —         —    
Commercial real estate     3       1,362       1,362  
Construction and development     —         —         —    
Consumer loans     —         —         —    
Commercial business loans     2       158       158  
      5     $ 1,520       1,520  

 

During the year ended December 31, 2013, the Bank modified one loan that was considered a trouble debt restructuring. The Bank extended terms for this loan at a market rate. During the year ended December 31, 2012, the Bank modified five loans that were considered troubled debt restructurings. We extended the terms for all five of these loans at market rates.

No loans restructured in the twelve months prior to December 31, 2013 or 2012 went into default during the period ended December 31, 2013 or 2012.

At December 31, 2013, there were $24.1 million in loans designated as troubled debt restructurings of which $16.3 million were accruing. At December 31, 2012, there were $27.9 million in loans designated as troubled debt restructurings of which $17.2 million were accruing.

125
 

Loans serviced for the benefit of others under loan participation arrangements amounted to $2.3 million and $15.9 million at December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively.

Activity in loans to officers, directors and other related parties for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012 is summarized as follows:

 

    At December 31,
    2013   2012
    (In thousands)
         
Balance at beginning of year   $ 12,965       19,702  
New loans     3,470       4,619  
Repayments     (3,503 )     (11,356 )
Balance at end of year   $ 12,932       12,965  

 

In management’s opinion, related party loans are made on substantially the same terms, including interest rates and collateral, as those prevailing at the time for comparable transactions with an unrelated person and generally do not involve more than the normal risk of collectability.

The Company is party to financial instruments with off-balance-sheet risk in the normal course of business to meet the financing needs of its customers. These financial instruments include commitments to extend credit. These instruments involve, to varying degrees, elements of credit risk in excess of the amount recognized in the consolidated balance sheets.

The Company’s exposure to credit loss in the event of nonperformance by the other party to the financial instrument for commitments to extend credit is represented by the contractual amount of these instruments. The Company uses the same credit policies in making commitments as for on-balance sheet instruments. At December 31, 2013 and 2012, the Company had commitments to extend credit in the amount of $48.6 million and $31.9 million, respectively. At December 31, 2013 and 2012, the Company had standby letters of credit in the amount of $526,000 and $396,000, respectively.

Commitments to extend credit are agreements to lend to a customer as long as there is no violation of any condition established in the contract. Commitments generally have fixed expiration dates or other termination clauses and may require a payment of a fee. Since commitments may expire without being drawn upon, the total commitments do not necessarily represent future cash requirements. The Company evaluates each customer's creditworthiness on a case-by-case basis. The amount of collateral obtained, if deemed necessary by the Company upon extension of credit, is based on management's credit evaluation of the party. Collateral held varies, but may include inventory, property and equipment, residential real estate and income producing commercial properties.

Standby letters of credit obligate the Company to meet certain financial obligations of its customers, if, under the contractual terms of the agreement, the customers are unable to do so. Payment is only guaranteed under these letters of credit upon the borrower’s failure to perform its obligations to the beneficiary. The Company can seek recovery of the amounts paid from the borrower and the letters of credit are generally not collateralized. Commitments under standby letters of credit are usually one year or less. At December 31, 2013, the Company has recorded no liability for the current carrying amount of the obligation to perform as a guarantor; as such amounts are not considered material. The maximum potential of undiscounted future payments related to standby letters of credit at December 31, 2013 was approximately $526,000.

 

126
 

NOTE 5 - PREMISES AND EQUIPMENT, NET

Premises and equipment, net at December 31, 2013 and 2012 consists of the following:

    At December 31,
    2013   2012
    (In thousands)
Land   $ 5,304       5,029  
Buildings     11,658       11,277  
Furniture, fixtures and equipment     8,023       7,345  
Construction in process     599       44  
Total premises and equipment     25,584       23,695  
Less: accumulated depreciation     (7,999 )     (7,298 )
Premises and equipment, net   $ 17,585       16,397  

Depreciation expense included in operating expenses for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012 amounted to $918,000 and $833,000, respectively. The construction in process related to technology related equipment that will be transferred into furniture, fixture and equipment during 2014. Remaining estimated costs for completion of the construction in process are expected to be approximately $100,000. There was no interest capitalized during fiscal 2013 and 2012.

NOTE 6 – REAL ESTATE ACQUIRED THROUGH FORECLOSURE

Transactions in other real estate owned for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012 are summarized below:

    At December 31,
    2013   2012
    (In thousands)
Balance at beginning of year   $ 6,284       6,097  
Additions     4,140       9,407  
Sales     (3,302 )     (8,171 )
Write downs     (849 )     (1,049 )
Balance at end of year   $ 6,273       6,284  

A summary of the composition of real estate acquired through foreclosure follows:

    At December 31,
    2013   2012
    (In thousands)
Real estate loans:                
One-to-four family   $ 959       1,010  
Commercial real estate     1,781       1,902  
Construction and development     3,533       3,372  
    $ 6,273       6,284  

127
 

NOTE 7 – MORTGAGE SERVICING RIGHTS

Mortgage loans serviced for others are not included in the accompanying statements of financial condition. The value of mortgage servicing rights is included on the Company’s consolidated balance sheets. The unpaid principal balances of loans serviced for others were $2.0 billion and $2.2 billion, respectively, at December 31, 2013 and 2012.

The economic estimated fair values of mortgage servicing rights were $17.7 million and $18.1 million, respectively, at December 31, 2013 and 2012. The estimated fair value of servicing rights at December 31, 2013 were determined using discount rates ranging from 11.66% to 12.66% , prepayment speed assumptions (“PSA”) ranging from 116.6 to 138.2, depending upon the stratification of the specific servicing right, and a weighted average delinquency rate of .90% as determined by a third party. The estimated fair value of servicing rights at December 31, 2012 were determined using discount rates ranging from 11.00% to 15.50%, prepayment speed assumptions (“PSA”) ranging from 114.6 to 145.1, depending upon the stratification of the specific servicing right, and a weighted average delinquency rate of 1.24% as determined by a third party.

During 2013 servicing rights related to approximately $972.9 million of unpaid loan principal serviced for others were sold. The Company received $11.0 million in net proceeds and recognized a gain in the accompanying consolidated statement of operations of $5.5 million. No servicing rights were sold during 2012.

The following summarizes the activity in mortgage servicing rights, along with the aggregate activity in the related valuation allowances, for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012:

    December 31,
    2013   2012
    (In thousands)
MSR beginning balance   $ 12,039       6,452  
Amount capitalized     6,860       7,051  
Amount sold     (5,547 )     —    
Amount amortized     (2,444 )     (1,464 )
MSR ending balance   $ 10,908       12,039  

There was no allowance for loss in fair value in mortgage servicing rights for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012.

The estimated amortization expense for mortgage servicing rights for MSRs owned at December 31, 2013, for the years ended December 31, 2014, 2015, 2016, 2017, 2018 and thereafter is $1.1 million, $1.0 million, $990,000, $950,000, $890,000 and $6.0 million, respectively. The estimated amortization expense is based on current information regarding future loan payments and prepayments. Amortization expense could change in future periods based on changes in the volume of prepayments and economic factors.

At December 31, 2013 and 2012, servicing related trust funds of approximately $19.9 million, and $27.1 million, respectively, representing both principal and interest due investors and escrows received from borrowers, are on deposit in custodial accounts and are included in noninterest-bearing deposits in the accompanying financial statements.

At December 31, 2013 and 2012, the Company had blanket bond and errors and omissions coverages of $5.0 million each.

 

128
 

NOTE 8 - DEPOSITS

Deposits outstanding by type of account at December 31, 2013 and 2012 are summarized as follows:

    At December 31,
    2013   2012
    (In thousands)
Noninterest-bearing demand accounts   $ 83,500       82,004  
Interest-bearing demand accounts     92,067       51,490  
Savings accounts     17,816       10,882  
Money market accounts     220,915       207,299  
Certificates of deposit:                
Less than $100,000     195,239       215,549  
$100,000 or more     88,044       86,023  
Total certificates of deposit     283,283       301,572  
Total deposits   $ 697,581       653,247  

The aggregate amount of brokered certificates of deposit was $61.8 million and $29.9 million at December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively. Brokered certificates of deposit are included in the table above under certificates of deposit less than $100,000. The aggregate amount of institutional certificates of deposit was $40.0 million at December 31, 2013 and 2012. Interest expenses related to certificates of deposit over $100,000 was $664,000 and $462,000 for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively.

The amounts and scheduled maturities of certificates of deposit at December 31, 2013 and 2012 are as follows:

    At December 31,
    2013   2012
    (In thousands)
Maturing within one year   $ 144,119       220,024  
Maturing one through three years     53,231       44,280  
Maturing after three years     85,933       37,268  
    $ 283,283       301,572  

The Company has pledged $4.9 million of mortgage-backed securities as of December 31, 2013 to secure public agency funds.

 

129
 

NOTE 9 – SHORT-TERM BORROWED FUNDS

Short-term borrowed funds at December 31, 2013 and 2012 are summarized as follows:

    At December 31,
    2013   2012
        Interest       Interest
    Balance   Rate   Balance   Rate
    (Dollars in thousands)
Unsecured line of credit   $ —         —         2,750       4.75 %
Short-term FHLB advances     10,000       0.36 %     77,500       0.16%-.82%  
Mortgage loan warehouse line of credit     —         —         1,932       2.5%-4.5%  
Subordinated debenture, due 2020     300       2.70 %     300       2.81 %
Total short-term borrowed funds   $ 10,300               82,482          

Lines of credit with the FHLB of Atlanta are based upon FHLB-approved percentages of Bank assets, but must be supported by appropriate collateral to be available. The Company has pledged first lien residential mortgage, second lien residential mortgage, residential home equity line of credit, commercial mortgage and multifamily mortgage portfolios under blanket lien agreements resulting in approximately $237.3 million of collateral for these advances. In addition, at December 31, 2013, the Company has pledged $12.3 million of securities for these advances. At December 31, 2013, collateral totaling $249.6 million was pledged to support FHLB advances. At December 31, 2013 the Company had FHLB advances of $67.5 million outstanding with excess collateral pledged to the FHLB during those periods that would support additional borrowings of approximately $88.6 million.

Lines of credit with the Federal Reserve Bank (“FRB”) are based on collateral pledged. The Company has pledged certain non-mortgage commercial, acquisition and development, and lot loan portfolios under blanket lien agreements resulting in approximately $52.0 million of collateral to the FRB for these advances. At December 31, 2013 the Company had lines available with the FRB for $38.7 million. At December 31, 2013 the Company had no FRB advances outstanding.

At December 31, 2012, Crescent Mortgage had a mortgage loan warehouse line of credit from a correspondent with a $35.0 million credit limit, of which $33.1 million was still available. The facility was secured by Crescent Mortgage’s residential mortgage loans held for sale and other assets. During 2013, this credit line was paid in full and not renewed by the Company. Crescent Mortgage currently is self-funding its mortgage production.

Effective October 1, 2012, the Company modified a $3.0 million unsecured line of credit with a correspondent bank, of which $2.8 million was outstanding at December 31, 2012. During 2013, the unsecured credit line was paid in full and not renewed.

The Company has a subordinated debenture totaling $1.9 million that has principal repayments that began in 2010. See Note 10 – Long-Term Debt for additional disclosure.

Certain borrowings were prepaid to manage the cost of funds and related interest rate sensitivity, resulting in a net loss on the extinguishment of debt of $19,000, and $1.6 million during 2013, and 2012, respectively.

 

130
 

NOTE 10 – LONG-TERM DEBT

Long-term debt at December 31, 2013 and 2012 are summarized as follows:

    December 31, 2013
        Interest
    Balance   Rate
    (Dollars in thousands)
Long-term FHLB advances, due 2015 through 2021   $ 57,500       0.42%-4.00%  
Subordinated debentures, due 2016 through 2020     1,575       2.70 %
Subordinated debentures issued to Carolina Financial Capital Trust I, due 2032     5,155       3.75 %
Subordinated debentures issued to Carolina Financial Capital Trust II, due 2034     10,310       3.29 %
Total long-term debt   $ 74,540          

 

    December 31, 2012
        Interest
    Balance   Rate
    (Dollars in thousands)
Long-term FHLB advances, due 2013 through 2021   $ 37,500       0.52%-4.00%  
Subordinated debentures, due 2016 through 2020     11,875       1.84%-2.81%  
Subordinated debentures issued to Carolina Financial Capital Trust I, due 2032     5,155       3.75 %
Subordinated debentures issued to Carolina Financial Capital Trust II, due 2034     10,310       3.39 %
Total long-term debt   $ 64,840          

 

As of December 31, 2013, the principal amounts due on long-term debt in 2014, 2015, 2016, 2017, 2018 and thereafter were $0, $7.8 million, $10.3 million, $5.3 million, $5.3 million and $45.8 million, respectively. As of December 31, 2013, there were no principal amounts callable by the FHLB on advances.

At December 31, 2013 and 2012, statutory business trusts (“Trusts”) created by the Company had outstanding trust preferred securities with an aggregate par value of $15.0 million. The trust preferred securities have floating interest rates ranging from 3.29% to 3.75% at December 31, 2013 and maturities ranging from December 31, 2032 to January 7, 2034. The principal assets of the Trusts are $15.5 million of the Company’s subordinated debentures with identical rates of interest and maturities as the trust preferred securities. The Trusts have issued $465,000 of common securities to the Company.

The trust preferred securities, the assets of the Trusts and the common securities issued by the Trusts are redeemable in whole or in part beginning on or after December 31, 2008, or at any time in whole but not in part from the date of issuance on the occurrence of certain events. The obligations of the Company with respect to the issuance of the trust preferred securities constitutes a full and unconditional guarantee by the Company of the Trusts’ obligations with respect to the trust preferred securities. Subject to certain exceptions and limitations, the Company may elect from time to time to defer subordinated debenture interest payments, which would result in a deferral of distribution payments on the related trust preferred securities.

Beginning with the scheduled payment date of December 31, 2010, the Company deferred the payment of interest on its outstanding trust preferred securities for an indefinite period which can be no longer than twenty consecutive quarterly periods. At December 31, 2012, the Company deferred these payments for nine quarters and had eleven quarters of deferral available. These as well as any future deferred distributions continue to accrue interest. Distributions on the trust preferred securities are cumulative. Therefore, in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, the Company continued to accrue the monthly cost of the trust preferred securities as it has since issuance. The balance of deferred payments at December 31, 2012 was approximately $1.2 million. During 2013, the Company cured all deferred payments and interest and resumed scheduled payments on the trust preferred securities.

As currently defined by the FRB, the Company had $15.0 million of long-term debt that qualified as Tier 1 capital at December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively. The Company had $975,000 and $7.3 million of long-term debt that qualified as Tier 2 capital at December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively.

131
 

NOTE 11 - INCOME TAXES

Deferred tax assets are recognized for future deductible amounts resulting from differences in the financial statement and tax bases of assets and liabilities and operating loss carry forwards. A valuation allowance is then established to reduce that deferred tax asset to the level that it is "more likely than not" that the tax benefit will be realized. The realization of a deferred tax benefit by the Company depends upon having sufficient taxable income of an appropriate character in the future periods.

Income tax expense for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012 consists of the following:

    For the Years
    Ended December 31,
    2013   2012
Current income tax expense   (In thousands)
Federal   $ 7,673       9,900  
State     1,171       1,152  
      8,844       11,052  
Deferred income tax expense  (benefit)                
Federal     754       (599 )
State     (212 )     (58 )
      542       (657 )
Total income tax expense   $ 9,386       10,395  

A reconciliation from expected Federal tax expense to actual income tax expense for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012 using the base federal tax rates of 35% follows:

    For the Years
    Ended December 31,
    2013   2012
    (In thousands)
Computed federal income taxes   $ 9,171       9,546  
State income tax, net of federal benefit     623       757  
Tax exempt interest     (305 )     (47 )
Other, net     (103 )     139  
Total income tax expense   $ 9,386       10,395  

 

132
 

The following is a summary of the tax effects of temporary differences that give rise to significant portions of the deferred tax assets and liabilities at December 31, 2013 and 2012:

 

    At December 31,
    2013   2012
Deferred tax assets:   (In thousands)
Loan loss reserve   $ 2,810       3,499  
Unrealized loss on securities available for sale     1,365       187  
Tax vs. book gain on loans held for sale     —         803  
Debt issuance costs     95       95  
Net operating loss carryforwards     220       214  
Reserve for mortgage repurchase losses     2,291       1,827  
OREO write-downs     466       413  
Stock based compensation     121       98  
Reserve for miscellaneous losses     375       387  
Other     716       35  
      8,459       7,558  
Valuation allowance     (172 )     (271 )
Total gross deferred tax assets     8,287       7,287  
Deferred tax liabilities:                
Depreciation     (633 )     (368 )
Loan fees     (235 )     (137 )
Total gross deferred tax liabilities     (868 )     (505 )
Deferred tax assets, net   $ 7,419       6,782  

 

A portion of the annual change in the net deferred income tax asset relates to unrealized gains and losses on debt and equity securities. The deferred income tax (benefit) related to the unrealized gains and losses on debt and equity securities of $1.2 million and $2.8 million, respectively, for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively, was recorded directly to stockholders’ equity as a component of accumulated other comprehensive income. The balance of the change in the net deferred tax asset of $656,000 of deferred tax benefit and $1.5 million of deferred tax, respectively, for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively, is reflected as a deferred income tax expense in the consolidated statement of operations. The valuation allowances relate to state net operating loss carry-forwards. It is management’s belief that the realization of the remaining net deferred tax assets is more likely than not. The Company’s federal income tax returns were examined for the years 2008 through 2010. No changes were proposed.

NOTE 12 - COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENCIES

The Company has entered into agreements to lease certain office facilities under non-cancellable operating lease agreements expiring on various dates through June 2020. The Company’s rental expense for its office facilities for the years ended December 31, 2013, and 2012 totaled $653,000, and $595,000, respectively.

Minimum rental commitments (in thousands) under the leases are as follows:

 

Year 1   $ 604  
Year 2     421  
Year 3     353  
Year 4     252  
Year 5     252  
After Year 5     265  
Total   $ 2,147  

 

133
 

In the course of ordinary business, the Bank is, from time to time, named a party to legal actions and proceedings, primarily related to the collection of loans and foreclosed assets. In accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, the Company establishes reserves for litigation and regulatory matters when those matters present loss contingencies that are both probable and estimable. When loss contingencies are not both probable and estimable, the Company does not establish reserves.

During 2012, the Company had disputes over employment agreements with two former executive officers. The Company incurred expenses related to the settlement of the disputed employment agreements of $2.6 million and $227,000 for the periods ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively. All amounts related to the settlement of these agreements have expensed as of December 31, 2013.

NOTE 13 – SHARE-BASED COMPENSATION

 

Compensation cost is recognized for stock options and restricted stock awards issued to employees. Compensation cost is measured as the fair value of these awards on their date of grant. A Black-Scholes model is utilized to estimate the fair value of stock options, while the market price of the Company's common stock at the date of grant is used as the fair value of restricted stock awards. Compensation cost is recognized over the required service period, generally defined as the vesting period for stock option awards and as the restriction period for restricted stock awards. For awards with graded vesting, compensation cost is recognized on a straight-line basis over the requisite service period for the entire award.

As stated in Note 1, On January 15, 2014, the Board of Directors of the Company declared a two-for-one stock split to stockholders of record dated February 10, 2014, payable on February 28, 2014. All share, earnings per share, and per share data have been retroactively adjusted to reflect this stock split for all periods presented in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles.

 

The Company has adopted the 2002 Stock Option Plan under which an aggregate of 277,500 shares have been reserved for issuance by the Company upon the grant of stock options or limited rights, of which 11,160 are outstanding. The plan provided for the grant of options to key employees and Directors as determined by the Board of Directors. No additional options can be awarded under this plan. The options vest ratably over a five-year period and have a ten-year term, both of which begin at the date of grant.

 

The Company adopted the 2006 Recognition and Retention Plan under which an aggregate of 120,000 shares of common stock have been reserved for issuance by the Company. The plan provides for the grant of stock to key employees and Directors of the Company and its subsidiaries. The non-vested common stock vests ratably over a five-year period. No restricted common stock of the Company was granted during fiscal 2012 and 2013 from this plan. As of December 31, 2013, a total of 113,000 shares have been awarded under the plan, of which 107,800 shares have vested and 5,200 shares are unvested.

 

The Company has adopted a 2013 Equity Incentive Plan under which an aggregate of 500,000 shares of common stock have been reserved for issuance by the Company. The plan provides for the grant of stock options and restricted stock awards to our officers, employees, directors, advisors, and consultants. The options are granted at an exercise price at least equal to the fair value of the common stock at the date of grant and expire ten years from the date of the grant. The vesting period for both option grants and restricted stock grants will vary based on the timing of the grant. As of December 31, 2013 a total of 178,900 shares were issued as restricted stock and 52,054 as stock options.

 

The expense recognition of employee stock option and restricted stock awards resulted in net expense of approximately $303,000, and $86,000 during the twelve months ended December 31, 2013, and 2012, respectively.

 

Information regarding the 2013 grants as well as other relevant disclosure related to the share-based compensation plans of the Company is presented below.

 

134
 

Stock Options

 

Activity in the Company's stock option plans is summarized in the following table. All information has been retroactively adjusted for stock splits.

 

    At and For the Years Ended December 31,
    2013   2012
        Weighted       Weighted
        Average       Average
        Exercise       Exercise
    Shares   Price   Shares   Price
Outstanding at beginning of year     16,480     $ 11.65       280,960       7.82  
Granted     52,054       10.00       —         —    
Exercised     (4,320 )     10.15       —         —    
Forfeited or expired     (1,000 )     (12.00 )     (264,480 )     (7.50 )
Outstanding at end of year     63,214     $ 10.40       16,480       11.65  
                                 
Options exercisable at end of year     11,560     $ 12.19       16,480       11.65  

 

The aggregate intrinsic value of 63,214 and 16,480 stock options outstanding at December 31, 2013 and 2012 was $346,000 and $0, respectively.

 

Information pertaining to options outstanding at December 31, 2013, is as follows:

 

    At December 31, 2013
    Options Outstanding   Options Exercisable
        Weighted Avg.   Weighted       Weighted
    Number   Remaining Years   Average   Number   Average
Exercise Prices   Outstanding   Contractual Life   Exercise Price   Outstanding   Exercise Price
  $10.00       56,054       8.7     $ 10.00       4,000     $ 10.00  
  $12.00       6,160       1.5       12.00       6,160       12.00  
  $19.25       1,000       2.8       19.25       1,400       19.25  
          63,214       7.9     $ 10.34       11,560     $ 12.19  

 

    At December 31, 2012
    Options Outstanding   Options Exercisable
        Weighted Avg.   Weighted       Weighted
    Number   Remaining Years   Average   Number   Average
Exercise Prices   Outstanding   Contractual Life   Exercise Price   Outstanding   Exercise Price
  $10.00       8,000       1.3     $ 10.00       8,000     $ 10.00  
  $12.00       7,080       2.5       12.00       7,080       12.00  
  $19.25       1,400       3.8       19.25       1,400       19.25  
          16,480       2.0     $ 11.65       16,480     $ 11.65  

 

The fair value of options is estimated at the date of grant using the Black-Scholes option pricing model and expensed over the options' vesting period. The following weighted-average assumptions were used in valuing options issued during 2013:

 

    2013
Dividend yield     0 %
Expected life     6.5 years  
Expected volatility     35 %
Risk-free interest rate     1.04 %

 

135
 

As of December 31, 2013, there was $125,000 of total unrecognized compensation cost related to non-vested stock option grants under the plans. The cost is expected to be recognized over a weighted-average period of 1.3 years as of December 31, 2013. No options vested during the years end December 31, 2013 or 2012.

 

Restricted Stock

 

The Company from time-to-time also grants shares of restricted stock to key employees and non-employee directors. These awards help align the interests of these employees and directors with the interests of the stockholders of the Company by providing economic value directly related to increases in the value of the Company's stock. The value of the stock awarded is established as the fair market value of the stock at the time of the grant. The Company recognizes expense, equal to the total value of such awards, ratably over the vesting period of the stock grants.

 

All restricted stock agreements are conditioned upon continued employment. Termination of employment prior to a vesting date, as described below, would terminate any interest in non-vested shares. Prior to vesting of the shares, as long as employed by the Company, the key employees and non-employee directors will have the right to vote such shares and to receive dividends paid with respect to such shares. All restricted shares will fully vest in the event of change in control of the Company.

 

Nonvested restricted stock for the year ended December 31, 2013 is summarized in the following table. All information has been retroactively adjusted for stock splits.

 

        Weighted-
        Average
        Grant-Date
Restricted stock   Shares   Fair Value
Nonvested at January 1     11,600     $ 4.06  
Granted     178,900       10.59  
Vested     (10,300 )     6.31  
Forfeited     (6,000 )     10.00  
Nonvested at December 31     174,200     $ 10.58  

 

The vesting schedule of these shares as of December 31, 2013 is as follows:

 

    Shares
  2014       37,900  
  2015       37,900  
  2016       35,300  
  2017       60,300  
  2018       2,800  
  Thereafter       —    
          174,200  

 

As of December 31, 2013, there was $972,000 of total unrecognized compensation cost related to nonvested restricted stock granted under the plans. The cost is expected to be recognized over a weighted-average period of 3.39 years as of December 31, 2013. The total fair value of shares vested during the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012 was approximately $100,832 and $0, respectively.

 

136
 

NOTE 14 – ESTIMATED FAIR VALUE OF FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS

Current accounting literature requires disclosures about the fair value of all financial instruments whether or not recognized in the balance sheet, for which it is practicable to estimate the value. In cases where quoted market prices are not available, fair values are based on estimates using present value or other techniques. Those techniques are significantly affected by the assumptions used, including the discount rate and estimates of future cash flows. In that regard, the derived fair value estimates cannot be substantiated by comparison to independent markets and, in many cases, could not be realized through immediate settlement of the instrument. Certain items are specifically excluded from disclosure requirements, including the Company’s stock, premises and equipment, accrued interest receivable and payable and other assets and liabilities.

The fair value of a financial instrument is an amount at which the asset or obligation could be exchanged in a current transaction between willing parties, other than in a forced sale. Fair values are estimated at a specific point in time based on relevant market information and information about the financial instruments. Because no market value exists for a significant portion of the financial instruments, fair value estimates are based on judgments regarding future expected loss experience, current economic conditions, risk characteristics of various financial instruments, and other factors.

The Company has used management’s best estimate of fair value based on the above assumptions. Thus the fair values presented may not be the amounts that could be realized in an immediate sale or settlement of the instrument. In addition, any income taxes or other expenses that would be incurred in an actual sale or settlement are not taken into consideration in the fair values presented.

The Company determines the fair value of its financial instruments based on the fair value hierarchy established under ASC 820-10, which requires an entity to maximize the use of observable inputs and minimize the use of unobservable inputs when measuring fair value. A financial instrument’s categorization within the valuation hierarchy is based upon the lowest level of input that is significant to the financial instrument's fair value measurement in its entirety. There are three levels of inputs that may be used to measure fair value. The three levels of inputs of the valuation hierarchy are defined below:

   
Level 1 Quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets and liabilities for the instrument or security to be valued. Level 1 assets include marketable equity securities as well as U.S. Treasury securities that are highly liquid and are actively traded in over-the-counter markets.
Level 2 Observable inputs other than Level 1 quoted prices, such as quoted prices for similar assets and liabilities in active markets, quoted prices in markets that are not active, or model-based valuation techniques for which all significant assumptions are derived principally from or corroborated by observable market data. Level 2 assets and liabilities include debt securities with quoted prices that are traded less frequently than exchange-traded instruments and derivative contracts whose value is determined by using a pricing model with inputs that are observable in the market or can be derived principally from or corroborated by observable market data. U.S. Government sponsored agency securities, mortgage-backed securities issued by U.S. Government sponsored enterprises and agencies, obligations of states and municipalities, collateralized mortgage obligations issued by U.S. Government sponsored enterprises, and mortgage loans held-for-sale are generally included in this category. Certain private equity investments that invest in publicly traded companies are also considered Level 2 assets.
Level 3 Unobservable inputs that are supported by little, if any, market activity for the asset or liability. Level 3 assets and liabilities include financial instruments whose value is determined using pricing models, discounted cash flow models and similar techniques, and may also include the use of market prices of assets or liabilities that are not directly comparable to the subject asset or liability. These methods of valuation may result in a significant portion of the fair value being derived from unobservable assumptions that reflect The Company's own estimates for assumptions that market participants would use in pricing the asset or liability. This category primarily includes collateral-dependent impaired loans, other real estate, certain equity investments, and certain private equity investments.

 

Cash and due from banks - The carrying amounts of these financial instruments approximate fair value. All mature within 90 days and present no anticipated credit concerns.

Interest-bearing cash - The carrying amount of these financial instruments approximates fair value.

137
 

Securities available-for-sale and securities held to maturity – Fair values for investment securities available-for-sale and securities held to maturity are based upon quoted prices, if available. If quoted prices are not available, fair values are measured using independent pricing models or other model-based valuation techniques such as the present value of future cash flows, adjusted for the security’s credit rating, prepayment assumptions and other factors such as credit loss assumptions.

FHLB stock and other non-marketable equity securities - The carrying amount of these financial instruments approximates fair value.

Mortgage loans held for sale – Mortgage loans held for sale are recorded at either fair value, if elected, or the lower of cost or fair value on an individual loan basis. Origination fees and costs for loans held for sale recorded at lower of cost or market are capitalized in the basis of the loan and are included in the calculation of realized gains and losses upon sale. Origination fees and costs are recognized in earnings at the time of origination for loans held for sale that are recorded at fair value. Fair value is derived from observable current market prices, when available, and includes loan servicing value. When observable market prices are not available, the Company uses judgment and estimates fair value using internal models, in which the Company uses its best estimates of assumptions it believes would be used by market participants in estimating fair value. Mortgage loans held for sale are classified within Level 2 of the valuation hierarchy.

Loans receivable - For variable rate loans that reprice frequently and have no significant change in credit risk, estimated fair values are based on carrying values and are classified as Level 2. Estimated fair values for certain mortgage loans, credit card loans, and other consumer loans are based on quoted market prices of similar loans sold in conjunction with securitization transactions, adjusted for differences in loan characteristics and are classified as Level 2. Estimated fair values for commercial real estate and commercial loans are estimated using discounted cash flow analyses, using interest rates currently being offered for loans with similar terms to borrowers of similar credit quality and are classified as Level 2. Estimated fair values on impaired loans are estimated using discounted cash flow analyses or underlying collateral values, where applicable. Impaired loans not requiring a specific charge against the allowance represent loans for which the fair value of the expected repayments or collateral meet or exceed the recorded investment in the loan. At December 31, 2013 and 2012, substantially all of the total impaired loans were evaluated based on the fair value of the underlying collateral. Loans which are deemed to be impaired are primarily valued on a nonrecurring basis at the fair value of the underlying real estate collateral. Such fair values are obtained using independent appraisals, which the Company considers to be Level 3 inputs.

Accrued interest receivable - The fair value approximates the carrying value.

Mortgage servicing rights - The Company initially measures servicing assets and liabilities retained related to the sale of residential loans held for sale (“mortgage servicing rights”) at fair value, if practicable. For subsequent measurement purposes, the Company measures servicing assets and liabilities based on the lower of cost or market.

Deposits - The estimated fair value of demand deposits, savings accounts, and money market accounts is the amount payable on demand at the reporting date. The estimated fair value of fixed maturity certificates of deposits is estimated by discounting the future cash flows using rates currently offered for deposits of similar remaining maturities.

Short-term borrowed funds - The carrying amounts of federal funds purchased, borrowings under repurchase agreements, and other short-term borrowings maturing within 90 days approximate their fair values. Estimated fair values of other short-term borrowings are estimated using discounted cash flow analyses based on the Company’s current incremental borrowing rates for similar types of borrowing arrangements.

Long-term debt - The estimated fair values of the Company’s long-term debt are estimated using discounted cash flow analyses based on the Company’s current incremental borrowing rates for similar types of borrowing arrangements.

138
 

Derivative asset and liabilities – The primary use of derivative instruments are related to the mortgage banking activities of the Company. The Company's wholesale mortgage banking subsidiary enters into interest rate lock commitments related to expected funding of residential mortgage loans at specified times in the future. Interest rate lock commitments that relate to the origination of mortgage loans that will be held-for-sale are considered derivative instruments under applicable accounting guidance. As such, The Company records its interest rate lock commitments and forward loan sales commitments at fair value, determined as the amount that would be required to settle each of these derivative financial instruments at the balance sheet date. In the normal course of business, the mortgage subsidiary enters into contractual interest rate lock commitments to extend credit, if approved, at a fixed interest rate and with fixed expiration dates. The commitments become effective when the borrowers "lock-in" a specified interest rate within the time frames established by the mortgage banking subsidiary. Market risk arises if interest rates move adversely between the time of the interest rate lock by the borrower and the sale date of the loan to an investor. To mitigate the effect of the interest rate risk inherent in providing interest rate lock commitments to borrowers, the mortgage banking subsidiary enters into best efforts forward sales contracts with third party investors. The forward sales contracts lock in a price for the sale of loans similar to the specific interest rate lock commitments. Both the interest rate lock commitments to the borrowers and the forward sales contracts to the investors that extend through to the date the loan may close are derivatives, and accordingly, are marked to fair value through earnings. In estimating the fair value of an interest rate lock commitment, the Company assigns a probability to the interest rate lock commitment based on an expectation that it will be exercised and the loan will be funded. The fair value of the interest rate lock commitment is derived from the fair value of related mortgage loans, which is based on observable market data and includes the expected net future cash flows related to servicing of the loans. The fair value of the interest rate lock commitment is also derived from inputs that include guarantee fees negotiated with the agencies and private investors, buy-up and buy-down values provided by the agencies and private investors, and interest rate spreads for the difference between retail and wholesale mortgage rates. Management also applies fall-out ratio assumptions for those interest rate lock commitments for which we do not close a mortgage loan. The fall-out ratio assumptions are based on the mortgage subsidiary's historical experience, conversion ratios for similar loan commitments, and market conditions. While fall-out tendencies are not exact predictions of which loans will or will not close, historical performance review of loan-level data provides the basis for determining the appropriate hedge ratios. In addition, on a periodic basis, the mortgage banking subsidiary performs analysis of actual rate lock fall-out experience to determine the sensitivity of the mortgage pipeline to interest rate changes from the date of the commitment through loan origination, and then period end, using applicable published mortgage-backed investment security prices. The expected fall-out ratios (or conversely the "pull-through" percentages) are applied to the determined fair value of the unclosed mortgage pipeline in accordance with GAAP. Changes to the fair value of interest rate lock commitments are recognized based on interest rate changes, changes in the probability that the commitment will be exercised, and the passage of time. The fair value of the forward sales contracts to investors considers the market price movement of the same type of security between the trade date and the balance sheet date. These instruments are defined as Level 2 within the valuation hierarchy.

Derivative instruments not related to mortgage banking activities, including financial futures commitments and interest rate swap agreements that do not satisfy the hedge accounting requirements are recorded at fair value and are classified with resultant changes in fair value being recognized in noninterest income in the consolidated statement of operations. Fair values for these instruments are based on quoted market prices, when available. As such, the fair value adjustments for derivatives with fair values based on quoted market prices are recurring Level 1.

Commitments to extend credit – The carrying amounts of these commitments are considered to be a reasonable estimate of fair value because the commitments underlying interest rates are based upon current market rates.

Accrued interest payable - The fair value approximates the carrying value.

Off-balance sheet financial instruments – Contract values and fair values for off-balance sheet, credit-related financial instruments are based on estimated fees currently charged to enter into similar agreements, taking into account the remaining terms of the agreements and counterparties’ credit standing.

 

139
 

The carrying amount and estimated fair value of the Company's financial instruments at December 31, 2013 and 2012 are as follows:

    At December 31, 2013
    Carrying   Fair Value
    Amount   Total   Level 1   Level 2   Level 3
Financial assets:   (In thousands)
Cash and due from banks   $ 4,489       4,489       4,489       —         —    
Interest-bearing cash     34,176       34,176       34,176       —         —    
Securities available for sale     167,535       167,535       —         167,535       —    
Securities held to maturity     24,554       23,547       —         15,177       8,370  
Federal Home Loan Bank stock     4,103       4,103       —         —         4,103  
Other investments     1,858       1,858       —         —         1,858  
Derivative assets     1,412       1,412       428       984       —    
Loans held for sale     36,897       37,041       —         37,041       —    
Loans receivable, net     535,221       524,142       —         497,045       27,097  
Accrued interest receivable     2,802       2,802       —         2,802       —    
Mortgage servicing rights     10,908       17,718       —         17,718       —    
                                         
Financial liabilities:                                        
Deposits     697,581       696,674       —         696,674       —    
Short-term borrowed funds     10,300       10,300       —         10,300       —    
Long-term debt     74,540       71,462       —         71,462       —    
Derivative liabilities     55       55       —         55       —    
Accrued interest payable     311       311       —         311       —    

 

    At December 31, 2012
    Carrying   Fair Value
    Amount   Total   Level 1   Level 2   Level 3
Financial assets:   (In thousands)
Cash and due from banks   $ 6,499       6,499       6,499       —         —    
Interest-bearing cash     11,340       11,340       11,340       —         —    
Securities available-for-sale     148,407       148,407       —         148,407       —    
Securities held-to-maturity     9,166       5,549       —         —         5,549  
Federal Home Loan Bank stock     6,413       6,413       —         —         6,413  
Other investments     1,728       1,728       —         —         1,728  
Derivative assets     6,542       6,542       —         6,542       —    
Loans held for sale     144,849       149,151       —         149,151       —    
Loans receivable, net     501,691       502,735       —         471,690       31,045  
Accrued interest receivable     3,203       3,203       —         3,203       —    
Mortgage servicing rights     12,039       18,165       —         18,165       —    
                                         
Financial liabilities:                                        
Deposits     653,247       654,090       —         654,090       —    
Short-term borrowed funds     82,482       82,480       —         82,480       —    
Long-term debt     64,840       58,874       —         58,874       —    
Derivative liabilities     —         —         —         —         —    
Accrued interest payable     1,599       1,599       —         1,599       —    

 

140
 

 

    At December 31,
    2013   2012
    Notional   Estimated   Notional   Estimated
    Amount   Fair Value   Amount   Fair Value
Off-Balance Sheet Financial Instruments:   (In thousands)
Commitments to extend credit   $ 38,595       —         31,916       —    
Standby letters of credit     526       —         396       —    
Derivative assets:                                
Mortgage loan interest rate lock commitments     —         —         289,584       4,783  
Mortgage loan forward sales commitments     20,516       106       59,177       1,692  
Mortgage-backed securities forward sales commitments     88,000       878       308,000       67  
Interest rate swaps     20,000       428       —         —    
                                 
Derivative liabilities -                                
Mortgage loan interest rate lock commitments     103,614       55       —         —    

 

In determining appropriate levels, the Company performs a detailed analysis of the assets and liabilities that are subject to fair value disclosures. At each reporting period, all assets and liabilities for which the fair value measurement is based on significant unobservable inputs are classified as Level 3.

Following is a description of valuation methodologies used for assets recorded at fair value on a recurring and non-recurring basis.

Investment Securities Available-for-sale

 

Measurement is on a recurring basis upon quoted market prices, if available. If quoted market prices are not available, fair values are measured using independent pricing models or other model-based valuation techniques such as the present value of future cash flows, adjusted for prepayment assumptions, projected credit losses, and liquidity. At December 31, 2013 and 2012, the Company’s investment securities available-for-sale are recurring Level 2.

Mortgage loans held for sale

 

Mortgage loans held for sale are recorded at either fair value, if elected, or the lower of cost or fair value on an individual loan basis. Origination fees and costs for loans held for sale recorded at lower of cost or market are capitalized in the basis of the loan and are included in the calculation of realized gains and losses upon sale. Origination fees and costs are recognized in earnings at the time of origination for loans held for sale that are recorded at fair value. Fair value is derived from observable current market prices, when available, and includes loan servicing value. When observable market prices are not available, the Company uses judgment and estimates fair value using internal models, in which the Company uses its best estimates of assumptions it believes would be used by market participants in estimating fair value. Mortgage loans held for sale are classified within Level 2 of the valuation hierarchy.

Brokered Deposit

 

Fair Value accounting was elected for a brokered deposit entered into during 2013 as part of the Company’s interest rate risk management. Fair value of the brokered deposit is derived from quoted market prices. If quoted market prices are not available, fair values are measured using independent pricing models or other model-based valuation techniques such as the present value of future cash flows, adjusted for prepayment assumptions, projected credit losses, and liquidity.

Impaired Loans

 

Loans that are considered impaired are recorded at fair value on a non-recurring basis. Once a loan is considered impaired, the fair value is measured using one of several methods, including collateral liquidation value, market value of similar debt and discounted cash flows. Those impaired loans not requiring a specific charge against the allowance represent loans for which the fair value of the expected repayments or collateral meet or exceed the recorded investment in the loan. At December 31, 2013, substantially all of the total impaired loans were evaluated based on the fair value of the underlying collateral. Loans which are deemed to be impaired are primarily valued on a nonrecurring basis at the fair value of the underlying real estate collateral. Such fair values are obtained using independent appraisals, which the Company considers to be Level 3 inputs.

141
 

Derivative Assets and Liabilities

 

The primary use of derivative instruments is related to the mortgage banking activities of the Company. The Company's wholesale mortgage banking subsidiary enters into interest rate lock commitments related to expected funding of residential mortgage loans at specified times in the future. Interest rate lock commitments that relate to the origination of mortgage loans that will be held-for-sale are considered derivative instruments under applicable accounting guidance. As such, The Company records its interest rate lock commitments and forward loan sales commitments at fair value, determined as the amount that would be required to settle each of these derivative financial instruments at the balance sheet date. In the normal course of business, the mortgage subsidiary enters into contractual interest rate lock commitments to extend credit, if approved, at a fixed interest rate and with fixed expiration dates. The commitments become effective when the borrowers "lock-in" a specified interest rate within the time frames established by the mortgage banking subsidiary. Market risk arises if interest rates move adversely between the time of the interest rate lock by the borrower and the sale date of the loan to an investor. To mitigate the effect of the interest rate risk inherent in providing interest rate lock commitments to borrowers, the mortgage banking subsidiary enters into best efforts forward sales contracts with third party investors. The forward sales contracts lock in a price for the sale of loans similar to the specific interest rate lock commitments. Both the interest rate lock commitments to the borrowers and the forward sales contracts to the investors that extend through to the date the loan may close are derivatives, and accordingly, are marked to fair value through earnings. In estimating the fair value of an interest rate lock commitment, the Company assigns a probability to the interest rate lock commitment based on an expectation that it will be exercised and the loan will be funded. The fair value of the interest rate lock commitment is derived from the fair value of related mortgage loans, which is based on observable market data and includes the expected net future cash flows related to servicing of the loans. The fair value of the interest rate lock commitment is also derived from inputs that include guarantee fees negotiated with the agencies and private investors, buy-up and buy-down values provided by the agencies and private investors, and interest rate spreads for the difference between retail and wholesale mortgage rates. Management also applies fall-out ratio assumptions for those interest rate lock commitments for which we do not close a mortgage loan. The fall-out ratio assumptions are based on the mortgage subsidiary's historical experience, conversion ratios for similar loan commitments, and market conditions. While fall-out tendencies are not exact predictions of which loans will or will not close, historical performance review of loan-level data provides the basis for determining the appropriate hedge ratios. In addition, on a periodic basis, the mortgage banking subsidiary performs analysis of actual rate lock fall-out experience to determine the sensitivity of the mortgage pipeline to interest rate changes from the date of the commitment through loan origination, and then period end, using applicable published mortgage-backed investment security prices. The expected fall-out ratios (or conversely the "pull-through" percentages) are applied to the determined fair value of the unclosed mortgage pipeline in accordance with GAAP. Changes to the fair value of interest rate lock commitments are recognized based on interest rate changes, changes in the probability that the commitment will be exercised, and the passage of time. The fair value of the forward sales contracts to investors considers the market price movement of the same type of security between the trade date and the balance sheet date. These instruments are defined as Level 2 within the valuation hierarchy.

Derivative instruments not related to mortgage banking activities, including financial futures commitments and interest rate swap agreements that do not satisfy the hedge accounting requirements are recorded at fair value and are classified with resultant changes in fair value being recognized in noninterest income in the consolidated statement of operations. Fair values for these instruments are based on quoted market prices, when available. As such, the fair value adjustments for derivatives with fair values based on quoted market prices in an active market are recurring Level 1.

Other Real Estate Owned (OREO)

 

OREO is carried at the lower of carrying value or fair value on a non-recurring basis.  Fair value is based upon independent appraisals or management’s estimation of the collateral and is considered a Level 3 measurement.  When the OREO value is based upon a current appraisal or when a current appraisal is not available or there is estimated further impairment, the measurement is considered a Level 3 measurement.

142
 

Assets and liabilities measured at fair value on a recurring basis are as follows as of December 31, 2013 and 2012:

    Quoted market price   Significant other   Significant other
    in active markets   observable inputs   unobservable inputs
    (Level 1)   (Level 2)   (Level 3)
    (In thousands)
December 31, 2013            
Available-for-sale investment securities:                        
Municipal securities   $ —         38,499       —    
US government agencies     —         5,175       —    
Mortgage-backed securities:                        
Agency     —         69,929       —    
Non-agency     —         53,932       —    
Loans held for sale     —         37,041       —    
Derivative assets:                        
Mortgage loan interest rate lock commitments     —         —         —    
Mortgage loan forward sales commitments     —         106       —    
Mortgage-backed securities forward sales commitments     —         878       —    
Interest rate swaps     428       —         —    
Brokered deposits     —         4,948       —    
Derivative liabilities:                        
Mortgage loan interest rate lock commitments     —         55       —    
Total   $ 428       210,563       —    
                         
December 31, 2012                        
Available-for-sale investment securities:                        
Municipal securities   $ —         17,769       —    
US government agencies     —         —         —    
Mortgage-backed securities:                        
Agency     —         79,209       —    
Non-agency     —         51,429       —    
Loans held for sale     —         149,151       —    
Derivative assets:                        
Mortgage loan interest rate lock commitments     —         4,783       —    
Mortgage loan forward sales commitments     —         1,692       —    
Mortgage-backed securities forward sales commitments     —         67       —    
Total   $ —         304,100       —    

 

143
 

Assets measured at fair value on a nonrecurring basis are as follows as of December 31, 2013 and 2012:

    Quoted market price   Significant other   Significant other
    in active markets   observable inputs   unobservable inputs
    (Level 1)   (Level 2)   (Level 3)
    (In thousands)
December 31, 2013            
Impaired loans:                        
Loans secured by real estate:                        
One-to-four family   $ —         —         6,117  
Home equity     —         —         125  
Commercial real estate     —         —         16,953  
Construction and development     —         —         1,328  
Consumer loans     —         —         20  
Commercial business loans     —         —         2,554  
Real estate owned:                        
One-to-four family     —         —         959  
Commercial real estate     —         —         1,781  
Construction and development     —         —         3,533  
Total   $ —         —         33,370  
                         
December 31, 2012                        
Impaired loans:                        
Loans secured by real estate:                        
One-to-four family   $ —         —         7,080  
Home equity     —         —         —    
Commercial real estate     —         —         17,818  
Construction and development     —         —         2,836  
Consumer loans     —         —         49  
Commercial business loans     —         —         3,262  
Real estate owned:                        
One-to-four family     —         —         1,010  
Commercial real estate     —         —         1,902  
Construction and development     —         —         3,372  
Total   $ —         —         37,329  

 

The Company predominantly lends with real estate serving as collateral on a substantial majority of loans. Loans that are deemed to be impaired are primarily valued at fair values of the underlying real estate collateral.

For Level 3 assets and liabilities measured at fair value on a recurring or non-recurring basis as of December 31, 2013 and December 31, 2012, the significant unobservable inputs used in the fair value measurements were as follows:

 

  December 31, 2013 and 2012
      Significant   Significant Unobservable
  Valuation Technique   Observable Inputs   Inputs
Impaired Loans Appraisal Value   Appraisals and or sales of   Appraisals discounted 10% to 20% for
      comparable properties   sales commissions and other holding costs
           
Real estate owned Appraisal Value/   Appraisals and or sales of   Appraisals discounted 10% to 20% for
  Comparison Sales/   comparable properties   sales commissions and other holding costs
    Other estimates        

 

144
 

NOTE 15 - OFF-BALANCE SHEET FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS AND CONCENTRATIONS OF CREDIT RISK

The Company is party to financial instruments with off-balance-sheet risk in the normal course of business to meet the financing needs of its customers. These financial instruments include commitments to extend credit. These instruments involve, to varying degrees, elements of credit risk in excess of the amount recognized in the consolidated balance sheets.

The Company’s exposure to credit loss in the event of nonperformance by the other party to the financial instrument for commitments to extend credit is represented by the contractual amount of these instruments. The Company uses the same credit policies in making commitments as for on-balance sheet instruments. At December 31, 2013 and 2012, the Company had commitments to extend credit in the amount of $48.6 million and $31.9 million, respectively. At December 31, 2013 and 2012, the Company had standby letters of credit in the amount of $526,000 and $396,000, respectively.

Standby letters of credit obligate the Company to meet certain financial obligations of its customers, if, under the contractual terms of the agreement, the customers are unable to do so. Payment is only guaranteed under these letters of credit upon the borrower’s failure to perform its obligations to the beneficiary. The Company can seek recovery of the amounts paid from the borrower and the letters of credit are generally not collateralized. Commitments under standby letters of credit are usually one year or less. At December 31, 2013, the Company has recorded no liability for the current carrying amount of the obligation to perform as a guarantor; as such amounts are not considered material. The maximum potential of undiscounted future payments related to standby letters of credit at December 31, 2013 was approximately $526,000.

Commitments to extend credit are agreements to lend to a customer as long as there is no violation of any condition established in the contract. Commitments generally have fixed expiration dates or other termination clauses and may require a payment of a fee. Since commitments may expire without being drawn upon, the total commitments do not necessarily represent future cash requirements. The Company evaluates each customer's creditworthiness on a case-by-case basis. The amount of collateral obtained, if deemed necessary by the Company upon extension of credit, is based on management's credit evaluation of the party. Collateral held varies, but may include inventory, property and equipment, residential real estate and income producing commercial properties.

The Company uses derivatives primarily to neutralize interest rate risk related to its pipeline of interest rate lock commitments issued on residential mortgage loans in the process of origination for sale. At December 31, 2013 and 2012, the Company’s outstanding mortgage interest rate lock commitments totaled $103.6 and $289.6 million, respectively. The Company uses mortgage loan forward sales commitments and mortgage-backed securities forward sales commitments that generally correspond with the composition of the locked pipeline to economically hedge a percentage of the Company’s pipeline of mortgage loan interest rate lock commitments and loans held for sale. At December 31, 2013 and 2012, the Company’s outstanding mortgage loan forward sales commitments totaled $20.5 million and $59.2 million, respectively. At December 31, 2013 and 2012, the Company’s outstanding mortgage-backed securities forward sales commitments totaled $88.0 million and $308.0 million, respectively. The Company’s derivative positions are marked to market as shown in Note 3 - Derivatives.

Derivative instruments not related to mortgage banking activities, including financial futures commitments and interest rate swap agreements that do not satisfy the hedge accounting requirements are recorded at fair value and are classified with resultant changes in fair value being recognized in noninterest income in the consolidated statement of operations. As of December 31, 2013, the Company’s outstanding interest rate swap totaled $20.0 million. The interest rate swap was entered into by the Company during 2013. As such, there was no amount outstanding for interest rate swaps during 2012. The Company’s derivative positions are marked to market as shown in Note 3 - Derivatives.

145
 

Management closely monitors its credit concentrations and attempts to diversify the portfolio within its market area. The Company’s markets are concentrated along coastal South Carolina. A summary of commercial real estate credit concentrations follows:

 

    At December 31,
    2013   2012
    (In thousands)
Commercial real estate loans, excluding owner-occupied and unfunded commitments   $ 190,934       174,680  
Loans secured by owner-occupied commercial real estate     115,413       122,498  
Unfunded commitments of commercial real estate     12,120       9,172  
Total   $ 318,467       306,350  

 

NOTE 16 - EMPLOYEE BENEFIT PLANS

The Company maintains a 401(k) plan that covers substantially all employees of CresCom Bank, Carolina Services (“CFC Participants”) and Crescent Mortgage (“CMC Participants”). Participants may contribute up to the maximum allowed by the regulation. During fiscal 2013 and 2012, the Company matched 75% of an employee’s contribution up to 6.00% of the participant’s compensation of the CFC Participants and the CMC Participants. For the years ended December 31, 2013, and 2012, the Company made matching contributions of $500,000 and $461,000, respectively.

The Company has an arrangement with two executives whereby the Company made payments to an insurance company on behalf of the executives. The advance is treated as a loan to the executive and the cash surrender value of the payment to the insurance company is included in other assets in the accompanying consolidated statements of financial condition. The cash surrender value of the advance at December 31, 2013 and 2012 is $535,000 and $813,000, respectively. The executive is entitled to the increase in cash value above the Company’s original cash value insurance contributions. The executive pays the Company imputed interest on the loan balance and the increase in the cash value is recorded as compensation to the executives. The insurance policy premiums are paid in full by the executives. Each executive is entitled to receive a $1.0 million death benefit and the Company will receive a $1.8 million death benefit. Since the executive pays the insurance premiums, the insurance proceeds would be taxable to the Company.

The Company incurred an aggregate premium of $108,000 and $133,000 paid on behalf of the executives for the period ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively.

NOTE 17 - EARNINGS PER SHARE

Basic earnings per share are calculated by dividing net income by the weighted average number of common shares outstanding during the period. Diluted earnings per share is calculated by dividing net income by the weighted average number of common shares outstanding plus the weighted average number of additional common shares that would have been outstanding if the dilutive potential common shares had been issued. Diluted earnings per share include the effects of outstanding stock options and restricted stock issued by the Company, if dilutive. The number of additional shares is calculated by assuming that outstanding stock options were exercised and that the proceeds from such exercises and vesting were used to acquire shares of common stock at the average market price during the reporting period.

As stated in Note 1, on January 15, 2014, the Board of Directors of the Company declared a two-for-one stock split to stockholders of record dated February 10, 2014, payable on February 28, 2014. All share, earnings per share, and per share data have been retroactively adjusted to reflect this stock split for all periods presented in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles.

146
 

The following is a summary of the reconciliation of average shares outstanding for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012:

    December 31,
    2013   2012
      Basic       Diluted       Basic       Diluted  
                                 
Weighted average shares outstanding     3,841,230       3,841,230       3,837,984       3,837,984  
Effect of dilutive securities     —         119,017       —         —    
Average shares outstanding     3,841,230       3,960,247       3,837,984       3,837,984  

The average market price used in calculating the dilutive securities under the treasury stock method for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012 was $13.15 and $7.56, respectively. For the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, 71,274 and 16,480 option shares, respectively, were excluded from the calculation of diluted earnings per share during the period because the exercise prices were greater than the average market price of the common shares, and therefore were deemed not to be dilutive. The Company does not have an actively traded market for its shares and, accordingly, the average market price used in calculating dilutive securities is based either on a very limited number of transactions or on a valuation model.

NOTE 18 - CAPITAL REQUIREMENTS AND OTHER RESTRICTIONS

The Company and the Bank are subject to various federal and state regulatory requirements, including regulatory capital requirements. Failure to meet minimum capital requirements can initiate certain mandatory and possible additional discretionary actions that if undertaken could have a direct material effect on the Company’s and the Bank’s financial statements. Under capital adequacy guidelines and the regulatory framework for prompt corrective action, the Company and the Bank must meet specific capital guidelines that involve quantitative measures of the Company’s and the Bank’s assets, liabilities, and certain off-balance sheet items as calculated under regulatory methods. The Company’s and the Bank’s capital amounts and classifications are also subject to qualitative judgments by the regulators about components, risk weighting and other factors. As of December 31, 2013, the most recent notification from federal banking agencies categorized the Company and the Bank as “well capitalized” under the regulatory framework. In order to be considered “adequately capitalized”, the Company and the Bank are required to maintain minimum Tier 1 capital and total risk-based capital to risk-weighted assets and Tier 1 capital to total average assets of 4%, 8%, and 4%, respectively. In order to be considered “well capitalized”, the Company and the Bank are required to maintain minimum Tier 1 capital and total risk-based capital to risk-weighted assets and Tier 1 capital to total average assets of 6%, 10%, and 5%, respectively. Since December 31, 2013, there have been no events or conditions that management believes have changed the Company’s or the Bank’s regulatory capital categories.

147
 

The actual capital amounts and ratios as well as minimum amounts for each regulatory defined category for the Company and the Bank at December 31, 2013 and 2012 are as follows:

            Required to be        
            Categorized   Required to be
            Adequately   Categorized
    Actual   Capitalized   Well Capitalized
    Amount   Ratio   Amount   Ratio   Amount   Ratio
    (Dollars in thousands)
                         
December 31, 2013                                                
Carolina Financial Corporation                                                
Tier 1 capital (to risk weighted assets)   $ 99,602       15.42 %     25,834       4.00 %     N/A       N/A  
Total risk based capital (to risk weighted assets)     108,650       16.82 %     51,668       8.00 %     N/A       N/A  
Tier 1 capital (to total average assets)     99,602       11.15 %     35,732       4.00 %     N/A       N/A  
                                                 
CresCom Bank                                                
Tier 1 capital (to risk weighted assets)     98,301       15.26 %     25,763       4.00 %     38,645       6.00 %
Total risk based capital (to risk weighted assets)     107,327       16.66 %     51,526       8.00 %     64,408       10.00 %
Tier 1 capital (to total average assets)     98,301       11.01 %     35,706       4.00 %     44,632       5.00 %
                                                 
December 31, 2012                                                
Carolina Financial Corporation   $ 82,839       13.11 %     25,266       4.00 %     N/A       N/A  
Tier 1 capital (to risk weighted assets)     98,030       15.52 %     50,532       8.00 %     N/A       N/A  
Total risk based capital (to risk weighted assets)     82,839       9.65 %     34,322       4.00 %     N/A       N/A  
Tier 1 capital (to total average assets)                                                
                                                 
CresCom Bank     85,537       13.57 %     25,222       4.00 %     37,833       6.00 %
Tier 1 capital (to risk weighted assets)     100,714       15.97 %     50,445       8.00 %     63,056       10.00 %
Total risk based capital (to risk weighted assets)     85,537       10.01 %     34,171       4.00 %     42,713       5.00 %
Tier 1 capital (to total average assets)                                                

 

A South Carolina state bank may not pay dividends from capital. All dividends must be paid out of undivided profits then on hand, after deducting expenses, including reserves for losses and bad debts. Unless otherwise instructed by the South Carolina Board of Financial Institutions, the Bank is generally permitted under South Carolina state banking regulations to pay cash dividends of up to 100% of net income in any calendar year without obtaining the prior approval of the South Carolina Board of Financial Institutions. In addition, under the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation Improvement Act, the Bank may not pay a dividend if, after paying the dividend, the Bank would be undercapitalized. The FRB may also prevent the payment of a dividend by the Bank if it determines that the payment would be an unsafe and unsound banking practice.

On July 2, 2013, the Federal Reserve adopted a final rule for the Basel III capital framework and, on July 9, 2013, the OCC also adopted a final rule and the FDIC adopted the same provisions in the form of an “interim” final rule. The rule will apply to all national and state banks and savings associations and most bank holding companies and savings and loan holding companies, which we collectively refer to herein as “covered” banking organizations. Bank holding companies with less than $500 million in total consolidated assets are not subject to the final rule, nor are savings and loan holding companies substantially engaged in commercial activities or insurance underwriting. In certain respects, the rule imposes more stringent requirements on “advanced approaches” banking organizations—those organizations with $250 billion or more in total consolidated assets, $10 billion or more in total foreign exposures, or that have opted in to the Basel II capital regime. The requirements in the rule will begin to phase on January 1, 2014, for advanced approaches banking organizations, and on January 1, 2015, for other covered banking organizations. The requirements in the rule will be fully phased in by January 1, 2019.

Management expects to comply with the final rules when issued and effective. To prepare for the implementation of the new capital rules, management continues to build capital through retained earnings and is evaluating strategies to maximize the Company’s capital under the Basel III NPR.

148
 

During the year ended December 31, 2013, the Company paid dividend payments of $401,000 to stockholders. There were no dividend payments in 2012.

NOTE 19 – SUPPLEMENTAL SEGMENT INFORMATION

The Company has three reportable segments: community banking, wholesale mortgage banking (“mortgage banking”) and other. The community banking segment provides traditional banking services offered through CresCom Bank. The mortgage banking segment provides mortgage loan origination and servicing offered through Crescent Mortgage. The other segment provides managerial and operational support to the other business segments through Carolina Services and Carolina Financial.

The accounting policies of the segments are the same as those described in the summary of significant accounting policies. The Company evaluates performance based on net income.

The Company accounts for intersegment revenues and expenses as if the revenue/expense transactions were generated to third parties, that is, at current market prices.

The Company’s reportable segments are strategic business units that offer different products and services. They are managed separately because each segment has different types and levels of credit and interest rate risk.

 

149
 

The following tables present selected financial information for the Company’s reportable business segments for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012:

    Community   Mortgage            
For the Year Ended December 31, 2013   Banking   Banking   Other   Eliminations   Total
    (In thousands)
Interest income   $ 31,200       1,637       17       94       32,948  
Interest expense     4,965       84       675       (6 )     5,718  
Net interest income (expense)     26,235       1,553       (658 )     100       27,230  
Provision for loan losses     (900 )     40       —         —         (860 )
Noninterest income (expense) from external customers     2,678       41,332       76       —         44,086  
Intersegment noninterest income     —         488       5,812       (6,300 )     —    
Noninterest expense     17,724       22,452       5,360       436       45,972  
Intersegment noninterest expense     4,853       1,037       —         (5,890 )     —    
Income (loss) before income taxes     7,236       19,844       (130 )     (746 )     26,204  
Income tax expense (benefit)     2,273       7,441       (219 )     (109 )     9,386  
Net income (loss)   $ 4,963       12,403       89       (637 )     16,818  
                                         
Assets   $ 873,104       61,846       101,497       (154,863 )     881,584  
Loans receivable, net     532,616       3,374       —         (769 )     535,221  
Loans held for sale     753       36,144       —         —         36,897  
Deposits     701,110       —         —         (3,529 )     697,581  
Borrowed funds     69,376       —         15,465       (1 )     84,840  

 

    Community   Mortgage            
For the Year Ended December 31, 2012   Banking   Banking   Other   Eliminations   Total
    (In thousands)
Interest income   $ 33,524       1,801       18       13       35,356  
Interest expense     6,377       397       748       (9 )     7,513  
Net interest income (expense)     27,147       1,404       (730 )     22       27,843  
Provision for loan losses     2,707       —         —         —         2,707  
Noninterest income (expense) from external customers     (2,668 )     56,133       59       —         53,524  
Intersegment noninterest income     —         618       5,813       (6,431 )     —    
Noninterest expense     22,198       23,445       5,744       —         51,387  
Intersegment noninterest expense     4,853       1,099       —         (5,952 )     —    
Income (loss) before income taxes     (5,279 )     33,611       (602 )     (457 )     27,273  
Income tax expense (benefit)     (1,869 )     12,603       (183 )     (156 )     10,395  
Net income (loss)   $ (3,410 )     21,008       (419 )     (301 )     16,878  
                                         
Assets   $ 874,354       54,204       88,344       (128,178 )     888,724  
Loans receivable, net     501,445       853       —         (607 )     501,691  
Loans held for sale     117,803       27,046       —         —         144,849  
Deposits     655,486       —         —         (2,239 )     653,247  
Borrowed funds     127,176       1,932       18,365       (151 )     147,322  

 

150
 

NOTE 20 - PARENT COMPANY FINANCIAL INFORMATION

The condensed financial statements for the parent company are presented below:

Carolina Financial Corporation

Condensed Statements of Financial Condition

 

    At December 31,
    2013   2012
Assets:   (In thousands)
Cash and cash equivalents   $ 334       439  
Investment in bank subsidiary     95,928       85,213  
Investment in non-bank subsidiaries     971       643  
Investment in unconsolidated statutory business trusts     465       465  
Securities available for sale     1       1  
Other assets     165       213  
Total assets   $ 97,864       86,974  
                 
Liabilities and stockholders' equity:                
Accrued expenses and other liabilities     172       1,245  
Short-term debt     —         2,750  
Long-term debt     15,465       15,465  
Stockholders' equity     82,227       67,514  
Total liabilities and stockholders' equity   $ 97,864       86,974  

 

 

Carolina Financial Corporation

Condensed Statements of Operations

 

    For the Years
    Ended December 31,
    2013   2012
    (In thousands)
Dividend income from non-bank subsidiaries   $ —         150  
Dividend income from banking subsidiary     4,400       —    
Interest income     17       18  
Total income     4,417       168  
Interest expense     670       739  
General and administrative expenses     435       451  
Total expenses     1,105       1,190  
Income (loss) before income taxes and equity in undistributed earnings of subsidiaries     3,312       (1,022 )
Income tax benefit     (414 )     (398 )
Income (loss) before equity in undistributed earnings of subsidiaries     3,726       (624 )
Equity in undistributed earnings of CresCom Bank     12,764       17,297  
Equity in undistributed earnings of Carolina Services     328       205  
Total equity in undistributed earnings of subsidiaries     13,092       17,502  
Net income   $ 16,818       16,878  

 

151
 

Carolina Financial Corporation

Condensed Statements of Cash Flows

 

    For the Years
    Ended December 31,
    2013   2012
    (In thousands)
Cash flows from operating activities:                
Net income   $ 16,818       16,878  
Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by operating activities:                
Equity in undistributed earnings in subsidiaries     (13,092 )     (17,502 )
Stock-based compensation     303       86  
Decrease in other assets     171       298  
(Decrease) increase in other liabilities     (1,197 )     504  
Net cash provided by operating activities     3,003       264  
Cash flows from financing activities:                
Principal repayment of short term debt     (2,750 )     (200 )
Proceeds from exercise of stock options     43          
Cash dividends paid on common stock     (401 )     —    
Net cash used in financing activities     (3,108 )     (200 )
Net increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents     (105 )     64  
Cash and cash equivalents, beginning of year     439       375  
Cash and cash equivalents, end of year   $ 334       439  

 

152
 

Item 14.  Changes in and Disagreements with Accountants on Accounting and Financial Disclosure

None.

Item 15.  Financial Statements and Exhibits

(a) Financial Statements

The financial statements and financial statement schedule are filed as a part of this registration statement and begin on page 94.

(b) Exhibits

The exhibits required to be filed as part of this registration statement are listed in the Exhibit Index attached hereto and are incorporated herein by reference.

 

153
 

SIGNATURES

Pursuant to the requirements of Section 12 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, the registrant has duly caused this registration statement to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized.

  CAROLINA FINANCIAL CORPORATION
     
     
Date: February 26, 2014 By: /s/ Jerold L. Rexroad
    Jerold L. Rexroad
    Chief Executive Officer

 

154
 

EXHIBIT INDEX

Exhibit No.

 

Description

3.1 Amended and Restated Certificate of Incorporation filed on April 2, 1997
3.2 Certificate of Amendment to the Amended and Restated Certificate of Incorporation filed on June 11, 2010
3.3 Amended and Restated Bylaws dated April 24, 2013
3.4 Amendment to Amended and Restated Bylaws dated April 24, 2013
3.5 First Amendment to the Amended and Restated Bylaws dated July 17, 2013
4.1 See Exhibits 3.1 through 3.5 for provisions in Carolina Financial Corporation’s Certificate of Incorporation and Bylaws defining the rights of holders of common stock
4.2 Form of certificate of common stock
10.1 Amended and Restated Employment Agreement by and between Crescent Bank and M.J. Huggins, III dated as of December 24, 2008*
10.2 First Amendment to the Amended and Restated Employment Agreement between CresCom Bank and M.J. Huggins, III dated September 21, 2012*
10.3 Amended and Restated Supplemental Executive Agreement by and between Carolina Financial Corporation  and M.J. Huggins, III dated as of December 24, 2008*
10.4 Amended and Restated Employment Agreement by and between Crescent Bank and David Morrow dated as of December 24, 2008*
10.5 First Amendment to the Amended and Restated Employment Agreement between CresCom Bank and David Morrow dated as of September 19, 2012*
10.6 Amended and Restated Supplemental Executive Agreement by and between Carolina Financial Corporation and David Morrow dated as of December 24, 2008 *
10.7 Employment Agreement by and between Carolina Financial Corporation  and Jerold L. Rexroad dated as of May 1, 2008 *
10.8 First Amendment to the Employment Agreement between Carolina Financial Corporation and Jerold L. Rexroad dated as of September 19, 2012*
10.9 Carolina Financial Corporation 2002 Stock Option Plan*
10.10 Carolina Financial Corporation 2006 Recognition and Retention Plan*
10.11 Carolina Financial Corporation 2013 Equity Incentive Plan*
10.12 Form of Carolina Financial Corporation Elite LifeComp Agreement*
10.13 Subservicing Agreement by and between Cenlar FSB and Crescent Mortgage Company dated January 1, 2004
10.14 First Amendment to Subservicing Agreement by and between Cenlar FSB and Crescent Mortgage Company dated as of February 19, 2004
10.15 Second Amendment to Subservicing Agreement by and between Cenlar FSB and Crescent Mortgage Company dated as of February 1, 2006
10. 16 Third Amendment to Subservicing Agreement by and between Cenlar FSB and Crescent Mortgage Company dated as of January 1, 2011
21.1 Subsidiaries of Carolina Financial Corporation
   

*Indicates management contracts or compensatory plans or arrangements

155

AMENDED AND RESTATED CERTIFICATE OF INCORPORATION

OF

CAROLINA FINANCIAL CORPORATION

 

This Amended and Restated Certificate of Incorporation hereby amends and restates that Certificate of Incorporation for Carolina Financial Corporation originally filed with the Secretary of State of Delaware on February 14, 1996.

FIRST: The name of the Corporation is Carolina Financial Corporation (hereinafter referred to as the “Corporation”).

SECOND: The address of the registered office of the Corporation in the State of Delaware is Corporation Trust Center, 1209 Orange Street, in the City of Wilmington, County of New Castle. The name of the registered agent at that address is The Corporation Trust Company.

THIRD: The purpose of the Corporation is to engage in any lawful act or activity for which a corporation may be organized under the General Corporation Law of Delaware.

FOURTH:

A. The total number of shares of all classes of stock which the Corporation shall have authority to issue is three million (3,000,000) consisting of:

1. Two hundred thousand (200,000) shares of Preferred Stock, par value one cent ($.01) per share (the “Preferred Stock”); and

2. Two million, eight hundred thousand (2,800,000) shares of Common Stock, par value one cent ($.01) per share (the “Common Stock”).

B. The Board of Directors is authorized, subject to any limitations prescribed by law, to provide for the issuance of the shares of Preferred Stock in series, and by filing a certificate pursuant to the applicable law of the State of Delaware (such certificate being hereinafter referred to as a “Preferred Stock Designation”), to establish from time to time the number of shares to be included in each such series, and to fix the designation, powers, preferences, and rights of the shares of each such series and any qualifications, limitations or restrictions thereof. The number of authorized shares of Preferred Stock may be increased or decreased (but not below the number of shares thereof then outstanding) by the affirmative vote of the holders of a majority of the Common Stock, without a vote of the holders of the Preferred Stock, or of any series thereof, unless a vote of any such holders is required pursuant to the terms of any Preferred Stock Designation.

C. 1. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Certificate of Incorporation, in no event shall any record owner of any outstanding Common Stock which is beneficially owned, directly or indirectly, by a person who, as of any record date for the determination of stockholders entitled to vote on any matter, beneficially owns in excess of 10% of the then-outstanding shares of Common Stock (the “Limit”), be entitled, or permitted to any vote in respect of the shares held in excess of the Limit. The number of votes which may be cast by any record owner by virtue of the provisions hereof in respect of Common Stock beneficially owned by such person owning shares in excess of the Limit shall be a number equal to the total number of votes which a single record owner of all Common Stock owned by such person would be entitled to cast, multiplied by a fraction, the numerator of which is the number of shares of such class or series which are both beneficially owned by such person and owned of record by such record owner and the denominator of which is the total number of shares of Common Stock beneficially owned by such person owning shares in excess of the Limit.

 
 

2. The following definitions shall apply to this Section C of this Article FOURTH:

(a) “Affiliate” shall have the meaning ascribed to it in Rule 12b-2 of the General Rules and Regulations under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as in effect on the date of filing of this Certificate of Incorporation.
(b) “Beneficial ownership” shall be determined pursuant to Rule 13d-3 of the General Rules and Regulations under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (or any successor rule or statutory provision), or, if said Rule 13d-3 shall be rescinded and there shall be no successor rule or statutory provision thereto, pursuant to said Rule 13d-3 as in effect on the date of filing of this Certificate of Incorporation; provided, however, that a person shall, in any event, also be deemed the “beneficial owner” of any Common Stock:
(1) which such person or any of its affiliates beneficially owns, directly or indirectly; or
(2) which such person or any of its affiliates has (i) the right to acquire (whether such right is exercisable immediately or only after the passage of time), pursuant to any agreement, arrangement or understanding (but shall not be deemed to be the beneficial owner of any voting shares solely by reason of an agreement, contract, or other arrangement with this Corporation to effect any transaction which is described in any one or more of clauses of Section A of Article EIGHTH) or upon the exercise of conversion rights, exchange rights, warrants, or options or otherwise, or (ii) sole or shared voting or investment power with respect thereto pursuant to any agreement, arrangement, understanding, relationship or otherwise (but shall not be deemed to be the beneficial owner of any voting shares solely by reason of a revocable proxy granted for a particular meeting of stockholders, pursuant to a public solicitation of proxies for such meeting, with respect to shares of which neither such person nor any such affiliate is otherwise deemed the beneficial owner); or
 
 
(3) which are beneficially owned, directly or indirectly, by any other person with which such first mentioned person or any of its affiliates acts as a partnership, limited partnership, syndicate or other group pursuant to any agreement, arrangement or understanding for the purpose of acquiring, holding, voting or disposing of any shares of capital stock of this Corporation;

and provided further, however, that (1) no Director or Officer of this Corporation (or any affiliate of any such Director or Officer) shall, solely by reason of any or all of such Directors or Officers acting in their capacities as such, be deemed, for any purposes hereof, to beneficially own any Common Stock beneficially owned by another such Director or Officer (or any affiliate thereof), and (2) neither any employee stock ownership plan or similar plan of this Corporation or any subsidiary of this Corporation, nor any trustee with respect thereto or any affiliate of such trustee (solely by reason of such capacity of such trustee), shall be deemed, for any purposes hereof, to beneficially own any Common Stock held under any such plan. For purposes of computing the percentage beneficial ownership of Common Stock of a person the outstanding Common Stock shall include shares deemed owned by such person through application of this subsection but shall not include any other Common Stock which may be issuable by this Corporation pursuant to any agreement, or upon exercise of conversion rights, warrants or options, or otherwise. For all other purposes, the outstanding Common Stock shall include only Common Stock then outstanding and shall not include any Common Stock which may be issuable by this Corporation pursuant to any agreement, or upon the exercise of conversion rights, warrants or options, or otherwise.

(c) A “person” shall include an individual, firm, a group acting in concert, a corporation, a partnership, an association, a joint venture, a pool, a joint stock company, a trust, an unincorporated organization or similar company, a syndicate or any other group formed for the purpose of acquiring, holding or disposing of securities or any other entity.

3. The Board of Directors shall have the power to construe and apply the provisions of this section and to make all determinations necessary or desirable to implement such provisions, including but not limited to matters with respect to (i) the number of shares of Common Stock beneficially owned by any person, (ii) whether a person is an affiliate of another, (iii) whether a person has an agreement, arrangement, or understanding with another as to the matters referred to in the definition of beneficial ownership, (iv) the application of any other definition or operative provision of the section to the given facts, or (v) any other matter relating to the applicability or effect of this section.

 
 

4. The Board of Directors shall have the right to demand that any person who is reasonably believed to beneficially own Common Stock in excess of the Limit (or holds of record Common Stock beneficially owned by any person in excess of the Limit) supply the Corporation with complete information as to (i) the record owner(s) of all shares beneficially owned by such person who is reasonably believed to own shares in excess of the Limit, (ii) any other factual matter relating to the applicability or effect of this section as may reasonably be requested of such person.

5. Except as otherwise provided by law or expressly provided in this section, the presence, in person or by proxy, of the holders of record of shares of capital stock of the Corporation entitling the holders thereof to cast a majority of the votes (after giving effect, if required, to the provisions of this section) entitled to be cast by the holders of shares of capital stock of the Corporation entitled to vote shall constitute a quorum at all meetings of the stockholders, and every reference in this Certificate of Incorporation to a majority or other proportion of capital stock (or the holders thereof) for purposes of determining any quorum requirement or any requirement for stockholder consent or approval shall be deemed to refer to such majority or other proportion of the votes (or the holders thereof) then entitled to be cast in respect of such capital stock, after giving effect to the provisions of this section.

6. Any constructions, applications, or determinations made by the Board of Directors pursuant to this section in good faith and on the basis of such information and assistance as was then reasonably available for such purpose shall be conclusive and binding upon the Corporation and its stockholders.

7. In the event any provision (or portion thereof) of this section C shall be found to be invalid, prohibited or unenforceable for any reason, the remaining provisions (or portions thereof) of this section shall remain in full force and effect, and shall be construed as if such invalid, prohibited or unenforceable provision had been stricken herefrom or otherwise rendered inapplicable, it being the intent of this Corporation and its stockholders that such remaining provision (or portion thereof) of this section remain, to the fullest extent permitted by law, applicable and enforceable as to all stockholders, including stockholders owning an amount of stock over the Limit, notwithstanding any such finding.

FIFTH: The following provisions are inserted for the management of the business and the conduct of the affairs of the Corporation, and for further definition, limitation and regulation of the powers of the Corporation and of its Directors and stockholders:

A. The business and affairs of the Corporation shall be managed by or under the direction of the Board of Directors. In addition to the powers and authority expressly conferred upon them by statute or by this Certificate of Incorporation or the Bylaws of the Corporation, the Directors are hereby empowered to exercise all such powers and do all such acts and things as may be exercised or done by the Corporation.

 
 

B. The Directors of the Corporation need not be elected by written ballot unless the Bylaws so provide.

C. Any action required or permitted to be taken by the stockholders of the Corporation must be effected at a duly called annual or special meeting of stockholders of the Corporation or by the unanimous consent in writing by such stockholders.

D. Special meetings of stockholders of the Corporation may be called only by the Board of Directors pursuant to a resolution adopted by a majority of the total number of authorized directorships (whether or not there exist any vacancies in previously authorized directorships at the time any such resolution is presented to the Board for adoption) (the “Whole Board”) or as otherwise provided in the Bylaws.

SIXTH:

A. The number of Directors shall be fixed from time to time exclusively by the Board of Directors pursuant to a resolution adopted by a majority of the Whole Board. The Directors shall be divided into three classes, with the term of office of the first class to expire at the first annual meeting of stockholders, the term of office of the second class to expire at the annual meeting of stockholders one year thereafter and the term of office of the third class to expire at the annual meeting of stockholders two years thereafter with each Director to hold office until his or her successor shall have been duly elected and qualified. At each annual meeting of stockholders following such initial classification and election, Directors elected to succeed those Directors whose terms expire shall be elected for a term of office to expire at the third succeeding annual meeting of stockholders after their election with each Director to hold office until his or her successor shall have been duly elected and qualified.

B. Subject to the rights of the holders of any series of Preferred Stock then outstanding, newly created directorships resulting from any increase in the authorized number of Directors or any vacancies in the Board of Directors resulting from death, resignation, retirement, disqualification, removal from office or other cause may be filled only by a majority vote of the Directors then in office, though less than a quorum, and Directors so chosen shall hold office for a term expiring at the annual meeting of stockholders at which the term of office of the class to which they have been chosen expires. No decrease in the number of Directors constituting the Board of Directors shall shorten the term of any incumbent Director.

C. Advance notice of stockholder nominations for the election of Directors and of business to be brought by stockholders before any meeting of the stockholders of the Corporation shall be given in the manner provided in the Bylaws of the Corporation.

D. Subject to the rights of the holders of any series of Preferred Stock then outstanding, any Director, or the entire Board of Directors, may be removed from office at any time, but only for cause and oily by the affirmative vote of the holders of at least 80% of the voting power of all of the then-outstanding shares of capital stock of the Corporation entitled to vote generally in the election of Directors (after giving effect to the provisions of Article FOURTH of this Certificate of Incorporation (“Article FOURTH”)), voting together as a single class.

 
 

SEVENTH: The Board of Directors is expressly empowered to adopt, amend or repeal the Bylaws of the Corporation. Any adoption, amendment or repeal of the Bylaws of the Corporation by the Board of Directors shall require the approval of a majority of the Whole Board. The stockholders shall also have power to adopt, amend or repeal the Bylaws of the Corporation; provided, however, that, in addition to any vote of the holders of any class or series of stock of the Corporation required by law or by this Certificate of Incorporation, the affirmative vote of the holders of at least 80% of the voting power of all of the then-outstanding shares of the capital stock of the Corporation entitled to vote generally in the election of Directors (after giving effect to the provisions of Article FOURTH), voting together as a single class, shall be required to adopt, amend or repeal any provisions of the Bylaws of the Corporation.

EIGHTH:

A. In addition to any affirmative vote required by law or this Certificate of Incorporation, and except as otherwise expressly provided in this section:

1. any merger or consolidation of the Corporation or any Subsidiary (as hereinafter defined) with (i) any Interested Stockholder (as hereinafter defined) or (ii) any other corporation (whether or not itself an Interested Stockholder) which is, or after such merger or consolidation would be, an Affiliate (as hereinafter defined) of an Interested Stockholder; or

2. any sale, lease, exchange, mortgage, pledge, transfer or other disposition (in one transaction or a series of transactions) to or with any Interested Stockholder, or any Affiliate of any Interested Stockholder, of any assets of the Corporation or any Subsidiary having an aggregate Fair Market Value (as hereinafter defined) equaling or exceeding 25% or more of the combined assets of the Corporation and its Subsidiaries; or

3. the issuance or transfer by the Corporation or any Subsidiary (in one transaction or a series of transactions) of any securities of the Corporation or any Subsidiary to any Interested Stockholder or any Affiliate of any Interested Stockholder in exchange for cash, securities or other property (or a combination thereof) having an aggregate Fair Market Value (as hereinafter defined) equaling or exceeding 25% of the combined Fair Market Value of the then-outstanding common stock of the Corporation and its Subsidiaries, except pursuant to an employee benefit plan of the Corporation or any Subsidiary thereof; or

4. the adoption of any plan or proposal for the liquidation or dissolution of the Corporation proposed by or on behalf of an Interested Stockholder or any Affiliate of an Interested Stockholder; or

5. any reclassification of securities (including any reverse stock split), or recapitalization of the Corporation, or any merger or consolidation of the Corporation with any of its Subsidiaries or any other transaction (whether or not with or into or otherwise involving an Interested Stockholder) which has the effect, directly or indirectly, of increasing the proportional share of the outstanding shares of any class of equity or convertible securities of the Corporation or any Subsidiary which is directly or indirectly owned by an Interested Stockholder or any Affiliate of an Interested Stockholder;

 

 
 

shall require the affirmative vote of the holders of at least 80% of the voting power of the then-outstanding shares of stock of the Corporation entitled to vote in the election of Directors (the “Voting Stock”) (after giving effect to the provision of Article FOURTH), voting together as a single class. Such affirmative vote shall be required notwithstanding the fact that no vote may be required, or that a lesser percentage may be specified, by law or by any other provisions of this Certificate of Incorporation or any Preferred Stock Designation or in any agreement with any national securities exchange or otherwise.

The term “Business Combination” as used in this Article EIGHTH shall mean any transaction which is referred to in any one or more of paragraphs 1 through 5 of Section A of this Article EIGHTH.

B. The provisions of Section A of this Article EIGHTH shall not be applicable to any particular Business Combination, and such Business Combination shall require only the affirmative vote of the majority of the outstanding shares of capital stock entitled to vote, or such vote as is required by law or by this Certificate of Incorporation, if, in the case of any Business Combination that does not involve any cash or other consideration being received by the stockholders of the Corporation solely in their capacity as stockholders of the Corporation, the condition specified in the following paragraph 1 is met or, in the case of any other Business Combination, all of the conditions specified in either of the following paragraphs 1 or 2 are met:

1. The Business Combination shall have been approved by a majority of the Disinterested Directors (as hereinafter defined).

2. All of the following conditions shall have been met:

(a) The aggregate amount of the cash and the Fair Market Value as of the date of the consummation of the Business Combination of consideration other than cash to be received per share by the holders of Common Stock in such Business Combination shall at least be equal to the higher of the following:
(1) (if applicable) the Highest Per Share Price (as hereinafter defined), including any brokerage commissions, transfer taxes and soliciting dealers’ fees, paid by the Interested Stockholder or any of its Affiliates for any shares of Common Stock acquired by it (i) within the two-year period immediately prior to the first public announcement of the proposal of the Business Combination (the “Announcement Date”), or (ii) in the transaction in which it became an Interested Stockholder, whichever is higher.
 
 
(2) the Fair Market Value per share of Common Stock on the Announcement Date or on the date on which the Interested Stockholder became an Interested Stockholder (such latter date is referred to in this Article EIGHTH as the “Determination Date”), whichever is higher.
(b) The aggregate amount of the cash and the Fair Market Value as of the date of the consummation of the Business Combination of consideration other than cash to be received per share by holders of shares of any class of outstanding Voting Stock other than Common Stock shall be at least equal to the highest of the following (it being intended that the requirements of this subparagraph (b) shall be required to be met with respect to every such class of outstanding Voting Stock, whether or not the Interested Stockholder has previously acquired any shares of a particular class of Voting Stock):
(1) (if applicable) the Highest Per Share Price (as hereinafter defined), including any brokerage commissions, transfer taxes and soliciting dealers’ fees, paid by the Interested Stockholder for any shares of such class of Voting Stock acquired by it (i) within the two-year period immediately prior to the Announcement Date, or (ii) in the transaction in which it became an Interested Stockholder, whichever is higher;
(2) (if applicable) the highest preferential amount per share to which the holders of shares of such class of Voting Stock are entitled in the event of any voluntary or involuntary liquidation, dissolution or winding up of the Corporation; and
(3) the Fair Market Value per share of such class of Voting Stock on the Announcement Date or on the Determination Date, whichever is higher.
(c) The consideration to be received by holders of a particular class of outstanding Voting Stock (including Common Stock) shall be in cash or in the same form as the Interested Stockholder has paid for shares of such class of Voting Stock. If the Interested Stockholder has previously paid for shares of any class of Voting Stock with varying forms of consideration, the form of consideration to be received per share by holders of shares of such class of Voting Stock shall be either cash or the form used to acquire the largest number of shares of such class of Voting Stock previously acquired by the Interested Stockholder. The price determined in accordance with subparagraph B.2 of this Article EIGHTH shall be subject to appropriate adjustment in the event of any stock dividend, stock split, combination of shares or similar event.
 
 
(d) After such Interested Stockholder has become an Interested Stockholder and prior to the consummation of such Business Combination: (1) except as approved by a majority of the Disinterested Directors, there shall have been no failure to declare and pay at the regular date therefor any full quarterly dividends (whether or not cumulative) on any outstanding stock having preference over the Common Stock as to dividends or liquidation; (2) there shall have been (i) no reduction in the annual rate of dividends paid on the Common Stock (except as necessary to reflect any subdivision of the Common Stock), except as approved by a majority of the Disinterested Directors, and (ii) an increase in such annual rate of dividends as necessary to reflect any reclassification (including any reverse stock split), recapitalization, reorganization or any similar transaction which has the effect of reducing the number of outstanding shares of the Common Stock, unless the failure to so increase such annual rate is approved by a majority of the Disinterested Directors; and (3) neither such Interested Stockholder or any of its Affiliates shall have become the beneficial owner of any additional shares of Voting Stock except as part of the transaction which results in such Interested Stockholder becoming an Interested Stockholder.
(e) After such Interested Stockholder has become an Interested Stockholder, such interested Stockholder shall not have received the benefit, directly or indirectly (except proportionately as a stockholder), of any loans, advances, guarantees, pledges or other financial assistance or any tax credits or other tax advantages provided by the Corporation, whether in anticipation of or in connection with such Business Combination or otherwise.
(f) A proxy or information statement describing the proposed Business Combination and complying with the requirements of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 and the rules and regulations thereunder (or any subsequent provisions replacing such Act, rules or regulations) shall be mailed to stockholders of the Corporation at least 30 days prior to the consummation of such Business Combination (whether or not such proxy or information statement is required to be mailed pursuant to such Act or subsequent provisions).

 
 

C. For the purposes of this Article EIGHTH:

1. A “Person” shall include an individual, a group acting in concert, a corporation, a partnership, an association, a joint venture, a pool, a joint stock company, a trust, an unincorporated organization or similar company, a syndicate or any other group formed for the purpose of acquiring, holding or disposing of securities.

2. “Interested Stockholder” shall mean any person (other than the Corporation or any holding company or Subsidiary thereof) who or which:

(a) is the beneficial owner, directly or indirectly, of more than 10% of the voting power of the outstanding Voting Stock; or
(b) is an Affiliate of the Corporation and at any time within the two-year period immediately prior to the date in question was the beneficial owner, directly or indirectly, of 10% or more of the voting power of the then-outstanding Voting Stock; or
(c) is an assignee of or has otherwise succeeded to any shares of Voting Stock which were at any time within the two-year period immediately prior to the date in question beneficially owned by an Interested Stockholder, if such assignment or succession shall have occurred in the course of a transaction or series of transactions not involving a public offering within the meaning of the Securities Act of 1933.

3. For purposes of this Article EIGHTH, “beneficial ownership” shall be determined in the manner provided in Section C of Article FOURTH hereof.

4. “Affiliate” and “Associate” shall have the respective meanings ascribed to such terms in Rule 12b-2 of the General Rules and Regulations under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as in effect on the date of filing of this Certificate of Incorporation.

5. “Subsidiary” means any corporation of which a majority of any class of equity security is owned, directly or indirectly, by the Corporation; provided, however, that for the purposes of the defmition of Interested Stockholder set forth in paragraph 2 of this section, the term “Subsidiary” shall mean only a corporation of which a majority of each class of equity security is owned, directly or indirectly, by the Corporation.

6. “Disinterested Director” means any member of the Board of Directors who is unaffiliated with the Interested Stockholder and was a member of the Board of Directors prior to the time that the Interested Stockholder became an Interested Stockholder, and any Director who is thereafter chosen to fill any vacancy of the Board of Directors or who is elected and who, in either event, is unaffiliated with the Interested Stockholder and in connection with his or her initial assumption of office is recommended for appointment or election by a majority of Disinterested Directors then on the Board of Directors.

 

 
 

7. “Fair Market Value” means: (a) in the case of stock, the highest closing sales price of the stock during the 30-day period immediately preceding the date in question of a share of such stock on the National Association of Securities Dealers Automated Quotation System or any system then in use, or, if such stock is admitted to trading on a principal United States securities exchange registered under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, Fair Market Value shall be the highest sales price reported during the 30-day period preceding the date in question, or, if no such quotations are available, the Fair Market Value on the date in question of a share of such stock as determined by the Board of Directors in good faith, in each case with respect to any class of stock, appropriately adjusted for any dividend or distribution in shares of such stock or any stock split or reclassification of outstanding shares of such stock into a greater number of shares of such stock or any combination or reclassification of outstanding shares of such stock into a smaller number of shares of such stock, and (b) in the case of property other than cash or stock, the Fair Market. Value of such property on the date in question as determined by the Board of Directors in good faith.

8. Reference to “Highest Per Share Price” shall in each case with respect to any class of stock reflect an appropriate adjustment for any dividend or distribution in shares of such stock or any stock split or reclassification of outstanding shares of such stock into a greater number of shares of such stock or any combination or reclassification of outstanding shares of such stock into a smaller number of shares of such stock.

9. In the event of any Business Combination in which the Corporation survives, the phrase “consideration other than cash to be received” as used in subparagraphs (a) and (b) of paragraph 2 of Section B of this Article EIGHTH shall include the shares of Common Stock and/or the shares of any other class of outstanding Voting Stock retained by the holders of such shares.

D. A majority of the Directors of the Corporation shall have the power and duty to determine for the purposes of this Article EIGHTH, on the basis of information known to them after reasonable inquiry (a) whether a person is an Interested Stockholder; (b) the number of shares of Voting Stock beneficially owned by any person; (c) whether a person is an Affiliate or Associate of another; and (d) whether the assets which are the subject of any Business Combination have, or the consideration to be received for the issuance or transfer of securities by the Corporation or any Subsidiary in any Business Combination has an aggregate Fair Market Value equaling or exceeding 25% of the combined Fair Market Value of the common stock of the Corporation and its Subsidiaries. A majority of the Directors shall have the further power to interpret all of the terms and provisions of this Article EIGHTH.

E. Nothing contained in this Article EIGHTH shall be construed to relieve any Interested Stockholder from any fiduciary obligation imposed by law.

 
 

F. Notwithstanding any other provisions of this Certificate of Incorporation or any provision of law which might otherwise permit a lesser vote or no vote, but in addition to any affirmative vote of the holders of any particular class or series of the Voting Stock required by law, this Certificate of Incorporation or any Preferred Stock Designation, the affirmative vote of the holders of at least 80% of the voting power of all of the then-outstanding shares of the Voting Stock, voting together as a single class, shall be required to alter, amend or repeal this Article EIGHTH.

NINTH: The Board of Directors of the Corporation, when evaluating any offer of another Person (as defined in Article EIGHTH hereof) to (A) make a tender or exchange offer for any equity security of the Corporation, (B) merge or consolidate the Corporation with another corporation or entity or (c) purchase or otherwise acquire all or substantially all of the properties and assets of the Corporation, may, in connection with the exercise of its judgment in determining what is in the best interest of the Corporation and its stockholders, give due consideration to all relevant factors, including, without limitation, the social and economic effect of acceptance of such offer on the Corporation’s present and future customers and employees and those of its Subsidiaries (as defined in Article EIGHTH hereof); on the communities in which the Corporation and its Subsidiaries operate or are located; on the ability of the Corporation to fulfill its corporate objectives as a bank holding company and on the ability of its subsidiary bank to fulfill the objectives of a stock bank under applicable statutes and regulations.

TENTH:

A. Each person who was or is made a party or is threatened to be made a party to or is otherwise involved in any action, suit or proceeding, whether civil, criminal, administrative or investigative (hereinafter a “proceeding”), by reason of the fact that he or she is or was a Director or an Officer of the Corporation or is or was serving at the request of the Corporation as a Director, Officer, employee or agent of another corporation or of a partnership, joint venture, trust or other enterprise, including service with respect to an employee benefit plan (hereinafter an “indemnitee”), whether the basis of such proceeding is alleged action in an official capacity as a Director, Officer, employee or agent or in any other capacity while serving as a Director, Officer, employee or agent, shall be indemnified and held harmless by the Corporation to the fullest extent authorized by the Delaware General Corporation Law, as the same exists or may hereafter be amended (but, in the case of any such amendment, only to the extent that such amendment permits the Corporation to provide broader indemnification rights than such law permitted the Corporation to provide prior to such amendment), against all expense, liability and loss (including attorneys’ fees, judgments, fines, ERISA excise taxes or penalties and amounts paid in settlement) reasonably incurred or suffered by such indemnitee in connection therewith; provided, however, that, except as provided in Section C hereof with respect to proceedings to enforce rights to indemnification, the Corporation shall indemnify any such indemnitee in connection with a proceeding (or part thereof) initiated by such indemnitee only if such proceeding (or part thereof) was authorized by the Board of Directors of the Corporation.

B. The right to indemnification conferred in Section A of this Article TENTH shall include the right to be paid by the Corporation the expenses incurred in defending any such proceeding in advance of its final disposition (hereinafter an “advancement of expenses”); provided, however, that, if the Delaware General Corporation Law requires an advancement of expenses incurred by an indemnitee in his or her capacity as a Director of Officer (and not in any other capacity in which service was or is rendered by such indemnitee, including, without limitation, service to an employee benefit plan) shall be made only upon delivery to the Corporation of an undertaking (hereinafter an “undertaking”), by or on behalf of such indemnitee, to repay all amounts so advanced if it shall ultimately be determined by final judicial decision from which there is no further right to appeal (hereinafter a “final adjudication”) that such indemnitee is not entitled to be indemnified for such expenses under this Section or otherwise. The rights to indemnification and to the advancement of expenses conferred in Sections A and B of this Article TENTH shall be contract rights and such rights shall continue as to an indemnitee who has ceased to be a Director, Officer, employee or agent and shall inure to the benefit of the indemnitee’s heirs, executors and administrators.

 

 
 

C. If a claim under Section A or B of this Article TENTH is not paid in full by the Corporation within sixty days after a written claim has been received by the Corporation, except in the case of a claim for an advancement of expenses, in which case the applicable period shall be twenty days, the indemnitee may at any time thereafter bring suit against the Corporation to recover the unpaid amount of the claim. If successful in whole or in part in any such suit, or in a suit brought by the Corporation to recover an advancement of expenses pursuant to the terms of an undertaking, the indemnitee shall be entitled to be paid also the expense of prosecuting or defending such suit. In (i) any suit brought by the indemnitee to enforce a right to indemnification hereunder (but not in a suit brought by the indemnitee to enforce a right to an advancement of expenses) it shall be a defense that, and (ii) in any suit by the Corporation to recover an advancement of expenses pursuant to the terms of an undertaking the Corporation shall be entitled to recover such expenses upon a final adjudication that, the indemnitee has not met any applicable standard for indemnification set forth in the Delaware General Corporation Law. Neither the failure of the Corporation (including its Board of Directors, independent legal counsel, or its stockholders) to have made a determination prior to the commencement of such suit that indemnification of the indemnitee is proper in the circumstances because the indemnitee has met the applicable standard of conduct set forth in the Delaware General Corporation Law, nor an actual determination by the Corporation (including its Board of Directors, independent legal counsel, or its stockholders) that the indemnitee has not met such applicable standard of conduct, shall create a presumption that the indemnitee has not met the applicable standard of conduct or, in the case of such a suit brought by the indemnitee, be a defense to such suit. In any suit brought by the indemnitee to enforce a right to indemnification or to an advancement of expenses hereunder, or by the Corporation to recover an advancement of expenses pursuant to the terms of an undertaking, the burden of proving that the indemnitee is not entitled to be indemnified, or to such advancement of expenses, under this Article TENTH or otherwise shall be on the Corporation.

D. The rights to indemnification and to the advancement of expenses conferred in this Article TENTH shall not be exclusive of any other right which any person may have or hereafter acquire under any statute, the Corporation’s Certificate of Incorporation, Bylaws, agreement, vote of stockholders or disinterested Directors or otherwise.

 
 

E. The Corporation may maintain insurance, at its expense, to protect itself and any Director, Officer, employee or agent of the Corporation or another corporation, partnership, joint venture, trust or other enterprise against any expense, liability or loss, whether or not the Corporation would have the power to indemnify such person against such expense, liability or loss under the Delaware General Corporation Law.

F. The Corporation may, to the extent authorized from time to time by the Board of Directors, grant rights to indemnification and to the advancement of expenses to any employee or agent of the Corporation to the fullest extent of the provisions of this Article TENTH with respect to the indemnification and advancement of expenses of Directors and Officers of the Corporation.

ELEVENTH: A Director of this Corporation shall not be personally liable to the Corporation or its stockholders for monetary damages for breach of fiduciary duty as a Director, except for liability (i) for any breach of the Director’s duty of loyalty to the Corporation or its stockholders, (ii) for acts or omissions not in good faith or which involve intentional misconduct or a knowing violation of law, (iii) under Section 174 of the Delaware General Corporation Law, or (iv) for any transaction from which the Director derived an improper personal benefit. If the Delaware General Corporation Law is amended to authorize corporate action further eliminating or limiting the personal liability of Directors, then the liability of a Director of the Corporation shall be eliminated or limited to the fullest extent permitted by the Delaware General Corporation Law, as so amended.

Any repeal or modification of the foregoing paragraph by the stockholders of the Corporation shall not adversely affect any right or protection of a Director of the Corporation existing at the time of such repeal or modification.

TWELFTH: The Corporation reserves the right to amend or repeal any provision contained in this Certificate of Incorporation in the manner prescribed by the laws of the State of Delaware and all rights conferred upon stockholders are granted subject to this reservation; provided, however, that, notwithstanding any other provision of this Certificate of Incorporation or any provision of law which might otherwise permit a lesser vote or no vote, but in addition to any vote of the holders of any class or series of the stock of the Corporation required by law or by this Certificate of Incorporation, the affirmative vote of the holders of at least 80% of the voting power of all of the then-outstanding shares of the capital stock of the Corporation entitled to vote generally in the election of Directors (after giving effect to the provisions of Article FOURTH), voting together as a single class, shall be required to amend or repeal this Article TWELFTH, Section C of Article FOURTH, Sections C or D of Article FIFTH, Article SIXTH, Article SEVENTH, Article EIGHTH or Article TENTH.

This Amended and Restated Certificate of Incorporation was duly adopted by unanimous written consent of the stockholders in accordance with the applicable provisions of Sections 228, 242 and 245 of the General Corporation Law of the State of Delaware.

 

 
 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, said Carolina Financial Corporation has caused this Amended and Restated Certificate of Incorporation to be signed by John D. Russ as President, this 2nd day of April, 1997.

      /s/ John D. Russ
      John D. Russ
      President
       
ATTEST:      
       
/s/ Frank J. Cole, Jr.      
Frank J. Cole, Jr.      
Secretary      

 

 

 

CERTIFICATE OF AMENDMENT

TO THE

AMENDED AND RESTATED CERTIFICATE OF INCORPORATION

OF

CAROLINA FINANCIAL CORPORATION

 

(Pursuant to 8 Del. C. Section 242)

 

Carolina Financial Corporation (the “Corporation”), a corporation organized and existing under and by virtue of the General Corporation Law of the State of Delaware, does hereby certify that:

FIRST: That at a meeting of the Board of Directors of the Corporation, resolutions were duly adopted setting forth a proposed amendment of the Amended and Restated Certificate of Incorporation of said corporation, declaring said amendment to be advisable and calling a meeting of the stockholders of said corporation for consideration thereof. The resolution setting forth the proposed amendment is as follows:

RESOLVED, that the Amended and Restated Certificate of Incorporation of this corporation be amended by revising Article FOURTH, Paragraph A thereof, so that, as amended, said Article FOURTH, Paragraph A shall be and read as follows:

FOURTH:

A. The total number of shares of all classes of stock which the Corporation shall have authority to issue is seven million (7,000,000) consisting of:

1. Two hundred thousand (200,000) shares of Preferred Stock, par value one cent ($.01) per share (the “Preferred Stock”); and
2. Six million eight hundred thousand (6,800,000) shares of Common Stock, par value one cent ($.01) per share (the “Common Stock”).

SECOND: That thereafter, pursuant to resolution of its Board of Directors, the annual meeting of the stockholders of the Corporation was duly called and held, upon notice in accordance with Section 222 of the General Corporation law of the State of Delaware at which meeting the necessary number of shares as required by statute were voted in favor of the amendment.

THIRD: That said amendment was duly adopted in accordance with the provisions of Section 242 of the General Corporation Law of the State of Delaware.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Carolina Financial Corporation has caused this certificate to be signed and attested to by its duly authorized officers this 10 th day of June, 2010.

 

 
 

    CAROLINA FINANCIAL CORPORATION
       
    By:   /s/ John D. Russ
      John D. Russ
      President and Chief Executive Officer
       
ATTEST:      
       
/s/ Frank J. Cole, Jr.      
Frank J. Cole, Jr.      
Secretary      

 

 

 

CAROLINA FINANCIAL CORPORATION

 

AMENDED AND RESTATED BYLAWS

 

As Amended Through April 24, 2013

 

ARTICLE I - STOCKHOLDERS

Section 1.           Annual Meeting

 

An annual meeting of the stockholders, for the election of Directors to succeed those whose terms expire and for the transaction of such other business as may properly come before the meeting, shall be held at such place, on such date, and at such time as the Board of Directors shall each year fix.

 

Section 2.           Special Meetings

 

Subject to the rights of the holders of any class or series of preferred stock of the Corporation, special meetings of stockholders of the Corporation may be called only by the Board of Directors pursuant to a resolution adopted by a majority of the total number of Directors which the Corporation would have if there were no vacancies on the Board of Directors (hereinafter the "Whole Board").

 

Section 3.           Notice of Meetings

 

Written notice of the place, date, and time of all meetings of the stockholders shall be given, not less than ten (10) nor more than sixty (60) days before the date on which the meeting is to be held, to each stockholder entitled to vote at such meeting, except as otherwise provided herein or required by law (meaning, here and hereinafter, as required from time to time by the Delaware General Corporation Law or the Certificate of Incorporation of the Corporation).

 

When a meeting is adjourned to another place, date or time, written notice need not be given of the adjourned meeting if the place, date and time thereof are announced at the meeting at which the adjournment is taken; provided, however, that if the date of any adjourned meeting is more than thirty (30) days after the date for which the meeting was originally noticed, or if a new record date is fixed for the adjourned meeting, written notice of the place, date, and time of the adjourned meeting shall be given in conformity herewith. At any adjourned meeting, any business may be transacted which might have been transacted at the original meeting.

 

Section 4.           Quorum

 

 
 

At any meeting of the stockholders, the holders of a majority of all of the shares of the stock entitled to vote at the meeting, present in person or by proxy (after giving effect to the Article FOURTH of the Corporation's Certificate of Incorporation), shall constitute a quorum for all purposes, unless or except to the extent that the presence of a larger number may be required by law. Where a separate vote by a class or classes is required, a majority of the shares of such class or classes present in person or represented by proxy shall constitute a quorum entitled to take action with respect to that vote on that matter.

 

If a quorum shall fail to attend any meeting, the chairman of the meeting or the holders of a majority of the shares of stock entitled to vote who are present, in person or by proxy, may adjourn the meeting to another place, date, or time.

 

If a notice of any adjourned special meeting of stockholders is sent to all stockholders entitled to vote thereat, stating that it will be held with those present constituting a quorum, then except as otherwise required by law, those present at such adjourned meeting shall constitute a quorum, and all matters shall be determined by a majority of the votes cast at such meeting.

 

Section 5.           Organization

 

Such person as the Board of Directors may have designated or, in the absence of such a person, the Chairman of the Board of the Corporation or, in his or her absence, the Chief Executive Officer or, in his or her absence, such person as may be chosen by the holders of a majority of the shares entitled to vote who are present, in person or by proxy. shall call to order any meeting of the stockholders and act as chairman of the meeting. In the absence of the Secretary of the Corporation, the secretary of the meeting shall be such person as the chairman appoints.

 

Section 6.           Conduct of Business

 

(a)          The chairman of any meeting of stockholders shall determine the order of business and the procedure at the meeting, including such regulation of the manner of voting and the conduct of discussion as seem to him or her in order. The date and time of the opening and closing of the polls for each matter upon which the stockholders will vote at the meeting shall be announced at the meeting.

 

(b)          At any annual meeting of the stockholders, only such business shall be conducted as shall have been brought before the meeting: (i) by or at the direction of the Board of Directors or: (ii) by any stockholder of the Corporation who is entitled to vote with respect thereto and who complies with the notice procedures set forth in this Section 6(b). For business to be properly brought before an annual meeting by a stockholder, the business must relate to a proper subject matter for stockholder action and the stockholder must have given timely notice thereof in writing to the Secretary of the Corporation. To be timely, a stockholder's notice must be delivered or mailed to and received at the principal executive offices of the Corporation not less than ninety (90) days prior to the date of the annual meeting; provided, however, that in the event that less than one hundred (100) days' notice or prior public disclosure of the date of the meeting is given or made to stockholders, notice by the stockholder to be timely must be received not later than the close of business on the 10th day following the day on which such notice of the date of the annual meeting was mailed or such public disclosure was made. A stockholder's notice to the Secretary shall set forth as to each matter such stockholder proposes to bring before the annual meeting: (i) a brief description of the business desired to be brought before the annual meeting and the reasons for conducting such business at the annual meeting; (ii) the name and address, as they appear on the Corporation's books, of the stockholder proposing such business; (iii) the class and number of shares of the Corporation's capital stock that are beneficially owned by such stockholder; and (iv) any material interest of such stockholder in such business. Notwithstanding anything in these Bylaws to the contrary, no business shall be brought before or conducted at an annual meeting except in accordance with the provisions of this Section 6(b). The Officer of the Corporation or other person presiding over the annual meeting shall, if the facts so warrant, determine and declare to the meeting that business was not properly brought before the meeting in accordance with the provisions of this Section 6(b) and, if he or she should so determine, he or she shall so declare to the meeting and any such business so determined to be not properly brought before the meeting shall not be transacted.

 

2
 

At any special meeting of the stockholders, only such business shall be conducted as shall have been brought before the meeting by or at the direction of the Board of Directors.

 

(c)          Only persons who are nominated in accordance with the procedures set forth in these Bylaws shall be eligible for election as Directors. Nominations of persons for election to the Board of Directors of the Corporation may be made at a meeting of stockholders at which Directors are to be elected only: (i) by or at the direction of the Board of Directors or; (ii) by any stockholder of the Corporation entitled to vote for the election of Directors at the meeting who complies with the notice procedures set forth in this Section 6(c). Such nominations, other than those made by or at the direction of the Board of Directors, shall be made by timely notice in writing to the Secretary of the Corporation. To be timely, a stockholder's notice shall be delivered or mailed to and received at the principal executive offices of the Corporation not less than ninety (90) days prior to the date of the meeting . , provided, however, that in the event that less than one hundred (100) days' notice or prior disclosure of the date of the meeting is given or made to stockholders, notice by the stockholder to be timely must be so received not later than the close of business on the 10th day following the day on which such notice of the date of the meeting was mailed or such public disclosure was made. Such stockholder's notice shall set forth: (i) as to each person whom such stockholder proposes to nominate for election or re-election as a Director, all information relating to such person that is required to be disclosed in solicitations of proxies for the election of Directors, or is otherwise required, in each case pursuant to Regulation 14A under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (including such person's written consent to being named in the proxy statement as a nominee and to serving as a Director if elected); and (ii) as to the stockholder giving notice of (x) the name and address, as they appear on the Corporation's books, of such stockholder and (y) the class and number of shares of the Corporation's capital stock that are beneficially owned by such stockholder. At the request of the Board of Directors any person nominated by the Board of Directors for election as a Director shall furnish to the Secretary of the Corporation that information required to be set forth in a stockholder's notice of nomination which pertains to the nominee. No person shall be eligible for election as a Director of the Corporation unless nominated in accordance with the provisions of this Section 6(c). The Officer of the Corporation or other person presiding at the meeting shill, if the facts so warrant, determine that a nomination was not made in accordance with such provisions and, if he or she should so determine, he or she shall declare to the meeting and the defective nomination shall be disregarded.

 

3
 
Section 7.           Proxies and Voting

 

At any meeting of the stockholders, every stockholder entitled to vote may vote in person or by proxy authorized by an instrument in writing or by a transmission permitted by law filed in accordance with the procedure established for the meeting. Any copy, facsimile telecommunication or other reliable reproduction of the writing or transmission created pursuant to this paragraph may be substituted or used in lieu of the original writing or transmission for any and all purposes for which the original writing or transmission could be used, provided that such copy, facsimile telecommunication or other reproduction shall be a complete reproduction of the entire original writing or transmission.

 

All voting, including on the election of Directors but excepting where otherwise required by law or by the governing documents of the Corporation, may be by a voice vote; provided, however, that upon demand therefor by a stockholder entitled to vote or by his or her proxy, a stock vote shall be taken. Every stock vote shall be taken by ballots, each of which shall state the name of the stockholder or proxy voting and such other information as may be required under the procedure established for the meeting. The Corporation shall, in advance of any meeting of stockholders, appoint one or more inspectors to act at the meeting and make a written report thereof. The Corporation may designate one or more persons as alternate inspectors to replace any inspector who fails to act. If no inspector or alternate is able to act at a meeting of stockholders, the person presiding at the meeting shall appoint one or more inspectors to act at the meeting. Each inspector, before entering upon the discharge of his or her duties, shall take and sign an oath faithfully to execute the duties of inspector with strict impartiality and according to the best of his or her ability.

 

All elections shall be determined by a plurality of the votes cast, and except as otherwise required by the Certificate of Incorporation or by law, all other matters shall be determined by a majority of the votes present and cast at a properly called meeting of stockholders.

 

Section 8.           Stock List

 

4
 

A complete list of stockholders entitled to vote at any meeting of stockholders, arranged in alphabetical order for each class of stock and showing the address of each such stockholder and the number of shares registered in his or her name, shall be open to the examination of any such stockholder, for any purpose germane to the meeting, during ordinary business hours for a period of at least ten (10) days prior to the meeting, either at a place within the city where the meeting is to be held, which place shall be specified in the notice of the meeting, or if not so specified, at the place where the meeting is to be held.

 

The stock list shall also be kept at the place of the meeting during the whole time thereof and shall be open to the examination of any such stockholder who is present. This list shall presumptively determine the identity of the stockholders entitled to vote at the meeting and the number of shares held by each of them.

 

Section 9.           Consent of Stockholders in Lieu of Meeting

 

Subject to the rights of the holders of any class or series of preferred stock of the Corporation, any action required or permitted to be taken by the stockholders of the Corporation must be effected at an annual or special meeting of stockholders of the Corporation or by unanimous consent in writing by such stockholders.

 

ARTICLE II - BOARD OF DIRECTORS

Section 1.           General Powers, Number and Term of Office

 

The business and affairs of the Corporation shall be under the direction of its Board of Directors. The number of Directors who shall constitute the Whole Board shall be such number as the Board of Directors shall from time to time have designated, except that in the absence of any such designation, such number shall be eleven (11). The Board of Directors shall annually elect a Chairman of the Board from among its members who shall, when present, preside at its meetings.

 

The Directors, other than those who may be elected by the holders of any class or series of Preferred Stock, shall be divided, with respect to the time for which they severally hold office, into three classes, with the term of office of the first class to expire at the first annual meeting of stockholders, the term of office of the second class to expire at the annual meeting of stockholders one year thereafter and the term of office of the third class to expire at the annual meeting of stockholders two years thereafter, with each Director to hold office until his or her successor shall have been duly elected and qualified. At each annual meeting of stockholders, commencing with the first annual meeting, Directors elected to succeed those Directors whose terms then expire shall be elected for a term of office to expire at the third succeeding annual meeting of stockholders after their election, with each Director to hold office until his or her successor shall have been duly elected and qualified.

 

Section 2.           Vacancies and Newly Created Directorships

 

5
 

Subject to the rights of the holders of any class or series of preferred stock, and unless the Board of Directors otherwise determines, newly created Directorships resulting from any increase in the authorized number of Directors or any vacancies in the Board of Directors resulting from death, resignation, retirement, disqualification, removal from office or other cause may be filled only by a majority vote of the Directors then in office, though less than a quorum, and Directors so chosen shall hold office for a term expiring at the annual meeting of stockholders at which the term of office of the class to which they have been elected expires and until such Director's successor shall have been duly elected and qualified. No decrease in the number of authorized Directors constituting the Board shall shorten the term of any incumbent Director.

 

Section 3.           Regular Meetings

 

Regular meetings of the Board of Directors shall be held at such place or places, on such date or dates, and at such time or times as shall have been established by the Board of Directors and publicized among all Directors. A notice of each regular meeting shall not be required.

 

Section 4.           Special Meetings

 

Special meetings of the Board of Directors may be called by one-third (1/3) of the Directors then in office (rounded up to the nearest whole number) or by the Chairman of the Board and shall be held at such place, on such date, and at such time as they or he or she shall fix. Notice of the place, date, and time of each such special meeting shall be given to each Director by whom it is not waived by mailing written notice not less than five (5) days before the meeting or be telegraphing or telexing or by facsimile transmission of the same not less than twenty-four (24) hours before the meeting. Unless otherwise indicated in the notice thereof, any and all business may be transacted at a special meeting.

 

Section 5.           Quorum

 

At any meeting of the Board of Directors, a majority of the Whole Board shall constitute a quorum for all purposes. If a quorum shall fail to attend any meeting, a majority of those present may adjourn the meeting to another place, date, or time, without further notice or waiver thereof.

 

Section 6.           Participation in Meetings By Conference Telephone

 

Members of the Board of Directors, or of any committee thereof, may participate in a meeting of such Board or committee by means of conference telephone or similar communications equipment by means of which all persons participating in the meeting can hear each other and such participation shall constitute presence in person at such meeting.

 

6
 
Section 7.           Conduct of Business

 

At any meeting of the Board of Directors, business shall be transacted in such order and manner as the Board may from time to time determine, and all matters shall be determined by the vote of a majority of the Directors present, except as otherwise provided herein or required by law. Action may be taken by the Board of Directors without a meeting if all members thereof consent thereto in writing, and the writing or writings are filed with the minutes of proceedings of the Board of Directors.

 

Section 8.           Powers

 

The Board of Directors may, except as otherwise required by law, exercise all such powers and do all such acts and things as may be exercised or done by the Corporation, including, without limiting the generality of the foregoing, the unqualified power:

 

(1)        To declare dividends from time to time in accordance with law;

 

(2)        To purchase or otherwise acquire any property, rights or privileges on such terms as it shall determine;

 

(3)        To authorize the creation, making and issuance, in such form as it may determine, of written obligations of every kind, negotiable or non-negotiable, secured or unsecured, and to do all things necessary in connection therewith;

 

(4)        To remove any Officer of the Corporation with or without cause, and from time to time to devolve the powers and duties of any Officer upon any other person for the time being;

 

(5)        To confer upon any Officer of the Corporation the power to appoint, remove and suspend subordinate Officers, employees and agents;

 

(6)        To adopt from time to time such stock, option, stock purchase, bonus or other compensation plans for Directors, Officers, employees and agents of the Corporation and its subsidiaries as it may determine;

 

(7)        To adopt from time to time such insurance, retirement, and other benefit plans for Directors, Officers, employees and agents of the Corporation and its subsidiaries as it may determine; and

 

(8)        To adopt from time to time regulations, not inconsistent with these Bylaws, for the management of the Corporation's business and affairs.

 

Section 9.           Compensation of Directors

 

7
 

Directors, as such, may receive, pursuant to resolution of the Board of Directors, fixed fees and other compensation for their services as Directors, including, without limitation, their services as members of committees of the Board of Directors.

 

Section 10.        Directors' Age Limitation

 

No person who has reached 78 years of age may be elected or appointed to a term of office as a Director. Any Director reaching their 78 th birthday shall continue in office until his or her successor shall have been elected at the next annual meeting of stockholders at which such Director's term expires.

 

 

 

ARTICLE III - COMMITTEES

Section 1.           Committee of the Board of Directors

 

The Board of Directors, by a vote of a majority of the Whole Board, may from time to time designate committees of the Board, with such lawfully delegable powers and duties as it thereby confers, to serve at the pleasure of the Board and shall, for those committees and any others provided for herein, elect a Director or Directors to serve as the member or members, designating, if it desires, other Directors as alternate members who may replace any absent or disqualified member at any meeting of the committee. Any committee so designated may exercise the power and authority of the Board of Directors to declare a dividend, to authorize the issuance of stock or to adopt a certificate of ownership and merger pursuant to Section 253 of the Delaware General Corporation Law if the resolution which designates the committee or a supplemental resolution of the Board of Directors shall so provide. In the absence or disqualification of any member of any committee and any alternate member in his or her place, the member or members of the committee present at the meeting and not disqualified from voting, whether or not he or she or they constitute a quorum, may by unanimous vote appoint another member of the Board of Directors to act at the meeting in the place of the absent or disqualified member.

 

Section 2.           Conduct of Business

 

Each committee may determine the procedural rules for meeting and conducting its business and shall act in accordance therewith, except as, otherwise provided herein or required by law. Adequate provision shall be made for notice to members of all meetings; one-third (1/3) of the members shall constitute a quorum unless the committee shall consist of one (1) or two (2) members, in which event one (1) member shall constitute a quorum; and all matters shall be determined by a majority vote of the members present. Action may be taken by any committee without a meeting if all members thereof consent thereto in writing, and the writing or writings are filled with the minutes of the proceedings of such committee.

 

8
 
Section 3.           Nominating Committee

 

The Board of Directors shall appoint a Nominating Committee of the Board, consisting of not less than three (3) members. The Nominating Committee shall have authority (a) to review any nominations for election to the Board of Directors made by a stockholder of the Corporation pursuant to Section 6(c) (ii) of Article I of these Bylaws in order to determine compliance with such Bylaw provision and (b) to recommend to the Whole Board nominees for election to the Board of Directors to replace those Directors whose terms expire at the annual meeting of stockholders next ensuing.

 

ARTICLE IV - OFFICERS

 

Section 1.           Generally

 

(a)            The Board of Directors as soon as may be practicable after the annual meeting of stockholders shall choose a Chairman of the Board, a President and Chief Executive Officer, one or more Vice Presidents, and a Secretary and from time to time may choose such other Officers as it may deem proper. The Chairman of the Board shall be chosen from among the Directors. Any number of offices may be held by the same person.

 

(b)           The term of office of all Officers shall be until the next annual election of Officers and until their respective successors are chosen, but any Officer may be removed from office at any time by the affirmative vote of a majority of the authorized number of Directors then constituting the Board of Directors.

 

(c)            All Officers chosen by the Board of Directors shall each have such powers and duties as generally pertain to their respective offices, subject to the specific provisions of this Article IV. Such Officers shall also have such powers and duties as from time to time may be conferred by the Board of Directors or by any committee thereof.

 

Section 2.           Chairman of the Board

 

The Chairman of the Board shall, subject to the provisions of these Bylaws and to the direction of the Board of Directors, serve in a general executive capacity and, when present, shall preside at all meetings of the Board of Directors or the stockholders of the Corporation. The Chairman of the Board shall perform all duties and have all powers which are commonly incident to the office of Chairman of the Board or which are delegated to him or her by the Board of Directors. He or she shall have power to sign all stock certificates, contracts and other instruments of the Corporation which are authorized.

 

Section 3.           President

 

9
 

The President shall have general power over the management and oversight of the administration and operation of the Corporation's business and general supervisory power and authority over its policies and affairs. He shall see that all orders and resolutions of the Board of Directors and of any Committee thereof are carried into effect.

 

Section 4.           Vice President

 

The Vice President or Vice Presidents shall perform the duties of the President in his or her absence or during his disability to act. In addition, the Vice Presidents shall perform the duties and exercise the powers usually incident to their respective offices and/or such other duties and powers as may be properly assigned to them by the Board of Directors, the Chairman of the Board or the President. A Vice President or Vice Presidents may be designated as Executive Vice President or Senior Vice President.

 

Section 5.           Secretary

 

The Secretary or an Assistant Secretary shall issue notices of meetings, shall keep their minutes, shall have charge of the seal and the corporate books, shall perform such other duties and exercise such other powers as are usually incident to such offices and/or such other duties and powers as are properly assigned thereto by the Board of Directors, the Chairman of the Board or the President.

 

Section 6.           Assistant Secretaries and Other Officers

 

The Board of Directors may appoint one or more Assistant Secretaries and such other Officers who shall have such powers and shall perform such duties as are provided in these Bylaws or as may be assigned to them by the Board of Directors, the Chairman of the Board or the President.

 

Section 7.           Action with Respect to Securities of Other Corporations

 

Unless otherwise directed by the Board of Directors, the President or any Officer of the Corporation authorized by the President shall have power to vote and otherwise act on behalf of the Corporation, in person or in which the Corporation may hold securities and otherwise to exercise any and all rights and powers which the Corporation may possess by reason of its ownership of securities in such other corporation.

 

ARTICLE V - STOCK

 

Section 1.           Certificates of Stock

 

Each stockholder shall be entitled to a certificate signed by, or in the name of the Corporation by, the Chairman of the Board or the President, and by the Secretary or an Assistant Secretary, or any Treasurer or Assistant Treasurer, certifying the number of shares owned by him or her. Any or all of the signatures on the certificate may be by facsimile.

 

10
 
Section 2.           Transfers of Stock

 

Transfers of stock shall be made only upon the transfer books of the Corporation kept at an office of the Corporation or by transfer agents designated to transfer shares of the stock of the Corporation. Except where a certificate is issued in accordance with Section 4 of Article V of these Bylaws, an outstanding certificate for the number of shares involved shall be surrendered for cancellation before a new certificate is issued therefor.

 

Section 3.           Record Date

 

In order that the Corporation may determine the stockholders entitled to notice of or to vote at any meeting of stockholders, or to receive payment of any dividend or other distribution or allotment of any rights or to exercise any rights in respect of any change, conversion or exchange of stock or for the purpose of any other lawful action, the Board of Directors may fix a record date, which record date shall not precede the date on which the resolution fixing the record date is adopted and which record date shall not be more than sixty (60) nor less than ten (10) days before the date of any meeting of stockholders, nor more than sixty (60) days prior to the time for such other action as hereinbefore described; provided, however, that if no record date is fixed by the Board of Directors, the record date for determining stockholders entitled to notice of or to vote at a meeting of stockholders shall be at the close of business on the day next preceding the day on which notice is given or, if notice is waived, at the close of business on the day next preceding the day on which the meeting is held, and, for determining stockholders entitled to receive payment of any dividend or other distribution or allotment of rights or to exercise any rights of change, conversion or exchange of stock or for any other purpose, the record date shall be at the close of business on the day on which the Board of Directors adopts a resolution relating thereto.

 

A determination of stockholders of record entitled to notice of or to vote at a meeting of stockholders shall apply to any adjournment of the meeting; provided, however, that the Board of Directors may fix a new record date for the adjourned meeting.

 

Section 4.           Lost, Stolen or Destroyed Certificates

 

In the event of the loss, theft or destruction of any certificate of stock, another may be issued in its place pursuant to such regulations as the Board of Directors may establish concerning proof of such loss, theft or destruction and concerning the giving of a satisfactory bond or bonds of indemnity.

 

Section 5.           Regulations

 

The issue, transfer, conversion and registration of certificates of stock shall be governed by such other regulations as the Board of Directors may establish.

 

11
 

ARTICLE VI - NOTICES

 

Section 1.           Notices

 

Except as otherwise specifically provided herein or required by law, all notices required to be given to any stockholder, Director, Officer, employee or agent shall be in writing and may in every instance be effectively given by hand delivery to the recipient thereof, by depositing such notice in the mails, postage paid, or by sending such notice by prepaid telegram or mailgram or other courier. Any such notice shall be addressed to such stockholder, Director, Officer, employee or agent at his or her last known address as the same appears on the books of the Corporation. The time when such notice is received, if hand delivered, or dispatched, if delivered through the mails or by telegram or mailgram or other courier, shall be the time of the giving of the notice.

 

Section 2.           Waivers

 

A written waiver of any notice, signed by a stockholder, Director, Officer, employee or agent, whether before or after the time of the event for which notice is to be given, shall be deemed equivalent to the notice required to be given to such stockholder, Director, Officer, employee or agent. Neither the business nor the purpose of any meeting need be specified in such a waiver.

 

ARTICLE VII - MISCELLANEOUS

 

Section 1.           Facsimile Signatures

 

In addition to the provisions for use of facsimile signatures elsewhere specifically authorized in these Bylaws, facsimile signatures of any Officer or Officers of the Corporation may be used whenever and as authorized by the Board of Directors or a committee thereof.

 

Section 2.           Corporate Seal

 

The Board of Directors may provide a suitable seal, containing the name of the Corporation, which seal shall be in the charge of the Secretary. If and when so directed by the Board of Directors or a committee thereof, duplicates of the seal may be kept and used by the Comptroller or by an Assistant Secretary or an assistant to the Comptroller.

 

Section 3.           Reliance upon Books, Reports and. Records

 

Each Director, each member of any committee designated by the Board of Directors, and each Officer of the Corporation shall, in the performance of his or her duties, be fully protected in relying in good faith upon the books of account or other records of the Corporation and upon such information, opinions, reports or statements presented to the Corporation by any of its Officers or employees, or committees of the Board of Directors so designated, or by any other person as to matters which such Director or committee member reasonably believes are within such other person's professional or expert competence and who has been selected with reasonable care by or on behalf of the Corporation.

 

12
 
Section 4.           Fiscal Year

 

The fiscal year of the Corporation shall be as fixed by the Board of Directors.

 

Section 5.           Time Periods

 

In applying any provision of these Bylaws which requires that an act be done or not be done a specified number of days prior to an event or that an act be done during a period of a specified number of days prior to an event, calendar days shall be used, the day of the doing of the act shall be excluded, and the day of the event shall be included.

 

ARTICLE VIII - AMENDMENT

 

The Board of Directors may amend, alter or repeal these Bylaws at any meeting of the Board, provided (i) notice of the proposed change is given not less than two days prior to the meeting; (ii) a designated committee of the Board has recommended such proposed change to the Board; and (iii) two-thirds (2/3rds) of the Whole Board approves such proposed change. The stockholders shall also have power to amend, alter or repeal these Bylaws at any meeting of stockholders, provided notice of the proposed change was given in the Notice of the Meeting; provided, however, that, notwithstanding any other provisions of these Bylaws or any provision of law which might otherwise permit a lesser vote or no vote, but in addition to any affirmative vote of the holders of any particular class or series of the Voting Stock Designation or these Bylaws, the affirmative votes of the holders of at least 80% of the voting power of all the then-outstanding shares of the Voting Stock, voting together as a single class, shall be required to alter, amend or repeal any provisions of these Bylaws.

 

13

 

CAROLINA FINANCIAL CORPORATION

 

AMENDMENT TO THE

 


AMENDED AND RESTATED BYLAWS

 

 

The following Amendment to the Amended and Restated Bylaws of Carolina Financial Corporation, a corporation duly organized and existing under the General Corporation Law of the State of Delaware (the “ Corporation ”), was approved by the Board of Directors of the Corporation at a meeting duly called and held on April 24, 2013.

 

ARTICLE II- BOARD OF DIRECTORS

 

SECTION 10: Directors’ Age Limitation

 

The age limit whereby Directors may be elected to the Holding Company Board increased from 78 years to 79 years.

 

 

CAROLINA FINANCIAL CORPORATION

 

FIRST AMENDMENT TO THE

 

AMENDED AND RESTATED BYLAWS

 

The following First Amendment to the Amended and Restated Bylaws of Carolina Financial Corporation, a corporation duly organized and existing under the General Corporation Law of the State of Delaware (the “ Corporation ”), was approved by the Board of Directors of the Corporation at a meeting duly called and held on July 17, 2013.

 

Article V of the Amended and Restated Bylaws of the Corporation is hereby deleted in its entirety and replaced with the following new Article V:

 

ARTICLE V- STOCK

 

Section 1. Certificates of Stock

 

The shares of capital stock of the Corporation shall be represented by certificates; provided, however, that the Board may provide by resolution or resolutions that some or all of any or all classes or series of its capital stock may be uncertificated shares. Any such resolution shall not apply to shares represented by a certificate until such certificate is surrendered to the Corporation. Each holder of stock represented by certificates shall be entitled to a certificate signed by, or in the name of the Corporation by, the Chairman of the Board or the President, and by the Secretary or an Assistant Secretary, or any Treasurer or Assistant Treasurer, certifying the number of shares owned by him or her in certificate form. Any or all of the signatures on the certificate may be by facsimile. In case of any officer or transfer agent who has signed or whose facsimile signature has been placed upon a certificate shall have ceased to be such officer or transfer agent before such certificate is issued, it may be issued by the Corporation with the same effect as if such person were an officer or transfer agent, at the date of issue.

 

Section 2. Transfers of Stock

 

Transfers of stock shall be made only upon the transfer books of the Corporation kept at an office of the Corporation or by transfer agents designated to transfer shares of the stock of the Corporation. Except where certificates of stock, or uncertificated shares, are issued in accordance with Section 4 of Article V of these Bylaws, an outstanding certificate for the number of shares involved shall be surrendered for cancellation before a new certificate is issued therefor.

 

 
 

Section 3. Record Date

 

In order that the Corporation may determine the stockholders entitled to notice of or to vote at any meeting of stockholders, or to receive payment of any dividend or other distribution or allotment of any rights or to exercise any rights in respect of any change, conversion or exchange of stock or for the purpose of any other lawful action, the Board of Directors may fix a record date, which record date shall not precede the date on which the resolution fixing the record date is adopted and which record date shall not be more than sixty (60) nor less than ten (10) days before the date of any meeting of stockholders, nor more than sixty (60) days prior to the time for such other action as hereinbefore described; provided, however, that if no record date is fixed by the Board of Directors, the record date for determining stockholders entitled to notice of or to vote at a meeting of stockholders shall be at the close of business on the day next preceding the day on which notice is given or, if notice is waived, at the close of business on the day next preceding the day on which the meeting is held, and, for determining stockholders entitled to receive payment of any dividend or other distribution or allotment of rights or to exercise any rights of change, conversion or exchange of stock or for any other purpose, the record date shall be at the close of business on the day on which the Board of Directors adopts a resolution relating thereto.

 

A determination of stockholders of record entitled to notice of or to vote at a meeting of stockholders shall apply to any adjournment of the meeting; provided, however, that the Board of Directors may fix a new record date for the adjourned meeting.

 

Section 4. Lost, Stolen or Destroyed Certificates; Issuance of New Certificates or Uncertificated Shares

 

In the event of the loss, theft or destruction of any certificate of stock, the Corporation may issue a new certificate of stock, or uncertificated shares, in its place pursuant to such regulations as the Board of Directors may establish concerning proof of such loss, theft or destruction and concerning the giving of a satisfactory bond or bonds of indemnity.

 

Section 5. Regulations

 

The issue, transfer, conversion and registration of certificates of stock and uncertificated shares shall be governed by such other regulations as the Board of Directors may establish.

 

Number Shares
   
C - ##### ** ##### **
   
Common Stock  
  SEE REVERSE FOR CERTAIN DEFINITIONS
   
  CUSIP ######    ##    #

 

[CAROLINA FINANCIAL CORPORATION LOGO]

 

CAROLINA FINANCIAL CORPORATION

Incorporated under the laws of the State of delaware

 

 

THIS IS TO CERTIFY that           [NAME, ADDRESS, CITY, STATE, ZIP]                is the owner of            [NUMBER OF SHARES]              FULLY PAID AND NON-ASSESSABLE SHARES OF THE COMMON STOCK, $0.01 PAR VALUE, OF CAROLINA FINANCIAL CORPORATION (hereinafter called the "Corporation"), transferable on the books of the Corporation by the holder hereof in person or by a duly authorized attorney, upon surrender of this certificate properly endorsed. This Certificate and the shares represented hereby are issue and shall be held subject to all the provisions of the Certificate of Incorporation, as amended, and the By-Laws of the Corporation, to all of which the holder of this certificate by acceptance hereof assents.

 

This certificate is not valid unless countersigned and registered by the Transfer Agent and Registrar.

 

WITNESS the facsimile seal of the Corporation and the facsimile signatures of its duly authorized officers.

 

Dated:     

 

    /s/ M. J. Huggins, III     /s/ Jerry L. Rexroad  
  M. J. Huggins   Jerry L. Rexroad  
  Secretary   President  

 

  [Countersigned and Registered]
  Registrar & Transfer Company
{Seal of the Corporation} (Cranford, New Jersey /
  Transfer Agent and Registrar /
  Authorized Signature

 

 
 

CAROLINA FINANCIAL CORPORATION

 

The Corporation will furnish without charge to each stockholder who so requests, the powers, designations, preferences, and relative, participating, optional, or other special rights of each class of stock or series thereof and the qualifications, limitations, or restrictions of such preferences and/or rights.

 

The shares evidenced by this Certificates are subject to a limitation contained in the Certificate of Incorporation to the effect that in no event shall any record owner of any outstanding Common Stock which is beneficially owned, directly or indirectly, by a person who beneficially owns in excess of 10% of the outstanding shares of Common Stock (the "Limit") be entitled or permitted to any vote in respect of shares held in excess of the Limit.

 

The Board of Directors of the Corporation is authorized by resolution or resolutions, from time to time adopted, to provide for the issuance of serial preferred stock in series and to fix and state the voting powers, designations, preferences, limitations and restrictions thereof. The Corporation will furnish to any shareholder upon requests and without charge a full description of each class of stock and any series thereof.

 

The shares represented by this Certificate may not be cumulatively voted on any matter. The Certificate of Incorporation requires the affirmative vote of the holders of at least 80% of the voting stock of the Corporation, voting together as a single class, to approve certain business combinations and other transactions and to amend certain provisions of the Certificate of Incorporation.

 

The following abbreviations, when used in the inscription on the face of this certificate, shall be construed as though they were written out in full according to applicable laws or regulations.

  

TEN COM as tenants in common   UNIF GIFT MIN ACT —  (Custodian)   Custodian   (Minor)
TEN ENT as tenants by the entireties                            Under Uniform Gifts to Minors Act   (State)
JT TEN as joint tenants with right of survivorship and not as tenants in common   UNIF TRF MIN ACT —  (Custodian)   Custodian (until age             )  
                      Under Uniform Transfers to Minors Act   (State)

 

Additional abbreviations may also be used though not in the list.

 

For value received,                                                              the undersigned hereby sells, assigns and transfers unto   

 

Please insert Social Security or Other Identifying Number of Assignee

 

 

 
PLEASE PRINT OR TYPEWRITE NAME AND ADDRESS INCLUDING POSTAL ZIP CODE OF ASSIGNEE
 
 
 

 

   Shares of the capital stock

 

represented by the within Certificate, and do hereby irrevocably constitute and appoint   

 

 
Attorney to transfer the said stock on the books of the within-named Corporation with full power of substitution in the premises.

 

Dated     

 

 

  NOTICE:   

THE SIGNATURE TO THIS ASSIGNMENT MUST CORRESPOND WITH THE NAME AS WRITTEN

UPON THE FACE OF THE CERTIFICATE, IN EVERY PARTICULAR, WITHOUT ALTERATION

OR ENLARGEMENT, OR ANY CHANGE WHATEVER.

 

 

  SIGNATURE(S) GUARANTEED:   

THE SIGNATURE(S) MUST BE GUARANTEED BY AN ELIGIBLE GUARANTOR INSTITUTION (BANKS,
STOCKBROKERS, SAVINGS AND LOAN ASSOCIATIONS AND CREDIT UNIONS WITH MEMBERSHIP IN AN
APPROVED SIGNATURE GUARANTEE MEDALLION PROGRAM), PURSUANT TO S.E.C. RULE 17Ad-15.

 

CRESCENT BANK

AMENDED AND RESTATED EMPLOYMENT AGREEMENT

 

This Amended and Restated Employment Agreement (the “Agreement”) is made effective as of December 24, 2008, by and between Crescent Bank, a state chartered stock bank (the “Bank”) and M. J, Huggins, III (the “Executive”). Any reference herein to the “Company” shall refer to Carolina Financial Corporation, the stock holding company parent of the Bank.

 

WHEREAS, the Bank and the Executive are currently parties to an employment agreement entered into on August 2, 2006 (the “Bank Employment Agreement”), pursuant to which the Executive is currently employed as President and Secretary of the Bank; and

 

WHEREAS, the Bank desires to amend and restate the Bank Employment Agreement in order to make changes to comply with Section 409A of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the “Code”) and the final regulations issued thereunder in April 2007; and

 

WHEREAS, the Executive is willing to serve the Bank on the terms and conditions hereinafter set forth and has agreed to such changes; and

 

WHEREAS, the Board of Directors of the Bank, the Bank, and the Executive believe it is in the best interests of the Bank to enter into the Agreement in order to reinforce and reward the Executive for his service and dedication to the continued success of the Bank and incorporate the changes required by Section 409A of the Code.

 

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the mutual covenants herein contained, and upon the other terms and conditions hereinafter provided, the parties hereby agree as follows:

 

1.           POSITION AND RESPONSIBILITIES

 

During the term of his employment hereunder, Executive agrees to serve in the position of President and Secretary (the “Office”) of the Bank. During said period, Executive also agrees to serve, if elected, as an officer and director of any subsidiary or affiliate of the Bank. Failure to reelect Executive to the Office set forth in this section in accordance with the terms of Section 2(a) without the consent of the Executive during the term of this Agreement, shall constitute an Event of Termination.

 

2.           TERM AND DUTIES

 

               (a)           The term of Executive’s employment under this Agreement shall begin as of the date first above written and shall continue for a period of thirty-six (36) full calendar months thereafter, provided that all changes intended to comply with Section 409A of the Code shall be retroactively effective to January 1, 2005; and provided further that no retroactive change shall affect the compensation or benefits previously provided to the Executive. During said term the Executive shall perform the normal and customary duties associated with the Office set forth in Section I. Commencing on the first anniversary date of this Agreement, and continuing at each anniversary date thereafter, the Agreement shall renew for an additional year such that the remaining term shall be three (3) years unless written notice is provided to Executive at least ten (10) days and not more than thirty (30) days prior to any such anniversary date, that this Agreement shall not renew, in which event this Agreement shall expire at the end of thirty-six (36) months following such anniversary date. Prior to each notice period for non-renewal, the disinterested members of the Board of Directors of the Bank (“Board”) will conduct a comprehensive performance evaluation and review of the Executive for purposes of determining whether to extend the Agreement, and the results thereof shall be included in the minutes of the Board’s meeting.

 

1
 

3.           COMPENSATION AND REIMBURSEMENT

 

               (a)           The compensation specified under this Agreement shall constitute the salary and benefits paid for the duties described in Section 2(b). The Bank shall pay Executive as compensation a salary of not less than $192,600 per year (“Base Salary”). Such Base Salary shall be payable no less frequently than monthly. During the period of this Agreement, Executive’s Base Salary shall be reviewed at least annually no later than December 1 of each year. Such review shall be conducted by a Committee designated by the Board, and the Board may increase, but not decrease, Executive’s Base Salary (any increase in Base Salary shall become the “Base Salary” for purposes of this Agreement). In addition to the Base Salary provided in this Section 3(a), the Bank shall provide Executive at no cost to Executive with all such other benefits as are provided uniformly to permanent full-time employees of the Bank.

 

               (b)          Executive will be entitled to participate in or receive benefits under any employee benefit plans including but not limited to, retirement plans, supplemental retirement plans, pension plans, profit-sharing plans, health-and-accident plans, medical coverage or any other employee benefit plan or arrangement made available by the Bank in the future to its senior executives and key management employees, subject to and on a basis consistent with the terms, conditions and overall administration of such plans and arrangements. Executive will be entitled to incentive compensation and bonuses as provided in any plan of the Bank in which Executive is eligible to participate (and he shall be entitled to a pro rata distribution under any incentive compensation or bonus plan as to any year in which a termination of employment occurs, other than Termination for Cause). Specifically, Executive shall be entitled to an incentive bonus each year equal to two percent (2.0%) of pre-tax, pre-incentive earnings, if any, of the Bank and such incentive bonus shall be paid promptly by the Bank and in any event no later than March 15 of the year immediately following the year in which the incentive bonus was earned. Nothing paid to the Executive under any such plan or arrangement will be deemed to be in lieu of other compensation to which the Executive is entitled under this Agreement.

 

               (c)           In addition to the Base Salary provided for by Section 3(a), the Bank shall pay or reimburse Executive for all reasonable travel and other reasonable expenses incurred by Executive performing his obligations under this Agreement and may provide such payment in such form and such amounts as the Board may from time to time determine in accordance with standards set by the Board of Directors, and such reimbursements shall be paid promptly by the Bank and in any event no later than March 15 of the year immediately following the year in which the expenses were incurred.

 

2
 

               (d)           In addition to the foregoing, Executive shall be entitled to receive fees for serving as a director of the Bank in the same amount and on the same terms as fees are paid to other directors of the Bank or subsidiary, and such amounts shall be paid promptly by the Bank and in any event no later than March 15 of the year immediately following the year in which the compensation was earned.

 

               (e)          The Bank and Executive have entered into a split dollar life insurance arrangement (the “ELITE LifeComp plan”) through Jefferson·Pilot Life Insurance Company under Policy No. 516014451N (the “Policy”). The ELITE LifeComp plan is comprised of a Jefferson-Pilot Variable Universal Life Policy contract with the Jefferson-Pilot Joint Ownership Agreement (“Joint Ownership Agreement”). The Joint Ownership Agreement defines the ownership of the Policy by the Bank and Executive. The Bank and the Executive have agreed that the Joint Ownership Agreement will remain in effect until February 27, 2022 (“Joint Ownership Termination Date”). The Bank and its successor agree that (i) the Policy will not be terminated prior to the Executive’s death, and (ii) the Joint Ownership Agreement will not be terminated prior to the Joint Ownership Termination Date, regardless of whether Executive’s employment with the Bank is terminated earlier, provided, however, that nothing herein should be construed to prohibit the Bank and the Executive from mutually agreeing to discontinue the Policy or the Joint Ownership Agreement should they mutually agree to another arrangement. Except in the event of Executive’s Termination for Cause, the Bank agrees to honor the Joint Ownership Agreement and the Addendum to Joint Ownership Agreement through the Joint Ownership Termination Date, and payments, if any, required to be made under such agreements will be made pursuant to the same payment schedule that was in effect prior to the Date of Termination.

 

4.           PAYMENTS TO EXECUTIVE UPON AN EVENT OF TERMINATION

 

The provisions of this Section shall in all respects be subject to the terms and conditions stated in Sections 8 and 14.

 

               (a)           The provisions of this Section shall apply upon the occurrence of an Event of Termination (as herein defined) during the Executive’s term of employment under this Agreement. As used in this Agreement, an “Event of Termination” shall mean and include any one or more of the following:

 

(i)    the termination by the Bank of Executive’s employment hereunder for any reason other than (A) Disability or Retirement, as defined in Section 6 hereof, (B) following a Change in Control, as defined in Section 5(a) hereof or (C) Termination for Cause as defined in Section 7 hereof; or

 

(ii)   Executive’s written notice of resignation from the Bank’s employ for “Good Reason,” which shall mean any of the following:

 

(A)    failure to elect or reelect or to appoint or reappoint Executive to the Office set forth in Section 1 during the term of this Agreement in accordance with Section 2(a) of this Agreement, unless consented to by the Executive,

 

3
 

(B)    material change in Executive’s function, duties, or responsibilities, which change would cause Executive’s position to become one of lesser responsibility, importance, or scope from the position and attributes thereof described in Section 1 hereof, to which Executive has not agreed in writing,

 

(C)    relocation of Executive’s principal place of employment by more than 30 miles from its location as of the effective date of this Agreement, or a material reduction in the benefits and perquisites to the Executive from those being provided as of the effective date of this Agreement (except for any reduction that is part of an employee-wide reduction in payor benefits),

 

(D)    liquidation or dissolution of the Bank or Company other than liquidations or dissolutions that are caused by reorganizations that do not affect the status of Executive, or

 

(E)     material breach of this Agreement by the Bank.

 

Upon the occurrence of any event described in clauses (ii) (A), (B), (C), (D) or (E), of this Section 4(a), Executive shall have the right to terminate his employment for Good Reason, provided, however, that prior to any termination of employment for Good Reason, the Executive must first provide written notice to the Bank within ninety (90) days of the initial existence of the condition, describing the existence of such condition, and the Bank shall thereafter have the right to remedy the condition within thirty (30) days of the date the Bank received the written notice from the Executive, provided that the cure period may be waived. If the Bank remedies the condition within such thirty (30) day cure period, then no Good Reason shall be deemed to exist with respect to such condition. Notwithstanding the preceding sentence, in the event of a continuing breach of this Agreement by the Bank, Executive, after giving due notice specified above, shall not waive any of his rights under this Agreement and this Section 4 by virtue of the fact that Executive has submitted his resignation but has remained in the employment of the Bank and is engaged in good faith discussions to resolve any occurrence of an event described in clauses (ii) (A), (B), (C), (D) and (E) of this Section 4(a).

 

               (b)           Upon the occurrence of an Event of Termination, on the Date of Termination, as defined in Section 8(b), the Bank shall pay Executive, or, in the event of his subsequent death, his beneficiary or beneficiaries, or his estate, as the case may be, as severance payor liquidated damages, or both, a lump sum distribution equal to the greater of:

 

               (i) the payments due for the remaining term of the Agreement, or

 

               (ii) three (3) times the average of the annualized Base Salary over the preceding three (3) years, including bonuses and any other cash compensation paid to the Executive during each of such years, and the amount of any benefits received pursuant to any employee benefit plans, on behalf of the Executive, maintained by the Bank during such period; provided however, that if the Bank is not in compliance with its minimum capital requirements or if such payments would cause the Bank’s capital to be reduced below its minimum capital requirements, such payments shall be deferred until such time as the Bank is in capital compliance.

 

4
 

               (iii) Upon the occurrence of an Event of Termination, all payments shall be made in a lump sum within thirty (30) days after the Date of Termination, provided however if the Executive is a “specified employee” (as defined in Treasury Regulation § 1.409A-1(i)), then, solely to the extent required to avoid penalties under Code Section 409A, such payment shall be delayed until the first day of the seventh month following the Executive’s Date of Termination. Such payment(s) shall not be reduced in the event the Executive obtains other employment following termination of employment. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, in the event of a Change in Control, as defined in Section 5 hereof, followed within one (I) year by an Event of Termination, any payments to the Executive under this Agreement shall be made in accordance with Section 5 hereof.

 

               (c)           Notwithstanding the provisions of Sections 4(a) and (h), and in the event that there has not been a Change in Control as defined in Section 5(a), upon the voluntary termination by the Executive upon giving sixty days notice to the Bank (which shall not be deemed to constitute an “Event of Termination” as defined herein), the Bank, at the discretion of the Board of Directors, may pay Executive, or in the event of his subsequent death, his beneficiary or beneficiaries, or his estate, as the case may be, a severance payment in an amount to be determined by the Board of Directors at the time of such voluntary termination by the Executive. Such severance payment shall not exceed three (3) times the average of the annualized Base Salary over the preceding three (3) years or such shorter period as the Executive shall have been employed by the Bank, including bonuses and any other cash compensation paid to the Executive during such years, and the amount of any benefits received pursuant to any employee benefit plans, on behalf of the Executive, maintained by the Bank during such period; provided, however, that if the Bank is not in compliance with its minimum capital requirements or if such payments would cause the Bank’s capital to be reduced below its minimum capital requirements, such payments shall be deferred until such time as the Bank is in capital compliance.

 

               (d)          Upon the occurrence of an Event of Termination, the Bank will cause to be continued life insurance and non-taxable medical and dental coverage substantially identical to the coverage maintained by the Bank for Executive prior to his termination. Such coverage shall cease upon the expiration of the remaining term of this Agreement.

 

               (e)           Upon the occurrence of an Event of Termination, the Bank shall honor the Joint Ownership Agreement and Addendum to Joint Ownership Agreement through the Joint Ownership Termination Date, and payments, if any, required to made under such agreements will be made pursuant to the same payment schedule that was in effect prior to the Date of Termination.

 

               (f)           For purposes of this Agreement, “Event of Termination” or “termination of employment” shall be construed to require a “Separation from Service” in accordance with Code Section 409A and the Treasury Regulations promulgated thereunder, such that the Bank and the Executive reasonably anticipate that the level of bona fide services the Executive would perform after termination would permanently decrease to a level that is less than 50% of the average level of bona fide services performed (whether as an employee or an independent contractor) over the immediately preceding 36-month period.

 

5
 

5.           CHANGE IN CONTROL

 

               (a)           The term “Change in Control” means (1) an event of a nature that (i) results in a change in control of the Bank or the Company within the meaning of the applicable federal and state statutes governing the acquisition of control of the Company or Bank, and applicable regulations promulgated thereunder as in effect on the date hereof, or (ii) would be required to be reported in response to Item 5.01 of the current report on Form 8-K, as in effect on the date hereof, pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (the “Exchange Act”), assuming such provisions apply to the Company and/or Bank; (2) any person (as the term is used in Sections l3(d) and 14(d) of the Exchange Act) is or becomes the beneficial owner (as defined in Rule 13d-3 under the Exchange Act), directly or indirectly of securities of the Company or the Bank representing 25% or more of the Company’s or the Bank’s outstanding securities; (3) individuals who are members of Incumbent Board (as defined below) cease for any reason to constitute at least a majority thereof, (4) a reorganization, merger, consolidation, sale of all or substantially all of the assets of the Company or the Bank or a similar transaction in which the Company or the Bank is not the resulting entity; or (5) a proxy statement is distributed that solicits proxies from stockholders of the Company, by someone other than the current management of the Company, seeking stockholder approval of a plan of reorganization, merger or consolidation of the Company or the Bank or similar transaction with one or more corporations as a result of which the outstanding shares of the class of securities then subject to such plan are exchanged for or converted into cash or property or securities not issued by the Company or the Bank. The term “Change in Control” shall not include an acquisition of securities by an employee benefit plan of the Company or the Bank or the acquisition of securities of the Company by the Bank in connection with the initial stock offering of the Company. In the application of the applicable statutes to a determination of a Change in Control, determinations shall be made by the Board of Directors. For purposes of this section 5(a), “lncumbent Board” means the Board of Directors of the Company and the Bank on the date hereof, provided that any person becoming a director subsequent to the date hereof whose election was approved by a vote of at least three-quarters of the directors comprising the Incumbent Board, or whose nomination for election by stockholders was approved by the nominating committee serving under an Incumbent Board, shall be considered as though he were a member of the Incumbent Board.

 

               (b)          If any of the events described in Section 5(a) hereof constituting a Change in Control have occurred, Executive shall be entitled to the benefits provided in paragraphs (c), (d), (e) , and (f) of this Section 5 upon his subsequent termination of employment at any time during the term of this Agreement (regardless of whether such termination results from (i) his resignation, provided such resignation occurs within one year of a Change in Control, or (ii) his dismissal), unless such termination is because of his death, Retirement, termination for Cause or termination for Disability, in which case Executive shall be entitled to the benefits described in Section 4 hereof. Upon the Change in Control, Executive shall have the right to elect to terminate his employment with the Bank for a period of one year following the Change of Control, for any reason, during the term of this Agreement.

 

6
 

               (c)           Upon the occurrence of a Change in Control followed by the Executive’s termination of employment, the Bank shall pay Executive, or in the event of his subsequent death, his beneficiary or beneficiaries, or his estate, as the case may be, as severance payor liquidated damages, or both, a sum equal to the greater of

 

                              (i)          the payments due for the remaining term of the Agreement, or

 

                              (ii)         2.99 times the average of the five preceding years’ Base Salary or such shorter period as the Executive shall have been employed by the Bank, including bonuses and any other cash compensation paid to the Executive during such years, and the amount of any contributions made to any employee benefit plans, on behalf of the Executive, maintained by the Bank during such years.

 

                              (iii)         Any payments to which the Executive may be entitled under this Section 5(c) shall be made in a lump sum within thirty (30) days after the Date of Termination following the Change in Control, or in the event that Code Section 409A applies and the Executive is a “specified employee” within the meaning of Code Section 409A, no later than the first day of the seventh month following the Executive’s Date of Termination.

 

               (d)          Upon the occurrence of a Change in Control followed by the Executive’s termination of employment, the Bank will cause to be continued life insurance, non-taxable medical and dental coverage substantially identical to the coverage maintained by the Bank for Executive prior to his termination of employment. Such coverage shall cease upon the expiration of thirty-six (36) months from the Executive’s termination of employment.

 

               (e)           Upon the occurrence of a Change in Control, the Bank shall honor the Joint Ownership Agreement and the Addendum to the Joint Ownership Agreement through the Joint Ownership Termination Date, and payments, if any, required to be made under such agreements will be made pursuant to the same payment schedule that was in effect prior to a Change in Control.

 

               (f)           If the payments and benefits pursuant to Section 5 hereof, either alone or together with other payments and benefits which the Executive has the right to receive from the Bank, would constitute a “parachute payment” under Section 2800 of the Code, then the payments and benefits payable by the Bank pursuant to Section 5 hereof shall be reduced by the minimum amount necessary to result in no portion of the payments and benefits payable by the Bank under Section 5 being non-deductible to the Bank pursuant to Section 280G of the Code and subject to the excise tax imposed under Section 4999 of the Code. If the payments and benefits under Section 5 are required to be reduced, the cash severance shall be reduced first, followed by a reduction in the fringe benefits. The determination of any reduction in the payments and benefits to be made pursuant to Section 5 shall be based upon the opinion of independent tax counsel selected by the Bank and paid by the Bank. Such counsel shall promptly prepare the foregoing opinion, but in no event later than thirty (30) days from the Date of Termination, and may use such actuaries as such counsel deems necessary or advisable for the purpose. Nothing contained in this Section 5 shall result in a reduction of any payments or benefits to which the Executive may be entitled upon termination of employment under any circumstances other than as specified in this Section 5, or a reduction in the payments and benefits specified in Section 5 below zero.

 

7
 

6.           TERMINATION UPON RETIREMENT, DISABILlTY OR DEATH

 

               (a)           Termination by the Bank of Executive based on “Retirement” shall mean termination in accordance with the Bank’s retirement policy or in accordance with any retirement arrangement established with Executive’s consent with respect to him. Upon termination of Executive upon Retirement, Executive shall be entitled to all benefits under any retirement plan of the Bank and other plans to which Executive is a party or in which he participated immediately prior to his Date of Termination.

 

               (b)           “Disability” or “Disabled” shall be construed to comply with Code Section 409A and shall be deemed to have occurred if: (i) Executive is unable to engage in any substantial gainful activity by reason of any medically determinable physical or mental impairment that can be expected to result in death, or last for a continuous period of not less than 12 months; (ii) by reason of any medically determinable physical or mental impairment that can be expected to result in death, or last for a continuous period of not less than 12 months, Executive is receiving income replacement benefits for a period of not less than three months under an accident and health plan covering employees of the Bank; or (iii) Executive is determined to be totally disabled by the Social Security Administration.

 

In the event Executive is unable to perform his duties under this Agreement on a fulltime basis for a period of six (6) consecutive months by reason of Disability, the Bank may terminate this Agreement, provided that the Bank shall continue to be obligated to pay the Executive his Base Salary, including bonuses and any other cash compensation paid to Executive during such period, in accordance with its regular payroll practice, for the remaining term of the Agreement, or one year, whichever is the longer period of time, and provided further that any amounts actually paid to Executive pursuant to any disability insurance or other similar such program which the Bank has provided or may provide on behalf of its employees, or pursuant to any workman’s or social security disability program shall reduce the compensation to be paid to the Executive pursuant to this paragraph.

 

Notwithstanding the foregoing, there will be no reduction in the compensation otherwise payable to Executive during any period that Executive is incapable of performing his duties hereunder by reason of temporary disability, provided that such compensation is paid pursuant to the regular payroll practice of the Bank and for a term that does not exceed six (6) months.

 

               (c)          In the event of Executive’s death during the term of the Agreement, his estate, legal representatives or named beneficiaries (as directed by Executive in writing) shall be paid Executive’s Base Salary as defined in Paragraph 3(a) at the rate in effect at the time of Executive’s death for a period of one (I) year from the date of the Executive’s death, in accordance with its regular payroll practice, and the Bank will continue to provide nontaxable medical and dental coverage substantially comparable to the coverage maintained by the Bank prior to the Executive’s death to the Executive’s family for one (I) year after the Executive’s death.

 

8
 

7.           TERMINATION FOR CAUSE

 

The term ‘‘Termination for Cause” shall mean termination because of the Executive’s personal dishonesty, incompetence, willful misconduct, any breach of fiduciary duty involving personal profit, intentional failure to perform stated duties, willful violation of any law, rule, or regulation (other than traffic violations, regulations that do not adversely affect the Bank or its employees, or similar offenses) or final cease-and-desist order, or material breach of any provision of this Agreement. In determining incompetence, the acts or omissions shall be measured against standards generally prevailing in the savings institutions industry. For purposes of this paragraph, no act or failure to act on the part of Executive shall be considered “willful” unless done, or omitted to be done, by the Executive not in good faith and without reasonable belief that the Executive’s action or omission was in the best interest of the Bank. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Executive shall not be deemed to have been Terminated for Cause unless and until there shall have been delivered to him a Notice of Termination, as specified in Section 8(c) hereof. A Notice of Termination shall be issued pursuant to a resolution, duly adopted by the affirmative vote of not less than a majority of the members of the Board, at a meeting of the Board called and held for that purpose (after reasonable notice, in writing, to Executive), finding that in the good faith opinion of the Board, Executive was guilty of conduct justifying Termination for Cause and specifying the particulars thereof in detail. In the event of Termination for Cause, the Executive shall be immediately suspended from the performance of his duties hereunder. The Executive shall not have the right to receive compensation or other benefits for any period after Termination for Cause, except as provided in Section 8(c) hereof. If Executive is Terminated for Cause, all rights of Executive under the ELITE LifeComp plan, other than those which vested in Executive prior to the Termination for Cause, but including the right to any further Policy bonuses, shall be immediately forfeited.

 

8.           NOTICE

 

               (a)          Any purported termination by the Bank or by Executive shall be communicated by Notice of Termination to the other party hereto. For purposes of this Agreement, a “Notice of Termination” shall mean a written notice which shall indicate the specific termination provision in this Agreement relied upon and shall set forth in reasonable detail the facts and circumstances claimed to provide a basis for termination of Executive’s employment under the provision so indicated.

 

               (b)           “Date of Termination” shall mean (A) if Executive’s employment is terminated for Disability, thirty (30) days after a Notice of Termination is given (provided that he shall not have returned to the performance of his duties on a full-time basis during such thirty (30) day period), and (B) if his employment is terminated for any other reason, the date specified in the Notice of Termination.

 

9
 

               (c)          If, within thirty (30) days after any Notice of Termination for Cause is given, the Executive notifies the Bank that a dispute exists concerning the termination, the Executive shall be entitled to an opportunity, together with counsel, to a hearing before the Board within thirty (30) days of notifying the Board of such dispute. Any adverse determination by the Board following such hearing may be submitted by the Executive to binding arbitration pursuant to Section 18 hereof. In the event that it is determined by the Board or pursuant to arbitration that “cause” for termination did not exist or such dispute is otherwise decided in Executive’s favor, the Executive shall be entitled to receive all compensation and benefits which should have been paid under either Section 4 or 5, with interest at the prime rate on such cash payments that should have been made during such period, and the Executive shall be reinstated to his position and duties hereunder.

 

9.           POST-TERMINATION OBLIGATIONS

 

               (a)          All payments and benefits to Executive under this Agreement shall be subject to Executive’s compliance with paragraph (b) of this Section 9 during the term of this Agreement and for one (1) full year after the expiration or termination hereof.

 

               (b)          Executive shall, upon reasonable notice, furnish such information and assistance to the Bank as may reasonably be required by the Bank in connection with any litigation in which it or any of its subsidiaries or affiliates is, or may become, a party, except for litigation between the Bank or the Company and the Executive.

 

10.          COVENANT NOT TO COMPETE

 

The Executive hereby covenants and agrees that for a period of one (1) year following the Date of Termination with the Bank, if such termination occurs prior to the end of the Executive’s term of employment under this agreement, he shall not, without the written consent of the Board, become an officer, employee, consultant, director, independent contractor, agent, sole proprietor, partner or trustee of any bank or bank holding company, savings bank, savings and loan association, savings and loan holding company, any mortgage or loan broker or any other entity competing with the Bank or its affiliates if such position entails working within (or providing services within) thirty (30) miles of the Bank’s main office; provided, however, that this Section 10 shall not apply if the Executive’s employment is terminated (i) for the reasons set forth in Section 4(a) hereof, (ii) for Disability or Retirement, as defined in Section 6 hereof, (iii) following a Change in Control, as defined in Section 5(a) hereof, or (iv) based upon Termination for Cause as defined in Section 7 hereof.

 

11.           EFFECT ON PRIOR AGREEMENTS AND EXISTING BENEFITS PLANS

 

This Agreement contains the entire understanding between the parties hereto and supersedes any prior employment agreement between the Bank or any predecessor of the Bank and Executive, except that this Agreement shall not affect or operate to reduce any benefit or compensation inuring to the Executive of a kind elsewhere provided. No provision of this Agreement shall be interpreted to mean that Executive is subject to receiving fewer benefits than those available to him without reference to this Agreement.

 

12.           NO ATTACHMENT

 

               (a)          Except as required by law, no right to receive payments under this Agreement shall be subject to anticipation, commutation, alienation, sale, assignment, encumbrance, charge, pledge, or hypothecation, or to execution, attachment, levy, or similar process or assignment by operation of law, and any attempt, voluntary or involuntary, to affect any such action shall be null, void, and of no effect.

 

10
 

               (b)         This Agreement shall be binding upon, and inure to the benefit of, Executive and the Bank and their respective successors and assigns.

 

13.           MODIFICATION AND WAIVER

 

               (a)          This Agreement may not be modified or amended except by an instrument in writing signed by the parties hereto.

 

               (b)          No term or condition of this Agreement shall be deemed to have been waived, nor shall there be any estoppel against the enforcement of any provision of this Agreement, except by written instrument of the party charged with such waiver or estoppel. No such written waiver shall be deemed a continuing waiver unless specifically stated therein, and each such waiver shall operate only as to the specific term or condition waived and shall not constitute a waiver of such term or condition for the future as to any act other than that specifically waived.

 

14.           REQUIRED PROVISION

 

Any payments made to Executive pursuant to this Agreement, or otherwise, are subject to and conditioned upon their compliance with 12 U.S.C. Section 1828(k) and any regulations promulgated thereunder.

 

15.           SEVERABILITY

 

If, for any reason, any provision of this Agreement, or any part of any provision, is held invalid, such invalidity shall not affect any other provision of this Agreement or any part of such provision not held so invalid, and each such other provision and part thereof shall to the full extent consistent with law continue in full force and effect.

 

16.           HEADINGS FOR REFERENCE ONLY

 

The headings of sections and paragraphs herein are included solely for convenience of reference and shall not control the meaning or interpretation of any of the provisions of this Agreement.

 

17.           GOVERNING LAW

 

This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of South Carolina but only to the extent not superseded by federal law.

 

11
 

18.           ARBITRATION

 

Any dispute or controversy arising under or in connection with this Agreement shall be settled exclusively by arbitration, conducted before a panel of three arbitrators sitting in a location mutually agreed upon by the Bank and the Executive that is within twenty-five (25) miles from the location of the Bank, in accordance with the rules of the American Arbitration Association then in effect. The Executive will select one arbitrator, the Bank will select one arbitrator, and the third arbitrator shall be mutually agreed upon by legal counsel for both the Executive and the Bank. Judgment may be entered on the arbitrator’s award in any court having jurisdiction; provided, however, that Executive shall be entitled to seek specific performance of his right to be paid until the Date of Termination during the pendency of any dispute or controversy arising under or in connection with this Agreement.

 

19.           PAYMENT OF LEGAL FEES

 

All reasonable legal fees paid or incurred by Executive pursuant to any dispute or question of interpretation relating to this Agreement whether brought by the Bank or Company or any successors thereto, or whether brought by the Executive in good faith shall be paid or reimbursed by the Bank, regardless of the outcome of the dispute or interpretation, provided however, that such reimbursement shall occur no later than two and one-half months after the end of the year in which the expense was incurred.

 

20.           INDEMNIFICATION

 

The Bank shall provide Executive (including his heirs, executors and administrators) with coverage under a standard directors’ and officers’ liability insurance policy at its expense, and shall indemnify Executive (and his heirs, executors and administrators) to the fullest extent permitted under federal law against all expenses and liabilities reasonably incurred by him in connection with or arising out of any action, suit or proceeding in which he may be involved by reason of his having been a director or officer of the Bank or the Company (whether or not he continues to be a director or officer at the time of incurring such expenses or liabilities), such expenses and liabilities to include, but not to be limited to, judgments, court costs and attorneys’ fees and the cost of reasonable settlements (such settlements must be approved by the Board of Directors of the Bank). If such action, suit or proceeding is brought against Executive in his capacity as an officer or director of the Bank, however, such indemnification shall not extend to matters as to which Executive is finally adjudged to be liable for willful misconduct in the performance of his duties. No Indemnification shall be paid that would violate 12 U.S.C. Section 1828(k) or any regulations promulgated thereunder.

 

21.           SUCCESSOR TO THE BANK

 

The Bank shall require any successor or assignee, whether direct or indirect, by purchase, merger, consolidation or otherwise, to all or substantially all the business or assets of the Bank or the Company, expressly and unconditionally to assume and agree to perform the Bank’s obligations under this Agreement, in the same manner and to the same extent that the Bank would be required to perform if no such succession or assignment had taken place.

 

12
 

SIGNATURES

 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Bank has caused this Agreement to be executed by their duly authorized officers, and Executive has signed this Agreement, on the day and date first above written.

 

ATTEST:   CRESCENT BANK
       
       
  /s/ Ann Sonnycalf   By:      /s/ Benedict P. Rosen
      Benedict P. Rosen
      Chairman of the Board
       
       
WITNESS:   EXECUTIVE
       
       
  /s/ Ann Sonnycalf   By:  /s/ M. J. Huggins, III
      M. J. Huggins, III

 

13

First Amendment to the

Amended and Restated Employment Agreement between

CresCom Bank and M. J. Huggins, III

 

WHEREAS, CresCom Bank (the “Bank”) and M. J. Huggins III (the “Executive) are parties to an Amended and Restated Employment Agreement dated as of December 24, 2008 (the “Agreement);

WHEREAS, the parties desire to modify the Agreement pursuant to Section 13 thereof to make certain changes the parties deem necessary and appropriate;

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the mutual covenants herein contained, the parties hereby agree as follows:

WHEREAS, the parties desire to modify the Agreement pursuant to Section 13 thereof to make certain changes the parties deem necessary and appropriate;

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the mutual covenants herein contained, the parties hereby agree as follows:

First Change

All references to “Crescent Bank” or the “Bank” in the Agreement shall refer to “Crescom Bank”.

Second Change

The first sentence of Section 1 is amended to read as follows: “During the term of his employment hereunder, Executive agrees to service in the position of President, Commercial Banking.”

Third Change

Section 2 is hereby amended by adding the following sentence to the end thereof:

“Notwithstanding anything in this Section 2 to the contrary, unless otherwise mutually agreed by the parties in writing, no annual extensions of the term of the Agreement shall occur after the date Executive attains age 70.”

Fourth Change

Section 3(a) is hereby amended by substituting “$240,000” for “$192,600” therein and Section 3(b) is hereby amended by deleting the third sentence thereof (referring to the two percent (2%) of pre-tax, pre-incentive earnings incentive bonus).

 
 

Fifth Change

Section 3(d) (referring to the payment of director’s fees) is hereby deleted and replaced with the following: “(d) Reserved .”

Sixth Change

Sections 4(b) is hereby amended to read as follows:

“(b) (i) Upon the occurrence of an Event of Termination, the Bank shall pay Executive, or, in the event of his subsequent death, his beneficiary or beneficiaries, or his estate, as the case may be, as severance pay or liquidated damages, or both, a lump sum amount equal to three (3) times the average of the sum of the following items in each of the three (3) years preceding his Date of Termination: ( i ) Executive’s annualized Base Salary (as defined in Section 3(a) above), (ii) all other cash compensation paid to Executive by the Bank in each year of the relevant period and (iii) contributions made on the Executive’s behalf to any employee benefit plans sponsored by the Bank; provided however, that if the Bank is not in compliance with its minimum capital requirements or if such payments would cause the Bank’s capital to be reduced below its minimum capital requirements, such payments shall be deferred until such time as the Bank is in capital compliance.

(ii) Upon the occurrence of an Event of Termination, all payments shall be made in a lump sum within thirty (30) days after the Date of Termination, provided however if the Executive is a “specified employee” (as defined in Treasury Regulation §1.409A-1(i)), then, solely to the extent required to avoid penalties under Code Section 409A, such payment shall be delayed until the first day of the seventh month following the Executive’s Date of Termination. Such payment(s) shall not be reduced in the event the Executive obtains other employment following termination of employment. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, in the event of a Change in Control, as defined in Section 5 hereof, followed within one (1) year by an Event of Termination, any payments to the Executive under this Agreement shall be made solely in accordance with Section 5 hereof.”

Seventh Change

Section 5(c) is hereby amended to read as follows:

“(c) Upon the occurrence of a Change in Control, followed by Executive’s termination of employment in the circumstances described in Section 5(b), the Bank shall pay Executive, or in the event of his subsequent death, his beneficiary or beneficiaries, or his estate, as the case may be, as severance pay or liquidated damages, or both, an amount equal to 2.99 times the average of the sum of the following items in each of the five completed calendar years preceding his termination of employment (or such shorter period as

 
 

Executive shall have been employed by the Bank): (1) Executive’s “annual compensation” (as defined below) and (ii) contributions made on the Executive’s behalf to any employee benefit plans of the Bank and its affiliates. For purposes of this Section 5(c), Executive’s “annual compensation” shall mean the amount reported by the Bank in Box 1 of Executive’s Form W-2(s) for a calendar year (but excluding income attributable to the vesting of equity compensation or the exercise of stock options). Any payments to which Executive may be entitled under this Section 5(c) shall be made in a lump sum within thirty (30) days after the Date of Termination following the Change in Control, or in the event that Code Section 409A applies and Executive is a “specified employee” within the meaning of Code Section 409A, no later than the first day of the seventh month following the Executive’s Date of Termination.”

Eighth Change

Section 10 is hereby amended to read as follows:

“If, and only if, Executive’s employment is terminated for the reasons set forth in Section 4(a) hereof, and such termination occurs prior to the end of the Executive’s term of employment under this Agreement, Executive agrees that, for a period of one (1) year following the effective date of his termination under Section 4(a), Executive shall not, without the written consent of the Board, become an officer, employee, consultant, director, independent contractor, agent, sole proprietor, partner or trustee of any bank or bank holding company, savings bank, savings and loan association, savings and loan holding company, any mortgage or loan broker or any other entity competing with the Bank or its affiliates, if such position entails working within (or providing services within) thirty (30) miles of any branch location of the Bank in (i) Myrtle Beach, South Carolina or (ii) Charleston, South Carolina.”

Ninth Change

Section 19 is hereby amended to read as follows:

“All reasonable legal fees paid or incurred by Executive pursuant to any dispute or question of interpretation relating to this Agreement, whether brought in good faith by the Bank (or any successors thereto) or Executive, shall be paid or reimbursed by the Bank if Executive is the prevailing party with respect to such matter, provided, however, that such reimbursement shall occur not later than thirty (30) days after the date that Executive becomes entitled to reimbursement of legal fees under this Section 19 (but in no event later than two and one-half months after the end of the year in which the expense was incurred). Notwithstanding the foregoing, with respect to disputes or questions of interpretation arising prior to July 1, 2012, payment or reimbursement shall be made to Executive without regard to whether Executive is the prevailing party with respect to such matter.”

* * * *

Executive acknowledges and agrees that his execution of this First Amendment constitutes his written consent to the changes set forth herein, including, without limitation, for purposes of Sections 4(a)(ii)(A) and (B) of the Agreement, his consent in writing to the change of his position to President, Commercial Banking of the Bank (as contemplated by the amendment herein to Paragraph 2 of the Agreement) and any change in the function, duties and responsibilities of his new position relative to those of his prior position.

In all other respects, the terms of the Agreement are hereby ratified and confirmed. This First Amendment may executed by the parties in counterparts.

 
 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this First Amendment, effective as of     9/21     , 2012.

 

  CRESCOM BANK  
     
     
    /s/ Manly Eubank  
  Name:   Manly Eubank  
  Title:   Chairman – Compensation Committee  
       
     
     
     
     
    /s/ M. J. Huggins  
  M. J. Huggins, III  

 

 

CAROLINA FINANCIAL CORPORATION

AMENDED AND RESTATED SUPPLEMENTAL EXECUTIVE AGREEMENT

This Amended and Restated Supplemental Executive Agreement (the “Agreement”) is made effective as of December 24, 2008, by and between Carolina Financial Corporation (the “Company”) and M. J. Huggins, III (the “Executive”) to supplement the amended and restated employment agreement between Executive and Crescent Bank (the “Bank”), a wholly-owned subsidiary of the Company, dated December 24, 2008 (the “Employment Agreement”). Capitalized terms which are not defined herein shall have the same meaning as set forth in the Employment Agreement (and any successor thereto).

WHEREAS, the Company and the Executive are currently parties to a supplemental executive agreement entered into on August 2, 2006 (the “Original Agreement”); and

WHEREAS, the Company desires to amend and restate the Original Agreement in order to make changes to comply with Section 409A of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the “Code”) and the final regulations issued thereunder in April 2007; and

WHEREAS, the Executive has agreed to such changes; and

WHEREAS, the Board of Directors of the Company, and the Executive believe it is in the best interests of the Company to enter into the Agreement in order to reinforce and reward the Executive for his service and dedication to the continued success of the Company and incorporate the changes required by Section 409A of the Code.

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the mutual covenants herein contained, and upon the other terms and conditions hereinafter provided, the parties hereby agree as follows:

Section 1 . (a) In the event of a termination of Executive’s employment with the Bank under Section 5 of the Employment Agreement, Executive shall be entitled to receive, pursuant to this Agreement, an amount payable by the Company, in addition to any compensation or benefits payable by the Bank pursuant to Section 5(c) and 5(d) of the Employment Agreement, which amount shall equal the difference, if any, between (i) the amount that would be paid by the Bank under the Employment Agreement pursuant to Sections 5 without regard to any reduction that may be required by Section 5(1), and (ii) the amount that is actually paid under the terms of the Employment Agreement. Any payments hereunder shall be made in a lump sum within thirty (30) days after the Date of Termination, or in the event the Executive is a Specified Employee (within the meaning of Treasury Regulations §1.409A-1(i)), and to the extent necessary to avoid penalties under Section 409A of the Code, payment shall be made to the Executive on the first day of the seventh month following the Executive’s Date of Termination.

(b)          For purposes of Section 1, termination of Executive’s employment with the Bank under Section 5 of the Employment Agreement as used herein shall mean “Separation from Service” as defined in Section 409A of the Code and the Treasury Regulations promulgated thereunder, provided, however, that the Bank and Executive reasonably anticipate that the level of bona fide services Executive would perform after termination would permanently decrease to a level that is less than 50% of the average level of bona fide services performed (whether as an employee or an independent contractor) over the immediately preceding 36-month period.

1
 

Section 2 . (a) In the event that any payments or benefits provided or to be provided to the Executive pursuant to Section 5 of the Employment Agreement, in combination with payments or benefits, if any, from other plans or arrangements maintained by the Company or the Bank, constitute “excess parachute payments” under Section 280G of the Code and are subject to excise tax under Section 4999 of the Code, the Company shall pay to Executive in cash an additional amount equal to the amount of the Gross Up Payment as defined herein. The “Gross Up Payment” shall be the amount needed to ensure that the amount of such payments and the value of such benefits received by Executive (net of such excise tax and any federal, state and local tax on the Company’s payment to him attributable to such excise tax) equals the amount of such payments and value of such benefits as he would receive in the absence of such excise tax and any federal, state and local tax on the Company’s payment to him attributable to such excise tax. The Company shall pay the Gross Up Payment within thirty (30) days after the Date of Termination, or in the event the Executive is a Specified Employee (within the meaning of Treasury Regulations §1.409A-1(i)), and to the extent necessary to avoid penalties under Section 409A of the Code, payment shall be made to the Executive on the first day of the seventh month following the Executive’s Date of Termination. For purposes of determining the amount of the Gross Up Payment, the value of any non-cash benefits and deferred payments or benefits shall be determined by the Company’s independent auditors in accordance with the principles of Sections 280G(d)(3) and (4) of the Code.

(b)          In the event that, after the Gross Up Payment is made, the amount of the excise tax described is determined to be less than the amount calculated in the determination of the actual Gross Up Payment made by the Company, Executive shall repay to the Company, at the time that such reduction in the amount of excise tax is finally determined, the portion of the Gross Up Payment attributable to such reduction, plus interest on the amount of such repayment at the applicable federal rate under Section 1274 of the Code from the date of the Gross Up Payment to the date of the repayment. The amount of the reduction of the Gross Up Payment shall reflect any subsequent reduction in excise taxes resulting from such repayment.

(c)           In the event that, after the Gross Up Payment is made, the amount of the excise tax is determined to exceed the amount anticipated at the time the Gross Up Payment was made, the Company shall pay to the Executive, in immediately available funds, within thirty (30) days following the date that such additional amount of excise tax is finally determined, an additional payment (“Additional Gross Up Payment”) equal to such additional amount of excise tax and any federal, state and local taxes thereon, plus all interest and penalties, if any, owed by the Executive with respect to such additional amount of excise and other tax.

(d)          The Company shall have the right to challenge, on Executive’s behalf, any excise tax assessment against him as to which Executive is entitled to (or would be entitled if such assessment is finally determined to be proper) a Gross Up Payment or Additional Gross Up Payment, provided that all costs and expenses incurred in such a challenge shall be borne by the Company and the Company shall indemnify the Executive and hold him harmless, on an after-tax basis, from any excise or other tax (including interest and penalties with respect thereto) imposed as a result of such payment of costs and expenses by the Company.

2
 

Section 3 . Any payments made to the Executive pursuant to this Agreement or otherwise, are subject to and conditioned upon compliance with all applicable banking laws and regulations, including, without limitation, 12 U.S.C. Section 1828(k) and any regulations promulgated thereunder.

Section 4 . This Agreement shall be deemed effective as of the date first above written, as if executed on such date. Except as expressly set forth herein, this Agreement shall not by implication or otherwise alter, modify, amend or in any way affect any of the terms, conditions, obligations, covenants or agreements contained in the Employment Agreement, all of which are ratified and affirmed in all respects and shall continue in full force and effect and shall be otherwise unaffected.

Section 5 . This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of South Carolina but only to the extent not superseded by federal law.

Section 6 . This Agreement may be executed in any number of counterparts, each of which shall for all purposes be deemed an original, and all of which together shall constitute but one and the same instrument.

Section 7 . This Agreement shall be interpreted and administered consistent with Section 409A of the Code.

3
 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Employers and the Executive have duly executed this Agreement as of the day and year first written above.

ATTEST:   CAROLINA FINANCIAL CORPORATION
       
       
       
  /s/ Frank J. Cole, Jr.   By: /s/ Frank E. Lucas
Secretary     Frank E. Lucas
       
       
       
WITNESS:   EXECUTIVE
       
       
       
  /s/ Ann Sonnycalf   By: /s/ M. J. Huggins, III
      M. J. Huggins, III

 

 

4

CRESCENT BANK

AMENDED AND RESTATED EMPLOYMENT AGREEMENT

This Amended and Restated Employment Agreement (the "Agreement") is made effective as of December 24, 2008, by and between Crescent Bank, a state chartered stock bank (the "Bank") and David L. Morrow (the "Executive"). Any reference herein to the "Company" shall refer to Carolina Financial Corporation, the stock holding company parent of the Bank.

WHEREAS, the Bank and the Executive are currently parties to an employment agreement entered into on August 2, 2006 (the "Bank Employment Agreement"), pursuant to which the Executive is currently employed as Chief Executive Officer of the Bank; and

WHEREAS, the Bank desires to amend and restate the Bank Employment Agreement in order to make changes to comply with Section 409A of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the "Code") and the final regulations issued thereunder in April 2007; and

WHEREAS, the Executive is willing to serve the Bank on the terms and conditions hereinafter set forth and has agreed to such changes; and

WHEREAS, the Board of Directors of the Bank, the Bank, and the Executive believe it is in the best interests of the Bank to enter into the Agreement in order to reinforce and reward the Executive for his service and dedication to the continued success of the Bank and incorporate the changes required by Section 409A of the Code.

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the mutual covenants herein contained, and upon the other terms and conditions hereinafter provided, the parties hereby agree as follows:

1.        POSITION AND RESPONSIBILITIES

During the term of his employment hereunder, Executive agrees to serve in the position of Chief Executive Officer (the "Office") of the Bank. During said period, Executive also agrees to serve, if elected, as an officer and director of any subsidiary or affiliate of the Bank. Failure to reelect Executive to the Office set forth in this section in accordance with the terms of Section 2(a) without the consent of the Executive during the term of this Agreement, shall constitute an Event of Termination

2.       TERM AND DUTIES

(a)            The term of Executive's employment under this Agreement shall begin as of the date first above written and shall continue for a period of thirty-six (36) full calendar months thereafter, provided that all changes intended to comply with Section 409A of the Code shall be retroactively effective to January 1, 2005; and provided further that no retroactive change shall affect the compensation or benefits previously provided to the Executive. During said term the Executive shall perform the normal and customary duties associated with the Office set forth in Section 1. Commencing on the first anniversary date of this Agreement, and continuing at each anniversary date thereafter, the Agreement shall renew for an additional year such that the remaining term shall be three (3) years unless written notice is provided to Executive at least ten (10) days and not more than thirty (30) days prior to any such anniversary date, that this Agreement shall not renew, in which event this Agreement shall expire at the end of thirty-six (36) months following such anniversary date. Prior to each notice period for non-renewal, the disinterested members of the Board of Directors of the Bank ("Board") will conduct a comprehensive performance evaluation and review of the Executive for purposes of determining whether to extend the Agreement, and the results thereof shall be included in the minutes of the Board's meeting.

1
 

(b)           During the period of his employment hereunder, except for periods of absence occasioned by illness, reasonable vacation periods, and reasonable leaves of absence, Executive shall devote substantially all his business time, attention, skill, and efforts to the faithful performance of his duties hereunder including activities and services related to the organization, operation and management of the Bank; provided, however, that, with the approval of the Board, as evidenced by a resolution of such Board, from time to time, Executive may serve, or continue to serve (however, in the case of positions held at the date of execution of this Agreement, no further written approval is necessary, provided that written approval was previously received), on the boards of directors of, and hold any other offices or positions in, business companies or business organizations, which, in such Board's judgment, will not present any conflict of interest with the Bank, or materially affect the performance of Executive's duties pursuant to this Agreement (it being understood that membership in social, religious, charitable or similar organizations does not require Board approval pursuant to this Section 2(b)).

3.        COMPENSATION AND REIMBURSEMENT

(a)                 The compensation specified under this Agreement shall constitute the salary and benefits paid for the duties described in Section 2(b). The Bank shall pay Executive as compensation a salary of not less than $197,600 per year ("Base Salary"). Such Base Salary shall be payable no less frequently than monthly. During the period of this Agreement, Executive's Base Salary shall be reviewed at least annually no later than December 1 of each year. Such review shall be conducted by a Committee designated by the Board, and the Board may increase, but not decrease, Executive's Base Salary (any increase in Base Salary shall become the "Base Salary" for purposes of this Agreement). In addition to the Base Salary provided in this Section 3(a), the Bank shall provide Executive at no cost to Executive with all such other benefits as are provided uniformly to permanent full-time employees of the Bank.

(b)                Executive will be entitled to participate in or receive benefits under any employee benefit plans including but not limited to, retirement plans, supplemental retirement plans, pension plans, profit-sharing plans, health-and-accident plans, medical coverage or any other employee benefit plan or arrangement made available by the Bank in the future to its senior executives and key management employees, subject to and on a basis consistent with the terms, conditions and overall administration of such plans and arrangements. Executive will be entitled to incentive compensation and bonuses as provided in any plan of the Bank in which Executive is eligible to participate (and he shall be entitled to a pro rata distribution under any incentive compensation or bonus plan as to any year in which a termination of employment occurs, other than Termination for Cause). Specifically, Executive shall be entitled to an incentive bonus each year equal to two percent (2.0%) of pre-tax, pre-incentive earnings, if any, of the Bank and such incentive bonus shall be paid promptly by the Bank and in any event no later than March 15 of the year immediately following the year in which the incentive bonus was earned. Nothing paid to the Executive under any such plan or arrangement will be deemed to be in lieu of other compensation to which the Executive is entitled under this Agreement.

2
 

(c)                 In addition to the Base Salary provided for by Section 3(a), the Bank shall pay or reimburse Executive for all reasonable travel and other reasonable expenses incurred by Executive performing his obligations under this Agreement and may provide such payment in such form and such amounts as the Board may from time to time determine in accordance with standards set by the Board of Directors, and such reimbursements shall be paid promptly by the Bank and in any event no later than March 15 of the year immediately following the year in which the expenses were incurred.

(d)                In addition to the foregoing, Executive shall be entitled to receive fees for serving as a director of the Bank in the same amount and on the same terms as fees are paid to other directors of the Bank or subsidiary, and such amounts shall be paid promptly by the Bank and in any event no later than March 15 of the year immediately following the year in which the compensation was earned.

(e)                 The Bank and Executive have entered into a split dollar life insurance arrangement (the "ELITE LifeComp plan") through Jefferson-Pilot Life Insurance Company under Policy No. 516014452N (the "Policy"). The ELITE LifeComp plan is comprised of a Jefferson-Pilot Variable Universal Life Policy contract with the Jefferson-Pilot Joint Ownership Agreement ("Joint Ownership Agreement"). The Joint Ownership Agreement defines the co-ownership of the Policy by the Bank and Executive. The Bank and the Executive have agreed that the Joint Ownership Agreement will remain in effect until February 27, 2015 ("Joint Ownership Termination Date"). The Bank and its successor agree that (i) the Policy will not be terminated prior to the Executive's death, and (ii) the Joint Ownership Agreement will not be terminated prior to the Joint Ownership Termination Date, regardless of whether Executive's employment with the Bank is terminated earlier, provided, however, that nothing herein should be construed to prohibit the Bank and the Executive from mutually agreeing to discontinue the Policy or the Joint Ownership Agreement should they mutually agree to another arrangement. Except in the event of Executive's Termination for Cause, the Bank agrees to honor the Joint Ownership Agreement and the Addendum to Joint Ownership Agreement through the Joint Ownership Termination Date, and payments, if any, required to be made under such agreements will be made pursuant to the same payment schedule that was in effect prior to the Date of Termination.

3
 

4.        PAYMENTS TO EXECUTIVE UPON AN EVENT OF TERMINATION

The provisions of this Section shall in all respects be subject to the terms and conditions stated in Sections 8 and 14.

(a)            The provisions of this Section shall apply upon the occurrence of an Event of Termination (as herein defined) during the Executive's term of employment under this Agreement. As used in this Agreement, an "Event of Termination" shall mean and include any one or more of the following:

(i) the termination by the Bank of Executive's employment hereunder for any reason other than (A) Disability or Retirement, as defined in Section 6 hereof, (B) following a Change in Control, as defined in Section 5(a) hereof or (C) Termination for Cause as defined in Section 7 hereof; or
(ii) Executive's written notice of resignation from the Bank's employ for "Good Reason," which shall mean any of the following:
(A) failure to elect or reelect or to appoint or reappoint Executive to the Office set forth in Section 1 during the term of this Agreement in accordance with Section 2(a) of this Agreement, unless consented to by the Executive,
(B) material change in Executive's function, duties, or responsibilities, which change would cause Executive's position to become one of lesser responsibility, importance, or scope from the position and attributes thereof described in Section 1 hereof, to which Executive has not agreed in writing,
(C) relocation of Executive's principal place of employment by more than 30 miles from its location as of the effective date of this Agreement, or a material reduction in the benefits and perquisites to the Executive from those being provided as of the effective date of this Agreement (except for any reduction that is part of an employee-wide reduction in pay or benefits),
(D) liquidation or dissolution of the Bank or Company other than liquidations or dissolutions that are caused by reorganizations that do not affect the status of Executive, or
(E) material breach of this Agreement by the Bank.

Upon the occurrence of any event described in clauses (ii) (A), (B), (C), (D) or (E), of this Section 4(a), Executive shall have the right to terminate his employment for Good Reason, provided, however, that prior to any termination of employment for Good Reason, the Executive must first provide written notice to the Bank within ninety (90) days of the initial existence of the condition, describing the existence of such condition, and the Bank shall thereafter have the right to remedy the condition within thirty (30) days of the date the Bank received the written notice from the Executive, provided that the cure period may be waived. If the Bank remedies the condition within such thirty (30) day cure period, then no Good Reason shall be deemed to exist with respect to such condition. Notwithstanding the preceding sentence, in the event of a continuing breach of this Agreement by the Bank, Executive, after giving due notice specified above, shall not waive any of his rights under this Agreement and this Section 4 by virtue of the fact that Executive has submitted his resignation but has remained in the employment of the Bank and is engaged in good faith discussions to resolve any occurrence of an event described in clauses (ii) (A), (B), (C), (D) and (E) of this Section 4(a).

4
 

(b)           Upon the occurrence of an Event of Termination, on the Date of Termination, as defined in Section 8(b), the Bank shall pay Executive, or, in the event of his subsequent death, his beneficiary or beneficiaries, or his estate, as the case may be, as severance pay or liquidated damages, or both, a lump sum distribution equal to the greater of:

(i) the payments due for the remaining term of the Agreement, or
(ii) three (3) times the average of the annualized Base Salary over the preceding three (3) years, including bonuses and any other cash compensation paid to the Executive during each of such years, and the amount of any benefits received pursuant to any employee benefit plans, on behalf of the Executive, maintained by the Bank during such period; provided however, that if the Bank is not in compliance with its minimum capital requirements or if such payments would cause the Bank's capital to be reduced below its minimum capital requirements, such payments shall be deferred until such time as the Bank is in capital compliance.
(iii) Upon the occurrence of an Event of Termination, all payments shall be made in a lump sum within thirty (30) days after the Date of Termination., provided however if the Executive is a "specified employee" (as defined in Treasury Regulation §1.409A-1(0), then, solely to the extent required to avoid penalties under Code Section 409A, such payment shall be delayed until the first day of the seventh month following the Executive's Date of Termination. Such payment(s) shall not be reduced in the event the Executive obtains other employment following termination of employment. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, in the event of a Change in Control, as defined in Section 5 hereof, followed within one (1) year by an Event of Termination, any payments to the Executive under this Agreement shall be made in accordance with Section 5 hereof.

 

5
 

(c)            Notwithstanding the provisions of Sections 4(a) and (b), and in the event that there has not been a Change in Control as defined in Section 5(a), upon the voluntary termination by the Executive upon giving sixty days notice to the Bank (which shall not be deemed to constitute an "Event of Termination" as defined herein), the Bank, at the discretion of the Board of Directors, may pay Executive, or in the event of his subsequent death, his beneficiary or beneficiaries, or his estate, as the case may be, a severance payment in an amount to be determined by the Board of Directors at the time of such voluntary termination by the Executive. Such severance payment shall not exceed three (3) times the average of the annualized Base Salary over the preceding three (3) years or such shorter period as the Executive shall have been employed by the Bank, including bonuses and any other cash compensation paid to the Executive during such years, and the amount of any benefits received pursuant to any employee benefit plans, on behalf of the Executive, maintained by the Bank during such period; provided, however, that if the Bank is not in compliance with its minimum capital requirements or if such payments would cause the Bank's capital to be reduced below its minimum capital requirements, such payments shall be deferred until such time as the Bank is in capital compliance.

(d)           Upon the occurrence of an Event of Termination, the Bank will cause to be continued life insurance and non-taxable medical and dental coverage substantially identical to the coverage maintained by the Bank for Executive prior to his termination. Such coverage shall cease upon the expiration of the remaining term of this Agreement.

(e)            Upon the occurrence of an Event of Termination, the Bank shall honor the Joint Ownership Agreement and Addendum to Joint Ownership Agreement through the Joint Ownership Termination Date, and payments, if any, required to made under such agreements will be made pursuant to the same payment schedule that was in effect prior to the Date of Termination.

(f)            For purposes of this Agreement, "Event of Termination" or "termination of employment" shall be construed to require a "Separation from Service" in accordance with Code Section 409A and the Treasury Regulations promulgated thereunder, such that the Bank and the Executive reasonably anticipate that the level of bona fide services the Executive would perform after termination would permanently decrease to a level that is less than 50% of the average level of bona fide services performed (whether as an employee or an independent contractor) over the immediately preceding 36-month period.

5.        CHANGE IN CONTROL

(a)            The term "Change in Control" means (1) an event of a nature that (i) results in a change in control of the Bank or the Company within the meaning of the applicable federal and state statutes governing the acquisition of control of the Company or Bank, and applicable regulations promulgated thereunder as in effect on the date hereof, or (ii) would be required to be reported in response to Item 5.01 of the current report on Form 8-K, as in effect on the date hereof, pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (the "Exchange Act"), assuming such provisions apply to the Company and/or Bank; (2) any person (as the term is used in Sections 13(d) and 14(d) of the Exchange Act) is or becomes the beneficial owner (as defined in Rule 13d-3 under the Exchange Act), directly or indirectly of securities of the Company or the Bank representing 25% or more of the Company's or the Bank's outstanding securities; (3) individuals who are members of Incumbent Board (as defined below) cease for any reason to constitute at least a majority thereof; (4) a reorganization, merger, consolidation, sale of all or substantially all of the assets of the Company or the Bank or a similar transaction in which the Company or the Bank is not the resulting entity; or (5) a proxy statement is distributed that solicits proxies from stockholders of the Company, by someone other than the current management of the Company, seeking stockholder approval of a plan of reorganization, merger or consolidation of the Company or the Bank or similar transaction with one or more corporations as a result of which the outstanding shares of the class of securities then subject to such plan are exchanged for or converted into cash or property or securities not issued by the Company or the Bank. The term "Change in Control" shall not include an acquisition of securities by an employee benefit plan of the Company or the Bank or the acquisition of securities of the Company by the Bank in connection with the initial stock offering of the Company. In the application of the applicable statutes to a determination of a Change in Control, determinations shall be made by the Board of Directors. For purposes of this section 5(a), "Incumbent Board" means the Board of Directors of the Company and the Bank on the date hereof, provided that any person becoming a director subsequent to the date hereof whose election was approved by a vote of at least three-quarters of the directors comprising the Incumbent Board, or whose nomination for election by stockholders was approved by the nominating committee serving under an Incumbent Board, shall be considered as though he were a member of the Incumbent Board.

6
 

(b)           If any of the events described in Section 5(a) hereof constituting a Change in Control have occurred, Executive shall be entitled to the benefits provided in paragraphs (c), (d), (e), and (f) of this Section 5 upon his subsequent termination of employment at any time during the term of this Agreement (regardless of whether such termination results from (i) his resignation, provided such resignation occurs within one year of a Change in Control, or (ii) his dismissal), unless such termination is because of his death, Retirement, termination for Cause or termination for Disability, in which case Executive shall be entitled to the benefits described in Section 4 hereof. Upon the Change in Control, Executive shall have the right to elect to terminate his employment with the Bank for a period of one year following the Change of Control, for any reason, during the term of this Agreement.

 

(c)            Upon the occurrence of a Change in Control followed by the Executive's termination of employment, the Bank shall pay Executive, or in the event of his subsequent death, his beneficiary or beneficiaries, or his estate, as the case may be, as severance pay or liquidated damages, or both, a sum equal to the greater of

(i) the payments due for the remaining term of the Agreement, or
(ii) 2.99 times the average of the five preceding years' Base Salary or such shorter period as the Executive shall have been employed by the Bank, including bonuses and any other cash compensation paid to the Executive during such years, and the amount of any contributions made to any employee benefit plans, on behalf of the Executive, maintained by the Bank during such years.
7
 
(iii) Any payments to which the Executive may be entitled under this Section 5(c) shall be made in a lump sum within thirty (30) days after the Date of Termination following the Change in Control, or in the event that Code Section 409A applies and the Executive is a "specified employee" within the meaning of Code Section 409A, no later than the first day of the seventh month following the Executive's Date of Termination.

(d)           Upon the occurrence of a Change in Control followed by the Executive's termination of employment, the Bank will cause to be continued life insurance, non-taxable medical and dental coverage substantially identical to the coverage maintained by the Bank for Executive prior to his termination of employment. Such coverage shall cease upon the expiration of thirty-six (36) months from the Executive's termination of employment.

(e)            Upon the occurrence of a Change in Control, the Bank shall honor the Joint Ownership Agreement and the Addendum to the Joint Ownership Agreement through the Joint Ownership Termination Date, and payments, if any, required to be made under such agreements will be made pursuant to the same payment schedule that was in effect prior to a Change in Control.

(f)            If the payments and benefits pursuant to Section 5 hereof, either alone or together with other payments and benefits which the Executive has the right to receive from the Bank, would constitute a "parachute payment" under Section 280G of the Code, then the payments and benefits payable by the Bank pursuant to Section 5 hereof shall be reduced by the minimum amount necessary to result in no portion of the payments and benefits payable by the Bank under Section 5 being non-deductible to the Bank pursuant to Section 280G of the Code and subject to the excise tax imposed under Section 4999 of the Code. If the payments and benefits under Section 5 are required to be reduced, the cash severance shall be reduced first, followed by a reduction in the fringe benefits. The determination of any reduction in the payments and benefits to be made pursuant to Section 5 shall be based upon the opinion of independent tax counsel selected by the Bank and paid by the Bank. Such counsel shall promptly prepare the foregoing opinion, but in no event later than thirty (30) days from the Date of Termination, and may use such actuaries as such counsel deems necessary or advisable for the purpose. Nothing contained in this Section 5 shall result in a reduction of any payments or benefits to which the Executive may be entitled upon termination of employment under any circumstances other than as specified in this Section 5, or a reduction in the payments and benefits specified in Section 5 below zero.

6.        TERMINATION UPON RETIREMENT, DISABILITY OR DEATH

8
 

(a)           Termination by the Bank of Executive based on "Retirement" shall mean termination in accordance with the Bank's retirement policy or in accordance with any retirement arrangement established with Executive's consent with respect to him. Upon termination of Executive upon Retirement, Executive shall be entitled to all benefits under any retirement plan of the Bank and other plans to which Executive is a party or in which he participated immediately prior to his Date of Termination.

(b)          "Disability" or "Disabled" shall be construed to comply with Code Section 409A and shall be deemed to have occurred if: (i) Executive is unable to engage in any substantial gainful activity by reason of any medically determinable physical or mental impairment that can be expected to result in death, or last for a continuous period of not less than 12 months; (ii) by reason of any medically determinable physical or mental impairment that can be expected to result in death, or last for a continuous period of not less than 12 months, Executive is receiving income replacement benefits for a period of not less than three months under an accident and health plan covering employees of the Bank; or (iii) Executive is determined to be totally disabled by the Social Security Administration.

In the event Executive is unable to perform his duties under this Agreement on a full-time basis for a period of six (6) consecutive months by reason of Disability, the Bank may terminate this Agreement, provided that the Bank shall continue to be obligated to pay the Executive his Base Salary, including bonuses and any other cash compensation paid to Executive during such period, in accordance with its regular payroll practice, for the remaining term of the Agreement, or one year, whichever is the longer period of time, and provided further that any amounts actually paid to Executive pursuant to any disability insurance or other similar such program which the Bank has provided or may provide on behalf of its employees, or pursuant to any workman's or social security disability program shall reduce the compensation to be paid to the Executive pursuant to this paragraph.

Notwithstanding the foregoing, there will be no reduction in the compensation otherwise payable to Executive during any period that Executive is incapable of performing his duties hereunder by reason of temporary disability, provided that such compensation is paid pursuant to the regular payroll practice of the Bank and for a term that does not exceed six (6) months.

(c)           In the event of Executive's death during the term of the Agreement, his estate, legal representatives or named beneficiaries (as directed by Executive in writing) shall be paid Executive's Base Salary as defined in Paragraph 3(a) at the rate in effect at the time of Executive's death for a period of one (1) year from the date of the Executive's death, in accordance with its regular payroll practice, and the Bank will continue to provide nontaxable medical and dental coverage substantially comparable to the coverage maintained by the Bank prior to the Executive's death to the Executive's family for one (1) year after the Executive's death.

7.        TERMINATION FOR CAUSE

9
 

The term "Termination for Cause" shall mean termination because of the Executive's personal dishonesty, incompetence, willful misconduct, any breach of fiduciary duty involving personal profit, intentional failure to perform stated duties, willful violation of any law, rule, or regulation (other than traffic violations, regulations that do not adversely affect the Bank or its employees, or similar offenses) or final cease-and-desist order, or material breach of any provision of this Agreement. In determining incompetence, the acts or omissions shall be measured against standards generally prevailing in the savings institutions industry. For purposes of this paragraph, no act or failure to act on the part of Executive shall be considered "willful" unless done, or omitted to be done, by the Executive not in good faith and without reasonable belief that the Executive's action or omission was in the best interest of the Bank. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Executive shall not be deemed to have been Terminated for Cause unless and until there shall have been delivered to him a Notice of Termination, as specified in Section 8(c) hereof. A Notice of Termination shall be issued pursuant to a resolution, duly adopted by the affirmative vote of not less than a majority of the members of the Board, at a meeting of the Board called and held for that purpose (after reasonable notice, in writing, to Executive), finding that in the good faith opinion of the Board, Executive was guilty of conduct justifying Termination for Cause and specifying the particulars thereof in detail. In the event of Termination for Cause, the Executive shall be immediately suspended from the performance of his duties hereunder. The Executive shall not have the right to receive compensation or other benefits for any period after Termination for Cause, except as provided in Section 8(c) hereof. If Executive is Terminated for Cause, all rights of Executive under the ELITE LifeComp plan, other than those which vested in Executive prior to the Termination for Cause, but including the right to any further Policy bonuses, shall be immediately forfeited.

8.        NOTICE

(a)           Any purported termination by the Bank or by Executive shall be communicated by Notice of Termination to the other party hereto. For purposes of this Agreement, a "Notice of Termination" shall mean a written notice which shall indicate the specific termination provision in this Agreement relied upon and shall set forth in reasonable detail the facts and circumstances claimed to provide a basis for termination of Executive's employment under the provision so indicated.

(b)          "Date of Termination" shall mean (A) if Executive's employment is terminated for Disability, thirty (30) days after a Notice of Termination is given (provided that he shall not have returned to the performance of his duties on a full-time basis during such thirty (30) day period), and (B) if his employment is terminated for any other reason, the date specified in the Notice of Termination.

(c)           If, within thirty (30) days after any Notice of Termination for Cause is given, the Executive notifies the Bank that a dispute exists concerning the termination, the Executive shall be entitled to an opportunity, together with counsel, to a hearing before the Board within thirty (30) days of notifying the Board of such dispute. Any adverse determination by the Board following such hearing may be submitted by the Executive to binding arbitration pursuant to Section 18 hereof. In the event that it is determined by the Board or pursuant to arbitration that "cause" for termination did not exist or such dispute is otherwise decided in Executive's favor, the Executive shall be entitled to receive all compensation and benefits which should have been paid under either Section 4 or 5, with interest at the prime rate on such cash payments that should have been made during such period, and the Executive shall be reinstated to his position and duties hereunder.

10
 

9.        POST-TERMINATION OBLIGATIONS

(a)              All payments and benefits to Executive under this Agreement shall be subject to Executive's compliance with paragraph (b) of this Section 9 during the term of this Agreement and for one (1) full year after the expiration or termination hereof.

(b)              Executive shall, upon reasonable notice, furnish such information and assistance to the Bank as may reasonably be required by the Bank in connection with any litigation in which it or any of its subsidiaries or affiliates is, or may become, a party, except for litigation between the Bank or the Company and the Executive.

10.      COVENANT NOT TO COMPETE

The Executive hereby covenants and agrees that for a period of one (1) year following the Date of Termination with the Bank, if such termination occurs prior to the end of the Executive's term of employment under this agreement, he shall not, without the written consent of the Board, become an officer, employee, consultant, director, independent contractor, agent, sole proprietor, partner or trustee of any bank or bank holding company, savings bank, savings and loan association, savings and loan holding company, any mortgage or loan broker or any other entity competing with the Bank or its affiliates if such position entails working within (or providing services within) thirty (30) miles of the Bank's main office; provided, however, that this Section 10 shall not apply if the Executive's employment is terminated (i) for the reasons set forth in Section 4(a) hereof; (ii) for Disability or Retirement, as defined in Section 6 hereof; (iii) following a Change in Control, as defined in Section 5(a) hereof, or (iv) based upon Termination for Cause as defined in Section 7 hereof.

11.      EFFECT ON PRIOR AGREEMENTS AND EXISTING BENEFITS PLANS

This Agreement contains the entire understanding between the parties hereto and supersedes any prior employment agreement between the Bank or any predecessor of the Bank and Executive, except that this Agreement shall not affect or operate to reduce any benefit or compensation inuring to the Executive of a kind elsewhere provided. No provision of this Agreement shall be interpreted to mean that Executive is subject to receiving fewer benefits than those available to him without reference to this Agreement.

12.      NO ATTACHMENT

(a)                 Except as required by law, no right to receive payments under this Agreement shall be subject to anticipation, commutation, alienation, sale, assignment, encumbrance, charge, pledge, or hypothecation, or to execution, attachment, levy, or similar process or assignment by operation of law, and any attempt, voluntary or involuntary, to affect any such action shall be null, void, and of no effect.

11
 

(b)                This Agreement shall be binding upon, and inure to the benefit of, Executive and the Bank and their respective successors and assigns.

13.      MODIFICATION AND WAIVER

(a)                 This Agreement may not be modified or amended except by an instrument in writing signed by the parties hereto.

(b)                No term or condition of this Agreement shall be deemed to have been waived, nor shall there be any estoppel against the enforcement of any provision of this Agreement, except by written instrument of the party charged with such waiver or estoppel. No such written waiver shall be deemed a continuing waiver unless specifically stated therein, and each such waiver shall operate only as to the specific term or condition waived and shall not constitute a waiver of such term or condition for the future as to any act other than that specifically waived.

14.      REQUIRED PROVISION

Any payments made to Executive pursuant to this Agreement, or otherwise, are subject to and conditioned upon their compliance with 12 U.S.C. Section 1828(k) and any regulations promulgated thereunder.

15.      SEVERABILITY

If, for any reason, any provision of this Agreement, or any part of any provision, is held invalid, such invalidity shall not affect any other provision of this Agreement or any part of such provision not held so invalid, and each such other provision and part thereof shall to the full extent consistent with law continue in full force and effect.

16.      HEADINGS FOR REFERENCE ONLY

The headings of sections and paragraphs herein are included solely for convenience of reference and shall not control the meaning or interpretation of any of the provisions of this Agreement.

17.      GOVERNING LAW

This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of South Carolina but only to the extent not superseded by federal law.

18.      ARBITRATION

Any dispute or controversy arising under or in connection with this Agreement shall be settled exclusively by arbitration, conducted before a panel of three arbitrators sitting in a location mutually agreed upon by the Bank and the Executive that is within twenty-five (25) miles from the location of the Bank, in accordance with the rules of the American Arbitration Association then in effect. The Executive will select one arbitrator, the Bank will select one arbitrator, and the third arbitrator shall be mutually agreed upon by legal counsel for both the Executive and the Bank. Judgment may be entered on the arbitrator's award in any court having jurisdiction; provided, however, that Executive shall be entitled to seek specific performance of his right to be paid until the Date of Termination during the pendency of any dispute or controversy arising under or in connection with this Agreement.

12
 

19.      PAYMENT OF LEGAL FEES

All reasonable legal fees paid or incurred by Executive pursuant to any dispute or question of interpretation relating to this Agreement whether brought by the Bank or Company or any successors thereto, or whether brought by the Executive in good faith shall be paid or reimbursed by the Bank, regardless of the outcome of the dispute or interpretation, provided however, that such reimbursement shall occur no later than two and one-half months after the end of the year in which the expense was incurred.

20.      INDEMNIFICATION

The Bank shall provide Executive (including his heirs, executors and administrators) with coverage under a standard directors' and officers' liability insurance policy at its expense, and shall indemnify Executive (and his heirs, executors and administrators) to the fullest extent permitted under federal law against all expenses and liabilities reasonably incurred by him in connection with or arising out of any action, suit or proceeding in which he may be involved by reason of his having been a director or officer of the Bank or the Company (whether or not he continues to be a director or officer at the time of incurring such expenses or liabilities), such expenses and liabilities to include, but not to be limited to, judgments, court costs and attorneys' fees and the cost of reasonable settlements (such settlements must be approved by the Board of Directors of the Bank). If such action, suit or proceeding is brought against Executive in his capacity as an officer or director of the Bank, however, such indemnification shall not extend to matters as to which Executive is finally adjudged to be liable for willful misconduct in the performance of his duties. No Indemnification shall be paid that would violate 12 U.S.C. Section 1828(k) or any regulations promulgated thereunder.

21.      SUCCESSOR TO THE BANK

The Bank shall require any successor or assignee, whether direct or indirect, by purchase, merger, consolidation or otherwise, to all or substantially all the business or assets of the Bank or the Company, expressly and unconditionally to assume and agree to perform the Bank's obligations under this Agreement, in the same manner and to the same extent that the Bank would be required to perform if no such succession or assignment had taken place.

13
 

SIGNATURES

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Bank has caused this Agreement to be executed by their duly authorized officers, and Executive has signed this Agreement, on the day and date first above written.

 

ATTEST:   CRESCENT BANK
       
/s/ Ann Sonnycalf   By:    /s/ Benedict P. Rosen
      Benedict P. Rosen
      Chairman of the Board
       
WITNESS:   EXECUTIVE
       
/s/ Ann Sonnycalf   /s/ David L. Morrow
    David L. Morrow

 

14

 

First Amendment to the

Amended and Restated Employment Agreement between

CresCom Bank and David L. Morrow

WHEREAS, CresCom Bank (the “Bank”) and David J. Morrow (the “Executive)” are parties to an Amended and Restated Employment Agreement dated as of December 24, 2008 (the “Agreement”);

WHEREAS, the parties desire to modify the Agreement pursuant to Section 13 thereof to make certain changes the parties deem necessary and appropriate;

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the mutual covenants herein contained, the parties hereby agree as follows:

First Change

All references to “Crescent Bank” or the “Bank” in the Agreement shall refer to “Crescom Bank”.

Second Change

Section 2 is hereby amended by adding the following sentence to the end thereof:

“Notwithstanding anything in this Section 2 to the contrary, unless otherwise mutually agreed by the parties in writing, no annual extensions of the term of the Agreement shall occur after the date Executive attains age 70.”

Third Change

Section 3(a) is hereby amended by substituting “$270,000” for “$197,600” therein and Section 3(b) is hereby amended by deleting the third sentence thereof (referring to the two percent (2%) of pre-tax, pre-incentive earnings incentive bonus).

Fourth Change

Section 3(d) (referring to the payment of director’s fees) is hereby deleted and replaced with the following: “(d) Reserved .”

Fifth Change

Sections 4(b) is hereby amended to read as follows:

“(b) (i) Upon the occurrence of an Event of Termination, the Bank shall pay Executive, or, in the event of his subsequent death, his beneficiary or beneficiaries, or his estate, as the case may be, as severance pay or liquidated damages, or both, a lump sum amount equal to three (3) times the average of the sum of the following items in each of the three (3) years preceding his Date of Termination: (i) Executive’s annualized Base Salary (as defined in Section 3(a) above), (ii) all other cash compensation paid to Executive by the Bank in each year of the relevant period and (iii) contributions made on the Executive’s behalf to any employee benefit plans sponsored by the Bank; provided however, that if the Bank is not in compliance with its minimum capital requirements or if such payments would cause the Bank’s capital to be reduced below its minimum capital requirements, such payments shall be deferred until such time as the Bank is in capital compliance.

 
 

(ii) Upon the occurrence of an Event of Termination, all payments shall be made in a lump sum within thirty (30) days after the Date of Termination, provided however if the Executive is a “specified employee” (as defined in Treasury Regulation §1.409A-1(i)), then, solely to the extent required to avoid penalties under Code Section 409A, such payment shall be delayed until the first day of the seventh month following the Executive’s Date of Termination. Such payment(s) shall not be reduced in the event the Executive obtains other employment following termination of employment. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, in the event of a Change in Control, as defined in Section 5 hereof, followed within one (1) year by an Event of Termination, any payments to the Executive under this Agreement shall be made solely in accordance with Section 5 hereof.”

Sixth Change

Section 5(c) is hereby amended to read as follows:

“(c) Upon the occurrence of a Change in Control, followed by Executive’s termination of employment in the circumstances described in Section 5(b), the Bank shall pay Executive, or in the event of his subsequent death, his beneficiary or beneficiaries, or his estate, as the case may be, as severance pay or liquidated damages, or both, an amount equal t o 2.99 times the average of the sum of the following items in each of the five completed calendar years preceding his termination of employment (or such shorter period as Executive shall have been employed by the Bank): ( i ) Executive’s “annual compensation” (as defined below) and (ii) contributions made on the Executive’s behalf to any employee benefit plans of the Bank and its affiliates. For purposes of this Section 5(c), Executive’s “annual compensation” shall mean the amount reported by the Bank in Box 1 of Executive’s Form W-2(s) for a calendar year (but excluding income attributable to the vesting of equity compensation or the exercise of stock options). Any payments to which Executive may be entitled under this Section 5(c) shall be made in a lump sum within thirty (30) days after the Date of Termination following the Change in Control, or in the event that Code Section 409A applies and Executive is a “specified employee” within the meaning of Code Section 409A, no later than the first day of the seventh month following the Executive’s Date of Termination.”

Seventh Change

Section 10 is hereby amended to read as follows:

“If, and only if, Executive’s employment is terminated for the reasons set forth in Section 4(a) hereof, and such termination occurs prior to the end of the Executive’s term of employment under this Agreement, Executive agrees that, for a period of one (1) year following the effective date of his termination under Section 4(a), Executive shall not, without the written consent of the Board, become an officer, employee, consultant, director, independent contractor, agent, sole proprietor, partner or trustee of any bank or bank holding company, savings bank, savings and loan association, savings and loan holding company, any mortgage or loan broker or any other entity competing with the Bank or its affiliates, if such position entails working within (or providing services within) thirty (30) miles of the Bank’s main office.”

 
 

Eighth Change

Section 19 is hereby amended to read as follows:

“All reasonable legal fees paid or incurred by Executive pursuant to any dispute or question of interpretation relating to this Agreement, whether brought in good faith by the Bank (or any successors thereto) or Executive, shall be paid or reimbursed by the Bank if Executive is the prevailing party with respect to such matter, provided, however, that such reimbursement shall occur not later than thirty (30) days after the date that Executive becomes entitled to reimbursement of legal fees under this Section 19 (but in no event later than two and one-half months after the end of the year in which the expense was incurred). Notwithstanding the foregoing, with respect to disputes or questions of interpretation arising prior to July 1, 2012. payment or reimbursement shall be made to Executive without regard to whether Executive is the prevailing party with respect to such matter.”

* * * *

In all other respects, the terms of the Agreement are hereby ratified and confirmed. This First Amendment may executed by the parties in counterparts.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this First Amendment, effective as of September 19, 2012.

  CRESCOM BANK
     
     
   /s/ Manly Eubank
  Name:   Manly Eubank 
  Title:  Chairman - Compensation Committee
     
     
   /s/ David L. Morrow
  David L. Morrow

 

 

CAROLINA FINANCIAL CORPORATION

AMENDED AND RESTATED SUPPLEMENTAL EXECUTIVE AGREEMENT

This Amended and Restated Supplemental Executive Agreement (the “Agreement”) is made effective as of December 24, 2008, by and between Carolina Financial Corporation (the “Company”) and David L. Morrow (the “Executive”) to supplement the amended and restated employment agreement between Executive and Crescent Bank (the “Bank”), a wholly-owned subsidiary of the Company, dated December 24, 2008 (the “Employment Agreement”). Capitalized terms which are not defined herein shall have the same meaning as set forth in the Employment Agreement (and any successor thereto).

WHEREAS, the Company and the Executive are currently parties to a supplemental executive agreement entered into on August 2, 2006 (the “Original Agreement”); and

WHEREAS, the Company desires to amend and restate the Original Agreement in order to make changes to comply with Section 409A of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the “Code”) and the final regulations issued thereunder in April 2007; and

WHEREAS, the Executive has agreed to such changes; and

WHEREAS, the Board of Directors of the Company, and the Executive believe it is in the best interests of the Company to enter into the Agreement in order to reinforce and reward the Executive for his service and dedication to the continued success of the Company and incorporate the changes required by Section 409A of the Code.

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the mutual covenants herein contained, and upon the other terms and conditions hereinafter provided, the parties hereby agree as follows:

Section 1 . (a) In the event of a termination of Executive’s employment with the Bank under Section 5 of the Employment Agreement, Executive shall be entitled to receive, pursuant to this Agreement, an amount payable by the Company, in addition to any compensation or benefits payable by the Bank pursuant to Section 5(c) and 5(d) of the Employment Agreement, which amount shall equal the difference, if any, between (i) the amount that would be paid by the Bank under the Employment Agreement pursuant to Sections 5 without regard to any reduction that maybe required by Section 5(f), and (ii) the amount that is actually paid under the terms of the Employment Agreement. Any payments hereunder shall be made in a lump sum within thirty (30) days after the Date of Termination, or in the event the Executive is a Specified Employee (within the meaning of Treasury Regulations §1.409A-1(i)), and to the extent necessary to avoid penalties under Section 409A of the Code, payment shall be made to the Executive on the first day of the seventh month following the Executive’s Date of Termination.

(b) For purposes of Section 1, termination of Executive’s employment with the Bank under Section 5 of the Employment Agreement as used herein shall mean “Separation from Service” as defined in Section 409A of the Code and the Treasury Regulations promulgated thereunder, provided, however, that the Bank and Executive reasonably anticipate that the level of bona fide services Executive would perform after termination would permanently decrease to a level that is less than 50% of the average level of bona fide services performed (whether as an employee or an independent contractor) over the immediately preceding 36-month period.

 
 

Section 2 . (a) In the event that any payments or benefits provided or to be provided to the Executive pursuant to Section 5 of the Employment Agreement, in combination with payments or benefits, if any, from other plans or arrangements maintained by the Company or the Bank, constitute “excess parachute payments” under Section 280G of the Code and are subject to excise tax under Section 4999 of the Code, the Company shall pay to Executive in cash an additional amount equal to the amount of the Gross Up Payment as defined herein. The “Gross Up Payment” shall be the amount needed to ensure that the amount of such payments and the value of such benefits received by Executive (net of such excise tax and any federal, state and local tax on the Company’s payment to him attributable to such excise tax) equals the amount of such payments and value of such benefits as he would receive in the absence of such excise tax and any federal, state and local tax on the Company’s payment to him attributable to such excise tax. The Company shall pay the Gross Up Payment within thirty (30) days after the Date of Termination, or in the event the Executive is a Specified Employee (within the meaning of Treasury Regulations §1.409A-1(i)), and to the extent necessary to avoid penalties under Section 409A of the Code, payment shall be made to the Executive on the first day of the seventh month following the Executive’s Date of Termination. For purposes of determining the amount of the Gross Up Payment, the value of any non-cash benefits and deferred payments or benefits shall be determined by the Company’s independent auditors in accordance with the principles of Sections 280G(d)(3) and (4) of the Code.

(b) In the event that, after the Gross Up Payment is made, the amount of the excise tax described is determined to be less than the amount calculated in the determination of the actual Gross Up Payment made by the Company, Executive shall repay to the Company, at the time that such reduction in the amount of excise tax is finally determined, the portion of the Gross Up Payment attributable to such reduction, plus interest on the amount of such repayment at the applicable federal rate under Section 1274 of the Code from the date of the Gross Up Payment to the date of the repayment. The amount of the reduction of the Gross Up Payment shall reflect any subsequent reduction in excise taxes resulting from such repayment.

(c) In the event that, after the Gross Up Payment is made, the amount of the excise tax is determined to exceed the amount anticipated at the time the Gross Up Payment was made, the Company shall pay to the Executive, in immediately available funds, within thirty (30) days following the date that such additional amount of excise tax is finally determined, an additional payment (“Additional Gross Up Payment”) equal to such additional amount of excise tax and any federal, state and local taxes thereon, plus all interest and penalties, if any, owed by the Executive with respect to such additional amount of excise and other tax.

(d) The Company shall have the right to challenge, on Executive’s behalf, any excise tax assessment against him as to which Executive is entitled to (or would be entitled if such assessment is finally determined to be proper) a Gross Up Payment or Additional Gross Up Payment, provided that all costs and expenses incurred in such a challenge shall be borne by the Company and the Company shall indemnify the Executive and hold him harmless, on an after-tax basis, from any excise or other tax (including interest and penalties with respect thereto) imposed as a result of such payment of costs and expenses by the Company.

 
 

Section 3 . Any payments made to the Executive pursuant to this Agreement or otherwise, are subject to and conditioned upon compliance with all applicable banking laws and regulations, including, without limitation, 12 U.S.C. Section 1828(k) and any regulations promulgated thereunder.

Section 4 . This Agreement shall be deemed effective as of the date first above written, as if executed on such date. Except as expressly set forth herein, this Agreement shall not by implication or otherwise alter, modify, amend or in any way affect any of the terms, conditions, obligations, covenants or agreements contained in the Employment Agreement, all of which are ratified and affirmed in all respects and shall continue in full force and effect and shall be otherwise unaffected.

Section 5 . This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of South Carolina but only to the extent not superseded by federal law.

Section 6 . This Agreement may be executed in any number of counterparts, each of which shall for all purposes be deemed an original, and all of which together shall constitute but one and the same instrument.

Section 7 . This Agreement shall be interpreted and administered consistent with Section 409A of the Code.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Employers and the Executive have duly executed this Agreement as of the day and year first written above.

ATTEST:   CAROLINA FINANCIAL CORPORATION
       
/s/ Frank J. Cole, Jr.   By:  /s/ Frank E. Lucas
Secretary     Frank E. Lucas
       
WITNESS:   EXECUTIVE
       
 /s/ Ann Sonnycalf   By:  /s/ David L. Morrow
      David L. Morrow

 

 

 

 

CAROLINA FINANCIAL CORPORATION

EMPLOYMENT AGREEMENT

This Agreement (the “Agreement”) is made effective as of the 1 st day of May, 2008 (the “Effective Date”) by and between Carolina Financial Corporation, a South Carolina corporation (the “Company”), and Jerold Lee Rexroad (“Executive”).

WHEREAS, the Company wishes to assure itself of the continued services of Executive for the period provided in this Agreement; and

WHEREAS, the Company engages in no independent activities other than owning the stock of its subsidiary depository institutions; and

WHEREAS, Executive is willing to serve in the employ of the Company for the said period set forth herein.

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the mutual covenants herein contained, and upon the other terms and conditions hereinafter provided, the parties hereby agree as follows:

1. POSITION AND RESPONSIBILITIES

During the period of his employment hereunder, Executive agrees to serve in the position as Executive Vice President of the Company((the “Executive Position”). In addition, Executive agrees to assume responsibilities of retail mortgage operations and mortgage investments of the Company and is expected to increase correspondent opportunities with Crescent Mortgage Company, a wholly owned subsidiary of the Company. Failure to reelect Executive as Executive Vice President of the Company as set forth in this section in accordance with the terms of Section 2(a) without the consent of Executive during the term of this Agreement, shall constitute an Event of Termination.

2. TERM AND DUTIES

(a) The period of Executive’s employment under this Agreement shall begin as of the date first above written and shall continue for a period of thirty-six (36) full calendar months thereafter. During said term, Executive shall perform the normal and customary duties associated with the Executive Position set forth in Section 1. Commencing on the first anniversary date of this Agreement, and continuing at each anniversary date thereafter, the Agreement shall renew for an additional year such that the remaining term shall be three (3) years unless written notice is provided to Executive at least ten (10) days and not more than thirty (30) days prior to any such anniversary date, that this Agreement shall not renew, in which event this Agreement shall expire at the end of thirty-six (36) months following such anniversary date. Prior to each notice period for non-renewal, the disinterested members of the Board of Directors of the Company (“Board”) will conduct a comprehensive performance evaluation and review of Executive for purposes of determining whether to extend the Agreement, and the results thereof shall be included in the minutes of the Board’s meeting.

 
 

(b) During the period of his employment hereunder, except for periods of absence occasioned by illness, reasonable vacation periods, and reasonable leaves of absence, Executive shall devote substantially all his business time, attention, skill, and efforts to the faithful performance of his duties hereunder including activities and services related to the Executive Position, provided, however, that Executive may continue to participate in the business activities in which he is participating at the time of execution of this Agreement (as set forth on Schedule A attached hereto) so long as such activities do not interfere with the performance of his duties hereunder, and provided further, that with the approval of the Board or its designee, as evidenced by a resolution of such Board, from time to time, Executive may serve, or continue to serve, on the boards of directors of, and hold any other offices or positions in, business companies or business organizations, which, in such Board’s judgment, will not present any conflict of interest with the Company or its subsidiaries, or materially affect the performance of Executive’s duties pursuant to this Agreement (it being understood that membership in social, religious, charitable or similar organizations does not require Board approval pursuant to this Section 2(b)).

3. COMPENSATION AND REIMBURSEMENT

(a) The compensation specified under this Agreement shall constitute the salary and benefits paid for the duties described in Section 2(b). The Company shall pay Executive as compensation a salary of not less than $200,000 per year (“Base Salary”) for the performance of his duties in the positions specified in Section 1 hereof. Such Base Salary shall be payable no less frequently than monthly. During the period of this Agreement, Executive’s Base Salary shall be reviewed at least annually no later than December 1 of each year. Such review shall be conducted by a Committee designated by the Board, and the Board may increase, but not decrease, Executive’s Base Salary (any increase in Base Salary shall become the “Base Salary” for purposes of this Agreement). In addition to the Base Salary provided in this Section 3(a), the Company shall provide Executive, at no cost to Executive, with all such other benefits as are provided uniformly to permanent full-time employees of the Company.

(b) Executive will be entitled to participate in, or receive benefits under, any employee benefit plans including, but not limited to, retirement plans, supplemental retirement plans (other than the Elite LifeComp Plan or any successor to the Elite LifeComp Plan that may be adopted in the future), pension plans, profit-sharing plans, health-and-accident plans, medical coverage or any other employee benefit plan or arrangement made available by the Company or Community FirstBank in the future to senior executives and key management employees, subject to, and on a basis consistent with, the terms, conditions and overall administration of such plans and arrangements. Executive will be entitled to incentive compensation and bonuses as provided in any plan of the Company or its subsidiaries in which Executive is eligible to participate (and he shall be entitled to a pro rata distribution under any incentive compensation or bonus plan as to any year in which a termination of employment occurs, other than Termination for Cause). Assuming Executive remains in the employ of the Company through December 31, 2008 of this Agreement, Executive will be entitled to a guaranteed bonus at the end of such period of Fifty Thousand Dollars ($50,000). Assuming Executive remains in the employ of the Company through December 31, 2009, Executive will be entitled to a guaranteed bonus at the end of such period of One Hundred Thousand Dollars ($100,000). If Executive remains in the employ of the Company through December 31, 2010, Executive will be entitled to incentive compensation in an amount up to 100% of Executive’s then Base Salary (paid during the third year of this Agreement). The bonuses to which Executive will be entitled under this paragraph will be paid to Executive within two and one-half months following the end of said periods, provided Executive remains employed with the Company at such time and provided, however, that if the Company is not in compliance with its minimum capital requirements or if such payments would cause the Company’s capital to be reduced below its minimum capital requirements, such payments shall be deferred until such time as the Company is in capital compliance. Nothing paid to Executive under any such plan or arrangement will be deemed to be in lieu of other compensation to which Executive is entitled under this Agreement.

 
 

(c) Executive shall receive 10,000 shares of restricted common stock of the Company on the Effective Date, which shares shall vest in equal annual installments over a five (5) year period on each anniversary of the Effective Date, and shall be permitted during the term of this Agreement to purchase up to $1 million of common stock of the Company, as available and at market prices.

(d) The Company shall pay or reimburse Executive for all reasonable travel and other reasonable expenses incurred by Executive performing his obligations under this Agreement, including transportation and lodging expenses incurred for commuting from Myrtle Beach, SC to Charleston, SC until June 30, 2010, and may provide such additional compensation in such form and such amounts as the Board may from time to time determine in accordance with standards set by the Board.

4. PAYMENTS TO EXECUTIVE UPON AN EVENT OF TERMINATION

The provisions of this Section shall in all respects be subject to the terms and conditions stated in Section 8.

(a) The provisions of this Section shall apply upon the occurrence of an Event of Termination (as herein defined) during Executive’s term of employment under this Agreement. As used in this Agreement, an “Event of Termination” shall mean and include any one or more of the following:

(i) the termination by the Company of Executive’s full-time employment hereunder for any reason other than (A) Disability or Retirement, as defined in Section 6 hereof, (B) following a Change in Control, as defined in Section 5(a) hereof, or (C) Termination for Cause as defined in Section 7 hereof; or
(ii) Executive’s written notice of resignation from the Company’s employ, upon any
 
 
(A) failure to elect or reelect or to appoint or reappoint Executive to the position of Executive Vice President of the Company as set forth in Section 1 during the term of this Agreement in accordance with Section 2(a) of this Agreement,
(B) material reduction in the benefits and perquisites to Executive from those being provided as of the Effective Date of this Agreement,
(C) liquidation or dissolution of the Company other than liquidations or dissolutions that are caused by reorganizations that do not affect the status of Executive, or
(D) any other material breach of this Agreement by the Company.

Upon the occurrence of any event described in clauses (ii) (A), (B), (C) or (D), of this Section 4(a), Executive shall have the right to elect to terminate his employment under this Agreement by resignation upon sixty (60) days prior written notice, which notice must be given by Executive within a reasonable period of time (not to exceed four calendar months) after the occurrence of such event. Notwithstanding the preceding sentence, in the event of a continuing breach of this Agreement by the Company, Executive, after giving due notice specified above, shall not waive any of his rights under this Agreement and this Section 4 by virtue of the fact that Executive has submitted his resignation but has remained in the employment of the Company and is engaged in good faith discussions to resolve any occurrence of an event described in clauses (ii) (A), (B), (C) or (D) of this Section 4(a).

(b) Upon the occurrence of an Event of Termination, on the Date of Termination, as defined in Section 8, the Company shall pay Executive, or, in the event of his subsequent death, his beneficiary or beneficiaries, or his estate, as the case may be, as severance pay or liquidated damages, or both, a sum equal to the greater of the payments due for the remaining term of the Agreement or three (3) times the average of the annualized Base Salary over the preceding three (3) years, including bonuses and any other cash compensation paid to Executive during each of such years, and the amount of any benefits received pursuant to any employee benefit plans, on behalf of Executive, maintained by the Company during such period; provided, however, that if the Company is not in compliance with its minimum capital requirements or if such payments would cause the Company’s capital to be reduced below its minimum capital requirements, such payments shall be deferred until such time as the Company is in capital compliance. Upon the occurrence of an Event of Termination, any payments shall be made in a lump sum within thirty (30) days after the Date of Termination, or in the event that Code Section 409A applies and Executive is a “specified employee” within the meaning of Treasury Regulations §1.409A-1(i), such payments shall be made in a lump sum on the first day of the seventh month following Executive’s Date of Termination. Such payment(s) shall not be reduced in the event Executive obtains other employment following termination of employment. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, in the event of a Change in Control, as defined in Section 5 hereof, followed within one (1) year by an Event of Termination, any payments to Executive under this Agreement shall be made in accordance with Section 5 hereof.

 
 

(c) Notwithstanding the provisions of Sections 4(a) and (b), and in the event that there has not been a Change in Control as defined in Section 5(a), upon the voluntary termination by Executive upon giving sixty (60) days notice to the Company (which shall not be deemed to constitute an “Event of Termination” as defined herein), the Company, at the discretion of the Board of Directors, may pay Executive, or in the event of his subsequent death, his beneficiary or beneficiaries, or his estate, as the case may be, a severance payment in an amount to be determined by the Board at the time of such voluntary termination by Executive. Such severance payment shall not exceed three (3) times the average of the annualized Base Salary over the preceding three (3) years or such shorter period as Executive shall have been employed by the Company, including bonuses and any other cash compensation paid to Executive during such years, and the amount of any benefits received pursuant to any employee benefit plans, on behalf of Executive, maintained by the Company during such period; provided, however, that if the Company is not in compliance with its minimum capital requirements or if such payments would cause the Company’s capital to be reduced below its minimum capital requirements, such payments shall be deferred until such time as the Company is in capital compliance.

(d) Upon the occurrence of an Event of Termination, the Company will cause to be continued life insurance and non-taxable medical and dental coverage substantially identical to the coverage maintained by the Company or its subsidiary for Executive prior to his termination. Such coverage shall cease upon the expiration of the remaining term of this Agreement.

(e) For purposes of Section 4, an “Event of Termination” and “voluntary termination of employment” as used herein shall mean “Separation from Service” as defined in Code Section 409A and the Treasury Regulations promulgated thereunder, provided, however, that the Company and Executive reasonably anticipate that the level of bona fide services Executive would perform after termination would permanently decrease to a level that is less than 50% of the average level of bona fide services performed (whether as an employee or an independent contractor) over the immediately preceding 36-month period.

5. CHANGE IN CONTROL

(a) The term “Change in Control” means (1) an event of a nature that (i) results in a change in control of the Company within the meaning of the applicable federal and state statutes governing the acquisition of control of the Company, and applicable regulations promulgated thereunder as in effect on the date hereof, or (ii) would be required to be reported in response to Item 5.01 of the current report on Form 8-K, as in effect on the date hereof, pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (the “Exchange Act”), assuming such provisions apply to the Company; (2) any person (as the term is used in Sections 13(d) and 14(d) of the Exchange Act) is or becomes the beneficial owner (as defined in Rule 13d-3 under the Exchange Act), directly or indirectly of securities of the Company representing 25% or more of the Company’s outstanding securities; (3) individuals who are members of Incumbent Board (as defined below) cease for any reason to constitute at least a majority thereof; (4) a reorganization, merger, consolidation, sale of all or substantially all of the assets of the Company or a similar transaction in which the Company is not the resulting entity; or (5) a proxy statement is distributed that solicits proxies from stockholders of the Company, by someone other than the current management of the Company, seeking stockholder approval of a plan of reorganization, merger or consolidation of the Company or similar transaction with one or more corporations as a result of which the outstanding shares of the class of securities then subject to such plan are exchanged for or converted into cash or property or securities not issued by the Company. The term “Change in Control” shall not include an acquisition of securities by an employee benefit plan of the Bank or the Company or the acquisition of securities of the Company in connection with the initial stock offering of the Company. In the application of the applicable statutes to a determination of a Change in Control, determinations shall be made by the Board. For purposes of this section 5(a), “Incumbent Board” means the Board of Directors of the Company on the date hereof, provided that any person becoming a director subsequent to the date hereof whose election was approved by a vote of at least three-quarters of the directors comprising the Incumbent Board, or whose nomination for election by stockholders was approved by the nominating committee serving under an Incumbent Board, shall be considered as though he were a member of the Incumbent Board.

 
 

(b) If any of the events described in Section 5(a) hereof constituting a Change in Control have occurred, Executive shall be entitled to the benefits provided in paragraphs (c), (d) and (e) of this Section 5 upon his subsequent termination of employment at any time during the term of this Agreement (regardless of whether such termination results from (i) his resignation, provided such resignation occurs within one (1)year of a Change in Control, or (ii) his dismissal), unless such termination is because of his death, Retirement, or termination for Disability in which case Executive shall be entitled to the benefits described in Section hereof. Upon the Change in Control, Executive shall have the right to elect to terminate his employment with the Company for a period of one year following a Change of Control, for any reason, during the term of this Agreement.

(c) Upon the occurrence of a Change in Control followed by Executive’s termination of employment (other than a Termination for Cause), the Company shall pay Executive, or in the event of his subsequent death, his beneficiary or beneficiaries, or his estate, as the case may be, as severance pay or liquidated damages, or both, a sum equal to the greater of the payments due for the remaining term of the Agreement or 2.99 times the average of the five preceding years’ Base Salary or such shorter period as Executive shall have been employed by the Company, including bonuses and any other cash compensation paid to Executive during such years, and the amount of any contributions made to any employee benefit plans, on behalf of Executive, maintained by the Company during such years. Any payments to which Executive may be entitled under this Section 5(c) shall be made in a lump sum within thirty (30) days after the Date of Termination following the Change in Control, or in the event that Code Section 409A applies and Executive is a “specified employee” within the meaning of Treasury Regulations §1.409A-1(i), such payments shall be made in a lump sum on the first day of the seventh month following Executive’s Date of Termination.

 
 

(d) Upon the occurrence of a Change in Control followed by Executive’s termination of employment (other than a Termination for Cause), the Company will cause to be continued life insurance and non-taxable medical and dental coverage substantially identical to the coverage maintained by the Company for Executive prior to his severance. Except as set forth in sub-section (3) below, such coverage and payments shall cease upon the expiration of thirty-six (36) months from Executive’s termination of employment.

(e) Excise Tax Indemnification.

(i) In the event that any payments or benefits provided or to be provided to Executive pursuant to this Agreement, in combination with payments or benefits, if any, from other plans or arrangements maintained by the Company, constitute “excess parachute payments” under Section 2800 of the Code, and are subject to excise tax under Section 4999 of the Code, the Company shall reimburse Executive, in cash, an additional amount equal to the amount of the Gross Up Payment as defined below. The “Gross Up Payment” shall be the amount needed to ensure that the amount of such payments and the value of such benefits received by Executive (net of such excise tax and any federal, state and local tax on the Company’s payment to him attributable to such excise tax) equals the amount of such payments and value of such benefits as he would receive in the absence of such excise tax and any federal, state and local tax on the Company’s payment to him attributable to such excise tax. The Company shall reimbursement Executive an amount equal to the Gross Up Payment by no later than the end of Executive’s taxable year next following Executive’s taxable year in which Executive remits the related taxes to the requiring taxing authority.
(ii) For purposes of determining the amount of the Gross Up Payment, the value of any non-cash benefits and deferred payments or benefits shall be determined by the Company’s independent auditors in accordance with the principles of Section 2800(d)(3) and (4) of the Code.
(iii) In the event that, after the Gross Up Payment is made, the amount of the excise tax described in Section 5(f)(i) hereof is determined to be less than the amount calculated in the determination of the actual Gross Up Payment made by the Company, Executive shall repay to the Company, at the time that such reduction in the amount of excise tax is finally determined, the portion of the Gross Up Payment attributable to such reduction, plus interest on the amount of such repayment at the applicable federal rate under Section 1274 of the Code from the date of the Gross Up Payment to the date of the repayment. The amount of the reduction of the Gross Up Payment shall reflect any subsequent reduction in excise taxes resulting from such repayment.
 
 
(iv) In the event that, after the Gross Up Payment is made, the amount of the excise tax described in Section 5(f)(i) hereof is determined to exceed the amount anticipated at the time the Gross Up Payment was made, the Company shall reimburse Executive, in immediately available funds, at the time that such additional amount of excise tax is finally determined, an additional payment (“Additional Gross Up Payment”) equal to such additional amount of excise tax and any federal, state and local taxes thereon, plus all interest and penalties, if any, owed by Executive with respect to such additional amount of excise and other tax by no later than the end of Executive’s taxable year next following Executive’s taxable year in which Executive remits the related taxes to the requiring authority.

(f) For purposes of Section 5, “termination of employment” as used herein shall mean “Separation from Service” as defined in Code Section 409A and the Treasury Regulations promulgated thereunder, provided, however, that the Company and Executive reasonably anticipate that the level of bona fide services Executive would perform after termination would permanently decrease to a level that is less than 50% of the average level of bona fide services performed (whether as an employee or an independent contractor) over the immediately preceding 36-month period.

6. TERMINATION UPON RETIREMENT, DISABILITY OR DEATH

(a) Termination by the Company of Executive based on “Retirement” shall mean termination in accordance with the Company’s retirement policy or in accordance with any retirement arrangement established with Executive’s consent with respect to him. Upon termination of Executive upon Retirement, no amounts or benefits shall be due to Executive under this Agreement, and Executive shall be entitled, if eligible, to all benefits under any retirement plan of the Company and other plans to which Executive is a party or in which he participates immediately prior to his Date of Termination.

(b) Termination by the Company of Executive’s employment based on “Disability” shall mean Executive is unable to engage in any substantial gainful activity by reason of any medically determinable physical or mental impairment that can be expected to result in death, or last for a continuous period of not less than 12 months; (ii) by reason of any medically determinable physical or mental impairment that can be expected to result in death, or last for continuous period of not less than twelve (12) months, Executive is receiving income replacement benefits for a period of not less than three months under an accident and health plan covering employees of the Company; or (iii) Executive is determined to be totally disabled by the Social Security Administration. In the event of such Disability, Executive’s obligation to perform services under this Agreement will terminate. In the event of such termination, Executive shall receive the benefits provided under any disability program sponsored by the Company or its subsidiaries. To the extent that such benefits are less than Executive’s Base Salary, the Company shall pay Executive an amount equal to the difference between such disability plan benefits and the amount of Executive’s Base Salary for the remaining term of the Agreement, or one year, whichever is a longer period of time, following the termination of his employment due to Disability. Accordingly, any payments required hereunder shall commence within thirty (30) days from the Date of Termination due to Disability and be payable in equal monthly installments.

 
 

(c) In the event of Executive’s death during the term of the Agreement, his estate, legal representatives or named beneficiaries (as directed by Executive in writing) shall be paid Executive’s Base Salary as defined in Paragraph 3(a) at the rate in effect at the time of Executive’s death for a period of one (1) year from the date of Executive’s death, and the Company will continue to provide non-taxable medical, dental, family and other benefits normally provided for an executive’s family for one (1) year after Executive’s death.

7. TERMINATION FOR CAUSE

The term “Termination for Cause” shall mean termination because of Executive’s personal dishonesty, incompetence, willful misconduct, any breach of fiduciary duty involving personal profit, intentional failure to perform stated duties, willful violation of any law, rule, or regulation (other than traffic violations, regulations that do not adversely affect the Company or its employees, or similar offenses) or final cease-and-desist order, or material breach of any provision of this Agreement. In determining incompetence, the acts or omissions shall be measured against standards generally prevailing in the savings institution industry. For purposes of this paragraph, no act or failure to act on the part of Executive shall be considered “willful” unless done, or omitted to be done, by Executive not in good faith and without reasonable belief that Executive’s action or omission was in the best interest of the Company. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Executive shall not be deemed to have been Terminated for Cause unless and until there shall have been delivered to him a Notice of Termination, as specified in Section 8(c) hereof. A Notice of Termination shall be issued pursuant to a resolution, duly adopted by the affirmative vote of not less than a majority of the members of the Board, at a meeting of the Board called and held for that purpose (after reasonable notice, in writing, to Executive), finding that in the good faith opinion of the Board, Executive was guilty of conduct justifying Termination for Cause and specifying the particulars thereof in detail. In the event of Termination for Cause, Executive shall be immediately suspended from the performance of his duties hereunder. Executive shall not have the right to receive compensation or other benefits for any period after Termination for Cause, except as provided in Section 8(c) hereof.

8. NOTICE

(a) Any purported termination by the Company or by Executive shall be communicated by Notice of Termination to the other party hereto. For purposes of this Agreement, a “Notice of Termination” shall mean a written notice which shall indicate the specific termination provision in this Agreement relied upon and shall set forth in reasonable detail the facts and circumstances claimed to provide a basis for termination of Executive’s employment under the provision so indicated.

 
 

(b) “Date of Termination” shall mean (A) if Executive’s employment is terminated for Disability, thirty (30) days after a Notice of Termination is given (provided that he shall not have returned to the performance of his duties on a full-time basis during such thirty (30) day period), and (B) if his employment is terminated for any other reason, the date specified in the Notice of Termination.

(c) If, within thirty (30) days after any Notice of Termination for Cause is given, Executive notifies the Company that a dispute exists concerning the termination, Executive shall be entitled to an opportunity, together with counsel, to a hearing before the Board within thirty (30) days of notifying the Board of such dispute. Any adverse determination by the Board following such hearing may be submitted by Executive to binding arbitration pursuant to Section 17 hereof. In the event that it is determined by the Board or pursuant to arbitration that Termination for Cause did not exist or such dispute is otherwise decided in Executive’s favor, Executive shall be entitled to receive all compensation and benefits which should have been paid under either Section 4 or 5, with interest at the prime rate on such cash payments that should have been made during such period, and Executive shall be reinstated to his position and duties hereunder.

9. POST-TERMINATION OBLIGATIONS

(a) All payments and benefits to Executive under this Agreement shall be subject to Executive’s compliance with paragraph (b) of this Section 9 during the term of this Agreement and for one (1) full year after the expiration or termination hereof.

(b) Executive shall, upon reasonable notice, furnish such information and assistance to the Company as may reasonably be required by the Company in connection with any litigation in which it or any of its subsidiaries or affiliates is, or may become, a party, except for litigation between the Company or the Company and Executive.

10. COVENANT NOT TO COMPETE

Executive hereby covenants and agrees that for a period of one (1) year following the date of his termination of employment with the Company, if such termination occurs prior to the end of Executive’s term of employment under this Agreement, he shall not, without the written consent of the Board, become an officer, employee, consultant, director, independent contractor, agent, sole proprietor, partner or trustee of any bank or bank holding company, savings bank, savings and loan association, savings and loan holding company, any mortgage or loan broker or any other entity competing with the Company or its affiliates if such position entails working within (or providing services within) a thirty (30) mile radius of the Company’s main office; provided, however, that this Section 10 shall not apply if Executive’s employment is terminated (i) for Disability or Retirement, as defined in Section 6 hereof, (ii) following a Change in Control, as defined in Section 5(a) hereof, or (iii) based upon Termination for Cause as defined in Section 7 hereof.

 
 

11. EFFECT ON PRIOR AGREEMENTS AND EXISTING BENEFITS PLANS

This Agreement contains the entire understanding between the parties hereto and supersedes any prior employment agreement between the Company or any predecessor of the Company and Executive, except that this Agreement shall not affect or operate to reduce any benefit or compensation inuring to Executive of a kind elsewhere provided. No provision of this Agreement shall be interpreted to mean that Executive is subject to receiving fewer benefits than those available to him without reference to this Agreement.

12. SOURCE OF PAYMENTS

(a) All payments provided in this Agreement shall be timely paid in cash or check from the general funds of the Company.

(b) Notwithstanding any provision herein to the contrary, to the extent that payments and benefits, as provided by this Agreement, are paid to or received by Executive from the Company’s subsidiaries for services actually rendered, such compensation, payments and benefits paid by such subsidiaries will be subtracted from any amount due Executive from the Company under this Agreement.

13. NO ATTACHMENT

(a) Except as required by law, no right to receive payments under this Agreement shall be subject to anticipation, commutation, alienation, sale, assignment, encumbrance, charge, pledge, or hypothecation, or to execution, attachment, levy, or similar process or assignment by operation of law, and any attempt, voluntary or involuntary, to affect any such action shall be null, void, and of no effect.

(b) This Agreement shall be binding upon, and inure to the benefit of, Executive and the Company and their respective successors and assigns.

14. MODIFICATION AND WAIVER

(a) This Agreement may not be modified or amended except by an instrument in writing signed by the parties hereto.

(b) No term or condition of this Agreement shall be deemed to have been waived, nor shall there be any estoppel against the enforcement of any provision of this Agreement, except by written instrument of the party charged with such waiver or estoppel. No such written waiver shall be deemed a continuing waiver unless specifically stated therein, and each such waiver shall operate only as to the specific term or condition waived and shall not constitute a waiver of such term or condition for the future as to any act other than that specifically waived.

15. SEVERABILITY

 
 

If, for any reason, any provision of this Agreement, or any part of any provision, is held invalid, such invalidity shall not affect any other provision of this Agreement or any part of such provision not held so invalid, and each such other provision and part thereof shall to the full extent consistent with law continue in full force and effect.

16. HEADINGS FOR REFERENCE ONLY

The headings of sections and paragraphs herein are included solely for convenience of reference and shall not control the meaning or interpretation of any of the provisions of this Agreement.

17. GOVERNING LAW

This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of South Carolina but only to the extent not superseded by federal law.

18. ARBITRATION

Any dispute or controversy arising under or in connection with this Agreement shall be settled exclusively by arbitration, conducted before a panel of three arbitrators sitting in a location mutually agreed upon by the Company and Executive that is within twenty-five (25) miles from the location of the Company, in accordance with the rules of the American Arbitration Association then in effect. Judgment may be entered on the arbitrator’s award in any court having jurisdiction; provided, however, that Executive shall be entitled to seek specific performance of his right to be paid until the Date of Termination during the pendency of any dispute or controversy arising under or in connection with this Agreement.

19. PAYMENT OF LEGAL FEES

All reasonable legal fees paid or incurred by Executive pursuant to any dispute or question of interpretation relating to this Agreement whether brought by the Company or any successors thereto, or whether brought by Executive in good faith shall be paid or reimbursed by the Company, regardless of the outcome of the dispute or interpretation. Any reimbursement that is to be made to Executive pursuant to this Section 18 shall occur no later than two and one-half months after the dispute is settled or resolved in Executive’s favor.

20. INDEMNIFICATION

The Company shall provide Executive (including his heirs, executors and administrators) with coverage under a standard directors’ and officers’ liability insurance policy at its expense, and shall indemnify Executive (and his heirs, executors and administrators) to the fullest extent permitted under federal law or the laws of the State of South Carolina, as applicable, against all expenses and liabilities reasonably incurred by him in connection with or arising out of any action, suit or proceeding in which he may be involved by reason of his having been a director or officer of the Company or the Company (whether or not he continues to be a director or officer at the time of incurring such expenses or liabilities), such expenses and liabilities to include, but not be limited to, judgments, court costs and attorneys’ fees and the cost of reasonable settlements (such settlements must be approved by the Board). if such action, suit or proceeding is brought against Executive in his capacity as an officer or director of the Company, however, such indemnification shall not extend to matters as to which Executive is finally adjudged to be liable for willful misconduct in the performance of his duties.

 
 

21. SUCCESSOR TO THE COMPANY

The Company shall require any successor or assignee, whether director indirect, by purchase, merger, consolidation or otherwise, to all or substantially all the business or assets of the Company, expressly and unconditionally to assume and agree to perform the Company’s obligations under this Agreement, in the same manner and to the same extent that the Company would be required to perform if no such succession or assignment had taken place.

 

 
 

SIGNATURES

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Company has caused this Agreement to be executed by their duly authorized officers, and Executive has signed this Agreement, on the day and date first above written.

ATTEST:   CAROLINA FINANCIAL CORPORATION
       
 /s/ Delores O. Harris    /s/ Frank E. Lucas  
    Frank E. Lucas
    Chairman of the Compensation Committee
       
WITNESS:   EXECUTIVE
       
 /s/ Ann Sonnycalf    /s/ Jerold Lee Rexroad  
    Jerold Lee Rexroad

 

 

 

 

First Amendment

to the Employment Agreement between

Carolina Financial Corporation and Jerold Lee Rexroad

WHEREAS, Carolina Financial Corporation (the “Company”) and Jerold Lee Rexroad (the “Executive) are parties to Employment Agreement dated as of May 1, 2008 (the “Agreement”);

WHEREAS, the parties desire to modify the Agreement pursuant to Section 14 thereof to make certain changes the parties deem necessary and appropriate;

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the mutual covenants herein contained, the parties hereby agree as follows:

First Change

Section 1 is hereby revised to read as follows:

“During the period of his employment hereunder, Executive agrees to serve in the position of President and Chief Executive Officer of the Company (the “Executive Position”). During said period, Executive also agrees to serve, if elected, as an officer and/or director of any subsidiary or affiliate of the Company. During the term of this Agreement, as set forth in Section 2(a), failure to reelect Executive to the Executive Position without the consent of the Executive shall constitute an Event of Termination (as defined in Section 4(a) below).”

Second Change

Section 2 is hereby amended by adding the following sentence to the end thereof:

“Notwithstanding anything in this Section 2 to the contrary, unless otherwise mutually agreed by the parties in writing, no annual extensions of the term of the Agreement shall occur after the date Executive attains age 70.”

Third Change

Section 3 is hereby amended by substituting “1300,000” for “$200,000” in the second sentence thereof.

Fourth Change

Section 4(a)(ii)(A) is hereby amended by deleting the reference to “Executive Vice President” and replacing it with “President and Chief Executive Officer”.

Fifth Change

Section 4(b) is hereby amended to read as follows:

 
 

“(b) (i) Upon the occurrence of an Event of Termination, the Company shall pay Executive, or, in the event of his subsequent death, his beneficiary or beneficiaries, or his estate, as the case may be, as severance pay or liquidated damages, or both, a lump sum amount equal to three (3) times the average of the sum of the following items in each of the three (3) years preceding his Date of Termination: (i) Executive’s annualized Base Salary (as defined in Section 3(a) above), (ii) all other cash compensation paid to Executive by the Company or its affiliates in each year of the relevant period and (iii) contributions made on the Executive’s behalf to any employee benefit plans sponsored by the Company or its affiliates; provided however, that if the Company is not in compliance with its minimum capital requirements or if such payments would cause the Company’s capital to be reduced below its minimum capital requirements, such payments shall be deferred until such time as the Company is in capital compliance.

(ii) Upon the occurrence of an Event of Termination, all payments shall be made in a lump sum within thirty (30) days after the Date of Termination, provided however if the Executive is a “specified employee” (as defined in Treasury Regulation §1.409A-1(i)), then, solely to the extent required to avoid penalties under Code Section 409A, such payment shall be delayed until the first day of the seventh month following the Executive’s Date of Termination. Such payment(s) shall not be reduced i n the event the Executive obtains other employment following termination of employment. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, in the event of a Change in Control, as defined in Section 5 hereof, followed within one (1) year by an Event of Termination, any payments to the Executive under this Agreement shall be made solely in accordance with Section 5 hereof.”

Sixth Change

Section 5(c) is hereby amended to read as follows:

“(c) Upon the occurrence of a Change in Control, followed by Executive’s termination of employment in the circumstances described in Section 5(b), the Company shall pay Executive, or in the event of his subsequent death, his beneficiary or beneficiaries, or his estate, as the case may be, as severance pay or liquidated damages, or both, an amount equal t o 2.99 times the average of the sum of the following items in each of the five completed calendar years preceding his termination of employment (or such shorter period as Executive shall have been employed by the Company): ( i ) Executive’s “annual compensation” (as defined below) and (ii) contributions made on the Executive’s behalf to any employee benefit plans of the Company and its affiliates. For purposes of this Section 5(c), Executive’s “annual compensation” shall mean the amount reported by the Company or its affiliates (including, without limitation, CresCom Bank) in Box 1 of Executive’s Form W-2(s) for a calendar year (but excluding income attributable to the vesting of equity compensation or the exercise of stock options). Any payments to which Executive may be entitled under this Section 5(c) shall be made in a lump sum within thirty (30) days after the Date of Termination following the Change in Control, or in the event that Code Section 409A applies and Executive is a “specified employee” within the meaning of Code Section 409A, no later than the first day of the seventh month following the Executive’s Date of Termination.”

 
 

Seventh Change

Section 10 is hereby amended to read as follows:

“If, and only if, Executive’s employment is terminated for the reasons set forth in Section 4(a) hereof, and such termination occurs prior to the end of the Executive’s term of employment under this Agreement, Executive agrees that, for a period of one (1) year following the effective date of his termination under Section 4(a), Executive shall not, without the written consent of the Board, become an officer, employee, consultant, director, independent contractor, agent, sole proprietor, partner or trustee of any bank or bank holding company, savings bank, savings and loan association, savings and loan holding company, any mortgage or loan broker or any other entity competing with the Company or its affiliates, if such position entails working within (or providing services within) thirty (30) miles of the Company’s main office.”

Eighth Change

Section 19 is hereby amended to read as follows:

“All reasonable legal fees paid or incurred by Executive pursuant to any dispute or question of interpretation relating to this Agreement, whether brought in good faith by the Company (or any successors thereto) or Executive, shall be paid or reimbursed by the Company if Executive is the prevailing party with respect to such matter, provided, however, that such reimbursement shall occur not later than thirty (30) days after the date that Executive becomes entitled to reimbursement of legal fees under this Section 19 (but in no event later than two and one-half months after the end of the year in which the expense was incurred). Notwithstanding the foregoing, with respect to disputes or questions of interpretation arising prior to July 1, 2011 payment or reimbursement shall be made to Executive without regard to whether Executive is the prevailing party with respect to such matter.”

* * * *

In all other respects, the terms of the Agreement are hereby ratified and confirmed. This First Amendment may executed by the parties in counterparts.

 

 
 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this First Amendment, effective as of September 19, 2012.

  CAROLINA FINANCIAL CORPORATION
     
     
   /s/ Manly Eubank
  Name:   Manly Eubank 
  Title:  Chairman - Compensation Committee
     
     
   /s/ Jerold Lee Rexroad
  Jerold Lee Rexroad

 

 

 

CAROLINA FINANCIAL CORPORATION

2002 STOCK OPTION PLAN

1. PURPOSE

The purpose of the Carolina Financial Corporation (the “Company”) 2002 Stock Option Plan (the “Plan”) is to advance the interests of the Company and its stockholders by providing Employees and Outside Directors of the Company and its Affiliates, including Community FirstBank of Charleston (“Community FirstBank”) and Crescent Bank, upon whose judgment, initiative and efforts the successful conduct of the business of the Company and its Affiliates largely depends, with an additional incentive to perform in a superior manner as well as to attract people of experience and ability.

2. DEFINITIONS

Affiliate ” means any “parent corporation” or ‘‘subsidiary corporation” of the Company. Community FirstBank or Crescent Bank, as such terms are defined in Section 424(e) or 424(f), respectively, of the Code.

Award ” means an Award of Non-Statutory Stock Options, Incentive Stock Options, and/or Limited Rights granted under the provisions of the Plan.

Beneficiary ” means the person or persons designated by a Participant to receive any benefits payable under the Plan in the event of such Participant’s death. Such person or persons shall be designated in writing on forms provided for this purpose by the Committee and may be changed from time to time by similar written notice to the Committee. In the absence of a written designation, the Beneficiary shall be the Participant’s surviving spouse, if any, or if none, his estate.

Board ” or “ Board of Directors ” means the board of directors of the Company or its Affiliate, as applicable.

Change in Control ” means (1) an event of a nature that (i) results in a change in control of the Company, Community FirstBank or Crescent Bank, within the meaning of the applicable federal and state statutes governing the acquisition of control of the Company, Community FirstBank or Crescent Bank, and applicable regulations promulgated thereunder as in effect on the date hereof; or (ii) would be required to be reported in response to Item 1 of the current report on Form 8-K, as in effect on the date hereof, pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (the “Exchange Act”), assuming such provisions apply to the Company, Community FirstBank or Crescent Bank; (2) any person (as the term is used in Sections 13(d) and 14(d) of the Exchange Act) is or becomes the beneficial owner (as defined in Rule 13d-3 under the Exchange Act), directly or indirectly of securities of the Company, Community FirstBank or Crescent Bank, representing 25% or more of the Company’s, Community FirstBank’s or Crescent Bank’s, outstanding securities; (3) individuals who are members of Incumbent Board cease for any reason to constitute at least a majority thereof; or (4) a reorganization, merger, consolidation, sale of all or substantially all of the assets of the Company, Community FirstBank or Crescent Bank, or a similar transaction in which the Company, Community FirstBank or Crescent Bank, is not the resulting entity. The term “Change in Control” shall not include (1) an acquisition of securities by an employee benefit plan of the Company, Community FirstBank or Crescent Bank, or (2) the acquisition of securities (i) of Community FirstBank by the Company in connection with the initial stock offering of the Company or (ii) of Crescent Bank by the Company in connection with the organization of Crescent Bank. In the application of the applicable statutes to a determination of a Change in Control, determinations shall he made by the Board of Directors.

 
 

Code ” means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.

Committee ” means a Committee of the Board the members of whom shall be determined by the Board in their sole discretion, provided that prior to any registration by the Company of any class of its securities under Section 12 of the Exchange Act, the Committee shall be modified to consist only of either (1) at least two Non-Employee Directors of the Company, or (ii) the entire Board of the Company.

Common Stock ” means the Common Stock of the Company, par value $.01 per share.

Date of Grant ” means the actual date on which an Award is granted by the Committee.

Director ” means a member of the Board.

Disability ” means the permanent and total inability by reason of mental or physical infirmity, or both, of an employee to perform the work customarily assigned to him. Additionally, a medical doctor selected or approved by the Board must advise the Committee that it is either not possible to determine when such Disability will terminate or that it appears probable that such Disability will be permanent during the remainder of said employee’s lifetime.

Effective Date ” means the date of, or a date determined by the Board of Directors following, approval of the Plan by the Company’s stockholders.

Employee ” means an employee of the Company or its Affiliates chosen by the Committee to participate in the Plan.

Fair Market Value ” means, (i) if the Common Stock is traded on the Nasdaq Stock Market or a national securities exchange, the last trade price of the Common Stock on the day prior to the date as to which Fair Market Value is being determined, or if the Common Stock was not traded on such prior day, the last trade on the next preceding day on which the Common Stock was traded (the Committee may rely on the Wall Street Journal in determining last trade prices and whether or not the Common Stock traded on a particular day); (ii) if the Common Stock is not traded on the Nasdaq Stock Market or a national securities exchange, Fair Market Value means the last trade price as reported by the OTC Bulletin Board, maintained by the Nasdaq Stock Market, Inc., within the 30-day period ending on the day prior to the date as to which Fair Market Value is to be determined, provided that if the Committee is aware of trades of Common Stock more recent that any last trade reported on the OTC Bulletin Board, the Committee, in its discretion given the circumstances of the trade, may determine to use such trading price as the Fair Market Value; (iii) if the Common Stock is not traded on the Nasdaq Stock Market or a national securities exchange and a trade was not reported on the OTC Bulletin Board within the 30-day period ending on the day prior to the date as to which Fair Market Value is to be determined, and if there are at least two broker-dealers quoting both a bid and asked price on the OTC Bulletin Board at the close of trading on the day prior to the date as to which Fair Market Value is to be determined, then Fair Market Value shall be the average of all bid and asked prices quoted by broker-dealers quoting both a bid and asked price on the OTC Bulletin Board at the close of trading on the day prior to the date as to which Fair Market Value is to be determined. In the event Fair Market Value cannot be determined in the manner described above, then Fair Market Value shall be determined by the Committee using a reasonable valuation method consistent with the Code and Treasury Regulations. The Committee shall he authorized, in its discretion, to obtain an independent appraisal to determine the Fair Market Value of the Common Stock.

2
 

Incentive Stock Option ” means an Option granted by the Committee to a Participant, which Option is designated as an Incentive Stock Option pursuant to Section 8.

Incumbent Board ” means the Board of Directors of the Company on the date hereof, provided that any person becoming a Director subsequent to the date hereof whose election was approved by a vote of at least three-quarters of the Directors comprising the Incumbent Board, or whose nomination for election by stockholders was approved by the same nominating committee serving under an Incumbent Board, shall be a member of the Incumbent Board.

Limited Right ” means the right to receive an amount of cash based upon the terms set forth in Section 9.

Non-Employee Director ” means, for purposes of the Plan, a Director who (a) is not employed by the Company or an Affiliate; (b) does not receive compensation directly or indirectly as a consultant (or in any other capacity than as a Director) greater than $60,000; (c) does not have an interest in a transaction requiring disclosure under Item 404(a) of Regulation S-K; or (d) is not engaged in a business relationship for which disclosure would be required pursuant to item 404(b) of Regulation S-K.

Non-Statutory Stock Option ” means an Option granted by the Committee to (i) an Outside Director or (ii) to any other Participant and such Option is either (A) not designated by the Committee as an Incentive Stock Option, or (B) fails to satisfy the requirements of an Incentive Stock Option as set forth in Section 422 of the Code and the regulations thereunder.

3
 

Outside Director ” means a Director who is not an employee of the Company or its Affiliates.

Option ” means an Award granted under Section 7 or Section 8.

Participant ” means an Employee or Outside Director of the Company or its Affiliates chosen by the Committee to participate in the Plan.

Termination for Cause ” means the termination of employment or termination of service on the Board caused by the individual’s personal dishonesty, willful misconduct, any breach of fiduciary duty involving personal profit, intentional failure to perform stated duties, or the willful violation of any law, rule or regulation (other than traffic violations or similar offenses), or a final cease-and-desist order, any of which results in material loss to the Company or one of its Affiliates.

3. ADMINISTRATION

The Plan shall be administered by the Committee. The Committee is authorized, subject to the provisions of the Plan, to establish such rules and regulations as it deems necessary for the proper administration of the Plan and to make whatever determinations and interpretations in connection with the Plan it deems necessary or advisable. All determinations and interpretations made by the Committee shall be binding and conclusive on all Participants in the Plan and on their legal representatives and beneficiaries.

All transactions involving a grant, award or other acquisition from the Company shall:

(a)            be approved by the Company’s full Board or by the Committee:

(b)           be approved, or ratified, in compliance with Section 14 of the Exchange Act, by either: the affirmative vote of the holders of a majority of the securities present, or represented and entitled to vote at a meeting duly held in accordance with the laws of the state in which the Company is incorporated; or the written consent of the holders of a majority of the securities of the issuer entitled to vote provided that such ratification occurs no later than the date of the next annual meeting of shareholders: or

(c)            result in the acquisition of an Option or Limited Right that is held by the Participant for a period of six months following the date of such acquisition.

4. TYPES OF AWARDS

Awards under the Plan may be granted in any one or a combination of: (a) Incentive Stock Options: (b) Non-Statutory Stock Options; and (c) Limited Rights.

5. STOCK SUBJECT TO THE PLAN

Subject to adjustment as provided in Section 14, the maximum number of shares reserved for issuance under the Plan is 160,700 shares of Common Stock. These shares of Common Stock may be either authorized but unissued shares or shares previously issued and reacquired by the Company. To the extent that Options or rights granted under the Plan are exercised, the shares covered will he unavailable for future grants under the Plan; to the extent that Options together with any related rights granted under the Plan terminate, expire or are canceled without having been exercised or, in the case of Limited Rights exercised for cash, new Awards may be made with respect to these shares.

4
 
6. ELIGIBILITY

Employees of the Company and its Affiliates, including Community FirstBank and Crescent Bank, shall be eligible to receive Incentive Stock Options, Non-Statutory Stock Options and/or Limited Rights under the Plan. Outside Directors shall he eligible to receive Non-Statutory Stock Options under the Plan.

7. NON-STATUTORY STOCK OPTIONS
7.1. Grant of Non-Statutory Stock Options.

(a)            Grants to Employees and Outside Directors . The Committee may, from time to time, grant Non-Statutory Stock Options to eligible Employees and Outside Directors, and, upon such terms and conditions as the Committee may determine, grant Non-Statutory Stock Options in exchange for and upon surrender of previously granted Awards under the Plan. Non-Statutory Stock Options granted under the Plan, including Non-Statutory Stock Options granted in exchange for and upon surrender of previously granted Awards, are subject to the terms and conditions set forth in this Section 7.

(b)           Option Agreement . Each Option shall he evidenced by a written option agreement between the Company and the Participant specifying the number of shares of Common Stock that may be acquired through its exercise and containing such other terms and conditions that are not inconsistent with the terms of the Plan.

(c)            Price . The purchase price per share of Common Stock deliverable upon the exercise of each Non-Statutory Stock Option shall be determined by the Committee on the date the Option is granted. Shares may be purchased only upon full payment of the purchase price. Payment of the purchase price may be made, in whole or in part, through the surrender of shares of the Common Stock at the Fair Market Value of such shares determined in the manner described in Section 2.

(d)           Manner of Exercise . Nonstatutory Stock Options shall vest based on a schedule determined by the Committee at the time of the award, provided that Non-Statutory Stock Options granted to Outside Directors on the Effective Date shall vest in five equal annual installments. The Committee may, in its sole discretion, accelerate the time at which any Non-Statutory Stock Option may be exercised in whole or in part by Employees of the Company, and by Outside Directors if the Company has not registered any class of its securities under section 12 of the Exchange Act. The vested Option may be exercised from time to time, in whole or in part, by delivering a written notice of exercise to the President or Chief Executive Officer of the Company. Such notice shall be irrevocable and must be accompanied by full payment of the purchase price in cash or shares of previously acquired Common Stock at the Fair Market Value of such shares, determined on the exercise date in the manner described in Section 2 hereof. If previously acquired shares of Common Stock are tendered in payment of all or part of the exercise price, the value of such shares shall be determined as of the date of such exercise.

5
 

(e)            Terms of Options . The term during which each Non-Statutory Stock Option may be exercised shall be determined by the Committee, but in no event shall a Non-Statutory Stock Option be exercisable in whole or in part more than 10 years from the Date of Grant. Notwithstanding the above, in the event of a Change in Control of the Company, Community FirstBank or Crescent Bank, all Non-Statutory Stock Options that have been awarded shall become immediately exercisable.

(f)            Termination of Employment or Service . Upon the termination of an Employee’s employment or upon termination of an Outside Director’s service for any reason other than Change of Control, Normal Retirement, Disability, death or Termination for Cause, such Participant’s Non-Statutory Stock Options shall be exercisable only as to those shares that were immediately purchasable on the date of termination and only for one year following termination. In the event of ‘Termination for Cause, all rights under a Participant’s Non-Statutory Stock Options shall expire upon termination. In the event of termination of employment or service of an Employee or Outside Director in the event of Change of Control, Normal Retirement, Disability or death, all Non-Statutory Stock Options held by such Participant, whether or not exercisable at such time, shall be exercisable by such Participant or his legal representative or beneficiaries for one year following the date of his termination of employment or service or such later period as determined by the Committee, provided that in no event shall the period extend beyond the expiration of the Non-Statutory Stock Option term.

(g)           Transferability . In the discretion of the Board, all or any Non-Statutory Stock Option granted hereunder may be transferable by the Participant once the Option has vested in the Participant, provided, however, that the Board may limit the transferability of such Option or Options to a designated class or classes of persons.

8. INCENTIVE STOCK OPTIONS
8.1. Grant of Incentive Stock Options .

The Committee may, from time to time, grant Incentive Stock Options to Employees. Incentive Stock Options granted pursuant to the Plan shall be subject to the following terms and conditions:

(a)            Option Agreement . Each Option shall be evidenced by a written option agreement between the Company and the Employee specifying the number of shares of Common Stock that may be acquired through its exercise and containing such other terms and conditions that are not inconsistent with the terms of the Plan.

6
 

(b)           Price . Subject to Section 14 of the Plan and Section 422 of the Code, the purchase price per share of Common Stock deliverable upon the exercise of each Incentive Stock Option shall be not less than 100% of the Fair Market Value of the Common Stock on the date the Incentive Stock Option is granted. However, if an Employee owns stock possessing more than 10% of the total combined voting power of all classes of stock of the Company or its Affiliates (or under Section 424(d) of the Code, is deemed to own stock representing more than 10% of the total combined voting power of all classes of stock of the Company or its Affiliates, by reason of the ownership of such classes of stock, directly or indirectly, by or for any brother, sister, spouse, ancestor or lineal descendent of such Employee, or by or for any corporation, partnership, estate or trust of which such Employee is a shareholder, partner or Beneficiary), the purchase price per share of Common Stock deliverable upon the exercise of each Incentive Stock Option shall not be less than 110% of the Fair Market Value of the Common Stock on the date the Incentive Stock Option is granted. Shares may be purchased only upon payment of the full purchase price. Payment of the purchase price may be made, in whole or in part, through the surrender of shares of the Common Stock at the Fair Market Value of such shares determined in the manner described in Section 2.

(c)            Manner of Exercise . The Options may be exercised from time to time, in whole or in part, by delivering a written notice of exercise to the President or Chief Executive Officer of the Company. Such notice is irrevocable and must be accompanied by full payment of the purchase price in cash or shares of previously acquired Common Stock at the Fair Market Value of such shares determined on the exercise date by the manner described in Section 2. If previously acquired shares of Common Stock are tendered in payment of all or part of the exercise price, the Fair Market Value of such shares shall be determined as of the date of such exercise.

(d)           Amounts Options . Subject to the provisions of Section 5, Incentive Stock Options may be granted to any eligible Employee in such amounts as determined by the Committee; provided that the amount granted is consistent with the terms of Section 422 of the Code. In the case of an Option intended to qualify as an Incentive Stock Option, the aggregate Fair Market Value (determined as of the time the Option is granted) of the Common Stock with respect to which Incentive Stock Options granted are exercisable for the first time by the Participant during any calendar year (under all plans of the Company and its Affiliates) shall not exceed $100,000. The provisions of this Section 8.1(d) shall be construed and applied in accordance with Section 422(d) of the Code and the regulations, if any, promulgated thereunder.

(e)            Terms of Options . The term during which each Incentive Stock Option may be exercised shall be determined by the Committee, but in no event shall an Incentive Stock Option be exercisable in whole or in part more than 10 years from the Date of Grant. If any Employee, at the time an Incentive Stock Option is granted to him, owns stock representing more than 10% of the total combined voting power of all classes of stock of the Company or its Affiliate (or, under Section 424(d) of the Code, is deemed to own stock representing more than 10% of the total combined voting power of all classes of stock, by reason of the ownership of such classes of stock, directly or indirectly, by or for any brother, sister, spouse. ancestor or lineal descendent of such Employee, or by or for any corporation, partnership, estate or trust of which such Employee is a shareholder, partner or Beneficiary), the Incentive Stock Option granted to him shall not be exercisable after the expiration of five years from the Date of Grant. No Incentive Stock Option granted under the Plan is transferable except by will or the laws of descent and distribution and is exercisable during his lifetime only by the Employee to which it is granted.

7
 

The Committee shall determine the date on which each Incentive Stock Option shall become exercisable and may provide that an Incentive Stock Option shall become exercisable in installments, provided, however, that Incentive Stock Options granted to Employees on the Effective Date shall vest in five equal annual installments. The shares comprising each installment may be purchased in whole or in part at any time after such installment becomes purchasable, provided that the amount able to be first exercised in a given year is consistent with the terms of Section 422 of the Code. To the extent required by Section 422 of the Code, the aggregate Fair Market Value (determined at the time the option is granted) of the Common Stock for which Incentive Stock Options are exercisable for the first time by a Participant during any calendar year (under all plans of the Company and its Affiliates) shall not exceed $100,000.

The Committee may, in its sole discretion. accelerate the time at which any Incentive Stock Option may be exercised in whole or in part, provided that it is consistent with the terms of Section 422 of the Code. Notwithstanding the above, in the event of a Change in Control of the Company, all Incentive Stock Options that have been awarded shall become immediately exercisable, unless the Fair Market Value of the amount exercisable as a result of a Change in Control shall exceed $100,000 (determined as of the Date of Grant). In such event, the first $100,000 of Incentive Stock Options (determined as of the Date of Grant) shall be exercisable as Incentive Stock Options and any excess shall be exercisable as Non-Statutory Stock Options.

(f)            Termination of Employment . Upon the termination of an Employee’s service for any reason other than Disability, Normal Retirement, Change of Control, death or Termination for Cause, the Employee’s Incentive Stock Options shall be exercisable only as to those shares that were immediately purchasable by such Employee at the date of termination and only for a period of three months following termination. In the event of Termination for Cause all rights under the Incentive Stock Options shall expire upon termination.

In the event of the death or Disability of any Employee, all Incentive Stock Options held by such Employee, whether or not exercisable at such time, shall be exercisable by such Employee or his legal representatives or beneficiaries for one year following the date of death or cessation of employment due to Disability. Upon termination of an Employee’s service due to Normal Retirement or a Change in Control, all Incentive Stock Options held by such Employee, whether or not exercisable at such time, shall be exercisable for a period of one year following the date of his cessation of employment, provided however , that any such Option shall not be eligible for treatment as an Incentive Stock Option in the event such Option is exercised more than three months following the date of his Normal Retirement or termination of employment due to a Change in Control. In no event shall the exercise period extend beyond the expiration of the Incentive Stock Option term.

8
 

(g)           Compliance with Code . The options granted under this Section 8 are intended to qualify as incentive stock options within the meaning of Section 422 of the Code, but the Company makes no warranty as to the qualification of any option as an incentive stock option within the meaning of Section 422 of the Code. If an Option granted hereunder fails for whatever reason to comply with the provisions of Section 422 of the Code, and such failure is not or cannot be cured, such Option shall be a Non-Statutory Stock Option.

9. LIMITED RIGHTS
9.1. Grant of Limited Rights

The Committee may grant a Limited Right simultaneously with the grant of any Option to any Employee of the Bank, with respect to all or some of the shares covered by such Option. Limited Rights granted under the Plan are subject to the following terms and conditions:

(a)            Terms of Rights . In no event shall a Limited Right be exercisable in whole or in part before the expiration of six months from the date of grant of the Limited Right. A Limited Right may be exercised only in the event of a Change in Control of the Company.

The Limited Right may be exercised only when the underlying Option is eligible to be exercised, provided that the Fair Market Value of the underlying shares on the day of exercise is greater than the exercise price of the related Option.

Upon exercise of a Limited Right, the related Option shall cease to be exercisable. Upon exercise or termination of an Option, any related Limited Rights shall terminate. The Limited Rights may be for no more than 100% of the difference between the exercise price and the Fair Market Value of the Common Stock subject to the underlying Option. The Limited Right is transferable only when the underlying Option is transferable and under the same conditions.

(b)           Payment . Upon exercise of a Limited Right, the holder shall promptly receive from the Company an amount of cash equal to the difference between the Fair Market Value on the Date of Grant of the related Option and the Fair Market Value of the underlying shares on the date the Limited Right is exercised, multiplied by the number of shares with respect to which such Limited Right is being exercised. In the event of a Change in Control in which pooling accounting treatment is a condition to the transaction, the Limited Right shall be exercisable solely for shares of stock of the Company, or in the event of a merger transaction, for shares of the acquiring corporation or its parent, as applicable. The number of shares to be received on the exercise of such Limited Right shall be determined by dividing the amount of cash that would have been available under the first sentence above by the Fair Market Value at the time of exercise of the shares underlying the Option subject to the Limited Right.

9
 
10. SURRENDER OPTION

In the event of a Participant’s termination of employment or termination of service as a result of death, Disability or Normal Retirement, the Participant (or his or her personal representative(s), heir(s), or devisee(s)) may, in a form acceptable to the Committee make application to surrender all or part of the Options held by such Participant in exchange for a cash payment from the Company of an amount equal to the difference between the Fair Market Value of the Common Stock on the date of termination of employment or the date of termination of service on the Board and the exercise price per share of the Option on the Date of Grant. Whether the Company accepts such application or determines to make payment, in whole or part, is within its absolute and sole discretion, it being expressly understood that the Company is under no obligation to any Participant whatsoever to make such payments. In the event that the Company accepts such application and determines to make payment, such payment shall be in lieu of the exercise of the underlying Option and such Option shall cease to be exercisable.

11. RIGHTS OF A STOCKHOLDER

A Participant shall have no rights as a stockholder with respect to any shares covered by a Non-Statutory and/or Incentive Stock Option until the date of issuance of a stock certificate for such shares. Nothing in the Plan or in any Award granted confers on any person any right to continue in the employ of the Company or its Affiliates or to continue to perform services for the Company or its Affiliates or interferes in any way with the right of the Company or its Affiliates to terminate his services as an officer, director or employee at any time.

12. AGREEMENT WITH PARTICIPANTS

Each Award of Options, and/or Limited Rights will be evidenced by a written agreement, executed by the Participant and the Company or its Affiliates that describes the conditions for receiving the Awards including the date of Award, the purchase price, applicable periods, and any other terms and conditions as may be required by the Board or applicable securities law.

13. DESIGNATION OF BENEFICIARY

A Participant may, with the consent of the Committee, designate a person or persons to receive, in the event of death, any stock option or Limited Rights Award to which he would then be entitled. Such designation will be made upon forms supplied by and delivered to the Company and may be revoked in writing. If a Participant fails effectively to designate a Beneficiary, then his estate will be deemed to be the Beneficiary.

14. DILUTION AND OTHER ADJUSTMENTS

In the event of any change in the outstanding shares of Common Stock by reason of any stock dividend or split, pro rata return of capital to all shareholders, recapitalization, merger, consolidation, spin-off, reorganization, combination or exchange of shares, or other similar corporate change, or other increase or decrease in such shares without receipt or payment of consideration by the Company, the Committee will make such adjustments to previously granted Awards, to prevent dilution or enlargement of the rights of the Participant, including any or all of the following:

10
 
(a) adjustments in the aggregate number or kind of shares of Common Stock that may be awarded under the Plan;
(b) adjustments in the aggregate number or kind of shares of Common Stock covered by Awards already made under the Plan; or
(c) adjustments in the purchase price of outstanding Incentive and/or Non-Statutory Stock Options, or any Limited Rights attached to such Options.

No such adjustments may, however, materially change the value of benefits available to a Participant under a previously granted Award. With respect to Incentive Stock Options, no such adjustment shall be made if it would be deemed a “modification” of the Award under Section 424 of the Code.

15. WITHHOLDING

There may be deducted from each distribution of cash and/or Common Stock under the Plan the amount of tax required by any governmental authority to he withheld.

16. AMENDMENT OF THE PLAN

The Board may at any time, and from time to time, modify or amend the Plan in any respect with regard to Awards received by Employees or Outside Directors; provided however , that no such termination, modification or amendment may affect the rights of a Participant, without his consent, under an outstanding Award. Any amendment or modification of the Plan or an outstanding Award under the Plan, including but not limited to the acceleration of vesting of an outstanding Award for reasons other than death, Disability, Normal Retirement, or a Change in Control, shall be approved by the Committee or the full Board of the Company.

17. EFFECTIVE DATE OF PLAN

The Plan shall become effective upon the Effective Date.

18. TERMINATION OF THE PLAN

The right to grant Awards under the Plan will terminate upon the earlier of (i) 10 years after the Effective Date, or (ii) the date on which the exercise of Options or related rights equaling the maximum number of shares reserved under the Plan occurs, as set forth in Section 5. The Board may suspend or terminate the Plan at any time, provided that no such action will, without the consent of a Participant, adversely affect his rights under a previously granted Award.

11
 
19. APPLICABLE LAW

The Plan will be administered in accordance with the laws of the State of Delaware.

12

 

CAROLINA FINANCIAL CORPORATION

2006 RECOGNITION AND RETENTION PLAN

1.             Establishment of the Plan

Carolina Financial Corporation (the “Company”) hereby establishes the Carolina Financial Corporation 2006 Recognition and Retention Plan (the “Plan”) upon the terms and conditions hereinafter stated in the Plan.

2.             Purpose of the Plan

The purpose of the Plan is to advance the interests of the Company, the Company’s stockholders and the Company’s Affiliates, including Community FirstBank of Charleston (“Community FirstBank”) and Crescent Bank, by providing Key Employees and Outside Directors of the Company and its Affiliates, upon whose judgment, initiative and efforts the successful conduct of the business of the Company and its Affiliates largely depends, with compensation for their contributions to the Company and its Affiliates and an additional incentive to perform in a superior manner, as well as to attract people of experience and ability.

3.             Definitions

The following words and phrases, when used in this Plan with an initial capital letter, unless the context clearly indicates otherwise, shall have the meanings set forth below. Wherever appropriate, the masculine pronoun shall include the feminine pronoun and the singular shall include the plural:

Affiliate ” means any “parent corporation” or “subsidiary corporation” of the Company or the Bank, as such terms are defined in Section 424(e) and (f), respectively, of the Code, or a successor to a parent corporation or subsidiary corporation. The term “Affiliate” shall include, by way of example but not limitation, each of Community FirstBank and Crescent Bank.

Award ” means the grant by the Committee of Restricted Stock, as provided in the Plan.

Beneficiary ” means the person or persons designated by a Recipient to receive any benefits payable under the Plan in the event of such Recipient’s death. Such person or persons shall be designated in writing on forms provided for this purpose by the Committee and may be changed from time to time by similar written notice to the Committee. In the absence of a written designation, the Beneficiary shall be the Recipient’s surviving spouse, if any, or if none, his estate.

Board ” or “ Board of Directors ” means the Board of Directors of the Company.

1
 

Cause ” means personal dishonesty, willful misconduct, any breach of fiduciary duty involving personal profit, intentional failure to perform stated duties, or the willful violation of any law, rule or regulation (other than traffic violations or similar offenses) or a final cease-and-desist order, any of which results in a material loss to the Company or an Affiliate.

Change in Control ” means (1) an event of a nature that (i) results in a change in control of the Company within the meaning of the applicable federal and state statutes governing the acquisition of control of the Company, and applicable regulations promulgated thereunder as in effect on the date hereof, or (ii) would be required to be reported in response to Item 5.01 of the current report on Form 8-K, as in effect on the date hereof, pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (the “Exchange Act”), assuming such provisions apply to the Company; (2) any person (as the term is used in Sections 13(d) and 14(d) of the Exchange Act) is or becomes the beneficial owner (as defined in Rule 13d-3 under the Exchange Act), directly or indirectly of securities of the Company representing 25% or more of the Company’s outstanding securities; (3) individuals who are members of Incumbent Board (as defined below) cease for any reason to constitute at least a majority thereof, (4) a reorganization, merger, consolidation, sale of all or substantially all of the assets of the Company or a similar transaction in which the Company is not the resulting entity; or (5) a proxy statement is distributed that solicits proxies from stockholders of the Company, by someone other than the current management of the Company, seeking stockholder approval of a plan of reorganization, merger or consolidation as a result of which the outstanding shares of the class of securities then subject to such plan are exchanged for or converted into cash or property or securities not issued by the Company. The term “Change in Control” shall not include an acquisition of securities by an employee benefit plan of the Company or an Affiliate or the acquisition of securities of the Company in connection with a stock offering of the Company. In the application of the applicable statutes to a determination of a Change in Control, determinations shall be made by the Board of Directors. For purposes of this definition, “Incumbent Board” means the Board of Directors of the Company on the date hereof, provided that any person becoming a director subsequent to the date hereof whose election was approved by a vote of at least three-quarters of the directors comprising the Incumbent Board, or whose nomination for election by stockholders was approved by the nominating committee serving under an Incumbent Board, shall be considered as though he were a member of the Incumbent Board.

Code ” means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.

Committee ” means a Committee of the Board the members of whom shall be determined by the board in their sole discretion, provided that prior to any registration by the Company of any class if its securities under Section 12 of the Exchange Act, the Committee shall be modified to consist only of either (i) at least two Non-Employee Directors of the Company, or (ii) the entire Board of the Company.

Common Stock ” means shares of the common stock of the Company, par value $.01 per share.

2
 

Company ” means Carolina Financial Corporation, or a successor corporation.

Continuous Service ” means employment as a Key Employee and/or service as an Outside Director without any interruption or termination of such employment and/or service. Continuous Service shall also mean a continuation as a member of the Board of Directors following a cessation of employment as a Key Employee or continuation of service as a Director Emeritus following termination of service as a Director. In the case of a Key Employee, employment shall not be considered interrupted in the case of sick leave, military leave or any other leave of absence approved by the Company or an Affiliate or in the case of transfers between payroll locations of the Company or an Affiliate between the Bank, its parent, its subsidiaries or its successor.

Director ” means a member of the Board.

Disability ” means the permanent and total inability by reason of mental or physical infirmity, or both, of an employee to perform the work customarily assigned to him/her, or of a Director or Outside Director to serve as such. Additionally, in the case of an employee, a medical doctor selected or approved by the Board must advise the Committee that it is either not possible to determine when such Disability will terminate or that it appears probable that such Disability will be permanent during the remainder of such employee’s lifetime.

Effective Date ” means the date of, or a date determined by the Board following, approval of the Plan by the Company’s stockholders.

Key Employee ” means any person who is currently employed by the Company or an Affiliate who is chosen by the Committee to participate in the Plan.

Non-Employee Director ” means, for purposes of the Plan, a Director who (a) is not employed by the Company or an Affiliate; (b) does not receive compensation directly or indirectly as a consultant (or in any other capacity than as a Director) greater than $60,000; (c) does not have an interest in a transaction requiring disclosure under the standards set forth for publicly-traded companies under Item 404(a) of Regulation S-K; or (d) is not engaged in a business relationship for which disclosure under the standards set forth for publicly-traded companies would be required pursuant to Item 404(b) of Regulation S-K.

Normal Retirement ” means retirement on or after age sixty-five (65) unless another age for Normal Retirement is specified by the Committee in connection with an Award.

Outside Director ” means a Director of the Company or an Affiliate who is not an employee of the Company or an Affiliate.

Recipient ” means a Key Employee or Outside Director of the Company or its Affiliates who receives or has received an Award under the Plan.

3
 

Restricted Period ” means the period of time selected by the Committee for the purpose of determining when restrictions are in effect under Section 6 with respect to Restricted Stock awarded under the Plan.

Restricted Stock ” means shares of Common Stock that have been contingently awarded to a Recipient by the Committee subject to the restrictions referred to in Section 6, so long as such restrictions are in effect.

4.             Administration of the Plan

(a)            Role of the Committee . The Plan shall be administered by the Committee. The interpretation and construction by the Committee of any provisions of the Plan or of any Award granted hereunder shall be final and binding. The Committee shall act by vote or written consent of a majority of its members. Subject to the express provisions and limitations of the Plan and subject to regulations and policy of the Federal Reserve Board and other applicable bank regulators, the Committee may adopt such rules and procedures as it deems appropriate for the conduct of its affairs. The Committee shall report its actions and decisions with respect to the Plan to the Board at appropriate times, but in no event less than one time per calendar year.

(b)           Role of the Board . The members of the Committee shall be appointed or approved by, and will serve at the pleasure of, the Board of Directors of the Company. The Board may in its discretion from time to time remove members from, or add members to, the Committee. The Board shall have all of the powers allocated to it in the Plan, may take any action under or with respect to the Plan that the Committee is authorized to take, and may reverse or override any action taken or decision made by the Committee under or with respect to the Plan, provided , however , that except as provided in Section 6(b), the Board may not revoke any Award except in the event of revocation for Cause.

(c)            Plan Administration Restrictions . All transactions involving a grant, award or other acquisitions from the Company shall, to the extent applicable:

(i) be approved by the Company’s full Board or by the Committee;
(ii) be approved, or ratified, in compliance with the standards for publicly traded companies set forth in Section 14 of the Exchange Act, by either: the affirmative vote of the holders of a majority of the shares present, or represented and entitled to vote at a meeting duly held in accordance with the laws under which the Company is incorporated; or the written consent of the holders of a majority of the securities of the issuer entitled to vote, provided that such ratification occurs no later than the date of the next annual meeting of stockholders; or
(iii) result in the acquisition of Common Stock that is held by the Recipient for a period of six months following the date of such acquisition.

4
 

(d)           Limitation on Liability . No member of the Board or the Committee shall be liable for any determination made in good faith with respect to the Plan or any Awards granted under it. If a member of the Board or the Committee is a party or is threatened to be made a party to any threatened, pending or completed action, suit or proceeding, whether civil, criminal, administrative or investigative, by reason of anything done or not done by him/her in such capacity under or with respect to the Plan, the Company shall indemnify such member against expense (including attorneys’ fees), judgments, fines and amounts paid in settlement actually and reasonably incurred by him/her in connection with such action, suit or proceeding if he/she acted in good faith and in a manner he/she reasonably believed to be in the best interests of the Company or its Affiliates and, with respect to any criminal action or proceeding, had no reasonable cause to believe his conduct was unlawful.

5.             Eligibility; Awards

(a)            Eligibility . Key Employees and Outside Directors are eligible to receive Awards.

(b)           Awards to Key Employees and Outside Directors . The Committee may determine which of the Key Employees and Outside Directors referenced in Section 5(a) will be granted Awards and the number of shares covered by each Award; provided , however , that in no event shall any Awards be made that will violate the Company’s Certificate of Incorporation and Bylaws, or any applicable federal or state law or regulation. Shares of Restricted Stock that are awarded by the Committee shall, on the date of the Award, be registered in the name of the Recipient and transferred to the Recipient, in accordance with the terms and conditions established under the Plan. Subject to adjustments pursuant to Section 7 hereof. The aggregate number of shares that shall be issued under the Plan is 60,000 shares. Awards issued under the Plan may be issued by the Company from authorized but unissued shares, treasury shares or shares acquired by the Company in open market purchases.

(c)            In the event Restricted Stock is forfeited for any reason, the Committee, from time to time, may determine which of the Key Employees and Outside Directors will be granted additional Awards to be awarded from forfeited Restricted Stock.

(d)           In selecting those Key Employees and Outside Directors to whom Awards will be granted and the amount of Restricted Stock covered by such Awards, the Committee shall consider such factors as it deems relevant, including among others, the position and responsibilities of the Key Employees and Outside Directors, the length and value of their services to the Company and its Affiliates, the compensation paid to the Key Employees or fees paid to the Outside Directors, and the Committee may request the written recommendation of the Chief Executive Officer and other senior executive officers of the Company and its Affiliates or the recommendation of the full Board. All allocations by the Committee shall be subject to review, and approval or rejection, by the Board.

No Restricted Stock shall be vested unless the Recipient maintains Continuous Service with the Company or an Affiliate until the restrictions lapse.

5
 

(e)            Manner of Award . As promptly as practicable after a determination is made pursuant to Section 5(b) to grant an Award, the Committee shall notify the Recipient in writing of the grant of the Award, the number of shares of Restricted Stock covered by the Award, and the terms upon which the Restricted Stock subject to the Award may be vested. Upon notification of an Award of Restricted Stock, the Recipient shall execute and return to the Company a restricted stock agreement (the “Restricted Stock Agreement”) setting forth the terms and conditions under which the Recipient shall earn the Restricted Stock, together with a stock power or stock powers endorsed in blank. Thereafter, unless issued in electronic form in the manner contemplated by Section 6(e) hereof, the Recipient’s Restricted Stock and stock power shall be deposited with an escrow agent specified by the Company (“Escrow Agent”) who shall hold such Restricted Stock under the terms and conditions set forth in the Restricted Stock Agreement. Each certificate in respect of shares of Restricted Stock Awarded under the Plan shall be registered in the name of the Recipient.

(f)            Treatment of Forfeited Shares . In the event shares of Restricted Stock are forfeited by a Recipient, such shares shall be returned to the Company and shall be held and accounted for pursuant to the terms of the Plan until such time as the Restricted Stock is re-awarded to another Recipient, in accordance with the terms of the Plan and the applicable state and federal laws, rules and regulations.

6.             Terms and Conditions of Restricted Stock

The Committee shall have full and complete authority, subject to other limitations of the Plan, to grant awards of Restricted Stock to Key Employees and Outside Directors and, in addition to the terms and conditions contained in Sections 6(a) through 6(h), to provide such other terms and conditions (which need not be identical among Recipients) in respect of such Awards, and the vesting thereof, as the Committee shall determine.

(a)            General Rules . Restricted Stock shall vest in a Recipient at the rate or rates determined by the Committee, provided that such Recipient maintains Continuous Service. Subject to any such other terms and conditions as the Committee shall provide with respect to Awards, shares of Restricted Stock may not be sold, assigned, transferred, pledged or otherwise encumbered by the Recipient, except as hereinafter provided, during the Restricted Period.

(b)           Continuous Service; Forfeiture . Except as provided in Section 6(c), if a Recipient ceases to maintain Continuous Service for any reason, unless the Committee shall otherwise determine, all shares of Restricted Stock theretofore awarded to such Recipient and which at the time of such termination of Continuous Service are subject to the restrictions imposed by Section 6(a) shall upon such termination of Continuous Service be forfeited. Any stock dividends or declared but unpaid cash dividends attributable to such shares of Restricted Stock shall also be forfeited.

(c)            Exception for Termination Due to Death, Disability, Normal Retirement or Following a Change in Control . Notwithstanding the general rule contained in Section 6(a), Restricted Stock awarded to a Recipient whose Continuous Service with the Company or an Affiliate terminates due to death, Disability, Normal Retirement or following a Change in Control, shall be deemed earned as of the Recipient’s last day of Continuous Service with the Company or an Affiliate.

6
 

(d)           Revocation for Cause . Notwithstanding anything hereinafter to the contrary, the Board may by resolution immediately revoke, rescind and terminate any Award, or portion thereof, previously awarded under the Plan, to the extent Restricted Stock has not been redelivered by the Escrow Agent to the Recipient, whether or not yet vested, in the case of a Key Employee whose employment is terminated by the Company or an Affiliate or an Outside Director whose service is terminated by the Company or an Affiliate for Cause or who is discovered after termination of employment or service on the Board to have engaged in conduct that would have justified termination for Cause.

(e)            Restricted Stock Legend . Each certificate in respect of shares of Restricted Stock awarded under the Plan shall be registered in the name of the Recipient and deposited by the Recipient, together with a stock power endorsed in blank, with the Escrow Agent, and shall bear the following (or a similar) legend:

“The transferability of this certificate and the shares of stock represented hereby are subject to the terms and conditions (including forfeiture) contained in the Carolina Financial Corporation 2006 Recognition and Retention Plan. Copies of such Plan are on file in the offices of the Secretary of Carolina Financial Corporation, 288 Meeting Street, Charleston, South Carolina 29401.”

Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Company may in its sole discretion issue Restricted Stock Awards in any other approved format (e.g., electronically or in book entry form) in order to facilitate the paperless transfer of such Awards. In the event Restricted Stock Awards are not issued in certificate form, the Company and the transfer agent shall maintain appropriate bookkeeping entries that evidence Participants’ ownership of such Awards. Restricted Stock Awards that are not issued in certificate form shall be subject to the same terms and conditions of this Plan, including Section 6(f) and 6(g), as any Restricted Stock Awards granted in certificated form.

(f)            Payment of Dividends and Return of Capital . After an Award has been granted but before such Award has been vested, the Recipient shall receive any cash dividends paid with respect to such shares, or shall share in any pro-rata return of capital to all stockholders with respect to the Common Stock. Stock dividends declared by the Company and paid on Awards that have not yet been vested shall be subject to the same restrictions as the Restricted Stock and the certificate(s) or other instruments representing or evidencing such shares shall be legended in the manner provided in Section 6(e) and shall be delivered to the Escrow Agent for distribution to the Recipient when the Restricted Stock upon which such dividends were paid are vested. Unless the Recipient has made an election under Section 83(b) of the Code, cash dividends or other amounts so paid on shares that have not yet been vested by the Recipient shall be treated as compensation income to the Recipient when paid. If dividends are paid with respect to shares of Restricted Stock under the Plan that have been forfeited and returned to the Company or to a trust established to hold issued and unawarded or forfeited shares, the Committee can determine to award such dividends to any Recipient or Recipients under the Plan, to any other employee or director of the Company or an Affiliate, or can return such dividends to the Company.

7
 

(g)           Voting of Restricted Shares . After an Award has been granted, the Recipient as conditional owner of the Restricted Stock shall have the right to vote such shares.

(h)           Delivery of Vested Shares . At the expiration of the restrictions imposed by Section 6(a), the Escrow Agent shall redeliver to the Recipient (or where the relevant provision of Section 6(c) applies in the case of a deceased Recipient, to his Beneficiary) the certificate(s) and any remaining stock power deposited with it pursuant to Section 5(f) and the shares represented by such certificate(s) shall be free of the restrictions referred to in Section 6(a). Notwithstanding the foregoing, if the Restricted Stock has been issued in electronic form, the Company shall have transferred to the Recipient or the Recipient’s brokerage account, in any acceptable from or elected by the Recipient, the Common Stock, free of any restrictions.

(i)             Valuation of Restricted Stock . The fair market value of the Restricted Stock shall be determined solely in the discretion of the Committee by the reasonable application of a reasonable valuation method. Factors to be considered under a reasonable valuation method include as applicable, but are not limited to:

(i) the value of tangible and intangible assets of the Company;
(ii) the present value of future cash-flows of the Company;
(iii) the market value of stock or equity interests in similar corporations and other entities engages in trades or businesses substantially similar to those engaged in by the corporation whose stock is to be valued, the value of which can be readily determined though objective means (such as through trading prices on an established securities market or an amount paid in an arm’s length private transaction);
(iv) the Company’s prospective earning power and dividend-paying capacity; and
(v) other relevant factors such as (1) the good will of the business, (2) the economic outlook in the Company’s industry, (3) the Company’s position in the industry and its management, (4) the degree of control of the business represented by the block of stock to be valued, (5) control premiums or discounts for lack of marketability; and (6) whether the valuation method is used for other purposes that have a material economic effect on the Company.

8
 

7.             Adjustments upon Changes in Capitalization

In the event of any change in the outstanding shares subsequent to the Effective Date by reason of any reorganization, recapitalization, stock split, stock dividend, combination or exchange of shares, or any merger, consolidation or any change in the corporate structure or shares of the Company, without receipt or payment of consideration by the Company, the maximum aggregate number and class of shares as to which Awards may be granted under the Plan shall be appropriately adjusted by the Committee, whose determination shall be conclusive. Any shares of stock or other securities received, as a result of any of the foregoing, by a Recipient with respect to Restricted Stock shall be subject to the same restrictions and the certificate(s) or other instruments representing or evidencing such shares or securities shall be legended and deposited with the Escrow Agent in the manner provided in Section 6(e).

8.             Assignments and Transfers

No Award nor any right or interest of a Recipient under the Plan in any instrument evidencing any Award under the Plan may be assigned, encumbered or transferred (within the meaning of Code Section 83) except, in the event of the death of a Recipient, by will or the laws of descent and distribution until such Award is vested.

9.             Key Employee Rights under the Plan

No Key Employee shall have a right to be selected as a Recipient nor, having been so selected, to be selected again as a Recipient and no Key Employee or other person shall have any claim or right to be granted an Award under the Plan or under any other incentive or similar plan of the Company or any Affiliate. Neither the Plan nor any action taken thereunder shall be construed as giving any Key Employee any right to be retained in the employ of the Company or any Affiliate.

10.          Outside Director Rights under the Plan

Neither the Plan nor any action taken thereunder shall be construed as giving any Outside Director any right to be retained in the service of the Company or any Affiliate.

11.          Withholding Tax

Upon the termination of the Restricted Period with respect to any shares of Restricted Stock (or at any such earlier time that an election is made by the Recipient under Section 83(b) of the Code, or any successor provision thereto, to include the value of such shares in taxable income), the Company or its Affiliate, as applicable, shall have the right to require the Recipient or other person receiving such shares to pay the Company the minimum amount of any federal or state taxes, including payroll taxes, that are applicable to such supplemental income and that the Company or an Affiliate is required to withhold with respect to such shares, or, in lieu thereof, to retain or sell without notice, a sufficient number of shares held by it to cover the amount required to be withheld. The Company shall have the right to deduct from all dividends paid with respect to shares of Restricted Stock the amount of any taxes which the Company or one of its Affiliates is required to withhold with respect to such dividend payments.

9
 

12.          Amendment or Termination

The Board of the Company may amend, suspend or terminate the Plan or any portion thereof at any time, provided , however , that no such amendment, suspension or termination shall impair the rights of any Recipient, without his consent, in any Award theretofore made pursuant to the Plan. Any amendment or modification of the Plan or an outstanding Award under the Plan, shall be approved by the Committee, or the full Board of the Company.

13.          Governing Law

This Plan, the Awards, all documents evidencing Awards and all other related documents shall be governed by, and will be construed and administered in accordance with the laws of the State of Delaware, except to the extent that federal law shall apply.

14.          Term of Plan

The Plan shall become effective on the date of, or a date determined by the Board of Directors. It shall continue in effect until the earlier of (i) ten years from the Effective Date unless sooner terminated under Section 12 hereof, or (ii) the date on which all shares of Common Stock available for award hereunder, have vested in the Recipients of such Awards.

10

 

 

CAROLINA FINANCIAL CORPORATION

2013 EQUITY INCENTIVE PLAN

Section 1. General Purpose of Plan; Definitions.

The name of this plan is the Carolina Financial Corporation 2013 Equity Incentive Plan (the “Plan”). The Plan was approved by the Board of Directors on January 16, 2013 (the “ Effective Date ”) and subsequently adopted by the shareholders of the Carolina Financial Corporation on April 24, 2013. The purpose of the Plan is to enable the Company and its Subsidiaries to attract and retain highly qualified personnel who will contribute to the Company’s success and to provide incentives to Participants to increase shareholder value and therefore further align the interests of the Participants with those of the shareholders to benefit all shareholders of the Company.

For purposes of the Plan, the following terms shall be defined as set forth below:

(a) “ Administrator ” means the Board and/or the Committee, as the case may be, to the extent that it administers the Plan, as set forth in Section 2 below.

(b) “ Award ” means any award granted under the Plan as further described in Sections 6 and 7 below.

(c) “ Award Agreement ” means, with respect to each Award, the signed written agreement between the Company and the Participant setting forth the terms and conditions applicable to the Award.

(d) “ Board ” means the Board of Directors of the Company.

(e) “ Cause ” shall mean with respect to the Company or Participating Employer which employs the Participant or for which such Participant primarily performs services, termination because of personal dishonesty, incompetence, willful misconduct, any breach of fiduciary duty involving personal profit, intentional failure to perform stated duties, willful violation of any law, rule, or regulation (other than traffic violations, regulations that do not adversely affect the Company or its employees, or similar offenses) or final cease-and-desist order, or material breach of any provision of an agreement with the Company. In determining incompetence, the acts or omissions shall be measured against standards generally prevailing in the community banking industry. No act or failure to act shall be considered “willful” unless done, or omitted to be done, not in good faith and without reasonable belief that the Participant’s action or omission was in the best interest of the Company. The determination of “Cause” may be made by the Administrator solely for purposes of this Plan and without regard to any other purpose of the Company.

(f) “ Change in Control ” means the first to occur of any one of the events:

 
 

(i) the date any Person (as such term is defined in Section 3(a)(9) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (the “Exchange Act”) and as used in Sections 13(d)(3) and 14(d)(2) of the Exchange Act) or more than one Person acting as a group (as determined under Treasury Regulation §1.409A-3(i)(5)(v)(B), acquires ownership of the stock of the Company that, together with stock held by such Person or group, constitutes more than 50 percent of the total fair market value or total voting power of the stock of such Company;

(ii) the date any one Person, or more than one Person acting as a group (as defined under Treasury Regulation §1.409A-3(i)(5)(v)(B)), acquires (or has acquired during the 12-month period ending on the date of the most recent acquisition by such Person or Persons) ownership of stock of the corporation possessing 30 percent or more of the total voting power of the stock of such corporation;

(iii) the date individuals who, as of the Effective Date, constituted the Board (the “Incumbent Board”) cease for any reason to constitute at least a majority of the Board; provided , however , that any individual becoming a director subsequent to the Effective Date whose election, or nomination for election by the Company’s shareholders, was approved by a vote of at least two-thirds of the directors then comprising the Incumbent Board (either by a specific vote or by approval of the proxy statement of the Company in which such person is named as a nominee for director, without objection to such nomination) shall be considered as though such individual were a member-of the Incumbent Board, but excluding or this purpose any such individual whose initial assumption of office occurs as a result of either an actual or threatened election contest or other actual or threatened solicitation of proxies or consents by or on behalf of a Person other than the Board; or

(iv) the date that any Person or more than one Person acting as a group (as defined under Treasury Regulation §1.409A-3(i)(5)(v)(B)) acquires (or has acquired during the 12-month period ending on the date of the most recent acquisition by such Person or Persons) assets from the Company that have a total gross fair market value equal to or more than 40 percent of the total gross fair market value of all assets of the Company immediately before such acquisition or acquisitions; or

(g) “ Code ” means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986 or any successor thereto.

(h) “ Committee ” means the Compensation Committee of the Board or, if applicable, any other committee the Board may appoint to administer the Plan. If at any time or to any extent the Board shall not administer the Plan, then the functions of the Board specified in the Plan may be exercised by the Committee. The Committee shall be comprised of three or more “outside” directors, within the meaning of section 162(m) of the Internal Revenue Code, who are also “non-employee directors” as defined in Rule 16b-3 under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 and “independent directors” as defined by NASDAQ Listing Rule 5605(a)(2).

 
 

(i) “ Common Stock ” or “ Stock ” means the common stock, par value $0.01 per share, of the Company.

(j) “ Company ” means Carolina Financial Corporation, a Delaware corporation (or any successor corporation that assumes this Plan, either contractually or by operation of law).

(k) “ Eligible Recipient ” means an officer, director, employee, consultant, or advisor of the Company or any subsidiary.

(l) “ Exercise Price ” means the per. Share price at which a Participant holding an Award of Options may purchase Shares issuable with respect to such Award of Options, if any.

(m) “ Fair Market Value ” on any date shall mean:

(i) if the Common Stock is readily tradable on an established securities market (as defined in Treasury Regulation §1.897-1(m)), the closing sales price of the Common Stock on such date on the securities exchange having the greatest volume of trading in the Common Stock during the 30-day period preceding the day the value is to be determined or, if there is no reported closing sales price on such date, the next preceding date on which there was a reported closing price; or

(ii) if the Common Stock also is not traded on the over-the-counter market (as defined in Treasury Regulation §1.897-1(m)), the fair market value as determined in good faith by the Board or the Committee by application of a reasonable valuation method consistently applied and taking into consideration all available information material to the value of the Company; factors to be considered may include, as applicable, independent third party valuations of the Common Stock, trading activity of the Common Stock known by the Board or the Committee, whether on the over-the-counter market or through private transactions, the value of the tangible and intangible assets of the Company, the present value of future cash-flows of the Company, the market value of stock or equity interests in similar corporations which can be readily determined through objective means (such as through trading prices on an established securities market or an amount paid in an arm’s length private transaction), and other relevant factors such as control premiums or discounts for lack of marketability. For purposes of the foregoing, a valuation prepared in accordance with any of the methods set forth in Treasury Regulation § 1.409A-1(b)(5)(iv)(B)(2) consistently used, shall be rebuttably presumed to result in a reasonable valuation. This paragraph is intended to comply with the definition of “fair market value” contained in Treasury Regulation § 1.409A-1(b)(5)(iv) and should be interpreted consistently therewith.

 
 

(n) “ Grant Date ” means the later of (a) the date on which the Administrator completes the corporate action authorizing the grant of an Award or such later date specified by the Administrator or (b) the date on which all conditions precedent to an Award have been satisfied, provided that conditions to the exercisability or vesting of Awards shall not defer the Grant Date.

(o) “ Incentive Stock Option ” or “ ISO ” means any Option intended to qualify as an “incentive stock option” within the meaning of Section 422 of the Code.

(p) “ Nonqualified Stock Option ” or “ NOSO ” means any Option that is not an Incentive Stock Option, including any Option that provides (as of the time such Option is granted) that it will not be treated as an Incentive Stock Option.

(q) “ Option ” means an option to purchase Shares granted pursuant to Section 6 of the Plan.

(r) “ Participant ” means any Eligible Recipient selected by the Administrator, pursuant to the Administrator’s authority in Section 2 of the Plan, to receive an Award.

(s) “ Participating Employer ” means any member of the following group, which includes the Company, if such member agrees, in writing, to be bound by the terms of the Plan:

(i) a controlled group of corporations, within the meaning of Code Section 414(b),

(ii) a group of trades or businesses under common control, within the meaning of Code Section 414(c),

(iii) an affiliated service group, within the meaning of Code Section 414(m), or

(iv) a trade or business required to be aggregated pursuant to Code Section 414(o).

Each Participating Employer is identified in Appendix A. The Company shall amend Appendix A as needed to reflect a Participating Employer ‘s adoption of the Plan or withdrawal from the Plan, without any need to otherwise amend the Plan. Amendment of Appendix A may be made by any authorized officer or designated representative of the Company and shall not require approval of the Board.

 
 

(t) “ Performance Goals ” means the restrictions, based upon the achievement of performance goals, established by the Administrator. Such Performance Goals may be based upon any individual Participant or Company criteria or metric that the Administrator may determine. Performance for any goal can be measured on an absolute basis (i.e., versus the Company’s budget or prior year result) or relative to a peer group or industry index, as well as over a 1-year or multi-year period. In any event, the Administrator shall have the authority to adjust any Performance Goal for unusual or non-recurring events in any manner permitted under Section 162(m) of the Code.

(u) “ Performance Period ” is a period not less than one calendar year, beginning not earlier than the year in which such Performance Award is granted, which may be referred to herein and by the Administrator by use of the calendar year in which a particular Performance Period commences; provided however that the Administrator shall have the authority to adjust a Performance Period for unusual or non-recurring events to a period of not less than six months.

(v) “ Permanent and Total Disability ” shall have the same meaning as given to that term by Treasury Regulation Section 1.409A-3(i)(4) and any regulations or rulings promulgated thereunder.

(w) “ Qualified Domestic Relations Order ” shall-have the-meaning-set forth in the Code or in the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, or the rules and regulations promulgated under the Code or such Act.

(x) “ Restricted Stock ” means Shares subject to certain restrictions granted pursuant to Section 7 of the Plan.

(y) “ Shares ” means shares of Common Stock reserved for issuance under the Plan, as adjusted pursuant to Sections 3 or 4 of the Plan, and any successor security.

(z) “ Substitute Awards ” means Awards granted or shares of Common Stock issued by the Company in substitution or exchange for awards previously granted by an Acquired Entity.

(aa) “ Treasury Regulations ” means regulations promulgated by the United States Department of Treasury pursuant to the Code, including proposed or temporary regulations as applicable.

Section 2. Administration.

The Plan shall be administered by the Administrator (unless and to the extent that the Board directs the Committee not to administer the Plan). Pursuant to the terms of the Plan, the Board or the Committee, as the case may be from time to time, shall serve as the Administrator and shall have the power and authority:

(a) to select those Eligible Recipients who shall be Participants;

 
 

(b) to determine whether and the extent to which Awards are to be granted to Participants under the Plan;

(c) to determine the number of Shares to be covered by or subject to each Award granted under the Plan;

(d) to determine the terms and conditions, not inconsistent with the terms of the Plan, of each Award granted under the Plan; and

(e) to determine the terms and conditions, not inconsistent with the terms of the Plan, that shall govern all written instruments evidencing Awards granted under the Plan, including Award Agreements.

The Administrator shall have the authority, in its sole discretion, to: adopt, alter, and repeal such administrative rules, guidelines and practices governing the Plan as it shall from time to time deem advisable; correct any defect, supply any omission, reconcile any inconsistency, and resolve any ambiguity in, and otherwise interpret, the terms and provisions of the Plan and any Award issued under the Plan (and any Award Agreement relating thereto); and otherwise supervise the administration of the Plan. All decisions made by the Administrator pursuant to the provisions of the Plan shall be final, conclusive and binding on all persons, including the Company and the Participants.

Notwithstanding the above, and subject to Sections 3, 4, 6, 8, 9, and 12, outstanding Options granted under the Plan shall not be repriced without approval by the Company’s shareholders. In particular, neither the Board nor the Administrator may take any action: (1) to amend the terms of an outstanding Option to reduce the Exercise Price thereof, cancel an Option and replace it with a new Option with a lower Exercise Price, or that has an economic effect that is the same as any such reduction or cancellation or (2) to cancel an outstanding Option having an Exercise Price above the then-current Fair Market Value of the Stock in exchange for the grant of another type of Award, without, in each such case, first obtaining approval of the shareholders of the Company of such action.

Section 3. Shares Subject to the Plan.

Subject to Section 4 of the Plan, the total number of Shares reserved and available for issuance under the Plan shall be 250,000 Share. Such Shares may consist n whole-or-in-part, of authorized and unissued shares or treasury shares. At all times the Company shall reserve and keep available a sufficient number of shares as shall be required to satisfy the requirements of all outstanding Options under the Plan. No fractional Shares shall be issued or delivered pursuant to the Plan. The Administrator shall determine whether cash, additional Awards or other securities or property shall be issued or paid in lieu of fractional Shares or whether any fractional shares should be rounded, forfeited or otherwise eliminated.

(a) Options . The maximum aggregated number of shares of Stock that may be subject to Options granted in any calendar year to any one Participant shall be 250,000 shares.

 
 

(b) Restricted Stock . The maximum aggregate number of shares of Stock that may be subject to Awards of Restricted Stock or Restricted Stock Units granted in any calendar year to any one Participant shall be 250,000 shares.

(c) Compliance with Section 162(m) of the Code . To the extent required by Section 162(m) of the Code, Shares subject to Options which are canceled shall continue to be counted against the limits set forth in paragraphs (a) and (b) immediately preceding.

(d) Reissuance of Shares .

Shares of Common Stock covered by an Award shall not be counted as used unless and until they are actually issued and delivered to a Participant. If any Award lapses, expires, terminates or is canceled prior to the issuance of shares thereunder or if shares of Common Stock are issued under the Plan to a Participant and thereafter are forfeited to or otherwise reacquired by the Company, the shares subject to such Awards and the forfeited or reacquired shares shall again be available for issuance under the Plan. Any shares of Common Stock (i) tendered by a Participant or retained by the Company as full or partial payment to the Company for the purchase price of the Award, or (ii) covered by an Award that is settled in cash or in a manner that some or all of the shares covered by the Award are not issued, shall among other actions, result in such shares being available for Awards under the Plan. The number of shares of Common Stock available for issuance under the Plan shall not be reduced to reflect any dividends or dividend equivalents that are reinvested into additional shares of Common Stock or credited as additional shares of Common stock subject or paid with respect to an Award.

(e) Performance Goals . The Administrator, in its discretion, may set restrictions based upon the achievement of Performance Goals, including, but not limited to, the purpose of qualifying Awards as “performance-based compensation” under Section 162(m) of the Code. When granting any Award other than an Option, the Administrator may designate such Award as a Qualified Performance-Based Award, based upon a determination that (i) the recipient is or may be a “covered employee” (within the meaning of Section 162(m)(3) of the Code) with respect to such Award, and (ii) the Administrator wishes such Award to qualify for exemption under Section 162(m) of the Code, and the terms of any such Award (and of the grant thereof) shall be consistent with such designation (including, without limitation, that all such Awards be granted by a committee composed solely of “outside directors”). To the extent required to comply with Section 162(m) of the Code, no later than 90 days following the commencement of a Performance Period or, if earlier, by the expiration of 25% of a Performance Period, the Administrator will designate one or more Performance Periods, determine the Participants for the Performance Periods and establish the Performance Goals for the Performance Periods. The Administrator also has the authority to provide for accelerated vesting of any Award based on the achievement of Performance Goals pursuant to the performance criteria specified for such Award. In the event that applicable tax and/or securities laws change to permit the Administrator discretion to alter the governing performance criteria without obtaining shareholder approval of such changes, the Administrator shall have sole discretion to make such changes without obtaining shareholder approval. In granting Awards which are intended to qualify under Section 162(m) of the Code, the Administrator may follow any procedures determined by it from time to time to be necessary or appropriate to ensure qualification of the Award under Section 162(m) of the Code. Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan, payment or vesting of any Performance Award shall not be made until the applicable Performance Goals have been satisfied and any other material terms of such Award were in fact satisfied. The Administrator shall certify in writing the attainment of each Performance Goal. Notwithstanding any provision of the Plan to the contrary, with respect to any Performance Award, (a) the Administrator may not adjust, downwards or upwards, any amount payable, or other benefits granted, issued, retained, and/or vested pursuant to such an Award on account of satisfaction of the applicable Performance Goals; provided that the Administrator may reduce or eliminate the performance compensation or other economic benefit that was due upon attainment of the Performance Goal (exercise of “negative discretion”) but such decrease does not increase the amount payable to any other employee, and (b) the Administrator may not waive the achievement of the applicable Performance Goals, except in the case of the Participant’s death or disability, or a Change of Control.

 
 

(f) Substitute Awards . Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan to the contrary, the Administrator may grant Substitute Awards under the Plan. In the event that a written agreement between the Company and an Acquired Entity pursuant to which a merger or consolidation is completed and approved by the Board and that agreement sets forth the terms and conditions of the substitution for or assumption of outstanding awards of the Acquired Entity, those terms and conditions shall be deemed to be the action of the Administrator without any further action by the Administrator, and the persons holding such awards shall be deemed to be the Participants.

(g) Administrator’s Discretion to Accelerate Vesting of Awards . Except upon the occurrence of a Change in Control (which is governed by the provisions of Section 9 hereof), the Administrator may, in its discretion and as of a date determined by the Administrator, fully vest any or all Awards awarded to a Participant pursuant to an Award and, upon such vesting, all restrictions applicable to such Award shall terminate as of such date. Any action by the Administrator pursuant to this section may vary among individual Participants and may vary among the Awards held by any individual Participant. Notwithstanding the preceding provisions of this section, the Administrator may not take any action described in this section (i) with respect to an Award that has been granted to a “covered Employee” (within the meaning of Treasury Regulation Section 1.162-27(c)(2)) if such Award is intended to meet the exception for performance-based compensation under Section 162(m) of the Code, or (ii) if such action shall cause any Award hereunder which is or becomes subject to Section 409A of the Code to fail to comply with the requirements of Section 409A of the Code.

(h) Forfeiture by Order of Regulatory Agency . If the Company’s or any of its financial institution subsidiaries’ capital falls below the minimum requirements contained in 12 CFR Section 3 or below a higher requirement as determined by the Company’s or such subsidiary’s primary bank regulatory agency, such agency may direct the Company to require Participants to exercise or forfeit some or all of their Awards. All Awards granted under this Plan are subject to the terms of any such directive.

 
 

Section 4. Corporate Transactions.

Subject to the provisions of Section 9 hereof relating to a Change in Control, in the event of any merger, consolidation, combination, reorganization, recapitalization, reclassification, extraordinary cash dividend, stock dividend, stock split, reverse stock split, or other change in corporate structure, the Administrator shall make an equitable substitution or proportionate adjustment in (i) the aggregate number of Shares reserved for issuance under the Plan, and (ii) the kind, number, and Exercise Price of Shares (or other cash or property) issuable with respect to outstanding Options granted under the Plan (which may become, without limitation, shares of an acquiring entity or other successor corporation that assumes this Plan), and (iii) the kind and number of Shares subject to any outstanding Awards of Restricted Stock granted under the Plan (which may become, without limitation, shares of an acquiring entity or other successor corporation that assumes this Plan), in each case as may be determined by the Administrator, in its sole discretion; provided , that with respect to ISOs, any adjustment shall be made in accordance with the provisions of Section 424(h) of the Code and any regulations or guidance promulgated thereunder; and provided, further, that no such adjustment shall cause any Award hereunder which is or becomes subject to Section 409A of the Code to fail to comply with the requirements of Section 409A of the Code.

Section 5. Eligibility.

The Participants under the Plan shall be selected from time to time by the Administrator, in its sole discretion, from among the Eligible Recipients. The Administrator shall have the authority to grant Awards under the Plan to the Eligible Recipients; provided , however , that only current employees may be granted ISOs.

Section 6. Options.

Options may be-granted alone or in addition to other Awards granted under the Plan. Any Option granted under the Plan shall be substantially in the form as the Administrator may from time to time approve, and the provisions of each Option need not be the same with respect to each Participant. Participants who are granted Options shall enter into an Award Agreement with the Company in such form as the Administrator shall determine, which Award Agreement shall set forth, among other things, the Exercise Price of the Option, the term of the Option and provisions regarding exercisability of the Option granted in connection with such Award Agreement.

Options granted under the Plan may be of two types: (i) Incentive Stock Options and (ii) Nonqualified Stock Options. If and to the extent any Option granted under the Plan intended to qualify as an ISO does not qualify as an ISO, such Option shall constitute a separate NQSO. A grant of an ISO can only be made to an Eligible Recipient who is also an employee within the meaning of Section 422(a)(2) of the Code.

 
 

Options granted under the Plan shall be subject to the following terms and conditions and shall contain such additional terms and conditions, not inconsistent with the terms of the Plan, as the Administrator shall deem desirable:

(a) Option Exercise Price . The Exercise Price of Shares issuable with respect to an Option shall be determined by the Administrator in its sole discretion, provided , however , that such Exercise Price shall not be less than 100% of the Fair Market Value on the date of grant, except in the case of Substitute Awards. If a Participant owns or is deemed to own (by reason of the attribution rules applicable under Section 424(d) of the Code) more than 10% of the combined voting power of all classes of stock of the Company or any subsidiary and an ISO is granted to such Participant, the Exercise Price of such ISO shall be no less than 110% of the Fair Market Value on the date such Option is granted.

(b) Option Term . The term of each Option shall be fixed by the Administrator, but no Option shall be exercisable more than 10 years after the date such Option is granted; provided , however , that if an employee owns or is deemed to own (by reason of the attribution rules of Section 424(d) of the Code) more than 10% of the combined voting power of all classes of stock of the Company or any subsidiary and an ISO is granted to such employee, the term of such ISO (to the extent required by the Code at the time of grant) shall be no more than five years from the date of grant.

(c) Exercisability . Options shall be exercisable at such time or times and subject to such terms and conditions as shall be determined by the Administrator at the time of grant. Specifically such terms and conditions may include (1) the attainment of one or more Performance Goals established by the Administrator, (2) the Participant’s continued employment with the Company or any subsidiary, or continued service as a director, consultant or advisor of the Company or any subsidiary, for a specified period of time, (3) the occurrence of any other event or the satisfaction of any other condition specified by the Administrator in its sole discretion, or (4) a combination of any of the foregoing. The Administrator may provide that any Option shall be exercisable only in installments, and the Administrator may waive such installment exercise provisions at any time, in whole or in part, based on such factors as the Administrator may determine, all in its sole discretion. An Option designated as an Incentive Stock Option shall cease to qualify for favorable tax treatment as an Incentive Stock Option to the extent it is exercised (if permitted by the terms of the Option) (i) more than three months after the date of a Participant’s termination of employment if termination was for reasons other than death or disability, (ii) more than one year after the date of a Participant’s termination of employment if termination was by reason of disability, or (iii) more than six months following the first day of a Participant’s leave of absence that exceeds three months, unless the Participant’s reemployment rights are guaranteed by statute or contract.

(d) Method of Exercise . Subject to Sections 6(c) and 8 of the Plan, vested Options may be exercised in whole or in part at any time during the Option term, by giving notice as described in the applicable Award Agreement. As determined by the Administrator in its sole discretion, payment in whole or in part may also be made: (i) to the extent permitted by applicable law, by means of any cashless exercise procedure approved by the Administrator, including by means of a net exercise whereby the Company issues net Shares and the remaining balance of the Shares to satisfy the Participant’s tax withholding obligations; (ii) in the form of unrestricted shares of Common Stock already owned by the Participant (based on the Fair Market Value on the date the Option is exercised); provided, however, that in the case of an ISO, the right to make payment in the form of already owned shares of Common Stock may be authorized only at the time of grant; (iii) any other form of consideration approved by the Administrator and permitted by applicable law; or(iv) any combination of the foregoing A Participant shall generally have the rights to dividends and any other rights of a shareholder with respect to the Shares subject to the Option only after the Participant has given written notice of exercise, has paid in full for such Shares, and, if requested, has given the representation described in paragraph (b) of Section 12 of the Plan.

 
 

(e) Non-Transferability of Options . Except as otherwise provided in the Award Agreement and subject to Section 8 of the Plan, Options may not be sold, pledged, assigned, hypothecated, transferred, or disposed of in any manner other than by will, or by the laws of descent and distribution, except that NQSOs may be transferred if and to the extent set forth in an Award Agreement.

(f) Annual Limit on Incentive Stock Options . To the extent that the aggregate Fair Market Value (determined as of the date the ISO is granted) of Shares with respect to which ISOs granted to a Participant under this Plan and all other equity compensation plans of the Company or any subsidiary become exercisable for the first time by the Participant during any calendar year exceeds $100,000 (as determined in accordance with Section 422(d) of the Code), the number of Shares attributable to the amount of such Fair Market Value exceeding $100,000 shall be treated as issuable with respect to NQSOs. The maximum aggregate number of ISOs that may be issued under the Plan is 250,000.

(g) Taxation of Incentive Stock Options .

(i) In order to obtain certain tax benefits afforded to Incentive Stock Options under Section 422 of the Code, the Participant must hold the shares acquired upon the exercise of an Incentive Stock Option for two years after the Grant Date and one year after the date of exercise.

(ii) A Participant may be subject to the alternative minimum tax at the time of exercise of an Incentive Stock Option. The Participant shall give the Company prompt notice of any disposition of shares acquired on the exercise of an Incentive Stock Option prior to the expiration of such holding periods.

(h) Certain Successor Options . To the extent not inconsistent with the terms, limitations and conditions of Section 422 of the Code and any regulations promulgated with respect thereto, an Option issued in respect of an option held by an employee to acquire stock of any entity acquired, by merger or otherwise, by the Company (or any subsidiary of the Company) may contain terms that differ from those stated in this Section 6, but solely to the extent necessary to preserve for any such employee the rights and benefits contained in such predecessor option, or to satisfy the requirements of Section 424(a) of the Code.

 
 

(i) Code Definitions . For purposes of this Section 6, “disability,” “parent corporation” and “subsidiary corporation” shall have the meanings attributed to those terms for purposes of Section 422 of the Code.

Section 7. Restricted Stock.

(a) Awards of Restricted Stock may be granted either alone or in addition to other Awards granted under the Plan. The Administrator shall determine the Eligible Recipients to whom, and the time or times at which, awards of Restricted Stock shall be made; the number of Shares to be awarded with respect to an Award of Restricted Stock; and the Restricted Period (as defined in Section 7(c) of this Plan) applicable to an Award of Restricted Stock. Award Agreements with respect to Restricted Stock shall be in such form as the Administrator may from time to time approve, and the provisions of Awards of Restricted Stock need not be the same with respect to each Participant. An Award of Restricted Stock shall be subject to such terms and conditions not inconsistent with the Plan as the Administrator shall impose and shall be evidenced by an Award Agreement.

(a) Stock Certificates. Subject to Section 7(c) below, with respect to each Participant who is granted an Award of Restricted Stock, the Company shall either (i) issue a stock certificate in respect of such Award of Restricted Stock, which certificate shall be registered in the name of the Participant and shall bear an appropriate legend referring to the terms, conditions, and restrictions applicable tom such Award of Restricted Stock; or (ii) enter such Award of Restricted Stock in book entry form (with appropriate restrictions noted with respect thereto), such method to be determined by the Administrator in its sole discretion. The Company may require that any stock certificates evidencing Restricted Stock granted under the Plan be held in the custody of the Company until the restrictions thereon shall have lapsed, and that, as a condition of any Award of Restricted Stock, the Participant shall have delivered a stock power, endorsed in blank, relating to the Shares covered by such Award of Restricted Stock.

(b) Restrictions and Conditions Applicable to Restricted Stock. An Award of Restricted Stock granted pursuant to this Section 7 shall be subject to the following restrictions and conditions:

(i) Subject to the provisions of the Plan and the Award Agreement governing any such Award of Restricted Stock, during such period as may be set by the Administrator commencing on the date of grant of the Award, the Participant shall not be permitted to sell, transfer, pledge, or assign such Shares of Restricted Stock (such period, the “Restricted Period”); provided, however, that the Administrator may, in its sole discretion, provide for the lapse of such restrictions in installments and may accelerate or waive such restrictions in whole or in part based on such factors and such circumstances as the Administrator may determine, in its sole discretion. Notwithstanding the preceding provision of this section, the Administrator may not take any action described in this section (i) with respect to an Award that has been granted to a “covered Employee” (within the meaning of Treasury Regulation Section 1.162-27(c)(2)) if such Award is intended to meet the exception for performance-based compensation under Section 162(m) of the Code, or (ii) if such action shall cause any Award hereunder which is or becomes subject to Section 409A of the Code to fail to comply with the requirements of Section 409A of the Code. Such restrictions shall be determined by the Administrator in its sole discretion, and the Administrator may provide that such restrictions lapse upon (1) the attainment of one or more Performance Goals established by the Administrator, (2) the Participant’s continued employment with the Company or any subsidiary, or continued service as a director, consultant or advisor of the Company or any subsidiary, for a specified period of time, (3) the occurrence of any other event or the satisfaction of any other condition specified by the Administrator in its sole discretion, or (4) a combination of any of the foregoing.

 
 

(ii) Subject to paragraph (b) of Section 12 of the Plan and/or unless otherwise provided in an Award Agreement, a Participant awarded Restricted Stock under the Plan generally shall have the rights of a shareholder of the Company with respect to such Restricted Stock during the Restricted Period (including, without limitation, the right to vote the Restricted Stock and to receive dividends thereon).

Section 8. Termination of Employment or Service.

Unless otherwise set forth in Section 12 of the Plan or as may otherwise be set forth in an Award Agreement, if a Participant’s employment with or service as an officer, director, employee, consultant, or advisor of the Company or of any subsidiary: (a) terminates for any reason and on the date of termination of employment or service the Participant is not vested as to his or her entire Award, the Shares issuable with respect to the unvested portion of such Award shall be forfeited; and (b) terminates for the reasons described below and on the date of termination of employment or service the Participant is vested as to any Options, then if such termination is (i) by reason of his or her death or Permanent and Total Disability, any vested Option may thereafter be exercised for a period of twelve months following termination of employment or service; (ii) for Cause, then any vested Option shall cease to be exercisable and shall terminate; or (iii) for any other reason than listed in subsections (b)(i) and (b)(ii) above, then any vested Option may thereafter be exercised for a period of 90 days following termination of employment or service. If, and to the extent that, after termination of employment or service, the Participant does not exercise his or her Option within the applicable time stated above, the unexercised Option shall terminate.

Section 9. Change in Control.

Unless otherwise determined in an Award Agreement, in the event of a Change in Control:

 
 

(a) Effective immediately prior to the occurrence of the Change in Control, (i) each outstanding Award shall become fully vested and, if applicable, exercisable, (ii) the restrictions and forfeiture conditions applicable to any such Award granted shall lapse, and (iii) any performance conditions imposed with respect to Awards shall be deemed to be fully achieved.

(b) The Administrator may notify all Participants that all outstanding Awards shall be assumed by the acquiring entity or substituted on an equitable basis with awards issued by the acquiring entity. For purposes of this Section 9, an Award shall be considered assumed or substituted for if, following the Change in Control, the Award remains subject to the same terms and conditions that were applicable to the Award immediately prior to the Change in Control except that, if the Award related to Shares, the Award instead confers the right to receive common stock or other securities of the acquiring entity.

(c) Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan, in the event of a Change in Control, except as would otherwise result in adverse tax consequences under Section 409A of the Code, the Board may, in its sole discretion, provide that each Award shall, immediately upon the occurrence of a Change in Control, be cancelled in exchange for a payment in cash or securities in an amount equal to (i) the excess (if any) of the consideration paid per Share in the Change in Control (as determined by the Administrator in its sole discretion) over the exercise or purchase price (if any) per Share subject to the Award multiplied by (ii) the number of Shares subject to the Award (if the consideration paid per share in the Change in Control is deemed by the Administrator to be less than the Exercise Price or purchase price (if any) per Share subject to an Award, then such Awards may be deemed to have been paid in full and canceled by the Administrator).

Section 10. Amendment and Termination.

The Board may amend, alter, or discontinue the Plan, but no amendment, alteration, or discontinuation that would materially impair the rights of a Participant under any Award granted or Award Agreement in effect under the Plan shall be made without such Participant’s consent. The Administrator may accept surrender of outstanding Awards and grant new Awards in substitution for them; provided, that the Administrator will not, without prior shareholder approval, exchange underwater Options or otherwise modify the exercise price or purchase price of any Option or Award that has the effect of being a repricing. To the extent necessary and desirable, approval of the Company’s shareholders shall be obtained for any amendment that would:

(a) increase the total number of Shares reserved for issuance under the Plan; or

(b) change the class of officers, directors, employees, consultants, and advisors eligible to participate in the Plan.

The Administrator may amend the terms of any Award granted under the Plan, prospectively or retroactively, but, subject to Section 4 of the Plan, no such amendment shall impair the rights of any Participant without his or her consent. Notwithstanding the previous sentence, the Administrator reserves the right to amend the terms of any Award or Award Agreement as may be necessary or appropriate to avoid adverse tax consequences under Section 409A of the Code or to comply with any requirements under the Company’s “clawback” policy regarding incentive compensation, or such “clawback” requirements under the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 or the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act, as amended from time to time.

 
 

Section 11. Unfunded Status of Plan.

The Plan is intended to constitute an “unfunded” plan. With respect to any payments not yet made to a Participant by the Company, nothing contained herein shall give any such Participant any rights that are greater than those of a general unsecured creditor of the Company.

Section 12. General Provisions.

(a) Shares shall not be issued pursuant to the exercise or settlement of any Award granted under the Plan unless the exercise or settlement of such Award and the issuance and delivery of such Shares pursuant to such Award shall comply with all relevant provisions of law, including, without limitation, the Securities Act of 1933, the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, withholding tax requirements and the requirements of any stock exchange upon which the Common Stock may then be listed, and shall be further subject to the approval of counsel for the Company with respect to such compliance. The Company may rely on an opinion of its counsel as to such compliance. Any share certificate issued to evidence Common Stock for which an Award is exercised or issued may bear such legends and statements as the Administrator may deem advisable to assure compliance with Federal and state laws and regulations.

(b) The Administrator may require each person acquiring Shares granted under the Plan to represent to and agree with the Company in writing that such person is acquiring the Shares without a view to distribution thereof. All certificates for Shares delivered under the Plan shall be subject to such stock-transfer orders and other restrictions as the Administrator may deem advisable under the rules, regulations, and other requirements of the Securities and Exchange Commission, any stock exchange upon which the Common Stock is then listed, and any applicable Federal or state securities law. The certificates for such Shares may include the legend set forth below, or any other legend that the Administrator deems appropriate to reflect any restrictions on transfer for such Shares.

“THE ISSUANCE OF THE SHARES REPRESENTED BY THIS CERTIFICATE HAS NOT BEEN REGISTERED UNDER THE SECURITIES ACT OF 1933. THE SHARES HAVE BEEN ACQUIRED FOR INVESTMENT AND MAY NOT BE SOLD, TRANSFERRED OR ASSIGNED IN THE ABSENCE OF EITHER AN EFFECTIVE REGISTRATION STATEMENT FOR THESE SHARES UNDER THE SECURITIES ACT OF 1933 OR AN OPINION OF COUNSEL THAT REGISTRATION IS NOT REQUIRED UNDER THE ACT.”

 
 

(c) Nothing contained in the Plan shall prevent the Board from adopting other or additional compensation arrangements. The adoption of the Plan or granting of an Award shall not confer upon any Eligible Recipient any right to continued employment with or service to the Company or any subsidiary, as the case may be, nor shall it interfere in any way with the right of the Company or any subsidiary to terminate the employment or service of any Eligible Recipient at any time.

(d) Unless otherwise set forth in an applicable Award Agreement, a Participant may elect, no later than the date as of which the value of an Award becomes includible in the gross income of the Participant for Federal income tax purposes (the “withholding date”), to have the Company withhold vested whole shares of Common Stock deliverable upon the exercise of an Option or the vesting of the Restricted Stock to satisfy (in whole or in part) the amount, if any, that the Company or any subsidiary is required to withhold for taxes; provided , however , that the amount of shares of Common Stock so withheld shall have a Fair Market Value (as of the withholding date) that is not in excess of the amount determined by the Company to be equal to the applicable minimum statutorily required withholding tax payments. Any such election shall be irrevocable.

To the extent that a Participant does not make such an election, or such election does not fully satisfy such minimum statutorily required withholding tax payments, then (x) the Company may require that the Participant pay to the Company, or make arrangements satisfactory to the Company regarding payment of, any Federal, state, or local taxes of any kind required by law to be withheld with respect to such Award, as a condition of the exercise of any Option, (y) the Company may withhold vested whole shares of Common Stock deliverable upon exercise of an Option or vesting of the Restricted Stock to satisfy (in whole or in part) the amount, if any, that the Company or any subsidiary is required to withhold for taxes; provided , however , that the amount of shares of Common Stock so withheld shall have a Fair Market Value (as of the withholding date) that is not in excess of the amount determined by the Company to be equal to the applicable minimum statutorily required withholding tax payments, and (z) the Company shall have the right to deduct from any payment of any kind otherwise due to a Participant up to an amount equal to any federal, state or local taxes of any kind required by law to be withheld in connection with the granting, vesting or exercise of an Award (not to exceed the amount determined by the Company to be the applicable minimum statutorily required withholding tax payments). Upon request, the Participant shall reimburse the Company for any taxes that the Company withholds that are not otherwise reimbursed as contemplated above in this Section 12(d).

(e) No member of the Board or the Administrator, nor any officer or employee of the Company acting on behalf of the Board or the Administrator, shall be personally liable for any action, determination, or interpretation taken or made in good faith with respect to the Plan, and all members of the Board or the Administrator and each and any officer or employee of the Company acting on their behalf shall, to the extent permitted by law, be fully indemnified and protected by the Company in respect of any such action, determination, or interpretation. Except to the extent prohibited by applicable law, the Administrator may delegate to one or more individuals the day-to-day administration of the Plan and any of the functions assigned to it in this Plan. Such delegation may be revoked at any time.

 
 

(f) If a Participant is an officer or director of the Company within the meaning of Section 16, Awards granted hereunder shall be subject to all conditions required under Rule 16b-3, or any successor rule(s) promulgated under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, to qualify the Award for any exemption from the provisions of Section 16 available under such Rule. Such conditions are hereby incorporated herein by reference and shall be set forth in the agreement with the Participant, which describes the Award.

(g) The Company shall be under no obligation to effect the registration pursuant to the Securities Act of 1933 of any shares of Stock to be issued hereunder or to effect similar compliance under any state laws. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, the Company shall not be obligated to cause to be issued or delivered any shares of Stock pursuant to the Plan unless and until the Company is advised by its counsel that the issuance and delivery of such shares is in compliance with all applicable laws, regulations or governmental authority and the requirements of any securities exchange on which shares of Stock are traded. The Administrator may require, as a condition of the issuance and delivery of shares of Stock pursuant to the terms hereof, that the recipient of such shares make such covenants, agreements and representations, and that such shares, if certificated, bear such legends, and if dematerialized, be so restricted, in each case, as the Administrator, in its sole discretion, deems necessary or desirable.

Section 13. Section 409A of the Code.

Notwithstanding any provision in the Plan to the contrary, no payment or distribution under this Plan that constitutes an item of deferred compensation under Section 409A of the Code and becomes payable by reason of a Participant’s termination of employment or service with the Company will be made to such Participant unless such Participant’s termination of employment or service constitutes a “separation from service” (as defined in Section 409A of the Code). For purposes of this Plan, each amount to be paid or benefit to be provided shall be construed as a separate identified payment for purposes of Section 409A of the Code. If a participant is a “specified employee” (as defined in Section 409A of the Code), then to the extent necessary to avoid the imposition of taxes under Section 409A of the Code, such Participant shall not be entitled to any payments upon a termination of his or her employment or service until the earlier of: (i) the expiration of the six-month period measured from the date of such Participant’s “separation from service” or (ii) the date of such Participant’s death. Upon the expiration of the applicable waiting period set forth in the preceding sentence, all payments and benefits deferred pursuant to this Section 13 (whether they would have otherwise been payable in a single lump sum or in installments in the absence of such deferral) shall be paid to such Participant in a lump sum as soon as practicable, but in no event later than 60 calendar days, following such expired period, and any remaining payments due under this Plan will be paid in accordance with the normal payment dates specified for them herein.

 
 

Section 14. Notice.

All notices, requests, waivers, and other communications required or permitted hereunder shall in writing and shall be either personally delivered, sent by reputable overnight courier service or mailed by first class mail, return receipt requested, to the recipient at the address below:

Carolina Financial Corporation

288 Meeting Street

Charleston, SC 29401

Attn: Jerry L. Rexroad, President & CEO

or such other address or the attention of such other person as the recipient party shall have specified by prior written notice to the sending party, or sent by other electronic means. All such notices, requests, waivers and other communications shall be deemed to have been effectively given: (a) when personally delivered to the party to be notified; (b) when sent by confirmed facsimile to the party to be notified; (c) five (5) business days after deposit in the United States Mail postage prepared by certified or registered mail with return receipt requested at any time other than during a general discontinuance of postal service due to strike, lockout, or otherwise (in which case such notice, request, waiver or other communication shall be effectively given upon receipt) and addressed to the party to be notified as set forth above; or (d) two (2) business days after deposit with a national overnight delivery service, postage prepaid, addressed to the party to be notified as set forth above with next-business-day delivery guaranteed. A party may change its or his notice address given above by giving the other party ten (10) days’ written notice of the new address in the manner set forth above.

Section 15. Governing Law and Interpretation.

The Plan and all Awards made and actions taken thereunder shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of South Carolina, without reference to principles of conflict of laws.

Section 16. Severability.

If, for any reason, any provision of this Plan is held invalid, such invalidity shall not affect any other provision of this Plan not held so invalid, and each such other provision shall to the full extent consistent with law continue in full force and effect. If any provision of this Plan shall be held invalid in part, such invalidity shall in no way affect the rest of such provision not held so invalid, and the rest of such provision, together with all other provisions of this Plan, shall to the full extent consistent with law continue in full force and effect.

Section 17. Term of Plan.

 
 

The Plan shall be effective as of the Effective Date. No Award shall be granted pursuant to the Plan on or after the tenth anniversary of the Effective Date, but Awards granted under the Plan prior to the tenth anniversary of the Effective Date may extend beyond the tenth anniversary of the Effective Date pursuant to the terms of the Award as provided for under the Plan and the terms of the applicable Award Agreement.

* * * * *

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Board of Directors of the Company has adopted this Carolina Financial Corporation 2013 Equity Incentive Plan, to be executed on behalf of the Company by a duly designated officer of the Company, as of the day and year first above written as the Effective Date.

  CAROLINA FINANCIAL CORPORATION
     
  By:    /s/ Jerry L. Rexroad
     
  Name:   Jerry L. Rexroad
     
  Title:   President & CEO

  

 

 
 

Appendix A

 

Participating Employers

 

Carolina Financial Corporation

CresCom Bank

Crescent Mortgage Company

Carolina Services Corporation of Charleston

 

 

Jefferson Pilot

Financial

 

Jefferson Pilot Financial Insurance Company, One Granite Place P.O. Box 515, Concord, New Hampshire 03302

 

Jefferson Pilot Financial Insurance Company (A stock company, herein called the Company), will pay the Death Benefit specified on page 6 to the Beneficiary on receipt of due proof of the Insured's death, subject to the provisions of this and the following pages, all of which are a part of this policy.

 

This is a Flexible Premium Variable Life Insurance Policy. The Specified Amount may be increased or decreased by the Owner. Net Premiums will be allocated to the General Account or to one or more divisions of JPF Separate Account A (herein called Separate Account A) as determined by the Owner.

 

THE POLICY'S ACCUMULATION VALUE IN EACH DIVISION OF SEPARATE ACCOUNT A IS BASED ON THE INVESTMENT EXPERIENCE OF THAT DIVISION AND MAY INCREASE OR DECREASE DAILY, THE ACCUMULATION VALUE IS NOT CU ARANTEED AS TO DOLLAR AMOUNT.

 

The policy's accumulation value in the General Account will earn interest daily at a minimum guaranteed effective rate of 4 ½%. Interest in excess of the guaranteed rate may be applied in the calculation of the accumulat8ion value at such increased rates as the Company may determine.

 

THE AMOUNT OF DEATH BENEFIT OR THE DUREATION OF THE DEATH BENEFIT MAY VARY UNDER THE CONDITIONS DESRIBED ON PAGES 6 AND 7 .

 

This policy is a legal contract between the Owner and Jefferson Pilot Financial Insurance Company.

 

READ YOUR POLICY CAREFULLY

 

RIGHT TO CANCEL – Please examine this policy carefully. The Owner may cancel this policy by returning it to Jefferson Pilot Financial Insurance company or to the agent through whom it was purchased within 10 days after the date the Owner receives the policy, within 45 days of the date of the execution of the application for insurance, or within 10 days after mailing or personal delivery of a Notice of the Right Withdrawal, whichever is later. If the policy is returned, it will be deemed void from the beginning and any premium paid for it will be refunded within 7 days. If this policy is issued as a replacement for a policy issued by us or another insurer, the time period in which you have to review the policy and return it to us for cancellation is extended to 20 days after the date the Owner received the policy, and is extended to 20 days after mailing or personal delivery of a Notice of the Right of Withdrawal, whichever is later.

 

Executed for the Company at its Service Office in Concord, New Hampshire, as of the policy date.

 

Chief Executive Officer Secretary

 

Insured:

Number:

 

 
 

Flexible Premium Variable Life Insurance Policy. Flexible Premiums Payable Until the Maturity Date or Until Prior Death. Adjustable Death Benefit. Insurance Payable at Death, Some Benefits Reflect Investment Results. Additional Benefits, if any, as indicated on Page 3. Non-Participating. No Dividends.

 

 
 

GUIDE TO POLICY PROVISIONS

 

 

 

 

A copy of the application will be found after page 18. Any other benefit agreements will also be found after page 18.

 

 
 

BENEFICIARY AS STATED IN APPLICATION UNLESS LATER CHANGED.

 

LIFE INSURANCE PLANNED PERIODIC PREMIUM

 

INITIAL SPECIFIED AMOUNT

 

PLAN OF INSURANCE                               FLEXIBLE PREMIUM VARIABLE LIFE

 

IT IS POSSIBLE THAT COVERAGE WILL EXPIRE PRIOR TO THE MATURITY DATE CHOSEN WHEN EITHER NO PREMIUMS ARE PAID FOLLOWING PAYMENT OF THE INITIAL PREMIUM OR SUBSEQUENT PREMIUMS ARE INSUFFICIENT TO CO NTINUE COVERAGE TO SUCH DATE. IF CURRENT VALUES CHANGE, THIS WILL ALSO AFFECT COVERAGE.

 

THE POLICY'S ACCUMULATION VALUE IN THE GENERAL ACCOUNT WILL EARN INTEREST DAILY AT A MINIMUM GUARANTEED EFFECTIVE RATE OF 4-1/2%. THE POLICY'S ACCUMULATION VALUE HELD IN THE GENERAL ACCOUNT FOR POLICY LOAN COLLATERAL WILL EARN INTEREST DAILY AT THE LESSER OF AN EFFECTIVE RATE OF 6.00% OR THE INTEREST RATE CURRENTLY CREDITED.

 

ALLOCATIONS OF NET PREMIUM:

 

 

 

SELECTED EXPENSE CHARGES:

 

1)

 

2) A MONTHLY ADMINISTRATIVE CHARGE. THIS CHARGE IS EQUAL TO $6.00 PER MONTH IN EACH POLICY YEAR.

 

3) COST OF INSURANCE AS DEFINED ON PAGE 16.

 

4) MORTALITY AND EXPENSE RISK CHARGE AS DEFINED ON PAGE 15.

 

5) SURRENDER CHARGE ON WITHDRAWAL OR SURRENDER AS DEFINED ON PAGE 14.

 

 
 

MAXIMUM SURRENDER PREMIUMS

PER $1,000 INITIAL SPECIFIED AMOUNT OR

PER $1,000 OF INCREASE IN THE SPECIFIED AMOUNT

 

ISSUE AGE OR AGE AT INCREASE PREMIUM ISSUE AGE OR AGE AT INCREASE PREMIUM ISSUE AGE OR AGE AT INCREASE PREMIUM

 

 

 
 

TABLE OF MONTHLY GUARANTEED COST OF

INSURANCE RATES PER $1000

POLICY NUMBER 51601445IN

 

 

Age Monthly Rate Age Monthly Rate Age Monthly Rate

 

 

 
 

PREMIUM PROVISIONS

 

Premium Payments – An initial premium is due and payable on the policy date. The initial premium must be large enough, after the deduction of the premium expense charge, to cover monthly deductions for at least three months. All premiums are payable at the Home Office of the Company or to an authorized agent of the Company in exchange for a receipt. This receipt must be signed by an elected officer of the Company and countersigned by such agent. The Company will not accept a premium payment less than $25.

 

Planned Periodic Premium and Premium Frequency – The Planned Periodic Premium and Premium Frequency, as shown on page 3, are selected by the Owner. The Planned Periodic Premium is the amount of premium the Owner intends to pay. The Premium Frequency is how often the Owner intends to pay the Planned Periodic Premium. Payment of the Planned Periodic Premium is at the option of the Owner.

 

The Company will send Planned Periodic Premium payment reminder not ices. If the mode of premium payment is preauthorized check, government allotment or payroll deduction, notice of any Planned Periodic Premium due till not be sent.

 

Changes in Premium Frequency and increases or decreases in the Planned Periodic Premium may be made by the Owner by providing written notification to the Company. The Company reserves the right to limit the amount of any increase.

 

Net Premium – the net premium is equal to the premium paid multiplied by 95.5%. the deduction of 2.5% is a premium tax charge

 

Allocation of Net Premiums – The Owner will determine the allocation of the net premiums among the General Account and the divisions of Separate Account A. The minimum percentage that may be allocated to any of these accounts if 10%.

 

Unscheduled Premiums – Premium payments in addition to the Planned Periodic Premium may be made at any time prior to the Maturity Date. The Company reserves the right to limit the number and amount of additional premium payments.

 

If there is an existing policy loan, premium payments in the amount of the Planned Periodic Premium, received at the Premium Frequency, will be applied as premium. Premium or premium payments received other than at the Premium Frequency, will first be applied as policy loan repayments, then as premium when the policy loan is repaid.

 

Grace Period – The Company will allow a grace period of 61 days. Such grace period will begin on the day that the Company sends notice to the Owner and to the assignee, if any, that the cash value less any policy debt on a Monthly Anniversary Day is not enough to cover the monthly deduction for the month following such Monthly Anniversary Day. The cash value and monthly deduction are defined in the n on forfeiture Provisions section.

 

The policy will terminate without value at the end of the grace period unless a premium large enough, after the deduction of the premium expense charge, to cover monthly deductions for at least three months is paid by the end of the grace period.

 

If the insured dies during the grace period, the Company will deduct any overdue monthly deduction, which is applicable to the grace period, from the proceeds of the policy.

 

 
 

Reinstatement – If this policy terminates as provided in the G race Period provision, it may be reinstated by the Owner at any time within five years after the date of termination. Reinstatement must occur before the maturity date. Reinstatement is subject to the following requirements:

 

(1) Receipt of satisfactory evidence of insurability by the Company

 

(2) Payment of a premium large enough, after the deduction of the premium expense charge, to cover:

 

(a) Monthly deductions for at least three policy months following the effective date of reinstatement.

 

(b) Any due and unpaid monthly administrative charges

 

(3) Payment or reinstatement of any debt against the policy which existed on the date of termination.

 

The effective date of a re instated policy shall be the date the Company approves the application for reinstatement. Prior to receipt of the required premium or reinstatement, the accumulation value of the policy on the date of reinstatement shall be the accumulation value on the date of termination. The surrender factor in effect on reinstatement shall be as defined in the Surrender Charge section.

 

DEATH BENEFIT PROVISIONS

 

Death Benefit – The death benefit provided by this policy depends on the Death Benefit Option in effect on the date of death. The Death Benefit Option for this policy is shown on page 3.

 

Option 1 – Under Option 1, the death benefit shall be the greater of:

 

(1) The Specified Amount, or

 

(2) the accumulation value on the date of death multiplied by the corridor percentage.

 

Option II – Under Option II, the death benefit shall be equal to the Specified Amount plus the accumulation value on the date of death. However, the death benefit can never be less than the accumulation value on the date of death multiplied by the corridor percentage.

 

 

 
 

The corridor percentage depends on the attained age of the Insured on the date of death.

 

 

Attained Age Corridor Percentage Attained Age Corridor Percentage Attained Age Corridor Percentage Attained Age Corridor Percentage
40 & below 250% 52 171% 64 122% 91 104%
41 243 53 164 65 120 92 103
42 236 54 157 66 119 93 102
43 229 55 150 67 118 94 101
44 222 56 146 68 117 95 100
45 215 57 142 69 116    
46 209 58 138 70 115    
47 203 59 134 71 113    
48 197 60 130 72 111    
49 191 61 128 73 109    
50 185 62 126 74 107    
51 178 63 124 75-90 105    

 

Changes in Existing Coverage – The Initial Specified Amount is shown on page 3. At any time after the first policy anniversary, the Owner may, by written request, increase or decrease the Specified Amount. Any change is subject to the following conditions:

 

(1) Any decrease will become effective on the Monthly Anniversary Day that coincides with or next follows receipt of the request. Any such decrease will be deducted in the following order:

 

(a) From the most recent Specified Amount In crease, if any;

 

(b) Successively from the next most recent Specified Amount increase, if any;

 

(c) From the Initial specified Amount.

 

(2) Any request for an increase must be applied for on a supplemental application and shall be subject to evidence of insurability satisfactory to the Company. The minimum increase in Specified Amount is $25,000.

 

(3) Any change approved b y the Company will become effective on the effective date shown in the Supplemental Policy Specifications page, subject to deduction of the first month's cost of insurance therefor from the accumulation value of this policy.

 

(4) The Owner may request in writing to change the Death Benefit Option. If the request is to change from Option I to Option II, the Specified Amount will be decreased by the amount of the accumulation value. Evidence of insurability satisfactory to the Company will be required on a change from Option I to Option II. If the request is to change from Option II to Option I, the Specified Amount will be increased by the amount of the accumulation value. The effective date of either change shall be the Monthly Anniversary Day that coincides with or next follows the day the request for change is received.

 

(5) The minimum decrease in Specified Amount, by the Owner, is $25,000. No such decrease may reduce the Specified Amount below $100,000.

 

Change of the Maturity Date – The Maturity Date may be changed, upon written request by the Owner. The new Maturity Date may be any policy anniversary after the end of the tenth policy year and before the policy anniversary nearest the insured's 95 th birthday. However, the new Maturity Date must be at least twelve months from the date the Company received a written request therefor from the Owner.

 

 
 

GENERAL PROVISIONS

 

The Contract – This contract is made in consideration of the application and the payment of an initial premium sufficient to keep this policy in force for at least two months. A copy of the application is attached as a part of this policy. The entire contract consists of this policy and the application (and any supplemental applications for additional Specified Amounts). All statements in an application shall be deemed representations and not warranties. No statement shall be used to contest this policy or to defend against a claim unless it is contained in the application or in a supplemental application, and a copy of such application is attached to the policy when issued or made a part of the policy when changes in the Specified Amount become effective.

 

Ownership of Policy – The insured shall be the Owner of the policy unless stated otherwise in the contract or changed at a later date. During the lifetime of the insured all rights under this policy will be exercised by the Owner if the Owner has reserved the right to change the beneficiary. The Owner may name a new Owner or name a Contingent Owner. The Owner may change a Contingent Owner. If the Owner does not survive the insured, the Contingent Owner will, if living, become the Owner. Upon proper written notice of the Owner or beneficiary will be voided. Unless otherwise stated, all rights under this policy are vested in the Owner or in the Owner’s assigns.

 

Incontestability – After two years from its date, this policy shall be incontestable as to statements made in the application. If an increase in the Specified Amount becomes effective after the policy date, such increase will be incontestable as to statements made in application for increase after two years from its effective date.

 

Suicide – This policy does not cover the risk of suicide within two years from the policy date, whether the Insured is sane or insane. In such event, the only liability of the Company will be refund of premiums paid without interest less any policy loan and less any partial surrender.

 

This policy does not cover the risk of suicide, whether sane or insane, within two years from the effective date of any increase in the Specified Amount with respect to such increase. In such event, the only liability of the Company will be a refund of the cost of insurance for such increase.

 

Misstatement of Age or Sex – If the Insured’s age or sex has been misstated in the application, we will adjust the proceeds to reflect the correct age or sex. In such event, the Death Benefit we will pay will be equal to:

 

(1) The Accumulation Value on the date of death of the Insured less any outstanding debt; plus

 

(2) The Death Benefit , less the Accumulation Value on the date of death of the insured, multiplied by the ratio of (a) the cost of insurance actually deducted at the beginning of the policy month in which death occurs, to (b) the cost of insurance that should have been deducted based on the correct age or sex.

 

If the Insured’s age or sex has been misstated in the application, the amount payable under any rider by reason of death of the Insured shall be that amount of insurance which the rider cost, for the policy month during which such death occurred, would have purchased had the cost of the benefits provided under the rider been calculated using the correct rider cost of the correct age or sex.

 

If prior to the death of the Insured, it is found that the Insured’s age or sex has been misstated in the application or the policy or a rider, the policy Cash Value will be recalculated from issue, using mortality charges based on the correct age or sex.

 

 
 

Beneficiary – At any time prior to the death of the insured, the Owner may name or change a revocable beneficiary. If no beneficiary has been named, the Owner will be the beneficiary. A change of the Owner or beneficiary must be made in writing. To be binding on the Company, the change must be signed by the Owner and any irrevocable beneficiary and must be filed at the Home Office. Any such change shall take effect as of the date it was signed, subject to any payment made or other action taken by the Company before the change was filed. Unless otherwise provided, the proceeds to be paid at the death of the Insured shall be paid in equal shares to those named beneficiaries who survive the insured. Payment will be made in the following order: (1) the primary beneficiaries, (2) any secondary beneficiaries, if no primary beneficiary survives the Insured, (3) any tertiary beneficiaries, if no primary or secondary beneficiary survives the Insured, (4) Owner, (5) the executors, administrators, or assigns of the Owner, if no named beneficiary survives the insured. The terms “children” or “lawful children” of a person, when used to name beneficiaries, shall include only lawful children born to or legally adopted by that person.

 

Assignment – No assignment of this policy will be binding upon the Company until it has been filed at its Home Office. Each assignment will be subject to any payments made or action taken by the Company before it was filed. The Company will not be responsible for any assignment being valid or sufficient.

 

Proceeds – Proceeds means the amount payable on the maturity date, on the surrender of this policy before the maturity date or upon the death of the Insured.

 

The proceeds payable on the death of the insured shall be the death benefit, less any debt. If the policy is surrendered, the proceeds shall be the cash value, less any debt. On the maturity date the proceeds shall be the cash value, less any debt. The proceeds are subject to the adjustment provided in the Misstatement of Age, Incontestability and Suicide provisions of this policy.

 

Payment of Proceeds – Unless an optional mode of settlement is elected, the proceeds payable on the death of the insured shall be paid in one sum to the beneficiary.

 

Unless an optional mode of settlement is elected, any proceeds payable on the maturity date or upon surrender of this policy shall be paid in one sum to the Owner.

 

Postponement of Payments – The Company will usually pay any amounts payable on surrender, withdrawal, or policy loan allocated to Separate Account A within seven days after written notice is received. The Company will usually pay any death benefit proceeds within seven days after the Company receives due proof of death. Payment of any amount payable on surrender, withdrawal, policy loan, or death may be postponed whenever:

 

(1) The New York Stock Exchange is closed other than customary week-end and holiday closings, or trading on the New York Stock Exchange is restricted as determined by the Securities and Exchange Commission;

 

(2) The Securities and Exchange Commission, by order, permits postponement for the protection of policyowners; or

 

(3) An emergency exists as determined by the Securities and Exchange Commission, as a result of which disposal of securities is not reasonably practicable or it is not reasonably practicable to determine the value of the next assets practicable to determine the value of the next assets of Separate Account A.

 

Transfers may also be postponed under these circumstances.

 

The Company may defer the portion of any transfer, amount payable on surrender, withdrawal or policy loan from the General Account for not more than six months. However, no payment from the General Account to pay premiums on policies with the Company will be deferred.

 

 
 

Age – Age of the Insured, as used herein, refers to the age nearest birthday on the policy date. Attained age of the Insured means the age nearest birthday on the last policy anniversary.

 

Modification – Only an elected officer of the Company can, on behalf of the Company, change or modify this policy or waive any of the Company’s rights or requirements. Any such changes must be made in writing.

 

Policy Date – The date shown on page 3, which is the date requested by the Owner or the later of the date of application or the date of any required medical examination. The policy date is the date from which policy years, policy months, and policy anniversaries will be determined.

 

Effective Date of Coverage – The effective date of coverage under this policy shall be as follows:

 

(1) For all coverage provided in the original application, the effective date shall be the policy date.

 

(2) For any increase or addition to coverage, the effective date shall be the date shown on the Supplemental Policy Specifications page. The effective date for such coverage shall begin on the policy Monthly Anniversary Day that coincides with or next follows the date the application for the increase or addition is approved by the Company.

 

Termination – All coverage under this policy shall terminate when any one of the following events occurs:

 

(1) The Owner requests that coverage terminate. (Such request will require a surrender of this policy.)

 

(2) The Insured dies.

 

(3) The policy matures.

 

(4) The grace period ends.

 

Maturity Date – Unless otherwise specified, the maturity date will be the policy anniversary nearest the Insured’s 95 th birthday. Coverage may expire before the maturity date if no premiums are paid after the initial premium or future premiums are not enough to continue coverage to such date.

 

Annual Report – Each year a report will be sent to the Owner which shows the current cash value, premiums paid and all charges since the last report, and outstanding policy loans.

 

Non-Participating – This policy does not share in any surplus distribution of the Company. No dividends are payable.

 

Specified Amount – The face amount of the policy, which is the minimum death benefit payable under the policy.

 

POLICY LOANS

 

Policy Loans – After the first policy anniversary, a loan will be granted upon the sole security and assignment of this policy to the Company. The maximum loan amount is 90% of the cash value on the date of the loan. Any prior debts to the Company against this policy will be deducted from the amount advanced under the loan. Any outstanding debt will be deducted from the proceeds payable at the Insured’s death, on maturity, or on surrender.

 

The Owner may allocate the policy loan among the General Account and the divisions of Separate Account A. If the Owner does not specify the allocation, then the policy loan will be allocated among the General Account and the divisions of Separate Account A in the same proportion that the accumulation value in the General Account, less any debt, and the accumulation value in each division bears to the total accumulation value of the policy, less any debt, on the date of the policy loan. Accumulation value in each division equal to the policy loan allocated to each division will be transferred to the General Account and reduce the accumulation value in that division. If loan interest is not paid when due, an amount of accumulation value equal to the loan interest will also be transferred.

 

 
 

If the policy debt exceeds the policy's accumulation value in the General Account, the Company win transfer accumulation value equal to the excess debt from the divisions of Separate Account A to the Genera[ Account as security for the excess debt The amount transferred will be allocated among the divisions in the same proportion that the accumulation value in each division bears to the policy's total accumulation value in all divisions of Separate Account A.

 

Policy loan Interest - Interest on policy loans is payable at the effective rate of 8%, or at any lower rate established by the Company for any period during which the loan is outstanding. Loan Interest accrues on a daily basis from the date of the loan and is payable at the end of each policy year. loan interest unpaid on a policy anniversary becomes loan principal.

 

The Company shall provide at least 30 days written notice to the Owner (or any other party designated by the Owner to receive notice under this policy) and any assignee recorded at the Home Office of any increase in the interest fate on loans outstanding 40 or more days prior to the effective date of the increase. As to loans made during the 40 days before the effective date of the policy loan interest rate increase, the Company shall notify the Owner and any assignee at the time the loan is made.

 

The effective date of any increase in such interest rate shall not be less than one year after the effective date of the establishment of the previous rate. If the interest rate is increased, the amount of such increase shall not exceed one percent per year.

 

Interest accrues on a daily basis from the date of the loan and is compounded annually. Interest unpaid on a policy anniversary becomes loan principal.

 

Debt - As used in this policy, debt means the principal of any loan outstanding against this policy, plus any accrued loan interest.

 

If the policy debt exceeds the cash value, the Company will send a notice by mail to the Owner and to the assignee, if any, at their addresses last reported to the Company. If the excess Is not paid within 61 days from the date the notice is mailed, the policy will terminate without value.

 

Policy Loan Repayment - Any debt may be repaid, in whole or in part, at any time while this policy is in force. When a loan repayment is made, accumulation value securing the debt in the General Account equal to the loan repayment will be allocated among toe General Account and divisions of Separate Account A using the same percentages used to allocate net premiums.

 

 
 

SEPARATE ACCOUNT PROVISIONS

 

Separate Account - The variable benefits under this policy are provided through investments in Separate Account A. The Company established Separate Account A as a separate investment account to support variable life insurance contracts. The Company will not allocate assets to Separate Account A to support the operation of any contracts or policies that are not variable life insurance.

 

The assets of Separate Account A are owned by the Company. However, these assets are not part of the Company's General Account. Income, gains and losses, whether or not realized, from assets allocated to Separate Account A will be credited to or charged against the account without regard to the Company's other income, gains or losses.

 

Assets equal to the reserves and other liabilities of Separate Account A will not be charged with liabilities that arise from any other business the Company may conduct The Company shall have the right to transfer to its General Account any assets of Separate Account A which are in excess of such reserves and other policy liabilities.

 

Separate Account A Is registered with the Securities and Exchange Commission as a unit investment trust under the Investment Company Act of 1940. Separate Account A is also subject to the laws of Our domiciliary state which regulate the operations of insurance companies incorporated in Our domiciliary state. The investment policy of Separate Account A will not be changed without the approval of the Insurance Commissioner of Our domiciliary state. The approval process is on file with the Insurance Commissioner of the state in which this policy was delivered.

 

Divisions - Separate Account A has several divisions. Each division will buy shares of a separate series of Jefferson Pilot Variable Fund, Inc., American Century Variable Portfolios, Inc., American Funds Insurance Series, The Ayco Series Trust, Fidelity Variable Insurance Products Fund, Franklin Templeton Variable Insurance Products Trust, MFS Variable Insurance Trust, PIMCO Variable Insurance Trust, ProFunda VP, Scudder Investment VIT Funds, T. Rowe Price Equity Series, Inc., Vanguard Variable insurance Fund, Inc. Each series represents a separate investment portfolio of Jefferson Pilot Variable Fund, Inc., American Century Variable Portfolios, Inc., American Funds Insurance Series, The Ayco Series Trust, Fidelity Variable Insurance Products Fund, Franklin Templeton Variable Insurance Products Trust, MFS Variable Insurance Trust, PIMCO Variable Insurance Trust, ProFunds VP, Scudder Investment VIT Funds, T. Rowe Price Equity Series, Inc., Vanguard Variable Insurance Fund, Inc. All divisions of Separate Account A are shown on page 3. The Owner will determine the percentage of net premiums which will be allocated to each division.

 

Income, gains and losses, whether or not realized, from the assets of each division of Separate Account A are credited to or charged against that division without regard to income, gains or losses in other divisions of Separate Account A or in the General Account.

 

The Company will value the assets of each division of Separate Account A at the end of each valuation period. A valuation period is the period between two successive valuation dates. A valuation date is each day that the New York Stock Exchange is open for business or any other day in which there is material change in the value of the assets in Separate Account A.

 

Transfers - The Owner may transfer amounts between the General Account and the divisions of Separate Account A or among the divisions of Separate Account A by sending a written request to the Company. The total amount transferred must be at least $250. No amounts under $250 may he transferred out of any division of Separate Account A or the General account unless such lesser amount constitutes the entire balance. A transfer charge equal to the lesser of $25 or 10% of the amount transferred will be imposed each time amounts are transferred, except with respect to policy loans. The transfer charge will be deducted from the amount that is transferred. The Company will make transfers so that the accumulation value on the date of transfer will not be affected by the transfer except to the extent of the transfer charge. The Company may revoke or modify the transfer privilege at any time, including the minimum amount transferable and the transfer charge.

 

 
 

As long as any portion of the policy's accumulation value is allocated to a division of Separate Account A, the policy's accumulation value and cash value will reflect the investment performance of the chosen division(s) of Separate Account A. The death benefit may also reflect the performance of the chosen division(s) of Separate Account A.

 

At any time, the Owner may transfer 100% of the policy's accumulation value to the General Account While 100% of the policy's accumulation value is allocated to the General Account, minimum benefits for the policy will be fixed and guaranteed.

 

No transfer charge will be imposed for a transfer of all accumulation value in Separate Account A to the General Account. However, any transfer from the General Account to the division(s) of Separate Account A will be subject to the transfer charge.

 

Addition, Deletion, or Substitution of Investments - The Company reserves the right, subject to compliance with applicable law, to make additions to, deletions from, or substitutions for the shares of a series that are held by Separate Account A or that Separate Account A may purchase. The Company reserves the right to eliminate the shares of any of the series of Jefferson Pilot Variable Fund, Inc., American Century Variable Portfolios, Inc., American funds Insurance Series, The Ayco Series Fidelity Variable Insurance Products fund, Franklin Templeton Variable Insurance Products Trust, MFS Variable Insurance Trust, PIMCO Variable Insurance Trust, ProFunds VP, Scudder Investment VIT Funds, T. Rowe Price Equity Series, inc. and Vanguard Variable Insurance Fund, Inc., and to substitute shares of another series of Jefferson Pilot Variable Fund, Inc., American Century Variable Portfolios, Inc., American Funds Insurance Series, The Ayco Series Trust, Fidelity Variable Insurance Products Fund, Franklin Templeton Variable Insurance Products Trust, MFS Variable Insurance Trust, PIMCO Variable Insurance Trust, ProFunds VP, Scudder Investment VIT Funds, T. Rowe Price Equity Series, Inc. and Vanguard Variable insurance Fund, Inc., or of another open-end, registered investment company, if the shares or series are no longer available for Investment or if in the Company's Judgment, further investment in any eligible series should become inappropriate in view of the purposes of the policy. The Company will not substitute any shares attributable to the Owner's interest in a division of Separate Account A without notice to the Owner and prior approval of the Securities and Exchange Commission, to the extent required by the Investment Company Act of 1940. This shall not prevent Separate Account A from purchasing other securities for other series or classes of policies, or from permitting conversion between series or classes of policies or contracts on the basis of requests made by owners. The Company reserves the right to establish additional divisions of Separate Account A, each of which would Invest in a new series of Jefferson Pilot Variable Fund, Inc., American Century Variable Portfolios, Inc., American Funds Insurance Series, The Ayeo Series Trust, Fidelity Variable insurance Products fund, Franklin Templeton Variable Insurance Products Trust, MFS Variable Insurance Trust, PIMCO Variable Insurance Trust, Pro Funds VP, Scudder Investment VIT Funds, T, Rowe Price Equity Series, Inc. and Vanguard Variable Insurance Fund, inc, or in shares of another open-end investment company. The Company also reserves the right to eliminate existing divisions of Separate Account A.

 

It the Company considers it to be in the best Interest of persons having voting privileges under the policies, Separate Account A may be operated as a management company under the investment Company Act of 1940; or it may be deregistered under that Act in the event registration is no longer required or it may be combined with other separate accounts.

 

 
 

NONFORFEITURE VALUES

 

Accumulation Value - The accumulation value of the policy is equal to the total of the policy's accumulation value in the General Account and the policy's accumulation value in divisions of Separate Account A.

 

Cash Value - The cash value is equal to the accumulation value less a surrender charge.

 

Surrender Charge - The surrender charge for the initial Specified Amount is calculated by multiplying the surrender factor (shown below) by the lesser of (1) or (2), where:

 

(1) is the total premium paid in the first policy year;

 

(2) is the Maximum Surrender Premium for the issue age, as shown in the table on page 3A, multiplied by the Initial Specified Amount.

 

The surrender factor will vary by policy year according to the following table:

 

Policy Year 1-5 6 7 8 9 10 11 and later

 

Surrender Factor .30 .25 .20 .15 .10 .05 0

 

An additional surrender charge will be assessed for any increase in the Specified Amount. The additional charge is calculated by multiplying the surrender factor (shown below) by the lesser of (i) or (2), where:

 

(1) is (a) times (b) divided by (c).where:

 

(a) is the increase in the Specified Amount;

 

(b) is the sum of the cash value just prior to the Increase in the Specified Amount and the total premiums received in the twelve months just following the increase in the Specified Amount;

 

(c) is the Specified Amount after the increase in the Specified Amount;

 

(2) is the Maximum Surrender Premium for the attained age of the Insured on the effective date of the increase in the Specified Amount, as shown on page 3A, multiplied by the increase in the Specified Amount.

 

The surrender factor is based on how long the increase has been in effect according to the following table:

 

Increase Year 1-5 6 7 8 9 10 11 and later

 

Surrender Factor .15 .125 .10 .075 .05 .025 0

 

The surrender charge in affect at any time is the sum of the surrender charge for the Initial Specified Amount plus the additional surrender charge for any increase in the Specified Amount. If the Specified Amount is decreased, the surrender charge will not decrease.

 

Separate Account Accumulation Values - The accumulation value in each division on the policy date is equal to the portion of the net premium which has been paid and allocated to that division, less the portion of the first monthly deduction allocated to the policy's accumulation value in that division.

 

At the end of each valuation period after the policy date, the policy's accumulation value in a division Is equal to (1) plus (2) plus (3) minus (4) minus (5) where:

 

(1) is the accumulation value in the division on the preceding valuation date multiplied by the Net Investment Factor for the current valuation period.

 

(2) is any net premium received during the current valuation period which is allocated to the division.

 

(3) is all accumulation values transferred to the division from another division or the General Account during the current valuation period.

 

 
 

(4) is all accumulation values transferred from the division to another division or the General Account and accumulation values transferred to secure a policy debt during the current valuation period.

 

(5) is all withdrawals from the division during the current valuation period.

 

In addition, whenever a valuation period includes the Monthly Anniversary Day, the accumulation value at the end of such period is reduced by the portion of the monthly deduction allocated to the division.

 

Net Investment Factor - The Net Investment Factor measures the investment performance of a division during a valuation period. The Net Investment Factor for each division for a valuation period is calculated as (a) divided by (b), minus (c) where:

 

(a) is (1) the value of the assets in the division at the end of the preceding valuation period, plus (2) the investment income and capital gains, realized or unrealized, credited to the assets in the valuation period for which the net investment factor is being determined, minus (3) the capital losses, realized or unrealized, charged against those assets during the valuation period, minus (4) any amount charged against each division for taxes, or any amount the Company sets aside during the valuation period as a reserve for taxes attributable to the operation or maintenance of each division.

 

(b) is the value of the assets in the division at the end of the preceding valuation period.

 

(c) is a charge not to exceed .0024657% for each day in the valuation period. This corresponds to .9% per year for mortality and expense risks.

 

General Account Accumulation Value - The accumulation value In the General Account on the policy date is equal to the portion of the net premium which has been paid and allocated to the General Account, less the portion of the first monthly deduction allocated to the General Account.

 

On each Monthly Anniversary Day, the accumulation value in the General Account is equal to (1) plus (2) plus (3) plus (4) minus (5) minus (6) minus (7) where:

 

(1) is the accumulation value in the General Account on the preceding Monthly Anniversary Day.

 

(2) is one month's interest on item (1).

 

(3) is any net premium received since the preceding Monthly Anniversary Day plus interest from the date the net premium is received to the Monthly Anniversary Day.

 

(4) is the sum of all accumulation values transferred to the General Account division of Separate Account A since the preceding Monthly Anniversary Day and Interest from the date the accumulation value is transferred to the Monthly Anniversary Day.

 

(5) is the sum of all accumulation values transferred from the General Account to a division of Separate Account A since the preceding Monthly Anniversary Day and interest from the date the accumulation value is transferred to the Monthly Anniversary Day.

 

(6) is all withdrawals from the General Account since the preceding Monthly Anniversary Day plus Interest from the date of the withdrawal to the Monthly Anniversary Day.

 

(7) is the portion of the monthly deduction allocated to the accumulation value in the General Account, to cover the policy month following the Monthly Anniversary Day.

 

 
 

On any elate other than a Monthly Anniversary Day, the accumulation value will be calculated on a consistent basis.

 

General Account interest Rate - The policy's accumulation value in the General Account will earn interest daily at a minimum guaranteed effective rate of 4 1/2%. Interest in excess of the guaranteed rate may be applied in the calculation of the accumulation value at such increased rates as the Company may determine. The policy's accumulation value held in the General Account for policy loan collateral will earn interest daily at the lesser of an effective rata of 6% or the interest rate currently credited.

 

Monthly Deduction - The monthly deduction for a policy month shall be equal to (1) plus (2), where:

 

(1) is the cost of insurance (as described below) and the cost of additional benefits provided by rider for the policy month.

 

(2) is a monthly administrative charge. This charge is equal to $6.00 per month in each policy year.

 

The monthly for a policy month shall be equal to (1) plus (2), where:

 

(1) is the cost of insurance (as described below) and the cost of additional benefits provided by rider for the policy month.

 

(2) is a monthly administrative charge. This charge is equal to $6.00 per month in each policy year.

 

The monthly deduction for a policy month will be allocated among the General Account and the divisions of Separate Account A in the same proportion that the accumulation value in the General Account less any debt and the accumulation value in each division bears to the total accumulation value of the policy, less any debt, at the beginning of the policy month.

 

Cost of Insurance - The cost of insurance for the Insured is determined on a monthly oasis. The cost of Insurance is determined separately for the initial Specified Amount and each subsequent increase in Specified Amount. The cost of insurance is calculated as (1), multiplied by the result of (2) minus (3), where:

 

(1) is the cost of insurance rate as described in the Cost of Insurance Rates provision.

 

(2) is the death benefit at tile beginning of the policy month, divided by 1.0036748.

 

(3) is the accumulation value at the beginning of the policy month, prior to the monthly deduction for the cost of insurance.

 

If the Death Benefit Option is Option I and there have been increases in the Specified Amount then the accumulation value shall be first considered a part of the Initial Specified Amount If the accumulation value exceeds the Initial Specified Amount, it shall then be considered a part of the additional Specified Amounts resulting from increases in the order of such increases.

 

Cost of Insurance Rates - The monthly cost of insurance rate is based on the sex, Issue age, policy year, and rating class of the Insured. Monthly cost of insurance rates will be determined by the Company based upon expectations as to future mortality experience. Any change in cost of insurance rates will apply to all individuals of the same class as the Insured. The rating class will be determined separately for the Initial Specified Amount and for any increase in Specified Amount that requires evidence of insurability. However, the cost of insurance rates can never be greater than those shown in the Table of Monthly Guaranteed Cost of Insurance Rates. Such guaranteed maximum rates are based on the Commissioners 1980 Standard Ordinary Mortality Table.

 

 
 

Insufficient Cash Value - If the cash value less any debt on a Monthly Anniversary Day is insufficient to cover the monthly deduction for the month following such Monthly Anniversary Day , the policy shall terminate as provided in the Grace Period provision.

 

Continuation of Insurance - In the event Planned Periodic Premium payments are not continued, insurance coverage under this policy and any benefits provided by rider will be continued until the cash value, less any debt, is insufficient to cover the monthly deduction, as provided in the Grace Period provision. This provision shall not continue the policy beyond the Maturity Date nor continue any rider beyond the date for its termination, as provided in the rider. If the cash value is sufficient to continue this policy to the Maturity Date, then any remaining cash value will be paid to the Owner if the Insured is then living.

 

Surrender - Upon written request the Owner may surrender this po1icy at any time during the lifetime of the Insured and before the Maturity Date. The amount payable on surrender of this policy shall be the cash value on the date the Company receives the request for surrender, less any debt.

 

Withdrawal of Cash Value (Withdrawal) - Upon written request the Owner may make a withdrawal from this policy. Any withdrawal is subject to the following conditions:

 

(1) The amount withdrawn may not exceed the cash value less any outstanding debt.

 

(2) The minimum amount that may be withdrawn is $750.

 

(3) A charge equal to the lesser of $25 or 2% of the amount of the withdrawal will be deducted from the amount of each withdrawal.

 

(4) The accumulation value will be reduced by the sum of the withdrawal and a pro-rata portion of the surrender charge in effect on the date of the withdrawal. The remaining accumulation value and schedule of surrender charges will be determined by multiplying each of these values by a numerical factor. This numerical factor is equal to

 

Amount of Withdrawal

1 - [___________________________________]

Cash Value Immediately Before Withdrawal

 

(5) The Death Benefit will be reduced by an amount equal to the reduction in the accumulation value. This will result in a reduction of the Specified Amount if the Death Benefit is Option 1 by an amount equal to the reduction in the accumulation value. The Specified Amount remaining In force after any withdrawal must be at least $10,000.

 

The Owner may allocate the withdrawal among the General Account and the divisions of Separate Account A. If the Owner does not specify the allocation, then the withdrawal will be allocated among the General Account and the divisions of Separate Account A in the same proportion that the accumulation value in the General Account. less any debt, and the accumulation value in each division bears to the total accumulation value of the policy, less any debt, on the date of the withdrawal,

 

Basis of Computations - Minimum cash values and reserves in the General Account are based on the Commissioners 1980 Standard Ordinary Mortality Table with interest at 4 1/2% per year.

The method used in computing cash values and reserves in Separate Account A is in accordance with actuarial procedures that recognize the variable nature of Separate Account A. The method used is such that if the Net Investment Factor, lass one, for all divisions of Separate Account A, at all times from the policy date, is equal to an effective annual interest rate of 4 1/2% then the cash values and reserves in Separate Account A will be at least equal to the minimum cash values and reserves, which would have been required by the law of the state in which this policy is delivered, of an equivalent policy in which all net premiums have been allocated to the General Account.

 

 
 

All values under this policy are not less than the values required by the state in which this policy was delivered. A detailed statement of the method of computation of cash values under this policy has been filed with the insurance department of the state in which this policy was delivered.

 

Illustration of Benefits and Values - The Company will provide illustrations of death benefits and cash values at any time after the policy date upon written request by the Owner and payment of a nominal fee. The fee payable will be the one then in effect for this service; however, such fee can never exceed $25. The first illustration in any policy year will be furnished free of charge. This illustration will be based on the existing cash value at the time of request and maximum cost of insurance rates. Additional illustrations win be made based on the existing cash value and current mortality assumptions.

 

SETTLEMENT OPTIONS

 

Election of an Option – Any proceeds to be paid under this policy may be paid as an income under any one of the options stated below. The election of an option or change of prior election must be made in writing to the Company at its Home Office. If an option is not chosen by the Owner prior to the death of the insured, the primary beneficiary may make such election.

 

Unless the Company agrees otherwise, any such payments will be made only to a natural person taking in his own right. An option may be elected only if the amount of the proceeds is $2,000 or more. The Company may change the interval of payments to 3, 6 or 12 months, if necessary to increase the guaranteed payments to at least $20.00 each.

 

Option A Installments of a Specified Amount – Payments of an agreed amount to be made each month until the proceeds and interest are exhausted.

 

Option B – Installments for a Specified Period – Payments to be made each month for an agreed number of years.

 

Option C – Life Income – Payments to be made each month for the lifetime of the payee. It is guaranteed that payments will be made for a minimum of 10, 15, or 20 years as agreed upon.

 

Option D – Interest – Payment of interest on the proceeds held by the Company. The amount of interest payment is calculated at the compound rate of 3% per year. Interest payments will be made in 12-, 6-, 3-, or 1-month intervals as agreed upon.

 

Supplementary Contract – When the proceeds of this policy becomes payable, a supplementary contract setting forth the terms of the option chosen will be issued to the payee. The first payment under Option A, B, or C shall be payable on the effective date of such option. The first payment under Option D shall be payable at the end of the first agreed payment interval.

 

Interest – The interest rat for Options A, B, and D will not be less than 3% per year. The interest rate for Option C will not be less than 2 1/2% per year. Interest in addition to that stated may be paid or credited from time to time under any option but only at the sole discretion of the Company.

 

Withdrawal Value – Unless otherwise stated in the election of an option, the payee shall have right to receive the withdrawal value under that option.

 

For Options A and D the withdrawal value shall be any unpaid balance of proceeds plus accrued interest.

 

 
 

For Option B the withdrawal value shall be the commuted value of the remaining payments. Such value will be calculated on the same basis as the original payments.

 

For Option C the withdrawal value shall be the commuted value of the remaining payments. Such value will be calculated on the same basis as the original payments. To receive this value, the payee must submit evidence of insurability. Such evidence must be satisfactory to the Company. Otherwise, the withdrawal value shall be the commuted value of any remaining guaranteed payments. In this event the payments will be resumed at the end of the guaranteed period if the payee should be alive on that date. The payments will then continue for the lifetime of the payee.

 

Under any of these options, the payee shall have the right to receive the withdrawal value in partial amounts. However, the partial amounts shall not be less than the smaller of the withdrawal value or $100.

 

Death of Payee – If the payee dies before the proceeds are exhausted or the prescribed payments made, a final payment will be made in one sum to the estate of the last surviving payee. The amount to be paid will be calculated as described for the applicable option in the Withdrawal Value Provision.

 

Limitation on Rights of Payee and Claims of Creditors – Neither the amount retained under an option nor any payment made under an option can be assigned or pledged. To the extent permitted by law such amounts or payments shall not subject to claims of creditors or legal process.

 

 
 

EXTENSION OF MATURITY DATE RIDER

 

Effective Date –

 

This rider is part of the policy to which it is attached. It takes effect on the effective date of the policy unless a later effective date is shown above. In this rider, “we”, “us” or “our” means Jefferson Pilot Financial Insurance Company; “you” means the Owner of the policy; and “insured” means the person named on the Data Page.

 

The Maturity Date may be extended beyond that date otherwise defined in the policy by written request. The new Maturity Date will be that requested by you. If you elect to extend the original Maturity Date, you may revoke this election in writing at any time prior to the original Maturity Date.

 

After the original Maturity Date:

 

(1) No new premiums will be accepted by us;
(2) We will continue to credit interest to the policy’s Accumulation Value of the General Account in the same manner;
(3) The Accumulation Value in each division of Separate Account A will continue to be calculated in the same manner;
(4) The Death Benefit will always be equal to the Accumulation Value of the policy;
(5) Interest on any policy loans will continue to accrue and become part of any debt;

(6) We will deduct no more cost of insurance charges.

 

 

Chief Executive Officer Secretary

 

 
 

AMENDMENT

 

 

This amendment is a part of the policy to which it is attached and it takes effect on the Policy Date of the policy. This amendment is subject to the terms and conditions of the policy unless otherwise stated herein. The policy is amended as follows:

 

The separate series of funds identified in the first paragraph of the Divisions section on Page 12 and in the first and second paragraph of the Addition, Deletion, or Substitution of Investment section on Page 13 of the SEPARATE ACCOUNT PROVISIONS of Your policy have been changed to:

 

Lincoln Variable Insurance Products Trust, American Century Variable Portfolios, Inc., American Funds Insurance Series, Delaware VIP Trust, DWS Investments VIT Funds, Fidelity Variable Insurance Products Fund, Franklin Templeton Variable Insurance Products Trust, Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust, MFS Variable Insurance Trust, PIMCO Variable Insurance Trust, ProFunds VP, Vanguard Variable Insurance Fund, Inc.

 

This amendment will terminate upon termination of the policy.

 

 

Secretary

 

 
 

GENERAL PROVISIONS RIDER

 

Jefferson Pilot Financial Insurance Company issues this Rider as a part of the policy to which it is attached. This Rider is issued in consideration of the application and payment of the initial premium for the policy. There is no premium charge for this Rider. The following sections of the policy are changed:

 

(1) The last sentence in sub-paragraph 5 under Changes in Existing Coverage on Page 7 is changed to “No such decrease may reduce the Specified Amount below $25,000.00”;

 

(2) The following sub-paragraph under Changes in Existing Coverage on Page 7 is added:

 

(6) The Specified Amount cannot be increased at any time after the Insured reaches the age of 85.

 

(3) The entire section Policy Loans on Page 11 is replaced by the following section:

 

Policy Loans – After the first policy anniversary, a loan will be granted upon the sole security and assignment of this policy to the Company. The maximum loan amount is 90% of the cash value on the date of the loan less any debt. Cash value is defined under Nonforfeiture Values on Page 14. Any debt will be deducted from the proceeds payable at the Insured’s death, on maturity, or on surrender.

 

The Owner may allocate the policy loan among the General Account and the divisions of Separate Account A. If the Owner does not specify the allocation, then the policy loan will be allocated among the General Account and the divisions of Separate Account A in the same proportion that the accumulation value in the General Account, less any debt, and the accumulation value in each division bears to the total accumulation value of the policy, less any debt, on the date of the policy loan. Accumulation value in each division equal to the policy loan allocated to each division will be transferred to the General Account and reduce the accumulation value in that division. If loan interest is not paid when due, an amount of accumulation value equal to the loan interest will also be transferred.

 

If the policy debt exceeds the policy's accumulation value in the General Account, the Company will transfer accumulation value equal to the excess debt from the divisions of Separate Account A to the General Account as security for the excess debt. The amount transferred will be allocated among the divisions in the same proportion that the accumulation value in each division bears to the policy's total accumulation value in all division of Separate Account A.

 

Types of Policy Loans – Type A and Type B – There are two (2) types of policy loans which the Company will grant to the Owner – Type A and Type B. The type of loan which the Company will grant depends upon the amount of unloaned Type A balance available at the time the loan is taken. The unloaned Type A balance if 90% of the cash value, less the threshold, and less the sum of any outstanding Type A loans as defined below. The threshold is the Guideline Single Premium for this policy at issue as defined in Section 7702 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986 entitled "Life Insurance Contract Defined". If the Specified Amount as defined on Page 10 of this policy increases, the threshold will be increased to the threshold at issue times the ratio of the largest specified Amount ever existing on the policy to the Initial Specified Amount. If the Specified Amount decreases, the threshold will not change.

 

A Type A Loan is a policy loan granted by the Company when the unloaned Type A balance before the loan is taken exceeds the loan requested.

 

A Type B Loan is a policy loan granted by the Company when the unloaned Type A balance before the loan is taken is less than or equal to zero.

 

 
 

When the unloaned Type A balance before the loan is taken exceeds zero, but is less than the loan requested, a Type A Loan equal to the unloaned Type A balance will be granted by the Company. The remainder of the requested loan will be a Type B Loan.

 

The Company will grant a Type A Loan first before a Type B Loan. Once a policy loan is granted, it remains a Type A or a Type B until it is repaid.

 

Policy Loan Interest – The interest charged by the Company on a policy loan depends upon the type of loan granted. On a Type A Loan the Company will charge an effective interest rate of two (2) percentage points lower than the effective interest rate charged at the time by the Company for a Type B Loan.

 

On a Type B Loan the Company will charge interest at the effective maximum rate of 8%, or at any lower rate established by the Company for any period during which the loan is outstanding.

 

Loan Interest accrues on a daily basis from the date of the loan and is payable at the end of each policy year. Loan interest unpaid on a policy anniversary becomes loan principal. The Company shall provide at least 30 days written notice to the Owner (or any other party designated by the Owner to receive notice under this policy) and any assignee recorded at the Home Office of any increase in the interest rate on loans outstanding 40 or more days prior to the effective date of the increase. As to loans made during the 40 days before the effective date of the policy loan interest rate increase, the Company shall notify the Owner and any assignee at the time the loan is made.

 

The effective date of any increase in such interest rate shall not be less than twelve months after the effective date of the establishment of the previous rate. If the interest rate is increased, the amount of such increase shall not exceed o ne percent per year. Interest accrues on a daily basis from the date of the loan and is compounded annually. Interest unpaid on a policy anniversary becomes loan principal.

 

Debt – As used in this policy, debt means the principal of any loan outstanding against this policy, plus any accrued loan interest. If the policy debt exceeds the cash value, the Company will send a notice by mail to the Owner and to the assignee, if any, at their addresses last reported to the Company. If the excess is not paid within 61 days from the date the notice is mailed, the policy will terminate without value.

 

Policy Loan Repayment – Any debt may be repaid, in whole or in part, at any time while this policy is in force. When a loan repayment is made, accumulation value securing the debt in the General Account equal to the loan repayment will be allocated among the General Account and divisions of Separate Account A u sing the same percentages used to allocate net premiums. Repayments will be used to reduce policy loans until fully paid in the following order:

 

(1) Any or all Type B Loans; then

 

(2) Any or all Type A Loans.

 

 

 
 

AMENDMENT

 

This Amendment becomes a part of the policy to which it is attached and is effective on the Policy Date of the policy. This Amendment terminates upon termination of the policy.

 

The paragraph entitled Basis of Computations in the Nonforfeiture Values is hereby deleted and is replaced by the following:

 

Basis of Computations - Minimum cash values in the General Account are based on the Commissioners 1980 Standard Ordinary Mortality Table with interest at 4.50% per year. Reserves in the General Account are based on the Commissioners 1980 Standard Ordinary Mortality Table with interest at 4.00% per year.

 

The method used in computing cash values and reserves in Separate Account A is in accordance with actuarial procedures that recognize the variable nature of Separate Account A. The method used is such that if the Net Investment Factor, less one, for all divisions of Separate Account A, at all times from the policy date, is equal to an effective annual interest rate of 4.50% for cash values and 4.00% for reserves, then the cash values and reserves in Separate Account A will be at least equal to the minimum cash values and reserves, which would have been required by the law of the state in which this policy is delivered, of an equivalent policy in which all net premiums have been allocated to the General Account.

 

All values under this policy are not less than the values required by the state in which this policy was delivered. A detailed statement of the method of computation of cash values under this policy has been filed with the insurance department of the state in which this policy was delivered.

 

Secretary

 
 

SETTLEMENT OPTIONS

TABLES OF MONTHLY INSTALLMENTS UNDER OPTION B OR C

 

Monthly installments are shown for each $1,000 of net proceeds applied. The ages shown are ages nearest birthday when the first monthly installment is payable.

 

OPTION B TABLE

INSTALLMENTS FOR A SPECIFIED PERIOD

 

Years Monthly Installment Years Monthly Installment Years Monthly Installment Years Monthly Installment Years Monthly Installment
1 $84.47 7 $13.16 13 $7.71 19 $5.73 25 $4.71
2 42.86 8 11.68 14 7.26 20 5.51 26 4.59
3 28.99 9 10.53 15 6.87 21 5.32 27 4.48
4 22.06 10 9.61 16 6.53 22 5.15 28 4.37
5 17.91 11 8.86 17 6.23 23 4.99 29 4.27
6 15.41 12 8.24 18 5.96 24 4.84 30 4.18
Multiply the monthly installment by 11.84 for annual, by 5.96 for semi-annual or by 2.99 for quarterly installments.  

 

OPTION C TABLE

LIFE INCOME

Attained

Age of Payee

MONTHLY INSTALLMENTS

Attained

Age of Payee

MONTHLY INSTALLMENTS
    GUARANTEED     GUARANTEED
Male Female 10 Years 15 Years 20 Years Male Female 10 Years 15 Years 20 Years
16 or Under 21 or Under

 

$2.83

 

$2.82

 

$2.81

 

51

 

56

 

$4.60

 

$4.44

 

$4.24

17 22 2.85 2.84 2.84 52 57 4.69 4.52 4.30
18 23 2.88 2.87 2.86 53 58 4.79 4.60 4.36
19 24 2.90 2.89 2.88 54 59 4.90 4.69 4.41
20 25 2.93 2.92 2.91 55 60 5.01 4.77 4.47
21 26 2.95 2.95 2.93 56 61 5.12 4.86 4.53
22 27 2.98 2.97 2.96 57 62 5.23 4.94 4.59
23 28 3.01 3.00 2.99 58 63 5.35 5.03 4.64
24 29 3.04 3.03 3.02 59 64 5.48 5.12 4.70
25 30 3.08 3.07 3.05 60 65 5.61 5.21 4.75
                   
26 31 3.11 3.10 3.08 61 66 5.74 5.30 4.80
27 32 3.14 3.13 3.11 62 67 5.87 5.39 4.85
28 33 3.18 3.17 3.15 63 68 6.01 5.48 4.90
29 34 3.22 3.20 3.18 64 69 6.16 5.56 4.94
30 35 3.26 3.24 3.22 65 70 6.30 5.65 4.98
31 36 3.30 3.28 3.25 66 71 6.45 5.73 5.02
32 37 3.34 3.32 3.29 67 72 6.60 5.82 5.05
33 38 3.39 3.36 3.33 68 73 6.76 5.90 5.09
34 39 3.43 3.41 3.37 69 74 6.91 5.97 5.12
35 40 3.48 3.45 3.41 70 75 7.07 6.05 5.14
                   
36 41 3.53 3.50 3.45 71 76 7.23 6.12 5.17
37 42 3.59 3.55 3.50 72 77 7.38 6.18 5.19
38 43 3.64 3.60 3.54 73 78 7.54 6.24 5.20
39 44 3.70 3.65 3.59 74 79 7.69 6.30 5.22
40 45 3.76 3.71 3.64 75 80 7.84 6.35 5.23
41 46 3.82 3.77 3.69 76 81 7.98 6.39 5.24
42 47 3.88 3.82 3.74 77 82 8.13 6.43 5.25
43 48 3.95 3.88 3.79 78 83 8.26 6.47 5.26
44 49 4.02 3.95 3.84 79 84 8.39 6.50 5.26
45 50 4.09 4.01 3.90 80 or 85 or 8.51 6.53 5.27
46 51 4.17 4.08 3.95 Over Over      
47 52 4.25 4.15 4.01          
48 53 4.33 4.22 4.07          
49 54 4.42 4.29 4.12          
50 55 4.50 4.37 4.18          
Multiply the monthly installment by 11.80 for annual, 5.93 for semi-annual or by 2.98 for quarterly installments.

 

 
 

 

Jefferson Pilot Jefferson Pilot Financial Insurance Company , PO Box 515, Concord, NH 03302-0515 (hereinafter referred to as “the Company”)

 

PREMIUM ALLOCATION & DISCLOSURE FORM FOR VARIABLE UNIVERSAL LIFE INSURANCE (Completed Form Must Accompany Application for Life Insurance)

 

Name of Owner:       
  First Middle Initial Last
       
Name of Insured(s):        
  First Middle Initial Last
       
       
  First Middle Initial Last

 

Section I: Disclosure for Variable Universal Life Insurance

I have applied for a variable universal life insurance policy (“Policy”). I have received a prospectus, which describes the Policy’s provisions in detail.

 

My Representative has reviewed each of the items in Subsections A through E with me, and I understand:

 

A. Most variable universal life insurance policies have the following general features (but Policy features, definitions and details will vary by insurance company and Product):

 

1. What am I buying: A variable universal life insurance policy.

 

2. Where my payments go: My payments are premiums for the Policy. After the insurer takes out certain charges from each payment, I can direct the net payments to the fixed account (if available) and/or sub-accounts I select. Each sub-account invests in a professionally managed portfolio with a particular investment objective. I am assuming investment risk for all funds placed in sub-accounts. The funds placed in a fixed account are guaranteed and backed by the claims paying ability of the insurance company.

 

3. Monthly Policy Deductions: Most variable universal life policies deduct charges from the policy’s cash value monthly or periodically; these cover an administrative charge, the cost of insurance rates and any option (rider) benefits. In most variable universal life policies, the cost of insurance rates are set by the insured’s risk class and vary by the insured’s age each year.

 

4. Sub-account and portfolio fees: Other fees and expenses are charged against the assets of the selected sub-accounts and the portfolios in which they invest.

 

5. Does the cash value of my policy keep changing: Yes. Future Policy cash values may be more or less than the premiums paid. They will depend on:

 

Actual investment results of sub-accounts and/or the interest credited to the Fixed Account (if selected);
The cost of insurance rate and other regular deductions;
The amount and timing of my premium payments and any cash withdrawals or loans I take; and
Any changes I make to the Policy.

 
 

 

6. Surrender, loans and partial withdrawals have limits and charges: I can surrender my Policy at any time. In most policies, the value I would receive on surrender is the cash value of the Policy, less any surrender charges, less any outstanding policy loans. Surrender charges may significantly affect the amount available for loans and withdrawals, and they may apply for a number of years. Loans and partial withdrawals may have other limits, conditions and/or charges; and they will reduce the death benefit payable and the cash value available to cover the policy deductions. Surrenders and/or withdrawals of cash values may cause the Policy to lapse unless additional premium dollars are paid in. The prospectus describes these limits, conditions, effects and charges in detail.

 

B. Illustrations: Any policy illustration is hypothetical and based on assumptions. Illustrations are intended to show how a policy would work under different scenarios and not to project results. Actual rates of return and policy results are not guaranteed and will vary [payments placed in the fixed account carry some guarantees for specified periods of time).

 

C. Taxes: Jefferson Pilot Financial Insurance Company does not give tax or legal advice. I will consult with my own professional tax or legal advisor about my own tax situation if necessary. The Prospectus discusses Federal tax matters under current tax law as they pertain to the policy.

 

D. My needs and objectives:

 

a. The policy is designed for long-term buyers who seek life insurance benefits and a choice of investment options for its cash value. I have reviewed my insureable needs and financial objectives with my Representative. I have an adequate cash reserve for emergencies outside of this policy. I have determined that my payments are affordable and the Policy, including the designated sub-accounts, is appropriate for my insurance and financial needs and objectives.

 

b. This policy is intended to be purchased as a funding vehicle for (check one):

 

¨   Income Replacement ¨ Supplemental Retirement Income ¨ Estate Plan
¨   Charitable Gift ¨ Split Dollar ¨ Deferred Compensation
¨   Key Person ¨ Bonus Plan ¨ Business Continuity
¨   Other

 

E. Prospectus: I have been given a currently effective prospectus and have had sufficient opportunity to review it. My representative has satisfactorily answered my questions, if any, that I have regarding the proposed policy.

 

Section II: Allocation of Net Premiums (5% is the minimum allowed for any sub-account used. Use whole numbers only – no fractions or decimals. Total sum of percentage allocations must equal 100%.)

 

 
 

 

Fund Advisor/Subadvisor Percentage Fund No.
ProFund VT Technology ProFund Advisors, LLC  % 082
Vanguard VIF Small Company Growth The Vanguard Group   % 078
ProFund VP Financial ProFund Advisors, LLC   % 083
JPVF Growth Jefferson Pilot Investment Advisory Corporation subadvised by Strong Capital Management, Inc.   % 026
American Funds Growth Capital Research and Management Co.   % 088
Fidelity VIP Growth Fidelity Management Research Co.   % 043
Soudder VIT Small Cap Index Deutsche Asset Management   % 081
JPVF Small Company Jefferson Pilot Investment Advisory Corporation subadvised by Lord, Abbett & Company   % 031
Fidelity VIP Mid Cap Fidelity Management and Research Co.   % 087
ProFund VP Healthcare ProFund Advisors, LLC   % 076
T. Rowe Price Mid-Cap Growth T Rowe Price Associates   % 076
JPVF Mid-Cap Growth Jefferson Pilot Investment Advisory Corporation subadvised by Turner Investment Partners, Inc.   % 071
JPVF Strategic Growth Jefferson Pilot Investment Advisory Corporation subadvised by T Rowe Price Associates, Inc.   % 021
MFS Research MFS Investment Management   % 035
Franklin Small Cap Value Franklin Advisory Services, LLC   % 085
JPVF Mid-Cap Value Jefferson Pilot Investment Advisory Corporation subadvised by Wellington Management Company, LLP   % 072
JPVF Capital Growth Jefferson Pilot Investment Advisory Corporation subadvised by Janus Capital Management, LLC   % 041
Vanguard VIF Mid-Cap Index The Vanguard Group   % 079
Ayco Growth Fund The Ayco Company, LP   % 074
JPVF Small-Cap Value Jefferson Pilot Investment Advisory Corporation subadvised by Dalton, Greiner, Hartman, Maher & Co.   % 070
American Century VP Int’l Fund American Century Investments   % 073
American Century VP Value American Century Investments   % 077
Fidelity VIP Equity-Income Fidelity Management and Research Co.   % 044
JPVF Value Jefferson Pilot Investment Advisory Corporation subadvised by Credit Suisse Asset Management, LLC   % 037
American Funds Growth-Income Capital Research and Management Co.   % 089

 

 
 

Fund Advisor/Subadvisor Percentage Fund No.
Templeton Foreign Securities Fund Templeton Investment Counsel, LLC   % 024
JPVF International Equity Jefferson Pilot Investment Advisory Corporation subadvised by Marsico Capital Management   % 025
MFS Utilities MFS Investment Management   % 036
JPVF S&P 500 Index Jefferson Pilot Investment Advisory Corporation subadvised by Barclays Global Fund Advisors   % 049
JPVF World Growth Stock Jefferson Pilot Investment Advisory Corporation subadvised by Templeton Investment Counsel, LLC   % 006
Fidelity VIP Contrafund Fidelity Management and Research Co.   % 047
Vanguard VIF REIT Index The Vanguard Group   % 080
JPVF High Yield Bond Jefferson Pilot Investment Advisory Corporation subadvised by MFS Investment Management   % 028
JPVF Balanced Jefferson Pilot Investment Advisory Corporation subadvised by Janus Capital Management, LLC   % 045
PIMCO Total Return PIMCO   % 075
Fidelity VIP Investment Grade Bond Fidelity Management and Research Co.   % 086
JPVF Money Market Jefferson Pilot Investment Advisory Corporation subadvised by MFS Investment Management   % 011
Other     %  
General Account     % 050
Total     %  

 

 

     
Signature of Owner                                         Date    
     
Meiton    
Name of Owner (Please Print)    
     
     
Social Security or Tax ID Number   Owner’s Brokerage Account Number
     

I declare that I have reviewed each of these ______ with the Owner.

 

     
Signature of Registered Representative       Date   Rep Number
     
     
Name of Registered Representative (Please Print)    
     

I have reviewed this transaction and find it suitable for the client.

 

     
Signature of Approving Principal       Date    
     
     
Name of Principal (Please Print)    
     

 

 
 

 

Jefferson Pilot Jefferson Pilot Financial Insurance Company , PO Box 515, Concord, NH 03302-0515 (hereinafter referred to as “the Company”)

 

APPLICATION SUPPLEMENT FOR VARIABLE LIFE INSURANCE

 

Instructions: For use with individual and survivorship life products. Complete information for both Proposed insureds, where requested, if applying for Joint and last Survivor Flexible Premium Variable Life.

 

The Variable Life Premium Allocation Form shall also be completed and attached.

 

A. 1) Proposed Insured:     Birthdate:   /   /  
                     
  2) Proposed Insured:     Birthdate:   /   /  
                     
                     

 

B. Premium Payor (Complete if the Premium Payor is other than the Proposed Insured(s))

 

  1.  Name of Payor:  
       
  2.  Relationship to Proposed Insured(s):  
       

 

 

C. Monthly Charges

 

Monthly insurance and administrative charges will be deducted from the General Account and divisions of the Separate Account on a pro rata basis unless the box is checked below:

 

¨ Deduct all charges from the                      division (any single division or the General Account may be noted).

 

COMPLETE THIS SECTION ONLY IF APPLYING FOR INDIVIDUAL FLEXIBLE PREMIUM VARIABLE LIFE INSURANCE:

 

D. Death Benefit Qualification Test

 

Please choose the Death Benefit Qualification Test. Once a test has been selected it may not be changed during the life of the contract.

 

¨ Cash Value Accumulation Test            ¨ Guideline Premium Test

 

E. Suitability

 

  Yes No    
         
  ¨ ¨ 1. Have you, the Proposed insured(s) and the Owner, if other than the Proposed insured(s), received a current Prospectus dated                              for the policy applied for?  
         
  ¨ ¨ 2. Do you understand that the amount and duration of the death benefit may vary depending on the investment performance of funds in the Separate Account?  
         
  ¨ ¨ 3. Do you understand that the cash values may increase or decrease, depending on the investment performance of the funds held in the Separate Account?  
         
  ¨ ¨ 4. With this in mind, do you believe that the policy applied for is in accord with your insurance objective and your anticipated financial needs?  
         

 

 
 

 

Jefferson Pilot

Financial

Elite

LifeComp®

 

 

Elite LifeComp® AGREEMENT FOR UNIVERSAL LIFE POLICY

 

The parties to this Elite LifeComp® Agreement request that the provisions of this form be included in the Insurer’s file for the life insurance policy identified below. Any previous designations of beneficiary or contingent beneficiary and election of settlement options are hereby revoked.

 

Policy No.

 

 

 

Or New Application Date On the Life of Named Insured(s)

 

I. DEFINITIONS Where the terms below appear, they are defined as follows:

 

“INSURER” means the following company: (select one)

 

¨ Jefferson-Pilot Life   ¨ Jefferson Pilot Financial
  Insurance Company     Insurance Company
  P.O. Box 21008     One Granite Place, P.O. Box 515
  Greensboro, NC 27420     Concord, NH 03302-0515

 

 

 

“Co-Owner”

 

 

“Employer”

 

 

“Co-Beneficiary”

 

 

 

 

 

 

“Net Premiums”: For the purpose of this Agreement, the term “Net Premiums” means the total premiums paid on the policy by the Employer plus accrued interest thereon, any partial withdrawals made by the Employer, and any other amounts received by the Employer from the Co-Owner to reduce the Co-Owner’s obligation under the outstanding Employer loan plus an effective annual rate of ______% or the actual growth in policy values for the year, if less. In no event will the Net Premiums be less than the outstanding employer loan plus any accrued but unpaid interest on the employer loan.

 

 
 

“Insured”: For purposes of this Agreement, the term “Insured” means that individual (named in the space provided above) on whose life the insurance coverage is provided, or where the insurance policy provides coverage on the lives of two individuals, “Insured” shall refer to both individuals on whose lives the coverage applies.

 

II. Payment of Premiums and Interest

 

With regard to policy premiums and interest on the Employer loan, the Employer and Co-Owner agree:

 

· The Employer’s portion of any premium contribution shall constitute a loan to the Co-Owner.
· Any voluntary additional premium contributions by the Co-Owner paid indirectly to the insurer through the Employer shall not be part of the Employer’s Net Premiums. The Co-Owner is obligated for interest on the employer loan at the Applicable Federal Rate, as determined under IRC §7872 and regulations thereunder.

 

III. Division of Death Proceeds

 

This agreement contemplates a division of death proceeds between two beneficiaries: the Employer and the Co-Beneficiary.

 

Upon payment of the death proceeds while this Elite LifeComp® Agreement is in effect: (Select one)

 

1. ¨ The Employer shall receive death proceeds equal to the Net Premiums as defined in Section 1 of this document.  Notwithstanding, in no event shall the Co-Beneficiary be entitled to receive an amount which is less than the Policy Value or Cash Value less the total of Net Premiums and any policy loans by the Co-Owner even if the Employer’s defined share of the proceeds must be reduced accordingly.  
     
2. ¨ The Employee shall receive death proceeds equal to the sum of ____________ plus the Net Premiums as defined in Section 1 of this document.  Notwithstanding, in no event shall the Co-Beneficiary be entitled to receive an amount which is less than the Policy Value or Cash Value less the total of Net Premiums and any policy loans by the Co-Owner even if the Employer’s defined share of the proceeds must be reduced accordingly.  

 

Regardless of the option selected above, the amount payable to the Co-Beneficiary shall be referred to as “Co-Beneficiary Death Proceeds.”

 

Insurer shall pay the entire net death proceeds in one sum to the joint order of the Employer, the Co-Beneficiary, and any collateral assignee. Payment by insurer in accordance with the above will fully and finally discharge insurer for the amount so paid.

 

IV. Ownership Rights

 

Unless otherwise state herein, the Employer, acting alone, may exercise the following rights:

 

 
 
(1) The right to borrow against, pledge or assign the policy, however, in an amount not to exceed the Net Premiums.
(2) The right to make partial surrenders of the cash surrender value, provided the aggregate amount of such partial surrenders shall not exceed the amount of the Net Premiums.
(3) The right to designate and change the beneficiary for the Employer’s share of the death proceeds.
(4) The right to change the planned premium, mode of premium payment and the frequency of premium payment.

 

Unless otherwise state herein, the Co-Owner, acting alone, may exercise the following rights:

 

(1) The right to designate and change the Co-Beneficiary and change a settlement option for the Co-Beneficiary.
(2) The right to exercise the Conversion Privilege of any Spouse Term Rider or Children’s Term Rider which is included in the policy and be the Owner and premium payor of any new policy issued in lieu of such rider.
(3) The right to transfer, assign or pledge the Co-Owner’s interest in the policy.

 

Unless otherwise stated herein, the Employer and Co-Owner must act jointly to exercise the following rights:

 

(1) The right to change the Specified Amount of the policy and the death benefit option.

(2) The right to reinstate the policy.
(3) The right to borrow against or make a partial surrender of the Co-Owner’s interest in the policy.

 

The Employer’s consent to these transactions shall not be unreasonably withheld.

 

Where the policy is variable universal life insurance, the Employer and Co-Owner must also act jointly to exercise the following additional rights:

 

(1) The right to reallocate premiums among the divisions of the Separate Account and the General Account.
(2) The right to transfer accumulation value among the divisions of the Special Account and the General Account.

 

By signing immediately below, the employer waives the right of Employer consent and joint action to reallocate premiums among divisions of the Separate Account and the General Account, and the right to transfer accumulation value among the divisions of the Separate Account and General Account.

 

Employer Waiver by:   Attest:  
  Title   Title

 

The Employer and Co-Owner hereby agree that Insurer is authorized to recognize the Employer’s claims to its rights hereunder and to rely on the Employer’s determination of any amount payable to the Employer under this policy prior to the death of the Insured, with no further inquiry of any nature. The exercise of these rights and determination of these amounts by the Employer shall be binding on the Co-Owner, and the rights of any other persons or parties having an ownership or beneficiary interest in the policy shall be subject to such exercise and/or such determination.

 

 
 

Nevertheless, as between the Employer and the Co-Owner, the Employer covenants that it will not exercise any rights, options and privileges not specifically reserved to the Employer in a manner which would impair any right or interest of the Co-Owner or Co-Beneficiary. In a like manner, the Co-Owner covenants that it will not exercise any rights, options or privileges not specifically reserved to the Co-Owner in a manner which would impair any right or interest of the Employer.

 

This Agreement may be added to a policy previously owned by the Employer and/or the Co-Owner, including any policy collaterally assigned by the Co-Owner to the Employer. A tax-free exchange of a previously owned policy for a new policy issued by the insurer may be a necessary preliminary step before this Agreement can be added to a policy. If there is a tax-free exchange of a previously owned policy, it is expressly agreed that, the exchange will be requested by the owner(s) (and assignee, if any) of the previously owned policy. Following full and final completion of the policy exchange, the owner(s) (and assignee, if any) request that this Agreement be added to the new policy, and that the Agreement become immediately effective.

 

V. Termination

 

A. Upon the termination of the Co-Owner’s employment with the Employer for any reason other than death of the insured or if the Co-Owner shall fail to pay that portion of each premium payment, if any, required in II above, the Employer shall have the following rights, without the consent of the Co-Owner.

 

(1) If the Surrender Value of the policy is less than the Net Premiums, the Employer shall have the right to:

 

(a) surrender the policy and receive all surrender proceeds tot he exclusion of the Co-Owner, or

 

(b) release the Employer’s rights in the policy upon payment by the Co-Owner to the Employer an amount equal to the Net Premiums. Such release of the Employer’s rights shall be upon such forms as insurer may require.

 

(2) If the Surrender Value exceeds the Net Premiums, the following shall apply:

 

(a) The Employer may make a partial surrender in an amount equal to the Net Premiums. At the election of the Employer, the Employer may receive a policy with a Cash Surrender Value equal to the Net Premium and a Death Benefit which shall not exceed that to which the Employer was entitled under Article III. Following the Employer’s partial surrender and release of ownership rights, the Co-Owner shall receive a policy with the original policy date and with a Death Benefit not to exceed the Co-Beneficiary’s Death Proceeds determined under Article III.

 

(b) If the Employer elects not to take a policy pursuant to (a) above, the Employer may elect (i) to make a partial surrender in an amount equal to the Net Premiums, or (ii) release the Employer’s rights in the policy upon payment by the Co-Owner to the Employer of an amount equal to the Net Premiums. Upon receipt of the amount payable under (i) or (ii), above, the Employer shall have no further rights to, or any incidents of ownership in, the policy. Provided, however, that the Death Benefit may be adjusted, if necessary, so that the Death Benefit is no greater than the Co-Beneficiary’s Death Proceeds as determined in Article III. Such release of the Employer’s rights shall be upon such forms as insurer may require.

 

 
 

The type and insured amount of any new policy shall conform to Insurer’s policy rules in effect on the date of the issue or reissue of the new policy.

 

Insurer shall have no responsibility for determining the Net Premiums for the purpose of this Section V but instead shall rely solely upon the statements and representations of the Employer and shall be fully protected in relying thereon.

 

B. If more than one individual is insured under the policy and the insured individual possessing the employer-employee relationship with the named Employer pre-deceases the other insured individual, then this Agreement will automatically terminate under the conditions described in paragraph A(1) or A(2) of this Section.

 

C. Upon the adjudication of the Employer as an insolvent or as a bankrupt, the Co-Owner may pay to the Employer an amount equal to the Net Premiums in exchange for the transfer by the Employer of all ownership rights to the Co-Owner, including the right to change the beneficiary.

 

D. If the employer’s Net Premiums are reduced to zero, this Agreement will automatically terminate and all rights and ownership will become vested in the Co-Owner, otherwise, this Agreement may be cancelled only upon the joint request of the Employer and the Co-Owner.

 

E. In the event of a conflict between the terms of this Agreement and the policy to which it is attached, the terms of the policy shall control.

 

F. It is intended that this Elite LifeComp® Agreement will comply with Treasury decision 9092. The parties agree to amend this Agreement, if necessary, to remain in compliance with the proposed and final regulations.

 

 

Dates                                                                     this the               day of                                                          , 20               .

 

     
Witness   (Signature of Co-Owner/Applicant)

 

 
(Signature of Proposed Instated/Applicant.  If other than Co-Owner/Applicant)

 

The undersigned officers of   represent that the
  (Name of Employer)  

Corporation has duly authorized the execution of this Elite LifeComp® Agreement on behalf of the corporation and that we have the authority to sign this Elite LifeComp® Agreement on behalf of the Employer.

 

Attest:   By:  
       
Title:   Title:  
       
       

 

(To be completed by Home Office)

 

 
 

Insurer acknowledges and has recorded this Elite LifeComp® Agreement.

 

Signed on behalf of the insurer.

 

 

    By:  

(Date Recorded)

 

 

ENDORSEMENTS:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Flexible Premium Variable Life Insurance Policy – Flexible Premiums Payable

Until The Maturity Date Or Until Prior Death. Adjustable Death Benefit.

Insurance Payable At Death. Some Benefits Reflect Investment Results.

Additional Benefits, If Any, As Indicated On Page 3.

Non-Participating. No Dividends.

 

 

 

 

SUBSERVICING AGREEMENT

BY AND BETWEEN

CENLAR FSB

AND

CRESCENT MORTAGE COMPANY

Dated: January 1, 2004

 

 

SUBSERVICING AGREEMENT

THIS SUBSERVICING AGREEMENT (“Agreement”) is made as of the 1 st day of January, 2004 (the “Contract Date”) by and between Crescent Mortgage Company (herein, “Owner/Servicer”), and Cenlar FSB (herein, “Subservicer”).

RECITALS

WHEREAS, Subservicer is engaged in the business of servicing and subservicing residential mortgage loans evidenced by notes and secured by deeds of trust, mortgages, trust deeds or like security instruments; and

WHEREAS, Owner/Servicer owns the right to service the residential mortgage loans or pools of residential mortgage loans identified on Exhibit I attached hereto and Subservicer has the capacity to subservice said loans for Owner/Servicer; and

WHEREAS, Owner/Servicer desires that Subservicer subservice said residential mortgage loans and Subservicer is agreeable thereto;

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the mutual recitals, promises and covenants set forth herein, and other good and valuable consideration herein receipted for, but not herein recited, the receipt of which is hereby acknowledged, the parties hereto agree and covenant as follows:

ARTICLE I.  

DEFINITIONS

For purposes of this Agreement, each of the following terms shall have the meaning specified with respect thereto.

1.1. Agreement.

“Agreement” shall mean this Agreement as the same may be from time to time amended.

1.2. Ancillary Income.

“Ancillary Income” shall mean commissions and other income earned on optional insurance premiums received that are related to the Mortgages and such other fees earned from other solicitations of Mortgagors.

1.3. Applicable Requirements.

“Applicable Requirements” shall mean, as of the time of reference, all of the following: (i) all Mortgage-related obligations of Owner/Servicer, including without limitation those contractual obligations of Owner/Servicer or Subservicer contained in this Agreement or in the Mortgages for which Owner/Servicer is responsible; (ii) all applicable Mortgage related federal, state and local legal and regulatory requirements (including statutes, rules, regulations and ordinances) binding upon Owner/Servicer or Subservicer; (iii) all other applicable Mortgage-related requirements and guidelines of (1) each governmental agency, board, commission, instrumentality and other governmental body or office having jurisdiction, including without limitation those of FHA, FHLMC, FNMA, GNMA, HUD and VA (exclusive of any FHLMC balloon reset obligations), and (2) any private mortgage insurance companies; and (iv) all other applicable judicial and administrative judgments, orders, stipulations, awards, writs and injunctions.

 

 
 

1.4. Commencement Date.

“Commencement Date” shall mean with respect to any particular Mortgage, the date on which Subservicer commences subservicing of the loan and the loan resides on Subservicer’s system.

1.5. FDIC.

“FDIC” shall mean the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation.

1.6. FHA.

“FHA” shall mean the Federal Housing Administration.

1.7. FHLMC.

“FHLMC” shall mean the Federal Home Loan Mortgage Corporation.

1.8. FNMA.

“FNMA” shall mean the Federal National Mortgage Association.

1.9. Ginnie Mae or GNMA.

“GNMA” shall mean the Government National Mortgage Association.

1.10. HUD.

“HUD” shall mean the Department of Housing and Urban Development.

1.11. Initial Commencement Date.

“Initial Commencement Date” means the date on which the Subservicer first commences subservicing a loan (or pool of loans) and the loan (or loans) resides on Subservicer’s system.

1.12. Investor.

“Investor” shall mean the owner and holder of the Note .

1.13. Late Charge.

“Late Charge” shall mean the charge imposed on the Mortgagor pursuant to the applicable note or Mortgage for making a required payment after the scheduled due date and any applicable grace period.

 
 

 

1.14. Mortgage.

“Mortgage”, “mortgages”, “loan” or “loans” shall mean fixed or adjustable rate loans, mortgages, security deeds, trust deeds, deeds of trust and related loan documents relating to fixed or adjustable rate loans which comprise the residential mortgage loans or pools of residential mortgage loans identified on Exhibit I, and similar loans for which Subservicer subsequently accepts subservicing from Owner/Servicer from time to time for inclusion under the terms of this Agreement, as well as other types of loans for which Subservicer accepts subservicing subject to such additional or different terms and conditions as may be agreed to by the Owner/Servicer and Subservicer.

1.15. Mortgagor.

“Mortgagor” or “Mortgagors” shall mean mortgagors, grantors of security deeds, grantors of trust deeds and deeds of trust, and the grantors of any Mortgages.

1.16. Note.

“Note” shall mean the original executed Note evidencing the indebtedness of a Mortgage.

1.17. Owner/Servicer.

“Owner/Servicer” shall mean Crescent Mortgage Company and its successors.

1.18. P&I.

“P & I” shall mean principal and interest.

1.19. REO.

“REO” shall mean real estate owned by Owner/Servicer or Investor.

1.20. Subservicer.

“Subservicer” shall mean Cenlar FSB.

1.21. T&I.

“T & I” shall mean taxes and insurance.

1.22. VA.

“VA” shall mean the Veterans Administration.

 
 

ARTICLE II.  

AGREEMENTS OF SUBSERVICER

2.1. General.

Subservicer hereby agrees to subservice the Mortgages on behalf of Owner/Servicer pursuant and subject to the terms of this Agreement.

2.2. Compliance.

Subservicer will comply with, and Subservicer will use commercially reasonable efforts to cause each Mortgagor to comply with, all Applicable Requirements. Owner/Servicer shall indemnify and hold harmless Subservicer from any liability, claim, loss or damages, including reasonable attorneys’ fees, directly or indirectly resulting from or arising out of Subservicer’s actions taken or not taken in good faith to comply with any Applicable Requirement or to cause a Mortgagor to comply with any Applicable Requirement.

2.3. Procedure.

Until the principal and interest of each Mortgage is paid in full, unless this Agreement is sooner terminated pursuant to the terms hereof, and subject to all Applicable Requirements, Subservicer shall:

(a) Collect from Mortgagors applicable payments of principal and interest, and applicable deposits for taxes, assessments and other public charges that are generally escrowed, hazard insurance premiums, flood insurance premiums as required, FHA insurance or private mortgage insurance premiums, optional insurance premiums, and all other items, as they become due;
(b) Accept payments of principal and interest and escrow deposits only in accordance with the Mortgage and Applicable Requirements. Deficiencies or excesses in payments or deposits shall be accepted and applied, or accepted and not applied, or rejected in accordance with the requirements of HUD and VA, with respect to FHA and VA mortgages, respectively, and in accordance with the provisions of the Mortgage and Applicable Requirements with respect to conventional loans;
(c) Apply all installment payments and escrow deposits collected from the Mortgagor, and maintain permanent mortgage account records capable of producing, in chronological order: the date, amount, distribution, installment due date or other transactions affecting the amounts due from or to the Mortgagor and indicating the latest outstanding balances of principal, escrow deposits, advances, and unapplied payments;
(d) Pending disbursement, segregate and deposit funds collected in a custodial account or accounts in an insured financial institution in such manner as to show the custodial nature thereof, and s o that the Investor and each separate Mortgagor w hose funds have been deposited into such account or accounts will be individually insured under the rules of the FDIC. Subservicer’s records shall show the respective interest of the Investor and each Mortgagor in all such custodial accounts. All funds collected for principal and interest shall be maintained by and carried in records of Subservicer as “trustee” for the Investor, except as may otherwise be required by Applicable Requirements;

 
 

 

(e) Pay interest on custodial accounts that it maintains or controls pursuant to sub-paragraph (d) above if any Applicable Requirement requires the payment of interest on such deposits. Owner/Servicer shall reimburse Subservicer for said interest in accordance with Section 9.1 hereof. As applicable, Subservicer will determine the amount of deposits to be made by Mortgagors and will furnish to each Mortgagor, at least once a year, an analysis of the escrow account;
(f) Maintain accurate records reflecting the status of taxes, ground rents and other recurring similar charges generally accepted by the mortgage servicing industry, which would become a lien on the security property. For all Mortgages providing for the payment to and collection by Subservicer of impound deposits for taxes, ground rents or such other recurring charges, Subservicer shall remit payments for such charges before any penalty date. Subservicer assumes responsibility for the timely remittance of all such payments and will hold harmless and indemnify Owner/Servicer and Investor from all penalties, loss or damage resulting from Subservicer’s failure to discharge said responsibility subsequent to the Commencement Date of the particular Mortgage by the Subservicer, provided that Subservicer will not be liable for any such penalty, loss or damage with respect to the particular Mortgage resulting from the nonpayments of taxes in a timely manner in the event a guaranteed tax service contract is not established prior to the relevant next due bill request cutoff date or if once a guaranteed tax service contract is established, if due to invalid, inaccurate or missing data or a failure of the tax service provider. In the event a guaranteed tax service contract has not been established prior to the relevant next due bill request cutoff date or Subservicer has been unable to verify the validity, accuracy or existence of the data with the tax service provider, Subservicer will use its reasonable best efforts, including review of information provided by the tax service provider to Owner/Servicer relating to those loans with respect to which Subservicer has commenced subservicing, to remit payment for taxes, ground rents or such other recurring charges before any penalty date. For purposes of this section, the term “bill request cutoff date” means the date by which the tax service provider must submit a request for bills for tax, ground rent or other recurring charges to the relevant taxing authority;
(g) For all mortgage loans which have no provisions for the payment to and collection by Subservicer of escrow deposits for taxes, upon notification by Owner/Servicer’s tax service provider Subservicer will pay any delinquent taxes and seek reimbursement of such expense on Owner/Servicer’s behalf from the Mortgagor in accordance with the applicable loan documents or otherwise as permitted by Applicable Requirements. Owner/Servicer shall reimburse Subservicer for such tax payments in accordance with Section 9.1 hereof. Additionally, Subservicer s hall not be responsible for payment of ground rents or other charges for any Mortgage for which it is not obligated to collect escrow deposits and will pay such charges only upon Owner/Servicer’s instructions and remittances;

 
 

 

(h) When funds held in any Mortgagor’s escrow account are insufficient to pay taxes, assessments, mortgage insurance premiums, hazard or flood insurance premiums, or other items due therefrom, Owner/Servicer shall reimburse Subservicer for all outstanding deficiencies, and any other advances made by Subservicer to protect the security of Owner/Servicer and Investor, in accordance with Section 9.1 hereof;
(i) Maintain in full force and effect at all times existing FHA mortgage insurance, VA guaranty, private mortgage insurance, or optional insurance, as applicable, in accordance with the type of Mortgage, and assume responsibility for the remittance of the premiums thereon to the extent funds are available from the Mortgagor’s escrow account; and
(j) For all mortgage loans that have provision for an escrow account for the payment of hazard or flood insurance, assure that improvements on the property securing each Mortgage are insured by a hazard and/or flood insurance policy acceptable under applicable Investor guidelines. In all events, the provisions of the underlying loan documents shall prevail. In order to effectively service the Mortgages during the subservicing period, the mortgagee on the hazard and/or flood insurance policies should read as follows:

Crescent Mortgage Company

its Successors and/or Assigns

Central Loan Administration & Reporting

P.O. Box 1516

Latham, NY 12110-8016

In accordance with the terms of Subservicer’s mortgage impairment insurance policy, Subservicer shall not maintain the original insurance policy for any Mortgage delivered for subservicing.

2.4. Other.

Subservicer shall be responsible for further safeguarding Investor’s interest in the property and rights under the Mortgage by:

(a) Inspecting properties after the Mortgagor is sixty (60) days or more delinquent in the payment of any obligation under the Mortgage, and perform such other inspections as prudence and sound business judgment, in Subservicer’s discretion, suggest;
(b) To the extent commercially reasonable, securing any property found to be vacant or abandoned, and advising Investor of the status thereof;

 
 

 

(c) Whenever Subservicer receives actual notice of any liens, bankruptcy, probate proceeding, tax sale, partition, local ordinance violation, condemnation or proceeding in the nature of eminent domain or similar event that would, in Subservicer’s judgment, impair Investor’s security, Subservicer shall assist Investor or Owner/Servicer in undertaking appropriate action to preserve its security;
(d) Notifying Owner/Servicer or the Investor, if required, of any notices of change in ownership, requests for partial releases, easements, substitutions, division, subordination, alterations, or waivers of security instrument terms and processing such matters in accordance with instructions received from the Owner/Servicer;
(e) Disbursing insurance loss settlements, including:
(1) Receiving reports of insurance losses and assuring that proof of loss statements are properly filed;
(2) Authorizing the restoration and rehabilitation of the damaged property;
(3) Collecting, endorsing and disbursing the insurance loss proceeds and arranging for progress inspections and payments, if necessary;
(4) Complying with all Applicable Requirements pertaining to settlement of insurance losses;
(5) In general, complying with Applicable Requirements to assure that the priority of the Mortgage is preserved; and
(6) If special disaster procedures are issued by Investors or governmental agencies, Subservicer will release funds in accordance with those policies.
2.5. Accounting and Investor Reporting.

Subject always to Applicable Requirements, Subservicer shall:

(a) Remit to the Investor, on a date and in a manner specified by Investor, all principal and interest due to Investor. Subservicer will remit any guaranty fees in accordance with Applicable Requirements. Subservicer will remit monthly to Owner/Servicer on the fifth (5th) business day after the end of the month, the remaining portion of the gross service fee collected, net of the amounts due Subservicer as set forth in Section 4.1 hereof;
(b) Submit all reports to Investor under Owner/Servicer’s assigned “seller/servicer” number or such other number that Owner/Servicer and Investor may designate in writing to Subservicer. Subservicer will not make consolidated reports of balances together with simultaneous cash remittances unless Subservicer services one hundred (100%) percent of Mortgages for which Owner/Servicer holds the servicing rights.

 
 

 

(c) Make direct remittances to such third parties to whom Investor has sold or assigned all or part of its interest in a Mortgage, including the sale of participating interests therein, provided that the Agreement remains in full force and effect with respect to such Mortgage and for which Subservicer receives a minimum of thirty (30) days written notice of such sale or assignment. If following the sale or transfer, Subservicer must make more than one remittance per month with respect to a Mortgage, Subservicer shall be entitled to and shall be paid additional compensation of One Dollar ($1.00) per loan per month for each such additional remittance;

In the event the Investor instructs Owner/Servicer to service release any loan(s), and Owner/Servicer shall deliver such notice to Subservicer, immediately acknowledge, in writing to Owner/Servicer, the Investor’s request and proceed in accordance with the Investor’s instructions. In the event Owner/Servicer determines and instructs Subservicer to not proceed with the Investor’s instructions, Owner/Servicer agrees to hold Subservicer harmless for any action taken or claim brought against Subservicer by Investor, and from any loss or damage, including reasonable attorneys’ fees, resulting therefrom. To the extent any loan(s) is thereafter service released in accordance with the Investor’s instructions, Subservicer shall be entitled to the payment by Owner/Servicer of the Exit Fee as provided in Section 5.1 hereof.

(d) Maintain any related custodial demand deposit accounts associated with the receipt, disbursement and accumulation of principal, interest, taxes, hazard insurance, mortgage insurance, etc. as “trustee” for Owner/Servicer and/or Investors and/or Mortgagors with the exception of GNMA servicing. Pursuant to GNMA’s regulations, Subservicer is not permitted to withdraw/disburse funds from the “MI” custodial account. Any benefit or value derived from all funds held at Subservicer in all demand deposit accounts shall accrue to the benefit of Subservicer.
(e) Where Investors require interest paid through the end of the month although interest due from the Mortgagor is to the actual date of the pay-off, advance its own funds to cover any uncollected interest due the Investor. Owner/Servicer shall reimburse Subservicer for any such advances that remain unpaid after offset by Subservicer against gross service fees, in accordance with Section 9.1. Subservicer shall offset any such advances against the gross service fees next due and payable to Owner/Servicer;
(f) Not accept any prepayment of any Mortgage except as specified, required or authorized by Applicable Requirements and by the terms of the Mortgage, nor waive, modify, release or consent to postponement on the part of the Mortgagor of any term or provision of the Mortgage documents without the written consent of Investor;
(g) Upon payment of a Mortgage in full, and subject to Section 3.1(1) hereof, have prepared and file any necessary release or satisfaction documents, and shall continue subservicing of the loan pending final settlement, and refund any Mortgagor deposits;

 
 

 

(h) Make interest rate adjustments in compliance with Applicable Requirements and the Mortgage, which reflects the applicable movements of the applicable loan rate index. Subservicer shall execute and deliver all appropriate notices required by Applicable Requirements and the Mortgage regarding such interest rate adjustments including but not by way of limitation, timely notification to Investor, of the applicable date and information regarding such interest rate adjustment, the methods of implementation of such interest rate adjustments, new schedules of Investor’s share of collections of principal and interest, and of all prepayments of any Mortgage hereunder by Mortgagor;
(i) Perform such other customary duties, furnish copies of standard reports and execute such other documents in connection with its duties hereunder as Owner/Servicer and Investor from time to time reasonably may require. All reports deemed standard under this Section 2.5 are contained in Exhibit V hereof; and
(j) Use commercially reasonable efforts to provide special reports, data files, or related services to either Owner/Servicer or any third party, at the request of Owner/Servicer. Subservicer shall thereupon bill Owner/Servicer for such reports, data files or related services in accordance with Exhibit III, as applicable, or in accordance with a separate fee to be determined in advance by Owner/Servicer and Subservicer, and same may be deducted by Subservicer from the gross service fee.
2.6. Delinquency Control.

Subservicer shall:

(a) Maintain a delinquent mortgage servicing program which shall include an adequate accounting system that indicates the existence of delinquent Mortgages, a procedure that provides for sending delinquent notices, assessing late charges, and returning inadequate payments, and a procedure for the individual analysis of distressed or chronically delinquent loans;
(b) Maintain a collection department and an on-line automated collection system that substantially complies with established FNMA collection guidelines;
(c) Provide Owner/Servicer and Investor with a month-end collection and delinquency report identifying and describing the status of any delinquent loans, and from time to time as the need may arise, provide Owner/Servicer and Investor with loan service reports relating to any items of information which Subservicer is otherwise required to provide hereunder, or detailing any matters Subservicer believes should be brought to the special attention of Owner/Servicer and Investor; and

 
 

 

(d) Upon the request of Owner/Servicer and Investor, assist in the foreclosure or other acquisition of the property relating to any Mortgage, the transfer of such property to the Investor, FHA or VA, as applicable, and the collection of any applicable mortgage insurance, and pending completion of these steps, protect such property from waste and vandalism. At the option of Investor, Investor may assign such Mortgage to Subservicer, which will then conduct all such proceedings in its own name, promptly thereafter assigning and conveying to the Investor any title, equity, or other property or right acquired by such proceedings. Subservicer will have title to the property conveyed in the name designated by Investor. Owner/Servicer agrees to reimburse Subservicer for all of its actual expenses so incurred under this paragraph, including, but not limited to, travel, court costs and attorneys’ fees, in accordance with Section 9.1 hereof.
2.7. Real Estate Owned.
(a) Upon acquisition by Investor or Owner/Servicer for its account, at the completion of a foreclosure proceeding, or acceptance of a voluntary deed in lieu of foreclosure, Subservicer will continue to service the REO while so owned. These operations shall be on terms as determined and directed by Investor or Owner/Servicer from time to time. Subservicer will service the same until the property is sold or otherwise liquidated. Subservicer shall be entitled to the Subservicing fee with respect to REO indicated in Exhibit II attached hereto.
(b) When Subservicer has advanced funds to pay taxes, assessments, hazard or flood insurance premiums, or other items necessary to protect the security of the Investor or Owner/Servicer in the REO, Subservicer will bill Owner/Servicer for any such advances made. Owner/Servicer agrees to reimburse Subservicer for such advances in accordance with Section 9.1 hereof.
2.8. Books and Records.

Subservicer will keep records in accordance with industry standards pertaining to each Mortgage, and such records shall be the property of Owner/Servicer and upon termination of this Agreement shall be delivered to Owner/Servicer at Owner/Servicer’s expense.

Subservicer shall cause a certified public accountant selected and employed by it to provide Owner/Servicer not later than ninety (90) days after the close of Subservicer’s fiscal year, with a certified statement of Subservicer’s financial condition as of the close of its fiscal year and a Uniform Single Audit Program letter. Upon request, not later than ninety (90) days after the close of Subservicer’s fiscal year, Subservicer will also provide Owner/Servicer with a summary of Subservicer’s Business Continuity Plan. Any additional requests for loan audit or confirmations to be performed by Subservicer’s audit firm on Owner/Servicer’s Mortgages, shall be at Owner/Servicer’s sole expense.

Subservicer shall give Owner/Servicer or Owner/Servicer’s authorized representative opportunity upon notice at any time during Subservicer’s normal business hours to examine Subservicer’s books and records.

 
 

 

2.9. Insurance.

Subservicer will maintain in effect at all times and at its cost, a blanket fidelity bond and an errors and o missions policy and mortgage impairment policy in a form and at coverage levels acceptable to FHLMC and FNMA. If so requested by Owner/Servicer, Subservicer shall cause certificates evidencing the existence of such coverage to reflect Owner/Servicer as an additional named insured.

ARTICLE III.  

AGREEMENTS OF OWNERISERVICER

3.1. Documentation.

Subservicer has or will provide Owner/Servicer with a Servicing Transfer Checklist. At its sole cost and expense, Owner/Servicer shall provide Subservicer with:

(a) By the dates indicated, documentation, data or such other information specified in the Servicing Transfer Checklist to Subservicer or to such entities designated by Subservicer. If the information required by Subservicer in the Servicing Transfer Checklist is not timely provided, or contains missing, inaccurate or invalid data, or if the characteristics of the portfolio or any Mortgage materially differ from those Owner/Servicer offered to Subservicer to subservice hereunder, Subservicer may refuse to accept for subservicing those Mortgages which cause the material differences in the portfolio or adjust the fees contained in Exhibit II as to all or some Mortgages and accept the Mortgages for subservicing. In the event Owner/Servicer requests Subservicer to subservice under this Agreement additional Mortgages which are not subject to a servicing agreement between Owner/Servicer and Investor which Subservicer has previously reviewed and approved, Owner/Servicer shall submit a copy of the servicing agreement to Subservicer for review at least thirty (30) days prior to the requested Commencement Date. Based upon its review, Subservicer may refuse to accept such Mortgages for subservicing under this Agreement or may adjust the fees set forth in Exhibit II as to such Mortgages and accept the Mortgages for subservicing;
(b) Copies of any applicable documents or records which are necessary or appropriate for Subservicer to conduct the subservicing of the Mortgages, including, without limitation, those set forth in Exhibit IV. In addition, upon request by the Subservicer the Owner/Servicer shall provide Subservicer with the original note, original recorded mortgage, recorded assignments, title policy and original mortgage insurance certificate or VA 1oan guaranty certificate, if necessary to complete a satisfaction or foreclosure action of a Mortgage Loan, or for any other purpose if required by Subservicer to properly administer and service the Mortgage Loan. Owner/Servicer acknowledges and agrees that unless specifically requested by and delivered to Subservicer, Subservicer is not responsible for safeguarding any original loan documents;

 
 

 

(c) Complete and accurate electronic data and documentation for each Mortgage submitted hereunder to enable Subservicer to place and continue to subservice the Mortgage on its computer system;
(d) Preprinted overnight or labels for expediting special requests pursuant to Section 2.5(1) hereof;
(e) Prior to the release of notices to the Mortgagor set forth in Section 3.4 of this Agreement, a complete listing of any Mortgages where the mortgage payment is inclusive of an optional insurance premium. This list will also provide the name of the insurance company; type of insurance coverage; premium amount; and the name and telephone number of the individual at Owner/Servicer’s firm or affiliation knowledgeable as to such coverage.
(f) Physical evidence that a hazard insurance policy is in force for each Mortgage delivered to Subservicer for subservicing and all notices regarding the various hazard insurance policies. Further, Owner/Servicer agrees to hold Subservicer harmless from any loss or damage caused by insufficient evidence of hazard insurance coverage delivered to Subservicer or any loss or damage which occurred during a lapsed policy prior to delivery of the Mortgages to Subservicer for subservicing;
(g) Life-of-loan guaranteed tax service contracts for each Mortgage from an issuer acceptable to Subservicer. In the event the Owner/Servicer provides the requisite fee and Subservicer orders the tax service contract, Subservicer will use reasonable efforts to obtain the tax service contract prior to various bill request dates established by the tax service companies. In the event a contract is not established prior to the bill request date, or, after such contract is established, such tax servicer vendor ceases business and fails to provide the required information to Subservicer, Subservicer will use reasonable efforts to obtain the tax information in order to pay the taxes timely; provided, however, Subservicer assumes no obligation or liability with the non-payment of taxes in a timely manner in the event a contract is not established;
(h) Life-of-loan Flood Contracts from an issuer acceptable to Subservicer.
(i) Copies of most recent FNMA, FHLMC, FHA, GNMA, HUD claims, VA and third party audits for review;
(j) Copies of most recent audited financial statements, and annual financial statements thereafter within ninety (90) days of year-end, throughout the term of this Agreement;
(k) The name and address of all document custodians. All costs and expenses of said document custodians (including, without limitation, those resulting from a change of document custodian) shall be the responsibility of Owner/Servicer; and

 
 

 

(l) Upon pay-off of a mortgage, Subservicer will request the loan documents from the custodian, Investor, or Owner/Servicer, as the case may be, and upon receipt of same will prepare the appropriate discharge/satisfaction documents. Subservicer will forward the documents to Owner/Servicer, who shall execute and return such discharge/satisfaction document to Subservicer in a timely manner that permits the recording thereof in accordance with Applicable Requirements. In lieu of returning such documents to the Subservicer, the Owner/Servicer may process the discharge/satisfaction of the Mortgage.

In the event that Owner/Servicer does not return such documents to Subservicer in a timely manner, Subservicer assumes no liability for any penalty that may be imposed for failure to discharge or cancel the Mortgage in accordance with any Applicable Requirement. In addition, Owner/Servicer shall reimburse Subservicer for any fee, expense or penalty that Subservicer may incur in connection with any such discharge, cancellation, or satisfaction.

3.2. Further Notification.

Owner/Servicer shall provide Subservicer upon delivery of each Mortgage submitted for subservicing with specific information required in the Servicing Transfer Checklist regarding the Investor or whether the Mortgage remains unsold (in warehouse) at the commencement of subservicing. If a Mortgage that has been delivered to Subservicer in unsold status is later sold, Owner/Servicer will immediately notify Subservicer of the sale by telephone and will deliver a written copy of the permanent Investor’s purchase advice or funding detail report by facsimile, e-mail or overnight mail immediately thereafter. Subservicer will then reflect the Investor in its records, however, any penalty for late reporting, remittances, etc. imposed by the Investor which were the result of a delay by Owner/Servicer in notifying Subservicer of the Investor’s purchase of the Mortgage(s), shall be the responsibility of Owner/Servicer.

3.3. Default and Right of Offset.

In the event Owner/Servicer shall fail to pay to Subservicer any sums due and payable to Subservicer under this Agreement when and as the same shall be due and payable, whether as compensation, reimbursement, or otherwise, or if Owner/Servicer is in default hereunder in any other respect, Subservicer shall be entitled to adjust Owner/Servicer’s “net service fee due” in set-off of the amount of any sum so owing and unpaid. This provision shall not impair Subservicer’s right to be reimbursed as provided herein or to exercise all other remedies permitted by law.

3.4. Notices.

By no later than thirty (30) days prior to the date on which Subservicer is scheduled to commence subservicing of the Mortgages (i.e., the date scheduled to be the Initial Commencement Date or scheduled to be any subsequent Commencement Date), 0wner/Servicer shall deliver or cause to be delivered to Subservicer for approval a joint form or joint forms of a Mortgagor notification letter in connection with the commencement of subservicing responsibilities for the related Mortgages by Subservicer. Not less than fifteen (15) days prior to the scheduled Commencement Date and otherwise in accordance with Applicable Requirements, Owner/Servicer shall mail, or cause to be mailed, the approved form of notification to the Mortgagors of the commencement of the subservicing responsibilities for the related Mortgages by Subservicer. The expense of the preparation, printing and mailing of such notices shall be borne by Owner/Servicer. Owner/Servicer also shall, at its expense, notify and instruct or cause to be notified and instructed the applicable tax service provider with regard to the Mortgages, the custodian of the Mortgage files, and all insurers to deliver all tax bills, payments, notices and insurance statements, as applicable, to Subservicer on and after the applicable commencement date.

 
 

 

3.5. Instructions to Subservicer.

Owner/Servicer shall provide instructions to Subservicer in accordance with Section 2.4(d) hereof regarding the processing of requests for partial releases, easements, substitutions, division, subordination, alterations, or waivers of security instrument terms.

ARTICLE IV.  

COMPENSATION

4.1. Subservicing Fee.

As consideration for subservicing the Mortgages, Subservicer shall be paid the fees in accordance with Exhibits II and III. Subservicer’s fees shall be adjusted annually. Such adjustments shall not exceed the percent increase in the U.S. Department of Labor, Bureau of Labor Statistics, Consumer Price Index, U.S. City Average, for all Urban Consumers, other goods and services (‘82 - ‘84 = 100) (the “CPI-U Index”) between the annual averages of the most recently published twelve (12) month period and the immediately preceding twelve (12) month period. Subservicer shall subtract from the monthly service fee remitted to Owner/Servicer subservicing fees, Exit Fees (if appropriate), fees for optional services, any Late Charges and Ancillary Income due Subservicer and any guaranty fees remitted by Subservicer. All monthly fees are charged based upon beginning of month loan count and status. Beginning with the thirteenth month after the Contract Date, the subservicing fee due Subservicer shall be based on the greater of one thousand (1,000) loans or the actual number of loans subserviced under this Agreement.

In addition, Owner/Servicer shall remit to Subservicer in accordance with Section 9.1 the amounts billed by Subservicer for fees and expenses associated with services which are proper under this Agreement, including, without limitation, services performed in connection with the foreclosure of mortgages, property maintenance and improvement, property management, the sale of any foreclosed real estate, and similar extraordinary expenses, which shall be contracted or performed by the Subservicer at its customary, reasonable costs for such services, and all other amounts due Subservicer hereunder.

4.2. Solicitation.

Upon receipt of the prior written consent of Owner/Servicer and in accordance with Applicable Requirements, Subservicer shall be entitled to solicit individual Mortgagors in the name of Central Loan Administration & Reporting for accident, health, life, property and casualty insurance, and any other products or services which Subservicer deems appropriate. Subservicer shall retain any resulting commission or other income in accordance with Exhibit II, attached hereto.

 
 

ARTICLE V.  

TERM AND TERMINATION

5.1. Term and Notice.

The term of this Agreement shall commence upon the Contract Date and end at twelve o’clock midnight (12:00 A.M.) on December 31, 2006 except that if neither party shall terminate this Agreement by one hundred twenty (120) days written notice to the other prior to the expiration of the initial term, this Agreement shall renew itself and exist and continue for successive terms of three (3) years each until terminated by such notice.

At any time during this Agreement, Owner/Servicer may, without cause, and on ninety (90) days prior written notice to Subservicer, terminate this Agreement as to any or all Mortgages then being subserviced. Upon expiration or termination of this Agreement by Owner/Servicer without cause as to any or all Mortgages, Owner/Servicer shall pay Subservicer an Exit Fee in accordance with the schedule contained in Exhibit II and with respect to a termination of three hundred (300) or more Mortgages, a subservicing fee through the month ending ninety (90) days from the effective date of the notice of termination. With respect to any given termination, Subservicer will cooperate with Owner/Servicer, but shall be under no obligation to meet a transfer schedule requested by Owner/Servicer, where Subservicer has received less than ninety (90) days notice of termination. The term for determining the Exit Fee applicable to each such Mortgage begins on the first of the month of the Commencement Date for that Mortgage.

At any time during the term(s) hereof, Subservicer may, without cause, by one hundred eighty (180) days prior written notice to Owner/Servicer, terminate this Agreement as to any or all Mortgages then being subserviced, without obligating Owner/Servicer to pay any Exit Fees.

5.2. Termination.

In the event of a material breach of this Agreement, which breach is curable by the breaching party, the breaching party shall have thirty (30) days to cure such breach after written notification is given by the non-breaching party. If the breach is either not cured within the thirty (30) day period, or is a breach of such a type as to be incapable of being cured, the non-breaching party may terminate this Agreement upon five (5) days notice, and require the immediate transfer of all Mortgage Documents and other data and information related to the Mortgages.

Should either Owner/Servicer or Subservicer at any time during the term of this Agreement have its rights to service for FHLMC, FNMA or GNMA suspended or lose any other permits or licenses necessary to carry out its responsibilities under this Agreement, or if either party becomes insolvent, files for bankruptcy, or is placed under conservatorship or receivership, then, and in any of these events, the other party may immediately terminate this Agreement for cause, without any further liability to the non-breaching party.

 
 

Should there be fewer than one thousand (1,000) Mortgages subserviced for Owner/Servicer by Subservicer at any time after the date which is one (1) year from the Initial Commencement Date of this Agreement, Subservicer shall have the right, in its sole discretion, to terminate this Agreement upon ninety (90) days written notice to Owner/Servicer.

In addition to all other amounts due hereunder, the non-breaching party shall be entitled to all costs of collection and all costs related to the transfer of said Mortgage Documents and other data and information related to the Mortgages, including the payment of an Exit Fee in accordance with Exhibit II hereof if Subservicer is the non-breaching party and terminates this Agreement.

Should Owner/Servicer fail to deliver the Mortgages to Subservicer for subservicing within one hundred twenty (120) days of the Contract Date, Subservicer, in its sole discretion may terminate this Agreement upon written notice to Owner/Servicer. Owner/Servicer shall thereupon pay to Subservicer the greater of one thousand ($1,000.00) dollars or two ($2.00) dollars for each Mortgage identified on Exhibit I, to partially defray Subservicer’s expense in preparing for the subservicing of the Mortgages.

The rights of termination, as provided herein, are in addition to all other available rights and remedies, including the right to recover damages in respect of any breach.

5.3. Reimbursement.

Upon expiration or termination of this Agreement as to any or all Mortgages, Owner/Servicer shall reimburse Subservicer for all costs reasonably incurred in connection with the expiration or termination of subservicing and return of documents and other information regarding the Mortgages then subserviced to Owner/Servicer, Owner/Servicer’s designee, or the Investor or Investor’s designee. These costs include, but are not limited to, third party costs incurred by Subservicer, and internal and staffing costs of Subservicer directly attributable to the return of the documents and other information regarding the Mortgages. In addition, Subservicer’s right to reimbursement for actual expenses and any advances made on behalf of Owner/Servicer in accordance with the terms of this Agreement, and for all other amounts due Subservicer hereunder, shall also apply in the event the Investor instructs Subservicer in writing to terminate subservicing.

5.4. Accounting/Records.

Upon expiration or termination of this Agreement, Subservicer will cease all subservicing activities and account for and turn over to Owner/Servicer, Owner/Servicer’s designee, or the Investor or Investor’s designee, as applicable, all funds collected hereunder, less the compensation and other amounts then due Subservicer, and deliver to Owner/Servicer, Owner/Servicer’s designee, the Investor or Investor’s designee, as applicable, all records and documents relating to each Mortgage then subserviced and will advise Mortgagors that their mortgages will henceforth be serviced by Owner/Servicer, Owner/Servicer’s designee, Investor or Investor’s designee.

 
 

ARTICLE VI.  

REPRESENTATIONS, WARRANTIES AND COVENANTS

OF OWNER/SERVICER

6.1. Assistance.

Owner/Servicer warrants and represents to, and covenants and agrees with Subservicer that, to the extent necessary, Owner/Servicer shall cooperate with and assist Subservicer as requested by Subservicer, in carrying out Subservicer’s covenants, agreements, duties and responsibilities under this Agreement and in connection therewith shall execute and deliver all such papers, documents and instruments, including but not limited to servicing agreements, if any, as may be necessary and appropriate in furtherance thereof

6.2. Notice of Breach.

Owner/Servicer shall immediately notify Subservicer of any failure or anticipated failure on its part to observe and perform any warranty, representation, covenant or agreement required to be observed or performed by it as a servicer.

6.3. Taxes.

Real estate taxes due within thirty (30) days following the Commencement Date shall have been paid by the Owner/Servicer prior to delivery of subservicing to Subservicer. Owner/Servicer will indemnify and hold Subservicer harmless from any tax penalties and interest that arose or accrued prior to thirty (30) days following the Commencement Date, and as set forth in Section 2.3(f) hereof.

6.4. Agency Approvals.

Owner/Servicer is an approved servicer for, and in good standing with FHLMC, FNMA, GNMA, HUD, VA, and all Investors, and shall maintain such approvals and standing throughout the term of this Agreement. Owner/Servicer warrants that each Mortgage has been serviced in accordance with all Applicable Requirements at all times prior to the Commencement Date.

6.5. Authority.

Owner/Servicer is a duly organized and validly existing corporation in good standing under the laws of its state of incorporation and has all requisite power and authority to enter into this Agreement and the persons executing this Agreement on behalf of Owner/Servicer are duly authorized to do so.

 
 

ARTICLE VII.  

REPRESENTATIONS, WARRANTIES AND

COVENANTS OF SUBSERVICER

Subject to the provisions of Article VIII hereinbelow, Subservicer warrants and represents to, and covenants and agrees with, Owner/Servicer as follows:

7.1. Notice of Breach.

Subservicer shall notify Owner/Servicer of any failure or anticipated failure on its part to observe and perform any warranty, representation, covenant or agreement required to be observed and performed by it as a subservicer.

7.2. Agency Approvals.

Subservicer is an approved servicer for FHLMC, FNMA, GNMA, HUD and VA, and shall maintain such approvals throughout the term of this Agreement.

7.3. Authority.

Subservicer is a duly organized and validly existing corporation in good standing under the laws of its jurisdiction of incorporation and has all requisite power and authority to enter into this Agreement and the persons executing this Agreement on behalf of Subservicer are duly authorized so to do.

ARTICLE VIII.  

INDEPENDENCE OF PARTIES; INDEMNIFICATION SURVIVAL

8.1. Independence of Parties.

The following terms shall govern the relationship between Owner/Servicer and Subservicer:

(a) Subservicer shall have the status of, and act as, an independent contractor. Nothing herein contained shall be construed to create a partnership or joint venture between Owner/Servicer and Subservicer;
(b) Subservicer shall not be responsible for any representations, warranties or contractual obligations in connection with (1) the sale to FHLMC, FNMA, GNMA or private Investors of any of the Mortgages, or (2) the servicing of any such Mortgages prior to the Commencement Date of subservicing of a Mortgage by Subservicer pursuant to this Agreement;
(c) Anything herein contained in this Article VIII or elsewhere in this Agreement to the contrary notwithstanding, the representations and warranties of Subservicer contained in this Agreement shall not be construed as a warranty or guarantee by Subservicer as to future payments by any Mortgagor;

 
 

 

(d) Anything herein contained in this Article VIII or elsewhere in this Agreement to the contrary notwithstanding, Subservicer shall not be responsible for performance or compliance under any loan repurchase agreements, indemnifications, representations or warranties of an origination nature, or those servicing representations and warranties directly or indirectly related to the origination process made between Owner/Servicer and any Investor, either prior or subsequent to this Agreement.
8.2. Indemnification by Subservicer.

Except as otherwise stated herein, Subservicer indemnifies and holds harmless Owner/Servicer from any liability, claim, loss or damage, including reasonable attorneys’ fees, directly or indirectly resulting from or arising out of Subservicer’s failure to observe or perform any or all of Subservicer’s covenants, agreements, warranties or representations contained in this Agreement. Except for matters with regard to which Subservicer must indemnify Owner/Servicer pursuant this Section 8.2 or costs or expenses that Subservicer must bear hereunder, in no event shall Subservicer be liable for losses, costs, expenses, damages or claims (including attorneys’ fees) incurred by Owner/Servicer in connection with the Mortgages subserviced hereunder, including without limitation losses, costs, expenses, damages or claims (including attorneys’ fees) incurred by Owner/Servicer in connection with the default or foreclosure of such Mortgage.

8.3. Indemnification by Owner/Servicer.

Owner/Servicer indemnifies and holds harmless Subservicer from any liability, claim, loss or damage, including reasonable attorneys’ fees, directly or indirectly resulting from or arising out of Owner/Servicer’s failure to observe or perform any o r all of Owner/Servicer’s covenants, agreements, warranties or representations contained in this Agreement. Further, Owner/Servicer will indemnify Subservicer and hold it harmless from any losses, costs, expenses, damages or claims (including attorneys’ fees) incurred by Subservicer which have resulted or may result from the performance of any previous servicer or subservicer.

Furthermore, should Owner/Servicer misrepresent, misinform, provide inadequate information or no information regarding the status of optional insurance coverages ( such as mortgage 1ife insurance) which would cause Subservicer to incur a loss or damage, Owner/Servicer agrees to hold Subservicer harmless from any and all claims, liabilities, damages, and loss, including reasonable attorneys’ fees, resulting therefrom;

8.4. Privacy.

Subservicer respects the financial privacy of the Mortgagors and complies with all Applicable Requirements designed to secure that privacy. Subservicer and Owner/Servicer agree not to disclose or otherwise share nonpublic personal information with non-affiliated third parties except in compliance with Applicable Requirements. The parties agree that the customer relationship with the Mortgagor remains with the Owner/Servicer and that Owner/Servicer will provide all disclosures or notices to the Mortgagors as required by Applicable Requirements. The parties agree to provide each other on a timely basis with customer requests that information not be shared.

 
 

 

8.5. Survival.

The indemnifications, representations and warranties set forth herein shall survive termination of this Agreement.

ARTICLE IX.  

MISCELLANEOUS

9.1. Due Date of Payments.

Unless otherwise stated herein, a 11 fees, payments, charges, expenses, advances and any other sums payable to Subservicer by Owner/Servicer hereunder, shall be due and payable within five (5) business days from date of Subservicer’s invoice. Thereafter, all sums shall be subject to a finance charge at an annual rate of four hundred basis points (400 BP) over the three month LIBOR as published in The Wall Street Journal on the first business day of the month in the billing period.

9.2. Changes in Practices.

The parties hereto acknowledge that the standard practices and procedures of the mortgage servicing industry change or may change over a period of time. Material changes in practices or procedures may increase the cost of subservicing beyond that contemplated by the parties at the time of this Agreement. For the purposes of this paragraph, a change in practice or procedure is deemed to be material if such change is required to comply with changes in Applicable Law and/or Investor Requirements and such compliance by Subservicer is substantially more burdensome and costly to Subservicer. To accommodate these changes, Subservicer may, from time to time, notify Owner/Servicer of such material changes in practices and procedures and proposed changes in the Subservicing Fee to reflect such material changes. It is understood that prior to imposing any increased Subservicing Fee, Subservicer must reasonably demonstrate to Owner/Servicer that the increase in the Subservicing Fee is directly related to Subservicer’s additional costs in implementing the change in policy or procedure and that the increase is in keeping with those other servicers throughout the mortgage servicing industry and is not unique to Subservicer. Should any such proposed change in the Subservicing Fee made in good faith by Subservicer nevertheless be unacceptable to Owner/Servicer, and should Owner/Servicer and Subservicer fail to agree on an increase in the Subservicing Fee that would be acceptable to both parties, then such Subservicing Fee shall remain unchanged. Subservicer shall thereafter have the option (i) to continue to subservice the Mortgages already being subserviced and all future Mortgages at the existing Subservicing Fee under the terms of this Agreement, (ii) continue to subservice the Mortgages already being subserviced at the existing Subservicing Fee and provide sixty (60) days advance written notice to Owner/Servicer that Subservicer will not thereafter accept any additional Mortgages for subservicing under the terms of this Agreement, or (iii) terminate this Agreement without cause upon one hundred twenty (120) days advance written notice to Owner/Servicer.

 
 

 

9.3. Assignment.

This Agreement may be assigned only by written consent of both Owner/Servicer and Subservicer. The sale of all or substantially all of the stock or assets of Owner/Servicer or Subservicer, or the transfer of a controlling interest in Owner/Servicer or Subservicer, shall not be deemed an assignment of this Agreement for purposes of this Section 9.3.

9.4. Prior Agreements.

If any provision of this Agreement is inconsistent with any prior Agreements between the parties, oral or written, the terms of this Agreement shall prevail, and after the Contract Date of this Agreement, the relationship and agreements between Owner/Servicer and Subservicer shall be governed in accordance with the terms of this Agreement.

9.5. Entire Agreement.

This Agreement contains the entire agreement between the parties hereto and cannot be modified in any respect except by an amendment in writing signed by both parties.

9.6. Invalidity.

The invalidity of any portion of this Agreement shall in no way affect the remaining portions hereof.

9.7. Effect.

Except as otherwise stated herein, this Agreement shall remain in effect until Owner/ Servicer’s interest in all of the Mortgages, including the underlying security, are liquidated completely, unless sooner terminated pursuant to the terms hereof

9.8. Applicable Law.

This Agreement shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of New Jersey.

9.9. Notices.

All notices, requests, demands and other communications which are required or permitted to be given under this Agreement shall be in writing and shall be deemed to have been duly given upon the delivery or mailing thereof, as the case may be, sent by registered or certified mail, return receipt requested or by a nationally recognized overnight courier service to the attention of the person named at the address set forth on the signature page hereof

 
 

 

9.10. Waivers.

Either Owner/Servicer or Subservicer may, upon written consent of both parties written notice to the other:

(a) Waive compliance with any of the terms, conditions or covenants required to be complied with by the other hereunder; and
(b) Waive or modify performance of any of the obligations of the other hereunder.

The waiver by either party hereto of a breach of any provision of this Agreement shall not operate or be construed as a waiver of any other subsequent breach.

9.11. Binding Effect.

This Agreement shall inure to the benefit of and be binding upon the parties hereto and their successors and assigns.

9.12. Headings.

Headings of the Articles and Sections in this Agreement are for reference purposes only and shall not be deemed to have any substantive effect.

9.13. Force Majeure.

Each party will be excused from performance under this Agreement, except for any payment obligations for services that have been or are being performed hereunder, for any period and to the extent that it is prevented from performing, in whole or in part, as a result of delays caused by the other party or any act of God, war, civil disturbance, court order, labor dispute, third party nonperformance or other cause beyond its reasonable control, including failure, fluctuations or nonavailability of heat, light, air conditioning or telecommunications equipment. Such nonperformance will not be a default or a ground for termination as long as the party uses commercially reasonable efforts to expeditiously remedy the problem causing such nonperformance and to execute its disaster recovery plan then in existence.

9.14. Non-Solicitation of Employees.

Owner/Servicer and Subservicer agree that neither party will solicit the services of any employee of the other party during the term or any extensions of this Agreement, without first obtaining the written consent of the other party. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Owner/Servicer and Subservicer understand and agree that the following shall not constitute solicitation under this Paragraph (c): (i) employment solicitations directed t o the general public at large, including without limitation newspaper, radio and television advertisements, and (ii) an employment solicitation directed by a party to an employee of the other party, and any related communication, that occurs after a communication regarding employment that was initiated by the employee.

 
 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, each party has caused this instrument to be signed in its corporate name on its behalf by its proper officials duly authorized as of the day, month and year first above written.

    Owner/Servicer:  
       
ATTEST:   CRESCENT MORTGAGE COMPANY  
           
By:   /s/ Parthiv J. Dave   By:   /s/ Robert C. KenKnight  
Name:   Parthiv J. Dave   Name:    Robert C. KenKnight  
Title:   Asst. Secretary   Title:   President  

 

  Address:  115 Perimeter Center Place  
    Suite 285  
    Atlanta, GA 30346-1238  

 

  Tax Identification No.:   ##-#######  

 

 

    SubServicer:  
       
ATTEST:   CENLAR FSB  
           
By:   /s/ Joan M. Heras   By:   /s/ Michael W. Young  
Name:  Joan M. Heras   Name:  Michael W. Young  
Title:   Asst. Secretary   Title:   President & Chief Executive Officer  

 

  Address:  425 Phillips Boulevard  
    Suite 285  
    Ewing, NJ 08618  

 

 
 

EXHIBIT I

Mortgages sold to FHLMC and/or FNMA in accordance with the terms of the FHLMC Single Family Seller/Servicer Guide or the FNMA Selling and Servicing Guide, as applicable, Mortgages guaranteed by GNMA in accordance with applicable GNMA guidelines, and Mortgages acceptable to Subservicer owned by Owner/Servicer or by Investors under the terms of servicing and/or pooling agreements acceptable to Subservicer.

[OR]

[Attach List or Schedule of Loans to be Subserviced]

 
 

EXHIBIT II

Set-Up Fee:

$ 7.00 for loans other than Chase

-0- for loans sold to Chase that are

intended to remain at Cenlar for 180 days

   

Subservicing Fee:

Fixed Rate Conventional

Adjustable Rate Conventional

Fixed Rate FHA/VA

Adjustable Rate FHA/VA

 

$7.45 per loan per month

$8.44 per loan per month

$8.44 per loan per month

$9.37 per loan per month

   
Loans in Foreclosure & Bankruptcy $29.10 per loan per month
   
Real Estate Owned (per Case per Month)  
Management $17.46
Marketing REO (optional) ½ of 1% of Sales Price (Min. - $500.00)
   
All monthly fees are charged based upon beginning of month loan count and status.
   
Cost inflator -CPI — Other Goods and Services (Adjusted on January 1, 2004 and annually thereafter) to reflect the increase, if any, in the year-over-year change in the index for the preceding 12 month period.)
   

Loan Exit Fee:

Payoffs

Termination Without Cause (Standard)

Less than 6 months or if less than 3,000 loans

6-12 months

Year 2

Year 3 and thereafter

Loans sold to Chase Manhattan Mortgage

Corp. that are intended to remain at Cenlar for 180 days

 

None

 

 

$40.00

$30.00

$25.00

$20.00

 

 

 

No Charge

   
Late Charges/Ancillary Income: Cenlar and Crescent will split any increase over Crescent’s present base level
   
Custodial Accounts: Retained by Crescent
   
Advances: Cenlar will bill Crescent
   
Tax Service Contracts: Provided to Cenlar
   

Optional:

Private Label Subservicing

Separate Customer Service phone line

Live transfer of refinance/cross sell inquiries

Electronic Data Transmission

 

$1,100 Set-up charge

$250 Set-up charge; $25 per month

$.15 per minute of usage

Cost based on defined requirements

 

 
 

EXHIBIT III

Auxiliary Fees Schedule:  
Reports:  
Standard Alltel Reports (see Exhibit IV) No Charge
Optional Alltel Reports $25.00 per report
Custom report development and execution $85.00 per hour (minimum 1 hour)
   
Project Support  
   
Staff $50.00 per hour
Manager $100.00 per hour
Sr. Manager $150.00 per hour
   
ARM Audits:  
   

Short version

Rush – Short version

Long Version

$7.50 per file

$15.00 per file

Price according to defined requirements

   
General Ledger/Data Feeds:  
   

Price according to defined requirements

Estimate to be provided prior to initiation of project

 
   
Due Diligence/3 rd Party Audits:  
   

See Project Support for management fees

Space fee

Reports

 

$200.00 per room per day

Determined by defined requirements

   
System Access:  
   

Set-up Fee

Monthly Charge

$750.00

$50.00 per month + transaction fee

   
File Storage for Decline Applicants:  
   
Approx. 30 boxes, plus 15 additional boxes per year $1.00 per month per box

 

 
 

EXHIBIT IV

Additional Documents or Records to be Provided to Subservicer

A.                 Copies of the following shall be provided with respect to each Mortgage Loan:

1. Collection records.
2. Detailed foreclosure and bankruptcy information, including critical activity dates.
3. Copies of notices sent to attorneys, trustees and property maintenance companies of the change of Servicer must be included in the loan file for all foreclosures and bankruptcies.
4. Information concerning all pending items, including but not limited to partial releases, mortgage life or mortgage disability claims and litigation, and customer service inquiries.
5. A schedule and copies of all assumption and payoff statements generated by the Owner/Servicer that are active at the time of transfer.
6. Copy of letter to the appropriate tax service notifying them of the assumption of subservicing by the Subservicer.
7. Copy of notices sent to appropriate insurance companies/agents requesting endorsements to reflect transfer to Subservicer.
8. Copies of the conversion cutoff bank reconciliations within 25 days of the final cutoff.
9. Life of Loan transaction history file (available in hard copy, fiche or film).
10. Other documents or information that Subservicer may reasonably request from time to time which are available from Owner/Servicer or its designee.
B. A schedule identifying each Mortgage Loan that requires special handling, with a statement of the reasons therefor and all relevant documentation attached.

 
 

EXHIBIT V

INVESTOR REPORTS

Monthly Cutoffs:

P139 Trial Balance by Investor
P185 Interest Accrual
5212 Paid in Advance Remittance Report
S213 Curtailments Made Report
S214 Paid-in-full Remittance Report
S51Z Schedule RC-C Maturity and Repricing Data for Loans
S5UT Interest Accrual: Income and Receivable Report (Monthly)
S5UV Interest Accrual: By Exception (Monthly)
S214 Consolidation of Remittance Reports
5237 Monthly Report of Delinquents
T303 Single Debit Reconciliation (if applicable)
S288 Loans Removed Report
S287 Loans Added Report
T330 Remittance Exceptions Prepaid
T331 Remittance Exceptions Curtailment
   

GNMA/FNMA Pool Reports:

T340 Issuers Monthly Pool Report
S540 Pool Reconciliation Errors
T341 Issuers Monthly Summary Report
ZZ46 Report of Pools with Out-of- Balance Conditions
T343 Issuers Liquidation Schedule
   

FNMA Laser Reports (A/A, and S/S):

T653 Loan Activity Report
   

FHLMC Reports:

S53X Participation Loans Trial Balance Report
T652-1 Individual Loan Reconciliation Report
T652-2 Detail of P&I Cash Reconciliation
T653-3 Loan Payoff Detail Report
ZZFM-I FHLMC Individual Loan Account Data Cross Reference

 

DEFAULT REPORTS

Delinquents:

Monthly Summary Delinquent Reports
- By Type of Delinquency
- By Loan Type
- By Investor Type
P4DL - List of Delinquent Accounts by Investor and Investor Number (Includes Collector Contact Information)
T383 - Dollar Volume and Delinquency Report by Investor, State (this will be run upon request only)

 

 
 

Foreclosure:

S5FT Foreclosure Trial Balance Report
S58P Loans in Foreclosure sorted by Investor/State/Processor
S5L2 Loan Steps Selected by Investor and Step
   

Bankruptcy

   
S2T4 Bankruptcy Trial Balance
S5BK Bankruptcy Loan Data Report
   

Management/Accounting Reports

 
S2BT Pledge Loan Detail Report
S50V Loans Added or Deleted From Pledging
S50U Loans Pledged as Collateral
P46T Net Fees Amortization Journal
S56U Net Fees Amortization — Nonaccruing Loans
T3AZ Fee/Cost Activity and Amortization Summary Report
S5AZ Fee/Cost Activity and Amortization Report
P132 Discount Transactions
S263 Loans Added to Single Debit Control
T3XQ OTS Schedule CMR Consolidated Maturity and Rate Information
S2XQ Detail for OTS Schedule CMR Consolidated Maturity and Rate Information

 

 

FIRST AMENDMENT TO SUBSERVICING AGREEMENT

THIS FIRST AMENDMENT TO SUBSERVICING AGREEMENT (“First Amendment”) dated as of February 19, 2004 by and between Crescent Mortgage Company (“Owner/Servicer”) and Cenlar FSB (“Subservicer”).

RECITALS

WHEREAS, Owner/Servicer and Subservicer entered into a certain Subservicing Agreement dated as of January 1, 2004; and

WHEREAS, Owner/Servicer and Subservicer desire to amend the Agreement further as set forth below.

NOW THEREFORE, in consideration of the mutual recitals, promises and covenants set forth in this First Amendment and in the Agreement, and other good and valuable consideration, the receipt and sufficiency of which is hereby acknowledged, the parties agree as follows:

1. Capitalized terms used and not otherwise defined herein shall have the meanings assigned to them in the Agreement.
2. Article VI of the Agreement, Representations, Warranties and Covenants of Owner/Service is amended to add a new Section 6.6 to read as follows:

6.6 Predatory Lending Regulations; High Cost Loans.

None of the Mortgage(s) are classified as (i) “high cost” loans under the Home Ownership and Equity Protection Act of 1994 or (ii) “high cost”, “threshold”, “covered” or “predatory” loans under any other applicable state, federal or local law.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this First Amendment to be executed as of the day and year first indicated above.

ATTEST:   CRESCENT MORTGAGE COMPANY  
           
By:    /s/ Jay Hood   By:    /s/ Robert C. KenKnight  
Name/Title: Jay Hood, Vice Pres.   Name/Title:  Robert C. KenKnight, President  
       
ATTEST:   CENLAR FSB  
           
By:    /s/ Joan M. Heras   By:    /s/ Gregory S. Tornquist  
Joan M. Heras, Asst. Secretary   Gregory S. Tornquist, Senior Vice President  

 

SECOND AMENDMENT TO SUBSERVICING AGREEMENT

THIS SECOND AMENDMENT TO SUBSERVICING AGREEMENT (“Second Amendment”) dated as of February 1, 2006 by and between Crescent Mortgage Company (“Owner/Servicer”) and Cenlar FSB (“Subservicer”).

RECITALS

WHEREAS, Owner/Servicer and Subservicer entered into a certain Subservicing Agreement dated as of January 1, 2004 and a First Amendment to Subservicing Agreement dated as of February 19, 2004 (the “Agreement”); and

WHEREAS, Owner/Servicer and Subservicer desire to amend the Agreement further as set forth below.

NOW THEREFORE, in consideration of mutual recitals, promises and covenants set forth in this Second Amendment and in the Agreement, and other good and valuable consideration, the receipt and sufficiency of which is hereby acknowledged, the parties agree as follows:

1.             Exhibit II is hereby amended to change the terms of the exit fee as follows:

            Loan Exit Fee:

Payoffs   None
Termination Without Cause (Standard)    
Less than 6 months of if less than 3,000 loans   $ 35.00  
6-12 months   $ 25.00  
Year 2   $ 20.00  
Year 3 and thereafter   $ 15.00  
Loans sold to Chase Home Finance LLC
that are intended to remain at Cenlar for
180 days
  No Charge  

 

2.             The amendment provided for herein shall apply and be effective only with respect to the provisions of the Agreement specifically referred to herein. Except as expressly amended hereby, the Agreement shall continue in full force and effect in accordance with the provisions thereof.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this Second Amendment to be executed as of the day and year Second indicated above.

CRESCENT MORTGAGE COMPANY   CENLAR FSB  
             
By:     /s/ Robert C. KenKnight   By:   /s/ Gregory S. Tornquist  
Title:     President   Title:   Executive Vice President  

 

 

THIRD AMENDMENT TO SUBSERVICING AGREEMENT

THIS THIRD AMENDMENT TO SUBSERVICING AGREEMENT (“Third Amendment”) is made as of January 1, 2011 by and between Crescent Mortgage Company (“Owner/Servicer”) and Cenlar FSB (“Subservicer”).

RECITALS

WHEREAS, Owner/Servicer and Subservicer entered into a certain Subservicing Agreement on or about January 1, 2001 (the “Agreement”); and

WHEREAS, The parties have previously entered into a First Amendment to Subservicing Agreement dated February 19, 2004 and a Second Amendment to Subservicing Agreement dated February 1, 2006; and

WHEREAS, The parties wish to extend the term of the Agreement, add and/or modify some provisions of the Agreement and amend some of the fees charged by Subservicer under the Agreement.

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the mutual recitals, promised and covenants set forth in this Third Amendment and in the Agreement, and other good and valuable consideration, the receipt and sufficiency of which is hereby acknowledged, the parties agree as follows:

1.          The following definitions are added to Article I, Definitions:

1.23          Decisioning Fee:

A fee set forth in Exhibit II that is earned and due and payable by Owner/Servicer to Subservicer when Subservicer has engaged in Loss Mitigation and made (i) a recommendation to Owner/Servicer or Investor or (ii) a decision, if so authorized, to offer or decline relief other than foreclosure to the affected Mortgagor.

1.24          Disposition Fee:

A fee set forth in Exhibit II that is earned and due and payable by Owner/Servicer to Subservicer upon execution of a loan modification or written (formal) repayment plan by the Mortgagor or the receipt of funds by Subservicer of funds representing an approved short sale or receipt of documents representing completion of a deed-in-lieu of foreclosure or an approved assumption of a defaulted Mortgage Loan.

1.25          Loss Mitigation.

Those efforts, other than foreclosure, taken to lessen losses to an Investor when collection efforts have not resulted in a Mortgagor curing a delinquency or if required by Applicable Requirements. Such efforts may include, advising Mortgagors of various relief alternatives to foreclosure, receipt and analysis of a Mortgagor's financial information, determining the value of the Mortgaged Property and recommending to Investor or Owner/Servicer, approval, or denial of a relief alternative, as applicable.

 
 

 

2. A new section 2.10 Process Changes and Other Services is hereby added to the Agreement as follows:

2.10          Process Changes and Other Services

a. From time to time during the term of this Agreement, Subservicer or Owner/Servicer may request process changes and/or that Subservicer perform services in relation to the subservicing of the Mortgage Loans that are not contemplated by or included within the Agreement. The implementation of such processes or the performance of such services shall be governed by a Statement of Work (“SOW”) as described in this Section.
b. The following definitions shall apply for the purposes of this Section:
1. “SOW Services” shall mean services which may include but are not limited to, consulting, custom programming, design or modification of reports, project management, implementation, and other process changes listed on one or more SOWs executed by Owner/Servicer and Subservicer and which SOWs will be incorporated into and become part of the Agreement.
2. “Work Product” includes, without limitation, all designs, discoveries, creations, works, work in progress, deliverables, inventions, products, computer programs, procedures, improvements, developments, drawings, notes, documents, business methods, information and materials made, conceived or developed by Subservicer alone or with others which result from the SOW Services.
c. Subservicer or Owner/Servicer may from time to time initiate a request for SOW Services. If the parties agree, Subservicer will prepare a proposed SOW containing, without limitation:
1. A description of the SOW Services to be performed including all requirements, and requested deliverables;
2. The estimated date for delivery of such SOW Services, if applicable; and
3. The rates, prices, and estimated fees and compensation for such SOW Services, if any.
d. Upon approval by the parties of an SOW, Subservicer will provide Owner/Servicer with SOW Services set forth in the SOW. Subservicer will use commercially reasonable efforts to meet the estimated delivery date set forth in the SOW.

 
 

 

e. All such Work Product shall at all times be and remain the sole and exclusive property of Subservicer, or applicable third party engaged by Subservicer.
f. In the event any express conflict or inconsistency exists between the provisions of an SOW and the provisions of this Agreement, the provisions of the SOW will control with respect to the interpretation of that SOW, provided, however, that the provisions of the SOW will be so construed as to give effect to the applicable provisions of this Agreement to the fullest extent possible.
g. Change management process.

Owner/Servicer and Subservicer may at anytime agree to additions, deletions, modification or other deviations from the SOW Services (“Changes”). All such Changes shall only be made pursuant to a written change order or other modification to the SOW.

h. Invoices.

Subservicer will invoice for Owner/Servicer for services and expenses, as provided in the SOW and any related Changes.

i. Limitation of Liability.

The total liability of Subservicer to Owner/Servicer, for all claims whatsoever related to an SOW or the SOW Services provided thereunder, including any cause of action sounding in contract, tort or otherwise shall be limited to the actual damages and shall not exceed the total amount of all fees paid through the date of claim to Subservicer by Owner/Servicer under the SOW. In no event shall Subservicer be liable for consequential damages of the Owner/Servicer.

j. Nondisclosure of Confidential or Secret Information.

Owner/Servicer will hold all information related to an SOW or SOW Services supplied to Owner/Servicer by Subservicer, or obtained or prepared in the performance of an SOW as proprietary and confidential information, and Owner/Servicer will not, during the term of an SOW or thereafter, communicate or divulge any such information, knowledge of or data to any person, firm or corporation other than Subservicer, or persons, firms or corporations specifically designated in writing by Subservicer.

3. The following paragraph shall be added to section 4.1 Subservicing Fee.

Subservicer shall be paid those fees set forth in Exhibit II for engaging in Loss Mitigation and be reimbursed for all related Servicing Advances for the affected Mortgage Loans. Owner/Servicer, and not Subservicer, shall be entitled to all amounts paid or allowed from time to time by the FNMA, FHLMC, HUD, FHA, VA, private mortgage insurer and any Investor as applicable, for engaging Loss Mitigation either directly or through Subservicer.

 
 

 

4. Effective January 1, 2011, Exhibit II and Exhibit III attached to the Agreement are hereby deleted and replaced with the attached Revised Exhibit II and Revised Exhibit III, respectively.
5. The first paragraph of section 5.1 Term and Notice is hereby deleted and replaced with the following:

The term of this Agreement shall commence upon the Contract Date and end at twelve o'clock midnight (12:00 A.M. eastern time) on December 31, 2015 except that if neither party shall terminate this Agreement by one hundred twenty (120) days written notice to the other prior to the expiration of the initial term, this Agreement shall renew itself and exist and continue for successive terms of five (5) years each until terminated by such notice.

6. All other terms of the Agreement shall remain unchanged.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this Third Amendment to Subservicing Agreement to be executed as of the day and year first indicated above.

CENLAR FSB   CRESCENT MORTGAGE COMPANY  
           
By:     /s/ Gregory S. Tornquist   By:    /s/ Kelly Byers  
Name:  Gregory S. Tornquist   Name:  Kelly Byers  
Title: President and Chief Executive Officer   Title: CFO  
  425 Phillips Boulevard     5901 Peachtree Dunwoody Road  
  Ewing, NJ 08618     Atlanta. GA 30328  

 

 
 

Exhibit II

 

Setup Fees

Private Label

Live transfer of refinance/cross sell inquiries*

 

$2,750 set up charge, plus $25/month*

$.15 per minute of usage

New Loan Interface built by Cenlar

 

$7,500

New Loans Originated via interface*

Internet/Manual Setup

$7.50

$25.00

 

Monthly Fees
Subservicing Fee (per loan per month)* P&I and T&I Custodial Accounts Retained by Crescent Mortgage
  0-2,999 3,000-9,999 Over 10,000
  Loans Loans Loans
          Conventional Fixed $6.75 $6.50 $6.25
          Conventional ARMs (A) $7.60 $7.35 $7.10
          FHA-VA Fixed $7.25 $7.00 $6.75
          FHA-VA ARMs, EAs (A) $8.10 $7.85 $7.60
          Option ARMs $8.10 $7.85 $7.60

Note-Effective after initial interest rate adjustment

-Monthly/Quarterly ARMs add $0.75

 

     

Minimum Monthly Subservicing Fee Amount

 

$3,000    
Interim Servicing Fees (per loan per month)*      
          Subservicing Fee – All Products $7.00    

Exit Fee (per loan)

 

$27.50    
Default Fees*      
          In addition to monthly base fee -      
30 days Delinquent $10.00    
60 Days Delinquent $20.00    
90 Days Delinquent $30.00    
          In lieu of monthly subservicing fees -      
120+ Days Delinquent $40.00    
Loans in Foreclosure $40.00 Conventional; $55.00 FHA/VA

Bankruptcy Loans

 

$50.00    
Government Claims Processing Charges      
Part “A” and Part “B” Claim $150.00 each    

Supplemental claim

 

$75.00    
Real Estate Owned – Monthly Fee* $15.00    
          Market REO (optional) ½% of Sales Price (min. $500.00)
       
Loss Mitigation Fees      
          Decisioning Fee $500.00    
          Disposition Fee $500.00    
       
Late Charges 50/50 Split    

 

 
 

 

Exit Fees      
Exit Fee (per loan)      
          Payoffs None    
          Termination Without Cause      
          < 6 months $40.00    
          6-12 months $30.00    
          Year 2 $25.00    
          Year 3 and thereafter $20.00    

 

Tax and Flood  
Tax and Flood Service Contracts Required by Cenlar
       
          Tax Contract (if placed thru Cenlar) $70.00    
          Flood Determination Certification $18.00    
          ATSU setup (if client’s Tax Vendor is used) $7.00    
       
       

 

 
 

Exhibit III

 

Optional Services  
Welcome Call Program $5.00 per loan
   
Monthly Statements  
(This item will be increased to reflect postal increases as they occur) $.63/loan/month
   
Remote Inquiry System Access $450 per user account, plus $25/month*
   
Global Teller Access via Web 5 User accounts included in base pricing
$1.50 per month/per user account $5,000 set up
   
Customer Web Access  
   1.  Private Label Webframes, or $1,500 set, up plus $50/month*
   2.  Customer Web Access with Single Sign on (SSO) $5,000 set up
   
Data Extract Files $300 setup, plus $25/run
   
General Ledge/Data Feeds Setup cost based on defined requirements, plus $500/month*
   
Project Support  
          Staff $50 per hour
          Manager/MIS Technical Support $100 per hour
          Senior Manager $150 per hour
   
Reports  
          Standard LPS Reports No charge
          Optional LPS Reports $25
          Ad Hoc Queries and Reports $85 per hour – min 1 hours
          Custom Programming $125 per hour – min 2 hours + expenses, re-run $65
   
Other Optional Services as defined by Client Pricing will be determined based upon Statement of Work (SOW) requirements

 

* Subject to annual adjustment as set forth in Paragraph 4.1 of the Subservicing Agreement.

 

 

Subsidiaries of the Registrant

 

Subsidiaries State of Incorporation
CresCom Bank South Carolina
Crescent Mortgage Company Delaware
Carolina Services Corporation of Charleston Delaware
Carolina Financial Capital Trust I Delaware
Carolina Financial Capital Trust II Delaware